JP7355078B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine that adjusts the direction of a game ball flowing down a gaming area (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 11-197311

However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases .

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the operating rate of the gaming machine .

To achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 includes a game board having a game area on the front side, a first member to be disposed on the front side of the game board, and a front side of the first member. a second member that is arranged at a predetermined interval on the side and allows the game ball to flow down between the opposing sides of the first member, and at least one of the first member and the second member. A changing means is provided for changing an opposing distance between a predetermined portion disposed on one side and the other of the first member or the second member, and the changing means changes the first state from the first state to the first state from the first state. A second state in which the falling direction of the game ball flowing down between the facing parts of the first member and the second member is different can be formed, and the game ball flowing down between the facing parts can be visually recognized by the player. The second member is formed with a visible part that allows the inside to be visually checked, and the displacement direction of the predetermined part is the front-back direction of the game board, and the changing means are arranged on the game board, the distance between the opposing faces can be changed.

According to the game machine according to claim 1, there is provided a game board having a game area on the front side, a first member for disposing on the front side of the game board, and a predetermined interval on the front side of the first member. and a second member that is disposed across from the first member and allows the game ball to flow down between the opposing sides of the first member, and the second member is disposed on at least one of the first member and the second member. the first state and the second state are changed by the changing means to change the distance between the predetermined portion and the other of the first member and the second member; A second state can be formed in which the direction of the game ball flowing down between the opposing members is different, and the second state is configured such that the game ball flowing down between the opposing members can be visually recognized by the player. is formed with a visible part that allows the interior to be seen; the direction of displacement of the predetermined part is in the front-rear direction of the game board; and the changing means is configured such that the first member is attached to the game board. In the disposed state, since the facing interval is configured to be changeable, it is possible to prevent players from perceiving that they are at a disadvantage, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. (a) is a front view of the general winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the general winning opening unit taken along the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12(a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XIII-XIII in FIG. 2. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in range XIV of FIG. 13. FIG. It is a back view of the general winning a prize unit. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in range XIV of FIG. 13. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame. (a) is a front view of the first unit, (b) is a side view of the first unit, and (c) is a rear view of the first unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit. FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXI-XXI in FIG. 18(b). 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit shown in FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 18(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 21, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 21 is a sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc of No. 21. FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in range XXVa in FIG. 21, and (b) is a sectional view of the first unit along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 25(a). (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in range XXVa in FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 26(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 25(a). 25(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. 25(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXVb-XXVb in FIG. 25(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG. 25(a). be. (a) is a front view of the second unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit. 30 is a sectional view of the second unit taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 29. FIG. (a) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a side view of the center frame. (a) is a perspective front view of the center frame, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame. 34 is a sectional view of the center frame taken along the line XXXVI-XXXVI in FIG. 33. FIG. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board, and (b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the back case, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the back case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case and the board box, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case and the board box. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 6 is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the first extended state. FIG. 7 is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the first extended state. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. (a) is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first extended state, and (c) in the second extended state. 50 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 50, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 51. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 50, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 52 is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the LVc-LVc line of No. 52. (a) is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVIa-LVIa in FIG. 52, and (b) is a front view of the first link member and cam member of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. FIG. 6 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range LXIXa of FIG. 68(b), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range LXIXb of FIG. 68(a). (a) is a top view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit. 70(a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 70(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in range LXXIV in FIG. 73. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. It is a front view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a top view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of a distribution unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit as seen in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit as seen in the direction of arrow XCIIb in FIG. 91. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit. FIG. 89 shows a rotating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and (b) shows a rotating unit as seen in arrow XCVb in FIG. FIG. 89 shows a rotating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and (b) shows a rotating unit as seen in arrow XCVb in FIG. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in a closed state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in an open state, respectively. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in an open state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in a closed state, respectively. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit in a closed state, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in an open state. (a) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body as seen in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100(a), and (c) is a side view of the rotating body as seen in the direction of arrow Cc in FIG. FIG. 3 is a side view of the rotating body when viewed from a direction. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body. (a) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member in the closed state, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member in the open state. (a) and (b) are side views of the decoration unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105. FIG. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (a) is a top view of the ball holder, (b) is a front view of the ball holder, and (c) is a sectional view of the ball holder taken along the line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in FIG. 108(a). It is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball holder. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a ball holder. (a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit taken along the line CXI-CXI in FIG. 87. It is a front view of an upper displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the upper displacement unit. FIG. 7 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at an intermediate position. FIG. 3 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at the extended position. (a) is a front view of the variable part, and (b) is a rear view of the variable part. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in the second embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (a) is a front view of a lower displacement member in a third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. (a) is a top view of a distribution unit in a fifth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. 131(a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. 131(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in range CXXXV in FIG. 134. It is a front view of the rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. (a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. (a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the displacement unit. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit. 145 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG. 145. FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective front view of the 1st link member in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of the game board in a 10th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in an 11th embodiment. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb of FIG. 153(a), and (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member of FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of a ball receiver in a twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the ball receiver. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the CLVc-CLVc line in FIG. 155(b). (a) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, and (c) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a sectional view of a special prize winning device. It is an exploded perspective front view of a special prize winning device. (a) is a top view of the special winning device, and (b) is a sectional view of the special winning device along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158(a). (a) is a rear view of the rear case in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLIXb-CLIXb in FIG. 159(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a back case in a fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a back case in a sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a rear view of the rear case in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG. 161(a). (a) is a front view of the back case in an 18th embodiment, and (b) is a back view of the back case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a schematic top view of the game board, and (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of an engagement member in a nineteenth embodiment. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a one-way sectional view taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165. It is an exploded perspective view of a back case and a rotation unit in a 20th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the engagement member, and (b) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engagement member. (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case and rotation unit in the twenty-first embodiment. (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engagement member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit taken along the line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in FIG. 171(a). (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the rear case and the rotation unit. (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the rear case and the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective front view of an engaging member and a fixing member. (a) and (b) are front views of the back case. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa in FIG. 175(b). 177(b) is a front view of the back case in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a sectional view of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). 177(b) is a sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII of FIG. 177(b). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board in the twenty-fifth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board in the twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board in the twenty-seventh embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the twenty-ninth embodiment. (a) is a sectional view of a general winning a prize mouth unit in a 30th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a general winning a prize mouth unit in a 31st embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize winning device in a 32nd embodiment. (a) is a front view of the special winning device, (b) is a top view of the special winning device, and (c) is a sectional view of the special winning device along the line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in FIG. 185(a). It is. (a) is a sectional view of the special winning device, and (b) is a sectional view of the special winning device along the line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in FIG. 186(a). (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member in the 33rd embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the special prize winning device. (a) is a front view of the game board in the 34th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb in FIG. 188(a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. 189 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXC-CXC in FIG. 188. (a) is a front view of the game board in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the CXCIb-CXCIb line in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of a special prize winning device. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 taken along the line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191(b). (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board in a 36th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board. (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board in a thirty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member in a thirty-eighth embodiment. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line of FIG. 197(a), and (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member of FIG. 197(a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member in a thirty-ninth embodiment. 199(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and FIGS. 199(b) and 199(c) are sectional views of the lower displacement member. 200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line CCb-CCb in FIG. 200(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the forty-first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the CCIb-CCIb line in FIG. 201(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the CCIIa-CCIIa line in FIG. 201(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the CCIIb-CCIIb line in FIG. 201(a). be. It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in a 42nd embodiment. (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204(a). (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the CCVb-CCVb line in FIG. 205(a). (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the CCVIb-CCVIb line in FIG. 206(a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal structure of the special prize winning device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display content showing the variation of the 16R probability variable jackpot in the first control example, and (b) is an example of the display mode of the rotating unit during the 16R probability variation jackpot variation. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display content showing the variation of the 6R probability variable jackpot in the first control example, and (b) is an example of the display mode of the rotating unit during the 6R probability variation jackpot variation. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of display content showing fluctuations during the CHARGE performance in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing display content showing the stoppage of fluctuations during the CHARGE performance in the first control example. It is a figure showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the roulette effect after the special symbol stops in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the display content showing the result of the roulette effect in the first control example. It is a figure showing an example. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of display content when the button press validity period has occurred in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing display content when the button press validity period has elapsed for a certain period in the first control example. It is a figure showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents while a button is being pressed in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a fusion of button effects after the display of each button press validity period in the first control example matches. It is a figure showing an example of the case. It is a timing chart showing the period during button press effect in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the automatic button press effect 1 in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the automatic button press effect 2 in the first control example. It is a diagram. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the button automatic press effect 3 in a 1st example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when an attacker wins a prize during a jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a pseudo attacker wins a prize during a jackpot game in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display contents. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main control device 110. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal winning random number table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection table, and (c) This is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of a variation pattern selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal/potential variation pattern selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation variation pattern selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a reservation rank selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a reservation mode selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a treasure box mode selection table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a group of performance counters. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces B to D. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating the back surface E. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol 1 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the small hit setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the general pattern pre-reading process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing other prize-winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hold mode selection process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the treasure box mode selection process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the win related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing right attacker jackpot related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the pseudo attacker effect processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a stop process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the operation performance setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing charge performance setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/presentation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing liquid crystal presentation execution management processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the operation performance management process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing a preview effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a fluctuation replacement switching process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is. (a) is a flowchart showing operation effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing button fusion display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart showing pseudo winning a prize display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content indicating the start of the point acquisition performance in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content indicating the end of the point acquisition performance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of a point acquisition effect with a held ball in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the reach selection variation pattern. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display content of pseudo fluctuation in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content showing point consumption re-variation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the symbol HOLD selection screen in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the symbol HOLD screen in the second control example. . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a point selection table with reservation in a second control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a point selection table without reservation in a second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation point selection table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display position in the second control example. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning consumption point selection table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the losing consumption point selection table in the second control example. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing variation pattern reception processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the point selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the special point selection process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which showed consumption reach selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 2nd control example. 12 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a second control example. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the third control example. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of initial operation data in a third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the firing motion data in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the origin motion data in the third control example. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the first motion data in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the second motion data in the third control example. It is a diagram. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation setting process performed by MPU in a display control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the initial discharge operation setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the operation control process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st operation|movement setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge|emission operation setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd operation|movement setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flow chart which shows firing operation setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a fourth control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal structure of the special prize winning device in a fourth control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in a fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the flow of the performance performed corresponding to the gaming state in the 4th control example. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display content showing the performance in the potential performance A mode in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the performance in the potential performance B mode in the fourth control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of display content showing . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 4 tables of random numbers per special symbol in the 4th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 4 tables of random numbers per small hit in the 4th control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the four normal winning random number tables in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection 4 table in a fourth control example. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of four tables for normal and probability variations in a fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 4 tables for potential confirmation in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 4 tables for time saving in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in a fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation execution process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 off fluctuation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation execution process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 off stop process 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing state command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo production setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 4th example of control. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a modification of the first control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 111, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 11 has a
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 18 are attached to the upper and lower two locations on the left side, and the inner frame 4 is supported as an opening/closing shaft on the side where the hinges 18 are provided so that it can be opened and closed toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.
A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the terminal to the front area of the terminal 3.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, there is a front door 5 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 4, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front door 5.
and is provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, on the top surface of the upper plate 17, a frame button 2 is provided.
2 is provided. This frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the performance displayed in , or changing the content of the performance of Super Reach.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. (see 2)
A certificate stamp or the like affixed to the pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. pachinko machine 10
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the ball lending unit, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. be exposed.
Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium).
Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. Return button 43
is operated when requesting the return of a card etc. inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of the game board 13, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, and a firing stop switch 51 that stops firing the ball during the period of being pressed.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding the ball, there are rails 76, 77, general prize opening 63, and the first
It is constructed by assembling the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral part is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It will be done. The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player.
The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front side of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is erected at an inner position of the outer rail 77. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The gaming area is an area defined by the front surface of the gaming board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails.
(area in which the fired ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 76 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the game board 13 to prevent a ball that has been guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). 1st
The symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured such that the LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are: 15R guaranteed variable jackpot;
There are 4R surefire jackpot and 15R normal jackpot. First symbol display device 37A, 3
7B not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also indicates a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot.

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R regular jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15,
This is a jackpot in which the game moves to a low probability state and is in a time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in normal mode, it means that the gaming state (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the second symbol's probability of winning has increased).

During probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the second prize opening 64
The time during which the first electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is released is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the first electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), compared to when the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state), the access to the second prize opening 640 is The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, one winning The first electric accessory 640a may be opened more often than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and the first electric accessory At least one of the number of times 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is released and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened in one win are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased compared to the normal one.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first winning hole 64 and a second winning hole 64.
The first symbol display device 37A,
The passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 and the third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in 37B. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol using the second symbol as a trigger is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the first through gate 66.
A variable display is performed in which a "○" symbol (not shown) and an "x" symbol (not shown) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In addition, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, in the second symbol display device, after the variable display of the third symbol, “
The “×” symbol will be stopped and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first electric accessory 64 attached to the second winning hole 640
0a is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to have the first electric accessory 640a of the second prize opening 640 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the time change or short time, the first hit per hit increases the probability of winning.
If you are making it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 during the probability change or time saving by increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a, the fluctuation display of the second symbol may be changed. This time may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. 1st for
The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second
A lottery will be held to win the design. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device,
If the result of the winning lottery is a win, a “○” symbol will be displayed as a stop symbol in the fluctuating display,
If the result of the winning lottery is a loss, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device.
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also,
The maximum number of balls reserved for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times,
The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. Note that in this embodiment, the first
Although the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same, the ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 is a different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. Let there be 3 pieces,
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 may be configured to be five.

Further, on the left side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a third winning hole 82 is provided in which a ball can be won. When a ball is won, the third winning hole 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, via the ball throwing unit 600. That is, the third winning a prize opening 82 is arranged in a state in which it communicates with a first opening 511, which will be described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third prize opening 82. This third electric accessory 82a is configured to be rotatably displaced relative to the game board 13 to open and close, and normally the third electric accessory 82a
a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82.
On the other hand, if there is a determination of a jackpot triggered by a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, the third electric accessory 82a will be opened for a predetermined time (expanded) before, after, or during the jackpot. state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning hole 82. In addition, the third prize opening 82
A sensor device SE1 that detects the passing ball is mounted on the downstream side of the ball.

In addition, the timing of opening the third electric accessory 82a is the same as that of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 56.
It does not have to be triggered by the winning of 40, but as a result of the fluctuating display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the first through gate 66 falling ball, the "○" symbol is displayed as the second symbol. When displayed on the device, it may be opened.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This first electric accessory 64
0a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state)
As a result, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a It becomes an open state (enlarged state) and becomes a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

As mentioned above, during fixed change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal.
Also, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the time change or short time, the second prize opening 640 is larger than the normal time.
It is possible to create a situation in which it is easy for the ball to win.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning hole 640, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, so it is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting").
), it is more advantageous for the player to obtain many opportunities for jackpot drawings by winning the first winning slot 64 and aiming for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second prize opening 640 can be won. Since the ball is in a comfortable state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R jackpot by opening the first electric accessory 640a and winning the second prize opening 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). How to
It is possible to switch between hitting left-handed and hitting right-handed. Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
When a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first jackpot symbol is drawn so that the jackpot stops. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30
(until seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have been won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate.
It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, for example, It may also be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Ru. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 1
16 are housed in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100~
The box base 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Also,
A seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal,
It is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the dispensing control device 111
2 is provided with an operating knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM203
In addition, various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
7A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing of display results on the second symbol display device, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. The work area where the values are stored (
work area). Note that the RAM 203 is supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B,
A solenoid consisting of a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a in the forward direction centering on the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. 209 are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a power supply device 1.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in 15 is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/Os, etc. are stored. have. RAM213 is pachinko machine 10
The configuration is such that data can be retained (backed up) by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 receives a power outage signal SG from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc.
1 is input, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing at the time of power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
This is to control a. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
(not being operated), the firing solenoid is energized in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). Display control device 114 such as display) and preview presentation
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, etc. performed in . The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 2
The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to 25, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and to change the presentation content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the audio lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio output device 226 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and also outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Controls turning on and off of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and controls the third symbol display device 8 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113.
This is to control the display of the variation effect of the third symbol in 1. In addition, the display control device 1
14 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (Fig.
(see) RAM erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 is an AC 2
It takes in a voltage of 4 volts and is used for various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20.
Generates 12 volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motors, etc., 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and uses these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage. Necessary voltage is supplied to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like.
201 and each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. In addition, power supply section 2
51 maintains the output voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, to the normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage becomes less than 22 volts. configured to maintain. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit 200 and the game board 13. Moreover, FIGS. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated downward from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the displaced state shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is extended from the state shown in FIG. 7 to a first extended position, which will be described later, and in FIG. The respective figures show a state in which they are displaced to a second extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 30 formed in a box shape.
0, and an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotation unit 700, and a sorting unit 5A00 attached to the back of the game board 13 in the inner space of the back case 300.
and a throwing unit 600 are housed therein.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably disposed on a base member 910 that is rectangular and elongated in front view and is disposed above the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. an upper displacement member 940, and an opening 301a of the rear case 300 (i.e.
On the front side of the third symbol display device 81), an effect of rotating and displacing the upper displacement member 940 while sliding the upper displacement member 940 can be performed. Note that a detailed explanation of the upper displacement unit 900 will be given later.

The lower displacement unit 400 is slidably disposed on a base member 410 that is rectangular and oblong in front view and is disposed below the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. The lower displacement member 440 is formed so as to be able to perform an effect of rotating and displacing the lower displacement member 440 while sliding it on the front side of the opening 301a of the back case (that is, the third symbol display device 81). Note that a detailed explanation of the lower displacement unit 400 will be given later.

The rotation unit 700 includes a rear base 720 that is substantially rectangular in front view and is disposed on the right side (arrow) of the opening 301a of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and a rear base 720 that is substantially rectangular in front view. A rotating body 800 disposed in the game board 13 is provided, and the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player through a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. Note that a detailed explanation of the rotation unit 700 will be given later.

The ball throwing unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and is attached to the third prize opening 82 of the game board 13.
A path is formed through which game balls are thrown from the player to the back side of the game board 13 to a first opening 511 of a distribution unit 500, which will be described later.

The sorting unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 disposed opposite to the path forming member 510 with a predetermined gap formed therein,
A sorting member 540 is attached to the base plate 520 and distributes the game balls flowing down between the opposing path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each ball throwing route (second ball throwing route KR2 or third ball throwing route KR3). . The game balls sorted by the sorting member 540 are thrown to the lower displacement unit 400. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 500 will be given later.

<The first decorative body and the second decorative body are arranged at adjacent positions in the front-rear direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16, the general winning slot unit 1 disposed on the game board 13
50 will be explained.

First, the general winning a prize unit 150 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.
FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, and FIG. 12(a) is a general winning opening unit 1.
50, and FIG. 12(b) is a sectional view of the general winning a prize opening unit 150 taken along the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12(a).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. and a general winning opening unit 150.

The base plate 60 includes a first opening 60a that opens at the center when viewed from the front, and a second opening 60b that opens at the lower side in the direction of gravity of the game area formed by the rail members 76 and 77. . A center frame 86 is disposed in the first opening 60a, and a center frame 86 is disposed in the first opening 60a.
A general winning a prize opening unit 150 is arranged in b. Further, a sticker with decorations (patterns, designs, etc.) formed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) is attached to the base plate 60, so that the decoration can be visually recognized by the player. Note that the decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to a sticker, and decoration may be printed (painted) on the front side of the base plate 60.

The general prize winning opening unit 150 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13 (the front of the base board 60), and is capable of changing the path of the game ball flowing down the game area. In addition, general prize winning unit 1
50 is arranged at a position along the lower end (in the direction of arrow D) in the gravity direction when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) with respect to the game area surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. be done. Note that in FIGS. 13 to 16, the seal provided on the base plate 60 is shown with the reference numeral 60c as a decorative member. In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative member 60c has a character (person).
is drawn.

The general winning a prize opening unit 150 includes a main body portion 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front,
a first standing portion 152 standing upright from the end of the main body portion 151 on the front side (in the direction of arrow F);
A second upright portion 153 extends from the upper end in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) of the first upright portion 152 toward the center of the gaming area, and a second upright portion 153 is provided on the back side of the main body portion 151. Decorative member 15
4, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed on the front side of the main body part 151.
The main preparation is as follows.

The main body part 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b opened in the thickness direction of the base plate 60, and is covered with the second opening 60b.
It is arranged on the front side of 0. In addition, the second opening 60b allows the game ball flowing into the general prize opening 63 provided in the main body part 151 to be sent to the back side of the game board 13 (base board 60). Furthermore, the base plate 6 of the main body part 151 increases from the inner part to the outer end in a front view.
An inclined surface 151a that is inclined toward the 0 side, a recess 151b that is recessed in the back surface on the base plate 60 side (arrow B direction side), and a back surface 151 that forms the back surface of the main body 151 excluding the recess 151b.
d.

The inclined surface 151a is formed to be inclined at approximately 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be brought into contact with the slope 151a and flowed down along the slope of the slope 151a, and can be moved to the front side of the main body part 151.

Here, the inclined surface 151a is not formed at the end of the main body 151, and the side surface of the main body 151 is
When the base plate 60 is formed perpendicularly to the front surface, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 contacts (collides with) the side surface of the main body part 151 from a direction perpendicular to the side surface of the main body part 151. There is a risk that the game ball that comes into contact with it will bounce back in the direction opposite to the direction of flow.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface 151a allows the game ball that contacts the side surface of the main body part 151 to be moved to the front side of the main body part, so that the game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily prevented from flowing down. stagnation can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body part 151 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

The back surface portion 151d is the back surface of the main body portion 151 as described above, and is similar to the recessed portion 1 in the rear view.
It is formed with a constant width around 51b. In addition, the back part 151d is the general winning opening unit 1.
50 is disposed on the base plate 60, it is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c).

The recessed portion 151b is recessed toward the front side (arrow F direction side). In addition, the recessed portion 151b
has a recessed bottom surface 151b2 serving as a bottom surface in the recessed direction, and an inner surface 151b3 that stands up from the outer edge of the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B).

The recessed bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface for a decorative member 154, which will be described later, and is formed as a plane parallel to the front surface of the main body portion 151. Thereby, when the decoration of the decorative member 154 is visually recognized through the main body portion 151, the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be uniformly recognized.

The inner surface 151b3 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the shape of the inner surface 151b3 when viewed from the front is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154, which will be described later. As a result, when the decorative member 154 is disposed in the recess 151b, the decorative member 1
54 can be prevented from protruding outside the recess 151b. Therefore, general winning unit 1
50 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the back side 151d of the main body 151 and the base plate 60, thereby forming a gap between the back side 151d of the main body 151 and the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent this from happening. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the main body portion 151 from protruding toward the front side with respect to the base plate 60 compared to the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body part 151 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

The recess 151b is a recess that accommodates a decorative member 154, which will be described later, in its recessed space, and the recess depth (recess distance toward the front side (direction of arrow F)) is greater than the thickness of the decorative member 154. It is set large. Further, the recess 151b extends from the end of the main body 151 in a front view to the main body 1.
It is recessed along the shape of the end of the main body part 151 at a position spaced a certain distance inside the main body part 151 .

Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recessed portion 151b, the back surface of the decorative member 154 can be prevented from protruding further to the back side than the main body portion 151. Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the concave bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60, so that the back surface 151d of the main body part 151 and the base plate 60 are separated. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the main body portion 151 from protruding toward the front side relative to the base plate 60 compared to the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from above the main body part 151 in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow U) to the front of the main body part 151 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

The first standing portion 152 is erected from the end of the main body portion 151 on the end side of the gaming area (on the inner rail 76 side) to the front side (on the arrow F direction side). The first erected portion 152 has an erected dimension set to be approximately the same as the width dimension in the erected direction of the inner rail 76 erected in front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Further, the distance between the first upright portion 152 and the glass unit 16 of the front door 5 that covers the front side of the game board 13 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body part 151 is placed in the first upright part 1 at the lower end of the game area in the direction of gravity.
52 can be collided. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body part 151 can be prevented from colliding with the inner rail 76, and the inner rail 76 can be prevented from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 is a space for guiding the game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13.
The space for arranging reinforcement or the like between the opposing rails 6 and the outer rails 77 is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to provide reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from bending, and there is a risk that the game balls flowing down the gaming area will collide with the inner rail 76, causing the inner rail 76 to bend.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 (
The first upright portion 152) can make it difficult for game balls flowing down the game area to collide with the inner rail 76. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distance between the opposing inner rails 76 and outer rails 77 from changing due to bending of the inner rails 76. As a result, the game ball can be stably launched into the game area.

The second upright portion 153 extends from the upper end of the first upright portion 152 in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) in a downwardly inclined manner toward the center of the gaming area (first prize opening 64). (see Figure 2). As a result, the game ball flowing down between the opposing inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 (see FIG. 2) hits the upper surface (the surface in the direction of arrow U) of the downwardly inclined extending portion of the second upright portion 153. When the ball is thrown, the game ball can be rolled along the downward slope of the second upright portion 153 and thrown toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game ball flowing down the gaming area between the opposing sides of the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 (arrow L direction side) enters the first prize opening 64 arranged in the center of the gaming area (inflow). You can easily do it.

The decorative member 154 is formed into a plate shape and is adhered to the back side of the main body portion 151. Further, the decorative member 154 has a decoration formed on the front side of the main body portion 151 that is continuous with the decoration formed on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 in a front view. Thereby, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be visually recognized as one decoration together with the decoration on the decorative member 154. In addition,
In this embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 154, and the character of the decorative member 60c and the character of the decorative member 154 can be visually recognized as one character.

Moreover, the decorative member 154 is formed from a light-transmitting material. As a result, the light that has passed through the second opening 60b from the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B) enters the back side of the decorative member 154, and is emitted from the front side of the decorative member 154 (the side in the direction of arrow F). can be done. Therefore, the decoration formed on the front side of the decorative member 154 can be brightened and made visible to the player, and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily seen by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the base plate 60 and the general winning a prize opening unit 150 will be explained. FIG. 13 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XIII-XIII in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 is formed to have a larger outer shape than the opening shape of the second opening 60b of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. As a result, the general winning opening unit 150
is disposed on the base plate 60, the end of the decorative member 154 fits into the recess 151b of the main body 151.
is arranged between the concave bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Therefore,
When the adhesion between the main body part 151 and the decorative member 154 peels off due to deterioration over time, the decorative member 1
54 can be prevented from falling off from the game board 13.

Further, the decorative member 154 has a width that overlaps with the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB), which is a circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion 151, which will be described later, is inserted. The diameter of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11) is set larger than that of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11). This results in
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the decorations of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c when viewed from the front due to a misalignment of the arrangement of the decorative member 154 with respect to the main body 151 or a misalignment of the position where the decorative member 60c is formed. . As a result, the player can easily recognize the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

In addition, the three general winning holes 63 provided in the main body 151 are connected to openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. 71) provided on the back side of the game board 13.
The game ball won in the general winning hole 63 is thrown to the fourth ball throwing route KR4 of the distribution unit 500. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 500 will be given later.

Further, in the distribution unit 500, a substrate (not shown) equipped with a light source capable of emitting light to the front side is disposed on a base plate 520 (see FIG. 71), and the light emitted from the substrate is transmitted to the base plate. The light passes through the second opening 60b of 60 and is irradiated onto the back surface of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

Therefore, the second opening 60b is used as a space for irradiating light onto the path of the game ball that wins from the general winning hole 63 of the general winning hole unit 150 and the back surface of the general winning hole unit 150. This eliminates the need to form two separate openings, one for throwing the game ball and one for passing light, so light can be irradiated across the entire back surface of the general winning a prize opening unit 150. The main body part 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 can be easily
A general winning hole 63 can be arranged in the entire area. As a result, general prize winning unit 150
In addition, the degree of freedom in design can be improved, and the decoration (decorative member 154) of the general winning hole unit 150 can be easily recognized by the player by emitting light from the entire area of the general winning hole unit 150.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative decorative member 154 connected to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is a main body part disposed along the front surface of the base plate 60. 151, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be placed adjacent to each other (close to each other) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
As a result, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be viewed from an angle oblique to the front view (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)).
c and the decorative member 154, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are visually recognized to be shifted compared to the case where the decoration of the general winning hole unit is arranged in front of the general winning hole unit. can be suppressed. As a result, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decorative member 154
The connected portion with the decoration can be visually recognized by the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the player's viewpoint, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the connection of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in range XIV of FIG. Note that in FIG. 14, the path of light that is visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As described above, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration. Therefore, in order for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c of the base board 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the displacement of the two decorations. However, when forming the decoration on the base plate 60 or when arranging the decoration member 154 on the main body part 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration at an accurate position (same position every time). Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is arranged on the base board 60, the position of the decoration of the decorative member 154 with respect to the decorative member 60c of the base board 60 is shifted, so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 There is a problem in that it becomes difficult for players to visually recognize the decorations as a single decoration.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is arranged on the back side of the inclined surface 151a. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60 of the base plate 60
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to accurately recognize the connecting portion with the decoration in c (by blurring the connecting portion so that the player can see it). Therefore, the player can recognize the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

To explain in detail, as shown in FIG. 14, the connecting portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P1" (see FIG. 14)) is connected to the inclined surface 1 of the main body part 151.
It is located on the back side of 51a. Therefore, the light emitted toward the player's viewpoint from the boundary P1 and the connecting part between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P2" (see FIG. 14)) The light emitted toward the player's viewpoint can be reflected at different positions on the decorative member 60c or the decorative member 154 (that is, on the path of the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint). (This can prevent the boundary P2 from being formed.)

Therefore, at the boundary P1, a misalignment of the decorative member 60c with respect to the decorative member 154 is easily recognized by the player as a misalignment of the decoration, and at the boundary P2, a misalignment of the decoration due to a difference in the direction of refraction of light is easily recognized by the player. However, since the decorations that are visible to the player from the respective positions of the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be placed in different positions, the positional deviation of the decorations at the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be easily recognized at the same position. It is possible to prevent players from seeing the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation of the decoration at the boundary P1 and the positional deviation of the decoration at the boundary P2 from being combined, and the amount of positional deviation of the decoration from increasing and being recognized by the player. As a result, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Furthermore, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, from the player's perspective, the connection part between the decorative member 60c and the main body part 151 (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P3" (see FIG. 14)), A boundary P1 can be placed between the boundary P2 and the boundary P2. Therefore, between the positional deviation of the decoration (boundaries P2 and P3) due to the light being refracted when the light is emitted from the main body part 151,
A boundary P1 can be placed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the recognized area from being extended due to the position of the decoration being shifted. In other words, the area where the decoration is visually recognized due to a shift in position can be limited to the front of the game board 13. As a result, the misalignment area of the decoration can be reduced with respect to the game area of the game board 13, making it easier for the player to recognize the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

In addition, in this embodiment, the face of the character is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60,
The body of the character decorated on the decorative member 60c is decorated on the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning port unit 150. That is, the outline of the decoration is located at the connecting portion of the decoration between the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize the positional deviation of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as the outline of the decoration. As a result, the decorative member 6
The decorations of 0c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the character's face up to the neck is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base board 60, and the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 is decorated with the decorative member 60c.
The clothes worn by the body of the character decorated with 0c are decorated, and the character's face (neck) and clothes are decorated with different hues (in this example, the face is skin-colored and the clothes are black). This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are separated by making the positional deviation of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 different in color. I can do it. As a result, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

As described above, the main body portion 151 has a recessed portion 151b on the back side, and a decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recessed portion 151b. Further, the shape of the inner side surface (inner surface 151b3) of the recessed portion 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 when viewed from the front. Thereby, when disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151, the inner surface 151b3 of the recessed portion 151b can be used as a guide (positioning). As a result, when attaching the decorative member 154 to the main body part 151, it is possible to suppress the arrangement of the decorative member 154 from being misaligned with respect to the main body part 151.

Further, on the back side of the main body portion 151, cylindrical protrusions 155 (see FIG. 15) are formed at a plurality of locations (in this embodiment, three locations (see FIG. 15)). The protrusion 155 is a positioning protrusion that positions the general winning a prize opening unit 150 with the base plate 60 when it is disposed on the base plate 60, and is inserted into the recess 60d provided in the base plate 60. In addition, the protrusion 155
At least one location (in this embodiment, one location) is located on the concave bottom surface 151b2 of the concave portion 151b.
The decorative member 154 is inserted into an opening formed in the decorative member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body portion 151.

Therefore, the protrusion 155 allows positioning when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, and also enables positioning when disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body part 151. Therefore, since the positioning portion for arranging the decorative member 154 on the front side of the decorative member 60c can be the same portion, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 from being misaligned. It can be suppressed. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Furthermore, the protrusion 155 protruding from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 is located in a range E1 (FIG. 15), which will be described later.
(see) area (the area where the adhesive tape 154a is attached). As a result, the main body 15
1, the decorative member 154 is placed with the protrusion 155 inserted into the opening of the decorative member 154, with one edge of the decorative member 154 aligned with the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. This allows the decorative member 154 to be positioned at two locations with respect to the main body portion 151. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to arrange the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 by aligning the edges of the decorative member 154 at two locations on the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. As a result, the work of disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning a prize unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in range XIV of FIG. 13. In addition, in FIG. 15, the decorative member 1
The range of the adhesive tape 154a to be applied to the area 54 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line with the reference numeral E1. Further, in FIG. 14, the path of light that is visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. Note that in this embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed from a light-transmissive double-sided tape, and the adhesive tape 154a is
It is attached to 1.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesive tape 154a that adheres the decorative member 154 and the main body portion 151 is pasted along the edge of the decorative member 154 with a constant width. As a result, in areas where the adhesive tape 154a is not attached (parts other than range E1), the adhesive tape 154a
A gap (space) with a predetermined width is formed between the main body portion 151 (recessed bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (front surface of the decorative member) by the thickness a.

Further, the adhesive tape 154a passes through the boundary P3 from the end of the decorative member 154 to the inclined surface 1.
It is bonded to an area beyond the virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) perpendicular to 51a. This results in
The light passing through the main body 151 and emitted from the inclined surface 151a is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the part where the wavelength is changed) in a range E1 (the end of the decorative member 154) where the adhesive tape 154a is attached. Department). As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the general winning a prize opening unit 150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Here, if the player views the game board 13 from a higher position than usual (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity), As shown, the light L exiting from the inclined surface 151a toward the player's line of sight is repeatedly reflected from the front and back surfaces of the main body 151 and passes through the interior of the main body 151. In this case, the decorative member 15
4 is in contact with the main body portion 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of the light is changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 every time it is reflected on the decorative member 154 side. Therefore, the light that passes through the interior of the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a is transmitted to the decorative member 15.
The wavelength change due to the decoration at the end of 4 alone cannot be reflected. Therefore, the inclined surface 151
Since the decoration recognized by the player from a is different from the wavelength of the decoration visually recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, there is a problem that the decorations are not continuous between the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a. Ta.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the adhesive portion of the decorative member 154 to the main body 151 is in the range E1.
By making it possible to prevent the light L that reflects and passes through the interior of the main body portion 151 from being affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the wavelength of the light is not changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the light passing through the main body 151 and emitted from the inclined surface 151a is transmitted to the adhesive tape 154a, the part affected by the decoration (the part where the wavelength is changed) of the decorative member 154.
The area E1 (the end of the decorative member 154) can be pasted, and the decoration on the slope 151a that is visually recognized by the player can be easily recognized by the player as being continuous with the adjacent decoration. As a result, the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, the special prize winning device 550 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36. First, with reference to FIG. 17, a method of arranging the special prize winning device 550 will be described. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 includes a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding the central opening of the base plate 60, and a protruding portion that protrudes radially outward of the base frame 86a. 86b.

The base frame 86a has a shape that follows the central opening of the base plate 60, and a part of the base frame 86a is inserted inside the central opening, and a portion other than the part of the base frame 86a is shaped like the base plate 60. It is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state of protruding toward the front side.

The protruding portion 86b is protruded from the gaming area of the game board 13 to the right side (in the direction of arrow R) when viewed from the front. As a result, the special winning device 550 disposed on the protruding portion 86b can be disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side) when viewed from the front with respect to the gaming area, and when the special gaming state is entered, when hitting right A part of the throwing path of the game ball can be configured by the special winning device 550.

The protruding portion 86b includes an opening 86b1 that opens in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB), and is located above the opening 86b1 (in the direction of arrow U) toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). It mainly includes a recessed portion 86b2.

A part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 86b1. Thereby, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special prize winning device 550 disposed on the back side of the protrusion 86b via the opening 86b1.

The recessed portion 86b2 is capable of accommodating a part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later. In addition, a detection device 86b3 capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided in the recess 86b2.
will be placed. Thereby, the game ball passing through the portion accommodated inside the recessed portion 86b2 of the first unit 551 can be detected.

The special winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 disposed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the protrusion 86b of the center frame 86, and a first unit 551 disposed on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the protrusion 86b. The second unit 552 is configured mainly to include a second unit 552.

The first unit 551 has a space (path) through which a game ball can flow down, and a part of the first unit 551 is disposed in the game area of the game board 13. Further, the first unit 551 is arranged on the center frame 86 by a screw inserted through the second unit 552. Note that a detailed explanation of how to arrange the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special prize winning device 550 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. 18(a) is a front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of the first unit 551.
) is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18(c) is a rear view of the first unit 551. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 disposed on the front side and a second path member 570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 560. , and a third path member 580 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570.

The first path member 560 includes a front plate 564 formed in a plate shape along the front side of the game area of the game board 13, and a substantially U-shaped cross section with an open upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U). A first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563 protruding from the upper end of the face plate 564 toward the back side, and the first receiving portion 561, second receiving portion 562, and third receiving portion thereof. A first wall portion 565 that is formed continuously on the lower side of the portion 563 (in the direction of arrow D) and extends along a part of the edge of the front plate 564; It mainly includes two sets of a second wall part 566 and a third wall part 567, which are formed in a shape and protrude from two places spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance.

The front plate 564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of the game ball formed between the opposite sides of a second path member 570 or a third path member 580, which will be described later, and is formed from a light-transmitting member. Ru. As a result, the player can move the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 to the front plate 564.
can be visually recognized through (through).

The front plate 564 also includes a guide portion 564a that protrudes toward the second path member 570 side (back side (arrow B direction side)).

The guide part 564a is caused by the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, so that the front plate 564
The second path member 570 or the third path member 570, which will be described later, is
It extends along the downstream path of the game ball that flows down between the opposite sides of the path member 580. Further, the guide portion 564a is provided in a protruding manner at a position separated by a radius of the game ball from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. In other words, the guide portion 564a is provided protrudingly at approximately the same position as the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560. Thereby, the portion where the front plate 564 and the game ball come into contact can be limited to the protruding tip portion of the guide portion 564a. Therefore, the front plate 5
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of scratches due to contact with the game ball in the entire area of 64 and the transfer of dirt attached to the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the first path member 560 via the front plate 564 can be easily seen by the player.

The first receiving part 561, the second receiving part 562, and the third receiving part 563 are parts that receive game balls flowing down from the gaming area above the first unit 551 (in the direction of the arrow U) into the inside of the first unit 551. , the opening on the upper side is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at the upper end (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564. Ru.

The first receiving part 561 is set to have a larger receiving width for game balls (width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) than the second receiving part 562 and the third receiving part 563. Thereby, game balls flowing into the special winning device 550 are made easier to flow into the first receiving section 561 than into the second receiving section 562 or the third receiving section 563.

Further, the first receiving portion 561 is communicated with a downstream path formed inside the first unit 551. Thereby, the game balls received in the first receiving section 561 are flown down inside the first unit 551. In addition, the downstream path of the game ball of the first unit 551 will be described later.

The second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 are communicated with a downstream path formed inside the second unit 552, which will be described later. As a result, the game balls received in the second receiving section 562 and the third receiving section 563 are flown down inside the second unit 552. Note that the second unit 55
The second downstream route will be described later.

The first wall portion 565 is an inner wall that forms a space in which a game ball is thrown between opposing fourth wall portions 573 formed in a second path member 570, which will be described later. The first wall portion 565 has one end connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above, and the other end connected to the lower side of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 in the left-right direction (arrow LR). The upper side wall portion 565a extends in the upper side wall portion 565a, and the curved wall portion 565b is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the rear and is connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper side of the rolling surface of the game ball when the game ball rolls on the upper surface (surface in the direction of arrow U) of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later. It is formed at a position spaced apart above the diameter of the game ball (in the direction of arrow U) in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the game ball.

The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end of the fourth wall portion 573. Ru. Further, the curved wall portion 565b is formed in a semicircular arc shape centered on the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall section 573 can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall section 573 by flowing down along the inner wall of the curved wall section 565b, and the ball can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall section 573, and its rolling. The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall that forms a space for a path branching from the main flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is a pair of wall portions that protrude from the back surface of the front plate 564. The opposing distance is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the number of paths flowing down the first unit 551 can be increased.

The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion that forms the inner surface of a path branching from the main throwing path (main path SK3) of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is provided protruding from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the pair of opposing walls is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the path of the game balls flowing down the first unit 551 can be increased.

Further, the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 each have a downstream end connected to the first unit 5
51 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Thereby, the game ball can be thrown to both sides of the first unit 551 in the left-right direction from the branch passage described later.

The second path member 570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 571 facing the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and a fourth wall portion 5 protruding from the front of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560.
73, a fifth wall 574 protruding from the fourth wall 573 at a predetermined distance downward, and a fifth wall 574 protruding from the fifth wall 574 at a predetermined distance downward. The sixth wall portion 575 is formed mainly of a sixth wall portion 575.

The base plate 571 is arranged at a position separated from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 by a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. The base plate 571 also includes first openings 571 that open at positions corresponding to the first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563, respectively.
a, a second opening 571b and a third opening 571c, a fourth opening 571d opening below the first opening 571a, and opening above each of the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575; The fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f, the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575
A recessed portion 571g located between and recessed on the back side.

The first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c allow game balls to flow into the first receiving section 561, second receiving section 562, and third receiving section 563 of the first path member 560 described above. This is an opening through which the back side of the base plate 571 is passed.

The base plate 571 also includes a first opening 571a, a second opening 571b, and a third opening 5.
A first rolling part 576, a second rolling part 577, and a third rolling part 578 are provided that protrude from the lower end of the 71c toward the back side. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is transferred to the third path member 580, which will be described later, and the game ball passing through the second opening 571b or the third opening 571c is
The balls are each thrown to a second unit 552, which will be described later.

The first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d have a third path member 580, which will be described later, on the back side.
Part of the area will be covered. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is thrown toward the front side of the base plate 571 (in the direction of arrow F) from the fourth opening 571d.

The fourth wall portion 573 projects from the base plate 571 along the lower end of the fourth opening 571d and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Further, the fourth wall portion 573 is formed such that its upper surface is inclined downward as it goes from the fourth opening 571d side opened on the left side of the base plate 571 when viewed from the front to the right side when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow R). . As a result, the game ball thrown to the front side of the base plate 571 through the fourth opening 571d is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall 573, and the slope of the upper surface of the fourth wall 573 allows the game ball to be thrown toward the front side of the base plate 571. The ball can be thrown to the right side (in the direction of arrow R).

The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion that becomes the rolling surface of the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565, and the game ball is rolled in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573. It is provided in a protruding manner at a position spaced apart downwardly from the diameter, and extends in the left-right direction of the base plate 571 (in the direction of the arrow LR). Further, the upper surface (surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fifth wall section slopes downward as it goes from the curved wall section 565b side (arrow R direction side) to the recessed part 574g side (arrow L direction side), which will be described later. It is formed by Thereby, the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b to the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 can be rolled toward the recessed portion 574g side. Further, the fifth wall portion 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward in the rolling surface of the game ball.

The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are arranged in parallel in the extending direction of the fifth wall 574. Further, the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set to have a recessed width and a recessed depth larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a fifth opening 571e that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is thrown to the back side of the base plate 571.

The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the fifth wall 574, and allows the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fifth wall 574 to be held in the recessed portion. The ball can be thrown to the upper part of the sixth wall part 575 formed below the recessed part 574g (in the direction of arrow D) while allowing the ball to flow inside the recessed part 574g.

The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that serves as a rolling surface for the game ball that rolls on the fifth wall portion 574 and is thrown to the recessed portion 574g, and the game ball rolls downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574. It protrudes from the base plate 571 at a position spaced apart from the diameter of the base plate 571, and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR) of the base plate 571. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 is formed such that its upper surface is inclined downward from the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) toward the third wall portion 567 side described above. As a result, the recessed portion 574
The game ball thrown from g to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can be rolled toward the ball throwing path side formed by the third wall portion 567. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 includes a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b that are recessed toward the lower side on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are arranged in parallel in the extending direction of the sixth wall 575. Further, the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set to have a recessed width and a recessed depth larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, a sixth opening 571f that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b pass through the sixth opening 571f and are thrown to the back side of the base plate 571.

The third path member 580 includes a first covering member 581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side), and a first covering member 581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the lower side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side). A second covering member 582 disposed on the back surface of the D direction side), a first covering member 581 and a second covering member 5
82 and a second drive unit 584 provided on the back surface of the second covering member 582.

The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a disposed on the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d described above, and a plate-shaped attachment portion 58 continuous to the lower side of the curved portion 581a.
1b.

The curved portion 581a has a first opening 571a and a fourth opening 571d (second path member 570
) is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with an open side, and a first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside thereof (see FIG. 24(a)). In addition, the curved inner wall surface of the curved portion 581a and the first rolling portion 576
The distance from the protruding tip of the ball is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the first
The game ball rolling on the rolling part 576 can be made to flow down along the inner wall of the curved part 581a, and can be thrown to the lower side of the first rolling part 581a. Therefore, by throwing the game ball to the curved portion 581a that curves toward the back side, the rolling time of the game ball can be lengthened. As a result, even if the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be ensured on a plane parallel to the game area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Furthermore, the lower end of the curved portion 581a is arranged at a position slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening 571d. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has been flown down from the first rolling part 576 along the inner wall of the curved part 581a and thrown into the fourth opening part 571d from flowing backward and flowing into the inside of the curved part 581a.

The attachment portion 581b has two through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first covering member 581 to the back surface of the second path member 570 are inserted. In addition, the mounting portion 581b is
It includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. The columnar body 551a has a screw hole bored at its tip for fastening a second unit 552, which will be described later, to the first unit 551. Thereby, the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be fastened together by screwing a screw inserted from the back side of the second unit 552 into the columnar body 551a.

The second covering member 582 includes a second curved portion 582a disposed on the back side of the sixth opening 571f.
and a back side wall portion 58 disposed on the back side of the first to fourth receiving recesses 574a to 575b.
2b.

The second curved portion 582a is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side open (see FIG. 24(c)). The second curved portion 582a also includes an upright wall 582a1 on the inside of the U-shape, which is erected from the front side toward the back side. Standing wall 5
82a1, the internal space of the second curved portion 582a is divided into the first
It is divided into a space 582a2 and a second space 582a3 formed next to the first space 582a2 with an erected wall 582a1 in between.

The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of the game ball, and are formed from the front side to the back side. In addition, the first space 582a2 and the second space 58
2a3 is connected on the back side. Further, the inner surface of the first space 582a2 is formed to be inclined downward as it goes toward the back side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is formed to be inclined downward as it goes to the front side. As a result, the game ball thrown from the recessed part 571g to the second curved part 582a is rolled toward the back side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2, and at the end of the back side, the game ball is rolled toward the second curved part 582a.
The ball is thrown into the second space 582a3 due to the curvature of the curved portion 582a, rolled toward the front side due to the inclination of the second space 582a3, passes through the opening of the sixth opening 571f, and is thrown to the front side of the base plate 571. .

The back side wall portion 582b is configured to receive a ball thrown into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b.
This is a wall portion on the back side of the ball throwing path that guides the game balls passing through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f below the special winning device 550. As a result, the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 574a
Game balls thrown into the receiving recess 575b can be collected. Therefore, the first receiving recess 5
74a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, the gaming balls that have passed through detection devices SE3 to SE6, which will be described later, have given gaming value to the player, flow down the gaming area again, and gaming value has been given to the player again. You can prevent this from happening.

The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a, and a first variable plate 583b connected to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a.
It mainly includes a first protection member 583c surrounding the solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b.

The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in accordance with the displacement of the shaft of the first solenoid 583a. .
In addition, when the first variable plate 583b is extended to the front side, the tip of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the fifth opening 571e, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second
It is arranged above the receiving recess 574b. Thereby, when the first variable plate 583b is extended to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent game balls from flowing into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

The first protection member 583c is formed into a box shape with the second path member 570 side open, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is disposed inside the first protection member 583c. Further, the first protection member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 that penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 583c1 is a portion into which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw inserted through the through hole 583c1 is inserted into the first covering member 581.
or the through hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582, and the second
It is screwed into a hole drilled in the path member 570. Therefore, by disposing the first drive unit 583 on the second path member 570, the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be arranged on the second path member 570. Thereby, the screw fastening portions of the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583, the first drive unit 583 can
If the special winning device 550 is forcibly removed, the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 5
82 and the second path member 570, it is easy to make the game ball unable to pass through the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where fraud has been committed.

The second drive unit 584, like the first drive unit 583, includes a second solenoid 584a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-back direction by electric power, and a second variable plate 584b connected to the shaft of the second solenoid 584a. It mainly includes a second protection member 584c that covers the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b.

The second variable plate 584b is formed from a plate-shaped body that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is bent into a crank shape when viewed from the front. In addition, when the second variable plate 584b is extended to the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b is connected to the sixth opening 57 described above.
1f, and is arranged above the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. Thereby, when the second variable plate 584b is extended to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent the game balls from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

The second protection member 584c is formed into a box shape that is open on the second path member 570 side, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is disposed inside the second protection member 584c. The second protection member 584c also includes a back side wall portion 584c1 that covers the back side of the ball throwing path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. As a result, the rear side wall portion 584c
1 and the second wall portion 566, as well as forming a throwing path between the rear side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566.
The second path member 570 can be covered with the wall portion 566 . As a result, the first unit 55
Detection device SE3~ arranged in the second path member 570 in which the illegal member is inserted from the side of the first path member 570.
This makes it easier to prevent fraud from being committed to SE6.

Next, the throwing path of the game ball flowing into the first unit 551 from the first receiving portion 561 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG. 21 shows XXI-XX in FIG. 18(b).
It is a sectional view of the first unit 551 along the I line. FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. 21. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 18(b). FIG. 24(a) shows XXIVa-XXIV in FIG.
24(b) is a sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line a, and FIG.
24(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line -XXIVb, and FIG. 24(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG.

The game balls flowing into the first unit flow down the game ball main paths SK1 to SK6 in the order of main path SK1, main path SK2, main path SK3, main path SK4, main path SK5, and main path SK6. Or, from main route SK3 to main route SK on the way down main route SK1 to SK6.
3 and flows down the sub-path HK1. Or main route SK
1 - A sub-route HK that communicates with the main route SK5 from the main route SK5 on the way down the main route SK6
2 or sub-route HK3, and flows down either sub-route HK2 or sub-route HK3.

In addition, detection devices SE3 to SE6 that detect the passing of game balls are arranged on the sub-paths HK1 to HK3, and the player receives a predetermined gaming value by detecting the game balls by the detection devices SE3 to SE6. Granted. In this embodiment, a game value is awarded to the player based on a predetermined number of prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK1 is connected to the curved portion 581 of the first covering member 581.
a and the first rolling portion 576 (see FIG. 24(a)) of the second path member 570, and communicates the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. As described above, the curved portion 581a is curved and formed to have a U-shaped cross section with the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side open, and the game passing through the main path SK1 is The ball can be diverted to the back side. As a result, when the game ball passes through a space with a limited area in front view (the inside of the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d), the amount of movement of the game ball in the left and right direction can be reduced. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the main path SK1.Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the first unit 551, thereby increasing the player's interest. can.

In addition, as will be described later, the game balls flowing into the main path SK1 are given a predetermined gaming value to the player, so the rolling of the game balls that may give the player a gaming value is This makes it easier for people to see. As a result, it is possible to easily provide interest to the players. The main path SK1 is in communication with a main path SK2, which will be described later, and allows game balls passing through the main path SK1 to flow into the main path SK2.

Further, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 corresponds to the recessed portion 86b of the center frame 86 described above.
2 (see FIG. 17). Thereby, when the main path SK1 is clogged with game balls (flow is slow), the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) can detect the malfunction and notify an error.

Furthermore, the passage width of the main path SK1 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball,
It is set smaller than the opening through which the game ball of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) passes. As a result, if a game ball (illegal game ball) with a diameter larger than the standard game ball diameter (11 mm) is manufactured and an illegal game is performed with that ball, the ball will be sent to the main route. S
It can be kept inside K1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal game balls from flowing down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 arranged downstream of the main path SK1 and from committing fraud. In addition, by keeping the illegal game ball on the main path SK1, it is possible to detect it with the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and notify an error (illegality). In this case, fraud means that the detection device S
The purpose is to fit an illegal game ball into any of the openings E3 to SE7 and cause the detection devices SE3 to SE7 to continue detection, thereby obtaining a payout (gaming value) of the illegal game ball.

The main path SK2 includes a first wall portion 565 of the first path member 560 and a fourth wall portion of the second path member 570.
This is a space formed between the wall portion 573 and the wall portion 573. The game balls flowing into the main path SK2 roll on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 and flow down. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 extends in the left-right direction (
The fourth opening 571d extends in the direction of the arrow LR) and is formed to be inclined downward as it moves away from the fourth opening 571d.

Therefore, the above-mentioned curved portion 581a (the curved path toward the back side) is formed at the switching portion of the throwing direction of the game ball (the connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2), so that the player can It is possible to prevent losing sight of the game ball flowing down the SK1. That is, when a path that curves toward the back side is formed in the middle of a straight ball throwing path (for example, main path SK2) extending in the left-right direction, the game ball rolling with a constant acceleration on the curved path Since the acceleration is changed (decreased), the line of sight that was following the game ball may end up ahead of the game ball, which may cause the player to lose sight of the game ball.

On the other hand, since the rolling direction of the game ball is switched and a curved path toward the back side is formed in the part where the rolling speed of the game ball is originally slowed down, the player's line of sight is ahead of the game ball. It is possible to suppress the player from losing sight of the game ball.

In addition, the curved portion 581a, which is the inner wall of the main path SK1, is on the left side (in the direction of the arrow L) of the first unit 551, which is disposed slightly to the right (in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the center of the game board 13 in the left-right direction. (side end). Therefore, a curved path (main path SK1) to the back side is formed on the side where the first unit 551 is easily visible to the player located in front of the game board 13, so that the player can move from the main path SK1 to the main path SK1. It is possible to easily prevent losing sight of a game ball passing through SK2.

Moreover, the main path SK2 is connected to the curved path WK1, and via the curved path WK1,
It communicates with a main route SK3, which will be described later. Thereby, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 flows into the main path SK3 via the curved path WK1. Note that a detailed explanation of the curved path WK1 will be given later.

The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall 573 and the fifth wall 574 of the second path member 570. The game balls flowing into the main path SK3 roll on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 and flow down. Further, on the main path SK3, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above is projected onto the main path SK3 when extended. The first variable plate 5 is placed on this main path SK3.
In the state in which 83b protrudes, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the fifth wall portion 574 is moved to the first variable plate 58.
3b and is thrown to the main path SK4.

On the other hand, when the first variable plate 583b is retracted from above the main path SK3, the sub path HK1 in the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall portion 574 is Game balls are flowed in. The ball is thrown through the secondary path HK1 to the recovery path formed by the back side wall 582b via the fifth opening 571e.

In this way, the first unit 551 is provided with the first variable plate 583b that protrudes onto the throwing path of the game ball or retreats from the throwing path of the game ball, and the displacement of the first variable plate 583b causes the main unit of the first unit 551 to move. A case where a game ball flowing down route SK3 is guided to sub route HK1, and a case where a game ball flowing down route SK3 is guided to sub route HK1, and
Since it is possible to change the case where the game ball is guided by K4 and the case where it is guided, it is possible to change the direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, since the game balls flowing into the sub-route HK1 are given a predetermined gaming value to the player, the player can be made to keep an eye on whether the game balls have flowed into the sub-route HK1. Further, the first variable plate 583b is disposed in the middle of the ball throwing path formed in the first unit 551, and is displaced in the player's viewing direction (arrow FB direction). 583
The displacement of b can be made difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game ball flowing down from the first unit 551, and it is possible to easily give the player an interest in the game ball flowing down.

In addition, the sub route HK1 is located below the main route SK3, which throws the game ball from the right side (direction of arrow R) to the left side (direction of arrow L), and the secondary route HK1 is located below the main route SK3, and the game ball is thrown from the left side. It is formed in the fifth wall portion 574 that forms a gap with the main path SK6 for throwing the ball to the right side. Therefore,
Since the sub-route HK1 is formed using the space between the game balls thrown left and right, it is possible to suppress the external shape of the first unit 551 from increasing in the vertical direction. As a result, by reducing the external size of the first unit 551, it is possible to narrow the range in which the player follows the game ball with his/her eyes.
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing into the main path SK4 comes into contact with the protrusion 568 and recessed part 571g.
After the ball is thrown to the inside (back side), the ball rolls around the protrusion 568 along the inner surface of the recess and is thrown to the outside (front side) of the recess. That is, the game ball is rolled so as to bypass the protrusion 568. Moreover, the main path SK4 is connected to the main path SK5, and the game balls passing through the main path SK4 can flow into the main path SK5.

The main path SK5 is the first space 582 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above.
This is a space formed by a2 and a second space 582a3. The game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls inside the first space 582a2 toward the back side as described above, and then moves to the second space 582a2.
It rolls inside 82a3 to the front side. Further, on the main path SK5, the second variable plate 584b of the second drive unit 584 described above projects onto the main path SK5 when extended. This main route SK
In the state where the second variable plate 584b protrudes above the second curved portion 582a, the game ball rolling inside the second curved portion 582a is thrown to the main path SK6.

On the other hand, when the second variable plate 584b is retracted from above the main path SK5, the sub path HK2 in the space formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall portion 575 is The game ball is thrown down. The ball is thrown into the recovery path formed by the back side wall 582b through the sixth opening 571f through the subpath HK2.

Further, the second curved portion 582a constituting the main path SK5 is formed to be curved toward the back side as described above, and can detour the game ball passing through the main path SK5 to the back side.
Thereby, even if the area in front view is set to a predetermined limited space, the distance over which the game ball can roll can be increased.

Further, the second variable plate 584b is configured to be extended or retracted in a part of the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part of the downstream side of the main path SK5. A curved path toward the back side is formed between the upstream side of the main path SK5 and the downstream side of the main path SK5.
It is possible to lengthen the time during which a game value may be given to a player by a game ball passing through K5. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time for providing interest to the player.

A sub-route HK3 is connected to the communication portion between the main route SK4 and the main route SK5. Subroute H
K3 is the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and the back side wall portion 58 of the third path member 580.
4c1 is the space formed between the opposite sides.

The sub route HK3 is a direction different from the flowing direction of the game ball (the right direction in front view (arrow R direction)) when the game ball flows from the main route SK4 to the main route SK5 (the left direction in front view (arrow L direction)). Further, the lower inner edge of the inlet of the sub-path HK3 is set below the second variable plate 584b (in the direction of arrow D).

Here, when the game ball flows down from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 normally (with no external force other than gravity acting on it), the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 or the sub path HK2. Ru. On the other hand, at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the sub path HK2, the second variable plate 584b is extended, and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, causing an external force other than gravity to be applied to the game ball. When the second variable plate 584b acts, the game ball is pushed out to the inlet of the sub-path HK3 and flows into the sub-path HK3.

Therefore, the first unit 551 is provided with a second variable plate 584b that protrudes onto or retreats from the throwing path of the game ball, and the main path SK4 of the first unit 551 is adjusted by the displacement of the second variable plate 584b. Or the game ball flowing down the main path SK5 is the main path SK5 and the sub path HK2.
Alternatively, since the ball is guided to either the sub-route HK3, it is possible to change the direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player by the game balls that flow into the sub-route HK2 or HK3, so the player should pay close attention to whether or not the game balls flow into the sub-route HK2 or HK3. can be done. Further, since the second variable plate 584b is disposed in the middle of the ball throwing path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, the first unit 551 can be made to watch the game balls flowing down, making it easier for the player to enjoy the game balls flowing down.

Further, as described above, on the upstream side across the main path SK4, the path along which the game ball flows is switched by the first variable plate 583b. Therefore, game balls that have not flown into the upstream sub-route HK1 and have not been given any gaming value to the player are allowed to flow further downstream to the sub-route HK2 or H.
It can be made to flow into K3. Therefore, by passing the game ball, which could once have been given gaming value to the player, through the switching part of the downstream path, the game ball can be transferred to the secondary path HK2 and H.
It is possible to make the player have the desire to play K3 again.

Furthermore, a main path SK4 that curves toward the back side is provided between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5 where the path along which the game ball flows is switched. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range when viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball. That is, by having the player recognize the position of the game ball through the main path SK4 after it has flown down the main path SK3, the player can watch the game ball rolling on the main path SK5 connected downstream of the main path SK4. You can easily do it. As a result, the game balls flowing into the sub-paths HK2 and HK3 can be easily seen by the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, at both left and right end portions on the front side of the second variable head 584b, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24(c)) which are inclined toward the back side toward the end portions in the left-right direction are formed. This results in
When the second variable plate 584b is extended and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b abuts the game ball at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the sub path HK2, the game ball is moved by the inclined surface 584b1. can be pushed out to the inlet side of the sub-path HK3. Therefore, the inclined surface 584b1
The secondary path HK2 can prevent the game ball from being caught between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560, and also provides a path in which the direction of the game ball can be switched depending on the timing at which the game ball is flown down. A plurality of paths (three paths in this embodiment) can be formed.

The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing down the main path SK6 is thrown to the game area of the game board 13. Therefore, the first receiving part 5
If the game ball that has flowed into the ball 61 does not flow into the first to fourth receiving recesses 574a to 575b, no gaming value is given to the player, and the ball is thrown from the main path SK6 to the game area of the game board 13. , are collected from the outlet 71 formed on the game board 13.

<Guiding means for displacing the game ball in the front-back direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28, the flow of the game ball from the main path SK2 to the main path SK3 will be explained. 25(a) and 26(a) are partially enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIG. 25(b) and FIG. 26(b) are
) is a sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVb-XXVb. 27(a) is a schematic sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25(a), and FIG.
FIG. 27(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the unit 551, and FIG. 27(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the unit 551.
FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XVIIc. Figure 28(a) is
FIG. 28 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVb-XXVb in FIG.
(b) shows the first unit 55 along line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG. 25(a).
1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 26, a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main route SK2, the main route SK3, and the curved route WK1 are
A first groove recessed in the base plate 571 of the second path member 570 and having an arcuate cross section toward the back side.
A recessed portion 571h, a second recessed portion 571i, and a third recessed portion 571j, a first stepped portion 571k protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK2 to the front side, and a second step portion protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK3. A stepped portion 571m is provided.

The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 has a first recess 571h, a second recess 571i, and a third recess 571h.
A first protrusion 564b, a second protrusion 564c, and a third protrusion 564b are provided at positions facing the recess 571j, respectively.
A protruding portion 564d is provided.

The opposing dimension L11 between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c (see FIG. 28(a)) is
It is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the opposing front plate 564 and base plate 571. This results in
The first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, the third concave portion 571j, the first convex portion 564b, the second concave portion
The game ball thrown between the convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d is placed in the first concave portion 571h,
By bringing the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j into contact with the first convex portion 564b, second convex portion 564c, and third convex portion 564d, the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Further, the opposing dimension between the first recess 571h and the first protrusion 564b and the opposing dimension between the third recess 571j and the third protrusion 564d are the opposing dimension between the second recess 571i and the second protrusion 564c. The distance is set to be approximately the same as L11.

Furthermore, the protruding tip surfaces of the first protrusion 564b, the second protrusion 564c, and the third protrusion 564d,
The distance L13 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the base plate 571, excluding the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j, is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, the third recess 571j, and the first
A game ball thrown between the opposing convex portions 564b, 2nd convex portions 564c, and 3rd convex portions 564d can be made to collide with the first convex portions 564b, 2nd convex portions 564c, and 3rd convex portions 564d.
As a result, the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

In addition, in this case, the game balls that have come into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are flown down inside the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. . Therefore, the game ball flowing down can be prevented from falling in the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 57.
It can be guided in the concave direction of 1j.

The stepped portion 571k projects from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK2 toward the front side. In addition, the stepped portion 5
71k is formed on the downstream side of the main route SK2. The stepped portion 571k is set such that the upstream end of the main path SK2 protrudes from the front of the base plate 571 to the front side, and the downstream end is located at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Set. This results in
The game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the stepped portion 571k and moved to the front side.

Further, the step portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface whose upstream end protrudes toward the front side from the upstream side toward the downstream side. Thereby, the game ball that flows down the main path SK2 and comes into contact with the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k can be guided to the front side and flowed down to the downstream side.

Furthermore, the step portion 571k has an upstream end that is connected to a first convex portion 564 formed on the front plate 564.
b is formed on the upstream side of the main route SK2. Thereby, the game ball that comes into contact with the stepped portion 571k and is guided to the front side can easily come into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

The first recess 571h is recessed in the base plate 571 constituting the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the first recess 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at a position projected toward the front side by the stepped portion 571k. The depth of the first recess 571h toward the back side at the center in the vertical direction is the step part 571h.
It is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L22 of k toward the front side (see FIG. 27(b)). As a result, the game ball that is thrown smoothly along the main path SK2 is allowed to flow into the inside of the first recess 571h without being displaced in the recessed direction (back side (direction of arrow B)) of the first recess 571h. be able to.

On the other hand, the game ball that is thrown down the main path SK2 in a wild state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k, guided to the front side of the main path SK2, and is guided to the front side of the main path SK2 to form the first convex portion of the front plate 564. 564b. Thereby, the game ball can be thrown inside the first recess 571h while suppressing the wild movement of the game ball.

Furthermore, the first recessed portion 571h has a height dimension Y8 ( Figure 25
(a)) is set to the radius of the game ball, and the concave bottom surface is perpendicular to the rolling surface of the game ball (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) on the downstream side of the main path SK2. Height dimension Y up to
9 (see FIG. 25(a)) is set higher than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the main route S
When throwing the game ball flowing down K2 along the first recess 571h, the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U
The rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced by applying resistance to the game ball in the direction of lifting it (direction side). As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be made sufficiently small, and the game ball can be made to flow down smoothly.

The radius X11 (see FIG. 27(b)) in the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, so that when the game ball is thrown inside the first recess 571h, A game ball can be brought into contact with the inner wall. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the number of contact portions of the game ball that contacts the first recessed portion 571h from becoming two, and it is possible to suppress an increase in resistance to rolling of the game ball due to an increase in the number of contact portions. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from stopping on the main path SK2.

The first convex portion 564b formed at a position facing the first concave portion 571h is the first convex portion 571h.
It is formed at a position spaced apart from the upstream end of the main path SK2 in the throwing direction of the game ball (direction of arrow R in FIG. 27(b)), and the value of the distance is set to be smaller than the radius of the game ball. be done.
Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, and the first concave portion 5
This makes it easier to throw the ball to the inside of 71h.

The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1, and has an elliptical outer shape that is elongated in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction) when viewed from the front. In addition, the second recess 5
71i, the center position in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) when viewed from the front is set to the middle position of the curved path WK1. Furthermore, the second recess 571i is formed at a center position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in a front view in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the curved path WK1.

In addition, the main path SK1, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK2 are all set to have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25(a)) that is perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball when viewed from the front. The width dimension L18 is set to approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the maximum width of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j in the transverse direction when viewed from the front is set to approximately 1/2 of the width L18 described above. As a result, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1, and main path SK2) can be caused to pass through the front side of the first recess 571h, second recess 571i, and third recess 571j. , it is possible to easily throw the game ball inside the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The stepped portion 571m projects from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3 toward the front side. In addition, the stepped portion 5
71m is formed on the upstream side of the main route SK3. The stepped portion 571m is set at a position where the downstream end of the main path SK3 protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 571, and
The upstream end is set at the same position as the back surface of the curved route WK1. As a result, the main route S
After the game ball flowing down K3 is thrown downstream from the stepped portion 571m, it can be suppressed from flowing backward (rebounding) beyond the stepped portion 571m to the upstream side.

The third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 constituting the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the third recess 571j is located on the base plate 571 at a position projected toward the front side by the stepped portion 571m.
is formed. The depth of the third recess 571j toward the back side at the center in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height L23 of the stepped portion 571m toward the front side (see FIG. 27(c)). Thereby, the game ball thrown along the main path KR3 can easily flow out from the inside of the third recess 571j to the outside.

Furthermore, the end of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 is connected to the sub path H, which will be described later.
The first variable plate 583b that switches the path flowing down to K1 is disposed above the upstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the main path SK3 in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow U). As a result, if the stop position of the first variable plate 583b shifts upward in the direction of gravity due to the displacement (the variable plate 583b
b is disposed above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), by throwing the game ball passing through the main path SK3 along the inner surface of the third recess 571j, the first variable plate 583b
You can throw the ball without getting caught. As a result, in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent to each other, it is no longer necessary to arrange the first variable plate 583b downward, and it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 from increasing. .

Further, in this case, the third recess 571j has a longitudinal direction in the horizontal direction (arrow L
-R direction), and is spaced upward from the game ball flowing down the main path SK3, so the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b is spaced upward from the game ball. It is possible to apply resistance in the direction of lifting to the side. As a result, the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b can be prevented from being caught on the first variable plate 583b.

Furthermore, the first unit 551 is located on one side (
A main path SK2 for throwing a game ball in the direction (arrow R direction side), and a main path SK3 for throwing a game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the other side in the horizontal direction in the direction opposite to the guiding direction of the main path SK2.
The curved route WK1 connects one side of the main route SK2 and the main route SK3 to each other, and the curved route WK1 includes a guide means (a guide means (a third The second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i) are provided on the inner walls on the front side and the back side with respect to the game board, so that the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 can be directed to the front side or the back side (front and back of the game board 13 in front view). direction).

Therefore, compared to the case where the throwing path of the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 is formed on the same plane in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, the game ball accelerated by rolling on the main path SK2 (first path) flows downward. You can slow down the speed. Therefore, since the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced, the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 returns to the main path SK2, or the ball throw direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the main path SK2 inside the curved path WK1. Shaking (shaking) in the direction of arrow LR) can be suppressed. This allows the player's line of sight to follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a fixed direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown onto the curved path WK1.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (left and right direction when viewed from the front) with respect to the game board 13 when viewed from the front, the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 is There is no need to lengthen the path to prevent the game ball from swinging,
The curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be placed within a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and the first unit 551 can be placed within a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13.
can secure installation space.

Further, the width of the first recess 571h is increased toward the upstream side of the main path SK2 in a direction perpendicular to the downstream direction of the main path SK2 (in the direction of the arrow UD). Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily received into the first recess 571h. Furthermore, since the first recess 571h is set to have a smaller recess width toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, the game ball received in the first recess 571h can easily escape from the same position. That is, the first recess 5
71h can easily receive the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2, and can easily allow the game ball to escape from the same position on the downstream side of the main path SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily throw the game ball to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1 communicating downstream of the main path SK2.

In this case, the recessed end of the first recess 571h in the downstream direction (direction of arrow R) of the main path SK2 is the rolling surface (fourth
The upper surface of the wall portion 573 is formed at a position exceeding the upper surface of the wall portion 573. Therefore, the game ball that escapes from the first recess 571h can be made less susceptible to the influence of the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball that has come out of the first recess 571h can be easily thrown to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1.

Moreover, the main path SK2 extends from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall portion 565b side (that is, from the left side in front view (arrow L direction side) to the right side in front view (arrow R direction side)). The space is formed to be inclined toward the front plate 564 side (front side (direction side of arrow F)). Also, the main route S
K2 is formed such that its rolling surface (the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the front side. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down by the first convex portion 564b, and the reaction force of the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 colliding with the curved wall portion 565b can be applied to the main path SK2.
It is possible to suppress the backflow of water. As a result, the game ball can be stably flowed down at the point where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed.

The upper end (end in the direction of arrow U) of the second recess 571i is drawn in a straight line along the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling on the main path SK2 (fourth wall portion 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 25(a)). Thereby, it is possible to easily receive the game ball thrown through the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed and flowing into the curved path WK1 into the second recess 571i.

A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at the location where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (curved path WK1). As described above, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion
The protruding tip surface of the convex portion 564d, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571
Since the distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the opposite sides of the base plate 571 excluding j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the distance between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The game ball flowing down can be brought into contact with the second convex portion 564c and pushed into the inside of the second concave portion 571i. Therefore, it flows into the main path SK3 (the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c).
The game ball (which slips out from between the holes) can be made to flow down along the arc of the inner surface of the second recess 571i.

Here, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 tends to flow down a position closer to the rolling direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the inside of the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i when viewed from the front, and flows down. Therefore, the throwing direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be easily directed in the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b and temporarily stopping the flow of the game ball at the point where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (see FIG. 28).

Furthermore, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is determined by the main path SK.
Since the game ball can be oriented in the downstream direction of No. 3, the force with which the game ball collides with the curved wall portion 565b can be reduced. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b due to repeated collisions of game balls with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

Further, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first convex portion 564b is
The recessed portion 571h is formed in the second path member 570 disposed on the back side.

Here, a recess (second path member 570
When a recess corresponding to the first recess 571h is formed, the first path member 56
It is necessary to increase the thickness of the 0 plate. Therefore, as the thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the transparency of the first path member 560 deteriorates, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551.

Furthermore, if a concave portion is formed on the back side of the bulging portion that partially bulges out on the front side of the first path member 560, the game board 13 It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front side of the glass unit. Therefore, as the first path member 560 is separated from the glass unit 16, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

On the other hand, the first protrusion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first recess 571h is formed on the second path member 570 disposed on the back side. , the thickness of the first path member 560 disposed on the front side can be reduced. Moreover, since a portion that partially protrudes from the front side of the first path member 560 is not formed, the first path member 560 can be disposed close to the glass unit 16. As a result, the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560 can be easily recognized by the player.

The second convex portion 564c is located below the main path SK2 (the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573) in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow D), and descends in substantially the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 when viewed from the front. Formed at an angle. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the opposing portions of the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i is guided to the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second concave portion 571i when viewed from the front due to the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, the second recess 571i is formed with a curved recessed surface, so that it abuts the inside of the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i when viewed from the front and prevents the falling game ball. The ball can be thrown toward the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the curved path WK
The game balls can smoothly flow from the game ball 1 to the main path SK3.

Further, the second recessed portion 571i has an end on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the front view.
An imaginary line IL4 drawn in a straight line along the rolling trajectory of the center of the game ball rolling K3 (Fig.
(see (a)). Thereby, the height of the center of the game ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recessed portion 571i can be set on the virtual line IL4. As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is thrown in the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall 565b side to the recessed part 571g (see FIG. 21) side). Therefore, the game ball ejected from the second recess 571i is routed along the main path SK3 or the curved path WK.
A game ball thrown to the main path SK3 by contacting the inner surface of the curved path WK1 can be prevented from colliding with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and stagnating inside those paths.

The downward direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be directed to the throwing direction of the main path SK3 at a position close to the rolling surface of the main path SK3. As a result, from the curved path WK1 to the main path S
It is possible to suppress the game ball flowing into K3 from being thrown in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. As a result, the game ball thrown to the main path SK3 is
Collision with the inner wall of K1 and stagnation can be suppressed.

<Disposing the first member that provides high gaming value on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29(a) is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 29(b) is a front view of the second unit 552.
2 is a rear view of the vehicle. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG.
5 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit 552. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 includes a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). A throwing path for a game ball is formed between a fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and a fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side of the fifth path member 620 facing the fifth path member 620. The second unit 552 mainly includes a sixth path member 630 and a decorative member 650 disposed on the side surface of the second unit 552.

The fourth path member 610 is connected to the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above.
It is attached to the back side (direction side of arrow B). The fourth path member 610 also includes a mounting plate 611 formed in a plate shape with a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a mounting plate 611 that stands upright from the end of the mounting plate 611 toward the first unit 551 (front side (direction of arrow F)). A first communicating path 615 and a second communicating path 616 whose internal spaces communicate with the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 are provided.

The mounting plate 611 includes an insertion portion 617 recessed in a circular shape on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and a through hole formed in the bottom of the recess, and a fifth path member 620. side(
A path-side fastening part 618 and a decorative-side fastening part 619 that protrude in a circular shape from the back side (direction of arrow B) and have a hole into which a screw is screwed on the distal end surface of the protrusion, and a mounting plate 611 It has an opening 613 opened at the center of the opening 613, and a second insertion part 614 opened outside the opening 613.

The insertion portions 617 are portions through which the tips of screws for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are inserted, and are formed at multiple locations (in this embodiment, three locations) on the mounting plate 611.

The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion into which a screw inserted into an insertion hole 632 of a sixth path member 630 (described later) is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632. As a result, the 6th
The path member 630 may be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The decoration-side fastening portion 619 is a portion into which a screw inserted into a fastening hole 652 formed in a decorative member 650 (described later) is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. Thereby, the decorative member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged in the first unit 551. Thereby, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be disposed inside the opening 613. Therefore, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, it is possible to suppress the fourth path member 610 from increasing in the front-rear direction, and to protect the periphery of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a. Fourth
It can be surrounded by a path member 610.

The first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are formed in a U-shape with an open upper side (arrow U direction side) when viewed from the front, and extend in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). . Also,
The first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 have their front end portions in contact with the back side of the second rolling portion 577 and third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551, and their back side ends. The end portions are brought into contact with the front side of the end portions of a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 of a fifth path member 620, which will be described later. Further, the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 are connected to the fifth communication path from the first unit 551 side.
The path member 620 is formed to be inclined downward toward the path member 620. Thereby, the game balls thrown from the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 to the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 are transferred to the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616. The communication passage 616 can be rolled to flow into the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620 .

The second insertion part 614 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, which is screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the protruding part 86b when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protruding part 86b of the center frame 86. It is formed at a position corresponding to a screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. Thereby, the fourth path member 610 can be disposed on the back surface of the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86.

When the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, the side wall portion 612 connects the side surface of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the first unit 551. It is a plate member that covers the side surface of the mounting plate 611, and is erected from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611 to the first unit 551 side (front side (direction side of arrow F)). Note that the length of the side wall portion 612 erected toward the front side (first unit 551 side) is set to a length such that the side wall portion 612 comes into contact with the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. As a result, the side wall portion 612 is disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, it is possible to prevent illegal objects from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed from a substantially rectangular plate when viewed from the front, a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 opened in the plate member 621, and a periphery of the second inlet 626. from below the second inlet 626 to the sixth path member 630 side (back side (arrow B direction side))
a second erected wall 623 erected; a first erected wall 624 erected from the periphery of the first inlet 625 to below the first inlet 625 on the sixth path member 630 side; From the plate member 621 to the sixth
It mainly includes a fastened portion 627 that protrudes toward the path member 630 side.

The plate member 621 is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the outer shape of the fourth path member 610 when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the fourth path member 610. The plate member 621 also includes a central opening 622 that is opened at the center when viewed from the front. This central opening 622 is formed larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a in rear view, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. As a result, the plate member 621 (
When the fifth path member 620) is disposed on the back side of the fourth path member 610, the fourth path member 61
The second solenoid 584a inserted through the inside of the opening 613 of 0 can be placed inside the central opening 622.

The first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 are connected to the first inlet of the fourth path member 610 as described above.
This is a portion (an opening through which the game balls flowing through the communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 are received) between the opposing surfaces of the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630.

The fastened portion 627 is a portion into which the tip of a screw inserted through a fastening hole 633 formed in a sixth path member 630 (described later) is screwed into the fastened portion 627, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. Thereby, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened together. In addition, the fastened portion 62
The protrusion dimension of No. 7 toward the sixth path member 630 side is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a gap is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 in which the game ball can flow down.

The first standing wall 624 connects the first inflow port 625 to the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 63.
This is a wall that guides game balls flowing into the opposing space of 0, and extends downward and is connected to the second standing wall 623. The second standing wall 623 is a wall that guides the game balls flowing into the fifth path member 620 from the second inlet, and extends in the vertical direction of the plate member 621. In addition,
The ball throwing path formed by the first erected wall 624 and the second erected wall 623 will be described later.

The sixth path member 630 includes a base plate 631 formed from a substantially rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a second central opening 634 opened in the base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. and an insertion hole 6 formed around the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631.
32 and a fastening hole 633.

The second central opening 634 is formed to have approximately the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 when viewed from the front, and when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined, It communicates with the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 . Thereby, when the second unit 552 is arranged on the back side of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be arranged inside the second central opening 634.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the ball throwing path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. FIG. 32 is a sectional view of the second unit 552 taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 29.

As shown in FIG. 32, the second unit 552 includes a first standing wall 624 of the fifth path member 620.
A sub-route HK4 surrounded by the sub-route HK4 and a sub-route H formed surrounded by the second standing wall 623.
K5.

The sub-path HK4 extends downward from the first inlet 625, is bent toward a sub-path HK5, which will be described later, and communicates with the sub-path HK5. Furthermore, a detection device SE7 for detecting passage of a game ball is disposed in a downwardly extending portion of the sub-route HK4. Thereby, it is possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the sub-route HK4. Moreover, when the detection device SE7 detects the passing of the game ball,
A predetermined gaming value is given to the player (in this embodiment, a prize ball of the game ball).

In the present embodiment, the number of game balls awarded to the player (for example, 3) as the game balls pass through the detection device SE7 is determined by the detection device SE3 disposed in the first unit 551. ~
The number of game balls awarded to the player as the game balls pass through SE6 (for example, 15 balls)
less than. That is, the gaming value given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection device SE7 is given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 disposed in the first unit 551. The game value is set higher than the game value. This makes it easier to draw attention to the game ball passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is possible to easily provide interest to the players.

The sub-pathway HK5 extends downward from the second inlet 626 and connects the second unit 552.
It communicates with the recovery path of the pachinko machine 10 below. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the sub-route HK5 are collected without giving any game value to the player. In addition, the game balls flowing down the sub-route HK4 and detected by the detection device SE7 are thrown to the sub-route HK5 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

The special winning device 550 also includes a first unit 551 made of a light-transmissible material and disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and a second unit disposed on the back side of the first unit 551. 552, the first unit 551 includes a first receiving section 561 into which a game ball can be inserted.
The second unit 552 includes a second receiving section 562 and a third receiving section 5 into which game balls can be inserted.
63, the game balls that enter the first receiving section 561 have a higher gaming value to the player (payout of game balls) than the game balls that enter the second receiving section 562 and the third receiving section 563. will be granted.

Therefore, the routing of the ball throwing paths of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is complicated (for example, the ball throwing path of the first unit 551 and the ball throwing path of the second unit 552 are Compared to the case where the game balls flow down the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same timing, it is easier for the player to watch the game balls flowing down the first unit 551. Therefore, the first receiving section 5 with high gaming value
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 provided with 61. As a result, the player can see the game ball passing through a path that provides a high gaming value to the player, making it easier to increase the player's interest.

In addition, the inlet of the throwing path for throwing game balls to the first unit 551 (first receiving section 561)
Since the inflow ports (second receiving part 562 and third receiving part 563) of the throwing path for throwing game balls to the second unit 552 are formed at adjacent positions, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to decide whether the game balls flow into the unit 551 or into the second unit 552 where a low game value is given. As a result, it is possible to easily keep the player interested until just before the game balls flow into the special winning device 550.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, special prize winning device 550 is inserted into center frame 86.
The following describes the arrangement of the . FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the center frame 86,
FIG. 33(b) is a side view of the center frame 86. 34(a) is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34(b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. Figure 36 shows XX in Figure 33.
FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86 taken along the line XVI-XXXVI. FIG. 37(a) is
37(b) is a schematic exploded sectional view of the game board 13. FIG.
Note that FIGS. 37(a) and 37(b) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 36.

<Fixing means for biasing the first member toward the base member>
As shown in FIGS. 33 to 37, the special winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 that is removable on the front side of the center frame 86 and a removable first unit 551 on the back side of the center frame 86, with the center frame 86 in between. A possible second unit.

The first unit 551 is mounted on the front side of the protrusion 86b with the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed on the back side of the first unit 551 inserted into the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86. will be placed in Further, the first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the second unit 552 side.

The columnar body 551a has an insertion portion 61 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552.
7, and has a hole at its tip into which a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 is screwed.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by screws inserted into the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. To explain in detail, the first unit 551 is disposed with the protrusion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed between the first unit 551 and the fourth path member 610 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side). Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 into the columnar body 551a.

Further, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, the screw inserted into the second insertion part 614 formed in the second unit 552 is inserted into the screw hole 86b4 ( (see FIG. 35), the protruding portion 86b and the fourth path member 610 can be fastened together. As described above, the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, so when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protrusion 86b, the first unit 551
is fastened to the protruding portion 86b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the vertical opening dimension Y1 (see FIG. 37(b)) of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 is the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570). It is set slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37(b)). In addition, the first unit 55
The distance dimension Y4 (see FIG. 37(b)) from the contact surface with the front of the base plate 60 of the first unit 552 to the contact surface with the base plate 60 of the second unit 552 is 552
When these are fastened together, the thickness is set to be slightly smaller than the thickness Y3 (see FIG. 37(b)) of the base plate 60.

Thereby, when the first unit 551, the second unit, and 552 are fastened together, the first unit 551 can be urged toward the base plate 60 side (back side). Therefore, base plate 6
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front surface of the device 0 and the first unit 551. Therefore, there is no need to fasten the first unit 551 with screws from the front side of the base plate 60, and accordingly,
Since a screw fastening allowance is not required on the front side of the first unit 551, the area on the front side of the first unit 551 can be used as a throwing space for game balls. As a result, the first
A throwing space for the game balls formed in the unit 551 can be secured.

Further, the fastening portion (column body 551a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is
Since it is formed protrudingly on the back side of the first unit 551, compared to the case where the fastening part is formed on the front side of the base plate 60, it is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed on the first unit 551. can.

Further, since the second unit 552 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (front side), it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent tampering with the first solenoid 583a and second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 by inserting a tampered object such as a wire or piano wire between the opposing sides of the second unit 552 and the base plate 60.

Furthermore, since the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 with screws inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, the front side of the first unit 551 has a fastening allowance (screws are inserted) with the base plate 60. This eliminates the need to form an extended portion (in which an opening is formed). As a result, the entire area of the outer shape of the first unit 551 when viewed from the front can be used as a throwing path, and the throwing path of the first unit 551 can be enlarged.

In addition, since the fastening part between the base board 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base board 60, the fastening part between the base board 60 and the first unit 551 can be removed due to fraud from the front side of the game board 13. It is possible to prevent this from happening. As a result, unauthorized access to the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the connecting portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the head of the screw. As a result, the first
When the player recognizes the configuration for fixing the unit 551 to the base plate 60,
It is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest.

Further, the first unit 551 includes a fixing means (screw) fastened from the back side of the base plate 60.
Therefore, it is placed on the base plate 60 in a state where it is biased toward the back side with respect to the base plate 60.
The biasing force acting on the first unit 551 toward the rear side allows the first unit 551 and the base plate 60 to be disposed in close contact with each other.

Further, since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 with a throwing path through which the game ball can be thrown, the first unit 551
51 and the ball throwing path of the second unit 552 can be prevented from being misaligned when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are assembled. As a result, the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are
It is possible to prevent the ball from stopping on the second throwing path.

Further, the first unit 551 includes a rolling surface (a second rolling part 577 and a third rolling part 578) for causing the game ball thrown to the first unit 551 to flow into the second unit 552.
Therefore, each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552
If the first unit 551 is fastened to the protruding portion 86b of the second unit 86, an error may occur in assembling the first unit 551 to the center frame 86, and the throwing of the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 may not be carried out smoothly. There was a risk that I would lose my ability.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the first unit 551 is
52, it is possible to minimize the error when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened (minimize the location where the error occurs when fastening). As a result, the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

The fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions overlapping with at least a portion of the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 of the fourth path member 610 in rear view. . Accordingly, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after removing the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610. As a result, the first unit 55 forming the main paths SK1 to SK6
1 is removed from the center frame 86 and unauthorized access to the main routes SK1 to SK6 can be suppressed.

Further, the protruding portion 86b includes an upright portion 86b5 that stands on the second unit 552 side (folds back) at the end (see FIG. 33(b)). As a result, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 with the protrusion 86b of the center frame 86 in between, the upright portion 86b5 of the first unit 551 It surrounds the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a which are arranged on the back side.

Therefore, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or piano wire from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 facing each other. It can be suppressed. As a result, with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 disposed on the center frame 86, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551.

Further, a first solenoid 583a is provided between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
A part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a is provided, and an upright portion 86b5 is also provided. Therefore, by utilizing the space in which the upright portion 86b5 is disposed, the first solenoid 583a
and a part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a. Therefore, since a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a
84a can be prevented from protruding toward the back side. As a result, it is possible to easily surround the back sides of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a with the second unit 552, thereby preventing unauthorized access to the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from the back side. 2 unit 552.

Furthermore, a first solenoid 583 is provided between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
a and a part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a are arranged, so the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 is hidden by the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a, making it difficult to see from the player side. I can do it. As a result, even if the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in front view, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 can be This can be easily seen by players. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 that gives the player a higher gaming value than the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 can be visually recognized by the player. This makes it easier for players to enjoy the game.

Further, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, the decorative member 650 is disposed to cover the inner side surface of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86. Thereby, it is possible to prevent illegal objects such as wires and piano wires from being inserted into the special prize winning device 550 through (through) the opening of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 58 disposed in the first unit 551
3 a is inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 formed in the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552 on the back side. This results in
It is possible to suppress the second unit 552 from bulging out to the back side (arrow B direction side), and the first
It is possible to prevent illegal objects such as wires and piano wires from being accessed to the solenoid 583a.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, the second path member 570 of the first unit 551 in which the first solenoid 583a is disposed
can suppress bending. As a result, the passage of the game ball through the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, as described above, the opening 8 of the protrusion 86b formed in the center frame 86
Since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are surrounded by the 6b1, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a, which have a relatively large (heavy) load, are supported by the opening 86b1 (projection 86b). can do. As a result, the protruding portion 86b can be prevented from bending due to the load of the special prize winning device 550.

Therefore, since the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be suppressed from bending (deflecting), the arrangement of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 is adjusted to the base plate 60.
It is possible to suppress misalignment with respect to the As a result, game balls can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

Also, a second rolling section 57 that throws a game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.
7 and the third rolling portion 578 are formed outside the opening 86b1 of the protruding portion 86b. As a result, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 disposed inside the opening 86b1
The electromagnetic force generated by driving 84a causes the first unit 551 to move from the second unit 552.
It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball being thrown from being obstructed. In other words, the protrusion 86b can prevent the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the protrusion 86b. As a result, the throwing of game balls from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 can be stabilized.

As described above, the first solenoid 583a is disposed with its rear side inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. Thereby, the wiring of the detection devices SE3 to SE6 of the first unit 551 and the first solenoid 583a can be inserted through the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. Further, since the wiring can be arranged along the first solenoid 583a, it is possible to suppress the wiring from becoming tangled.

Furthermore, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the protrusion 86b on which the first unit 551 is disposed does not bend. can be suppressed. Therefore, since the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be prevented from bending (flexing), the position of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 can be prevented from shifting with respect to the base plate 60. It can be suppressed. As a result, game balls can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

<Displacement member for arranging the fixing member of the board unit on the back member>
Next, the connection structure between the rear case 300 and the board unit 110 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42. First, with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 30
The structure of 0 will be explained.

38(a) is a front view of the back case 300, and FIG. 38(b) is a front view of the back case 300.
FIG. FIG. 39(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 300, and FIG.
(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 300 includes an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301, and case 300
The above-mentioned board box 100 (main controller 110
), and a fixing member 320 for fixing.

In addition, the rear case 300 includes protruding portions 30 that protrude from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301.
1b, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 31.
0, and a second opening 301d that opens at a position opposite to the second opening 301d.

The protruding portion 301b is a shaft for holding the engaging member 310 in a slidable state,
It is inserted into the inside of a sliding groove 314 that opens in an engaging member 310, which will be described later. In addition, the protruding portion 30
1b is annularly protruding, and a screw can be screwed into the inside of the annular shape. Therefore, after inserting the protruding part 301b into the sliding groove 314, a screw having a head having a diameter larger than the width of the sliding groove 314 is screwed into the protruding part 301b. 310 back case 3
It can be placed in 00.

The first opening 301c is an opening through which a part of the fixing member 320 (an engaging part with the engaging member 310, which will be described later) is inserted. )
It is formed into a shape that allows it to be inserted. As a result, the fixing member 320 provided on the back side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engaging member 310 provided on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

Further, the first opening 301c has a projecting wall 301c1 that protrudes toward the back side at an end that is opposite to the engagement side (arrow L direction side) between the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310 (arrow R direction side). Equipped with The protruding wall 301c1 has a hook-like shape with a protruding tip on the back side bent at approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in a direction away from the first opening 301c (in the direction of arrow R).

The tip of the projecting wall 301c1 is inserted into a locking portion 331 of a fixing member 320, which will be described later. Thereby, the opposite side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 disposed on the back case 300 can be moved from left to right (
The fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be supported (engaged) at both ends in the arrow LR direction), and the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be supported (engaged) at both ends by suppressing concentration of force on the engaging portion of the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310. 310
can be prevented from being damaged. Note that a detailed explanation of the arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be given later.

The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part of the engaging member 310 (operator 315), which will be described later, into the back side of the back case 300. It can be operated from. Therefore, as described above, after placing the fixing member 320 on the back surface of the back case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the back side of the back case 300, and the fixing member 320 and the engaging member are attached to the back case 300 ( It can be engaged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301).

The engaging member 310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first piece 311 and a second piece 312 extending in parallel directions, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 3.
A third piece 313 connects the ends of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312.

The above-mentioned two sliding grooves 314 are formed at one location each on the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, and are long in the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction). It is opened in the shape of a long hole. This allows the engaging member 310 to slide in the direction in which the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 extend (in the direction of the arrow LR).

The first piece 311 has an end on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected, as an engaging portion with a fixing member 320 described later. The engaging portion 316 is formed to protrude outward on both sides in the up and down direction (direction of arrow UD), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and the engaging portion 316 at two locations. A recess 317 recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 311 (direction of arrow LR) from a substantially intermediate position and toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (direction of arrow B)) of the back case 300. A protruding operator 315 is provided.

The engaging portion 316 has a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and has one side (the side in the direction of arrow R).
The outer surface of the first piece 311 is formed as an inclined surface that protrudes outward from the end of the first piece 311 toward the other side (in the direction of arrow L). Extension direction (arrow LR
It extends in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction.

The recess 317 is formed by cutting out the first piece 311 in the thickness direction, and is formed by cutting out the first piece 311 in the thickness direction.
It is recessed from one end (the side in the direction of arrow R) toward the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L). Therefore,
One side of the first piece 311 is divided into two. Thereby, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320. Note that a detailed explanation of the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be given later.

The operator 315 is an operation part for operating the engagement member 310, is formed at the other end of the first piece 311, and has a protruding dimension larger than the thickness of the bottom wall 301 of the back case 300. It is set to a value of 1, and protrudes to the back side of the back case 300 by at least a size that an operator can grasp with his or her fingers. Thereby, the operator 315 can be made to protrude from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 315) can be grasped and operated.

The second piece 312 includes a circular fastening hole 318 on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is
This is a part into which a screw inserted into a hole (see FIG. 89) penetrated through a rear base 720 of a rotation unit 700, which will be described later, is screwed. As a result, the inside of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301
After disposing the rotating unit 700 on the front side of the rotating unit 700, the engaging member 310 disposed on the back side of the rotating unit 700 is operated to move the engaging member 310 to a specified position (to engage with a fixed member 320, which will be described later). The engaging member 31 can be operated to the mating position) and the engaging member 31 can be screwed into the fastening hole 318.
0 and the rotation unit 700 (rear base 720) can be fastened together. Therefore, the operator 315 protrudes from the back side of the back case 300 so that the engaging member 310 is placed at a specified position.
It is possible to make it inoperable simply by operating the . As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 315 is improperly operated, and the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (
The main controller 110) can be prevented from being easily replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In this case, the fastening hole 318 is inserted through the hole in the back base 720 of the rotation unit 700.
The screw fastened to may be operable from a hole provided in the game board 13 from which the first prize opening 64 is removed. In this case, there is no need to release the connection between the game board 13 and the back case 300, so it is possible to prevent the work of replacing the board box 100 with a normal board box 100 from becoming complicated. As a result, the work of replacing a normal board box 100 can be simplified.

The fixing member 320 is composed of a separate member from the back case 300. As a result, the board box 100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320, which has a smaller outer diameter than the rear case 300. Easy to set up. As a result, the board box 100 can be easily disposed in the rear case 300 in a state where the board box 100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 320.

Furthermore, while the back case 300 can be used as a component with the same shape for each model of pachinko machine, the board box 100 has a different shape and size depending on the model of each pachinko machine 10. The fixing member 320 provided with the pachinko machine cannot be shared with another pachinko machine. Therefore, compared to the case where the fixing member 320 is formed integrally with the back case 300, the mold for molding the back case 300 can be the same mold as another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320 whose outer diameter is smaller than that of the back case 300, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The fixing member 320 includes an intervening member 330 that engages with the above-described engaging member 310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 330. Thereby, the shaft supporting member 340 can be used as a second-use item having the same shape as the fixing member of another game machine.

The intervening member 330 is formed into a box shape that is open on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F), and the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) is open.
A locking portion 331 protrudes from the side surface of the other side (direction side of arrow L), and an engaged portion 332 formed in a frame shape and protruding from the side surface of the other side (direction side of arrow L) toward the back case 300 side (front side). , mainly includes an insertion hole 333 that opens in a circular shape on the box-shaped bottom surface, and a protrusion 334 that projects from the back surface toward the shaft support member 340 side.

The locking portion 331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 301c to the opening. The protruding wall 301c1 provided in a protruding manner is inserted into the bottom wall portion 301 and engaged with the bottom wall portion 301. As a result, when installing the intervening member 330 (fixing member 320) on the back case 300, the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 331 of the intervening member 330, and one side of the intervening member 330 (arrow R direction side) can be locked to the back case 300.

The engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 310, and has a dimension in which it protrudes toward the back case 300 (in the direction of arrow F) beyond the engaging member 310 disposed on the back case 300. The distance from the inner surface of the front side (direction of arrow F) of the enclosed space to the front of the bottom wall 301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engagement member 310 to the front of the bottom wall 301. Set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the intervening member 330 to a shaft support member 340 (described later) is inserted, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the shaft support member 340.

The protrusion 334 has a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the tip on the bent side and the bottom surface of the intervening member 330 is set to be larger than the thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the shaft support member 340, which will be described later. be done.
As a result, the insertion portion 3
44 can be inserted and arranged.

The shaft support member 340 includes a main body 341 formed in a box shape that is open on the back case 300 side (direction of arrow F), and a substantially U-shaped cross section from the back side of the main body 341 (direction of arrow B). The support portion 342 is formed mainly of a bulging support portion 342.

The main body portion 341 includes an insertion portion 3 that protrudes upward from a side surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side).
44, and a fastening hole 343 that is recessed from the bottom side (arrow D direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the main body part 341 formed in a box shape.

The insertion portion 344 is a plate member inserted between the bent end of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the intervening member 330, as described above. Thereby, the upper side of the shaft support member 340 can be prevented from tilting toward the back side of the back case 300.

The fastening hole 343 is arranged on the lower side (in the direction of arrow D) toward the end opposite to the insertion portion 344 . Further, as described above, the fastening hole 343 is the insertion hole 333 of the intervening member 330 (FIG. 39).
This is a hole into which a screw is inserted (see (b)). Therefore, the shaft support member 340 is located on the upper side (
The insertion portion 344 (on the arrow U direction side) is inserted into the protrusion 334 of the intervening member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the intervening member 330. Therefore, since the shaft support member 340 is fixed to the intervening member 330 only by fastening the screws on the lower side, the number of fastening parts can be reduced, and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

The support portion 342 is a portion that is caulked to the bearing portion 117 of the above-described board box 100 (main controller 110), and is formed in a hollow shape into which a caulking fitting can be placed. Note that the board box 100 is held in a rotatable state relative to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with caulking metal fittings.

Next, referring to FIGS. 40(a) to 41(b), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320
The engagement with will be explained. 40(a) is a front view of the rear case 300 before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the rear case 300 before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the state shown in FIG. Figure 41(a
) is a front view of the back case 300 in a state after the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of case 300. Note that in FIGS. 40(b) and 41(b), a part of the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps with the back case 300 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, the intervening member 330 and the shaft support member 340 are placed on the intervening member 330 side (front side (arrow) They are fastened and assembled using screws inserted from the F direction side)). As a result, the intervening member 330
And it is possible to prevent the shaft support member 340 from being improperly disassembled (the fastened screws being removed) from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340 from being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

The interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixed member 320) in the fastened state are connected to the projecting wall 30 formed in the first opening 301c inside the locking portion 331 of the interposed member 330, as described above.
1c1 is inserted. In this case, the interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (
The fixing member 320) opens the first opening 301c from the bent side (arrow R direction side) of the projecting wall 301c1.
will be placed in

When the fixing member 320 is disposed in the back case 300, a space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is disposed at a position facing one end (on the engaging portion 316 side) of the engaging member 310. Thereby, by slidingly displacing the engaging member 310, one end (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

Here, the outer dimensions in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the two engaging parts 316 of the engaging member 310 are the openings in the vertical direction of the space surrounded by the engaged parts 332 of the fixed member 320 described above. It is set larger than the dimensions. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 cannot be disposed in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

On the other hand, the engaging member 310 allows the first piece 311 to be easily elastically deformed by the recess 317 provided on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 as described above, and also allows the first piece 311 to be easily elastically deformed. Due to the triangular shape of the joint portion 316, the force generated when the engaging member 310 is slid and abuts against the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 can be applied to the recessed portion 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, the first piece 311 formed into two forks can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are
The engaging member 310 is slid and the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is moved to the intervening member 33.
When inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portions 332 of 0, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to its pre-deformed shape. As described above, the engaging portion 316 has the other side surface connected to the first piece 311.
It extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which it extends. Therefore, the force that causes the engagement member 310 to slide in the opposite direction alone does not act to cause the first piece 311 to elastically deform toward the recess 317. That is, the first piece 311 is connected to the engaged part 332 by the inclined surface of the engaging part 316 and the recessed part 317.
The other side of the engaging portion 316 (the side in the direction of arrow L) can be easily inserted into the space surrounded by the
It is possible to make it difficult for the first piece 311 inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 to come out. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back side of the back case 300 due to a fraudulent act by the player, and the board box 100 (main controller 110) which is caulked to the fixing member 320 is an unauthorized board box. It is possible to suppress the exchange.

Further, the back case 300 is disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300, and is located on the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B), and is located between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The fixing member 320 includes an engaging member 310 that can be operated from the outside between opposing faces of the
It is provided with an engaged portion 332 that protrudes toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the back case 300, and the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are engaged with each other to be disposed on the back case 300. , with the accessory device (in this example, the rotation unit 700) disposed between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the outside between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300. , the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 can be engaged with each other.

Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be disposed on the back case 300 without the engagement member 310 being obstructed by the accessory device disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 facing each other. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily disposed on the back case 300.

Furthermore, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300, the engaging portion between the back case 300 and the fixing member 320 is connected to the base plate. 60 and the rear case 300 facing each other. As a result, the base plate 6
It is difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of 0. As a result, the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 3 are removed from the back side of the base plate 60.
20 is released, and the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being tampered with (for example, replaced with an unauthorized fixing member).

The back case 300 also includes a first opening 301c that is opened in a portion where the fixing member 320 is disposed, and a second opening 301d that is opened in a portion where the engagement member 310 is disposed. The engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the back case 300, and is inserted from the back side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the back case 300 via (inserting) the second opening 301d. The fixed member 320 is operable, and since the engaged portion 332 that has passed through the first opening 301c is disposed on the front side of the rear case 300, the engaged portion 332 of the engaging member 310 and the fixed member 320 is This makes it difficult to access the engaging portion from the back side of the back case 300. the result,
Regardless of the size of the accessory device disposed on the back case 300, the fixing member 320 can be fixed to the back case 300, and the game board 13 can be operated from the back side and replaced with an unauthorized board box. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, the engaging member 310 includes an operator 315 that is inserted through the second opening 301d and protrudes toward the back side of the back case 300 (the direction of the arrow B). ), the engaging member 310 can be easily operated.
As a result, the engaging operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be easily performed.

In addition, since the engaging member 310 can be slid on a plane parallel to the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 can be moved in the front-rear direction (arrowed by the arrow) relative to the back case 300. Since the engagement member 310 is not displaced in the F-B direction), the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the engagement member 310 can be easily used as a space for an accessory device disposed in the rear case 300. As a result, the area on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as a space for installing accessory devices.

Next, the operation for removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is It is possible to operate from the back side of the back case 300 (the side in the direction of arrow B) through the first opening 301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 toward the concave side of the recess 317 using a special tool or the like, the engagement between the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be prevented. The connection is canceled. With this engagement released, the engaging member 310 is displaced in the direction of pulling it out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332 (in the direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is restored. , the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

Note that it is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 and the first opening 301c be formed as small as possible. According to this, from the back case 300 to the fixing member 3
It is possible to make it impossible for the person who is removing 20 to insert his or her fingers into the device, and to allow the insertion of a special tool.
As a result, only a worker with a dedicated tool can replace the board box 100 (main controller 110), and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced with an unauthorized one.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the board box 100 (main controller 110) caulked to the shaft support member 340 will be described. FIG. 42(a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main controller 110), and FIG.
b) is a rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main controller 110). In addition, in FIG. 42(b), the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps with the substrate box 100 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the board box 100 has one end side (arrow R
A bearing portion 117 is provided that protrudes from the end portion of the bearing portion (direction side). The bearing portion 117 is mounted in the vertical direction (arrow U
-D direction) at a predetermined interval. As described above, the pair of bearing parts 117 are parts that are caulked and fastened to the support part 342 of the shaft support member 340, and the vertical dimension (arrow UD direction) of the support part 342 and the distance between the opposing parts are approximately the same. Set to be the same. As a result, the board box 100 is fastened to the shaft supporting member 340 by arranging the support part 342 between the pair of bearing parts 117 facing each other, and by inserting a caulking pin from above the bearing part 117 and fixing it by caulking. be done.

According to the board box 100 configured as above, the board box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the shaft support member 340 and is disposed on the back side of the engagement member 310, so that the above-mentioned When operating the operator 315 to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixed member 320, the operator 315 can be easily operated by rotating the substrate box 100. Further, after the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the board box 10
0 on the back side of the engagement member 310 makes it difficult to operate the operator 315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 3
It is possible to prevent the board box 15 from being manipulated and replaced with an unauthorized board box.

Note that the other end side (arrow L direction side) of the board box 100 is the bottom wall portion 3 of the rear case 300.
01, the screws are inserted from the back side of the board box 100 (the side in the direction of arrow B) and fastened to the back case 300. As a result, the board box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 43 to 14 illustrate a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (the lowest position with respect to the base member 410).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. 420, a link member 430 that is connected to the base member 410 and is displaced as the transmission member 420 is displaced, and one end is slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end is connected to the link member 430. and a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by transmission of driving force from the link member 430.

The base member 410 is formed by combining two rectangular and laterally elongated plate members when viewed from the front in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 disposed on the front side and a back base 412 disposed on the back side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the rear base 412, which face each other.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 43).
a, 411b, two cylindrical pivot pins 411c, 411d protruding toward the back side, and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc shape with the pivot pin 411d as an axis. .

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by two protrusions 47 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440.
2,473 are the holes through which they are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, the protrusions 47 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b
2,473 along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, extending upward from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411 (see FIG. 4).
3 upward). Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged so that the axes of their circular arcs are located at different positions, and the gap between the opposing grooves in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It is possible to displace the object while moving it. That is, two sliding grooves 411a, 411b
By changing the distance between them, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. Note that the detailed manner of displacement of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The pivot pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Also,
The pivot pin 411c is formed from a metal rod and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
11c can be prevented from breaking (damaging).

The pivot pin 411d has a through hole 431 formed at one end of a first link member 431, which will be described later.
The protrusion is inserted into the through hole 431a, and is formed into a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the pivot pin 411d is formed from a metallic rod-shaped body, and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when force is applied to the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, it is possible to suppress the pivot pin 411d from breaking (damaging).

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back side of the front base 411 and is connected to the pivot pin 411.
It is curved around the axis d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance at which the curved wall portion 411e comes into contact with a protruding end surface of a plate-shaped projection 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later. Therefore, displacement of the first link member 431 toward the front side is suppressed. In addition, the curved wall portion 411e
is formed to be curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, so even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, the plate-like protrusion 431 of the first link member 431
b can be brought into contact with the protruding tip surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The recovery port 411f is an opening for allowing the ball ejected from the exit opening 471 by movement of the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, to flow into the recovery port 411f and to be recovered. The downstream side of the recovery port 411f is connected to the ball recovery path. The collection port 411f is located at the front base 41.
1, and its opening surface is opposite to the surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and below the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the first extended state in the direction of gravity. It is considered to be a surface located on the side.

Further, the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received into the recovery port 411f and quickly recovered.

The back base 412 has grooves 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (the front side in FIG. 44) toward the back side, and a locking part 412c formed protruding toward the front side near the groove 412b. Formed primarily in preparation.

The groove 412a is a hole into which the distal end side of the pivot pin 411c of the front base 411 described above is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411c, and faces the pivot pin 411c. Recessed in position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held so that it cannot fall off from the base member 410 by assembling the front base 411 and the back base 412 after the pivot pin 411c is inserted into the shaft portion 422a. Further, since the back base 412 can hold the tip of the pivot pin 411c, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from its outer circumferential surface, the pivot pin 411c is able to hold the front end of the pivot pin 411c. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove 412b is a hole into which the distal end side of the pivot pin 411d of the front base 411 described above is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411d, and faces the pivot pin 411d. Recessed in position. Therefore, the first link member 431 is connected to the through hole 431
After the pivot pin 411d is inserted through the base member 411a, the front base 411 and the back base 412 are combined and held so that they cannot fall off from the base member 410. In addition, the back base 412
However, since the tip of the pivot pin 411d can be held, when a force is applied to the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the pivot pin 411d is bent from the connection part with the front base 411. This can prevent it from breaking.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end side of the biasing spring SP1, which will be described later.
It is formed outside P1. Thereby, one end side of the biasing spring SP1 can be locked. Note that a detailed explanation of the biasing spring SP1 will be given later.

The transmission member 420 includes a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of a drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam that meshes with the transmission gear 421 and rotates as the transmission gear 421 is driven. 422.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear that has a toothing surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is fitted onto the shaft of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when electric power is applied to drive motor KM1 and the shaft portion is rotated, transmission gear 421 is similarly rotated.

The cam member 422 has a shape in which the outer shape in a front view is a combination of ends of two semicircles of different sizes, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The small semicircular portion of the cam member 422 has a tooth surface 4 on its outer circumferential surface that meshes with the transmission gear 421.
22b is carved, and a shaft portion 422a is formed to penetrate through the center of the semicircle. Cam member 42
A sliding groove 422c is formed in the large semicircular portion of No. 2 on the back side facing a link member 430, which will be described later.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted, as described above.
Since the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported on the shaft portion 1c, the cam member 422 is supported on the shaft support pin 411c.
is held rotatably about the axis of

The cam member 422 is attached to the base member 410 with the tooth surface 422b meshing with the transmission gear 421.
Therefore, when the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 422a.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer periphery of the semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a large radius. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end to the other end. The sliding groove 422c also includes a step portion 422c1 extending from the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 toward the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is located in a retracted state, which will be described later. A step portion 422c3 extends from the sliding protrusion 431d toward the through hole 431a when the member 440 is in a second extended state, which will be described later, and a step portion 422c3 extends between the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the second extended state. A step portion 422c2 is provided that extends from the sliding protrusion 431d toward the through hole 431a when located in the intermediate first extended state.

The link member 430 is formed from two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the respective ends of a first link member 431 and a second link member 432.

The first link member 431 is bent into a generally doglegged shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cam member 422, and has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side, and a cylindrical connecting protrusion 431c protruding toward the back side on the other end side. , a plate-like protrusion 431b protruding to a position facing the above-mentioned curved wall portion 411e, and a cylindrical sliding protrusion 4 protruding toward the front side of the bent portion.
31d.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the pivot pin 411d is inserted as described above. 1st
The link member 431 is rotatably held relative to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 with the pivot pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-like protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses displacement of the first link member 431 in the front-rear direction and prevents the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 disposed forward. It is formed as a plate-shaped body that protrudes in a curved manner with the hole 431a as an axis, and its protrusion length is set larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. This can prevent the back surface of the cam member 422 from colliding with the front surface of the first link member 431.

Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is set larger than the thickness (dimension in the direction of arrow FB) of the cam member 422. Furthermore, there is a slight gap (distance
) are placed apart from each other.

The cam member 422 is disposed in such a manner that it can be displaced in a region between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps, which are the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other, are the distance X1 described above.
It is set larger than 4.

As a result, the first link member 9
431 can be brought into contact with the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) with the protruding distal end surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b when bent. Therefore, the cam member 422 is placed between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
It is possible to prevent the displacement from being restricted due to being pinched.

The connecting protrusion 431c is a shaft portion connected to a second link member 432, which will be described later, and is inserted into a through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head is connected to the through hole 4 from the back side.
A screw or the like larger than 32a is fastened. Thereby, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f that protrudes toward the back side is formed at the edge of the through hole 431a. Wall part 431
f is a wall surface for fitting and holding a biasing spring SP1, which will be described later, on its outer peripheral surface.

The link-side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that locks the other end of the biasing spring SP1 fitted into the wall portion 431f, and is formed to protrude in a hook shape from the back side of one end of the first link member 431. .
Therefore, the biasing spring SP1 has one end engaged with the locking portion 412c of the back base 412, and the other end engaged with the link side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. Ru. Therefore, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 can be applied in a direction to rotate the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 acts, so that the drive motor K
The energy consumption of M1 can be suppressed.

The sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position spaced apart from the through hole 431a by approximately the same distance as the distance from the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the through hole 431a. Furthermore, the tip of the sliding protrusion 431d is inserted into the sliding groove 422c. That is, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed so that its outer diameter is smaller than the width dimension between the opposing sliding grooves 422c.

The sliding protrusion 431d is disposed inside the sliding groove 422c and is displaced by sliding inside the sliding groove 422c as the cam member 422 rotates. That is, by displacing the cam member 422, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be given later.

Furthermore, since the sliding projection 431d and the plate-like projection 431b are formed in close proximity to each other, the forward displacement of the first link member 431 is suppressed by the plate-like projection 431b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, there is no need to increase the depth of the sliding groove 422c formed in the cam member 422, and the cam member 422
The rigidity can be ensured without increasing the thickness of 2 in the front-rear direction.

The second link member 432 is formed into a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one side long, and is formed into a plate shape with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The second link member 432 is mainly formed with a through hole 432a formed to penetrate in the front-back direction on one end side, and a through hole 432b formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the other end side.

The through hole 432a is a hole for connecting with the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted into the through hole 432a. Thereby, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431.

The through hole 432b is connected to a lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, and can transmit displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432b is connected to a protrusion 48 of a rear case 482, which will be described later.
2a is a hole into which the projection 482a is inserted, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 can be connected to the second link member 432. It is rotatably held against the Therefore, the drive of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted through the link member 430 when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. FIG. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 49 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state. 400 is a front view. FIG. 50 shows the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state.
51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 52 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state. Furthermore, Figure 5
0 to 52, the rear base 412 is shown transparently. Moreover, in FIGS. 50 to 52, a part of the plate-shaped projection 431b and the curved wall portion 411e of the first link member 431 are illustrated with chain lines.

In addition, the retracted state means that the sliding protrusion 431d disposed inside the sliding groove 422c is
42c1, and the lower displacement member 440 is disposed on the lower side. The second extended state means that the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged between the opposing steps 442c3, and the lower displacement member 440
The tip side is placed at the top. The first extended state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged between the opposing step portions 442c2, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 at the first position is rotated by the transmission gear 421 to the other end side of the sliding groove 422c (step 422
c3 side) is positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the shaft portion 422a in rear view. In this case, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and positioned at the stepped portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 is in a state in which the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is located on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the through hole 431a on the one end side (rotated around the through hole 431a as an axis). The end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, the first link member 432
31 (through hole 432a side) is located on the right side in rear view (right side in FIG. 50). As a result, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432
The protrusions 472, 473 connected to
0 right side). As described above, since the distance between the vertically opposing sliding grooves 411a and 411b is larger on the right side in rear view than on the left side, the lower displacement member 44
0 is arranged with the longitudinal direction substantially parallel to the left-right direction. That is, it is placed in front of the front base 411.

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first extended state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by displacing the cam member 422.

In the first extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the retracted state position and displaced to the third position. As a result, the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is placed above the shaft portion 422a. Due to this rotational displacement, the first link member 43 is guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c.
The first sliding protrusion 431d is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is placed in the third driven position. Note that in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d is aligned with the stepped portion 422c of the sliding groove 422c.
It is guided between two opposing inner walls.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is moved from the retracted position to the upper left in rear view (FIG. 51). upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shapes of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, since the distance between the vertically opposing sliding grooves 411a and 411b becomes narrower from the right side to the left side in rear view, the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in front view (right side in FIG. 48). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Furthermore, in the first extended state, the collection port 411f is located on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the distal end side. That is, by sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440 during transition from the retracted state to the first extended state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is extended to the right side of the base member 410 when viewed from the front. It can be displaced without causing any damage. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable regions of other displacement accessories. Collisions with other displacement accessories can be suppressed.

In addition, since the recovery port 411f is located below one end of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, When the ball drops downward from the exit opening 471 during the firing operation, the ball can be sent to the recovery port 411f.

The displacement from the first extended state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second extended state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first extended state.

In the second extended state, the transmission gear 42 is shifted from the first extended state by the driving force of the drive motor KM1.
1 is rotated, and the cam member 422 is placed in a second position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the first extended position (third position). Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (step portion 422c3 side) is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Also, due to this rotational displacement, the sliding of the first link member 431 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c The moving protrusion 431d is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is arranged at the second driven position.In addition, in the second extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d
is guided between opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) changes from the position in the first extended state to approximately 30 degrees when viewed from the rear. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left in FIG. 52).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shapes of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the vertically opposing sliding grooves 411a and 411b becomes narrower from the right side to the left side in the rear view, so the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 49). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

In addition, in the second extended state, as in the first extended state, a collection port 41 is provided on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the tip side.
1f is positioned. That is, by sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440 during transition from the retracted state to the second extended state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is extended to the right side of the base member 410 when viewed from the front. It can be displaced without causing any damage. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement area that is different from the variable area of other displacement accessories, and it is possible to suppress collisions with other displacement accessories.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. The first link member 431 and the cam member 42 are shown in FIG. 53(a) in the retracted state, FIG. 53(b) in the first extended state, and FIG. 53(c) in the second extended state.
2 is a rear view of FIG. Note that in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c), the first
A portion overlapping with the link member 431 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), in the retracted state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431
are arranged between opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Furthermore, as described above, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position spaced apart from the through hole 431a by approximately the same distance as the distance from the through hole 431a to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, when a force to rotate about the axis of the through hole 431a is applied to the first link member 431 located in the retracted state,
The force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. Therefore, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the rotational force of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, in the retracted state, the first link member 431
The lower displacement member 440 connected to the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from being displaced.

As shown in FIG. 53(b), in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 43 of the first link member 431
1d, it is arranged between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state, when a force to rotate around the through hole 431a is applied to the first link member 431 located in the first extended state, the force is transferred from the sliding protrusion 431d to the cam member 422. Shaft portion 422a
can be made to act. Therefore, due to the rotational force of the first link member 431, the cam member 422
rotation can be suppressed. As a result, in the first extended state, the second link member 432
The lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from being displaced.

Here, at the first extended position, the lower displacement member 440 is at an intermediate position of displacement, and therefore, in order to maintain the stopped state, it is necessary to maintain the drive motor KM1 in the stopped state. Therefore, there is a problem in that energy consumption increases when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first extended position (intermediate position of displacement).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 4 of the first link member 431
31d is disposed between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c, so that the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from being displaced as described above. Therefore, even if the electric power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position halfway through its displacement, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 from increasing when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped mid-displacement.

As shown in FIG. 53(c), in the second extended state, the sliding protrusion 43 of the first link member 431
1d, it is arranged between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state and the first extended state, the through hole 4 is formed in the first link member 431 located in the second extended state.
When the force of rotation about the axis of the cam member 31a is applied, the force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding protrusion 431d. Therefore, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the rotational force of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, in the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed from being displaced.

In addition, each step portion 422c1, 422c2, 422c3 has a sliding protrusion 431d and a through hole 43.
1a, the width of the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced can be reduced. Therefore, in the retracted position, the first extended position, and the second extended position, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d, in which the first link member 431 can rotate around the axis of the through hole 431a, is reduced. can. Therefore, the gap in which the first link member 431 in each state can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a can be reduced. As a result, the amount by which the lower displacement member 440 swings in each state due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440 restrict the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiver 467. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. FIG. 54(a) shows the lower displacement unit 4 along the LIVa-LIVa line in FIG.
54(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 51. Note that in FIGS. 51 and 52, the rear base 412
54A and 54B show cross-sectional views of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state where the lower displacement unit 400 is not seen transparently.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the link member 43 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state
0 is disposed between the rear base 412 and the cam member 422. Therefore, the lower displacement member 44
0 can be suppressed from swinging back and forth. That is, the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected via the second link member 432 to a lower displacement member 440 that is constructed by combining a plurality of fixtures, so that the load of the lower displacement member 440 causes it to move in the front-rear direction. Since the cam member 422 is disposed at the front where there is a risk of the first link member 431 bending forward, it is possible to suppress the first link member 431 from bending forward. As a result, since the first link member 431 can be prevented from moving forward, the lower displacement member 44
0 can be suppressed from swinging back and forth.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state is arranged between the back base 412 and the cam member 422, as in the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth.

Furthermore, in the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is disposed on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, when the link member 430 is formed from two members, it is necessary to make the connecting part rotatable, so the rigidity becomes weaker than other parts and easily bends due to the gap, but there is a cam on the front side. Since the member 422 is arranged, bending of the connecting portion of the link member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Regulating the displacement of the displacement member by means of regulating the displacement of the driven member>
Next, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55(a) shows the lower displacement unit 4 along the LVa-LVa line in FIG.
55(b) is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the LVb-LVb line in FIG. 51, and FIG. 55(c) is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the LVc-LVc line in FIG. 52. 400 is a sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e are placed in different positions. Therefore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), it is possible to suppress the resistance acting on the cam member 422 from increasing. As a result, the start of displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 55(b) and 55(c), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state (
In the third position), a part of the cam member 422 is placed at a position that is separated by a predetermined gap on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the curved wall portion 411e. Thereby, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the axial side surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e, and the cam member 422 can be prevented from being displaced in the front direction.

Note that the surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (arrow F direction side) is
It is formed on a flat surface parallel to the back surface of No. 1 (see FIG. 45). Thereby, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from partially abutting the curved wall portion 411e, and to prevent force from being concentrated in one part. As a result, damage to the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), the lower displacement member 440 (on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction) is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the force component that causes the lower displacement member 440 to tilt in the front-rear direction is increased. Therefore, when the first extended state (third position) is set, the force in the longitudinal direction acting on the link member 430 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is greater than when the retracted state (first position) is set. be made larger. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 moves from the retracted state (first position) to the first position.
When the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the extended state (third position), a portion of the cam member 422 is displaced from the curved wall portion 41.
Since it is disposed on the front side of 1e, displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth between the first extended state (third position) and the second extended state (second position). It can be easily seen.

Note that the displacement of the link member 430 toward the back side can be regulated by disposing the link member 430 between the back base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings toward the back side, the link member 430 can be brought into contact with the back base 412 to restrict displacement of the link member 430. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth.

Further, the front base 411 includes a regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) that regulates the swinging of the link member 430 in a direction other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaceable between the first position and the second position. and is capable of displacing a first displacement area for displacing from the first position to a third position intermediate between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement area for displacing the second position from the third position, The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by the cam member 422 being displaced from the first position to the second position, and from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. a first driven region that displaces a third driven position intermediate between the third driven position and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position; When the cam member 422 is displaced through the second displacement region, the regulating means (curved wall portion 4
11e) restricts the swinging of the cam member 422 in a direction other than the displacement direction, so the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 is restricted using the same portion of the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e). be able to.

Therefore, since it is only necessary to form the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) at one location, the cam member 42
Compared to the case where regulating means for regulating displacement are formed on each of link member 2 and link member 430, the shape of the regulating means can be simplified and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Further, a means (curved wall portion 411e) restricts the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422.
Since the regulation can be performed using the same part of the first regulation means (curved wall portion 411e)
Since it is not necessary to form the link member 430, the cam member 422, and the restricting portions respectively, the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) can be made smaller accordingly.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second extended state, the projections 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b formed in the front base 411. (Collar C disposed on the protrusions 472, 473 (see FIG. 14)) moves toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the other end side (stepped portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 as the cam member 422 is displaced. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). As a result, when the other end side (step 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the back side by the protrusions 472, 473 (collars C disposed on the protrusions 472, 473), the cam member 422 There is a possibility that it will be rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction about 422a and come into contact with the link member 430.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be regulated by contacting the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 moves toward the shaft portion 422a.
It is possible to suppress rotational displacement in the front-back direction around . As a result, contact between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first extended state (third position), the displacement is regulated by the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 is not bent during the initial operation. It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance due to contact with the wall portion 411e. As a result, the initial operation of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described. FIG. 56(a) shows the L in FIG.
56(b) is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line VIa-LVIa, and FIG. 56(b) is a front view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state (second position). It is. In addition, in FIG. 56(b), the outer shape of the base member 410 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped projection 431b of the first link member 431. Thereby, rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction of displacing the lower displacement unit 400 from the retracted state (first position) to the second displacement state can be restricted. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be distributed to the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b, and the abutment portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431. Gear 421 and tooth surface 42
Damage to the tooth surface of 2b can be suppressed.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the first link member 431
The contact surface between the plate-shaped projection 431b and the cam member 422 is set in a direction perpendicular to the virtual line KS1 passing through the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 and the contact portion thereof. As a result, when a force is applied around the axis of the first link member 431 from the second displacement state to the retracted state (first position), the force is applied to the axis of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is possible to suppress the action in the direction of rotation. As a result, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the force acting on the first link member 431 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, the distal end side (the side opposite to the protrusion 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction) of the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the first
When the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the link member 431 is maximum, the transmission of force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, so the lower displacement member 440 is moved to the second position. It can be easily maintained in a displaced position.

Further, when the cam member 422 is placed in the second displacement state, the lower displacement member 440
Due to the load, a force is applied to rotate the first link member 431 around the axis of the through hole 431a. In this case, a force PW1 (see FIG. 56(b)) in which the end of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-like protrusion 431b and the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56(b)),
The inner wall of the second sliding groove 422c is pushed out from the sliding projection 431d, and the cam member 422 is pushed out from the shaft portion 4.
The force PW2 (see FIG. 56(b)) in the direction of rotation around the axis of 22a acts in a direction that cancels each other out. As a result, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the force exerted by the first link member 431 can be suppressed.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. 57(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 60(a) and (b) show the lower displacement member 4
40 is a front view.

Note that in FIG. 60(a), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 60(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently. The state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and a case member 480 and the base member 470. It is formed mainly of a transmission mechanism 460 disposed displaceably therebetween, and a decorative member 450 formed to cover the front and rear of a case member 480.

The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude toward the back side on one end side, and a standing wall 471a that stands from the edge on the other end side to the front side. , a protruding wall 477 protruding from the upper end of the center portion toward the front side in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 57) in an upside-down U-shape; A rack gear 476 provided, shaft portions 474 and 475 protruding to the front side, a rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the back surface of one end of the base member 470, and a vertical center portion of the base member 470. and an opening 479 which extends from one end to the other end and is recessed.

The protrusions 472 and 473 fit into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 as described above.
This is a connecting portion that is inserted into and connects the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411. Therefore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between opposing inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

The standing wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the facing front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481 described later is attached to the base member 470,
The vertical dimensions are set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The shaft portions 474, 475 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of transmission gears 462, 463 of a transmission mechanism 460, which will be described later, and rotatably hold the transmission gears 462, 463.
It is formed into a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole.

The rack gear 476 has a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465, which will be described later. As a result, the movable rack 464, which will be described later, slides and displaces with respect to the base member 470.
Transmission gear 465 can be rotated.

The protruding wall 477 is configured so that when a ball thrown from a ball throwing unit 600 (to be described later) is received in front of the base member 470 through an opening 451a of the decorative member 450, the ball moves toward the lower displacement member 440.
This is a wall surface for preventing the ball from falling to the outside of the ball, and the space between the opposing wall portions formed in a substantially U-shape is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball.

The wiring locking part 478 is a member for locking a flexible wiring (not shown) to a control board disposed on the back side of the base member 470, and connects one end of the flexible wiring to the base member 470. It is attached to the back side of the base member 470 via the. Thereby, even if the lower displacement member 440 is disposed so as to be displaceable with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to suppress the flexible wiring from becoming entangled.

Further, the wiring locking portion 478 includes a projection 478a projecting in a columnar shape on the back side. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that protrudes further to the back side than the link member 430 connected to the back side, and is set to a distance that allows the projection 478a to come into contact with the front surface of the back base 412. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging rearward, and the link member 430
Collision with the rear base 412 can be suppressed.

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the sliding direction of the movable rack 464 disposed on the front side, and a guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464, which will be described later, is inserted inside.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member disposed in front of the base member 470, and includes a transmission gear 461.
, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a movable motor KM2 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463, and which is slidably disposed in front of the base member 470. A rack 464 , a transmission gear 465 rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464 and meshed with a rack gear 476 , and a transmission gear 465 of the movable rack 464 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 . a rack 466 disposed so as to be slidable in the front;
The rack 466 mainly includes a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466.

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted into the shaft hole, and when the drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 while being connected to the drive motor KM2, the base member 470 will be placed in

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 have the shaft portion 474 of the base member 470 in the shaft hole.
475 is inserted and rotatably retained on the base member. In addition, transmission gears 461 to 46
3 are gear trains in mesh with each other, and when the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2, the terminal transmission gear 463 is rotated.

The movable rack 464 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b projecting in a cylindrical shape from the front side, and upwardly projecting from one end side of the upper end surface. an abutment plate 464c, a guide plate 464d protruding from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and a rack guide portion 464e protruding to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d;
It is formed mainly with a collision part 464f protruding from the other end downward.

The rack gear 464a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, the base member 4
By arranging the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in mesh with each other at the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by driving the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion on which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and the transmission gear 46
It is formed into a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the shaft hole of No. 5.

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that comes into contact with a distribution member 540 of a distribution unit 500, which will be described later, and displaces the distribution member 540. That is, the distributing member 540 can be displaced by displacing the movable rack 464. Note that the manner in which the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 come into contact will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-shaped body inserted into the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the direction of displacement of the movable rack 464 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 4 is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.
64 can be displaced along the direction in which the opening 479 extends. Note that in this embodiment,
Since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

The rack guide portion 464e is a projecting wall for regulating the displacement direction of the rack 466, which will be described later, and is provided to protrude from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f comes into contact with a protrusion 492b of a displacement member 492, which will be described later, so that the displacement member 492
This is a wall portion that displaces the movable rack 464, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the movable rack 464. Further, the collision portion 464f is formed such that the other end thereof is inclined. As a result, the protrusion 4 of the displacement member 492
92b can be displaced by sliding along its inclined surface.

The rack 466 is formed from a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular in front view, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the other end toward the back side, and a shaft portion 466b that protrudes toward the front side. two sliding plates 466c, and a recessed portion 466 recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.
d.

Rack gear 466a is meshed with transmission gear 465 attached to movable rack 464.
As a result, when the rack 466 is placed in front of the movable rack 464, when the movable rack 464 slides, the transmission gear 465 rotates with the sliding displacement, and driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. . Therefore, rack 466 can be displaced relative to movable rack 464.

The shaft portion 466b is a projection inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving part 467 can be held rotatably.

The sliding plate 466c is a projection inserted into an opening 481a of the front case 481, which will be described later, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. This allows the transmission gear 46 to be connected to the rack 466.
When the driving force is transmitted from 5 and the rack 466 is displaced relative to the movable rack 464,
The direction of displacement of the rack 466 can be defined in the direction in which the opening 481a extends.

When the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the recessed part 466d is in a state in which the rack guide part 464e is arranged inside. As a result, the transmission gear 4 is connected to the rack 466.
When the driving force is transmitted from 65 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the direction of displacement of the rack 466 can be defined in the direction in which the rack guide portion 464e extends.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, by forming the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 rotates while sliding in the left-right direction, depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, the state of engagement between the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight, and the transmission From gear 465 to rack 46
There was a risk that the driving force would not be properly transmitted to the 6.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the portion that defines the displacement direction of the rack 466 is
6c and the opening 481a, the recessed part 466d, and the rack guide part 464e, so when the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440 is changed, the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466
It is possible to suppress changes in the occlusal state of the teeth. As a result, the transmission of drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 can be prevented from being inhibited.

Further, the sliding plate 466c is formed to protrude from two places in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 57(a)) of the rack 466, and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) At the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most extended with respect to the movable rack 464), it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57).

Here, at the displacement end position, since the ball receiver 467 disposed on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) as described later, the ball receiver disposed on one end side of the rack 466 The other end of the rack is likely to be displaced due to the inertial force caused by the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, a load is easily applied to the meshing surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466
There was a risk of damage.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is
At the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most extended with respect to the movable rack 464), it is disposed below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57), so that the ball receiver 467 performs the firing operation ( When the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 engage with each other, the rack 466 can be prevented from being displaced when the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 engage with each other. As a result, damage to the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 can be suppressed.

The ball receiving part 467 is a part that holds a game ball, and is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed so that the ball can be received in the inner part of the U-shape. That is, the inside of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball can be placed inside the ball receiving portion 467. In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 has a shaft hole 467b that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape,
It is formed mainly with leg portions 467a that protrude downward from the lower outer circumferential surface.

As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for rotatably holding the ball receiving portion 467 on the rack 466, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. Further, after the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, a biasing spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft of the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. Ru. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rack 466 in a state where it is biased clockwise in a front view. Note that a detailed description of the aspect of the ball receiving portion 467 will be given later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that urges the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the urging spring SP2, and with the U-shaped open portion of the ball receiving portion 467 facing upward, the tip thereof faces the front side described later. It is set at a position where it comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481. Thereby, rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 can be restricted.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and back of the base member 470, and
It mainly includes a front case 481 arranged on the front side of 0 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 481 is formed into a rectangular and horizontally elongated plate shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction at approximately the middle position in the direction of gravity, a bottom wall portion 481b that protrudes from the lower end surface on the back side, and a bottom wall portion 481b that is formed protrudingly from the lower end surface on the back side. It is formed mainly with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above, the base member 470
When the front case 481 is disposed, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted inside.

The bottom wall portion 481b is formed to protrude from the lower end of the front case 481 toward the back side, and extends in the left-right direction. Furthermore, when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b.

The back case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the back side of the base member 470, and has a laterally elongated rectangular outer shape smaller than the outer shape of the base member 470 when viewed from the front. Further, the back case 482 includes a protrusion 482a that projects toward the back side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b, the tip of the protrusion 482a is inserted into the through hole 432b.
The back case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotatably connected by fastening a screw or the like whose head is larger than the inner diameter of the back case 482 and the second link member 432.

The decorative member 450 is formed into an external shape that resembles a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 includes a front side decorative part 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a back side decorative part 452 arranged on the back side of the back case 482.
It is formed mainly by Note that in this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

The front decoration part 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481. This makes it possible to make the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front decorative part invisible to the player.

The back side decoration part 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front side decoration part 451. Thereby, the member arranged on the back side of the front side decoration part 451 from above the back side decoration part 452 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, a displacement member 492 is disposed on the same plane as the front decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is formed mainly of a shaft portion 492a that projects toward the back side and a protrusion 492b.

The shaft portion 492a is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be rotatably connected to the front case. Also, the shaft portion 492 inserted into the shaft hole 481c
A biasing spring SP3 is disposed on the distal end side of a. Thereby, the displacement member 492 can be placed in a biased state. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be given later.

The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force rotating around the axis of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 as the movable rack 464 is displaced.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) displaceably disposed on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving part 467 (displacement member) can hold a game ball. In addition, since the displacement member 492 is formed to be ejectable and can be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

That is, when a game ball is launched from the ball receiver 467, the lower displacement member 440 is moved by the weight of the game ball.
For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in a direction that offsets the change in the center of gravity position due to the firing of the game ball, the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the center of gravity position is adopted. The occurrence of rattling can be suppressed. In addition, when a game ball is fired from the ball receiver 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction due to the firing of the game ball. When a configuration in which the lower displacement member 440 is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to reaction.

Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is placed in the second displacement state, a force PW1 in a direction that causes the cam member 422 to rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56(b)) and the force PW2 (see FIG. 56(b)) in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a act in directions that cancel each other out, and the cam member 422 is acted upon by the first link member 431. Rotation due to force can be suppressed. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be arranged in a stable state. Therefore, when a game ball is fired from the ball receiving part 467 of the lower displacement member 440 in the second displacement state position, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings due to the inertia caused by the game ball's firing. can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 is displaced by the collision portion 464f colliding with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. . That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving part 467 is
It can also be used as a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, and its wobbling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by a sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is moved in accordance with the detection result. It is not necessary to control the drive unit 492 by a driving means, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467 can be ensured.

Next, the transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. Figure 6
1 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. It is. 64(a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that the first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is located approximately in the center of the base member 470 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 61). The second position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is placed below the protruding wall 477 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 62). The third position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the right end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction.

In addition, in FIGS. 61 to 64, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 48
1 is seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated with a chain line. Further, FIGS. 64(a) and (b) sequentially illustrate the transition state immediately before displacement to the third position, and FIG. 64(c) illustrates the lower displacement member 440 in the third position.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the first position of the lower displacement member 440, the movable rack 464 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Further, in the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 overlap in the front-rear direction. That is, like the movable rack 464, the rack 466 is also located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at approximately the center position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

In the first position, the movable racks 464 and 466 are connected to the base member 470, as described above.
are gathered at the left end in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 rotates while sliding (displaces from the retracted state to the first and second extended states), the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged near the rotating shaft. It is desirable that the

According to this embodiment, since the transmission mechanism 460 that displaces the ball receiving part 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superimposed in the front and back (two-stage rack), the center of gravity of the transmission mechanism 460 is shifted by sliding the front base 411. It can be brought closer to the grooves 411a, 411b side (the rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the retracted state position to the first and second extended state positions as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the lower displacement member 440
The driving force for rotationally displacing 0 can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. As a result, transmission gear 462 and transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted from the rack gear 464a meshing with the transmission gear 463 to the movable rack 464, and the movable rack 464 is slid to the right with respect to the base member 470.

When the movable rack 464 is slid, the movable rack 46
A transmission gear 465 disposed at the base member 470 is rotated by a rack gear 476 of the base member 470. As a result, driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2, similarly to the displacement from the first position to the second position. Note that since the transmission of drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467
7 is released from the contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481, and is rotationally displaced around the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2 disposed on the shaft portion 466b. .

To explain in detail, in the first and second positions (the state in which the ball receiving part 467 is arranged on the left side in front view from the ball receiving part 467 in the third position), the tip of the leg part 467a of the ball receiving part 467 is It is brought into contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481, and rotation clockwise in the front view around the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 is restricted.

On the other hand, when the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the bottom wall portion 48
The standing wall 4 of the bottom wall portion 481b and the base member 470 is disposed on the right side of the end portion of the base member 481b when viewed from the front.
It is arranged inside the recessed part 481b1 formed between the opposing parts 71a and 71a. Therefore, the ball receiving part 46
7 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. When the ball receiving part 467 is rotated in the third position, the tip of the leg part 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall part 481b, and rotation of the ball receiving part 467 about the shaft hole 467b is restricted. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. Note that, hereinafter, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position will be referred to as a firing operation.

Further, the ball receiving part 467 is provided with a recessed part 481b1 that is recessed in the orbital region when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). , recess 4
81b1, and is formed so that its posture can be changed by engaging the leg portion 467a with the recess 481b1. Therefore, the structure for changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is simplified. can be converted into

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid to the right in front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and the projection 492 of the displacement member 492
collides with b. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving part 467 is rotationally displaced, and the displacement member 492 is also rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving part 467 performs a firing operation and the ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter, so that the lower displacement member 440
The force that causes the displacement member 492 to swing and the inertia force that causes the displacement member 492 to rotate can be applied in opposite directions. As a result, when the ball is ejected from the inside of the lower displacement member 440, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging.

Next, referring to FIG. 65, the operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. Figure 65
(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. Note that FIGS. 65(a) to (c)
In the following, transition states in which a ball is received into the ball receiving portion 467 are sequentially illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 65A to 65C, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated with a chain line.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 65(a) to (c), the horizontal direction when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the symbol H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first tension state. The horizontal direction in the extended state is illustrated with the symbol of a virtual line H2. Further, the angle at which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted state position to the first extended state position is shown with the symbol angle θ. Note that the virtual line H1, the virtual line H2, and the angle θ are also illustrated in the figures after FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving part 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is in the first position. By displacing the game ball T1 to the opening 451a formed in the front decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440, the game ball T1 is thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. The game ball T1 thrown into the opening 451a is thrown inside the protruding wall 477, and then into the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the game ball T1 is thrown into the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 44
0 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, since the ball receiving part 467 is arranged below the protruding wall 477, the game ball T1 thrown inside the projecting wall 477 is transferred to the inside of the ball receiving part 467. Can throw the ball. By receiving the game ball T1 in the ball receiving part 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced in accordance with the operation of the ball receiving part 467.

As shown in FIG. 65(c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiver, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. As a result, with the game ball T1 placed in the ball receiving portion 467, the first
The ball receiving portion 467 can be placed at the position.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member whose one side is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member. According to this gaming machine, in addition to an effect in which the base member is displaced between an extended position where the base member is extended into the game area and made visible to the player and a retracted position where the base member is retreated from the game area, the base member is It is possible to perform an effect in which the displacement member is displaced in a state where it is placed in the extended position.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is disposed on the base member so that it can be displaced, so when the displaceable member is displaced, the backlash of the base member relative to the base member is caused with one side as the dead center. There was a problem in that sticking easily occurred. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximum, and the base member is likely to wobble due to the influence of inertial force.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts to be displaced from the second position;
The configuration is configured such that the displacement starts from a first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position, and at least the lower displacement member 440 is in a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410. In the arranged state (for example, the first extended state in which the lower displacement member 440 extends into the gaming area and is visible to the player), the lower displacement member 440 of the base member starts to be displaced from the first position. Shake can be suppressed. That is, the first position is lower than the second position.
Since the position is close to one side of the lower displacement member, by setting this first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiver 467, the lower displacement member 440 transfers the weight of the ball receiver 467 to the base member 410. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 440 can be kept closer to the dead center when it rattles, and the influence of inertial force when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be made less likely to act on the lower displacement member 440. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

Furthermore, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) while slidingly displacing. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced with the game ball T1 disposed far from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is likely to be generated on the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to the inner wall of the ball receiving part 467. A collision sound is generated due to the collision between the game ball T1 and the game ball T1.
Otherwise, there was a problem that the ball receiving part 467 was damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position after the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving part 467, so the game ball T1 can be moved around the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440. It can be placed nearby (closer to). Therefore, the game ball T is attached to the lower displacement member 440.
When the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) in a state where the ball T1 is received, it is possible to suppress the centrifugal force from being generated on the game ball T1. As a result, when the game ball T1 and the ball receiving part 467 collide, it is possible to suppress generation of a collision sound or damage to the ball receiving part 467.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 is a transmission mechanism 4 that operates the ball receiver 467.
60 is formed by a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear), and a rack 466 (rack member), and a ball receiving portion 467 is provided on the rack 466, so that the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started from the first position. In this case, the weight of not only the rack 466 but also the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 should be kept close to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 wobbles with respect to the base member 410). I can do it. As a result, shaking of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

Further, in a state where the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by placing the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 can be adjusted to the sliding groove 4 of the front base 411.
11a, 411b side (rotation shaft side of the lower displacement member 440). Therefore, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the retracted state position to the first and second extended state positions,
By setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the driving force when rotationally displacing the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the ball payout operation will be described. Figures 66(a) to (c)
2 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. Note that in FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 in the ball discharging operation are sequentially illustrated. In addition, FIGS. 66(a) to (c
), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated with a chain line. Further, the ball discharging operation is an operation of discharging the game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the exit opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) to (c), the dispensing operation of dispensing the ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 sequentially displaces the lower displacement member 440 from the first position to the third position. It is done by

That is, by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving part 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 is moved inside the ball receiving part 467. Along with the displacement, it is transported to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 that has been moved to the exit opening 471 side is applied with inertia force toward the exit opening 471 side by the sliding displacement of the ball receiving part 467 and the firing operation of the ball receiving part 467 in the third position, and the game ball T1 is moved to the exit opening 471 side. It is popped out from inside the section 467. Thereby, the ball can be ejected from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Here, when the ball receiving part 467 (displacement member) starts to be displaced from the first position, the displacement direction is a direction away from the position of the lower displacement member 440, so the ball receiving part 467 is in the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 must be connected to the transmission gear 465 ( Rack gear 466a to which the pinion gear (pinion gear) is meshed
The side portion is directed toward one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be kept closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 wobbles with respect to the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiver 467 Shaking of the lower displacement member 440 when it is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

The ball receiving part 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction) and is formed so that its posture can be changed when the third position is reached. While it is possible to easily maintain the state held by the portion 467 and prevent the game ball T1 from falling off from the ball receiving portion 467, the second
When the position is reached, the game ball T1 is moved to the ball receiving portion 467 by utilizing the change in the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467.
It can be easily dispensed from the inside.

Note that when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiver 467 shown in FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c) is released. When performing the operation, the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 4
The game ball paid out to the outside of 40 is thrown to the upper part of ball holder 710 of rotation unit 700.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, a discharge operation when two or more balls are thrown into the interior of the lower displacement member 440 will be described. Figures 67(a) to (c) and Figures 68(a) to (c)
) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c) and FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c), transition states of the ejection operation are illustrated in order. 43(a) to (c) and FIG. 44(a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 The outline of is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 67(a) to (c), when two or more balls are consecutively thrown from the distribution unit 500 (described later), the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467.

That is, by displacing the ball receiving part 467 from the first position to the second position, the first game ball T1 can be thrown inside the ball receiving part 467, and the second game ball T2 can be thrown to the inside of the ball receiving part 467. It can be held inside the protruding wall 477 in contact with the game ball T1 (see FIG. 67(b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position, the second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467.

Here, in a game machine that displaces the ball received in the ball receiving part 467 at the second position to the third position by the displacement of the ball receiving part 467, if a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. There is a possibility that more than the prescribed number of game balls may be thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that the game balls exceeding the prescribed number may cause problems. For example, the transmission mechanism 4 that drives the ball receiver 467 when the game balls exceed the specified number
60 and get caught in the moving parts, potentially causing damage. Alternatively, game balls exceeding the specified number may be placed outside the game area (for example, on the back side of the game board 13 or on the back case 3).
There was a risk that the liquid could leak out to the inside of the 00.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving part 467 is formed to be movable from the second position to the first position opposite to the throwing direction of the ball. The orbital area can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the sorting member 540 and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the expanded trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 will prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from being thrown. It can be accepted into the orbital region. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number,
It can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiver 467 and from flowing out of the gaming area, and as a result, the game balls exceeding the specified number Problems caused by balls can be made less likely to occur.

In addition, the ball receiver 467 is capable of receiving and holding one game ball T1 thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, at the second position, and also in the direction from the second position to the first position (second direction). ) so that it can be displaced at least by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball,
After receiving one game ball at the second position, move the ball receiving part 467 from the second position to the third direction (
By displacing the game balls in excess of the specified number in the orbital area (first direction) of the ball receiving part 467 (
The ball can be thrown to a region (in the first direction from 467 of the ball receiving portion). Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, the ball receiver 467 holds the first game ball T1, and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiver 467. Game ball T after the ball
2 can be separated. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving part 467 in the third position direction (first direction), while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the first game ball T1,
It becomes possible to discharge only the game balls T2 after the number of balls from the orbital area.

In addition, in the case where the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball, and then the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the third position and the game ball T1 is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, the second ball is game ball T2
falls onto the top of the rack 466, and the second game ball T2 hits the ball receiver 467 and the transmission gear 465.
There is a possibility that the second game ball T2 may not be ejected to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the receiving operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving part 467 is performed after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving part 467 at the second position, and then at the first position opposite to the exit opening 471. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second game ball T2 from being unable to be ejected to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is equipped with an accessory that performs a discharging operation to discharge a game ball thrown into the accessory, the movement of the member that discharges the ball (in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 467) is performed at a position that receives the ball. (second position) and the ball ejecting position (third position), when two or more game balls are thrown into the accessory, the ball is ejected from the member that ejects the balls. Exit (output opening 471)
However, in this embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the first game ball T2 on the opposite side to the exit opening 471. By displacing the ball to the position, the second game ball T2 can be thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 68(a) to (c), after throwing the second game ball T2 onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467, the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position before the firing operation. By letting
The game ball T2 can be rolled toward the exit opening 471 side while being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be ejected from the exit opening 471.

In this case, the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion of the ball receiver 467 is located above the center position of the second game ball T2 thrown onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467 (upper part of FIG. 68(a)). will be placed in Further, in a state where the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is arranged at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Furthermore, since the right side of the U-shape (right side in FIG. 68(a)) of the ball receiving part 467 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end of the leg part 467a, the second game ball The outer surface of T2 can be brought into contact with leg portion 467a.

In addition, since the leg portion 467a is tilted at approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is in contact with the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side). be touched.
Thereby, when rolling the second game ball T2 toward the exit opening 471 side, it is possible to generate a force to lift the second game ball T2 upward on the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a. Therefore,
The frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced. As a result, when rolling the second game ball T2 toward the exit opening 471 side, it is possible to suppress the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped.

In other words, the leg portion 467a protrudes from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the protruding tip thereof aligns with the trajectory of the ball receiving portion 467. Since it is formed so that it can come into contact with the lower half of the game ball thrown into the area (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2), the ball receiving part 467 moves from the first position to the third position (first direction). When the game ball is displaced to , the game ball can be moved while pushing its lower half with the leg portions 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily ejected from the orbital region of the ball receiver 467.

In addition, a leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held in the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 (the second and subsequent game balls T2). By intervening, it is possible to secure an interval between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 by the protruding length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the first game ball T1 is held by the ball receiving portion 467, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

Furthermore, by engaging with the recess 481b1, the leg portion 467a serves both the role of changing the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 and the role of moving the game ball while pushing its lower half, so the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. This can reduce product costs.

Further, since the size of the recessed portion 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the size of the recessed portion 481b1 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the size of the recessed portion 481b1 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (i.e., the size of the recessed portion 481b1). When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved as the ball receiver 467 is displaced in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily ejected from the orbital region.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440
A collection port 411f is disposed below the emission opening 471 of the image forming apparatus. Therefore, the game ball T2 discharged in the retracted state is thrown to the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the first extended state, the recovery port 411f is located below the emission opening 471. Further, the recovery port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the ejected game ball T2 is thrown to the collection port 411f.

That is, the recovery port 411f is located on the first direction side (erected wall 471a side) of the base member 470.
Since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed vertically below the end portion of
The game balls (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2) that are moved as the ball moves in the third position direction (first direction) and are ejected from the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 are collected through the opening of the collection port 411f. can be accepted and collected from

Further, the opening of the collection port 411f is vertically aligned with the end of the base member 470 in the first direction (on the standing wall 471a side) at least in each of the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state. It is placed in the downward direction. As a result, even if the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted position, the first extended state, or the second extended state, the game ball (i.e., the second ball) that is ejected from the orbital area of the ball receiver 467 Subsequent game balls T2) can be received and collected through the opening of the collection member.

67(a) to (c) and FIG. 68(a) to (c) when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally to the imaginary line H1). When performing the discharging operation of the ball receiving part 467 shown in FIG.
The ball is thrown into the recovery port 411f. In addition, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 440 The game ball paid out to the outside of 440 is thrown to the collection port 411f as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is ejected from the exit opening 471 will be described. 69(a) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68(b), and FIG. 69(b) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68(a). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the firing operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiver 467 on the side of the standing wall 471a, and the exit opening is 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In this case, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a, and when the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 are brought into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily ejected from the exit opening 471. Moreover, the ball receiving part 467 can be returned to the state before the rotation operation by using the repulsive force when the ball receiving part 467 is brought into contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when ejecting the game ball T2 thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 46
It is possible to prevent the first game ball T1 held at 7 from falling off.

Further, in the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third position (first direction).
The concave portion 481b is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when the ball is displaced to
1 is provided with an erected wall 471a located on the first direction side, and the second and subsequent game balls thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 are disposed as the ball receiving part 467 is displaced in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved, it comes into contact with the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving part 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving part 467 can be regulated, so that the first game ball T1 can be moved. While maintaining the state held by the ball receiving part 467, only the second and subsequent game balls can be easily ejected from the orbital area.

That is, since the standing wall 471a is erected at a height from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the erecting tip that is lower than the radius of the game ball, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the legs, the lower half of the game ball T2 comes into contact with the standing wall 471a,
The game ball can easily climb over the standing wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiving part 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving part 467 and the standing wall 471a).
Since the reaction force can be applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving part 467, it is possible to restrict the attitude change of the ball receiving part and prevent the first game ball held by the ball receiving part 467 from falling off. It can be suppressed.
As a result, while maintaining the state in which the first game ball is held by the ball receiving portion 467, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the game area.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467, no game ball is interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving part 467, so the leg Section 467a
The attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed by being engaged with the recessed portion 481b1. As a result, the first game ball T1 (that is, the ball receiving part 4
67) can be easily discharged from the ball receiving part 467.

Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. 70(a) is a top view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 70(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 500. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the sorting unit 500 includes a base plate 520 formed in a plate-shaped body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a space between the base plate 520 that is attached to the front side of the base plate 520 and that faces the base plate 520. a path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of downstream paths through which balls can flow; and a base plate 52.
A distribution member 540 is rotatably attached to the back side of the base plate 520 and an extension is attached to the end face of the base plate 520 to extend the downward flow path of the ball formed between the opposing base plate 520 and the route forming member 510. The path member 530 is mainly formed.

The base plate 520 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 523 protruding toward the back side, a first opening 521 formed through the shaft portion 523 in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion 523, and a radius smaller than the first opening 521. A second opening 522 penetratingly formed in a large arc shape, a rolling portion 525 formed in a U-shaped cross section with an open upper end side on the side surface of the upper end and extending in the left-right direction, and a hook-shaped protrusion on the back side. It is formed mainly with a locking part 524.

The shaft portion 523 is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of a distribution member 540, which will be described later, and is inserted into the distribution member 54.
0 to the base member in a rotatable state, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings into which a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 542 of a distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted, and have a width larger than the thickness of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542. It is formed. Further, the distribution member 540 is rotatably attached to the base plate 5
20, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are formed to have a larger arc length than the circumferential dimension of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when viewed from the front.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with a locking portion 544 formed on the distribution member 540, and one end of the biasing spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling portion 525 is a bottom surface on which the ball rolls, and is formed to be inclined downward toward one end on the left side in rear view (left side in FIG. 70(b)) and has a U-shaped curved shape. It is formed larger than the outer shape of a sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be prevented from stopping at the rolling portion, and the ball can be rolled toward one end.

Further, the rolling portion 525 includes a plurality of protrusions 525 that protrude from the front and rear sides toward the inside of the U-shape.
b, and an opening 525a that opens toward the back side at one end.

The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear sides at regular intervals, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at alternate positions when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can collide with the protrusion 525b, so that the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down.

Here, as described above, the ball is thrown to the ball receiver 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 with the ball receiver 467 placed in the first position (Figs. 65(a) and 65(b) )reference).
Therefore, when the ball throwing speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling part 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3 is increased, the game ball is thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 440 before the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the second position. There is a risk that it will be done.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b are formed to protrude from the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3, and the game balls passing through the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3 are Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third ball throwing route KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required when the ball receiver 467 is displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position) can be lengthened accordingly.
7 can surely receive the game ball. Further, since the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be reduced, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced, and product costs can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed to be open to the back side of one end of the rolling portion 525, and its outer shape when viewed from the back is larger than the size of a sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling toward one end of the rolling portion 525 is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in a rectangular and vertically elongated plate shape with a horizontal width smaller than that of the base plate 520, and has a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball on the back side. By forming the distance between the opposing sides to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, a plurality of downward flow paths for the spheres are formed inside the sphere.

The path forming member 510 has a first opening 511 that opens on the upper end surface, a first ball throwing path KR1 formed between opposing side walls of the first opening 511, and a second ball throwing path KR1 connected to the first ball throwing path KR1. KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 that open on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3, are formed to penetrate in the front and back direction. A plurality of openings 514, 515, 516 and openings 514, 515, 5
16, and a fourth opening 517 that opens to the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth ball throwing path KR4.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing balls thrown from a ball throwing unit 600 (described later) to flow into the distribution unit, and is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510, and its outer shape is smaller than that of the ball. Formed large. Further, the first opening 511 is connected to the ball throwing unit 60.
0, so that balls thrown from the ball throwing unit 600 can flow into the ball throwing unit 600.

The first ball throwing path KR1 is a path through which the ball flowing from the first opening 511 flows down between the opposing base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed by extending downward. Further, the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed to extend approximately one third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and its downstream end is connected to the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3. be done. That is,
A ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 is configured to be able to flow down the second ball throwing path KR2 or the third ball throwing path KR3.

As described above, the second ball throwing route KR2 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball throwing route KR1, and its downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when a ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 flows down to the second ball throwing route KR2, the second opening 5
12 to the outside of the sorting unit 500.

The second opening 512 is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering the balls. Therefore, the balls discharged from the second opening are collected by the collection path. Moreover, the inside of the second opening 512 (second
A sensor device SE2 that detects passage of the game ball is arranged at the downstream end of the ball throwing path KR2. Therefore, by detecting the number of game balls passing through the third winning opening 82 with the sensor device SE1 and detecting the number of game balls passing through the second ball throwing path KR2 with the sensor device SE2, the third ball throwing The number of game balls passing through route KR3 can be detected.

That is, it is possible to detect whether a predetermined number of game balls (one ball) are stored upstream of the regulation plate 541, which will be described later, based on the difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third prize opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the number of balls passing through the second ball throwing route KR2 (sensor device SE2) is eight. If the number is 7,
It can be detected that one game ball is flowing down (storing) the third ball throwing path KR3.

As described above, the third ball throwing route KR3 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball throwing route KR1, and the downstream end thereof is connected to the third opening 513. That is, when a ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 flows down to the third ball throwing route KR3, the third opening 5
It is discharged from 13.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end side of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520 (the end side opposite to the opening 525a). Therefore, the balls ejected from the third opening 513 are transferred to the rolling portion 525.
The ball is thrown inside. That is, the ball thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 via the third opening 513.

The openings 514 to 516 are each formed on the back side of the third winning hole 82 formed on the game board 13, and the ball that wins the third winning hole 82 is thrown. That is, when a ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 enters the third winning opening 82, the ball is thrown into the distribution unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth ball throwing path KR4 is connected to the openings 514 to 516, and is connected to the openings 514 to 516.
The fourth opening formed in the lower end surface of the path forming member 510 is connected to the four paths. The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering the balls. Therefore, the ball won in the third prize opening 82 of the game board 13 is thrown to the fourth ball throwing path KR4 of the distribution unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

The extension path member 530 has a U-shaped cross section with an open bottom, and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the extended path member 530 is formed so that the inner diameter of the U-shape is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by being disposed above the rolling part 525 of the base plate 520, the ball thrown to the upper part of the rolling part 525 can be thrown inside the rolling part 525 and the extension path member 530, and , the balls rolling on the rolling portion can be prevented from falling from the rolling portion 525.

Further, the extension path member 530 is formed with protrusions 531 that are formed at regular intervals at the same positions in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. Thereby, similarly to the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be reduced.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one end long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The sorting member 540 includes a regulating plate 541 that is a plate-shaped body and projects from the front side.
It is formed mainly of a storage plate 542, a shaft hole 545 penetratingly formed on one upper end side, and a hook-shaped locking part 544 formed on the back side.

As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-back direction. The distribution member 540 is connected to the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520.
into the shaft hole 545, and insert a screw, etc. whose head is larger than the shaft hole from the back side into the shaft portion 523.
By fastening to the base plate 520, it is rotatably attached to the base plate 520.

The regulating plate 541 is disposed at a connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2 through the first opening 521 to prevent the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 from flowing into the second ball throwing path KR2. This plate member is formed to protrude toward the front side from the front end surface of the shaft hole 545, and the distance from the base plate 520 toward the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulating plate 541 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced around the axis of the shaft hole 545, the regulation plate 54
1 displacement area can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second ball throwing route KR2 through the second opening 522 and stores balls flowing down the second ball throwing route KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542. It is formed so as to protrude toward the front side from the front end face, and the protruding distance from the base plate 520 toward the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is formed to be curved into an arc centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the radius of the arc is larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulating plate 541. Therefore,
The storage plate 542 is formed at a position farther away from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541 is. Thereby, the regulation plate 541 can be made to protrude into the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second ball throwing path KR2.
Furthermore, the displacement area when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The protrusion 543 is a drive transmission member that applies rotational driving force to the distribution member 540 when collided with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above, and protrudes toward the other end of the distribution member 540. It is formed. That is, the protrusion 543 to which the driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to one end where the shaft hole 545 serving as the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is formed. Thereby, the force with which the abutting plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides can be reduced.

Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the abutting plate 464c can be reduced, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. Moreover, since the energy when the abutment plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision sound when the abutment plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide can be reduced. In addition,
A detailed manner of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

Further, a circularly bulging portion 543a is formed at a portion where the protruding tip of the protruding portion 543 contacts the abutting plate 464c. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the distribution member 5
When rotating and displacing 40, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 from increasing.

As described above, the locking portion 544 is connected to the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 by the biasing spring SP.
This is the part that locks 4. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a rotational force to the locking portion 524 side, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 540 from shaking due to vibrations of the Pachinko machine 10 or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the flow path of the balls of the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 73 is a sectional view of the distribution unit 500 taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 70(a). In addition, in FIG. 73, the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed at the storage position.

Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is the state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is placed on the second ball throwing path KR2. .

As shown in FIG. 73, in the first ball throwing path KR1, the lower end side of the downstream path is connected to the base plate 52.
It is tilted toward the center portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73) of 0, and the tilted portion is curved into a gentle S-shape. Further, the S-shaped curved tip portion is connected to the third ball throwing path KR3, and the second ball throwing path KR2 is tilted at the end of the first ball throwing path KR1 in a direction opposite to the direction in which the first ball throwing path KR1 is tilted. are connected in the same state.

As a result, by causing the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 to collide with the lower surface of the tilted part,
The downward direction of the ball can be directed from the direction of gravity to the direction in which the first ball throwing path KR1 is tilted.
Therefore, the ball can be caused to flow down toward the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 (the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3). Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 540 is not disposed, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 can be thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3.

Here, there is a downstream path along which the game ball flows, a first branch path and a second branch path that are branched from the downstream path, and a game ball that has flown down the downstream path is directed to either the first branch path or the second branch path. A game machine that distributes games is known.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed one ball at a time to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so the game balls flowing down the flow passage are distributed to the first branch passage. It is distributed equally (that is, half each) to the passage and the second branch passage. That is, there was a problem in that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage could not be changed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 467 is formed to be displaceable and receives game balls from the third ball throwing path KR3, and the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving part 467 comes into contact with the distribution member 540. Since the distribution member 540 is displaced by contacting and being displaced, the ball receiving portion 46
7, the number of game balls to be distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route can be changed. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 can be changed.

Note that the displacement of the distribution member 540 is determined by using the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467.
Since the distributing member 540 can be displaced, there is no need to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the sorting member 540. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled using position detection by a sensor device or drive by a drive means, reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member may decrease due to malfunction due to poor detection or control. However, according to this embodiment, the destinations to which balls are distributed by the distribution member 540 can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives game balls from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3, the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 is changed to the third destination in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467.
By switching to the ball throwing route, the game ball distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 can be reliably received by the displacement member.

Furthermore, in the conventional gaming machine, the game balls flowing down the flowing path are only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so that it is insufficient to provide players with interest.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is the third
In the state where the ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is set, the flow of game balls in the third is regulated, and in the state where the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path). Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) that allows the game ball to flow down in the third ball throwing route KR3 is provided, it is possible to provide interest to the player.

That is, when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is the third ball throwing route, the third ball throwing route KR3
When the game balls are stored in the third ball throwing route KR3 by regulating the flow of the game balls that have been distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, and when the destination of distribution by the regulating plate 541 is set to the second ball throwing route KR2, the third ball throwing route KR3
The game balls stored in the third ball throwing path KR3 can be allowed to flow down (released). As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream route) to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2,
It is possible to form an action of causing the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 to flow down (release). Furthermore, these storage and release operations can be performed alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, it is possible to provide interest to the player.

Moreover, since the regulating plate 541 (distributing means) and the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are provided with the distributing member 540 (integral member) formed integrally, the regulating plate 541 and the reservoir plate 542
In other words, when the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, they are two parts, so that the structure for operating them can be simplified and the reliability of the operation can be improved. The structure for operating the two parts becomes complicated and the reliability of the operation decreases.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as a single component, so the structure can be simplified accordingly, reducing product cost and improving operational reliability. be able to.

Further, the sorting member 540 has a storage position (first state position) and a regulation position (second state position).
When the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the regulation plate 5
41 is arranged at a position where the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position where the game balls are restricted from flowing down in the third ball throwing route KR3, and the distribution member 540 is placed at the position where the distribution member 540 is the distribution destination. In the state of being displaced to the position, the regulation plate 541 is placed in a position where the second ball throwing route KR2 is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is placed in a position that allows the game balls to flow down in the third ball throwing route. By displacing the sorting member 540 in two positions (storage position and regulation position), game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (flowing path) are transferred to the third ball throwing route KR3.
Or, in addition to the action of distributing to one side of the second ball throwing route, the action of temporarily stopping (storing) the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 and the flow of the stopped (stored) game balls. In addition, the storage and release operations can be performed alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, by simplifying the structure, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve operational reliability.

The sorting member 540 (integral member) is formed to be rotatable, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed to be able to move in and out of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path), and the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) By protruding toward KR3, the falling of game balls is restricted, and since the distribution member 540 is formed into an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis, the third ball throwing path KR3 is controlled so that the restriction plate 541 can come and go. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is arranged in such a manner that the side facing upstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is concave, the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3. In the initial state (i.e., the state in which only the distal end side of the flow state changing means is protruded into the passageway), the shape of the distal end side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in a direction that facilitates regulating the flow of game balls; The flow of game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 can be easily regulated.

Furthermore, in a state where the storage plate 542 is maximally protruded to the third ball throwing path and restricts the game balls from flowing down, the game balls can be held stably by the concave portion of the storage plate 542, so that it is possible to suppress the game balls from going wild.

The sorting unit 500 includes a biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) that applies a biasing force to the distributing member 540 (integral member) and biases the regulation plate 541 in the direction of protruding into the third ball throwing path (first branch path). ), and the distance from the regulating plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is the same as that of the regulating plate 541.
Since the distance from the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 to ) can be easily maintained.

In this case, since the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, when a falling game ball collides with the rotation axis, Because the distance from the storage plate 542 is large, even if the same impact force is applied, the storage plate 542
is likely to be retracted, the biasing direction of the biasing spring SP4 is such that the storage plate 542 is in the third ball throwing path KR.
3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from being recessed into the recess 519 by the biasing force.

In addition, the distribution member 540 (integrated member) rotates the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) in the direction of protruding into the third ball throwing path (first branch path) due to its own weight, so it The sorting member 540 can be easily maintained in a position where the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3 (ie, the storage position). Therefore, when a game ball collides, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the recess 519 by its own weight.

Furthermore, even if the biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) falls off, the distribution member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulating plate 541 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3 due to its own weight, and the game player goes to the third ball throwing path. It is possible to suppress the ball from flowing down.

Furthermore, the ball receiver 467 is provided with a biasing spring SP4 that applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2. 540 in a direction opposed to the direction of the biasing spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2, and the biasing force of the biasing spring , the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being changed inadvertently. In this case, after the distribution member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiver 467 and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4. Therefore, the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving part 467 is connected to the distribution member 540.
It can be made unnecessary to be in contact with the That is, the abutment plate 464c that interlocks with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distribution member 540. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described. Figure 74(a)
and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. Note that FIG. 74(a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the storage position and FIG. 74(b).
) respectively illustrate a state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the restriction position. In addition, the state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the regulation position means that the abutment plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 moves around the axis of the shaft hole 545. This is a state in which the regulating plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3 after being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), when the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position, the storage plate 542 is placed on the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is placed on the path forming member 51.
It is arranged inside a recess 518 formed in the wall on the back side of 0.

In this case, the distance L1 between the end of the tip of the storage plate 542 protruding inward of the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path KR3 that faces the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, a ball thrown from upstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first ball throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

Further, from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542, a first ball throwing path KR1 and a third ball throwing path KR
The distance dimension L2 to the connecting portion with 3 is set larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is reduced to 1.
It can be a ball. Note that, hereinafter, the state of the distribution unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 will be referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74(b), when the distribution member 540 is placed in the restriction position, the restriction plate 541 is placed at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3. , the storage plate 542 is disposed inside the recess 519 formed in the wall on the back side of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance L3 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 541 protruding inward of the first ball throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore,
The ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulation position and the storage position, the first ball throwing path K
A state in which a ball that is thrown R1 is thrown to a third ball throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third ball throwing path KR3, and a ball that is flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 is not allowed to flow into the third ball throwing path KR3. A state in which the ball is thrown to the second ball throwing route KR2 can be formed.

Therefore, by displacing one distribution member 540, when the ball is divided into two downstream paths from one downstream path, it is possible to reliably switch the downstream path of the ball to either one.

In addition, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on the second ball throwing route KR2, so that when the ball receiving section 467 is unable to receive game balls, It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being switched to the third ball throwing path.

Furthermore, the regulation plate 541 (distributing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path), and its appearance and retraction position is as follows.
Since it is an inner wall on the extension line in the downstream direction of the first ball throwing path KR1 at the downstream end, the regulating plate 541 can be made to protrude at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulation plate 541 starts to protrude into the downstream passageway or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passageway) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 541.

In addition, the regulation plate 541 (distributing means) is projected into the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branching path) to move the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) to the second ball throwing path ( Since the protruding direction of the regulating plate 541 is set to point toward the upstream end of the second ball throwing route KR2, the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 make a protruding action. When the game ball comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the regulation plate, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball throwing path KR along with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, the distribution to the second ball throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In this embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is arranged at a position farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541 is. may be placed in That is, the shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 is shown in FIG. 74(a).
The axis of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at a point P on the downstream side of the third ball throwing route KR3 shown in FIG. 74(b). In this case, the regulation plate 54 formed on the distribution member 540
1 and the storage plate 542 are arranged at the same positions as in this embodiment.

With the shaft hole 545 disposed at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulating plate 541 can be made faster than that of the storage plate 542 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the restriction position as described later, the restriction plate 541 can be quickly projected onto the flow path. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 from flowing into the third ball throwing path KR3 at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulation position to the storage position.

Further, in this case, the shape of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in front view is the point P
It is formed in an arc shape with the center at . Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the restriction position to the storage position (or the opposite), the displacement area of the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized. Further, the recesses 518 and 519 that receive the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 outside the third ball throwing path KR3 have a concave shape along the displacement locus of the regulation plate 541 and the regulation plate 541.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, a case will be described in which two or more balls are thrown from the ball throwing path when the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position. FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Further, from FIG. 75(a) to FIG. 76(b), transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced are sequentially illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 75(a) to 76(b), the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b), when the first game ball T1 is thrown to the first ball throwing route KR1 with the distribution member 540 placed in the storage position, as described above, , the game ball T1 is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

In this case, since the storage plate 542 is located downstream from the upper end of the third ball sending path KR3 by a distance between the radius and the diameter of the ball, some of the balls stopped at the upper part of the storage plate 542 but,
It is set in a state where it is projected toward the first ball throwing path KR1 side (see FIG. 75).

Therefore, as described above, the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed to be able to roll on the inner wall on the gravity direction side. The storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed to be able to move in and out of the third ball throwing path KR3 from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, so the game ball is not stored until the storage plate 542 starts protruding into the third ball throwing path KR3. The time required to reach a state where the flow of water can be regulated can be shortened. the result,
The distribution destination of the regulation plate 541 is from the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path) to the third ball throwing path KR
3, and when game balls are distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, the protrusion of the storage plate 542 can be easily made in time to regulate the flow of the game balls.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be able to protrude and retract from the third ball throwing path KR3, and in a state where it is maximally projected into the third ball throwing path KR3, a force component in the direction of the projection is applied from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when regulating the flow of the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the recess 519 due to the impact when the game balls collide.
Therefore, it is possible to easily control the flow of game balls.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(a) and (b), when the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first ball throwing route KR1 when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the game ball T2 is The ball is thrown in the direction from the first ball throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third ball throwing path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third ball throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

In this case, as described above, since the game ball T1 is in a state of protruding toward the first ball throwing path KR1 side, the game ball T2 is not thrown inside the third ball throwing path KR3, and the game ball T2 is not thrown inside the third ball throwing path KR3.
2, the game ball T2 can be thrown to the second ball throwing route KR2 without remaining inside the third ball throwing route KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the ball throwing on the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path) in the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path)
The inner wall on the side facing toward
The last game ball out of the specified number (1 ball) stored in the branch path) is sent to the third ball throwing route K.
Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side of R3, the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls, and then flowing down to the second ball throwing route KR2. It's easy to do.

In addition, among the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means the game ball located on the upstream side (on the opposite side to the regulation plate 541). Further, in this embodiment, the prescribed number is set to one ball. In this case, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the third ball throwing route KR3.

Further, as described above, the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) is such that the lower end side of the downstream path is tilted toward the center portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73), and the tilting The part is formed with a gentle S-shape. That is, since the downstream end of the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream path) is formed in the downstream direction of the upstream end of the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 is When colliding with the last game ball of the prescribed number of game balls stored in the throwing path, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball is different from the downstream direction of the upstream end of the third ball throwing path KR3. can be set. As a result, due to the repulsive force at the time of the collision, the trailing game ball jumps out from the upstream end of the third ball throwing route KR3, and is moved to the second ball throwing route KR2.
It is possible to suppress the inflow into the country.

Furthermore, since the upper end of the third ball throwing path KR3 is formed to be inclined in the direction of inclination of the lower end of the first ball throwing path KR1, the position where the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 is set in the upper hemisphere of the game ball T1. In addition, it can be set to the second ball throwing path KR2 side. Therefore, the rebound direction of the game ball T2 that collided with the game ball T1 can be set to the entrance (upper end) side of the second ball throwing path KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily thrown to the second ball throwing route KR2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball from stagnating in the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2.

In addition, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), and the flow of the game balls in the third ball throwing route KR3 is directed to the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means).
When the prescribed number (1 ball) of game balls is stored in the third ball throwing route KR3,
Since the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream path) are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path), when more than a specified number of game balls flow down the downstream path, It is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number (second and subsequent game balls T2) from staying in the first ball throwing route KR1. Therefore, the displacement of the regulation plate 541 (operation to make the distribution destination the second ball throwing route KR2)
However, it is possible to prevent the ball from being obstructed by the game ball stuck in the first ball throwing path KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a case where a ball is thrown into the ball throwing path when the distribution member 540 is placed at the restriction position. FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) show the distribution unit 500
FIG.

Note that FIGS. 77(a) and (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Further, FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) each illustrate the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Furthermore, FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) show a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed at the regulation position.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), when a ball is thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 with the distribution member 540 disposed at the regulating position, the thrown game ball T1 is transferred to the first ball throwing path KR1. Route KR
1 collides with the regulation plate 541 at the lower end. Thereby, the game ball T1 is guided to the second ball throwing route KR2 and flows down the second ball throwing route KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a description will be given of the operation when the ball is caused to flow down the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3. FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Further, FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) each illustrate the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Furthermore, FIG. 78(a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed at the storage position, and FIG. 78(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed in the restriction position.

As shown in FIGS. 78(a) and (b), the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state (FIG. 78(a)
), when the distribution member 540 is displaced and placed in the regulation position,
The game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 is flown down to the downstream side of the third ball throwing route KR3.

That is, only the balls that are stagnant above the storage plate 542 are allowed to flow down the third ball throwing path KR3. In addition, as mentioned above, the ball stagnating above the storage plate 542 is counted as 1, so it is the third ball.
Balls can be flown down the ball throwing path KR3 one ball at a time. Therefore, the third throwing route KR3
Since the number of balls flowing downstream can be stabilized, it is possible to suppress an unintended number of balls falling down the third ball throwing path KR3.

Therefore, the distributing member 540 (distributing means) displaces the third
It includes a regulating plate 541 (first protruding and retracting part) and a storage plate (second protruding and retracting part) that are formed to be able to protrude and retract from the ball throwing path (first branch passage), and the regulating plate 541 projects to the third ball throwing path. Therefore, the first
The game balls flowing down the ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) are formed so as to be able to be distributed to the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path), and the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 rather than the regulating plate 541. The regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are positioned so as to be able to regulate the flow of game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 by protruding into the third ball throwing route KR3.
When one protrudes into the path of the third ball throwing path KR3, the other is retracted outside the path of the third ball throwing path KR3 (inside the recesses 518 and 519). By displacing the distributing member 540 along with the displacement, only the prescribed number (one ball) of game balls can be distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 and received by the ball receiving section 467.

That is, by protruding the regulating plate 541, the first state is established in which the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 are distributed to the second throwing route, and by retracting the regulating plate 541, the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 are set to the first state.
The second state in which the game balls flowing down are distributed to the third ball throwing path, and the second protruding and retracting portion protrudes to restrict the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 from flowing down (storing the game balls). Third
By retracting the second protruding and retracting part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game ball stored in the third ball throwing path is caused to flow down and received by the ball receiving part, and each of these states By combining these, only the specified number (one ball) of game balls are distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 and the ball receiving section 46
7 can receive it.

Further, since the distribution member 540 includes the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution member 540 (the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated,
The structure for demonstrating those functions can be simplified. Further, when one of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the third ball throwing path KR3, the other is retracted outside the third ball throwing path KR3, so that the two of the ball receiving portions 467 It is sufficient if the distribution member 540 is also formed to be movable into two positions depending on the position (first position and second position). That is, by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, due to the structure of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the distribution member 54
The structure for displacing the zero can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball sorting operation can be improved accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 80, the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 40
0 will be explained. FIG. 79 is a front view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 80 is a top view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400.
Note that the lower displacement unit 400 is illustrated in a state where it is disposed at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the distribution unit 500 is arranged on the front side (lower side in FIG. 80) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, an opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the sorting unit 500 and an opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440.
and are placed in a position where they overlap in the front-back direction. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 is sent into the lower displacement member 440 through the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, throwing the ball to the lower displacement member 440 involves passing the ball flowing down the playing area in front of the game board 13 from the third prize opening 82 formed on the game board 13 via the ball throwing unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. will be carried out.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 has the rolling portion 525 communicating with the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467.
Since the distribution member 540 restricts the passage of game balls in the rolling portion 525, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the distribution member 540 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 are thrown, the distribution member 540 restricts the passage of game balls through the rolling portion 525. It is possible to reliably throw the game ball T2 after the first one to the orbital region of the distribution member 540 via the rolling portion 525. As a result, problems caused by the second and subsequent game balls T2 are less likely to occur.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. 81, 83, and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84, and 86 are sectional views of the distribution unit 500. In addition, FIG. 81,
In FIGS. 83 and 85, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 disposed on the front side is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 82, 84, and 86, the distribution member 540 is illustrated with a chain line, and the abutting plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 disposed on the back side is illustrated with a chain line.

Furthermore, FIGS. 81 and 82 illustrate a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the first position and the distribution member 540 is placed in the regulation position, and the lower displacement member 44
A state in which 0 is located in the retracted state is illustrated. 83 and 84 illustrate a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the second position, the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state. The condition is illustrated. 85 and 86 illustrate a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the first position and the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state. A state located at is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiver 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is in the first position, the ball receiver A rack 466 for driving the movable rack 467 is disposed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and a movable rack 464 is disposed on the back side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, like the rack 466, the movable rack 464 is placed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front). Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is located on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the left side surface when viewed from the front) is brought into contact with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, a rotational driving force is applied to the distribution member 540 around the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the distribution member 540 is displaced to a position (restriction position) in which the restriction plate 541 is projected into the first ball throwing path KR1.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiver 467 is placed in the first position, the ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is transferred to the third ball throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2 without being thrown down. Also, as mentioned above,
By displacing the distribution member 540 from the storage state in which the balls are stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulation position, the game ball can be thrown to the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542). At this time, the game ball can be thrown inside the ball receiving part 467 by causing the ball receiving part 467 to perform a ball receiving operation.

In addition, the third electric accessory 82a is used to store game balls in the distribution unit 500.
The opening operation is performed before the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the first position, and when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the first position, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state. . As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the game balls passing through the first ball throwing path KR1 are not restricted from flowing down by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and unintended game balls are 3
It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown to the downstream side of the ball throwing route KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is formed to be able to operate in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, it regulates the throwing of game balls to the trajectory area of the ball receiver 467 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiver 467. Or acceptable. In other words, regulation or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, so that, for example, the distribution member 540 can It is not necessary to control the driving means for driving the drive unit 540 or each of these means, and accordingly, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of the operation.

Further, in the distribution member 540, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the first position (second direction).
Since the game ball T2 is allowed to be thrown to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with being displaced to The game ball can be reliably thrown to the side area.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable between a switching position for switching the distribution member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). When the ball receiving section 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distributing member 540 is switched to the third ball throwing path KR3, and when the ball receiving section 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving section is distributed from the third ball throwing path. 467 is enabled to receive game balls,
Since the destination of distribution by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2, game balls exceeding the prescribed number (one ball in this embodiment) that the ball receiver 467 can receive are distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the distribution member 5
40 remains switched to the third ball throwing route, and the ball receiving section 467 receives the game balls. There is a risk that you will be assigned to If a means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing route KR3 is provided separately, the structure becomes complicated, reliability decreases, and product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, after the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the switching position and a prescribed number (one ball in this embodiment) of game balls are distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3, the distribution member 540
When the ball is displaced to the receiving position, the distribution destination is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2, so it is possible to prevent more than one game ball from flowing down to the third ball throwing route. Therefore,
The ball receiver 467 can prevent game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) that can be received from being distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. Further, since there is no need to separately provide the above-mentioned means (means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing path KR3), it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product costs.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (turned on), each operation unit starts from the position where the power is turned off (turned off). Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control thereof may be reset. In that case, if the distribution member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the storage state operates during the initial operation to cause the game balls to flow down the third ball throwing path KR3, There is a risk that the game ball will be thrown to the retracted side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 located at the third position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiver 467 are synchronized, so even if the power is turned off while the pachinko machine 10 is not located at the predetermined reference position, the pachinko machine It is possible to prevent an unintended game ball from being thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiver 467 when the machine 10 is powered on. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from clogging inside the lower displacement member 440.

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the game balls are left in the orbital area of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving part 467 is caused to perform the ejection operation described above, so that the game balls are not left in the orbital area of the ball receiving part 467. The game balls can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and collected from the collection port 411f.

Next, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is in the second position.
In the position or the third position (a position other than the first position), as described above, the rack 466 that drives the ball receiving part 467 is located at approximately the center of the lower displacement member 440 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 83). At the same time, the movable rack 464 is moved from the other end side (the left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 83) of the lower displacement member 440 to the one end side.

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position spaced from the other end of the lower displacement member 4440 toward one end. In this case, the surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545.
It is displaced to a position (storage position) where it projects into the ball throwing path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving part 467 is placed in the second position or the third position (a position other than the first position), the first
The ball thrown along the ball throwing path KR1 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Also,
As described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, a ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with a ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

Next, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the first extended state or the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 slides with respect to the front base 411 as described above. It is both displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the sorting member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the sorting member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is rotated to the third throwing ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) where it is projected onto path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state or the second extended state, the ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. be done. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, a ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with a ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2. .

That is, the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state and the second extended state (states other than the retracted state).
In this case, as the lower displacement member 440 is displaced, the position of the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is displaced, so that the communication state of the sphere between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the sorting unit 500 is released. . Therefore, when the ball flows down the third ball throwing path KR3, there is a risk that the ball will be discharged from the opening 451a into the back case 300. However, in this embodiment, by setting the distribution member 540 to the storage position, the third ball throwing path It is possible to suppress the ball from flowing down the downstream side of the route KR3. As a result, the balls of the back case 300 can be prevented from being ejected into the interior.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed to be displaceable in the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state, and when the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state, Since the ball receiver 467 is disposed on the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiver 467 can be displaced with the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state, or in the first or second extended state. A mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced can be formed. Therefore, the performance effect can be increased accordingly.

In this case, when the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first or second extended state, the ball receiving part 4
67 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling part 525 of the third ball throwing route KR3 (the third ball throwing route KR
3 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440). In such a state, the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving part 467 cannot contact the distribution member 540. Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is unable to receive game balls (the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the first extended state or the second extended state), the distribution member 540 distributes the game balls to the third throwing ball. Switching to route KR3 can be suppressed.

Moreover, since the distribution member 540 is disposed on the base plate 520 of the distribution unit 500, which is formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 470
It is possible to suppress the increase in size of the base member 470 of 40.

Here, since the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first extended state to the retracted state is not only a rotational displacement in the left-right direction but also a rotational displacement, when the abutment plate 464c in the tilted state is rotated, , the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 540
may not be able to rotate.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended position shown in FIG. (
2nd position or 3rd position). Thereby, the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced to the retracted state can be prevented from colliding with the protrusion 543. As a result, the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, causing the distribution member 5
40 can be prevented from being unable to rotate.

Furthermore, since the distributing member 540 is formed with the bulging portion 543a as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended state to the retracted state due to poor control or the like, the contact plate 464c Even when the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface, the distribution member 5
40 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the bulging portion 543a can reduce the area of contact with the abutting plate 464c, the bulging portion 543a can easily slide along the surface when the abutting plate 464c comes into contact with the bulging portion 543a. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotated and displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 from coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and preventing the distribution member 540 from rotating.

Next, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. 87 is a front view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 700, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 700. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, and a ball holder 71 disposed above the decoration unit 750 in the direction of gravity.
0, its ball holder 710, and a back base 720 arranged on the back side of the decoration unit 750.
, a left side transmission member 730 disposed on the left side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front, and a right side transmission member 740 disposed on the right side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front.

The ball holder 710 is a member for dropping the game ball emitted from the emitting opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. Thereby, the ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 can be caused to be thrown by the rotation unit 700. In addition, the ball holder 71
The detailed configuration of 0 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body with a curved portion arranged upward when viewed from the side, and the front side is decorated with characters and patterns. Furthermore, the decoration unit 750 is made up of a plurality of members, and is configured to be able to be displaced by transmission of a drive, which will be described later. Note that the configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

The back base 720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball holder 710 and the back side of the decoration unit 750, and is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. As mentioned above, the decoration unit 750 is
Since it is composed of a plurality of movable members, its fastening portion is limited, but by connecting the decorative unit 750 and the ball holder 710 on the back side at a position that is invisible to the player, the decorative unit The decorative unit 750 and the ball holder 710 can be assembled as one unit while ensuring the range of motion of the ball holder 750.

The left side transmission member 730 is attached to the drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface of the decoration unit 750 (left side in FIG. 87), the transmission member 730 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. Gear cover 7 covering motor base 732 and transmission member 730
33, and a ball throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between the facing gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover 734.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decoration unit 750, which will be described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730, which will be described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b that meshes with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c that meshes with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c that meshes with the transmission gear 731b. The transmission gear 731d is arranged adjacent to the transmission gear 731d and is coaxially arranged with the shaft 735, and the load gear 731e is meshed with the transmission gear 731d.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

The transmission gear 731b has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits rotational driving force from the decoration unit 750 to the right transmission member 740 on the right side.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring disposed inside and having a cam surface formed on its outer circumferential surface, an outer ring disposed outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction relative to the inner ring, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, creating resistance and transmitting power to the inner ring, and the outer ring rotates in the other direction relative to the inner ring. This is a cam-type clutch that, when rotated, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the roller decreases, causing the clutch to slip and cut off power transmission.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b receives the driving force in one direction from the drive motor KM4,
When the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft JB1 and the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the outer ring slips with respect to the inner ring, and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft JB1 is interrupted.

The transmission gear 731c has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein similarly to the transmission gear 731b. Further, a shaft 735 is disposed inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 731c receives the driving force in one direction from the drive motor KM4,
When the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft 735 and the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the outer ring slips with respect to the inner ring, and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted. Also,
The transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and their rotation directions are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b rotates in one direction, the transmission gear 731c
is considered to be a rotation in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b rotates in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b rotates in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the mode is switched to a mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or a mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

Transmission gear 731d is attached to shaft 735. As mentioned above, the shaft 735 is connected to the transmission gear 7
It is rotated only when 31c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and does not rotate in the other direction.

The load gear 731e has a shaft hole 791a of a resistance member 791 attached to the box member 760.
connected to. The resistance member 791 includes a shaft portion 791a that is rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed so that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, the load gear 73 connected to the shaft portion 791a
Similarly, a force greater than a predetermined amount is required to rotate 1e.

Thereby, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped due to the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, rotation due to the inertia force can be suppressed. That is,
The resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertia force that acts around the axis of the rotor 800 when the rotation of the rotor 800 is stopped.

Further, the load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d disposed coaxially with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 is reduced by the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4.
31d can be rotated in only one direction. That is, the transmission gear 731c is
When rotated in the other direction, the transmission of drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is cut off, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed. As a result, when rotating the transmission gear 731b in one direction, the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed.

The motor base 732 is formed into a box-like body with the decorative unit 750 side open, and a drive motor KM4 is disposed outside the bottom part of the box (on the left side in FIG. 87) with its shaft inserted into the inside of the box. This allows the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 to be connected to the motor base 73.
It can be placed inside 2. That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is the same as that of the transmission gear 731a.
is set larger than the width dimension of. As a result, it is possible to arrange the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a attached to the motor base 732 in the decoration unit 750, and it is possible to suppress the transmission gear 731a from colliding with the decoration unit 750.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decoration unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 disposed therebetween. Further, a through hole 733a is formed in the decoration unit 750 at a position facing a shaft hole of a rotating body 800, which will be described later. Thereby, the ball rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be discharged to the outside through the through hole 733a. Note that a description of the ball thrown to the rotating body 800 will be given later.

The ball throwing route cover 734 is a member disposed on the outside of the gear cover 733 (on the left side in FIG. 87), and is formed from a plate-shaped body, and has a wall portion projecting toward the gear cover 733 from its edge. As a result, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing route cover 734 facing each other, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 can be passed through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotation unit 700. I can do it. The ball discharged from the gap between the facing gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover is thrown into a recovery path (not shown) and collected.

The right side transmission member 740 includes a rotating member 741 connected to the other end side of the shaft portion JB1 described above;
It is formed mainly of an arm member 742 whose one end is connected to the rotating member 741, and a crank cover 743 disposed on the decoration unit 750 with the rotating member 741 and arm member 742 covered.

The rotating member 741 includes a main body portion 741b formed in a disc-like plate shape, and a main body portion 741b.
One-way clutch OW1 fitted into the shaft of
It is formed mainly with a cylindrical protrusion 741a that protrudes to the right side).

In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. Further, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that when rotation opposite to the rotational direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring, no transmission occurs between the inner ring and the outer ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotational speed faster than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated and the rotating member 741 is transferred to the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by a driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be made to rotate at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape that is a combination of a C-shape and an I-shape when viewed from the side, and has an I-shape at one end of the C-shape.
It is formed by connecting the other ends of the letters. The arm member 742 also has a shaft hole 742a formed through the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b formed through the one end of the I-shaped portion, and a C-shaped first sliding groove 742b. The second sliding groove 742c is mainly formed with an elliptical second sliding groove 742c formed through the other end of the cylindrical portion.

The shaft hole 742a is a shaft portion 764a formed in a right side plate 764 of a box member 760, which will be described later.
is a hole into which the shaft portion 764a is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is arranged in the decoration unit 750 with the shaft portion 764a inserted into the shaft hole 742a, so that the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decoration unit 750.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction of the ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore,
The protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

Further, the rotating member 741 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and its shaft is located half the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. placed at a location further apart. Thereby, by rotating the rotating member 741, it is possible to cause the arm member 742 to perform reciprocating rotational movement around the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a protrusion 773a of the right lid part 773, which will be described later, is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction of the ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 773a.
Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. In addition, the right lid portion 773
is formed to be rotationally displaceable with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, when the rotating member 741 is rotated and the arm member 742 performs a reciprocating rotational movement, the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 is rotated with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 mainly includes an elliptical portion 743a formed into an ellipse when viewed from the rear, and a ball throwing portion 743b formed continuously on the back side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and has an outer shape larger than the arm member 742 and the displacement area of the arm member 742 in side view, and extends the arm member 742 from the edge toward the decoration unit 750. A wall portion is formed that protrudes more than the thickness of the wall. Thereby, when the crank cover 743 is arranged on the decoration unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decoration unit 750 facing each other.

The ball throwing part 743b is a path member for sending the ball flowing down the downstream area in front of the game board 13 to a collection path when the ball is collected from a predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside. It is formed into a rod shape with a small space. Further, the ball throwing portion 743b has an open upper end and is connected to the collection port of the game board 13, and a lower end thereof is connected to an opening formed in the decoration unit 750. Thereby, the balls collected on the game board 13 can be passed through the interior of the decoration unit 750 via the ball throwing section 743b and guided to a collection path (not shown).

Next, the decoration unit 750 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decoration unit 750. 92(a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as viewed in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as seen in the direction of arrow
FIG. 7 is a side view of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the direction. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit 750. In addition, in FIGS. 91(b) and 91(c), the right side plate 764 and the left side plate 76 of the box member 760
5 is shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decoration unit 750 includes a box member 760 that serves as an outer decoration part of the decoration unit 750, and a lid disposed above the box member 760 in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91(a)). member 770, and a rotating body 80 disposed inside the box member 760 and lid member 770.
0.

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 disposed below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 disposed in front of the base member 762, and a lower plate 763 disposed on the bottom surface of the base member 762. It is formed mainly of a right side plate 764 disposed on the right side of the base member 762 when viewed from the front, and a left side plate 765 disposed on the left side of the base member 762 when viewed from the front.

The base member 762 is formed to have a laterally elongated rectangular shape that is larger than the rotating body 800 when viewed from above, and is formed to have a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the direction of gravity. The base member 762 has an upper surface formed into a curved surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. Thereby, when the base member 762 is placed near the rotating body 800, collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed.

The base member 762 mainly includes a recessed portion 762a recessed downward in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a ball throwing portion 762b recessed in a substantially L-shape on the bottom surface.

The recessed portion 762a is a groove in which the above-described shaft portion JB1 is disposed, and the decorative unit 75
The transmission gear 731b is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b disposed on the side surface of the transmission gear 731b. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball throwing part 762b is bent in an L shape and recessed on the bottom surface, and one end side is connected to the right side plate 7.
64, and the other end side is connected to the back side of the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761. Further, the concave width of the ball throwing portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. Thereby, by disposing the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side, it is possible to throw a ball into the inside of the box member 760.

The front plate 761 is formed to have a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness on the back side. In addition, the front plate 761 has a winning opening 761a having a size that allows a ball to be inserted into the front side. The prize opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing part 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown into the winning hole 761a is thrown to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762.

The right side plate 764 has a D-shaped outer shape with an upward curve when viewed from the side. In addition, the right side plate 764 has a shaft portion 764a protruding outward from the decoration unit 750, a bearing portion 764c penetratingly formed below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape of the same axis as the rotation axis of the rotating body 800. A curved opening 764d formed in the opening and a ball throwing portion 762b of the crank cover 743.
It is formed mainly of an opening 764b that opens at a position facing the lower end of the rotating body 800, and an engaging portion 764e that is semicircularly penetratingly formed in a side view on the axis of rotation of the rotating body 800.

The opening 764b allows the ball thrown from the ball throwing portion of the crank cover 743 to be passed through the base member 76.
This is a hole that allows the ball to be thrown to No. 2, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the ball. Thereby, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762.

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the shaft portion JB1 described above is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. Thereby, the driving force can be transmitted to the above-described right transmission member 740.

The curved opening 764d is an opening into which the protrusion 773a protruding from the right lid portion 773 is inserted. Moreover, since the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, the curved opening 764d
It is formed in a circular arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of. Thereby, when the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, collision between the protrusion 773a and the curved opening 764d can be suppressed.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the right end of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front, and holds the base plate 810 non-rotatably. That is, the tip portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted and arranged in the engaging portion 764e. This results in
The base plate 810 is not rotatable.

The left side plate 765 has an outer shape substantially the same as the right side plate 764 when viewed from the side.
The left side plate 765 also includes a through hole 765a formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800 side, and a through hole 765b into which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted. The hole 765c is mainly formed.

The through hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball discharged from the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 in the front view into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, through hole 7
65a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and its inner diameter is set to be the same size as the inner diameter of the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in a rotation regulating member 780, which will be described later.
The rotation regulating member 780 can be held in a rotatable state. Note that the displacement of the rotation regulating member 780 will be described later.

The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted, as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 so that the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower plate 763 form a throwing path through which a ball can pass.
Furthermore, an opening 763a is formed in the bottom plate 763, passing through it in the vertical direction. Opening 763a
is an opening for throwing a ball thrown inside the ball throwing part 762b to a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the ball that has won into the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the ball that is thrown from the game area to the ball throwing section 743b of the right side transmission member 740 can be discharged from the inside of the decoration unit 750.

The lid member 770 includes a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right side lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 when viewed from the front, and a curved lid portion 771. It is mainly formed to include a left side lid part 772 fastened to the left side surface in front view.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has a curved outer shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the side, and has a radius larger than that of the rotating body 800 . The curved lid part 771 includes a transparent part 771a formed from a transparent plate on a part of the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a board that allows the player to see the patterns, characters, etc. drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800. That is, the player may notice that the rotating body 800 is
Even if the upper end side is covered, the display of the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 771a.

The right lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the external size of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 in a side view. As a result, the right lid portion 773 is
The right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 is inserted into the annular inner portion.

Furthermore, the right lid portion 773 is formed mainly of a protrusion 773a that protrudes to the outside (right side in front view) of the decorative unit 750, and a recess 773b that is recessed toward the inner side in the radial direction on the outer peripheral edge. . The protrusion 773a is a protrusion inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742, as described above.

The opening/closing member 870 can be rotated by inserting a protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later, into the recess 773b. Therefore, the width of the recess 773b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. Further, the recessed portion 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge of the right lid portion 773 where the curved lid portion 771 is disposed.

The left lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771 . Further, the inner diameter of the left lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of a tooth surface 881a of a left rotating portion 880, which will be described later. Thereby, the left side cover part 772 is disposed with the left rotating part 880 of the rotating body 800 inserted into the annular inner part.

In addition, the left side lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a that protrudes to the outside of the decoration unit 750 (left side in front view). The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left lid portion 772 by being placed between opposing bifurcated sensors (not shown).

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be explained. The arrangement of the lid member 770 with the rotating body 800 assembled is the same as inserting the left and right ends of the rotating body 800 inside the right side lid part 773 and the left side lid part 772, respectively, before assembly (separate members). do. after that,
By assembling the right side cover part 773, the left side cover part 772, and the curved cover part 771, the rotating body 800 and the cover member 770 are connected. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable about the axis of the rotating body 800 relative to the rotating body.

The rotation regulating member 780 is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. The rotation regulating member 780 mainly includes a shaft hole 781 penetrating through the bent portion, a protrusion 782 protruding in the bending direction on one end side, and an abutment surface 783 formed flat at the tip of the other end side. be done.

The shaft portion 765b of the left side plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781 as described above. Thereby, the rotation regulating member 780 is rotatably held relative to the left side plate 765. Further, a biasing spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is applied to the rotation regulating member 780.

The protrusion 782 engages with an engagement protrusion 882 of a left rotation part 880, which will be described later, to rotate the rotating body 8.
00 rotational displacement can be regulated. The contact surface 783 is a surface that the end of the back side of the lid member 770 mentioned above comes into contact with, and when the lid member 770 comes into contact with it, the rotation regulating member 780 can be rotated. Note that the manner of regulating the rotation regulating member 780 and the rotating body 800 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, the transmission path of the driving force when the drive motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 95(a) and 96(a) show the rotation unit 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIG. 95(b) and FIG.
The rotating unit 700 at Vb.

In addition, in FIG. 95, the displacement direction of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 96, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the forward direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the forward direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is brought to a stopped state.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 7 connected to the shaft 735
31d is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates forward, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b is brought into a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates about the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731 does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 does not rotate. Therefore, the transmission gear 73 connected to the shaft 735
1d, the driving force is not transmitted, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are in a non-rotating state. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates negatively, the driving force to the lid member 770 is transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c transmits the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the rotating body 800.
(rotation side drive means) and a transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmission means) that transmits the transmission to the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later, via the lid member 770. Accordingly, the rotational force is transferred to transmission gear 731c or transmission gear 731b.
It is possible to transmit the signal to one side and block the transmission to the other side. As a result, the drive motor K
By simply switching the rotational direction of M4, it is possible to switch the drive target driven by its rotational driving force. In other words, depending on the rotational direction of drive motor KM4, the rotating body 800 can be rotated and stopped, and the opening/closing member can be rotated. The displacement of 870 and its stop can be switched,
The structure can be simplified while making it possible to form a plurality of modes.

Here, in a structure in which the one-way clutch OW1 is used to switch the drive target (the rotating body 800 or the opening/closing member 870 (lid member 770)) according to the rotational direction of the drive means, the transmission of the driving force from the drive motor KM4 is When it is cut off, it becomes possible to freely rotate or displace in the direction in which it was being driven by the driving force.Therefore, for example, the object to be driven by the driving means is the rotating body 8.
00 to the opening/closing member 870 (lid member 770) and transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body 800 becomes rotatable and may continue to rotate (rotate) due to inertial force.

In contrast, this embodiment includes a load gear 731e (load gear) meshed with a transmission gear 731d driven by a transmission gear 731c, so that transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is interrupted. However, by using the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear 731e, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, displacement of the lid member 770 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. Figure 97
(a) and FIG. 98(c) are the decorative units in the closed state, FIGS. 97(b) and 98(b) are in the intermediate state, and FIG. 97(c) and FIG. 98(a) are in the open state, respectively. 750 and a side view of the right side transmission member 740.

Note that FIGS. 97(a) to 97(c) and FIGS. 98(a) to 98(c) illustrate a state in which the crank cover 743 of the right side transmission member 740 is removed. In addition, the closed state of the decoration unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged to cover the upper half of the rotating body 800 (upper part in FIG. 97(a)), and the open state is a state in which the lid member 770 is rotated. It is in a state where it has been displaced and placed on the back side of the rotating body 800 (the right side in FIG. 97(c)). The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is located between the closed state and the open state.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 97(a) to 97(c), states in which the closed state is displaced to the open state are illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 98(a) to 98(c), the states in which the state is displaced from the open state to the closed state The following states are illustrated in order.

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. The driving force is transmitted to the arm member 742 by the drive motor K as described above.
This is done by rotating M4 in the negative direction.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is placed on the back side (on the right side in FIG. 97(a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, arm member 742
In this case, the first sliding groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is arranged on the back side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 97(a)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding from the right side of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 741
a is located below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742
is displaced downward in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (lower side in FIG. 97(b)) as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged above the shaft hole 742a in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 97(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed in a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. .

In this case, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is located closer to the back side than the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the center position of the rotating body 800 formed in a cylindrical shape). Therefore, due to the load on the lid member 770, a rotational force is applied in a direction to displace the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1 and configured so that the outer ring can rotate in advance of the inner ring, so the load of the lid member 770 causes the drive motor KM to
4 can be stopped and the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 97(c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the back side of the rotating body, the projection 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the intermediate position.
That is, it is the leftmost (left side in FIG. 97) end of the displacement region of the projection 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to the intermediate state, and by causing the lid member 770 to fall under load.

As a result, when displacing the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state, the drive motor KM
Since the section in which KM4 is driven can be made half of the total section, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be set according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be set according to the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, there is no need to complicate the control. As a result, control can be simplified and control failures can be suppressed.

Note that the displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section;
The displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the load of the lid member 770 is referred to as a second section, and the first section includes a
The code K1 will be explained with the code DK2 being added to the second section.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the open state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is connected to the arm member 742.
The lid member 77 is placed on the front side (on the left side in FIG. 98(a)) of the shaft hole 742a.
The curved lid portion 771 of 0 is placed on the back side of the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(b), the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 741
a is positioned above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742
is displaced downward in the direction of gravity of the shaft hole 742a (lower side in FIG. 98(b)) as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged above the shaft hole 742a in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 98(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and is rotationally displaced approximately 45 degrees upward from the state in which the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is located on the back side of the rotating body 800. It is assumed that it is placed at the position shown in the figure.

Furthermore, the lid member 770 that has been displaced to the closed state position (the position shown in FIG. 97(a)) is placed in the game area (the front side of the game board 13), and is placed in the open state position (the position shown in FIG. 97(c)). The lid member 770 that has been displaced to the position ) is placed outside the gaming area (on the back side of the gaming board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and causing the rotating body 800 to rotate. In particular, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening/closing member 870 that is displaced toward the gaming area. This opening/closing member 870 can be prevented from being opened (extended).

Furthermore, since the lid member 770 is placed outside the gaming area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position creates a space for the opening/closing member 870 to protrude into the gaming area. can be secured. Therefore, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the opening/closing member 870.

Furthermore, since the lid member 770 is formed to be rotatable around an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotary body 800 and is formed in a plate shape that curves along the outer surface of the rotary body 800, the lid member 770 is in a closed state. The space required for displacement between the position (covered position) and the open position (retracted position) can be suppressed, and therefore, the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, by forming the lid member 770 in a curved manner in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area can be
It is possible to prevent the liquid from remaining on the lid member 770 disposed in the closed position and to allow the liquid to flow down smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(c), the rotating member 741 is further rotated approximately 90 degrees, and the projection 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees.
1a to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742 of the arm member 742
b is displaced toward the back side (to the right in FIG. 98(c)) relative to the shaft hole 742a as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 98(c)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

In this case, as the lid member 770 is displaced, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced toward the front side relative to the rotation axis of the lid member 770. Therefore, during the transition from the intermediate state to the closed state, the lid member 77
With a load of 0, a rotational force is applied in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the driving motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

Therefore, since the lid member 770 can be brought into the closed state by the load of the lid member 770,
The lid member 770 can be reliably closed.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is caused only by the drive motor KM4, there is a possibility that the lid member 770 may not be able to be stopped at a normal position if the driving stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, in the case where the rotating member 741 has only one direction of rotation as in this embodiment, if the stopping operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return it to the normal position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the position at which the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped using the load of the lid member 770, so it is possible to suppress the position at which the lid member 770 is stopped from shifting. can.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force to the displacement member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member also remains constant. It is impossible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member was insufficient.

Note that the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the drive means, but if the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement sections of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. In order to achieve this speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member, and control to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device.
This results in an increase in product costs and control costs. Furthermore, the structure and control become complicated, leading to a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission means (rotating member 741 and arm member 742) are
When the one-way clutch OW1 is provided, and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced in one direction with respect to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1, rollers engage with the inner ring and the outer ring. When the driving force is transmitted and the inner ring is displaced in the other direction relative to the outer ring, the engagement of the rollers with the inner ring and the outer ring is released, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and the lid member In the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is displaced in one direction with respect to the inner ring, so regardless of the driving state of the rotating member 741, the second section DK2 (predetermined section) The displacement speed of the lid member 770 in section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in other sections. Therefore, it is possible to impart changes to the lid member 770 and enhance the performance effect accompanying the displacement of the lid member 770.

Furthermore, regardless of the driving state of the drive motor KM4, the outer ring can be caused to advance in one direction relative to the inner ring, so for example, the drive motor KM4 is driven at a constant drive speed over the entire displacement range of the lid member 770. There is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 during the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, it is possible to suppress energy consumption.

In addition, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction relative to the outer ring, the engagement of the rollers is released and the transmission of driving force is cut off, so the displacement member is brought to a stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (drive motor KM4) in this driving state can be transferred to the rotating body 8.
It can be used as a driving force to drive 00. That is, by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4), the two members, the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800, can be respectively displaced.

Further, the lid member 770 is formed to be rotatable, and its center of gravity is located at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and in the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since the cover member 770 is formed so as to be able to act in one direction, the outer ring can be displaced in one direction in advance of the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the lid member 770. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Furthermore, the driving force is transmitted to the main body portion 741 to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached.
b and a rotating member 741 (crank member) having a protrusion 741a (pin portion) protruding from its main body 741b and located displaced from the center of rotation of its main body 741c, and an arm member 742. The rotary member 741 is rotated by the outer ring, and the protrusion 741a
By sliding the rotating member 741 along the first sliding groove 742b, the other end side (the second sliding groove 742c side) of the rotating member 741 can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the direction of displacement of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the driving direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, since the second section DK can be formed to have both reciprocating motion, when the lid member 770 is reciprocated, when displacing it in any direction, it starts from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased, and as a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be varied, and the performance effect accompanying the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, displacement of the rotation regulating member 780 will be described. Figure 99(a
) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 99(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the open state. Note that in FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b), the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is shown transparently.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), when the lid member 770 is in the closed state, the rotation regulating member 780 is in a state (
In FIG. 99(a), it is rotated clockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance L4 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is smaller than the distance L5 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 (L4 <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation regulating member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is allowed to rotate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99(b), when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation regulating member 780 is a lid member 770 whose contact surface 783 is displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. The abutting surfaces 783 are brought into contact with each other, and the abutment surface 783 is pushed downward (rotated counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781 in FIG. 99(b)).

Therefore, the distance L4 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is made larger than the distance L6 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 (L6 <L4).

As a result, in the rotating body 800 in which the engagement protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is disposed at the lowest position in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 can be inserted inside the engagement protrusion 882. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation regulating member 780 are engaged, the rotating body 8
00 is considered unrotatable. In addition, in this embodiment, the position where rotation of the rotating body 800 is disabled (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening/closing member 870 of the rotating body 800 is in an open state, which will be described later. is set to

That is, the rotation regulating member 780 (rotation regulating means) that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800 is configured such that the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position) and the other side of the displacement member is stretched over the gaming area. Since the rotation of the rotating body 800 is restricted when the rotating body 800 is extended, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening/closing member 870 extended, and the opening/closing member 87 is rotated by other members located on the rotation locus.
0 interference can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress rotation of the rotating body 800 due to the load that is applied when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

Here, the first member and the second member are displaceably formed, and the first member has a covering position where at least a part of the second member is hidden from view, and a state where the first member is disposed at the covering position. A gaming machine is known that is movable between a retracted position and a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the first member is placed in the covered position and the second member is made invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the second member is formed to be displaceable, so when the second member is exposed, there is a risk that the second member will be displaced. Therefore, there was a problem in that the second member could not be seen in an appropriate state by the player, and the performance effect was reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) is capable of regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) when it is displaced to the open position (retracted position). Because of this, the rotating body 800 can be made visible to the player in an appropriate state, and the performance effect can be ensured. That is, when displacing the lid member 770 to the open position to expose the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which must be performed for the purpose of the performance, is performed by rotating the lid member 770. It is used as a means for regulating the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800.
The structure can be simplified.

Further, as will be described later, the shape of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically from the center of rotation (see FIG. 101). Therefore, since the rotating body 800 is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is offset from the center of rotation, the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, it is not necessary for the rotating body 800 to have a shape in which its center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and a shape that is asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the performance effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 will rotate around the rotation center (there is a risk of being rotated) due to the gravity, and will be displaced to the closed state position. A configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotary body 800 is particularly effective, and thereby the rotary body 800 can be made visible to the player in an appropriate state, and the performance effect can be ensured.

Note that the rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis. In this case, the rotating body 8
By forming 00 from two or more members having different specific gravity, its center of gravity can be placed at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half from a metal material and the other half from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be located on the side of the metal material, which generally has a higher specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. Figure 1
00(a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 100(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100(a), and FIG. 100(c) is a front view of the rotating body 800. 100(a) as viewed in the direction of arrow Cc. FIG. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed into a columnar shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 disposed on the shaft portion, and a first display section 830, a second display section 840, a third display section 850, and a fourth display section disposed surrounding the base plate 810 and combined in an annular shape. A display section 860, a right rotation section 89 disposed at one end in the axial direction, a left rotation section 880 disposed at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening/closing member disposed inside the first display section 830. 870.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section when viewed in the axial direction, and is also formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed with a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 that protrude outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed to protrude in an annular shape from the right side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (the right side in FIG. 100(a)). The right end portion 811 is formed mainly of a tip portion 811a that partially projects from the protruding tip of the right end portion 811, and a communication hole 811b in an annular inner portion.

The tip portion 811a further projects in the axial direction from the tip portion of the right end portion 811, and
The protruding area in the right side view (direction view in FIG. 100(c)) is the engaging portion 7 of the right side plate 764.
It is set smaller than the area inside 64e. The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engagement portion 764e of the right side plate 764 as described above. Thereby, the base plate 810 and the right side plate 764 (lid member 770) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be kept in a stopped state against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to an LED board 820 (described later) is inserted, and is formed through the right side surface of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front. This allows the wiring to be inserted.

The left end portion 812 is formed to protrude in an annular shape from the left side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (the left side in FIG. 100(a)). The left end portion 812 has a tip portion 8 protruding from the lower semicircle of the left end portion 812.
12a and a communication hole 812b in an annular inner portion.

The tip portion 812a further projects in the axial direction from the tip portion of the left end portion 812, and
The protruding shape in the left side view (direction view in FIG. 100(b)) is an annular lower semicircle.

The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 to the outside of the rotating body 800 by an opening/closing member 870 described later. The inner diameter of the communication hole 812b is set larger than that of the sphere and is set to be approximately the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

Further, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protruding distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance at which it comes into contact with the through hole 733a. Furthermore, a protrusion 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end surface of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be approximately the same as the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. Thereby, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left side transmission member 730) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be kept in a stopped state against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is rotatably disposed on the bottom surface of the base plate 810. The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed into a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and has a protrusion 813a inclined toward one end.
is formed. Further, the reverse rotation prevention member 813 has a biasing spring SP6 between it and the base plate 810.
is arranged, so that the protrusion 813a is always on the left side when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 100(a)).
It is said to be in a state where it is energized.

The right rotation portion 890 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side. The right rotation part 890 is formed so that the inner diameter of the inner side of the ring is larger than the size of the right end part 811 of the base plate 810 . As a result, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is placed inside the right rotation portion 890.
can be inserted. In addition, the right rotation part 890 has a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and a shaft hole 891 therethrough.
It is formed mainly with a sliding groove 892 that is curved and opened around 91.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which a shaft portion 872 of an opening/closing member 870 described later is inserted, and the shaft portion 87
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of No. 2. Thereby, displacement of the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 with respect to the first display portion 830 can be suppressed.

The sliding groove 892 is formed into a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and its radius is set to be the same as the distance between the protrusion 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870. Thereby, by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 into the sliding groove 892, the protrusion 871 can be slid inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced.

The left rotation portion 880 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side. The left rotating portion 880 is formed so that the inner diameter of the ring is larger than the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 . As a result, the left end portion 81 of the base plate 810 is placed inside the left rotating portion 880.
2 can be inserted. In addition, the left rotation portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 that protrudes in an annular shape from the inner edge portion, an engagement protrusion 882 that protrudes from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 that has sloped surfaces continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. be prepared and formed.

The wall portion 881 is formed to protrude to the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer circumferential surface of the protruding tip, and a communication hole 881b that opens inward.
Equipped with The tooth surface 881a meshes with the transmission gear 881d as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and can discharge the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 by opening the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later.

As described above, the engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation regulating member 780 is engaged. The engagement protrusion 882 is formed to protrude from the left side surface of the left rotating portion 880 when viewed from the front. Further, two engaging protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 is formed so as to be insertable between them.

The locking portion 883 has a sawtooth cross section. The left rotation part 880 is connected to the base plate 810
, the tip of the protrusion 813a of the above-mentioned reverse rotation prevention member 813 is brought into contact with the locking portion 883. As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotation part 880 in one direction is applied, the protrusion 813a slides along the inclined surface of the locking part 883, and the left rotation part 880
However, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotation part 880 in the other direction is applied, the surface of the locking part 883 is caught on the protrusion 813a and rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 800 from being rotated in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. Reverse rotation of the rotating body due to a collision or the like can be suppressed.

The first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860 are each formed in the same curved shape, and can be formed into one annular shape by connecting their end surfaces. Moreover, the inner diameters of the first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860, which are formed into one ring, are set to be approximately the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating sections 880, 890. This allows each display section 830 to 860 to be
0, the first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860 can be formed into one cylindrical shape.

In addition, the first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860 each have a character or a pattern drawn thereon, and as described above, they are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the left rotation section 880 to display the respective characters. This allows the player to visually recognize the patterns.

The first display section 830 is formed mainly of an opening 831 that is open on its curved surface, and a bearing section 832 that is open toward the shaft and protrudes in a U-shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening/closing member 870, which will be described later, is arranged.
The opening has an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the opening. The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size that allows the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 to be inserted into the open U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening/closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832, the opening/closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display section 830. Note that the manner of displacement of the opening/closing member 870 will be described later.

When the LED board 820 is supplied with power, the LEDs mounted on the LED board 820
Can emit light. Further, the LED board 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810.

Next, opening and closing of the opening/closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. Figure 103(a
) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in the closed state. Figure 103(b)
is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in an open state. In addition, in FIG. 103, when the opening/closing member 870 overlaps with another member, its outer diameter is illustrated by a chain line.

Further, the closed state of the opening/closing member 870 means that the outer peripheral surface of the opening/closing member 870 is connected to the first display portion 830.
It is in a state where it is arranged substantially parallel to the outer circumferential surface of. On the other hand, the open state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer circumferential surface of the opening/closing member 870 intersects with the outer circumferential surface of the first display section 830.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), in the rotating body 800 when the opening/closing member 870 is in the closed state, the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is on one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation part 890 (as shown in FIG. 103(a)).
872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103(b), the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in the open state
In this case, the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is located on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation part 890. That is, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation part 890.

Next, the displacement of the protrusion 871 will be explained with reference to FIG. 104. 104(a) and (b) are side views of the decoration unit 750. Note that FIGS. 104(a) and 104(
In b), the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

Further, FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in a closed state and the opening/closing member 870 is in a closed state. FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in an open state and the opening/closing member 870 is in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, the right lid portion 7
The outer edge of 73 is brought into contact with protrusion 871 . When the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer diameter L7 of the lower half of the right lid part 773 from the rotating shaft is smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotating part 890 to one end of the sliding groove 892 (L7 <L8).

Further, the difference in dimension between L7 and L8 is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 871. Therefore,
When the outer edge of the right lid portion 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871, the protrusion 871 is displaced toward one end of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is brought into the closed state. That is, when the decoration unit 750 is brought into the closed state, the opening/closing member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the decoration unit 750 is in the open state, the right lid portion 7
As the recess 773 is displaced, the recess 773b formed at the outer edge is also displaced. In this case, the recess 773
A protrusion 871 is inserted inside b. This allows the protrusion 871 to move the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is brought into the open state by the urging force of the urging spring SP7 disposed between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

As described above, the opening/closing member 870 can be displaced to the open state in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, since there is no need to provide a drive source for driving the opening/closing member 870 in the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be formed small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening/closing member 870 can also be used as a drive means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving force of separate driving means, there is a risk that the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 will interfere if poor control occurs. Since the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770
It is possible to suppress interference between

As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the opening/closing member 870 is opened, the rotating tip side is placed above the prize opening 761a of the box member 760. Thereby, the ball thrown from the ball throwing part 711c of the ball holder 710, which will be described later, can fall onto the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870.

In this case, the rotating tip side of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged above the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the ball falling on the upper surface can be caused to roll toward the inside of the rotating body 800. Rotating body 80
The game ball rolled into the inside of the rotating body 800 is rolled onto the upper surface of a base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800. Further, since the base plate 810 is tilted downward toward the left end 812 side, the ball rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 is rolled toward the left end 812 side and rotated from inside. It can be discharged to the outside of the body 800. That is, the interior of the rotating body 800 can be used as a throwing path for the ball.

Further, as described above, the rotation regulating member 780 that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disposed on the rotating body 800, so the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. When performing a performance, the performance effect can be further enhanced by displacing the opening/closing member 870. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the rotating body 800 may be rotated (rotated). Therefore, the configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, and thereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the production effect.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer surface around the rotational axis is arranged so that it can be viewed by the player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member can be visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating member or by stopping the rotating member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there was a problem in that the rotating member was not fully utilized, as it was only used as a member to hold the display on the outer surface for the player to see. . That is, the rotating member is formed to be relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display visible to the player. As a result, while the space it occupies increases, the area other than its outer surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed therein with the outside, and the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b are formed through which game balls can pass. (Communication port) is provided, so game balls flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space via the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is a dead space, can be used as a storage space for game balls or a ball throwing path, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is only possible to create a presentation mode in which the player can see the display on the outer circumferential surface when the rotating member is stopped, so there is little change in the presentation mode and the presentation effect is insufficient. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening/closing member 870 (displaceable member) disposed displaceably on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is provided, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is In addition to the performance mode in which the display of is made visible to the player, a performance mode in which the opening/closing member 870 is displaced can be formed, so that the performance mode can be changed accordingly, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), the rotating body 800 (
Since a part of the outer surface of the rotating member (rotating member) is formed by the opening/closing member 870, the outer shape of the rotating body 800 can be made smaller, and the space required for the rotating member 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening/closing member 870 is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the opening/closing member 870. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. In addition, by rotating the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 placed in the closed position and disposing (displacing) the opening/closing member 870 in the open position when the rotation is stopped, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be The visually recognized portion (opening/closing member 870) can be configured to protrude outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, thereby increasing interest.

Furthermore, an LED board 820 that emits light is disposed on a base plate 810 in the interior space of the rotating body 800 . Therefore, by setting the opening/closing member 870 to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the internal space is communicated with the outside, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is placed in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and light emitted from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and to displace the opening/closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening/closing member 870, which increases the product cost. increases. Further, if a driving means for displacing the opening/closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. KM4 can also be used to rotate the rotating body 800 and displace the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs. Further, since there is no need to mount a driving means on the rotating body 800 for displacing the opening/closing member, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

In addition, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as the inflow port through which game balls flow from the outside into the internal space, and the communication hole 881b can be used as an outlet through which game balls flow from the internal space to the outside. That is,
Even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (maintained in a stopped state), the rotating body 8
00 can be used as a throwing path for game balls.

Furthermore, the opening 831 is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 800, and the communication hole 881b is formed on the end face in the axial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the game balls can enter the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member). In addition to making it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow, the game balls can be ejected while the rotating body 800 is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating body 800 is arranged so that the outer surface is visible to the player, and the outer surface has the following:
Since the opening 831 (inflow port) is formed, the inflow of game balls can be easily recognized by the player. On the other hand, when the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, when the rotating body 800 is placed in a rotational position where the communication hole 881b is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outflow port) is formed on the end face of the rotating body 800 in the direction of the rotation axis, a state can be formed in which the game balls can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800.

Moreover, inside the opening 831 (first communication port), a displaceable opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is provided.
is disposed and the opening/closing member 870 is moved to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 is blocked by the opening/closing member 870, and when the opening/closing member 870 is moved to the open position (second position),
Since the opening 831 is opened, the inflow of game balls through the opening 831 can be switched between a shielded state and a permitted state.

Furthermore, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opposite side to the one side Since the other side of the opening/closing member 870 is projected toward the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inlet,
By using the opening/closing member 870, the game balls flowing down the game area can be easily caused to flow into the internal space of the rotating body 800.

Moreover, the game balls flowing down the game area can be easily stopped on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when an inlet for game balls is formed in the rotating body 800, the game balls flowing down the gaming area can be made to easily flow into the inlet by using the opening/closing member 870. In this case, if the opening/closing member 870 receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. . Therefore, the lid member 770 that has been displaced to the open position is rotated by the rotation regulating member 78.
A configuration in which the displacement of the rotary body 800 can be regulated by displacing the rotor 800 is particularly effective, and thereby the opening/closing member 870 can be easily maintained in a state in which it is extended to a predetermined position in the gaming area.

The shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged on the rotational direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is located further forward in the rotational direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) than the other side. Therefore, even if the opening/closing member 870 interferes with members disposed around the rotating member 800 when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated by such interference closes the opening/closing member 870 (displaces it to the closed position). can be made to act in the direction of
That is, when the rotating body 800 rotates, the opening/closing member 870 interferes with other members and is extended (second
position). Further, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from engaging with another member and inhibiting the rotation of the rotating body 800.

Further, a base plate 810 (fixing member) disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800
00 is non-rotatable with respect to the rotatably arranged box member 760 (base member),
By rolling the game ball that has flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 with the top surface of the base plate 810 toward the communication hole 881b, the game ball goes wild in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, the rolling of the game ball is inhibited and it can be prevented from remaining in the internal space.

As described above, since the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 870 is regulated by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening/closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) does not interfere with members around the rotating body 800. can be suppressed.

As described above, the rotating body 800 has the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back side of the base plate 810 is inserted, and the rotating body 800 has the communication hole 881b formed therein.
It is formed on the end face opposite to the end face of 0. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, when electrically wiring an LED board disposed inside the rotating body 800, the rotating body 8
If the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, the wiring will become tangled due to the rotation of the rotating body 800, so it is preferable to wire from the axial end face of the rotating body. If an opening is formed through which the game balls flow out, it becomes difficult to secure a space for the wiring to pass through.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be made on the outer circumferential surface, one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet of the game ball, and the other side is used as the outlet for inserting the wiring. Since it can be used as an opening, it is easy to secure a space for the wiring to pass through.

As a result, the game balls can be smoothly discharged through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work for electrical connection lines (wiring to the LED board 820) to the opening can be easily performed. Moreover, since the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated to the maximum extent, it is possible to easily suppress interference between the game ball rolling through the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communication hole 881b and the electrical connection line.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, lower displacement unit 400 and rotation unit 7
00 will be explained. 105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105. Note that in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state
0 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged at adjacent positions in the left-right direction. Further, in the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106), the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at approximately the center position of the ball holder 710 in the front-rear direction.

Next, referring to FIG. 107, the manner in which the ball is thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the first extended state.

As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state, and the lower displacement member 4
When the ball receiving part 467 disposed inside the ball receiving part 40 performs a firing operation with the ball received inside (ball receiving operation state), the ball receiving part 467 disposed inside the lower displacement member 440 releases the ball from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 as described above. The ball disposed inside the portion 467 is ejected to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

The ball ejected from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 falls freely onto the ball holder 710 of the rotation unit 700 disposed on the right side in front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

Next, the configuration of the ball holder 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. 108(a) is a top view of the ball holder 710, FIG. 108(b) is a front view of the ball holder 710, and FIG. 108(c) is the CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108(a). FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the ball pedestal 710 along the line. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball holder 710.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball holder 710 includes a tray holder 711 formed in a box shape.
, a solenoid 712 disposed inside the tray receiving portion 711 , a displacement member 713 connected to the solenoid 712 , and a cover member 714 covering the solenoid 712 .

The tray receiving part 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, an upright part 711b standing on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a throwing part 711c protruding from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a throwing part 711c. The shaft hole 711d is formed through an upright portion 711b that stands upright on the edge of the shaft.

The bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball throwing section 711c, which will be described later. As a result, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a is deflected (tilted) by the ball throwing part 711c.
Can be rolled to the side.

In addition, the bottom plate 711a is formed of a flexible material, and the lower surface of the bottom plate 711a (FIG. 10
8(c) (lower surface) is textured to form fine irregularities on the surface. This results in
When the bottom plate 711a is molded, the rate of heat shrinkage is made different between the top surface and the bottom surface so that it can easily bend toward the bottom surface. That is, when the textured bottom surface undergoes heat shrinkage due to the unevenness, it becomes difficult for force to act in the direction of convexly curving the bottom plate side. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed as a flat surface, when it is thermally shrunk, a horizontal pulling force acts and the end portion tends to change upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, it is possible to easily bend the ball in a direction that makes it easier to roll when it is thermally shrunk. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom plate 711a from becoming a defective product when molded.

The upright portion 711b is located above the outer edge of the ball throwing portion 711c in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 108(c)).
It is a wall part that is erected on the wall. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Thereby, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a can be suppressed from falling downward from the edge thereof. In this embodiment, the upright dimension of the upright portion 711b is approximately 1.5 of the diameter of the sphere.
set to double.

Further, the upright portion 711b is a central upright portion 711b1 that divides the area of the bottom plate 711a into two.
is connected to the upright portion 711b. The central upright portion 711b1 divides the upper area of the bottom plate 711a into an area where a ball is thrown and the other area where a solenoid 712 (described later) is disposed.

The ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. Also, in the left and right direction (Fig. 108 (
a) in the left-right direction) is located on the right side (right side in FIG. 108) of the approximate center position of the bottom plate 711a. Furthermore, the ball throwing portion 711c is protruded from the bottom plate and is therefore curved downward. Thereby, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can fall downward via the ball throwing part 711c. In addition, the prize opening 761a of the cover member 770 is arranged below the ball throwing part 711c (see FIG. 106), and the ball that falls from the ball throwing part 711c can be thrown into the inside of the winning hole 761a.

A shaft portion 713a of a displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. This results in
The displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

The solenoid 712 can piston-displace the shaft inserted into the solenoid 712 by applying electric power. A transmission member 712a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to a displacement member 713, which will be described later, and has a communicating hole 712a1 formed therethrough at its tip.

The displacement member 713 has a C-shaped cross section, and has a protrusion 71 at one end that protrudes outside the C-shape.
3b, and a C-shaped shaft portion 713a projecting inward at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. This causes solenoid 7
12 displacements are transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, displacement of the solenoid 712 drives the displacement member 713.

The cover member 714 is formed to have an outer shape larger than that of the solenoid 712, and is disposed above the solenoid 712 disposed on the upper part of the bottom plate 711a.
1 and is fastened and fixed. This allows the solenoid 712 to be fixed.

Next, the ball falling onto the ball holder 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. Figure 110 (
a) and FIG. 110(b) are cross-sectional views of the ball holder 710. Note that FIGS. 110(a) and 110(b) correspond to the cross section of the ball holder 710 in FIG. 108(c).

As shown in FIG. 110, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 falls freely in the direction of gravity, and due to the firing operation of the ball receiver 467, the ball is thrown toward the rotating unit 700 (right side in FIG. 110(a)). ). That is, the ball is dropped toward the bottom right of the bottom plate 711a of the ball holder 710 when viewed from the front.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball throwing part 711c, and the ball throwing part 711c is formed on the right side of the bottom plate 711a, so the upper surface of the bottom plate 711a where the ball falls. can be made into a slope that slopes downward to the right. Therefore, the direction of displacement of the ball and the direction of inclination of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls can be brought close to parallel.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 110(b), the ball that has fallen onto the bottom plate 711a moves upward (see FIG.
10(b) upward direction) can be suppressed. Therefore, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball holder 710 of the rotation unit 700 is
It is possible to suppress falling from 0.

Furthermore, the ball that has fallen onto the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the ball throwing section 711c by the momentum of the fall. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball to the ball throwing portion 711c can be shortened.
As a result, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball holder 710 can be thrown smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, light emission from the ball holder 710 will be described. Figure 111(a)
and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 700 taken along the line CXI-CXI in FIG. 87. Note that FIG. 111(a) shows the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 111(b) shows that the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state.
The decorative units 750 are illustrated in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), when the decoration unit 750 is placed in the closed state, light is emitted to the ball holder 710 by an LED board 721 placed on the back side of the back base 720. .

To explain in detail, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED board 721 is transferred to the lid member 77.
By reflecting the light toward the back side of the ball holder 710, the light is incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball holder 710. Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, the incident light can be diffusely reflected by the unevenness of the texture. This allows the entire bottom surface of the ball holder 710 to emit light.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111(b), when the decorative unit 750 is placed in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed in the lid member 770 as described above, so that the LED base 7
The 21 LEDs 721a are transmitted through the lid member 770 without being reflected. Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, the light can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and made to enter the ball holder 710.

Further, in this case, by rotating the third display section 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball holder 710 side (upper side in FIG.
The light emitted from D821 can be reflected by the inner wall of rotating body 800 and emitted from third display section 850.

As described above, the inner wall of the third display section 850 is textured, and a plurality of projections and depressions are formed on the surface. Therefore, the third display section 850 can more easily emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than the other display sections. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display section 850 on the ball holder 710 side.

Next, the detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, a structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 113 shows the upper displacement unit 90
0 is an exploded perspective front view of the vehicle. FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper displacement unit 900.
Note that FIGS. 112 to 114 illustrate a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is placed at the retracted position (the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 includes a base member 910 disposed on the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a base member 910 disposed inside the base member 910. a transmission member 920 , a rotation member 930 which is rotatably connected to the base member 910 and is displaced as the transmission member 920 is displaced, and a rotation member 930 whose one end is slidably and displaceably connected to the base member 410 . The upper displacement member 940 is connected to the upper displacement member 940 and is displaced by receiving the driving force from the rotation member 930.

The base member 910 is formed by combining two rectangular and laterally elongated plate members when viewed from the front, and includes a front base 911 disposed on the front side and a back base 912 disposed on the back side. A transmission member 920 and a rotating member 930 are arranged between the front base 911 and the rear base 912, which face each other.

The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 91 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 112).
1c, 911d, 911e, and a pivot pin 911b protruding toward the back side at the center position in the circumferential direction,
It is formed mainly of a shaft portion 911f protruding toward the front on one end side (left side in front view) of the front base, and an opening 911a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the one end side.

The opening 911a is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front base 911 is inserted to the rear side. Thereby, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted into the back side of the front base 911.

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted into shaft holes of a transmission gear 922 and a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, and can rotatably hold the transmission gear 922 and transmission gear 923. That is, the shaft support pins 911g and 911b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft holes of the transmission gears 922 and 923.

The sliding groove 911c is formed penetratingly in an arc shape centered on the axis of the pivot pin 911b. The sliding groove 911c is an opening into which a shaft support pin 923a of a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, is inserted, and the radius of the arc is approximately the same as the distance from the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923, which will be described later, to the shaft support pin 923a. Set. Thereby, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the pivot pin 923a inserted into the sliding groove 911c, collision between the pivot pin and the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c can be suppressed.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which pivot pins 951 and 952 of an upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction thereof is set larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pins 951 and 952. be done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction of the front base 911 (left and right direction in front view). On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered below the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the distances between the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d facing each other in the vertical direction are formed to be different. As a result, the inside of the sliding grooves 911e and 911d can be inserted into the pivot pin 9.
When 51 and 952 are slid, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated and slid due to the difference in distance between the vertically opposing sides.

The shaft portion 911f is formed to protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of a rotating member 930, which will be described later, and can hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

The back base 912 is a plate member attached to the back side of the front base 911 at a predetermined interval. Back base 912 is formed from a metal material. As a result, the base member 91
The overall rigidity of the 0 can be improved. As a result, the base member 9 is formed into a horizontally long rectangle.
When the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is disposed on the base member 910, twisting of the base member 910 can be suppressed.

The transmission member 920 is disposed between the front base 911 and the rear base 912, which face each other. The transmission member 920 includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, and a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5.
21 and a transmission gear 923 that meshes with the transmission gear 922.

As described above, the transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole. As a result, the transmission gear 9
21 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the drive motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 meshes with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above.
Thereby, the rotational driving force of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

The transmission gear 923 is formed with a pivot pin 923a protruding toward the front on its outer peripheral edge. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the pivot pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

The rotating member 930 is formed in the shape of a long rod on one side, and mainly includes a through hole 931 that is formed through the end of the one end in the front-rear direction, and an opening 932 that extends in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. be prepared and formed.

As described above, the through hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted, and by inserting the shaft portion 911f, the rotating member 930 can be rotated with respect to the front base 911. can be retained. Further, a biasing spring SP is provided at the tip of the shaft portion 911f.
8 are arranged. As a result, the rotating member 930 is biased in a direction that lifts the other end upward relative to the front base 911.

The opening 932 is a groove into which the pivot pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and is formed so that the pivot pin 923a can slide inside. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the pivot pin 923a is displaced, the pivot pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 932. Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is arranged with one end rotatably supported,
It is rotated about one end by displacement of the pivot pin 923a.

Further, on the other end side of the rotating member 930, an annular member 933 is disposed, which is formed into an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a plate shape with a predetermined thickness on the back side.

The front side of the annular member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along its outer periphery. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to an upper displacement member 940 described later, and a shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. Further, the annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, and as the rotation member 930 is rotationally displaced, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced.

A protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member, the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. can.

Further, the arcuate axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930, the first opening portion 960 can be displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the first opening portion 960 will be given later.

Note that on one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930, a shaft cover 913 and a deformation regulating cover 914, which are formed from a plate-shaped body, are disposed at the front. The shaft cover 913 is attached to the rotating member 93
The rotary member 930 is disposed in front of the rotating shaft portion of the rotary member 930, thereby suppressing rattling of the rotating member 930 in the front-rear direction. The deformation regulating cover 914 is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the rotating shaft, and can suppress deformation of the rotating member 930 in the front-back direction due to the weight of the upper displacement member 940 disposed on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 includes a base body 95 connected to the front base 911 and the rotation member 930.
0, two first openings 960 rotatably disposed on the back side of the base body 950,
The base body 950 mainly includes two second open portions 970 rotatably disposed on the front side and a variable portion 980 disposed on one end side.

The base body 950 has two pivot pins 951 and 952 formed protrudingly from the back surface of one end,
It is mainly formed with a shaft portion 953 that is formed protruding from the back surface of the other end side.

The pivot pins 951 and 952 fit into the sliding grooves 911e and 91 of the front base 911 as described above.
This is a protrusion inserted into 1d. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the pivot pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, thereby slidingly displacing the upper displacement member 940 in the left-right direction. At the same time, the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. Thereby, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotation member 930. Therefore, the rotating member 9
30 is rotationally displaced around one end by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the annular member 933
Due to the displacement, driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first open portions 960 are plate members having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the first open portions 960 are disposed on the back side of the base body 950. The first open portion 960 is rotatably supported on the other end of the base body 950. Further, the first opening portion 960 protrudes toward the back side and the annular member 9
A projection 961 is provided inside the sliding groove 933a of No. 33. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced relative to the rotation member 930 due to the displacement of the rotation member 930, the protrusion 9
61 can be slid inside the sliding groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a different position from the rotating axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Accordingly, the first opening portion 960 that is pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second open portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the second open portions 970 are arranged on the front side of the base body 950. The second open portion 970 is rotatably supported on the other end of the base body 950. Also. The second opening part 970 is formed with an engagement protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening part 960 is displaced a predetermined amount. As a result, as described above, when the first opening part 960 is rotationally displaced about the pivot portion when the upper displacement member 940 is subjected to a predetermined rotational displacement, the first opening part 960 engages with the second opening part 970. The second opening portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 shows the upper displacement unit 9 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the retracted position.
00 is a front view. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 disposed at an intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 placed in the extended position.

Note that the retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 means that the pivot pins 951 and 952 are
This is the position where the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of No. 1 are placed on the other end side (the right side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). In addition, the extended position means that the pivot pins 951 and 952 are
This is the position in which it is disposed at one end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e (left side in front view of the front base 911). Furthermore, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to a position intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the upper displacement member 940 changes its longitudinal direction from the approximately horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 115) to the approximately vertical direction ( (vertical direction in FIG. 117).

Further, along with the rotational displacement, the position of one end side of the upper displacement member 940 changes from the front base 911.
is displaced from the right end position in front view to approximately the center position in front view. That is, as described above, when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slid.

Furthermore, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 116 to the extended position shown in FIG. The second opening part 970, which is engaged with and displaced by the rotational displacement of the first opening part 960, is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, in the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is directed in the vertical direction, and the first opening part 960 and the second opening part 970 are in a displaced state.

Note that in this embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape that imitates the shape of a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, the first open part 960 and the second open part 960 are displaced from the first position to the third position.
By displacing the open portion 970, the player can visually recognize the displacement such that a human arm becomes thicker.

Next, the variable section 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118(a) is
118(b) is a front view of the variable part 980, and FIG. 118(b) is a rear view of the variable part 980.

As shown in FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape imitating a human hand, and includes a main body portion 981 forming the rear part of the hand, and a main body portion 981 that forms the rear part of the hand. It is formed mainly of finger parts 982 to 986 that are connected to form the finger parts of the hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is disposed inside the main body portion 981, and a variable plate (not shown) disposed inside can be moved by a piston in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 118(a)). be done.

The finger portion 982 corresponds to a thumb, and its base side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. Thereby, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are formed to mainly include a first link RB1 disposed on the base side and a second link RB2 disposed on the distal end side.

The first link RB1 is rotatably connected to the second link RB2 at its distal end and connected to the variable plate of the main body 981 at its base. Therefore, as the variable plate of the main body portion 981 makes a piston movement, the first link RB1 and the second link RB are connected via the first link RB1.
2 can be displaced. This allows the finger portions 983 to 986 to be displaced. Note that in this embodiment, by displacing the finger sections 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the opening and closing actions of the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 43).
a, 411b, two cylindrical pivot pins 411c, 411d protruding toward the back side, and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc shape with the pivot pin 411d as an axis. .

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by two protrusions 47 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440.
2,473 are the holes through which they are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, the protrusions 47 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b
2,473 along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, extending upward from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411 (see FIG. 4).
3 upward). Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged so that the axes of their circular arcs are located at different positions, and the gap between the opposing grooves in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 44 can be moved without applying rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440.
0 can be rotated as it slides.

The pivot pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Also,
The pivot pin 411c is formed from a metal rod and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
11c can be prevented from breaking (damaging).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment
I will explain about it. In the first embodiment, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2, but in the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment, the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466 It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2. Note that the same parts as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and a description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment. FIG. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Furthermore, Figure 120
Here, the decoration member 450 and front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. A transmission mechanism 2460 disposed displaceably between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 4 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480
50.

The base member 2470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472, 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and a standing wall 471a erected from the edge on the other end side to the front side. A protruding wall 477 that protrudes from the upper end of the center portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 120) in a vertically opposite U-shape toward the front side, shaft portions 474, 475 that project toward the front side; It is formed mainly of shaft parts 2470a and 2470b that protrude above 475.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468a (described later) is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468b (described later) is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As described below, transmission gear 246
8a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged such that gear tooth surfaces carved on their outer peripheral surfaces are meshed with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b in front view is the same as that of the transmission gear 2.
468a and the distance corresponding to the radius of the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is disposed in front of the base member 470 and has transmission gears 461, 4
62, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a movable rack having tooth surfaces that mesh with the transmission gear 463, and which is slidably disposed in front of the base member 470. 2464, a transmission gear 2468a that meshes with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b that meshes with the transmission gear 2468a, a rack 46 that meshes with the transmission gear 2468b, and a rack 466 that is rotatable to one end side. The ball receiving portion 467 is mainly provided with a ball receiving portion 467.

The movable rack 2464 is formed into a rectangular and oblong plate-like body when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision part 464f protruding from the lower end. It is mainly formed by

Rack gear 2464g is meshed with transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later. Thereby, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated in accordance with the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are respectively pivotally supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470 in a mutually meshed state as described above. As a result, transmission gear 2
When 468a is rotated, transmission gear 2468b is rotated. In addition, transmission gear 2468b
is meshed with rack gear 466a of rack 466, and when transmission gear 2468b is rotated, driving force is transmitted to rack 466 and rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. Note that the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are disposed at positions partially shifted in the front-back direction, and transmission gear 2468a and transmission gear 2468b are restrained from colliding with rack 466 and movable rack 2464, respectively.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be explained with reference to FIG. 121. Figure 121
is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that in FIG. 121, the decorative member 450 and front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are shown in a transparent state, similar to FIG. 120.

As shown in FIG. 121, electric power is applied to the drive motor KM2, and the above-mentioned transmission mechanism 24
60, when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the firing position, the movable rack 464 and the rack 46
6 are displaced in mutually different directions.

To explain in detail, by rotating the drive motor KM4, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (left side in FIG. 121). Along with this displacement, the transmission gear 24
68a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (to the right in FIG. 3). Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is opposite to the direction of displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the center of gravity position of the displacement member 2440 can be reduced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. As a result, shaking of the lower displacement member 2440 due to a change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment
I will explain about it. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by a rack and pinion mechanism, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by a link mechanism. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments include:
The same reference numerals are given and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. 122(a) shows the lower displacement member 344 in the third embodiment.
122(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 125(a) and 91(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440.

Note that in FIG. 125(a), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 125(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 are shown transparently. The state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 3470, and a case member 480 and the base. A transmission mechanism 3460 disposed displaceably between the member 3470 and a decorative member 45 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.
0.

The base member 3470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude from the back surface on one end side, and a standing wall 471a that stands from the edge on the other end side to the front side. A sliding wall 3470c is formed continuously from the base end side of the standing wall 471a and is erected at the lower edge of the base member 3470, and an upper end of the central part in the left-right direction (FIG. 122(a) left-right direction) The base member 470 mainly includes a protruding wall 477 that protrudes in a vertically opposite U-shape toward the front side, and an opening 479 that is recessed and extends from one end to the other end in the vertical center of the base member 470. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion that comes into contact with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 to regulate the position (aspect) of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, it is formed to protrude to a position below the ball receiving part 467. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with the opening of the U-shaped portion facing upward.

Furthermore, the sliding wall 3470c has a recessed portion 3470 recessed below the end on the side of the standing wall 471a.
c1 is formed. The recessed portion 3470c1 is a groove that receives the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 therein. Thereby, when the ball receiving part 467 is slid toward the upright part side by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later, the ball receiving part 467 can be received in the recess and the ball receiving part 467 can be rotated. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can perform a firing operation (an operation of ejecting the ball held inside the U-shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480, which will be described later;
A first link member 3468 rotatably connected to the shaft of drive motor KM2, a second link member 3469 rotatably connected to the first link member 3468, and the second link member 3469 and a ball receiving portion 467 connected to one end side.

The first link member 3468 is formed from a rectangular horizontally elongated plate-like body, and has a shaft hole 3468b penetratingly formed at one end side, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a bulging hole at the other end side. A load portion 3468c is formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole into which a rotating shaft 3469a of a second link member 3469, which will be described later, is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 3469a and is formed through the shaft hole 3468b in the front-rear direction.

As described above, the connecting hole 3468a is a hole that is fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and is formed to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. By fitting and fastening the shaft of the drive motor KM2 into the connection hole 3468a, the first link member 3468 connects the drive motor KM2 with the shaft of the drive motor KM2.
It is possible to rotate with the driving force of 2.

The load portion 3468c is formed to bulge out from the connecting hole 3468a toward the other end. Load section 3
46c is a member for applying a load to position the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side than the connecting hole 3468a, and is formed to bulge outward from the one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the first link member 3469
It is arranged on the back side of 68. The second link member 3469 has a rotating shaft 3469a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the other end toward the front, and a through hole 3469b that is formed at one end to penetrate in the front-rear direction.
It is formed mainly by

The rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468, as described above. Thereby, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 can be connected in a rotatable state.

The through hole 3469b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. Further, the through hole 3469b is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467 and the through hole 3469b are arranged coaxially, and a screw with a head larger than the width of the opening 469 in the transverse direction is inserted into the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b from the back side of the base member 3470. By inserting and fastening into the through hole 3469b, the ball receiving part 4
67 is rotatably connected to the second link member.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and back of the base member 470, and
It mainly includes a front case 3481 arranged on the front side of 0 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 3481 is formed into a rectangular and horizontally elongated plate shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 3481d penetrated at a position facing the drive motor KM2, and a bottom wall portion 481b protruding from the lower end surface on the back side.
and a shaft hole 481c that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower edge.

The opening 3481d is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 is inserted to the back side, and is formed to have a larger outer diameter than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the back side.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, and FIG.
b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position. FIG. 127(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position.

Note that from FIG. 126(a) to FIG. 127(b), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are sequentially illustrated. Also, FIG. 126(a) and FIG. 126(b) or FIG. 127(a) and FIG.
7(b) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the lower displacement member 440 in the first position has a first link member 3468 and a second link member 3469 in the longitudinal direction (in the left-right direction in FIG. 126(a)).
is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470 (left-right direction in FIG. 126(a)), and the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed at one end side of the base member 3470 (left side in FIG. 126(a)). Thereby, the second link member 3469 is arranged at one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 touches the base member 3470. is displaced relative to. As a result, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, the second link member 346
One end side of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and is slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, so that one end side of the second link member 3469 is pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470. . As a result, the ball receiving portion 46 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469
7 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(a), the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the second position, and the first link member 3468 is rotated approximately 180 degrees from the first position. , the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to its rotation axis. Therefore, the second link member 34
One end side of 69 is further pushed out to the other end side of base member 3470, and ball receiving part 467 is arranged in the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is placed inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the biasing spring SP2 and performs a firing operation.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced toward one end of the base member 3470. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the center of gravity position of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the direction opposite to the direction of displacement of the ball receiving part 467. The change in the center of gravity position of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, shaking of the lower displacement member 440 due to a change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127(b), by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468, the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position. Therefore, there is no need to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be quickly performed.

Therefore, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiver 467, the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes, so the lower displacement member 3440 tends to shake, but the ball receiver 467 can be quickly evacuated. By quickly bringing the center of gravity position closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440, it is possible to suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 3440.

Furthermore, by immediately displacing the ball receiving part 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the ejecting operation when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467.

That is, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward as a reaction. Immediately displacing the ball receiver 467 applies a force that displaces the base member 470 downward due to the reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiver 467, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the lower displacement unit 44 in the fourth embodiment
00 will be explained. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower displacement member 440 disposed in the retracted state is formed to be able to fire, but the lower displacement unit 440 in the fourth embodiment
0, the firing operation of the lower displacement member 440 placed in the retracted state is restricted. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of a lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 128, the decoration member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown with a chain line. Further, FIG. 128 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has an opening formed in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the facing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. 4471b is formed.

A tip portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

The front base 411 is provided with a substantially L-shaped engagement wall 4411g that is continuous with the bottom surface of the collection port 411f.

The engagement wall 4411g can prevent the ball receiver 467 from rotating at the third position (shooting operation) by inserting the substantially L-shaped tip portion 4411g1 into the opening 4471b. . That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 located in the retracted state.

Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. 129 and 130, similar to FIG. 128, the decoration member 450 and front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are shown in a transparent state, and the front case 48
The bottom wall portion 481b of FIG. 1 is illustrated by a chain line.

Further, FIG. 129 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the third position. Further, FIG. 130 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the first position.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engagement wall 4411g, and the recess 481
Entry into b1 or opening 4471b is restricted. This restricts rotation of the ball receiving portion 467.

Therefore, when the ball receiving part 467 is caused to perform a discharging operation in order to eject the ball thrown onto the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the third position. rotates,
It is possible to suppress the game balls held inside the ball receiving part 467 from being ejected.

That is, with the displacement of the ball receiving part 467 to the third position, the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 is changed when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) from the orbital area of the ball receiving part 467. can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first extended state position (a position other than the retracted state position), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engagement wall 4411g are spaced apart. Therefore, in the first extended state, the ball receiver 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform a firing operation.

That is, with the displacement of the ball receiving part 467 to the third position, when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) from the orbital area of the ball receiving part 467, the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 changes. While it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the ball receiving part 467 holds the prescribed number of game balls by suppressing the change in the ball position, the ball receiving part 467 is engaged when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first and second extended positions. Wall 4411g is opening 4471b
As the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the leg portion 467a
By being engaged with the opening 4471b, the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 can be changed, and a prescribed number of game balls can be easily discharged from the ball receiving part 467.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135, the distribution unit 55 in the fifth embodiment
00 will be explained. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulation state, but in the fifth embodiment, the distribution member 540 slides and displaces to form the storage state and the regulation state. do. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of a distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. 131(a) is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500.
FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 134 shows CXXXIV-C in FIG. 131(a).
FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 5500 along the XXXIV line. In addition, in FIG. 134, the outer shape of the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the sorting unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment includes a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a base plate 5520 attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and facing the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths between which balls can flow, and a distribution member 5540 that is slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520.
and an extension path member 530 that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 5520 and extends the downward flow path of the ball formed between the opposing base plate 5520 and the path forming member 510.

The base plate 5520 has two cylindrical shaft portions 5526 protruding toward the back side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed through the rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section with the upper end open on the side surface of the upper end. It is formed mainly of a rolling part 525 which is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking part 524 which projects in a hook shape from the back side.

Two shaft portions 5526 are formed to protrude from the back side, and are inserted into two sliding grooves 5546, which will be described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are connected to the regulating plate 54 of the distribution member 5540, which will be described later.
1 and the storage plate 5542 are inserted through the opening, and the opening has a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. Further, since the distribution member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger in the sliding direction of the distribution member 5540 than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. formed in the opening.

The distribution member 5540 is formed into a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with one end being long, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 5540 includes a regulating plate 55 that projects like a plate toward the front side.
41 and storage plate 5542, a sliding groove 5546 formed in an elongated hole extending in substantially the same direction as the regulation plate 5541 and storage plate 5542, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 formed on the back side.
It is formed mainly by

The regulation plate 5541 connects the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path K through the first opening 5521.
The game ball disposed at the connecting part with R2 and flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 is placed on the second ball throwing route KR1.
It is a plate member that restricts the flow into R2, and the distance it projects from the first opening 5521 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a straight line shape when viewed from the front, and the direction in which it extends is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. the result,
The opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The storage plate 5542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second ball throwing route KR2 and allows the game balls flowing down the second ball throwing route KR2 to flow down to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542,
The distance projected from the second opening 5522 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a linear shape when viewed from the front, and the direction in which it extends is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. the result,
The opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the sliding groove 5546. Therefore, the shaft portion 5526 is inserted into the sliding groove 55.
46 and by fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back side, the distribution member 5540 can be held in a slidable state relative to the base plate 5520.

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two locations, with their longitudinal directions parallel to each other. Thereby, the distribution member 5540 can be slidably displaced while suppressing rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

Next, displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be explained with reference to FIG. 135. Figure 135
(a) and FIG. 135(b) show the distribution unit 550 in the range CXXXV of FIG.
It is a partially enlarged view of 0. Note that FIG. 135(a) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is placed at the storage position, and FIG. 135(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is placed in the restriction position.

As shown in FIG. 135(a), when the distribution member 5540 is placed in the regulation position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged in the shape of the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 5541 is placed on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is placed inside a recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip of the storage plate 5542 protruding inward from the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path that faces the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first ball throwing path KR1) is stored in the storage plate 55.
It is stopped upstream of 42.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135(b), when the distribution member 5540 is placed at the restriction position, the restriction plate 5541 is placed at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3. , a regulating plate 5541 is disposed at a connecting portion between the first ball throwing route KR1 and the third ball throwing route KR3, and a storage plate 5542 is arranged in the recess 5 formed on the wall on the back side of the route forming member 510.
It is placed inside 19.

In this case, the distance L10 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 5541 protruding inward of the first ball throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulation position and the storage position, a ball thrown on the first ball throwing path KR1 is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third ball throwing path KR3; The ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 is not allowed to flow into the third ball throwing route KR3,
A state in which the ball is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2 can be created.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing one sorting member 5540, when the first downstream path is divided into two downstream paths, the downstream path of the ball can be reliably switched to either one.

Further, the regulating plate 5541 (distributing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path), and its appearance and retraction position is as follows.
It is an inner wall on an extended line in the downstream direction at the downstream end of the first ball throwing route KR1. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be made to protrude at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulation plate 5541 starts to protrude into the downstream path or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination using the regulation plate 5541.

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 (distributing means) is projected into the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branching path) to move the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) into the second ball throwing path ( Since the protruding direction of the regulating plate 5541 is set to point toward the upstream end of the second ball throwing route KR2, the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 make a protruding action. If the game ball comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the regulation plate, the game ball will be moved to the second
It can be pushed into the throwing path KR. As a result, the distribution to the second ball throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 140, rotation unit 670 in the sixth embodiment
0 will be explained. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the load gear 731e is connected to drive the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is restricted from operating by inertia force, but the rotating body 800 in the sixth embodiment is Gear 731e is removed. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. FIG. 136 is a front view of a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 6700. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 6500.

As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the rotation unit 6700 includes a rotating body 8 that is rotationally displaced.
00, a ball holder 710 placed above the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, a back base 720 placed on the back side of the ball holder 710 and the decoration unit 6750, and the decoration unit 6750. Left side transmission member 7 disposed on the left side in front view
30 and a crank cover 743 disposed on the right side of the decoration unit 6750 when viewed from the front.

The decoration unit 6750 includes a box member 760 formed in a box shape whose upper side in the direction of gravity is open.
and a rotating body 800 rotatably disposed inside the box member.
That is, in the first embodiment, the rotating body 800 is arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the decoration unit 750 is formed with the lid member 770 removed. Ru.

The left side transmission member 730 is attached with a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface of the decoration unit 750 (left side in FIG. 136), a transmission member 6731 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. The motor base 732, the gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and the ball throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and is formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the opposite side. be prepared and formed.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c. and a transmission gear 731d that is arranged adjacent to and coaxially with the shaft 735.

Transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits driving force to transmission gear 731c. In addition, the first
In the embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached inside the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b of the sixth embodiment. Furthermore, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as in the first embodiment,
A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when driving force in one direction is transmitted from drive motor KM4, rotational driving force can be transmitted to shaft 735, and when driving force in the other direction is transmitted from drive motor KM4, rotational driving force can be transmitted to the inner ring of one-way clutch OW1. As a result, the outer ring slips (slips) and the transmission of driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off.

Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. 139(a) to 139(c) are side views of the decoration unit 6750 as seen in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138, and FIGS. 140(a) to 140(c) are side views as seen in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. It is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in FIG.

139 and 140, the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is shown transparently. In addition, in FIGS. 139(a) to 139(c), the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800
140(a) to 140(c), the manner in which the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 displaces the first section DK1 is sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced clockwise (as viewed from the direction of FIG. 139) to the left (as viewed from the direction of FIG. 139).

As described above, the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically about the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state in which the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140(a) is placed above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140(b) is displaced to a position approximately parallel to the rotation axis. Once started, the load exerts a rotating force in the direction of rotation.

Therefore, the engagement of the rollers interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) takes the lead with respect to the inner ring (drive motor side). and is in a state where it is driven. That is, in the second section, the rotational speed of the rotating body 800 can be made faster than the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

Note that the rotating body 800 that rotates in the second section DK2 with the load is rotated in the direction shown in FIG.
The center of gravity G shown in 9(c) is rotated to a position below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in a direction opposite to the direction in which the rotating body 800 rotates. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 and enhance the presentation effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring (that is, increases the displacement speed of the lid member 770) due to its own weight. The displacement member 7710 in this embodiment uses the weight of the game ball to advance the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 relative to the inner ring (that is, increases the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

141 and 142 are schematic side views of a displacement unit 7700 in the seventh embodiment. Note that in FIG. 141, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is placed in the raised position is different from that in FIG.
Here, a state in which the displacement member 7710 is placed in the lowered position is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 includes a displacement member 7710 formed to be slidably displaceable, and transmits rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to the displacement member 7710. It mainly includes a transmission member 7720 that rotates, and a load gear 7730 that rotates as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The displacement member 7710 is a member supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the virtual line L1, and a driven pin 7711 protrudes from the side surface of the displacement member 7710.
It mainly includes a rack gear 7712 carved along the imaginary line L1 on the lower surface of the displacement member 7710, and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported on the tip of the displacement member 7710.

Note that the virtual line L1 is set as a straight line that slopes downward from the raised position shown in FIG. 141 to the lowered position shown in FIG. 142. That is, in the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is located higher in the direction of gravity than in the lowered position.

The driven pin 7711 is connected to the drive groove 772 in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720.
3b, and is formed as a cylindrical body with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding a game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and by being rotated around the rotation axis 7713a, it can be switched between the upright state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. 142. It is said that it can be formed. In the upright state, one end side protrudes beyond the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, making it possible to hold the game ball (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

Note that the ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by an urging force acting from an unillustrated urging spring (for example, a torsion spring). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the orbit of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), and when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the lowered position, the engagement pin 7740 is attached to the other end of the ball receiving member 7713. 7740 is engaged, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated and placed in a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring.
Returns to the leaning state.

The transmission member 7720 includes a disk-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by the aforementioned driving means (not shown), and a rotating member 77 that protrudes from an axial end surface of the rotating member 7721.
A cylindrical drive pin 7722 located eccentrically from the rotation center of 21, and the drive pin 772
The arm member 77 has a driven groove 7723a that is slidably inserted into one end of the arm member 77.
Mainly equipped with 23.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the drive means. Specifically, the one-way clutch OW1 has an inner ring connected to a driving means, an outer ring connected to a rotating member 7721, and when the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means. While transmitting the rotational driving force to the outer ring (that is, rotating the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A), the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means. , disconnects power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721).

The arm member 7723 has a driving groove 77 on the other end side opposite to the one end side where the driven groove 7723a is opened, into which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted.
23b is formed as an opening, and between the driven groove 7723a and the drive groove 7723b (
(intermediate portion) is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 7723c.

Note that the drive pin 7722 is formed as a cylindrical body with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b are connected to the arm member 7.
723 is formed as a linear groove along the longitudinal direction.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, the displacement member 7710 is
When the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the raised position shown in FIG. is rotated clockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation axis 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates clockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push down the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid along the imaginary line L1, and as shown in FIG. It is placed in the lowered position shown in .

On the other hand, from the state in which the displacement member 7710 is placed in the lowered position shown in FIG.
721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation axis 7723c. is rotated to As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push up the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid along the imaginary line L1, and as shown in FIG. It is placed in the raised position shown at 141.

Here, like the load gear 731e in the first embodiment, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating. As a result, the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723, causing the rotation member 7721 to move in the direction of arrow A (FIG. 141).
By rotating the one-way clutch OW1 (clockwise), it is possible to prevent the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 from leading the inner ring in one direction (the direction of arrow A). That is, in a state where no game ball is held, it is possible to suppress the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 from increasing when going from the raised position to the lowered position.

That is, the rotating member 7721 moves in the direction of arrow A (FIGS. 141 and 1) due to the rotational driving force of the driving means.
42 clockwise), the displacement member 7710 reciprocates between the raised position and the lowered position (slide displacement) at a sliding speed corresponding to the rotational driving speed of the rotational driving means.
be done.

143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when a game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. Note that FIG. 143 shows a state in which the displacement member 7710 is placed in the raised position, and FIG. 144 shows a state in which the displacement member 7710 is placed in the lowered position.
Each is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed to be able to hold a game ball on its upper surface. That is, in this embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is disposed in the area where the game ball flows down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed to be able to receive the game ball flowing down on its upper surface. In addition, in FIG. 143, the four game balls indicated by the symbol T are the displacement member 7.
A state where it is held on the upper surface of 710 is illustrated.

In this case, when the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavier) by the weight of the game ball to overcome the resistance caused by the rotation of the load gear 7730. can be done. That is, by applying the entire weight of the displacement member 7710 (the weight including the game ball) to the arm member 7723 and rotating the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 can be advanced in one direction (direction of arrow A) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the raised position to the lowered position can be made faster than the displacement speed when no game ball is held (see FIG. 141).

Furthermore, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be varied depending on the number of game balls held. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be varied (changed) not only depending on whether or not the displacement member 7710 holds game balls, but also depending on the number of game balls held. As a result, variations in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be increased accordingly.

As described above, the displacement member 7710 is provided with the ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (the end on the downwardly inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or ball receiving member 7713) receives a game ball flowing down the game area, the displacement member 7710 receives the game ball from the game ball.
The force applied to the slider can be applied as a force for sliding the slider toward the lowered position. That is, such force can be applied via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 in a direction that causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to advance in one direction (the direction of arrow A) relative to the inner ring.

This allows the falling game ball to be moved by the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 771).
3), the kinetic energy of the game ball can be used to make the displacement speed of the sliding displacement of the displacement member 7710 in the direction toward the lowered position faster.

In this case, the falling game balls have different flowing directions and flowing speeds. Therefore,
The force (magnitude of kinetic energy) applied to the displacement member 7710 can be varied depending on the difference in the falling state (flowing direction and speed) of the game ball to be received. This allows you to check not only whether or not the displacement member 7710 holds game balls or the number of game balls held,
The displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is also varied (changed) according to the falling state of the game ball.
be able to. As a result, variations in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be increased accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the rotating direction of the rotating member 7721 is set to be one direction, there is no need to switch the driving direction of the driving means. In other words, by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time required to switch the driving direction of the driving means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced without the need to switch the driving means.

In this case, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the reaction occurs when the ball receiving member 7713 rotates and drops the game ball received by the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713). Shaking of the displacement member 7710 can be suppressed.

That is, when a game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load on the displacement member 7710 becomes lighter by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 77
13 causes a force to displace the displacement member 7710 downward, thereby canceling out the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710.

Note that the game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to a game ball that moves along the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13 in the direction of gravity, but also includes a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Examples of game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include game balls that collide with nails, tulips, objects, etc. and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity, and balls that roll on a stage and then jump off the stage. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

Here, in this embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 is not holding a game ball (see FIG. 141), the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position. , the outer ring of one-way clutch OW1 is oriented in one direction (arrow A) with respect to the inner ring.
(in other words, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is moved against the inner ring when the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position. The displacement member 7710 may be configured to advance in one direction (arrow A direction) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 becomes faster). That is, only the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723, and the rotation member 7721 is moved in the direction of arrow A (Fig.
41 clockwise), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 may precede the inner ring.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. In the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, a rotation operation unit 8650 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, regarding the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 in the eighth embodiment, FIG.
This will be explained with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit 8650. Figure 14
7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG. 145.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged in the internal space of the upper tray 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation section 8654, which will be described later, protrudes outward from the upper tray 8017. It will be placed in such a state.

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6, and a transmission gear 86 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651.
52, a shaft portion 8653 that is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, a one-way clutch OW1 whose inner ring is fitted onto the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 into which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted. It is formed mainly by

Transmission gear 8651 is connected to the shaft of drive motor KM6. Therefore, drive motor KM6
By applying rotational driving force to the transmission gear 8651, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated. As mentioned above,
A transmission gear 8652 is disposed in mesh with the transmission gear 8651. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 865 is transmitted through the transmission gear 8651.
You can rotate 2.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a cylindrical shape, and its axial length is the same as that of the rotation operation portion 86.
54 is formed longer than the width dimension in the left and right direction. As described above, one end of the shaft portion 8653 is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other end is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Thereby, the driving force generated when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As mentioned above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and a roller engaged between them, and when the inner ring rotates in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring, and the inner ring can rotate in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be prevented from being transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation section 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is disposed with a portion of its outer peripheral surface protruding from the upper plate 8017. Furthermore, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted into the inner circular portion of the rotation operation portion 8654. That is, the inward inclination of the rotation operation portion 8654 is formed to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, rotation is transmitted to the rotation operation section 8654 by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651, 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. is rotated. On the other hand, drive motor KM6
When the one-way clutch OW1 is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 are disconnected from each other, and the transmission of the rotational drive to the rotational operation section 8654 is cut off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the case where the player operates the rotation operation section 8654 will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the cross section of FIG. 148 is similar to that of FIG. 147.
corresponds to

As described above, the rotation operation section 8654 is configured such that the rotation operation section 8654 rotates when the drive motor KM6 is rotated, and the rotation operation section 8654 rotates when the drive motor KM6 does not rotate. An embodiment in which the displacement is stopped can be formed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 148, the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction, and the rotation operation section 8
654 is rotated in the direction A, when the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation section 8654 to cause the rotation operation section 8654 to generate rotational force in the same direction as the rotation A direction, the one-way clutch O
The outer circumferential surface of W1 and the rotation operation section 8654 are rotated first. That is, the rotation operation section 865
4 can be operated by the player at a rotation speed faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6.

Further, when the rotational operation section 8654 is not rotated (the drive motor KM6 is not rotated), the player rotationally displaces the rotational operation section 8654 by applying a driving force to the rotational operation section 8654 in the direction of rotation A. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation section 8654 not only forms a non-rotating or rotating state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also a mode in which the rotation operation section 8654 rotates from a stopped state by the player's operation. Further, it is possible to form a mode in which the rotation operation section 8654 is rotated at a faster speed from the rotation state by the player's operation.

As a result, it is possible to create a plurality of modes in which the displacement mode of the rotary operation section 8654 is made visible to the player, thereby making it possible to provide interest to the player. Further, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation section 8654, it is possible to form a plurality of presentation modes of the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to increase the number of presentations and provide interest to the players.

Note that a sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations is placed on the side surface of the rotational operation section 8654, and effects that change based on the number of rotations and rotational speed of the rotational operation section 8654 can be performed.

Next, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. The plate-like protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment includes an inclined surface 9431b1 formed so that the contact surface with the cam member 422 is inclined. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 149(a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that FIG. 149(b)
corresponds to the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 56(a).

Note that, similarly to the lower displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and A transmission member 420 disposed on the base member 410 and the transmission member 4
A lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) that is displaced by transmission of driving force from 20 is provided. Further, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a link member 94 that is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440 and is displaced as the transmission member 420 is driven.
30, and the lower displacement member 440 is displaced by displacement of the link member 9430.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is bent into a generally doglegged shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 9431 has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 149(a)), and a through hole 431a that protrudes toward the back side on the other end side (in the direction of arrow U in FIG. 149(a)). a cylindrical connecting protrusion 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-shaped protrusion 9431b protruding to a position facing the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a cylindrical sliding protrusion 431d protruding toward the front side of the bent portion. And prepare.

The plate-like protrusion 9431b extends in a curved manner about the axis of the through hole 431a, and protrudes toward the front side (front base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). In addition, the plate-like protrusion 94
The protruding dimension of the cam member 31b is set larger than the thickness (dimension in the direction of arrow FB) of the cam member 422. Further, the protruding end surface of the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) are arranged with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149(b))).

The cam member 422 is disposed in such a manner that it can be displaced in a region between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps, which are the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410, are larger than the distance X14 described above. It is set large.

As a result, the first link member 9
431 is bent, the protruding end surface of the plate-like projection 9431b can be brought into contact with the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 42 is placed between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
2 can be prevented from being pinched and the displacement being restricted.

Further, the plate-like projection 9431b includes an inclined surface 9431b1 that protrudes toward the front side toward the cam member 422 on the circumferential side surface on the cam member 422 side (arrow L direction side in FIG. 149(b)). As shown in FIG. 149(b), the inclined surface 9431b1 is on the protruding side (arrow F direction side)
It is formed to be inclined at approximately 45 degrees towards the front.

As a result, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like protrusion 9431b, the cam member 422 is moved toward the back surface of the first link member 9431 (on the side in the direction of arrow F). surface), and the first link member 94
The protruding end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the plate-like projection 9431b of No. 31 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 from swinging in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the second displacement state.

In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 be formed at the end of the cam member 422 at a portion that contacts the inclined surface 9431b1. As a result, the cam member 422
When the inclined surface 9431b1 comes into contact with the cam member 422, the cam member 422 can be easily displaced toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B).

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment
I will explain about it. In the first embodiment, the general winning a prize unit 150 includes the adhesive tape 1
In the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is attached to the inner side of the decorative member 10154 separated by a predetermined width from the end. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 150 is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 150 shows
This corresponds to the cross-sectional view in FIG. In addition, the general winning opening unit 1015 in the tenth embodiment
0 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13 (the front of the base board 60), like the general winning a prize unit 150 in the first embodiment, and is capable of changing the path of the game ball flowing down the game area. . In addition, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 is located at the end of the lower side in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) with respect to the gaming area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is placed along the section.

Furthermore, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 includes a main body part 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and a first upright part 152 that stands upright from the end of the main body part 151 on the front side (in the direction of arrow F). (see FIG. 12), and a second upright portion 153 (see FIG. 12) extending from the upper end of the first upright portion 152 in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the gaming area. a)) and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 (see FIG. 12(a)) formed on the front side of the main body portion 151.

As shown in FIG. 150, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decorative member 10154 arranged on the back surface of the main body part 10151. In the decorative member 10154, an adhesive tape 10154a that is adhered to the main body portion 151 is attached to the inner side of the decorative member 10154, which is separated by a predetermined width from the end of the decorative member 10154. As a result, the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a is
A predetermined gap (space) is formed at the end of the decorative member 10154 between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 10154. As a result, if the player holds the pachinko machine 10 (Fig.
When the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 is viewed from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the player (see), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the boundary between the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 10154. .

To explain in detail, by forming an air layer between the end of the decorative member 10154 and the main body 151, the inside of the main body 151 is reflected and the air is drawn from the end of the main body 151 (sloped surface 151a) toward the player. It is possible to prevent the light L emitted from being affected by the decoration at the end of the decorative member 10154 (to make it difficult for the wavelength of the light L to be changed). In addition, the light that passes through the adhesive tape 10154a and is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body 151 and is emitted to the outside of the main body 151, so that the player When reflected toward the viewpoint, the influence of the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be reduced.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player, and when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 change. This can make it difficult to recognize the boundaries of As a result, the decorative member 60c can be
When the player visually recognizes the decoration of the decorative member 10154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c of the base plate and the decoration of the decorative member 10154 as one decoration, and also to (Viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of aircraft 10 (see Figure 1))
When viewed from above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see that the decoration is divided by making it difficult to see the decoration at the border.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment
40 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 450 is irradiated with light by the control board 491 disposed on the back side of the lower displacement member 440. However, the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment The player can recognize the position of the game ball inside by the light emitted from 491. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment
The overall configuration of 40 will be explained. FIG. 151 shows the lower displacement member 11 in the eleventh embodiment.
440 is an exploded perspective front view. 152(a) and 152(b) show the lower displacement member 11
440 is a front view. Note that in FIG. 152(a), the outer shape of the light emitting body 11491a disposed on the control board 491 is illustrated by a chain line, and in FIG. 152(b), a state with the decorative member 11450 removed is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 152(a) and 152(b), the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45), and the front and rear of the base member 470. a case member 480 that covers the case member 480 and the base member 4;
70, and a decorative member 11450 that is formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 (in the direction of arrow FB).

The decorative member 11450 is formed to have an external shape imitating a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 11450 includes a front side decorative part 11451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 (in the direction of arrow F), and a back side decoration part arranged on the back side of the back case 482 (in the direction of arrow B). 452. Note that in this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450.

The front decoration part 11451 is formed to have a larger outer shape than the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481. This makes it possible to make the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front side decorative part 11451 invisible to the player. Further, the front side decorative portion 11451 includes a transparent portion 11451b formed from a light-transmitting material on the inside in a front view.

The transmission section 11451b includes a plurality of light emitters 11491 arranged on a control board 491, which will be described later.
It is formed in the entire area facing the position a, and can guide the light emitted from the plurality of light emitters 11491a to the player side. In addition, the transparent part 11451b is on the front side (arrow F direction side)
is curved toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) toward the outer end in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD). As a result, light incident from the back side of the transmitting portion 11451b is transmitted to the transmitting portion 11451b.
When the light passes through the inside of 451b and is emitted from the front side, it is made easier to diffuse.

The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, and a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and is disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the base member 470, a transmission gear 465 rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464, and a base. A rack gear 476 formed on the member 470 and having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465; and a movable rack 46 that has a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465.
A rack 11466 that is arranged to be slidable on the front side of 4, and the rack 11466
It mainly includes a ball receiving part 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the ball.

The rack 11466 is formed from a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, and a rack gear 466a carved from the other end in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrow L) to the rear side (direction of arrow B). A shaft portion 466b that projects in a cylindrical shape, two sliding plates 466c that project toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and a recessed portion on the back surface extending from one end in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrow R) to the other end. 59), and a shielding plate 11466e that protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a.

The shielding plate 11466e is made of a non-light-transmitting material and can block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. In addition, the shielding plate 11466e has an upwardly protruding height (
The height in the direction of arrow U) is higher than the light emitting body 11491a disposed on the back side (position in the direction of arrow U). As a result, as the rack 11466 is displaced, the shielding plate 1146
By displacing 6e in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), it is possible to block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a.

The control board 491 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitters 11491a that can irradiate light to the front side. The plurality of light emitters 11491a are arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower displacement member 11440, and are ball receivers arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470. 467 (in the direction of arrow U). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the light emitting part 11491a from being blocked by the ball receiving part 467.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, a state in which the game ball is thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. 153(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, and FIG. 153(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. 153(a). ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line in FIG. 153(a).

As shown in FIG. 153, when a game ball is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the received game ball is placed in a position overlapping the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the light emitting body 11491a. Thereby, the game ball received by the ball receiver 467 can block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a toward the player. As a result, the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 11440 by the shadow created by blocking the light.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, a control board 491 is provided on the back side of the decorative member 11450 and is capable of emitting light toward the displacement area of the ball receiver 467.
The ball receiver 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiver 467 blocks the light emitted from the control board 491 and reduces the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450. Since the parts are made to differ, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 located on the front side of the ball receiving part 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 is different from that emitted from the decorative member 11450 in other positions. By varying the amount of light (darkening and forming a shadow), the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light differs. The player can be made aware of this.

To explain in detail, when the control board 491 is arranged on the back side of the ball receiving part 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving part 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467. By doing so, the amount of light emitted from the ball receiving portion 467 or the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 can be made darker than other parts of the decorative member 11450. As a result, the player can be made aware that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is small (dark).

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape to receive the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and the light emitting body 1149
1a is placed at a higher position than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467,
The light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be made less likely to be emitted onto the ball receiver 467. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a causes the ball receiving part 46 to receive the game ball.
It is possible to prevent the outer shape of the rack 11466 that slides and displaces the ball receiving portion 467 and the ball receiving portion 467 from forming a shadow on the transparent portion 11451b. As a result, only the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 can form a shadow on the transparent part 11451b, so the ball receiving part 467 is displaced in a state where no game ball is received in the ball receiving part 467. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from drawing attention to the ball receiver 467.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment
I will explain about it. In the eleventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a by the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 is blocked, but in the twelfth embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is The three pieces 12467e block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154(b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion 12467. Note that Fig. 154 (a
), a part of the ball receiving portion 12467 is illustrated with a chain line.

Note that, similarly to the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45), and the front and rear portions of the base member 470. a case member 480 that covers the case member 480;
A decorative member 11450 is formed in a manner to cover the front and rear (in the direction of arrow FB). Further, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is the case member 480
and a transmission mechanism 12460 which is disposed displaceably between the base member 470 and has a ball receiving part 12467c which can be deformed by receiving a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and a second piece 12467d connected to the first piece 12467c. , a third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and disposed on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are parts that hold the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 12440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 12467c
When a game ball is thrown between the opposing sides of the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is displaced in the direction of separating from the first piece 12467c, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12
467d are arranged in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and a game ball can be held inside the U-shape.

The first piece 12467c includes a receiving piece 12467c4 forming an L-shape in front view, forming one extending side, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and the receiving piece 12467c4 and the leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 12467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b passing through the connecting portion (bending portion) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed, and a connecting portion 12467c1 protruding to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 in between. and.

The receiving piece 12467c4 is a part that forms the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) formed by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

The connecting portion 12467c1 projects from two locations at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 12467c5. Further, the connecting portion 12467c1 is connected to a second piece 1 which will be described later.
2467d and the third piece 12467e, and includes a connecting hole 12467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and has a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 12467c2 is connected to a shaft portion 12467e that protrudes from a third piece 12467e, which will be described later.
3 is the opening into which it is inserted. The connecting hole 12467c2 has a shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into an insertion hole 12467d3 formed in a second piece 12467d, which will be described later, on the back side (arrow B direction side).
inserted from. Further, the shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened with a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side (front side (direction side of arrow F)) of the connecting hole 12467c2. Thereby, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the first piece 12467c includes a recessed portion 12467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow D) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recessed portion 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowest part) of the bottom surface where the game ball is held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. As a result, the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
The game ball held in is rolled inside the recess 12467c3.

The second piece 12467d is the receiving piece 12467c4 of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 124.
67d forming the other side (arrow L direction side) formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a crescent shape when viewed from the front and is concave in the direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4. It is formed into a curved shape. Also, the first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d
an insertion hole 12467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) in the connecting part;
It mainly includes a recessed portion 12467d2 having a circular cross section from the back side (arrow B direction side) to the front side (arrow F direction side).

The second piece 12467d has the shaft portion 1246 of the third piece 12467e inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 12467e of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is also rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 12467c.

Furthermore, the second piece 12467d has connecting portions 12 that protrude from two places on the first piece 12467c.
467c1 and connected to the first piece 12467c. This allows the second
When the piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the connecting portion 12467c
By bringing the second piece 12467d into contact with the opposite side surface of the shaft portion 12467e3, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion 12467e3 from breaking.

The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 12467e4 of a third piece 12467e to be described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The third piece 12467e includes a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front;
A shaft portion 124 protruding from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (arrow F direction side)
67e3 and a connecting shaft 12467e4.

The shielding plate 12467e1 is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and the light-emitting body 11491a
When placed on the front side of the light emitter 11491a, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked. Note that the shielding of the light from the light emitter 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 12467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d, as described above. In addition, the shaft portion 1
The connecting hole 124 is inserted into the protruding distal end surface of the shaft portion 12467e3 from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3.
A hole is formed into which a screw inserted into 67c2 can be screwed. Therefore, when the shaft portion 12467e3 is inserted into the connection hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3, the shaft portion 12467e3
By fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of the first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d, and the third piece 12467e can be connected, and the third piece 12467e can be connected to the first piece 1246.
It can be made rotatable relative to 7c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is connected to the concave portion 12467d of the second piece 12467d.
2 is inserted. This causes the second piece 12467d to move against the first piece 12467c on the shaft portion 1.
When the connecting shaft 12467e4 is rotated about 2467e3, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e is replaced with the second piece 12467e.
It can be displaced along with the displacement of d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail. 155(a) and 155(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 taken along the CLVc-CLVc line in FIG. 155(b). be. Note that in FIGS. 155(a) and 155(b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitting body 11491a are illustrated with chain lines. Also, Figure 155
155(a) illustrates the state before the game ball is received (before being held) in the ball receiving part 12467, and in FIG. Ta)
The condition is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 155, before the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is moved to the first side by the load of the third piece 12467e. The third piece 12467e is in a state approaching the piece 12467c side.
is located below the light emitting body 11491a disposed on the back side of the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

On the other hand, when a game ball is received between the opposing first piece 12467c and second piece 12467d, the received game ball is A recess 12 located at the lowest end of the receiving surface by rolling the inner side surface)
You will be directed to 467c3. As a result, the second piece 12467d is attached to the shaft portion 124 on the outer surface of the game ball.
It can be rotated about 67e3 in a direction away from the first piece 12467c. As a result, the third piece 12467e that moves with the displacement of the second piece 12467d is moved to the ball receiving part 1246.
It can be placed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the light emitting body 11491a that is placed on the back side of 7.

Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the shielding plate 1246 of the third piece 12467e.
It can be shielded by 7e1. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be easily shielded only when the game ball is received in the ball receiving part 12467, so the position of the game ball received in the lower displacement member 12440 can be adjusted to the position of the light emitting body 11491a. The player can recognize the position of the shadow that blocks the light.

Further, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2 of the second piece 12467d, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied thereto. Center of gravity G of the third piece 12467e (Fig.
54(b)) is set on the opposite side of the shaft portion 12467e3 from the connection portion between the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e. As a result, when no force other than gravity is acting on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the second piece 12467d can be rotated toward the first piece 12467c4 by the load of the third piece 12467e. .

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected (taken out) from the ball receiving part 12467, the third piece 124
The second piece 12467d can be displaced toward the ball receiving piece 12467c4 side of the first piece 12467c by the load of 67e.

Furthermore, similarly to the ball receiving part 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving part 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 12467b by the operation of slidingly displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 12440, so that the lower displacement member 12440 emits light. The game ball received through the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game balls received in the ball receiving part 12467, the ball receiving part 12
In the structure in which the ball bearing part 12467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b as the ball bearing 467 slides, the sliding speed of the ball bearing part 12467 causes the ball bearing part 12 to rotate around the shaft hole 467b.
467 rotation speed is changed. Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiving part 12467, there was a problem that the ejection speed of the game balls from the ball receiving part 12467 was not stable.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the load on the third piece 12467e causes the second piece 12467 to
Since the direction in which d rotates and the direction in which the ball receiver 12467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b when emitting the game ball are set to be approximately the same direction, the game ball emitted from the emitting opening 471 A driving force can be applied when the second piece 12467d is displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 124
Even if the force applied to the game ball from the ball receiver 12467 when displacing the ball 67 and ejecting the game ball from the ejection opening 471 is reduced, the speed of the ejected game ball can be maintained. As a result, the ejection speed of the game balls ejected from the ball receiver 12467 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, the special prize winning device 13 in the thirteenth embodiment
550 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 of the special winning device 550
Although the case has been described in which the throwing path of the game ball that has flowed into the interior of the game ball 51 is switched by the first and second drive units 583 and 584 of the third path member 580, in the thirteenth embodiment, the throwing path of the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the special prize winning device 13550 is switched. By changing the facing interval, the flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 13550 is adjusted. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157, the special prize winning device 13 in the thirteenth embodiment
The overall configuration of 550 will be explained. 156(a) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156(b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 156(c) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a sectional view of the special prize winning device 13550 along the CLVIc-CLVIc line in a). FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device 13550.

As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, a special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment
includes a first path member 13560 disposed on the front side, and a second path member 13570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 13560.

The first path member 13560 includes a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13, and a front plate 13564 that protrudes from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). It mainly includes a first wall portion 13565.

The front plate 13564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 13570, which will be described later, and is formed from a light-transmitting member. Thereby, the player can visually check the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 through the front plate 13564. The front plate 13564 also includes a first convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c that protrude toward the second path member 13570, and a first convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c.
A third protrusion 135 located below the protrusion 13564c and protruding toward the second path member 13570
64d.

The first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c are protrusions for guiding the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are protrusions that guide the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are located outside the front plate 13564 in the left and right direction (arrow L
−R direction outward) toward the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction.

The third convex portion 13564d is located at the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and extends in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the throwing paths of the game balls flowing down from the special winning device 13550 are different on the left and right sides of the substantially central position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the special winning device 13550. , special prize winning device 1
The game ball flowing down from the left side of the front view of 3550 is thrown to the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2),
A specific gaming value is given to the player by the thrown game balls (a predetermined number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is thrown to the outlet 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the lower left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (
A first winning opening 64 is arranged on the arrow D direction side. Thereby, the game balls flowing down from the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front can be made to flow into the first winning opening 64.

The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special winning device 13550, and a connecting plate 13565a that protrudes outward to the left and right at the protruding tip is attached to the left and right first wall portions 13565, respectively. Provide two locations each.

A through hole 13565a1 for inserting a screw for fastening the special winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed through the connecting plate 13565a. This through hole 13
The special winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 using the screw inserted through the hole 565a1.

The second path member 13570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 13571 that faces the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560, and a base plate 13571 that connects the first path member 13560 from the left and right ends (arrow LR direction) of the base plate 13571. A fourth wall portion 13573 protruding from the front plate 13564 side is provided.

The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in the gap between the first path member 13560 and the front plate 13564, and is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the front plate 13564 when viewed from the front. This allows the front side of the base plate 13571 to be connected to the front plate 1356.
4, the base plate 13571 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

Further, the base plate 13571 has a fourth convex portion 1357 that protrudes toward the first path member 13560 side.
1b, the fifth convex portion 13571c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c.
It mainly includes a sixth convex portion 13571d located below and protruding toward the front plate 13564 side.

The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are protrusions for guiding the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are from the outside in the left and right direction of the base plate 13571 (the outside in the arrow direction (LR direction)). The base plate 13571 is formed to be inclined downward toward the center side.

The sixth convex portion 13571d is formed at a position facing the third convex portion 13564d described above, and has a length that has a predetermined gap from the tip of the third convex portion 13564d. In addition, the third
The gap between the opposing convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In the fourth wall portion 13573, two fastening holes 13573a for fastening screws inserted through the first path member 13560 are formed in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573. As a result, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

Further, a first path member 13560 is provided around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573.
A shim member SI is provided to adjust the gap between the opposing second path member 13570 and the second path member 13570.

The shim member SI is formed from a thin plate-shaped transparent material, and is made difficult to be visually recognized from the player side. Further, in this embodiment, the shim member SI is disposed at the end on the left side when viewed from the front, and the distance between the opposing front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side when viewed from the front is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158(a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158(b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 13550 along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158(a).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special winning device 13550 includes a shim member SI at the left end when viewed from the front.
are arranged, and the distance L14 (see FIG. 158(a)) between the opposing front plate 13564 and base plate 13571 on the left side when viewed from the front is equal to
3571 (see FIG. 158(a)).
4>L15).

Note that the interval L14 is the interval between the left end (on the arrow L direction side) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the interval L15 is the interval between the right end (on the arrow R direction side) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Furthermore, the interval L15 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the special winning device 1355
The game ball flowing down from above 0 can be made to flow into the special winning device 13550 from any position in the left and right direction (L14>L15>diameter of game ball).

Further, the special winning device 13550 is partitioned into left and right on the downstream side by a third convex portion 13564d and a sixth convex portion 13571d. As a result, the game balls flowing down the main path SK1 (see FIG. 158(b)) on the upstream side of the special winning device 13550 are connected to the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front, and the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front. It flows into either one of the sub-paths HK1 and the formed sub-path HK1. In addition, as mentioned above, the gaming area downstream of the special prize winning device 13550 is
Throwing paths are formed differently at approximately the center position in the left-right direction of the special winning device 13550.
Therefore, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the game area is thrown to a specific winning hole, and the game ball thrown from the sub path HK1 to the game area is thrown to the out port 71 of the game board 13.

Furthermore, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c of the front plate 13564 described above
The protrusion dimensions of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be substantially the same. That is, the first protrusion 13565b and the second protrusion 13564c protruding from the front plate 13564 toward the back side are set to have the same protrusion dimension. Also,
A fourth convex portion 13571b and a fifth convex portion 13 protrude from the base plate 13571 toward the front side.
The protrusion dimension is set to be the same as that of 571c. Furthermore, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth
The protrusion dimension is set to be the same as that of the protrusion 13571b.

Further, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are arranged at different heights in the vertical direction. That is, the front plate 13
The first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c that protrude from 564 toward the back side protrude from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c that protrude from the base plate 13571 toward the front side protrude from the same height. Furthermore, the first protrusion 13565b and the fourth protrusion 13571b are arranged at different heights, and the fourth protrusion 13571b is arranged below the first protrusion 13565b. Further, the lower side of the first protrusion 13565b, which protrudes from two places in the gravity direction, is arranged at an intermediate position between the fourth protrusion 13571b, which protrudes from two places in the gravity direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is moved to the first convex portion 13564b.
It can be made to flow down while sequentially colliding with the fourth convex portion 13571b, the second convex portion 13564c, and the fifth convex portion 13571c. As a result, the game ball is moved to the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564b.
It can be made to flow down along the extending direction of the convex part 13564c, the fourth convex part 13571b, and the fifth convex part 13571c.

Front plate 13564 and fourth convex portion 1357 on the left side of special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front
1b or the distance dimension L16 (see FIG. 158(a)) between the opposing base plate 13571 and the first convex portion 13564b is set larger than the diameter of the game ball by the shim member SI, and the Front plate 13564 and fifth convex portion 1357 on the right side in front view
1c or the distance L17 between the opposing base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c is
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Note that the interval L16 is the distance between the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13 of the first convex portion 13564b.
571c and the front plate 13564 at the end on the second convex portion 13564c side (arrow R direction side)
Alternatively, it is the distance dimension between facing base plate 13571. Further, the interval L17 is the fifth convex portion 1
3571c and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b of the second convex portion 13564c
This is the distance dimension between the opposite ends of the side (arrow L direction side) with the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning opening 64 is arranged below the left side (direction of arrow L) of the special winning device 13550 (direction of arrow D). The game balls flowing down can be made to flow into the first prize opening 64.

Therefore, the special winning device 13
The game ball flowing into the main path SK1 of 550 passes through the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 135.
71c, and is made easier to flow down along the extending direction of the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c and to be guided toward the sub-path HK1 side. On the other hand, special prize winning device 1355
The game ball flowing into the main path SK1 of the special prize winning device 13550 from the left side (arrow L direction side) in front view of No. Become more likely to be thrown. As a result, the direction of flow of the game balls flowing into the special winning device 13550 can be changed.

Note that in this embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, and the fourth convex portion 13
571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d.
It is formed above (in the direction of arrow U) than (the inlet for game balls between the main path HK1 and the sub path SK6). Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main route SK1 can be flowed down the sub route HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls can be flowed down the main route SK6 than the sub route HK1.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by the shim member SI, and the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are made non-parallel.
The position of the game ball (the direction in which the game ball flows down) flowing down between the opposing paths with the path member 13570 can be adjusted.

Therefore, the special winning device 13550
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the direction in which the player is likely to be flown down inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous before playing the game with the gaming machine, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, by simply changing the two opposing directions (back and forth direction (arrow FB direction)) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570, the flow of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 can be improved. Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be made easier than with a nail that can be adjusted in all directions with respect to the front of the game board 13 (base board 60). As a result, it is possible to easily cause the game balls to flow down in the direction intended by the adjuster.

Note that the direction intended by the adjuster is, for example, between the opposing first path member 13560 and second path member 13570 on the sub-route HK1 side (arrow L direction side) to the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). The space between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is made larger so that the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 flows down to the sub path HK1, or to the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). ) between the first route member 13560 and the second route member 13570 facing each other, the first route member 13560 and the second route member 135 on the sub route HK1 side (arrow L direction side)
70, so that the game balls flowing down inside the special prize winning device 13550 flow down to the main path SK6.

Furthermore, by sandwiching the shim member SI with respect to the first path member 13560 that is placed on the front side, the second path member 13570 that is placed on the back side is moved in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other. That is, since the second path member 13570 disposed far from the player is moved in the front-back direction, the distance between the first path member 13560 and Second path member 1357
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the distance between the opposing zeros. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, an engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 159. In the first embodiment, the operation element 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. The operator 14315 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed with a protruding distal end surface inclined toward the proximal end side. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 159(a) is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG.
9(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 taken along the line CLIXb-CLIXb in FIG. 159(a).

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

In addition, the rear case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment has an engaging member 14310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 14300. The board box 100 (main controller 11
0), and a fixing member 320 for fixing.

As shown in FIG. 159, an engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and first pieces 143 extend in parallel directions.
11 and the second piece 312, and the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 are connected to the first piece 1
4311 and a third piece 313 connected in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the second piece 312.

The first piece 14311 is on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is connected.
The end portion is formed as an engaging portion with the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 41(a)) of the fixing member 320, and the end portion is formed as an engaging portion with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41(a)). (arrow U-
an engaging part 316 that protrudes outward on both sides in the D direction), and a recess 317 that is recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 14311 (arrow LR direction) from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging parts 316. and an operator 143 that protrudes toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300.
15.

The operator 14315 is formed at the end of the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and its protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. It protrudes from the back side of the back case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that the operator can grasp with his or her fingers. Thereby, the operator 14315 can be made to protrude from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 14315) can be grasped and operated.

In addition, the protruding tip surface of the operator 14315 is located on the engaging portion 316 side (the other side of the first piece 14311).
It is formed as an inclined surface 14315a that approaches the base end side of the operator 14315 as it goes in the direction of arrow L). As a result, when the operator operates the operator 14315 in the direction of disengaging the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L), the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged. The force acting in the direction of releasing can be reduced.

That is, the force of the operator operating the operator 14315 can be dispersed by the inclined surface 14315a. This makes it difficult to release the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operator 14315 from the back side of the back case 300. the result,
A worker who attempts to replace the board box 100 that has been illegally placed on the fixing member 320 can be prevented from operating the operator 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300 and removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300. .

Further, the end of the inclined surface 14315a on the engaging portion 316 side is connected to the bottom wall portion 30 of the rear case 300.
1 is disposed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) than the back side. As a result, the engaging member 14310
The operator's hand operating the operator 14315 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315a in order to release the engagement between the fixed member 320 and the fixed member 320. As a result, an operator attempting to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 by making it difficult to operate the operator 14315 operates the operator 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300. Removal of the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 can be suppressed.

Next, an engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160(a). In the first embodiment, the operator 315 of the engagement member 310 is
Although the case has been described in which the operator 15315 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of 00, the operator 15315 in the fifteenth embodiment It is pivoted on. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section in FIG. 160(a) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 159(b).

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and the bottom wall 30 is opened through the opening 301a.
A third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the player 1 is visible.

In addition, the rear case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has an engaging member 15310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 15300. The board box 100 (main controller 11
0) and a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41).

As shown in FIG. 160(a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a first piece 15311 and a second piece extending in parallel directions. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41), the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312
The third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) connects the ends of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction thereof.

The first piece 15311 has an end on the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected and one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the engaged part 332 of the fixing member 320 (Fig. 41(a)), and protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. 316 (see FIG. 41), and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 15311 (arrow LR direction) from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316; It mainly includes an operator 15315 inserted into the second opening 301d of the back case 300, and a bearing part 15319 on which the operator 15315 is supported.

The bearing portion 15319 is provided protruding from the first piece 15311 on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 15311 is connected. Further, the bearing portion 15319 is connected to the operator 1 which will be described later.
A recess is formed into which a cylindrical shaft member 15315c inserted through the shaft member 5315 in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow UD) is inserted.

The operator 15315 is formed into a rod shape, and has a through hole 15315b penetrating in the direction of gravity at the end on the first piece 15311 side, and a shaft member 1531 inserted into the through hole 15315b.
5c.

Therefore, the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b is inserted into the recess of the bearing portion 15319, so that the operator 15315 is held in a rotatable state relative to the first piece 15311. Further, the rotation shaft (shaft member 15315c) of the operator 15315 is the first
It is arranged closer to the front than the piece 15311. As a result, the rightward (clockwise) rotation of the operator 15315 in the state shown in FIG. 160(a) when viewed from above can be restricted by contacting the other end of the first piece 15311, Rotation to the left (counterclockwise) is allowed.

Therefore, when the operator operates the operator 15315 in the direction of disengaging the engagement member 15310 and the fixed member 320 (in the direction of arrow L) (the operator 153 in the state shown in FIG. 160(a)
15 counterclockwise), the force that acts in the direction of disengaging the engagement member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L) can be reduced. As a result, by operating the operator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300, the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 3 are connected to each other.
This makes it difficult to release the engagement with 20. As a result, a player who attempts to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 may operate the operator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160(b), an engaging member 15310 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding operation of the engaging member 310 is performed by the operator 315 has been described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the first
This is done by manipulating the end of piece 16311. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section in FIG. 160(b) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 160(a). Also, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a bottom wall portion 301 that extends from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall portion 301 has a rectangular opening 301a (FIG. 5) in the center thereof.
(see FIG. 2) is formed as an opening, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a.

Furthermore, the rear case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment has an engaging member 16310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301; The board box 100 (main controller 1
10) and a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41).

As shown in FIG. 160(b), the engaging member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a first piece 16311 and a first piece 16311 extending in parallel directions. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41), the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312
The third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) connects the ends of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction thereof. Furthermore, the engaging member 1 in the sixteenth embodiment
6310 can be slid and displaced by a finger inserted into a second opening 301d formed in the back case 300 from the back side.

The first piece 16311 has an end on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected, and the engaged part 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41), and protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311 (see FIG. 41). 41), and a recessed portion 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 16311 (arrow LR direction) from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. Be prepared.

As shown in FIG. 160(b), when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the other side of the first piece 16311 (the side in the direction of arrow L) An end portion of the second opening portion 301d is arranged horizontally outward from the opening of the second opening portion 301d. Therefore, the engaging member 16
310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L)
When operating 6310, insert your finger from the second opening 301d of the back case 300,
It is possible to make it difficult to displace the engaging member 16310 in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320. As a result, the board box 1 disposed on the fixing member 320
00, a worker tries to replace the engagement member 1631 from the back side of the back case 300.
It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back case 300 by unauthorized operation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, a rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301d of the back case 300. However, in the seventeenth embodiment, the second opening 301d of the back case 17300 An operator 315 protruding from the rear case is covered by a portion of the rear case at a predetermined position. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 161(a) is a rear view of the rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 161(b) is a rear view of the rear case 173 along the CLXIb-CLXIb line in FIG. 161(a).
00 is a cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 161, a rear case 17300 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 17301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 17301 and 302. The bottom wall portion 17301 has a rectangular opening 301 in the center thereof when viewed from the front.
A is formed as an opening, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 is visible through the opening 301a.

The rear case 17300 also has a protrusion 301b protruding from two places on the front side of the bottom wall 17301, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. It includes a second opening 301d that opens at opposing positions, and a covering part 17301e that covers the back surface of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side).

The covering portion 17301e is located on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) of the second opening 301d.
It is erected from the end toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). Furthermore, the covered portion 17301e includes a bent portion 17301e1 whose standing tip portion is bent toward the inside of the second opening 301d in rear view. As a result, the covering portion 17301e is placed on the first opening 301c side (
It is formed into a box shape with an open side (the side in the direction of arrow R) and the opposite side (the side in the direction of arrow L).

In addition, the installation distance of the covered portion 17301e (from the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c to the bent portion 1730
1e1 and the front surface) is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the operator 315 protruding from the bottom wall portion 17301c. Furthermore, the covered portion 17301e is a bent portion 17 in a rear view.
The horizontal dimension of the controller 301e1 (arrow LR direction) is set larger than the horizontal dimension of the operator 315 when viewed from the rear.

As a result, when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the operator 315 is moved inside the covering member 17301e, as shown in FIG. 161(b). will be placed in Therefore, the direction in which the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released (
When the operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction of the arrow L), it is possible to make it difficult for the operator to grasp the operator 315 from the back side of the back case 17300. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the engagement member 310 from being displaced in the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released (in the direction of arrow L). As a result, a worker (player) attempting to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 may access the engaging member 31 from the back side of the back case 17300.
0 to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back case 17300.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164, back case 183 in the eighteenth embodiment
00 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the engagement member 310 is arranged in the linear direction (arrow L-
Although the case has been described in which the engaging member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment is slidably displaced in the R direction), the engaging member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment is rotationally displaced with respect to the rear case 18300. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163, the back case 183 in the eighteenth embodiment
The configuration of 00 and the operation of engagement member 18310 will be explained. Figure 162(a) and Figure 1
63(a) is a front view of the rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG.
(b) and FIG. 163(b) are rear views of the rear case 18300. In addition, Fig. 162 (
a) and FIG. 162(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, and in FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b), the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are The disengaged state is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the rear case 18300 in the 18th embodiment has a bottom wall portion 18301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected toward the front from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 18301. An outer wall portion 18302 is provided, and each wall portion 18301, 18302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. In addition, the rear case 18300 has an engaging member 18310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) of the bottom wall portion 18301, and an engagement member 18310 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 18300. and a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 18301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said that The bottom wall portion 18301 also includes a first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a protruding portion located below the first opening 18301c (in the direction of arrow D) and protruding toward the front side. 18301b.

The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 18332 of a fixing member 18320, which will be described later, and is formed to have a larger shape than the engaged portion 18332 when viewed from the front. As a result, after the accessory device (rotation unit 700) is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 can be placed on the front side of the back case 18300 from the back side of the back case 18300. can.

The protruding portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports an engaging member 18310, which will be described later, and is a member that pivotally supports an engaging member 18310, which will be described later.
It is cylindrical and protrudes from the front of 8301b. Further, a hole into which a screw is screwed is provided in the protruding end surface of the protruding portion 18301b. This allows the engaging member 18310 to be attached to the rear case 183.
00, by screwing the screw into the protruding portion 18301b, the engaging member 1831
0 can be prevented from coming out of the protruding portion 18301b.

The outer wall portion 18302 has a side surface on the right side (arrow R direction side) in the left-right direction (arrow L direction side) when viewed from the front.
-R direction). The opening 18302a is formed on the rotation locus of an engagement member 18310, which will be described later. Thereby, after the engaging member 18310 is disposed inside the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 can be made to protrude outside the rear case 18300 by rotating the engaging member 18310.

The fixing member 18320 includes an intervening member 18330 that engages with an engaging member 18310, which will be described later, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 18330.

The intervening member 18330 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and has a locking part 18331 that protrudes from the other side (arrow L direction side) and a rear case from the one side (arrow R direction side). 300
An engaged portion 18332 formed in a frame shape and protruding to the side, an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) that opens in a circular shape on the bottom surface of the box (the side surface in the direction of arrow B), and Protruding protrusion 33
4 and are mainly provided.

The locking portion 18331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and an L-shaped cross section is inserted into the opening from the periphery of the first opening 18301c. A protruding wall 18301c1 provided in a protruding manner is inserted into the bottom wall portion 18301 to be engaged with the bottom wall portion 18301.

As a result, when installing the intervening member 18330 (fixing member 18320) on the back case 18300, the protruding wall 18301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 18331 of the intervening member 18330, and the other side of the intervening member 18330 (arrow L direction side) can be locked to the rear case 18300.

The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310, and is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310.
The protruding dimension toward the 00 side (arrow F direction side) is the engagement member 1 disposed on the back case 18300.
8310, and the distance dimension from the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front of the bottom wall 18301 is set to a dimension exceeding 8310, and the distance dimension from the front of the engaging member 18310 to the bottom wall 1830
The distance to the front of No. 1 is set larger than the distance to the front of No. 1. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The engaging member 18310 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a second piece 18312 that is pivotally supported by the protrusion 18301b of the rear case 18300, and is bent from one end of the second piece 18312. and a first piece 18311 formed by.

The second piece 18312 is provided with a shaft support hole 18312a that is circularly opened in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. Pivot hole 18312a
is a hole into which the protruding portion 18301b of the back case 18300 described above is inserted, and thereby the engaging member 18310 can be disposed inside the back case 18300 in a pivotally supported state.

The first piece 18311 extends in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a described above. Thereby, the displacement area of the first piece 18311 can be minimized when the engagement member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the support hole 18312a. Further, the first piece 18311 has an engaging portion 18316 that protrudes from the shaft support hole 18312a to both sides in the radial direction at the end opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging portions 316 at the two locations. The first piece 18 from approximately the middle position of
A recess 18317 recessed in the extending direction of 311 is provided.

The two engaging portions 18316 have a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Also,
One of the two engaging parts 18316 has a diameter of the first piece 18311 that increases from the end opposite to the connecting part with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting part with the second piece 18312. It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes outward in the direction. The other engaging portion 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316
is formed in an outer shape that protrudes inward in the radial direction of the first piece 18311 from the end opposite to the connection part with the second piece 18312 toward the connection part with the second piece 18312.

The recess 18317 is formed by cutting out the first piece 18311 in the thickness direction, and
It is recessed from the end of the piece 18311 opposite to the side connected to the second piece 18312 toward the side connected to the second piece 18312 along the extending direction of the first piece 18311. Therefore, the first piece 18
The end of 311 is divided into two. As a result, the end of the first piece 18311 opposite to the side connected to the second piece 18312 is more easily elastically deformed than the side connected to the second piece 18312, and the engaging member 18310 is connected to the fixing member 18320. It can be easily engaged.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be explained. Figure 16
As shown in FIG. 3, the interposed member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 are fastened together by screws inserted from the interposed member 18330 side before engaging with the engaging member 18310.

Further, the engaging member 18310 is connected to the protruding portion 1830 of the back case 18300 as described above.
1b, and the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is
It is arranged so as to protrude from the opening 18302a of the back case 18300.

Note that the center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the back case 18300 is located at the back case 1.
The connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 closes to the opening of the rear case 18300 due to gravity when no external force is applied. A force is applied to the engagement member 18310 to rotate it in a direction protruding from the portion 18302a. As a result, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 is made to protrude outside the back case 18300, and the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixation member 18320 is This will prevent you from forgetting to do so.

The interposed member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixed member 18320) in the fastened state are
A projecting wall 18301c1 protruding from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the intervening member 18330, and the left side of the fixing member 18320 when viewed from the front (the side in the direction of arrow L) is locked to the rear case 18300. be done. In this case, the engaged portion 1833 of the fixed member 18320
2 is inserted inside the first opening 18301c, and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 is arranged at a position opposite to the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engagement member 18310.

Next, the operator who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320
By pushing the engaging member 18310 (connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the 8300 into the inside of the rear case 18300 (in the direction of arrow R1) (see FIG. 163), The mating member 18310 is rotated around the protrusion 18301b.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 is connected to the engaged portion 1833
It can be inserted into the internal space of 2. In this case, the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging parts 18316 is set to be larger than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged part 18332, but the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed inside the recess 18317, and the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging parts 18316 is reduced. The end of the first piece 18311 can be inserted inside the engaged part 18332 by making it smaller than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaging part 18332.

Further, since the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted inside the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310
However, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being operated from the outside of the back case 18300 in the engaged state. As a result, the engaging member 18310 may be tampered with and the fixing member 183
20 can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, the release of the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163(a), the first opening 18301c has a substantially L-shaped opening when viewed from the front, and the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. can be operated from the back side (direction of arrow B) of the back case 1300 through the first opening 18301c.

Therefore, the outer part of the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 is cut into the recess 18 using a special tool or the like.
317 is elastically deformed to the concave side, the engagement between the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is released. With this engagement released, the engagement member 18310
By displacing the engaging member 310 in the direction of pulling it out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332 (arrow L direction), and then returning the deformation of the engaging member 310, the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 1833
The engagement with 2 can be released.

Note that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engagement member 18310 and the first opening 18301c is preferably formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person removing the fixing member 18320 from the back case 300 cannot be inserted, and a special tool can be inserted. As a result, only a worker with a dedicated tool can replace the board box 100 (main controller 110), and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced with an unauthorized one.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a case where the engaging member 18310 forgets to engage the fixing member 18320 will be described. FIG. 164(a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, and FIG.
64(b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that FIGS. 164(a) and 164
(b) shows a state in which the engaging member 18310 has forgotten to engage with the engaged portion 18332. Further, FIGS. 164(a) and 164(b) illustrate a state in which an upper piece of the outer frame 11, which is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, is removed.

As described above, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 can be caused to protrude to the outside of the back case 18300 due to gravity. In this case, the engaging member 183 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13
Distance dimension LR from the end of 10 to the right end (arrow R direction side) of rear case 18300
1 (see FIG. 164(a)) is set larger than the inner left-right dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164(b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 in which the game board 13 is arranged. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixed member 18320 are not engaged and the game board 13 is inserted inside the outer frame 11, the back side of the engaging member 18310 hits the front of the outer frame 11. can be brought into contact. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged,
The engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18 prevent the game board 13 from being disposed on the outer frame 11.
320 can be prevented from being forgotten.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, the engagement member 1931 in the nineteenth embodiment
0 will be explained. In the 18th embodiment, the engagement member 18310 is arranged inside the outer frame 11 to prevent the engagement member 18310 from being tampered with, but in the 19th embodiment, the release direction of the engagement member 19310 is The rotation of the engagement member 18310 is restricted to prevent unauthorized manipulation of the engagement member 18310. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment. 166(a) is a front view of the rear case 18300, and FIG. 166(b) is a sectional view of the one-way 19350 taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165.

As shown in FIG. 165, the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis relative to the back case 19300, and a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis relative to the rear case 19300. 19312 and a first piece 18311 formed by bending from one end.

The second piece 19312 includes a fitting hole 19312b that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which the one-way 19350 described later is fitted, and the outer ring 1 of the one-way 19350 is fitted into the fitting hole 19312b.
It is formed to have approximately the same inner diameter as 9351.

The one-way 19350 includes an inner ring 19352 on which a cam surface is formed on the outer circumferential surface, and an inner ring 1 of the inner ring 19352.
9352, and a plurality of springs 19353 and rollers 19354 disposed between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352 (see FIG. 166(b)). When the inner ring 19352 tries to rotate in one direction relative to the outer ring 19351, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 increases, creating resistance and transmitting power to the outer ring, causing the inner ring to rotate in the other direction relative to the outer ring 19351. When the clutch rotates, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 decreases, causing the clutch to slip and cut off power transmission.
Note that a detailed explanation of the one-way 19350 will be given later.

Further, an operator 19360 is inserted into the center of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350. The operator 19360 includes an operating section 19361 disposed on the back side (direction of arrow B) of the rear case 19300, and an insertion section 19362 protruding from the front side of the operating section 19361 (direction of arrow F). Prepare for the Lord.

The operation part 19361 is a part where the operator operates the operator 19360 from the back side of the back case 19300, and is formed in a circular shape, and its outer shape is larger than the opening into which the insertion part 19362 described later is inserted. . This allows the operator 19360 to be attached to the rear case 1930.
When disposed from the back side of the case 19300, the operation unit 19361 can be prevented from slipping out to the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the back case 19300.

The insertion portion 19362 is formed into a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operating portion 19361, and protrudes toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). In addition, the insertion portion 19362 includes a protruding wall 19362a that protrudes in the radial direction on its outer peripheral surface.

The protruding wall 19362a connects the inner ring 1935 of the one-way 19350 to the insertion portion 19362.
A recess 1935 formed in the inner ring 19352 is an engaging portion that prevents the wheel from idling.
2a. This can prevent the rotational force acting on the operator 19360 from not being transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

Further, a concave portion having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed on the protruding distal end surface of the insertion portion 19362, and by screwing a screw into the concave portion from the front side toward the back side, the one-way 19350 A control element 19360 can be connected to.

Next, the arrangement of the rear case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 will be described with reference to FIG. 166. The back case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 that is generally rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open.
The rear case 19300 also has a front side (a box-shaped open side) of the bottom wall portion 19301.
an engaging member 19310 disposed on the arrow F direction side); a fixing member 18320 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 19300 and fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110);
Equipped with

The bottom wall portion 19301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 19301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said that In addition, the bottom wall portion 19301 has a first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a lower part of the first opening 18301c (arrow D
The insertion portion 1936 of the above-mentioned operator 19360 is located in the direction of
2 is inserted into the opening (not shown).

The above-mentioned engaging member 19310 is constructed by disposing the engaging member 19310 with the one-way 19350 inside the fitting hole 19312b on the front side of the bottom wall 10301, and then inserting the operator 19360 from the back side of the back case 19300. Insert the insertion part 19362 into the back case 1930
It is disposed on the bottom wall part 19301 by inserting it inside the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 through the opening of 0.

Next, the operation of the one-way 19350 will be explained. As mentioned above, one way 1
9350 is switched between allowing and blocking power transmission to the outer ring 19351 in one direction and the other direction of rotation of the inner ring 19352.

First, a case will be described in which power from the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring. Figure 166 (
As shown in b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (arrow LK direction (see FIG. 166(b)), a roller 193 is placed between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351.
54 is caught, the contact of the roller 19354 acts as resistance, and the power of the inner ring 19352 is transferred to the outer ring 1.
9351. In this case, one rotational direction is set in a direction in which the engaging member 19310 is engaged with the fixed member 18320.

Next, a case where the power to the inner ring 19352 is cut off will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (arrow RK direction (see FIG. 166(b)), the roller 19354 is displaced radially inward of the inner ring 19352 due to the resistance of contact with the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. This reduces the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354, causing the roller 19354 to slide relative to the outer ring 19351, cutting off power transmission. In this case, the other direction of rotation is set in a direction in which the engagement member 19310 is disengaged from the fixed member 18320.

As a result, with the engagement member 19310 disposed on the back case 19300, the operator 1
9360 can be rotated to engage the engagement member 19310 with the fixed member 18320. Furthermore, from the state in which the engaging member 19310 and the fixed member 18320 are engaged, the operator 19
360 to release the engagement between the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 is restricted. As a result, the engaging member 19310 (operator 19360) is improperly operated,
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an incorrect board.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the engagement member 2031 in the twentieth embodiment
0 will be explained. In the first embodiment described above, the movement of the engagement member 310 is performed by the rotation unit 70.
Although the case where the regulation is restricted by the screw inserted into the rear base 720 of the second
In the 0 embodiment, when the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the engaging member 20
The engagement portion 20 formed on the rear base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700
It is regulated by being engaged with 724a. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, the engagement member 2031 in the twentieth embodiment
0 and rotation unit 20700 will be explained. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the back case 20300 and rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment. Figure 168(a)
is a front view of the engagement member 20310, and FIG. 168(b) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engagement member 20310.

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 20300 in the 20th embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and the bottom wall 30 is opened through the opening 301a.
A third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the player 1 is visible.

In addition, the rear case 20300 in the 20th embodiment has an engaging member 20310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301, and the rear case 20300. The board box 100 (main controller 11
0), and a fixing member 320 for fixing. Further, in the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment, a rotation unit 20700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the engagement member 20310 disposed on the front side (direction side of arrow F) of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment has a crank-like shape when viewed from the front. The first piece 31 is formed in a shape and extends in directions parallel to each other.
Consisting of a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312. be done.

The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are each formed with a sliding groove 314 which is an elongated hole that is long in the direction in which the engaging member 20310 extends.
0312 (in the direction of arrow LR).

Further, the second piece 20312 includes a recess 20312c recessed in a side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engagement member 20310. The recess 20312c is a recess into which the tip of the engagement portion 20724a of the rear base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700, which will be described later, is inserted, and the engagement portion 207
It is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of 24a.

To explain in detail, the recessed portion 20312c has a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168(a)) from the connecting side of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313 to the end on the opposite side (arrow L direction side). Dimension SH2 (FIG. 168(
(see b)). Further, the recessed portion 20312c is recessed into a triangular shape with a right angle when viewed from the front, and the right-angled portion is set on the side where the second piece 20312 is connected to the third piece 313 (the side in the direction of arrow R).

The rotation unit 20700 has an opening 301 in the bottom wall 301 of the back case 20300.
A rectangular back base 20720 disposed on the right side (in the direction of arrow R) of the lower part of a, and a rotating body 800 disposed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the back base 20720 (in the direction of arrow F). 9
3), so that the player can visually recognize the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 through the light-transmitting center frame 86 disposed on the game board 13.

The back base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball holder 710 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back side of the ball holder 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back base 20720 includes an upright wall 20724 erected from the back.

The standing wall 20724 extends to surround the outer edge of the engagement member 20310 disposed on the back case 20300. Further, the standing wall 20724 is connected to the recess 20 of the engagement member 20310.
312c, and includes an engaging portion 20724a whose tip is inserted into the inside of the recessed portion 20312c.

The engaging portion 20724a protrudes from the standing wall 20724 in the direction in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixed member 320 (the direction of the arrow R), and is provided in the standing manner in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. It is formed separated from the wall 20724 by a predetermined gap. As a result, the engaging portion 2
By lowering the rigidity of 0724a, the engaging portion 20724a can be easily elastically deformed. Also,
A region in which the engaging portion 20724a can be elastically deformed can be secured by the gap between the standing wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

Furthermore, the engaging portion 20724a has a bent portion 2 bent toward the engaging member 20310 at the protruding tip portion.
0724a1, and the front view shape of the bent portion 20724a1 is the recessed portion 2031 described above.
It is formed into a triangular shape that is approximately the same shape as 2c. As a result, the engaging member 20310 has a bent portion 2 inside the recess 20312c of the engaging member 20310 before engaging with the fixing member 320.
0724a1 is placed. Therefore, the engagement member 20310 is moved in the direction of displacement (arrow LR
direction) (see FIG. 168(b)).

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the engagement member 20310 from vibrating with respect to the back case 20300 due to force such as vibration or shaking, and moving in the direction of engagement with the fixing member 320 (arrow R direction). Therefore, before the fixing member 320 is disposed on the back case 20300, the position of the engaging member 20310 is displaced, and when the fixing member 320 is disposed on the back case 20300, the fixing member 32
It is possible to prevent the engaged portion 332 of No. 0 from coming into contact with the engaging member 20310. In other words,
When disposing the fixing member 320 on the back case 20300, the engaged portion 33 of the fixing member 320
2 (see FIG. 167), it is possible to suppress the engagement member 20310 from being located within the displacement region when the engagement member 20310 is disposed. As a result, there is no need to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 20310 from the fixing member 320, so that workability when engaging the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engagement member 20310 and rotation unit 20700 in a state where the engagement member 20310 and the fixed member 320 are engaged will be described. Figure 169
(a) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engagement member 20310, and FIG.
b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. Note that FIGS. 169(a) and 169(b)
), a state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 169(b), the outlines of a part of the engaging member 20310 and the standing wall 20724 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 169, from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 20300,
15 is operated so that the engagement member 20310 is disposed on the left side (direction of arrow L) in the front view with respect to the bottom wall 301 of the back case 20300.
1, the recess 20 of the engagement member 20310 is displaced to the right side in front view (arrow R direction side).
The bent portion 20724a1 disposed inside the recess 20724a1 is pushed out into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

Here, as described above, the recess 20312c has a distance SH1 from the connecting side of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313 to the end on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) (see FIG. 168(a)). However, the dimension SH2 (
(see FIG. 168(b)), the engaging member 20310 is set substantially the same as the fixing member 320.
When the third piece 31 of the second piece 20312 of the engaging member 20310 is displaced to the position where it engages with the
The end on the opposite side (in the direction of arrow L) from the connection side with 3 is connected to the bent portion 20724a1 and the engagement member 20
310 in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction). This can prevent the engaging member 20310 from being incorrectly displaced in the direction of disengaging the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L).

Note that, similarly to the first embodiment, in the engaging member 20310, the engaging portion 316 is connected to the fixed member 3.
By being caught (engaged) with the engaged portion 332 of 20, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengaging from the fixing member 320 is restricted. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the back case 300, the engaged portion 332
32 and the engaging portion 316 may be illegally released through the first opening 301c.

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement in the direction of releasing the engagement of the engagement member 20310 with the fixing member 320 is caused by
Since the end on the opposite side can be brought into contact with the bent part 20724a1 and restricted, an unauthorized object can be inserted from the first opening 301c and the end of the engagement member 20310 and the bent part 20724a can be restricted.
1 can be prevented from being disengaged. As a result, the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 3
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an incorrect board due to the board box 100 (main controller 110) being connected to the fixing member 320 being illegally disengaged from the board 20.

Note that the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 20310 are connected by removing the rotation unit 20700 disposed inside the back case 20300 (bottom wall portion 301) from the back case 20300, and then removing the end portion and the bent portion of the engaging member 20310. After disengaging from the engagement member 20724a1, the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 20310 is elastically deformed and the end of the engagement member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, thereby separating both. The engagement can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotation unit 20700 from the front side of the back case 20300.
It is possible to prevent the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate due to unauthorized disengagement between the fixing member 320 and the fixing member 320.

Furthermore, as described above, since the engaging member 20310 is bent into a crank shape when viewed from the front, an illegal object such as a wire or the like inserted from the first piece 311 side can be inserted into the second piece in a straight line. It is possible to restrict feeding to the end of the piece 20312. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal object inserted from the first piece 311 side from being accurately sent to the engagement portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173, the rotation unit 21 in the 21st embodiment
700 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the rear base 72 of the rotation unit 700
Although the case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted into the
In the twenty-first embodiment, movement of the engagement member 310 is regulated by inserting the first piece 311 into the insertion portion 21724b formed on the back base 21720 of the rotation unit 21700. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the engagement member 310 and rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 300 and rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment. Figure 171 (a
) is a rear view of the rotation unit 21700 and the engaging member 310, and FIG. 171(b) is a
171(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 21700 taken along the line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in FIG. 171(a).

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 21300 in the 21st embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

In addition, the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment includes an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 21300.
300 (in the direction of arrow B), the board box 100 (main controller 110)
It mainly includes a fixing member 320 for fixing. Further, in the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment, a rotation unit 21700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, a rotation unit 21700 in the 21st embodiment
The rear base 21720 has a rectangular shape in front view and is disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the opening 301a of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and its rear surface. A rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) disposed on the front side of the base 21720, and an effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a light-transmitting center frame 86 disposed on the game board 13. It can be visually recognized by the player.

The back base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball holder 710 and the back side of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back side of the ball holder 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back base 21720 includes an upright wall 21724 erected on the back thereof.

The standing wall 21724 extends to surround the outer edge of the engagement member 310 disposed on the back case 300. In addition, in the standing wall 21724, the engagement member 310 is connected to the back case 30.
0 (the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320
(disengaged from the engagement member 310), toward the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 (arrow L
(direction)).

The insertion portion 21724b is inserted in the direction of displacement of the engagement member 310 from the standing wall 21724 (arrow LR).
It extends in a direction parallel to the gravitational force direction (the direction of the arrow UB), and is set to a dimension that overlaps the engaging member 310 in the gravitational direction (the direction of the arrow UB) when the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320. In addition, the insertion section 21
A bent portion 21724b1 that bends toward the back side (towards the engaging member 310) is formed at the tip of 724b, and the bent tip of the bent portion 21742b1 is bent in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 (arrow FB direction). , is set to a length that overlaps the engaging member 310.

Furthermore, the width of the insertion portion 21742b in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) is set to be smaller than the width of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the state where the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the insertion portion 21724b
The bent portion 21724b1 is inserted into the recess 317. This can suppress elastic deformation of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 toward the inner side of the recess 317 from the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, the engaging member 20310
This can prevent the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate due to unauthorized release of the engagement between the fixing member 320 and the fixing member 320.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when engaging the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320 will be described. Figures 172(a) and 173(
a) is a rear view of the rotation unit 21700 and the engagement member 310. 172(b) and 173(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rear case 300 and the rotation unit 21700. Note that FIGS. 172(a) and 172(b) illustrate a state in which the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged, and FIGS. 173(a) and 173(b) illustrate Joining part 3
10 is shown in the middle of being engaged with the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the engagement member 310 is in a state where the engagement with the fixed member 320 is released, and the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 is connected to the fixed member 320. Part 3
32, the end of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317. As a result, the width of the recess 317 in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) is made smaller than the width of the insertion portion 21724b in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, when the engaging part 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged part 332 (in the case of the position shown in FIG. 173(a)), the end of the first piece 311 touches the protruding tip of the insertion part 21724b. placed in a position that exceeds In other words, the length dimension in the left-right direction of the engaging portion 316 is the same as that of the insertion portion 21.
It is set larger than the opposing dimension from the protruding tip of 724b to the end of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Therefore, when the engaging part 316 is pushed out from the internal space of the engaged part 332, the end of the engaging member 310 on the first piece 311 side can be brought into contact with the bent part 21724b1 of the insertion part 21724b. . In this case, the tip of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) along the inclined surface of the bent portion 21724b1. Thereby, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging part 316 is pulled out of the internal space of the engaged part 332, as described above, the width of the recessed part 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311 Also, since the width dimension in the vertical direction of the insertion portion 21724b is increased, the recessed portion 317
The bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside.

Therefore, as described above, the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 can be prevented from being elastically deformed to the inner side of the recess 317. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the board box 100 (main controller 1
10) can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Note that the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are connected to the inside of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301
) is removed from the rear case 21300 and the end of the engaging member 310 is disengaged from the rear case 20300, and then the first
By elastically deforming the end of the piece 311 and pulling out the end of the engaging member 310 from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the engagement between the two can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotation unit 21700 from the front side of the back case 21300.
10 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released from the back side of the back case 21300,
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an incorrect board.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176, the engagement member 2231 in the 22nd embodiment
0 and the fixing member 22320 will be explained. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.
In the twenty-second embodiment, the fixing member 22 is provided in a recess 22311a provided in the engaging member 22310.
The bent portion 22332a1 formed at 320 is engaged. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIGS. 174 to 176(a), an engagement member 22310 in the twenty-second embodiment
and the configuration of the fixing member 22320 will be explained. FIG. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. 175(a) and 175(b) are front views of the rear case 22300. FIG. 176(a) shows CLXXVIa- in FIG. 175(b).
It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 22300 along the CLXXVIa line. In addition, Fig. 175 (
In a), a state before the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged is illustrated, and FIG.
75(b), a state in which the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176(a), the back case 223 in the 22nd embodiment
00 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is generally rectangular in front view, and outer wall portions 302 that stand up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is shaped like a box with one side open. In addition, the rear case 22300 includes an engaging member 22310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301;
01, and a fixing member 22320 that fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The engagement member 22310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first piece 22311 and a second piece 312 extending in parallel directions, and the first piece 2231.
The third piece 313 connects the ends of the first and second pieces 312 to each other in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312.

In addition, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 have a sliding groove 31 which is a long hole in the extending direction.
4 are formed, respectively, so that the engaging member 22310 can slide in the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction).

The first piece 22311 includes a recess 22311a that is recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end opposite to the side to which the third piece 313 is connected. .

The recessed portion 22311a is a bent portion 22332a1 formed in the fixing member 22320, which will be described later.
is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, and as described later, fixes the end of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 on one side (arrow R direction side). When accommodated in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the member 22320, the fixing member 223
It is formed at a position opposite to 22332a of 20.

Further, the internal shape of the recessed portion 22311a is formed in a substantially right triangular cross section, and the right-angled portion is set on the end side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311, and the recessed bottom surface is located on the It is formed as an inclined surface that becomes deeper toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) toward the end side of one piece 22311.

The fixing member 22320 includes an intervening member 22330 that engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 22310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the back side of the intervening member 22330.

The interposed member 22330 is formed in a box shape with an open front side (arrow F direction side), and has a locking part 331 protruding from one side (arrow R direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction side). An engaged portion 22332 formed in a frame shape and protruding from the side surface to the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 22300, and a box-shaped bottom surface (side surface in the arrow B direction side) It mainly includes an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) that opens in a circular shape, and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface.

The engaged portion 22332 has the first piece 2231 of the engaging member 22310 in the enclosed internal space.
This is the part into which the end on one side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the first piece 22 is inserted, and its inner edge shape is similar to the first piece 22.
It is set to be slightly larger than the external shape of 311. Further, the engaged portion 22332 of the engaging member 22310 is inserted from one side of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the frame-shaped portion.
It has a protrusion 22332a that protrudes in the direction of insertion (in the direction of arrow R).

The protrusion 22332a has a bent portion 2233 at the end thereof that is bent toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F).
2a1, the bent portion 22332a1 of which is connected to the recess 223 of the above-mentioned engagement member 22310.
By being inserted into 11a, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged with each other. That is, in the bent portion 22332a1, the engaging member 22310 is connected to the engaged portion 22332.
It is formed at a position facing the recessed portion 22311a in the inserted state.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 176(a), the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 22300 with the engaging member 22310 interposed therebetween. be done. Therefore, since the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301, the first
It is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 from being illegally released due to insertion of an unauthorized member such as a wire or the like through the opening 301c.

Furthermore, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be disposed between the bottom wall portion 301 and the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, the bottom wall portion 301
It is possible to prevent wires, wires, etc. that are illegally inserted from openings such as the first opening 301c formed in the first opening 301c from linearly reaching the engagement portions of the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member (such as a wire or the like) from being inserted through the opening of the bottom wall portion 301 and illegally releasing the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the protrusion 22332a is provided to protrude in the insertion direction of the engagement member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged portion 22332. Therefore, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223
20 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320. As a result, the bottom wall portion 3
When an incorrect member such as a wire or the like is inserted from the first opening 301c of 01, the insertion direction of the incorrect member reaching the engagement portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is determined by the bottom wall 3.
It can be tilted diagonally to the front of 01. This can make it difficult for the force in the direction of disengaging the engagement portion between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 to be transmitted from the tip of the incorrect member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of an unauthorized member through the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301 and the unauthorized release of the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176(b), an engaging member 23310 and a fixing member 23320 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the protrusion 22332a that engages the engaging member 22310 is provided protrudingly in the insertion direction of the engaging member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332, but in the twenty-third embodiment, Engaged portion 23 of engagement member 23310
A protrusion 23332a is provided to protrude in a direction opposite to the insertion direction of 332. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 176(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment. Note that the cross-sectional view in FIG. 176(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view in FIG. 176(a). Furthermore, as described above, the twenty-third embodiment has the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223 in the twenty-second embodiment.
20, only the engagement position is different from that of the 22nd embodiment, and other than the engagement portion between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320, the explanation thereof will be omitted since it is the same as the 22nd embodiment.

Note that the rear case 22300 in the twenty-third embodiment has a bottom wall portion 233 that is substantially rectangular in front view.
01, and an outer wall part 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall part 23301 toward the front, and each wall part 23301, 302 forms a box-shaped box with one side (front side) open. It is formed. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

In addition, the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment has the front side (
An engaging member 23310 is disposed on the box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F), and an engaging member 23310 is disposed on the back side of rear case 23300 (direction of arrow B), 110), and a fixing member 23320 for fixing.

As shown in FIG. 176(b), in the twenty-third embodiment, the engaged portion 2333
The protrusion direction of the protrusion 23332a protruding from the protrusion 22332a of the 22nd embodiment is
176(a)), and a bent portion 23332a1 bent toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) is formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion 23332a.

The engagement member 23310 has a bent portion 23332a1 at a position facing the bent portion 23332a1.
A rectangular opening 23310b larger than the outer shape of is formed. As a result, the engaging member 23
310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the opening 2
The bent portion 23332a1 is inserted inside 3310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are engaged with each other.

Furthermore, a third opening 23301e is formed in the bottom wall portion 23301 of the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment at a position facing the fixing member 23320. This third opening 23301e allows the operator to release the engagement between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the back side of the bottom wall 23301. As a result, the back case 23300
The work of removing the fixing member 23320 from the holder can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178, back case 243 in the twenty-fourth embodiment
00 will be explained. In the eighteenth embodiment, the fixing member 18320 is attached to the bottom wall portion 1830.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall part 24301, the engagement member 24310 is disengaged from the fixing member 18320 and the engaging member 18310. Cut the part inserted into the fixing member 24320.
Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177(a) is a front view of the back case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a sectional view of the back case 24300 taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). FIG. 178 shows CLXXVIII-C in FIG. 177(b).
It is a sectional view of the back case 24300 along the line LXXVIII.

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, a rear case 24300 in the 24th embodiment
comprises a bottom wall portion 24301 that is generally rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands upright from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front, and is provided with one side by each of the walls 24301 and 302. It is shaped like a box with an open front side. In addition, the rear case 24300 has a bottom wall portion 2.
Engagement member 2 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) of 4301
4310 and the back side of the bottom wall part 24301, and the board box 100 (main controller 1
10), and a fixing member 24320 for fixing.

The bottom wall portion 24301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 24301 (see FIG.
) are visible. In addition, the bottom wall portion 24301 has a first opening 24301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 24320, and a first opening 24301c that is located on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening 24301c and that is located in the front-rear direction (arrow F- A control element 24 (described later) is opened in the direction B) and is located inside.
An opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 24362 of 360 is inserted.

The engagement member 24310 includes a second piece 24312 formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front;
The first piece 24311 is bent from the end of the first piece 24312 and extends in an arc shape. The second piece 24312 has a through hole 24 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the connecting portion of the two orthogonal extending portions.
312d, and the distances from the through hole 24312d to the outside of the extended portion of the second piece 24312 are set to be substantially the same.

The through hole 24312d is a portion into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operator 24360, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed into a circular shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. As a result, when the operator 24360 is rotated, the engagement member 24310 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 24312d.

The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centered on the through hole 24312d, and the second piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centered on the through hole 24312d.
4312 protrudes from each end in one direction of rotation (left rotation in front view). Also,
Each first piece 24311 has an engaging portion 24316 that protrudes on both sides in the radial direction centering on the axis of the through hole 24312d at the protruding tip, and extends from the protruding tip surface toward the connection side with the second piece 24312. A recessed portion 24317 is provided.

The engaging portion 24316 is a portion to be engaged with a fixing member 24320 described later, and is a portion that is engaged with a fixing member 24320 that will be described later.
317, the protruding tip portion of the first piece 24311 (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) can be elastically deformed and engaged with the engaged portion 24332 formed on the fixing member 24320. Note that a detailed description of the shapes of the engaging portion 24316 and the recessed portion 24317 will be given later.

The operator 24360 is an operating member that transmits an operation from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to the engagement member 24310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301. The operating section 24361 has a cylindrical shape, and an insertion section 24362 protrudes coaxially with the operating section 24361. The operating portion 24361 is formed on the bottom wall portion 24301, and has an outer diameter set to be larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. Thereby, the entire operation element 24360 can be prevented from being displaced toward the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301.

The insertion portion 24362 is a portion inserted into the through hole 24312d of the engagement member 24310 as described above, and thereby transfers the rotational force input from the operation portion 24361 to the engagement member 24.
310.

The fixing member 24320 includes an intervening member 24330 that engages with the above-described engaging member 24310, and a shaft support member 340 that is disposed on the back side of the intervening member 24330.

The intervening member 24330 is formed into a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open. Also,
The interposed member 24330 includes a housing portion 24335 that projects from the front and is formed in a box shape with an open lower side (arrow D direction side). The housing portion 24335 has the engaging member 2 inside.
This is a portion into which the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 (the distal end portion of the first piece 24311) is inserted, and the open portion on the lower side is arranged on the displacement locus of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 described above. Thereby, the end of the first piece 24311 of the engagement member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 by rotating the engagement member 24310.

Further, the housing portion 24335 has an internal space larger than the engagement portion of the engagement member 24310 at one location. Thereby, when the engagement member 24310 is cut as will be described later, the cut portion of the engagement member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335. Note that in this embodiment, the size of the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is larger than that of the engaging member 243.
The engagement portion (tip portion of the first piece 24311) of 10 is approximately three times larger than that of the accommodating portion 24
At least three or more engaging members 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of 335.

As shown in FIG. 178, the accommodating portion 24335 is opened at the lower side, and a stepped portion 24335a protrudes from the opening portion in a step-like manner. The engaging portion 24316 of is engaged. Thereby, when the engaging member 24310 is rotated, the distal end portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted into the inside of the accommodating portion 24335, and the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 can be engaged with each other.

In this case, the recess depth SH3 (see FIG. 178) of the recess 24317 is
The distance dimension SH4 from the end of the first piece 24311 accommodated in and engaged with the housing part 35 to the lower end of the housing part 24335 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension SH4. Therefore, the engaged first piece 24311
A concave portion 24317 formed in the housing portion 24335 is housed inside the housing portion 24335. As a result, the end portion of the first piece 24311 is elastically deformed, and the engagement member 24310 and the fixing member 24
320 can be prevented from being disengaged.

Therefore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the first piece 24311 inserted inside the housing part 24335
By cutting the first piece 24311 protruding from the housing portion 24335 of the bottom wall portion 24301
Fixation member 24320 can be removed from.

In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the accommodating portion 24335 to the tip of the first piece 24311 is set larger than the distance dimension SH4 described above. As a result, the cut portion of the first piece 24311 can be moved above the accommodating part 24335, and the other first piece 24311 is inserted from the open side of the accommodating part 24335 (the side in the direction of arrow F) to form the stepped part 24335a. can be engaged with.

Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 is calculated as
The determination can be made based on the number of remaining first pieces 24311 of 310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335. As a result, the fixing member 2432
0 is illegally removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an incorrect board.
According to the number of remaining first pieces 24311 of 310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 housed in the housing section 24335, the operator can be made aware that the fixing member 24320 has been removed illegally.

In addition, as described above, the second piece 24312 of the engaging member 24310 is formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front, and by utilizing the region on the side where the first piece 24311 is not formed (the upper side of the T-shape), The first piece 24311 can be inserted into the fixing member 24320 by rotating the engaging member 24310. Further, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated by using the cut area of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 is attached to the fixing member 24320. can be inserted. As a result, the accommodating portion 2433 of the first piece 24311
5 can be determined. Therefore, the operator must remove the uncut first
Since it is possible to visually check the position of the piece 24311 and determine whether the fixing member 24320 has been illegally released, it is easier to prevent fraud than when an operator counts the number of first pieces 24311. It is possible to prevent workers from overlooking traces that have been left behind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is
51 has been described, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decorative member 154 is adhered to the front side of the base plate 60. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14.
Moreover, in FIG. 179(b), a state in which the general winning a prize opening unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60 is illustrated.

Note that the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 25013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60.
In addition, the game board 25013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and in addition to many nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first Prize opening 6
4. It is constructed by assembling the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the back surface of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the second opening 60b of the base 60 (FIG.
1)) A general winning a prize opening unit 25150 is arranged in the opening part.

As shown in FIG. 179, the general winning a prize unit 25150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is connected to the main body part 151 disposed along the front side of the base plate 60. , a first erected portion 152 erected from the end of the main body 151 , and a second erected portion erected from the front of the main body 141 and whose one end is connected to the first erected portion 152 . 1
53, a decorative member 25154 arranged on the back side of the main body part 151, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning holes 63 formed in the main body part 151.

The decorative member 25154 is formed into a plate shape from a light-transmitting material, and is decorated with a pattern or a letter (picture) that is connected to the decorative member 60c disposed on the front side of the base plate 60. Also,
The outer edge of the decorative member 25154 is slightly smaller than the inner edge of the recess 151b formed in the main body 151.

The decorative member 25154 also includes an adhesive tape 25154a attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) at the end of the back surface of the decorative member 25154. Thereby, the decorative member 25154 can be attached and disposed on the base plate 60. Therefore, when placing the decorative member 25154 on the base board 60, the operator can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front of the base board 60 while visually checking the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base board 60. Therefore,
The decoration positions of the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily aligned. As a result, the position of the decoration between the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is suppressed from shifting, and the player can use the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration. It can be easily recognized.

Furthermore, since the decorative member 25154 is attached directly to the front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c), the front-rear direction of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c is more The arrangement in the direction of the arrow FB can be made closer. As a result, each decorative member 25154, 6 when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 25154 from an angle.
It is possible to suppress the positional shift of the decoration of 0c from increasing. As a result, the player receives the decorative member 25.
154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the concave dimension X1 of the concave portion 151b of the main body portion 151 is set smaller than the width dimension X2 of the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B). be done. As a result, when the main body portion 151 is disposed from the front side (direction of arrow F) of the decorative member 25154, the decorative member 25154 is inserted into the recess 151b.
It is possible to prevent the front surface of the decorative member 25154 from coming into contact with the concave bottom surface 151b2 of the decorative member 25154.

Therefore, the back surface portion 151d forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recessed portion 151b can be brought into contact with the front surface of the base plate 60, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60 and making it difficult for the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 to be visually recognized.

Next, the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 180. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the main body 26
An inclined surface 26151a formed at the end of the cylindrical member 151 has an arcuate cross section that bulges outward. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 180(a) and 180(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 180(a) and 180(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14.
In addition, in FIG. 180(a), the player places the game board 26013 at a higher position than usual (for example,
The line of sight when viewed from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. The line of sight when viewed from a position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position in the direction of gravity of the game board 26013) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

Note that the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 26013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. The game board 26013 also includes a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general prize opening 63,
It is configured by assembling the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). (see) can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 26150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 180, the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment includes a plate-shaped main body part 26151 along the front side of the base plate 60, and A decorative member 154 is provided on the back side of the main body portion 26151.

The main body part 26151 is made of a transparent resin material and has a decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decorations such as the patterns and letters (pictures) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 261
51 includes an inclined surface 26151a whose end in a front view is inclined toward the back side and which bulges in an arcuate cross-section, and a recessed portion 1 that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 26151 toward the front side.
51b.

In the inclined surface 26151a, the inclination angle θ1 of the imaginary line IL1 connecting the connecting point with the plane on the front side of the main body part 26151 and the end on the rear side with respect to the front side of the base plate 60 is set to be smaller than 45 degrees. be done. As a result, light traveling in the horizontal direction of the main body 26151 is more easily transmitted from the inclined surface 26151a to the main body 2615 than when the inclination angle θ1 is set larger than 45 degrees.
The angle of incidence when incident on the outside of 1 is increased. Therefore, when light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, when a player enters the general winning slot unit 2615 from a higher position than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013,
0, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154, 60c can be easily seen from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c in the front and rear direction, so that the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150
and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.
Note that in this embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 26151a is formed in an arcuate cross-sectional shape that bulges outward, the closer to the center of the main body 26151 (lower side in FIG. 180(a)) the more the main body 26151a
The angle of incidence at which light traveling horizontally through the main body 26151 is incident on the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Therefore, as the light travels horizontally through the main body 26151 toward the center of the main body 26151 (lower side in FIG.
The angle of incidence when incident on the outside of 51 is increased.

Therefore, the player can move via the inclined surface 26151a below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180(a)), which passes through the intermediate position between the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body part 26151 and the end on the back side. When the side decoration is visually recognized, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body portion 26151 can be easily brought closer to the direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60.

Furthermore, the end of the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b is located on a horizontal line H passing through an intermediate position between the connecting point with the front plane of the main body 26151 and the end on the back side.
It is set below R1 (see FIG. 180(a)) and on the back side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when the player views the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180(a)) through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the player's line of sight passing through the main body portion 26151 can be easily moved closer to the front surface of the base plate 60 in a direction perpendicular to the front surface (horizontal direction).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180(a), even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 26013 from a higher position than usual, the inclined surface 26
151a to decorate the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the general prize opening unit 2615.
Together with the decoration of the decoration member 154 of 0, it can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180(b), when the player views the general winning slot unit 26150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 26013 from the normal height, the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a causes the main body Since the incident angle when the light traveling horizontally through the section 26151 enters the outside of the main body section 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a approximates a right angle, the light emitted to the outside of the main body section 26151 can be made difficult to refract. Therefore, the direction of the player's line of sight is suppressed from being bent when passing through the inclined surface 26151a, and the decorative member 15 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 is
4 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 in the longitudinal direction can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, a game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body part 151 of the general winning opening unit 150, but in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the main body part 2
The inclined surface 27151a formed at the end of the main body portion 27151 has an arcuate cross section recessed inside the main body portion 27151. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 181(a) and 181(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. Note that FIGS. 181(a) and 181(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14.
In addition, in FIG. 181(a), the player places the game board 27013 at a higher position than usual (for example,
The line of sight when viewed from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. The line of sight when viewed from a position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position in the direction of gravity of the game board 27013) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

Note that the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 27013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. The game board 27013 also includes a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general prize opening 63,
It is configured by assembling the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). (see) can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a general winning a prize opening unit 27150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 181, the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment includes a plate-shaped main body part 27151 along the front side of the base plate 60; A decorative member 154 is provided on the back side of the main body portion 27151.

The main body part 27151 is made of a transparent resin material and has a decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decorations such as the patterns and letters (pictures) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body part 271
51 includes an inclined surface 27151a whose end in a front view is inclined toward the back side and has an arcuate cross section and which is recessed toward the inside of the main body section 27151, and an inclined surface 27151a that is recessed from the back surface of the main body section 27151 toward the front side. The recess 151b provided therein is mainly provided.

In the inclined surface 27151a, the inclination angle θ2 of the imaginary line IL2 connecting the connecting point with the plane on the front side of the main body part 27151 and the end on the rear side with respect to the front side of the base plate 60 is set to be larger than 45 degrees. be done. Thereby, the outward protrusion distance of the inclined surface 2751a can be reduced, and the external shape of the main body portion 27151 can be prevented from increasing.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 27151a is recessed inside the main body portion 27151 and has an arcuate cross section, the player can use the inclined surface 27151a to
, 154, the area in which the decorations of each decorative member 60c, 154 can be viewed can be expanded through the inclined surface 27151a due to the concave shape. That is, the main body portion 27151
Due to the arcuate cross section recessed toward the inside of the decorative member 60c, 154, the slope 2
The light incident on 7151a can be refracted and focused toward the player's viewpoint. As a result, the patterns and characters (pictures) visible through the inclined surface 27151a can be made smaller, making it difficult for the player to understand the connections between the decorative members 60c and 154. As a result, the displacement of each decorative member 60c, 154 can be made difficult for the player to notice, and the player's interest can be prevented from being lost.

Furthermore, the end of the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b is located on a horizontal line H passing through an intermediate position between the connection point with the front plane of the main body 27151 and the end on the back side.
It is set above R2 and on the back side of the inclined surface 27151a.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 181(a), when the player visually recognizes the general winning a prize unit 27150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 26013 from a higher position than usual, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 The angle of incidence when light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion is incident on the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Therefore, light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decorative member 154 is easily refracted toward the player's viewpoint, so that the player can move from the normal position with respect to the game board 27013. When the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 is viewed from a high position, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154, 60c can be easily viewed from the front side. As a result, the decorative member 15
Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position of the connecting portions 4 and 60c in the front and back direction, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize unit 27150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60
Together with 0c, it can be easily recognized as 1 decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181(b), when the player views the general winning slot unit 27150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 27013 from the normal height, the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a allows the player to see the decoration. When light traveling horizontally through the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 enters the outside of the main body 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a, the incident angle approximates a right angle, so the light is emitted to the outside of the main body 27151. This makes it difficult for the light to be refracted. Therefore,
By suppressing the bending of the direction of the player's line of sight when passing through the inclined surface 27151a, it is possible to reduce the longitudinal positional deviation between the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. This can make it difficult for people to recognize the information. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(a), a game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the inner surface of the end of the recess 151b recessed in the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 is parallel to the thickness direction of the main body 151. The inner surface of the end of the recess 28151b in the embodiment is the recessed bottom surface 151.
It is inclined inward toward the b2 side. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. In addition,
FIG. 182(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. In addition, in FIG. 182(a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 28013 in the direction of gravity) is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

Note that the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 28013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. The game board 28013 also includes a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general prize opening 63,
It is configured by assembling the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). (see) can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 28150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the base plate 6 of the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment
The general winning a prize opening unit 28150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body part 28151 along the front side of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body part 28151. .

The main body part 28151 is made of a transparent resin material and has a decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decorations such as the patterns and letters (pictures) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body part 281
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 28151b recessed from the back side of the main body portion 28151 toward the front side.

As described above, the inner surface 28151b3 of the recessed portion 28151b extends outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side).
It is formed to be inclined toward the end side of 8151. In this case, the inclination angle θ3 (FIG. 182
(a)) is the inclination angle θ4 (
(see FIG. 182(a)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182(a), the player can
When the decorative member 60c is visually recognized through the main body 28151, the decorative position of the virtual image is bent and visually recognized by the player when the decorative member 60c is visually recognized through the main body 28151, and the decorative member 60c is displayed without passing through the main body 28151.
The decoration position of the real image can be brought closer to the actual decoration position when visually recognized. That is, the decorative member 60 is refracted and visually recognized by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body portion 28151 and the inner surface 28151b3 of the recessed portion.
The position c can be located on the extension line of the player's line of sight. As a result, when the player views the decorative member 60c through the main body portion 28151, it is possible to suppress the positional shift of the decoration caused by the refraction of light, thereby preventing the player's interest from being lost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(b), a game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the inner surface 2915 in the cross section of the recess 29151b
Although the case has been described in which the inclination angle θ3 of 1b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set smaller than the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60, in the 29th embodiment, the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b An inclination angle θ5 of the base plate 60 with respect to the front surface is set to be larger than an inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment. In addition,
FIG. 182(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. In addition, in FIG. 182(b), the line of sight when the player views the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 29013 in the direction of gravity) is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

Note that the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 29013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. The game board 29013 also includes a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general prize opening 63,
It is configured by assembling the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). (see) can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 29th embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 29150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182(b), the base plate 6 of the game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment
The general winning a prize opening unit 29150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body part 29151 along the front side of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body part 29151. .

The main body part 29151 is made of a transparent resin material and has a decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decorations such as the patterns and letters (pictures) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body 291
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 29151b recessed from the back side of the main body portion 29151 toward the front side.

As described above, the inner surface 29151b3 of the recessed portion 29151b extends outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side).
9151 is formed to be inclined toward the end side. In this case, the inclination angle θ5 (FIG. 182
(b)) is the inclination angle θ6 (
(see FIG. 182(b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182(b), the player can
When viewing the decorative member 60c through the inner surface 2915 of the recessed portion 29151b, the light emitted from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 to the player's viewpoint via the inclined surface 151a is
The light can be emitted in a direction substantially perpendicular to the inclination of 1b3. Therefore, when the light enters the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, it is possible to suppress the light from being refracted. As a result, the inner surface 291 of the recess 29151b
When the light is incident on 51b3, the light is refracted, so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154
It is possible to suppress the connecting portions from being viewed from above in the direction of gravity, and it is possible to easily make the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 visible to the player as one decoration.

Furthermore, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end of the decorative member 154, the dimensional error that occurs when the decorative member 154 is formed can be absorbed by the gap.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183(a), general winning opening unit 30 in the 30th embodiment
150 will be explained. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the inner surface 2815 of the recess 28151b
Although the case where 1b3 is formed in an inclined manner has been described, in the 30th embodiment, the recess 301
The inner surface 30151b3 of the recess 28151b bulges inside the recess 28151b and is curved to have an arcuate cross section. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Note that the game board 30013 in the 30th embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 30013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Be prepared. In addition, the game board 30013 includes a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general prize opening 63,
It is configured by assembling the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). (see) can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 30th embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 30150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

FIG. 183(a) is a sectional view of the general winning a prize opening unit 30150 in the 30th embodiment. Note that FIG. 183(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. In addition, in FIG. 183(a), when the player views the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 30013 in the direction of gravity), the line of sight is the two-dot chain line. Illustrated in

As shown in FIG. 183(a), the base plate 6 of the game board 30013 in the 30th embodiment
The general winning a prize opening unit 30150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body part 30151 along the front side of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body part 30151. .

The main body part 30151 is made of a transparent resin material and has a decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decorations such as the patterns and letters (pictures) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body part 301
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 30151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 30151 toward the front side.

The inner surface 30151b3 of the recessed portion 30151b is formed to be inclined outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side) toward the end of the main body portion 30151. At the same time, the recess 30151b bulges inward to have an arcuate cross section.
Thereby, the line of sight of the player viewing the decorative member 60c through the recessed portion 30151b can be easily directed in the direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, the recess 30
When the decoration of the game board 30013 is visually recognized through 151b, the end of the decorative member 154 is suppressed from being seen, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 183(b), the general winning opening unit 311 in the 31st embodiment
50 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the slope 151a is formed as a linear surface in cross section, but the slope 31151a in the 31st embodiment includes a plurality of recesses 31151a1. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183(b) is a sectional view of the general winning a prize opening unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment. Note that FIG. 183(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. Further, the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Also, game board 3
1013 is a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76, 77, a general prize opening 63, a first prize opening 64, The second prize opening 640, the variable prize winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (Fig. 2
(see FIG. 1), and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, in the 31st embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 31150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 183(b), the base plate 6 of the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment
The general winning a prize opening unit 31150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped main body part 31151 along the front side of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body part 31151.

The main body part 31151 is made of a transparent resin material and has a decorative member 15 disposed on the back side.
The decorations such as the patterns and letters (pictures) of 4 can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, the main body part 311
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 151b recessed from the back side of the main body portion 31151 toward the front side.

The inclined surface 31151a has a plurality of recessed portions 311 recessed in a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.
51a1. The plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged in parallel in the direction of inclination of the inclined surface 31151a, and extend along the end of the main body portion 31151 when viewed from the front. As a result, the light is incident on the inside of the main body 31151 and the end of the main body 31151 (the inclined surface 311
The light emitted from 51a) can be diffusely reflected. Therefore, the decoration visible through the inclined surface 31151a can be visible to the player in a blurred state.

Here, since the end portion of the decorative member 154 disposed on the main body portion 31151 is disposed on the back side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60
The connecting portion of the decoration c can be visually recognized by the player in a blurred state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of the decorative members, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjustment means for changing the flow direction by adjusting the distance between opposing faces>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, the special prize winning device 32 in the 32nd embodiment
550 will be explained. In the thirteenth embodiment, the shim member SI is sandwiched between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 to adjust the opposing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. As described above, in the 32nd embodiment,
A case will be described in which the facing distance between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the fastening position of the screw. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, the special winning device 32 in the 32nd embodiment
The configuration of 550 will be explained. FIG. 184 shows the special prize winning device 32 in the 32nd embodiment.
550 is an exploded perspective front view. FIG. 185(a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185(b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 185(c) is a front view of the special winning device 32550.
It is a sectional view of the special prize winning device 32550 taken along the line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in FIG. 185(a).

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, a special winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment
includes a first path member 32560 disposed on the front side and a second path member 32570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 32560.

The first path member 32560 is formed from a non-light transmitting material. In addition, the first path member 32
560 includes a front plate 32564 formed in a plate shape and disposed on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion protruding from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 toward the back side (base plate 60 side). 3256
5.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 32570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 33550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The first wall portion 32565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) with the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c that penetrates in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction), and two first wall portions 32565.
a plurality of protrusions 32565d arranged side by side on opposing surfaces of the protrusion 32565d having a triangular cross section;
It mainly includes upright portions 32565e erected from both upper and lower ends of the first wall portion 32565 on the opposing surface side of two second wall portions 32566.

The through hole 32565c is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 is inserted, and is formed at one location in each first wall portion 32565.

The one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of a second path member 32570, which will be described later, to position the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, and is a portion in the front-rear direction (arrow F -B direction) and in the vertical direction (arrow U-D)
It extends in the direction.

The upright portion 32565e covers the one side protrusion 32565d so that the one side protrusion 325 is away from the player.
65d is made invisible, and is set larger than the protruding distance of the one side protrusion 32565d. This suppresses the position where the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c from being visually recognized, and prevents the player from recognizing the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from deciding that they are at a disadvantage and not playing the pachinko machine 10.

The second path member 32570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 32571 that faces the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560, and a base plate 32571 that extends from the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends of the base plate 32571 to the first path member 32560. A fourth wall portion 32573 protruding from the front plate 32564 side is provided.

The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a throwing path for the game ball in the gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564, and the base plate 32571 is vertically moved in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) when viewed from the front. The size is made smaller than the front plate 32564. This can prevent the base plate 32571 from being viewed from the player side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the opposing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and determining whether the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

Further, the base plate 32571 has a fourth convex portion 3257 that protrudes toward the first path member 32560 side.
1b and the fifth convex portion 32571c, and the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571
c, and a sixth convex portion 32571d protruding toward the front plate 32564 side.

The fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 32550, and are from the outside in the left and right direction of the base plate 32571 (outside in the direction of arrows LR) to the base. It is formed to be inclined downward toward the center of the plate 32571.
As a result, the fourth convex portion 3 flows down between the opposing base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564.
2571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c, those fourth convex portions 32571b
Or it can be made easier to flow down in the direction of inclination of the fifth convex portion 32571c.

The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed on the lower side of the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c described above, and is also formed at approximately the center position of the base plate 32571 in the left-right direction. Further, the sixth convex portion 32571d extends in the direction of gravity. As a result, the flow flows down between the opposing base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564, and the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571
The game ball guided by c can be distributed to either the left or right side of the sixth convex portion 32571d.

The two opposing fourth wall portions 32573 include a plurality of other side recesses 32573c recessed toward the inner side in the opposing direction on the outer side surface in the opposing direction, and adjustment holes 32573 penetrated in the opposing direction.
b, and adjustment holes 32573 are formed inside the fourth wall portion 32573 at two locations in the opposing direction.
It mainly includes a housing portion 32573d surrounding b.

A plurality of the other side recesses 32573c are arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) of the fourth wall 32573, and extend in the direction of gravity. Further, the other side concave portion 32573c is recessed and formed to have a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross sectional shape is set to be approximately the same as the one side protrusion 32565d. As a result, the one side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other side recess 32573c and the first path member 3
2560 can be positioned.

The adjustment hole 32573b is a portion through which the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above is inserted into the accommodation portion 32573d side. In addition, adjustment hole 3257
3b is formed into an elongated hole that is long in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), thereby allowing movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570.

The accommodating portion 32573d has a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the front, and both ends thereof are connected to the fourth wall portion 32573. Further, the housing portion 32573d extends from the front of the base plate 32571 to the front end of the fourth wall portion 32573. As a result, the storage section 3
A screw plate 32590 into which screws inserted through the through hole 32565c and adjustment hole 32573b are screwed can be accommodated in the space surrounded by 2573d.

The screw plywood board 32590 is set to a size that allows it to be inserted into the space formed by the accommodating part 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction) is the same as the front-back dimension ( This is set smaller than the protruding dimension of the fourth wall portion 32573 toward the front side. Thereby, the screw plywood 32590 can be inserted inside the accommodating portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

Further, the screw plate 32590 has a screw hole 32591 into which the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b is screwed together, and the front and back direction of the screw hole 32591 (arrow FB direction).
Guide protrusions 3259 protrude from both ends of the fourth wall 32573 at two locations toward the opposing surface of the fourth wall 32573.
2.

The screw holes 32591 are formed in two places, and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. Also, 2
The screw holes 32591 are formed at positions where the distance of one screw hole 32591 from the upper end is the same as the distance of the other screw hole 32591 from the lower end. Thereby, when the screw groove of one of the screw holes 32591 is crushed, the screw can be fastened using the other screw hole 32591 by turning the screw plate 32590 upside down.

The guide protrusion 32592 projects a predetermined amount outwardly in the left-right direction from both front and rear end portions, and includes an inclined surface that slopes toward the screw hole 32591 side. As a result, the through hole 325
65c and the tip of the screw inserted through the adjustment hole 32573b can be guided to the screw hole 32591. In particular, in this embodiment, if the screw hole 32591 is damaged, a new screw hole 32591 can be used by turning it upside down. In this case, the screw hole 32 for the tip of the screw
Since the position of the screw 591 is likely to be misaligned, as in this embodiment, the tip of the screw is inserted into the screw hole 32.
591 is particularly effective.

The method for adjusting the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special prize winning device 32550 configured as described above first involves adjusting the through hole 3256 of the first path member 32560.
Loosen the screw inserted into 5c and screwed into the screw plate 32590. This allows the second
The first path member 32560 is allowed to move relative to the path member 32570.

Next, by elastically deforming the first wall portion 32565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, the first path member 32565 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570
After pulling out the one side protrusion 32565d of the 560 from the other side recess 32573c, adjust the position in the front and back direction, return the elastic deformation of the first wall part 32655 to the adjusted position, and then pull the one side protrusion 3 again.
2565d is inserted into the other side recess 32573c. As a result, the second path member 32570
The first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned) to.

Finally, the screw plate 32 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560.
By retightening the screw screwed into the second path member 32570, the first
Adjustment of channel member 32560 is completed.

According to this, as described above, since the one side protrusion 32565d and the other side recess 32573c are formed in corresponding shapes, the one side protrusion 32565d and the other side recess 32573c can be tightened with screws after being temporarily fixed.
5d can be pushed into the other side recess 32573c. Therefore, each position where the one-side protrusion 32565d can be inserted into the other-side recess 32573c can be adjusted so that it is always at the same position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variations in the flow of game balls depending on the operator who makes the adjustment, and it is possible to simplify the adjustment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described. FIG. 186(a) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550,
FIG. 186(b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize winning device 32550 taken along the line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in FIG. 186(a).

As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out to the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. In addition, the distance between the left front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 is made wider than that on the right side. In this case, the game ball flowing down between the opposing sides of the front plate 32564 and the base board 32571 is less likely to collide with the fourth convex portion 32571b on the left side, so that the game ball can flow down between the opposing sides on the left side more easily. . As a result, the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571
The game balls flowing down between the opposing sides can be easily discharged from the lower left side.

Next, the special prize winning device 33550 in the 33rd embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 187. In the above 32nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the position of the second path member 32570 with respect to the second path member 32570 is adjusted in a state where the first wall portion 32565 of the first path member 32560 is elastically deformed. In this embodiment, the first wall portion 33565 is connected to the front plate 32.
564. In addition, regarding the same parts as each of the above embodiments,
The same reference numerals are used to omit the detailed explanation.

FIG. 187(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 in the 33rd embodiment, and FIG. 187(b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 33550. In addition, Fig. 187 (
b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186(c).

As shown in FIG. 187, the special prize winning device 33550 in the 33rd embodiment includes a first path member 33560 disposed on the front side and a second path member disposed on the back side of the first path member 33560. 32570.

The first path member 33560 is a front plate 33 formed in a plate shape and disposed on the front side of the gaming area.
564, and a first wall portion 33565 that is pivotally supported on the left and right ends of the front plate 33564.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 32570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 33550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The holding portion 33564e is a member that holds a rod RD that pivotally supports a first wall portion 33565, which will be described later, and is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted into an annular inner portion. Further, the holding portions 33564e are formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the holding portions 33564e are coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, of the two holding parts 33564e, the holding part 33564e formed on the lower side is attached to the front plate 33564.
It is formed at the lower end of the , and the lower end side is closed. This allows the rod RD to be held at the holding part 3.
When the rod RD is inserted into the inside of the holding part 33564e from the upper side of the holding part 3564e, it is possible to suppress the rod RD from falling off (coming out) from the lower end of the holding part 33564e.

The first wall portion 33565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) with the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c that penetrates in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction), and the first wall portion 325 at two locations.
A plurality of one side protrusions 32565d are arranged in parallel on the opposing surfaces of 65 and have a triangular cross section.
, an upright portion 32565e that is erected on the opposite surface side of the second wall portion 32566 from both the upper and lower ends (arrow UD direction) of the first wall portion 32565, and a ring-shaped cross section on the front plate 33564 side. It mainly includes a shafted support 33565f that protrudes from the shaft.

The shafted support 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD that is inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and the inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size that allows insertion of the rod RD. . Further, the pivoted supports 33565f are formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of these supported supports 33565f are coaxial in the vertical direction. In addition, the two shafted supports 33565f are connected to the above-mentioned holding part 335 between them.
A holding portion 33564e formed above the portion 64e is disposed.

Thereby, the connection between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 is achieved by connecting the holding portion 33564 to the first wall portion 33565.
The front plate 3356
4, a first wall portion 33565 is rotatably disposed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 187(b), the base plate 325 of the second path member 32570
71, when the front plate 33564 of the first path member 33560 is disposed non-parallel to the front plate 33564, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 with respect to the front plate 33564 can be changed and disposed.

That is, in the thirty-second embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is disposed non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the front plate 325
It is necessary to hold the first wall portion 33565 in a state where it is elastically deformed with respect to the first wall portion 33565. Further, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, and the second path member 32560 is
One side protrusion 325 of first path member 32560 inserted into other side recess 32573c of 2570
65d needs to be pulled out from the other side recess 32573c. For that purpose, the front plate 32564
There was a possibility that the connecting portion between the first wall portion 32565 and the first wall portion 32565 would be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 33rd embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated with respect to the front plate 33564, there is no need to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall Damage to the connecting portion with the portion 33565 can be suppressed.

The method for adjusting the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special prize winning device 33550 configured as described above first involves adjusting the through hole 3256 of the first path member 33560.
Loosen the screw inserted into 5c and screwed into the screw plate 32590. This allows the second
The first path member 33560 is allowed to move relative to the path member 32570.

Next, by rotating the first wall portion 33565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 33564, the first path member 3356 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570
After pulling out the one side protrusion 32565d of 0 from the other side recess 32573c, adjust the position in the front and back direction, and at the adjusted position, return the rotation of the first wall part 33565 and pull out the one side protrusion 32565 again.
d into the other side recess 32573c. Thereby, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570.

Finally, the screw plate 32 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560.
By retightening the screw screwed into the second path member 32570, the first
Adjustment of path member 33560 is completed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 188 to 190, the special prize winning device 345 in the 34th embodiment
50 will be explained. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, a case was explained in which the direction in which the game ball flows is adjusted by adjusting the facing interval between the front and rear plates of the special winning device 13550.
In the 34th embodiment, the direction in which the game ball flows down can be adjusted by changing the position of the protrusion that protrudes toward the inside of the downflow path. In addition, regarding the same parts as each of the above embodiments,
The same reference numerals are used to omit the detailed explanation.

First, the overall configuration of the special prize winning device 34550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188(a) is a front view of the game board 34013 in the 34th embodiment, and FIG. 188(b) is a front view of the game board 34013 in the 34th embodiment, and FIG.
It is a sectional view of the game board 34013 along the line. FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013.

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, a special winning device 34550 in the 34th embodiment
is arranged above the first prize opening 64 arranged on the game board 34013. In addition, the special winning device 34550 is arranged so that the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 arranged on the front side is arranged in the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. .

Furthermore, the special winning device 34550 and the first winning opening 64 are arranged in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction).
The ball is placed at a position separated by the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball ejected from the special winning device 34550 can be visually recognized by the player.

The special prize winning device 34550 is a first path member 345 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 34570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560, and a fixture 34553 screwed onto the back side of the second path member 34570. Be prepared.

The first path member 34560 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 34570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material.
Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 34550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 34550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The first path member 34560 is formed into a plate shape, and includes a front plate 34564 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the gaming area, and a front plate 34564 from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the rear side (arrow A first wall portion 34565 erected on the B direction side).

The front plate 34564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of the downward flow path of the game ball formed between the opposite sides of the second path member 32570, which will be described later. The outer shape is also large when viewed from the front. This allows the second path member 34570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 to be moved to the front plate 3.
4564 can make it difficult to see. Therefore, from the player side, the second path member 3457
It is possible to prevent 0 from being visually recognized. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 34570 is changed, the change can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

The first wall portion 34565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13, and is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section. The vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565 on the back side is the front plate 345
64 and the fourth convex portion 34571b of the base plate 34571, which will be described later.
8(b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060 from the upright tip, and a through hole 34565g1 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565g. Ru. The through hole 34565g1 is a hole into which a screw is inserted, and by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 34565g1 into the base plate 34060, the first
Path member 34560 can be fastened to base plate 34060.

The second path member 34570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 34571 that faces the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560, and a support portion 34579 that projects from the back side of the base plate 34571 in a cylindrical shape.

The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in the gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564, and is formed at a position spaced apart from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined distance. The base plate 34571 also has a fourth convex portion 345 that protrudes toward the front plate 34564 side.
71b. Thereby, the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the opposing base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b can be changed.

The support part 34579 is a part that pivotally supports the second path member 34570, and the cylindrical shaft is
It is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (at the center of the base plate 34571). Furthermore, a circular through hole 34060d is opened in the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013 at a position corresponding to the support part 34579, and the support part 34060d is opened inside the through hole 34060d.
579 is inserted. Thereby, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported by the base plate 34060.

The support portion 34579 has a fastening hole 34579a recessed at its protruding tip. Fastening hole 345
79a is recessed coaxially with the axis of the support portion 34579, and has an internal thread machined on its inner peripheral surface. Thereby, the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 inserted into the through hole 34060d from the back side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

The fixture 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the second path member 34570 described above to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and includes an operating portion 34553a formed in a cylindrical shape and a projection on the front side of the operating portion 34553a. A threaded portion 34553b is provided.

The operating portion 34553a is a portion held by a worker who arranges the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and is formed to have a larger external shape than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060. Further, the operation section 34553a is connected to the through hole 34 of the base plate 34060.
The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of 060d.

As a result, when the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a and the second path member 34570 is disposed on the base plate 34060, the fixture 34553
can be prevented from coming out to the front side of the base plate 34060 through the through hole 34060d.

The threaded portion 34553b is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operating portion 34553a, and
A male thread is machined on its outer circumferential surface. As described above, the threaded portion 34553b is a portion that is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, is set to have an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and is inserted through the through hole 34060d. and is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570.

According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the ejection position of the game balls ejected from the special winning device 34550, the operator
Insert your hand (arm) from the front side of the game board 13 (in the direction of arrow F) to the back side of the base plate 34060 (in the direction of arrow B) through the first opening 60a (center frame 86) formed at 060. to access the operating section 34553a of the fixture 34553.

Next, rotate the operation part 34553a to close the fastening hole 34579 of the second path member 34570.
Loosen the threaded part 34553b screwed into part a. Thereby, the second path member 34570 is made rotatable about the support portion 34579, and the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b of the second path member 34570. Fourth convex portion 345
When the position of 71b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, so the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550 is changed. Can be changed.

In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis of the base plate 34571, so that the second path member 34570 cannot be rotated. In this case, it is possible to suppress changes in the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the second path member 34570 has been rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from deciding that they are at a disadvantage and not playing the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (second path member 34570) is changed will be described. Figure 190(a) to Figure 1
90(d) is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 34010 taken along the CXC-CXC line in FIG. 188.

As shown in FIG. 190, the fourth convex portion 34571b has a substantially V-shaped protrusion when viewed from the front. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 190(a), when the bent side of the V-shape is placed on the lower side, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are thrown to the center part along the slope of the V-shape. It's easy to do. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to flow into the winning hole 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190(b), when the bent side of the V-shape is placed on the upper side, the game balls flowing from above the special winning device 34550 are directed to both left and right ends along the slope of the V-shape. Makes it easier to throw the ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for game balls to flow into the winning hole 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 190(c) and 190(b), when the bent side of the V-shape is placed at either the left or right end, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are To easily throw a game ball along the slope of the upper side of the V, and to throw a game ball to the lower side of the V without colliding with the upper side of the V, along the slope of the lower side of the V. I can do it. Therefore,
The direction in which the game ball is thrown can be changed by the difference in the areas where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V and the lower side of the V.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, it is also possible to arrange the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b at a position other than the positions shown in FIGS. 190(a) to 190(d). For example, Figure 19
When the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees to the right in front view from the position shown in 0(a), the game balls flowing from above the special winning device 34550 are caused to flow down along the V-shaped slope. Therefore, the game ball can be easily discharged from a position slightly shifted to the left (in the direction of arrow L) from the upper side of the winning hole 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193, the special prize winning device 355 in the 35th embodiment
50 will be explained. In the above 34th embodiment, a case has been described in which the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed by rotating the second path member 34570, but in the 35th embodiment,
The second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35 in the 35th embodiment
550 will be explained. FIG. 191(a) shows a game board 35013 in the 35th embodiment.
FIG. 191(b) is a sectional view of the game board 35013 taken along the line CXCIb-CXCIb in FIG. 191(a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special prize winning device 35550.

As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, a special winning device 35550 in the 35th embodiment
is arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the first winning a prize opening 64 arranged on the game board 35013. In addition, in the special winning device 35550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. It is arranged in a shape.

Furthermore, the special winning device 35550 and the first winning opening 64 are arranged in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow UD)
The ball is placed at a position separated by the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball ejected from the special winning device 35550 can be visually recognized by the player.

The special winning device 34550 has a first path member 355 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 35570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560, and a fixture 34553 screwed onto the back side of the second path member 35570. Be prepared.

The first path member 35560 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing sides of a second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material.
Thereby, it is possible to make the downward direction of the game ball inside the special prize winning device 35550 invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The first path member 35560 is formed in a plate shape and includes a front plate 34564 disposed on the front side of the game area, and a front plate 34564 that stands from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the back side (arrow B direction side). A first wall portion 35565 provided therein.

The front plate 35564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the falling path of the game ball formed between the opposite sides of the second path member 35570, which will be described later. The outer shape of the base plate 35570 in front view is larger than that of the base plate 35571 of the base plate 35570. As a result, the second path member 35 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560
570 can be made difficult to visually recognize with the front plate 35564. Therefore, the second
It is possible to suppress the route member 35570 from being visually recognized. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 35570 is changed, the change can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

The first wall portion 35565 is a portion that is fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013.
4 and the fourth convex portion 35571b of the base plate 35571, which will be described later.
(see (b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60 from the erected tip, and penetrates the bent portion 35565g in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A through hole 35565g1 and a recessed portion 35565g2 recessed from the back surface of the bent portion 35565g toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) are formed.

The through hole 35565g1 is a hole into which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 35565g2 is a portion that accommodates both left and right ends (arrow LR direction side) of a base plate 35571 of a second path member 35570, which will be described later, inside, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565g. , is recessed in the vertical center of the bent portion 35565g. Thereby, when both left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are accommodated inside the recessed portion 35565g2, both left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portion 35365g. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the position of the base plate 35571. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from deciding that they are at a disadvantage and not playing the game.

Further, the concave dimension of the concave portion 35565g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the plate thickness of the base plate 35571, and the separation distance X5 between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565g (Fig. 191
(see FIG. 191(b)) is set larger than the horizontal width dimension X6 of the base plate 35571 (see FIG. 191(b)). Thereby, the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) can be displaced in the left-right direction. Note that the base plate 35571 (second path member 3557
0) will be described later.

The second path member 35570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560, and a rectangular shape in rear view projecting from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571. A support portion 35579 is provided.

The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in the gap between the first path member 35560 and the front plate 35564, and is formed at a position spaced apart from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined distance. Furthermore, the base plate 35571 includes a fourth convex portion 35571b that protrudes toward the front plate 35564 (in the direction of arrow F). As a result, the base plate 35571 and the front plate 3556
The direction in which the game balls flowing down between the four opposing sides can be changed by colliding with the fourth convex portion 35571b.

The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570, and is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570.
A cylindrical shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of base plate 34571 (center of base plate 34571).
Furthermore, the base plate 60 of the game board 34013 has a sliding hole 35060e in the form of an elongated hole extending in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the supporting part 35579, and the supporting part 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. Ru. Thereby, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

The width of the sliding hole 35060e in the transverse direction (in the direction of the arrow UD) is set to be approximately the same as the dimension in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrow UD) of the support part 35579, and The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is set larger than the direction dimension (arrow LR direction). Thereby, the support part 35579 inserted into the inside of the sliding hole 35060e can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the sliding hole 35060e.

Further, the support portion 35579 has a fastening hole 35579a recessed at its protruding tip. The fastening hole 35579a has a female thread on its inner peripheral surface, and the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. Note that the protruding dimensions of the support portion 34579 are as follows:
The thickness of the base plate 60 is set smaller than that of the base plate 60, and the fastening hole 35579a has the fixing tool 34.
By screwing together the screw portion 34553b of 553, the second path member 35570 is attached to the base plate 6.
It can be fixed to 0.

According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the ejection position of the game balls ejected from the special winning device 35550, the operator can Game board 3501 through 1 opening 60a (center frame 86)
3 from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 to access the operating section 34553a of the fixture 34553.

Next, rotate the operation part 34553a to close the fastening hole 35579 of the second path member 35570.
Loosen the threaded part 34553b screwed into part a. This makes the second path member 35570 slidable in the left-right direction, and the second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b of the second path member 35570. Fourth convex portion 3557
When the position of 1b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, so the ejection position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 is changed. Can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (second path member 35570) is changed will be described. Figure 193(a) to Figure 1
93(c) is the game board 3501 along the CXCIII-CXCIII line in FIG. 191(b).
3 is a sectional view of FIG. Note that in FIGS. 193(a) to 193(c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193(b) is used as the reference position, and in FIG. 193(a), the second path member 35570 is A state in which the second path member 35570 is displaced to the left in the view is illustrated, and a state in which the second path member 35570 is displaced from the reference position to the right (in the direction of the arrow R) in the front view is illustrated in FIG. 193(c).

As shown in FIG. 193, the fourth convex portion 35571b has a substantially V-shaped protruding shape when viewed from the front, and the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 35550 are centered along the slope of the V-shape. (V-shaped bent part).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193(b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571b is disposed above the first winning opening 64, the special winning device 35550 is discharged from below. This makes it easier for game balls to flow into the first prize opening 64.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (the position shown in FIG. 193(b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b
Since the bent part of the letter is placed at a position shifted to the left or right from the top of the first winning opening 64, the special winning device 3555
Game balls discharged from below the zero are made difficult to flow into the first prize opening 64.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, a special prize winning device 36550 in the 36th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the first unit 5 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60
51 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 and is held in a state where it is urged toward the back side of the base plate 60. In this embodiment, the first unit 36551 is urged toward the back side of the base plate 60 by the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 194(a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board 36013 in the 36th embodiment, and FIG. 194(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 36013. Furthermore, Figure 1
94 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 194, the special winning device 36550 in the 36th embodiment is slid from the inside of the first opening 60a where the center frame 86 is disposed, and
It is formed from the first unit 36551 disposed at 0.

The first unit 36551 has a space inside thereof in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, the game balls flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can be made to flow into the inside of the first unit 36551. Also, the first
The unit 36551 includes a fastening portion 36551b that protrudes from a side surface (rear surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the rear surface (in the direction of arrow B).

The fastening portion 36551b is a portion into which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted, and is provided to protrude toward the back side (direction of arrow B), and is attached to the base plate 60.
The protruding tip is bent in a direction parallel to the back surface of.

Furthermore, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) on the side surface on the bending side, and a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side of the bending portion 36551b, and a plate thickness direction (arrow FB a through hole 36551b1 that penetrates in the direction).

In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X7 from the base end (back surface of the first unit 36551) to the front of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194(b)). is set larger than the thickness of the base plate 60.
Furthermore, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 (FIG. 194 (b)) is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the thickness of the base plate 60.

When a screw is fastened to the through hole 36551b1, the bulging portion 36551b2 generates a force that presses (energizes) the first unit 36551 against the back side of the base plate 60 (in the direction of arrow F). It is formed between the base end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

As a result, when the screw inserted through the fastening portion 36551b is fastened to the back surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 comes into contact with the back surface of the base plate 60, thereby reducing the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60. , the force of pushing the bent end side into the base plate 60 side with the screw can be converted into the force of pulling out the base end side of the bent part toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). Thereby, formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 36551 and the front surface of the base plate 60 can be suppressed.

As a result, there is no need to fasten the screws through which the first unit 36551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 36551 can be easily formed larger by the amount of fastening allowance. Further, in the 36th embodiment, the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened.
6551 can be slid and displaced to facilitate attachment to the first opening 60a of the base plate 60.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, a special prize winning device 37550 in the 37th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the first unit 5 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60
51 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 and is held in a state where it is urged toward the back side of the base plate 60. In this embodiment, the first unit 37551 is fastened with a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60 and is held in a state where it is urged toward the back side of the base plate 60. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 195(a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board 37013 in the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 195(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 37013. Furthermore, Figure 1
95 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 195, a special prize winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment is formed from a first unit 37551 disposed in front of the base plate 60.

The first unit 37551 has a space inside thereof in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, the game balls flowing down the front of the base plate 60 can be made to flow into the inside of the first unit 37551. Also, the first
The unit 37551 includes a plurality of annular convex portions 3 that protrude in an annular shape on the back side (arrow B direction side).
7551b.

The annular convex portion 37551b is a portion into which a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60 is screwed, and an internal thread is formed on the inner peripheral surface. In this embodiment, the annular convex portions 37551b are formed at four locations on the back surface of the first unit 37551.

Further, a circular concave portion 37060d is formed in the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551b. The recess 37060d is a portion into which the annular protrusion 37551b is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 37551b. Further, the depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular projection 37551b.

Furthermore, a circular through hole 37060d1 coaxially with the recess 37060 is formed in the bottom surface of the recess 37060d. The through hole 37060d1 has an annular convex portion 3755
This is a hole through which the tip of a screw to be screwed into 1b is inserted, and the opening has an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 37060d. Thereby, a screw can be fastened to the first unit 37551 disposed from the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B) to the front side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow F).

In this case, as described above, the depth of the recess 37060d is set larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular projection 37551b, so by screwing the screw into the annular projection 37551b, The first unit 37551 can be disposed on the base plate 60 with the convex portion 37551b (first unit 37551) urged toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). Thereby, formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 37551 and the front surface of the base plate 60 can be suppressed.

As a result, there is no need to fasten the screws through which the first unit 37551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 37551 can be easily formed larger by the amount of fastening allowance. Further, in the 37th embodiment, since the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the recess 37060d of the base plate 60, the first unit 37551
The space in which the game ball is thrown can be enlarged.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side using the game ball>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 384 in the 38th embodiment
40 will be explained. In the eleventh embodiment, a case will be described in which a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball accommodated in the lower displacement member 11440 by light emitted from the control board 491, and the position of the game ball is recognized from the position of the shadow. However, the lower displacement member 11 in the 38th embodiment
440 reflects the light emitted from the control board 491 on the outer surface of the game ball, and allows the position of the game ball to be recognized at a position where the amount of light is increased. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
197(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, and FIG. 197(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440.
197(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along the line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb in FIG. 197(a), and FIG. In addition, in FIG. 197(a), the front side decorative member 384
51 and the front case 38481 are shown removed, and the front case 38
The LED 38483b disposed at 481 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Also, Figure 197(b)
And FIG. 197(c) shows a state in which the front decoration part 451 is attached.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the 38th embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46), and a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46).
A case member 38480 that covers both sides of the case member 70 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), a transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and covers the front and rear of the case member 38480. The decorative member 11450 is formed in the following manner.

The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is a front case 3 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470.
8481 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side).

The front case 38481 is formed into a rectangular and horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the front case 38
481 includes an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction (in the direction of arrows LR) at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrows UD), and a bottom wall portion that is formed protruding from the lower end surface on the back side (in the direction of arrow B). 481b, a shaft hole 481c penetrating the lower end in the front-rear direction, and an LED board 38 disposed on the back side.
483 is mainly provided.

The LED board 38483 is a member that causes the inside of the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481) to emit light, and includes a main body portion 38483a formed in a plate shape;
A plurality of LEDs 38483b are disposed in the LEDs 38483b and emit light.

The main body portion 38483a is a base on which wiring for conducting electricity to the plurality of LEDs 38483b is laid, and extends in the direction of displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (arrow LR direction). Multiple LED384
83b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the main body portion 38483a.

Further, each LED 38483b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes through the back side (arrow B direction side) of each LED 38483b. As a result, each LED 38
When the game ball is located on the back side of 483b, the light from the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated onto the front side decoration part 11451. Therefore, as described above, since the front decoration part 11451 includes the transmission part 11451b that can transmit light, the light reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated to the front decoration part 11451 is transmitted through the transmission part 11451b. The light can be emitted to the player side (in the direction of arrow F) through the light beam. Therefore, it is possible to make the amount of light visible from the player side through the transmitting portion 11451b greater in the portion reflected by the game ball than in the other portions. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 38440.

In addition, in this embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even if the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 is displaced, at least a part of the game ball can be irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be constantly irradiated onto the game ball received in the ball receiving section 467.

Further, according to the thirty-eighth embodiment, the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the back case 482, which are arranged on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the LED 38483b, are preferably members with a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member forms a black color scheme. According to this, LED
The light emitted from the case member 38480 (lower displacement member 38440) can be suppressed from being reflected inside the case member 38480 (lower displacement member 38440) and emitted from the transparent portion 11451b of the front decoration portion 11451. As a result, it is possible to increase the difference in the amount of light emitted between the front where the game ball is placed and the other front, allowing the player to recognize the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440. You can make it easier to do so.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 3944 in the 39th embodiment
0 will be explained. In the thirty-eighth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the game ball reflects light to make the player recognize the position where the game ball is placed, but in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the ball receiving part 3
The position of the game ball is recognized by reflecting the light by the reflective member disposed at 9467. In addition,
The same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment.
FIG. 199(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIG. 199(b) and FIG.
(c) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 39440. In addition, Fig. 199(b) and Fig. 199(
c) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 198(c).

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the 39th embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 46), and a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46).
A case member 38480 that covers the front and rear of the case member 38480, a transmission mechanism 39460 disposed displaceably between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 disposed to cover the front and rear of the case member 38480. , is provided.

The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member disposed on the front side of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, 463, and a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461.
a movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and is disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the base member 470; a transmission gear 465 that is in mesh with the transmission gear 465; a rack 39466 that has a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 and is disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the movable rack 464; Ball receiving part 39467 rotatably arranged on one end side
It is formed mainly by

The rack 39466 is formed from a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular in front view, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the other end toward the front side, and a shaft portion 39466b that protrudes toward the front side. It is formed mainly by two sliding plates 466c and a recessed part 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

The shaft portion 39466b is a projection inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving part 4
67 can be held rotatably.

The ball receiving portion 39467 includes a first piece 39467c bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, a second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and a second piece 39467d connected to the second piece 39467d. A third piece 39467e is provided on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are parts that hold the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 39440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 39467c
When a game ball is thrown between the opposing sides of the second piece 39467d, the second piece 39467d is displaced in the direction of separating from the first piece 39467c, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39
467d are arranged in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and a game ball can be held inside the U-shape.

The first piece 39467c includes a receiving piece 39467c4 forming an L-shape when viewed from the front, forming one extending side, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and the receiving piece 39467c4 and the leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 39467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bent portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 that protrudes to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 in between. and.

The receiving piece 39467c4 is a part that forms the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) formed by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front. It is formed into a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

The connecting portion 39467c1 protrudes from two locations at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 39467c5. In addition, the connecting portion 39467c1 is connected to a second piece 3 which will be described later.
9467d and the third piece 39467e, and includes a connecting hole 39467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and has a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 39467c2 is connected to a shaft portion 39467e that protrudes from a third piece 39467e, which will be described later.
3 is the opening into which it is inserted. The connecting hole 39467c2 has a shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into an insertion hole 39467d3 formed in a second piece 39467d, which will be described later, on the front side (arrow F direction side).
inserted from. Further, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened with a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side of the connecting hole 39467c2 (the side in the direction of arrow B). As a result, the first piece 39467
The second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to c.

Further, the first piece 39467c includes a recessed portion 39467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow D) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The concave bottom surface of the concave portion 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowest part) of the side surfaces where the game ball is held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. As a result, the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d
The game ball held in is rolled inside the recess 39467c3. As a result, the second piece 39467d can be easily displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c due to the load of the game ball.

The second piece 39467d includes the receiving portion 39467c4 of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 394.
67d forms the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) that is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and is concave in the direction away from the first piece 39467c. It is formed into a curved shape. Also, the second piece 39467d is the first piece 39467c.
An insertion hole 39467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the connecting portion of the connector, and a recessed part 39467d2 that is recessed in a circular shape from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side). Prepare for the Lord.

The second piece 39467d has the shaft portion 3946 of the third piece 39467e inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 39467e of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is similarly rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 39467c.

Furthermore, the second piece 39467d has connecting portions 39 that protrude from two places on the first piece 39467c.
467c1 and connected to the first piece 39467c. This allows the second
When the piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, the connecting portion 39467c
By bringing the second piece 39467d into contact with the opposite side surface of the shaft portion 39467e3, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion 39467e3 from breaking.

The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 39467e4 of a third piece 39467e to be described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The third piece 39467e includes a reflecting plate 39467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front;
A shaft portion 394 protruding from the reflecting plate 39467e1 toward the back side (arrow B direction side)
67e3 and a connecting shaft 39467e4.

The reflective plate 39467e1 is made of a resin material and has an outer surface coated with plating. Thereby, when the light emitted from the LED 38483b is irradiated onto the reflecting plate 39467e1, the light can be reflected on the outer surface of the reflecting plate 39467e1. In addition, the reflection plate 39467e1 is
The entire structure is curved in an arc toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, when light emitted from the front side is reflected, the light can be focused on a predetermined portion. Note that the shielding of the light from the light emitter 11491a by the reflection plate 39467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 39467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d, as described above. In addition, the shaft portion 3
A connecting hole 394 is inserted into the protruding tip surface of the 9467e3 from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3.
A hole is formed into which a screw inserted into 67c2 can be screwed. Therefore, when the shaft portion 39467e3 is inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3, the shaft portion 39467e3
By fastening a screw to the insertion end surface of the first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d, and the third piece 39467e can be connected, and the third piece 39467e can be connected to the first piece 3946.
It can be made rotatable relative to 7c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is connected to the concave portion 39467d of the second piece 39467d.
2 is inserted. This causes the second piece 39467d to move against the first piece 39467c on the shaft portion 3.
When rotationally displaced about 9467e3, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Therefore, the third piece 39467e is replaced with the second piece 39467e.
It can be displaced along with the displacement of d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199, when a game ball is received between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, the ball receiving part 39467 moves the received game ball between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.
The second piece 9467c and the second piece 39467d roll on the receiving surfaces (inner side surfaces formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front) and are guided to the recess 39467c3 located at the lowest end of the receiving surface. This results in
On the outer surface of the game ball, the second piece 39467d can be rotated about the shaft portion 39467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. As a result, the third piece 39467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 39467d, can be displaced upward and placed above the light irradiation of the LED 38483b.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b is reflected by the reflection plate 394 of the third piece 39467e.
67e1 to the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the lower displacement member 39440, and the transparent part 1
1451b. Thereby, the amount of light emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased, allowing the player to recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 39440.

Further, the second piece 39467d has the connecting shaft 39467e4 inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2, and the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied thereto. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the shaft portion 394673e from the connecting portion between the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e. As a result, when no force other than gravity is acting on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467de, the load of the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39
467e can be rotated toward the first piece 39467c4.

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected (taken out) from the ball receiving part 39467, the third piece 394
The second piece 39467d can be displaced toward the ball receiving piece 39467c4 side of the first piece 39467c by the load of 67e. Therefore, only when the game ball is received in the ball receiving part 39467, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting part 11451b can be partially increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress light from being reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 due to the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467, etc.

Furthermore, like the ball receiving part 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving part 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of slidingly displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 39440, so that the lower displacement member 39440 emits light. The game ball received through the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received in the ball receiving part 39467, the ball receiving part 39
In the structure in which the ball bearing part 39467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b as the ball bearing 467 slides, the sliding speed of the ball bearing part 39467 causes the ball bearing part 39 to rotate around the shaft hole 467b.
467 rotation speed is changed. Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiving part 39467, there is a problem that the ejection speed of the game balls from the ball receiving part 39467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the 39th embodiment, the load on the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39467 to
Since the direction in which d rotates and the direction in which the ball receiving part 39467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b when emitting the game ball are set to be approximately the same direction, the game ball emitted from the emitting opening 471 A driving force can be applied when the second piece 39467d is displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 394
Even if the force applied to the game ball from the ball receiver 39467 when displacing the ball 67 and ejecting the game ball from the ejection opening 471 is reduced, the speed of the ejected game ball can be maintained. As a result, the ejection speed of the game balls ejected from the ball receiver 39467 can be stabilized.

Next, the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a malfunction is reported when a game ball gets stuck in the curved part 581a of the main path SK1, but in the 40th embodiment, a game ball of a size other than the specified size Fraud can be reported when passing SK1. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 405 taken along the line CCb-CCb in FIG. 200(a).
51 is a schematic cross-sectional view. Note that the cross-sectional view in FIG. 200(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view in FIG. 25.

As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment has a front side (
A first route member 560 disposed on the side in the direction of arrow F), a second route member 570 disposed on the back side of the first route member 560 (on the side in the direction of arrow B), and the second route member 570 and a third path member 40580 disposed on the back surface of the device.

The third path member 40580 includes a first covering member 40581 disposed on the back surface above the second path member 570 (in the direction of arrow U), and a first covering member 40581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the bottom side (in the direction of arrow D). The second covering member 582 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the
A first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) arranged between the covering members 582 and a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) arranged on the back side of the second covering member 582 are mainly used. configured in preparation for

The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a throwing path for the game ball that curves in a substantially U-shape toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and is on the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. A curved portion 40581a that connects the
0581b.

The curved portion 40581a has a first opening 571a and a fourth opening 571d (second path member 5
70) is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with an open side, and a first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside thereof. In addition, the curved portion 40581a has a width dimension in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) that is formed smaller toward the back side (direction of arrow B), and a width dimension in the left-right direction of the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section. X10 (see FIG. 200(a)) is formed to have a size that is 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when a game ball with a diameter of 1.1 times or more than a prescribed game ball is thrown, the game ball can be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1).

Further, the curved portion 40581a is arranged inside the recessed portion 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similar to the curved portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the curved portion 40
A game ball stopped inside the ball 581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17), and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (fraud).

Furthermore, the curved portion 40581a includes an opening 40581a1 that opens in the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a housing portion 4 that is provided in a box shape that projects from the rear end of the opening 40481a1 and is open upward.
0581a2.

The opening 40581a1 is an opening for discharging balls with a smaller diameter than the specified game ball diameter from the main path SK1, and has an opening size of X15 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) (Fig. 200 (
(See a) is formed to have a size larger than 0.9 times the diameter of the game ball. Note that the opening 40
581a1 is formed on the back side of the curved part 40581, which is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling part 576, and can throw the game ball passing through the main path SK1 to the opening 40581a1. . Thereby, when a game ball whose diameter is 0.90% or more smaller than a prescribed game ball is thrown, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main path SK1.

The accommodating part 40581a2 is a box that accommodates the game ball discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the opening 40
The game balls ejected from 581a1 can be stored in the storage section 40581a2, and the stored game balls can be detected by the detection device 86b3 to cause the pachinko machine 10 to notify an error (fraud).

In addition, in the 40th embodiment, a case has been described in which the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed to be 0.1 times different in size from a game ball having a prescribed diameter (11 mm), but this is not necessarily the case. The size is not limited to , and the magnification of the size of the game ball may be changed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 415 in the 41st embodiment
51 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j formed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK3 are arranged vertically (arrow Although the case where the first recess 41571h and the second recess 41571i in the 41st embodiment are formed substantially symmetrically in the U-D direction has been described,
The third recess 41571j and the third recess 41571j are each formed in an irregular shape.The same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

201(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment, and FIG. 201(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 taken along the line CCIb-CCIb in FIG. 201(a).
1551 is a schematic cross-sectional view. FIG. 202(a) shows the CCIIa-CCI of FIG. 201(a).
202(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 along line Ia, and FIG.
1(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 along the line CCIIb-CCIIb of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment
is a first path member 41560 arranged on the front side, a second path member 41570 arranged on the back side of the first path member 41560, and a second path member 41570 arranged on the back side of the second path member 41570. The third path member 580 (see FIG. 19) is mainly formed.

The first path member 41560 includes a front plate 41564 that is formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), and a substantially U-shaped cross section that is open on the upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U). A first receiving part 561, a second receiving part 562, and a third receiving part 563 are formed in the front plate 41564 and protrude from the upper side (arrow U direction side) end to the back side (arrow B direction side). (See Figure 21),
The lower side (arrow D direction side) of the first receiving part 561, second receiving part 562, and third receiving part 563
A first wall portion 41565 that protrudes continuously from the front plate 41564 and extends along a part of the edge of the front plate 41564; It mainly includes two sets of a second wall portion 566 and a third wall portion 567 (see FIG. 21) protruding from two locations.

The front plate 41564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of a downstream path of the game ball formed between the opposing second path member 41570 and third path member 580, which will be described later.
It is formed from a light-transmitting member. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 via (through) the front plate 41564.

The front plate 564 also has a first convex portion 41564b and a second convex portion 415 at positions facing a first concave portion 41571h, a second concave portion 41571i, and a third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later.
64c and a third protrusion 41564d are provided in a protruding manner.

The second path member 41570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560, and a plate-shaped base plate 41571 that projects from the front side of the base plate 41571 (in the direction of arrow F) toward the first path member 41560. a fourth wall portion 573 (see FIG. 21);
a fifth wall portion 574 (see FIG. 21) that protrudes from a position spaced a predetermined distance downward from the fifth wall portion 574; It is formed mainly of a wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21).

The base plate 41571 has a ball throwing path (
A first recess 41571h recessed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK3,
It includes a second recess 41571i and a third recess 41571j.

The first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are formed in a curved shape toward the back side. In addition, the first concave portion 41571h and the first convex portion 4
The opposing dimension of 1564b, the opposing dimension of the second recess 41571i and the second protrusion 41564c, and the opposing dimension of the third recess 41571j and the third protrusion 41564d are the same opposing dimension L19 (FIG. 201( (see b)).

In addition, the opposing dimension L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is smaller than the opposing dimension L20 (see FIG. 201(b)) between the back of the front plate 41564 and the front of the base plate 571. is set to As a result, the first recess 41571h and the second recess 4157
1i and the third concave part 41571j and the first convex part 41564b, the second convex part 41564c, and the third convex part 41564d.
1571i and the third recess 41571j, the first convex part 41564b, and the second convex part 41564c
By making it come into contact with the third convex portion 41564d, the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Furthermore, the protrusion dimensions of the first protrusion 41564b, the second protrusion 41564c, and the third protrusion 41564d toward the base plate 41571 are set to be the same. Further, the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d, the first concave portion 41571h,
The distance L21 (see FIG. 201(b)) between the base plate 41571, excluding the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j, is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j
The game ball thrown between the first convex part 41564b, the second convex part 41564c, and the third convex part 41564d is the first convex part 41564b, the second convex part 41564c, and the third convex part 415.
64d. As a result, the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

The first recess 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2, and is recessed long along the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK2. As a result, the first recess 41571
When the game ball thrown inside the first recess 41571h is thrown inside the first recess 41571h, it is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the first recess 41571h. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be prevented from stopping due to contact with the first recess 41571h.

The first convex portion 41564b protrudes from the surface facing the first concave portion 41571h.
571h in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which it extends. As a result, when a game ball thrown along the main path SK2 comes into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball is moved to the first concave portion 41571h.
This makes it easier to throw the ball inside.

The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1, and is recessed long along the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). The second recess 41571i has an elliptical shape in a front view that is elongated in the vertical direction, and the middle position of the ellipse in the left-right direction is set at the middle position in the left-right direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the vertical direction. Further, the center of curvature of the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second recessed portion 41571i is arranged on the throwing trajectory of the center of the game ball thrown along the main path SK2. Therefore, since the second recessed portion 41571i is recessed above the trajectory of the game ball thrown from the main path SK2, even when the game ball is thrown at a relatively high speed along the main path SK2, the second recess 41571i Center the game ball into the second recess 41571
i can pass through the front side. As a result, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 is
It is possible to easily slow down the speed of the game ball by throwing the ball inside the recessed portion 41571i, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from going wild on the curved path WK1.

The second convex portion 41564c that protrudes from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. Further, the bent portion of the second convex portion 41564c is set on the front side of the center of curvature on the upper side of the ellipse of the second recessed portion 41571i when viewed from the front. Further, the bent portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c extends in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1, and the bent portion on the other side extends in the direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. It extends in the direction perpendicular to the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 comes into contact with the second convex part 41564c on the other side and is thrown inside the second concave part 41571i, and also to the second convex part 41564c on the one side. It is possible to easily reduce the throwing speed of the game ball thrown along the curved path WK11 by making contact with the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown into the curved path WK1 from going wild and to smoothly throw the game ball.

The third recess 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is recessed in an elongated elliptical shape in the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK3. As a result, the third recess 415
71j, when the game ball is thrown inside the third recess 41571j, the third
It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the recessed portion 41571j. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 can be prevented from stopping due to contact with the third recess 41571j.

Further, the center of curvature of the upstream end of the throwing path of the game ball in the third recess 41571j is set below the center position in the left-right direction of the second recess 41571i. As a result, the curved path WK1
The game ball flowing down inside the second recess 41571i can be easily received into the second recess 41571i, and the game ball can be easily thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

The third convex portion 41564d protruding from the surface facing the third concave portion 415671j is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. Further, the bent portion of the third convex portion 41564d is set on the front side of the center of curvature of the upstream end of the third recessed portion 41571j when viewed from the front. The bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d extends in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK3, and the bent portion on the other side is perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. It extends in the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is brought into contact with the third convex portion 41564d on the other side and thrown inside the third concave portion 41571j, and is also thrown into the third convex portion 41564d on the one side. It is possible to reduce the throwing speed of the game ball that is thrown along the main path SK3 by making contact with the ball. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK1 can be suppressed from going wild, and the game ball can be thrown smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206, the game board 42013 in the 42nd embodiment
I will explain about it. In the first embodiment, the other end side of the board box 100 (main controller 110) disposed in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 by screws inserted from the back side of the board box 100. As described, in the 42nd embodiment,
A case will be described in which the second engaging member 42370 disposed on the back case 42300 is engaged with the board box 42100.

First, with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204, the back case 423 in the 42nd embodiment
The overall configuration of 00 will be explained. FIG. 203 shows the rear case 42 in the 42nd embodiment.
300 is an exploded perspective front view. 204(a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 204(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 taken along the line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204(a). Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 42300 in the 42nd embodiment has a bottom wall portion 42301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 42301 toward the front. An outer wall portion 42302 is provided, and each wall portion 42301, 42302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open.

In addition, the rear case 42300 has an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 42301, and an engagement member 310 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 42300. and a fixing member 320 that fixes one end side of the board box 42100, and a bottom wall part 4230.
1, and fixes the other end side of the board box 42100.
70.

The bottom wall portion 42301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof, which is rectangular in front view, and through the opening 301a, a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2
) are visible. In addition, the bottom wall portion 42301 is provided with a columnar shape protruding from the front side.
A protrusion 301b inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engagement member 310, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and a second opening 301c opening at a position facing the engagement member 310.
A second protruding part 42301f is provided in a columnar shape protruding from the opening 301d and the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall part 42301, and is inserted into a sliding groove 42372 of a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later.
and a third opening 42301g formed above the second protruding portion 42301f (in the direction of arrow U) to penetrate in the plate thickness direction (direction of arrow FB).

The second protruding portions 42301f are protrusions that define the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370, and are formed in line at two locations in the direction of gravity. Further, the outer diameter of the second protrusion 42301f is set to be slightly smaller than the groove width in the lateral direction of a sliding groove 42372 of a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later. Furthermore, the distance between the centers of the two second protruding portions 42301f is set to be smaller than the groove width in the longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 42372. As a result, the sliding groove 4
Two second protrusions 42301f can be inserted and disposed inside 2372.

The third opening 42301g has a protrusion 4211 of a board box 42100, which will be described later, inside.
8 is an opening into which the opening is inserted, and the opening has a size larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 42118 when viewed from the front. Further, the third opening 42301g allows the engagement member 310 to be connected to the fixing member 320 in the state where the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204(a)).
It is formed at a position adjacent to the direction in which the engagement is released (direction of arrow L). This makes it impossible to disengage the engagement member 310 from the fixing member 320 in a state where the protruding portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. Note that a detailed description of the positional relationship between the protruding portion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be given later.

The outer wall portion 42302 includes a second opening 42302b that opens in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD) on the side surface on the lower side (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front. The second opening 42302b is
This is an opening through which a lower end (in the direction of arrow D) of a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a displacement region of the second engaging member 42370. As a result, the second engagement member 4
2370 can be displaced.

The board box 42100 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. The board box 42100 also includes a bearing part 117 (see FIG. 206(a)) that protrudes from one end (arrow R direction side) and a protruding part that protrudes from one surface of the front side of the board box 42100. 42118.

As described above, the protruding portion 42118 is connected to the third opening 42301 of the back case 42300.
g, and in a state where the front of the board box 42100 and the back of the back case 42300 are parallel, the length where the opening 42118a described later is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall 42301 of the back case 42300. is set to In addition, the protruding portion 42118 is
It has an opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity, and a second engagement member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted inside the opening 42118a. As a result, the substrate box 42100 is prevented from rotating around the fixing member 320, and the substrate box 42100 is
0 can be disposed on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the back case 42300 in a non-displaceable state.

Further, the third opening 42301g into which the protruding portion 42118 is inserted is in the state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged as described above (the state shown in FIG. 204(a)). Since the member 310 is formed at a position adjacent to the fixing member 320 in the direction in which it is disengaged (arrow L direction), the protruding portion 42118 is arranged at a position adjacent to the engaging member 310. In addition, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204(b)) of the protruding portion 42118 into the third opening 42301g is the separation distance Y7 (see FIG. 204(b)) between the front surface of the engaging member 310 and the front surface of the bottom wall portion 42301.
)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 204(b), the engaging member 310 and the protruding portion 42118 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

Therefore, when the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the protrusion 42118, the direction in which the engagement member 310 disengages from the fixing member 320 (the direction in which the protrusion 42
118) is regulated. As a result, the second
With the engaging member 42370 inserted, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being illegally disengaged from the fixing member 320, and to prevent the board box 42100 (main controller 110) from being replaced with an unauthorized board. This can be suppressed.

Further, the opening 42118a of the protrusion 42118 is opened in the direction of gravity, and the second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced in the direction of gravity and inserted. Therefore, since the direction of displacement of the second engagement member 42370 (gravitational direction) and the direction of displacement (horizontal direction) of the engagement member 310 are set perpendicular to each other, the engagement member 310 is forced to move due to fraud by the player. The second engaging member 423 inserted into the opening 42118a
70 can make it easier to accept. As a result, even if the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by the player, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being disengaged from the fixing member 320.

The second engagement member 42370 includes a plate member 42371 formed in a plate shape having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a second engagement member 42370 extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the upper end (direction of arrow U) of the plate member 42371. A recessed portion 42374 is recessed, a second engaging portion 42373 is recessed, and a second engaging portion 42373 is protruded horizontally outward (in the direction of arrows LR) from the upper end (in the direction of arrow U) of the plate member 42371. Setup section 4237
4 and a sliding groove 42372 opened in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB).

As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for movably disposing the second engaging member 42370, and is opened long in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). In addition, the sliding groove 423
The width dimension of 72 in the transverse direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the second protruding portion 42301f disposed inside the sliding groove 42372. Therefore, as mentioned above, the sliding groove 4
When the second protruding portion 42301f is inserted into the sliding groove 42372, the sliding direction of the second engaging member 42370 is defined in the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372.

The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for making it easier to elastically deform the upper end of the plate member 42371, and is recessed downward and cut out in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the rigidity of the upper end of the plate member 42371 can be lowered, making it easier to elastically deform.

The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end of the opening 42118a of the above-mentioned protruding portion 42118, and is protruded from both side surfaces of the recessed portion 42374 in a direction perpendicular to the notch direction. The distance X12 between the ends of the protrusions on both sides (see FIG. 204(a)) is equal to the opening 421.
It is set larger than the horizontal opening dimension X13 of 18a (see FIG. 204(b)). As a result, when the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engagement part 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, so that the second engagement part 42373 is inserted into the opening 42118a. You can prevent yourself from getting out of it.

Note that the second engaging portion 42373 is formed in a shape that projects horizontally outward from the upper side of the plate member 42371 toward the lower side. This allows the second engagement member 42370 to
When inserted into the plate member 2118a, the second engaging portion 42373 can be brought into contact with the inside of the opening portion 42118a, so that the upper side of the plate member 42371 can be easily elastically deformed.

Further, the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a (the engagement portion 42
373 is engaged with the protruding portion 42118), the lower end portion is connected to the outer wall portion 4230
The second opening 42302b of No. 2 is disposed inside the second opening 42302b. This can prevent the second engaging portion 42370 from being operated from the outside of the back case 42300. As a result, the second engaging portion 4
It is possible to prevent the board box 42100 (main controller 110) from being replaced with an unauthorized board due to unauthorized disengagement between the protrusion 2373 and the protrusion 42118.

Next, referring to FIGS. 204 and 205, the board box 4 is attached to the rear case 42300.
2100 will be explained. 205(a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 205(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 taken along the CCVb-CCVb line in FIG. 205(a). Note that FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b) illustrate the state after the board box 42100 is arranged in the rear case 42300, and FIG.
205(a) and 205(b) illustrate a state before the board box 42100 is disposed in the rear case 42300.

The board box 42100 in the 42nd embodiment is similar to the above-mentioned first embodiment,
First, the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310, and one side thereof is disposed on the back side of the back case 42300.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 205(a) and 205(b), the engaging member 310 is connected to the fixed member 3.
20, the tip of the second piece 312 of the engagement member 310 is disposed on the front side of the third opening 42301g. As a result, before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, the protruding portion 42118 of the board box 42100 is connected to the third opening 42301.
It can be prevented from being inserted into the inside of g. As a result, the board box 42100 can be prevented from being disposed in the back case 42300 only by engagement of the protruding portion 42118 and the second engaging portion 42370.

Next, the other side of the board box 42100 is rotated around the connecting portion between the fixing member on one side and 320, and the protrusion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300. Thereby, the protruding portion 42118 is placed in a position where it can engage with the second engaging member 42370.

Note that, before the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the third opening 42301g, the lower side thereof is inserted into the second opening 42302b, and the second engagement member 42370 is disposed outside the back case 42300 (FIG. 205(a) reference). This allows the board box 42100 to be attached to the back case 42.
300 can operate the second engagement member 42370 from the outside of the back case 42300, and the second engagement member 42370 can be inserted into the inside of the third opening 42301g.

In addition, since the displacement direction of the second engagement member 42370 is set in the direction of gravity, the second engagement member 42370 is disposed at the lower end due to the action of gravity before being inserted inside the third opening 42301g. . As a result, the protruding portion 42118 is connected to the third opening 42301 of the back case 42300.
Collision with the second engagement member 42370 can be suppressed when inserted into the inside of g. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

In addition, if the second engaging member 42370 is forgotten to engage with the protruding portion 42118, the second engaging member 42370 can be placed outside the back case 42300, so that the operator will not be in a normal state. can be easily recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second engaging member 42370 from forgetting to engage with the protruding portion 42118.

Next, the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 206(b) is a rear view of the game board 13.
It is a sectional view of the game board 13 along the CCVIb-CCVIb line in a).

As shown in FIG. 206, an upright member 4206Of is provided on the back surface of a base plate 42060 in the forty-second embodiment. The upright member 42060f is erected toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 42060, and its upright tip position is aligned with the back case 4230.
It is set on the same plane as the bottom wall part 42301 of 0. Further, the upright member 4206Of is the second
It is arranged below the engagement member 42370 and on the outside of the back case 42300. As a result, when the back case 42300 is disposed on the game board 42013 with the second engagement member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118 forgotten to be engaged, the upright portion 42060f is connected to the second engagement member 42370. It can be caused to collide with the lower side. As a result, the second engaging member 42
370 and the protruding portion 42118, or in a state where the board box 42100 is forgotten to be disposed on the back case 42300, the rear case 42300 can be prevented from being disposed on the base plate 42060.

Note that in this embodiment, a light emitting board that illuminates the inside of the back case 42300 is disposed on the upright portion 4206Of. Thereby, the upright portion 42060f can be used both as a portion that irradiates light and as a portion that suppresses engagement between the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the external size of the base plate 42060 from increasing.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In the first embodiment, the ball receiving part 467 is retracted from the third position to the second position or the first position according to the drive of the drive motor KM2. The drive for retracting to the first position may be driven by a biasing spring. For example, a biasing spring is disposed between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470, so that an elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, when the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the dispensing operation, the drive motor K
By turning off the drive of M3, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced toward the second position or the first position by the urging force of the urging spring.

Therefore, using the time until the driving force of drive motor KM2 is switched at the third position,
Since the ball receiving part 467 can be displaced, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the ejecting operation when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467.

That is, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 tends to be displaced upward due to the reaction. Immediately displacing the ball receiver 467 applies a force that displaces the base member 470 downward due to the reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiver 467, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, the engagement protrusion 882 that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800 is
Although a case has been described in which two are formed at a predetermined interval on the side surface of the screen, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of them may be arranged in a row on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and rotation of the rotating body 800 due to external force can be restricted when the lid member 770 is in the open state.

In the first embodiment, the opening 831 is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 800 and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831.
It may be formed on the side opposite to b. That is, openings may be formed on both sides of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, one of which may be used as an inlet for the balls, and the other may be used as an outlet for the balls. In this case, since the ball throwing path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (the rotating body 800) can be used as the ball throwing path, especially when there is no space for placing the ball on the back side of the game board 13. , it is possible to secure a throwing path without increasing the size of the game board 13.

In the first embodiment, the rotating body 800 has a cylindrical outer shape, but the outer shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be a polygon, an ellipse, or a combination thereof. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be made complicated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the effect has been switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the outer circumferential surface of the rotary operation section 8654 is formed to be operable by the player, but a push-in button may be provided on the outer circumferential surface of the rotary operation section 8654. In this case, the player can not only apply rotational force to the rotational operation section 8654, but also press a push button, or perform a combination of rotational operation and push operation of the rotational operation section 8654. . As a result, it is possible to create a plurality of operation modes for the rotary operation section 8654, which can provide interest to the player.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are in mesh with each other, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, transmission gear 8651
A torque limiter or the like may be interposed between the transmission gear 8652 and the transmission gear 8652 to interrupt the transmission of driving force when an overload is applied.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotary operation section 8654 in the rotating state, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM6 can be interrupted, and the rotation of the rotation operation section 8654 can be prevented from continuing. . As a result, when the player inputs rotation to the rotation operation section 8654 in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from breaking.

Further, when the player operates the rotation operation section 8654 and the player's finger or clothing gets caught between the rotation operation section 8654 and the upper tray 8017 on the rotation direction side, the rotation is stopped.
It is possible to prevent the player's fingers or clothes from being further caught. Therefore, the player can use the rotating operation section 8.
It is possible to prevent injuries caused by being caught between the upper plate 654 and the upper plate 8017.

In the eighth embodiment, the rotational direction of the rotational operation section 8654 is set to the direction A, but the rotational direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be set to the left and right with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the player can be made to perform actions accompanying the performance of the gaming machine, and the performance effect can be improved. For example, by operating the rotary operation unit 8654 by hitting it with the left hand so as to rotate it in the right direction, it is possible to perform an effect of hitting (slapping) a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the board box 100 is disposed on the fixing member 320, and by engaging the fixing member 320 with the engaging member 310, the board box 100 is prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and other members (for example, the third pattern It may be a display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting unauthorized input such as unauthorized radio waves or vibrations.

In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j formed in the first unit 551, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 5
64d have been described with respect to the case where they are formed at positions facing each other, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564
d is placed upstream of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j to direct the flowing game balls to the first convex 564b, second convex 564c, and third convex 564d. It may be formed so that it is received in the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j after abutment.

In the first embodiment, the thickness of the decorative member 154 is smaller than that of the recess 151 of the main body 151.
Although a case has been described in which the recess depth is smaller than b, the depth is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative member 154 is formed from an elastically deformable material, and the main body 15
It may be formed to be thicker than the recess depth of the first recess 151b. In this case, by compressing and elastically deforming the general winning a prize unit 150 when disposing it on the base plate 60, the main body part 151 can be disposed in a state in contact with the base plate 60.

In the first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is placed in the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 applied to the cam member 422 from the first link member 431 act in directions that cancel each other out. Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end of the cam member 422 and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b come into contact may be set in the direction from that contact point toward the axis of the shaft portion 422a. . According to this, it is possible to suppress the force acting on the cam member 422 in the direction of rotation about the shaft portion 422a.

In the first embodiment, the other end of the board box 100 is connected to the rear case 300 by screws.
Although a case has been described in which the device is disposed on the back side of the computer, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the other end of the board box 100 may be fixed by a seal that cannot be removed once it is engaged with the rear case 300. To explain in detail, a cylindrical sealing tool inserted through openings formed at a plurality of locations on the other end side of the back case 300 is inserted into an insertion portion recessed at a plurality of locations on the back side of the back case 300. By engaging the insertion portion and the sealing tool, the board box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Note that when removing the board box 100, the other end side of the board box 100 can be removed from the back case 300 by cutting the engagement portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool.
Moreover, when disposing the other end side of the board box 100 in the back case 300 again, insert a new sealing tool into the unused opening of the board box 100, and insert the new seal into the unused insertion part of the back case 300. By engaging with the board box 100, the other end side of the board box 100 can be disposed in the rear case 300.

In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end of the decorative member 154 is formed in the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.
Although a case has been described in which they are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 when viewed from the front may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

In this case, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60
By forming the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c from the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed from a single sheet, and the decorative member 154 is cut from the sheet.
and a decorative member 60c. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form the decorative member 154 in a separate process, the yield when forming the decorative member 154 can be improved.

Note that when the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the second opening 60b, and the decorative member 15
It is preferable that the front surfaces of 4 and the decorative member 60c are arranged on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c match in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, the player can recognize the decorations of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

In the first embodiment, the first convex portion 571h is provided on the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 551 to protrude toward the back side (arrow B side direction side). , a second convex portion 571i, and a third convex portion 571k are formed, and a first concave portion 571h and a second concave portion 571i are recessed toward the back side on the inner surface of the back side of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 511. and third
Although the case where the recessed portion 571j is provided has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 571
h. The second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k may be formed on opposite inner surfaces in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front.

Further, a recessed portion recessed toward the front image may be formed on the inner surface on the front side at a position facing the second recessed portion 571i. In this case, since the recess is provided in the ball throwing space of the curved path WK1,
Throwing space can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down too slowly on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the curved path WK1.

In the ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclined surface 9431b1 protrudes toward the front side toward the cam member 422, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
The inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed as an inclined surface whose protrusion amount toward the front side decreases as it goes toward the cam member 422.

In this case, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped protrusion 9531a, the cam member 422 is moved to the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411.
can be pushed to As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 from swinging back and forth, and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the second displacement state.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the light emitting body 11491a is formed at a position higher (in the direction of arrow U) than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitter 11491a may be disposed at approximately the same height as the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, the transparent part 11451
It is preferable that the height position b is formed from the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 to the upper side of the center.

According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the game ball, the shadow of the game ball formed in the transparent part 11451b is formed into a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game ball. can. This allows the roundness of the game ball to be formed in the shadow formed in the transparent portion 11451b, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments described above, the case where the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are displaced by the load of the game ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sensor is attached to the ball receiver 12467, 39467 to detect that a game ball has passed through the ball throwing path, and when the game ball is detected by the sensor, the third piece 12467e, 39467e may be displaced alone. According to this, the second piece 12
Since there is no need to displace 467d and 39467d due to the load of the game ball, the ball receiving part 12
The reliability of displacement of 467, 39467 can be improved. In addition, in this case, the third piece 12467e
, 39467e is disposed in the ball receiving portions 12467, 39467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the rotation axes for the rotational displacement of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are formed in the first pieces 12467c and 39467c, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by inserting the shaft portions 12467e3, 39467e3 of the third pieces 12467e, 39467e into the openings formed in the rack 466,
2467e and 39467e may be rotationally displaced relative to the rack 466. In this case, since it is possible to easily increase the distance between the rotating shaft and the connecting portion of the second pieces 12467d, 39467d, the distance between the third pieces 12467e, 394 relative to the displacement of the second pieces 12467d, 39467d
The amount of displacement of 67e can be easily increased. As a result, the shielding plate 124 of the third piece 12467e
67e1 can be easily arranged on the front side of the light emitting body 11491a. In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed into an elongated hole in which the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560, but it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the first path member 13560 may be moved in the front-back direction with respect to the second path member 13570. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front of the base plate 60 (gaming board 13) prevents the player from grasping the distance between the opposing first and second members. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the first, tenth, and twenty-fifth embodiments, the decorative members 154, 10154, and 25154 are attached using adhesive tapes 154a, 10154a, and 25154a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, An adhesive made of liquid may also be used.

In the thirteenth, thirty-second, thirty-third, thirty-fourth, and thirty-fifth embodiments, the first
The path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 are formed from a non-light transmitting material, and the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35
Although a case has been described in which the opposing gap between 560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 is made difficult for the player to recognize, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560
A slit-shaped opening with a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed in the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 1357.
0, 32570, and 34570 may be visually recognized by the player through the opening. In this case, the distance between the plurality of slit-shaped openings to the adjacent opening is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 355
60 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570, the player can recognize the game ball flowing down through the opening.

Further, a circular opening smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed in the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560, and the first path member 13560,
32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and second path members 13570, 3257
The player may be allowed to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the two faces through the opening. In this case, the adjacent width dimensions of the plurality of openings are formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the opening of the opening can be made smaller than when the opening is formed in a slit shape, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34
It is possible to prevent the player from perceiving the distance between the facing members 560, 35560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, 34570.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the portion to which the displacement member 18310 is engaged (the engaged portion 18332
) is formed on the fixing member 18320, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaged portion 18332 to which the displacement member 18310 is engaged may be formed in the substrate box 100 that is caulked and fixed to the fixing member 18320.

In this case, when the board box 100 is not placed in the rear case 18300,
Since the displacement member 18310 cannot be placed inside the rear case 18300, the displacement member 1
8310 can be in a state of protruding to the outside of the back case 18300 due to its own weight.

As a result, if the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the back case 18300, the displacement member 18310 is hooked to the outer frame 11 when the game board 18013 is arranged on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164(b)). This makes it possible to remind the operator that he or she has forgotten to attach the board box 100.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the bottom wall portion 302 of the rear case 300
The insertion portion 21724b of the rotation unit 21700 disposed in the recess 31 of the displacement member 310
7 to prevent the engagement between the displacement member 310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an insertion portion 21724b inserted into the recess 317 of the displacement member 310 may be formed in the substrate box 100 disposed on the fixed member 320.

Note that in this case, the insertion portion 21724b is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 302 through an opening formed in the fixing member 320. Further, the insertion portion 21724b is formed at a portion into which a shaft to be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320 is inserted. As a result, if the bearing part 117 of the board box 100 is cut and removed from the rear case 21300, the insertion part 21
724b can be left inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310. As a result, it may be difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300.

Therefore, when replacing the fixing member 320, it is necessary to correctly caulk the substrate box 100 and the fixing member 320 (cut the caulked portion). As a result, the fixing member 32
0 from the back member 21300, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed and replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In the forty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a light emitting board that irradiates light is disposed on the upright portion 42060f, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a drive member disposed on the base plate 42060 It may also be formed as a control board for controlling the game ball or a passage for throwing game balls.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 287. Note that the first control example describes a control example with a partial configuration change from each of the above-described embodiments, and the detailed explanation of the same configuration as each of the above-described embodiments is omitted. is omitted. Note that some of the configurations used in this control example that are the same as those in each of the above embodiments are given different numerals, but this is for the purpose of explaining the invention of this control example in an easy-to-understand manner. Since the specific contents of the configuration are the same as the corresponding configurations of each of the above embodiments, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a jackpot game is executed, and during the jackpot game, a ball is made easier to enter a winning device (for example, a variable winning device), thereby providing a player with a jackpot. There is a pachinko machine 10 that allows players to play games with the aim of playing the game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, when a player struggles to win a jackpot and executes a jackpot game, if the percentage of winning balls in the winning device (variable winning device) is low, the player's desire to play will be reduced. There was a problem with letting it happen.

Such a problem occurs when the ball collides with a plurality of obstacles (for example, nails) provided on the game board 13 as it flows down the game area formed on the game board 13, causing the ball to change its direction of flow. This is a problem that cannot be avoided in the pachinko machine 10 because the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 65 increases or decreases due to being variable.

On the other hand, in this first control example, the pseudo attacker (acting attacker) 165 (see FIG. 208) is configured to be driven in synchronization with the attacker (variable winning device) 65 that is opened during the jackpot game. Moreover, in addition to the balls that entered the variable winning device 65, the balls that entered the right general winning opening 163 (see FIG. 208) and the specific out opening 166 (see FIG. 208) also flow into the pseudo attacker 165. It consists of The pseudo attacker 165 is configured to be more visible to the player than the variable winning device 65.

With this configuration, when the jackpot game is started, the player executes the jackpot game while watching the winning ball of the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, it can be made to appear that more balls are winning into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game than balls actually winning into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game.

Also, among the balls fired in a right-handed game executed during a jackpot game, balls that have not won in the variable winning device 65 (balls that have entered other winning (balls) holes by the time they reach the variable winning device 65) The pseudo attacker 165 is configured to make the ball (played by the player) win a prize. Therefore, when the number of balls that enter the variable winning device 65 decreases, the number of balls that enter other winning holes (hereinafter referred to as winning holes, etc.) tends to increase. Regardless of the increase or decrease in the number of winning balls to the device 65, a predetermined number of balls can be stably won by the pseudo attacker 165.

In addition, in this first control example, in accordance with the timing when the ball that has won (entered the ball) in each winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, right general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166) enters the pseudo attacker 165, It is configured to execute a prize-winning performance.

As a result, it is possible to execute a winning effect based on the winning of a ball to the variable winning device 65 at the timing when the ball lands in the pseudo attacker 165, so that the pseudo attacker 165 is displayed to the player as a real attacker (the variable winning device 65). Note that the winning effect executed based on the winning of a ball to the variable winning device 65 includes, for example, a winning sound notification effect for notifying the player that a ball has won a prize in the variable winning device 65, and a third winning effect. A prize ball number display effect that displays information (acquisition information) on the symbol display device 81 to indicate the amount of benefits (prize balls) to be given to the player based on the winning of balls in the variable winning device 65. be.

Furthermore, in this control example, in order to make the balls that have won a prize in a plurality of different winning openings etc. enter the pseudo attacker 165, the guiding channel is set so that the balls that have passed through each winning opening, etc. are guided above the pseudo attacker 165. 690 (see FIG. 208), but since the distance from each winning hole to the pseudo attacker 165 is different, the order in which the balls land in each winning hole etc. and the order in which the balls land in the pseudo attacker 165 are different. There is. Therefore, in this first control example, the order in which the pseudo attacker 165 wins can be determined based on the type of winning hole where the ball won and the winning timing. If a predetermined number of prizes (the number for which the closing condition of the variable prize winning device 65 is met (for example, 10)) is exceeded during the period in which the pseudo attacker 165 is continuously opened, a specific winning presentation (overflow presentation) is performed. is configured to run.

In this way, in the configuration in which the balls that have won in each winning hole, etc. flow down the guiding flow path 690, the order in which the balls have won in the pseudo attacker 165 is calculated, not the order in which they have won in each winning hole, etc., and based on the calculation result. By configuring the player to execute a specific prize-winning performance (overflow performance) using the player, the prize-winning performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, the above-mentioned prize-winning performance is executed based on the detection results of the detection sensors 65s1, 65s2, 163s, and 166s (see FIG. 208) for detecting that a ball has won a prize in each prize-winning hole. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated detection sensor for the pseudo attacker 165 to execute a prize-winning effect using a winning ball. Therefore, the number of detection means (sensors) attached to the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, so design costs can be held down.

Next, the characteristic presentation content used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example will be briefly explained. Conventionally, there has been a configuration in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of special symbol lottery rights can be reserved and stored, and the period from when the lottery right is reserved to when the special symbol lottery is actually executed. During the process, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is performed to determine (predict) the jackpot lottery result in advance using the information included in the reserved lottery rights (winning information), and the performance is based on the pre-determined result. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes a so-called look-ahead effect.

In a conventional gaming machine using such a configuration, for example, by changing the display mode of identification information (so-called pending symbols) indicating the lottery rights that are reserved and stored, the lottery result is displayed to the player. A look-ahead effect that notifies you in advance may be executed. By executing such a look-ahead effect, when the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol may be used to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol. During the period until the is executed (the special symbol lottery period executed before the corresponding pending symbol), the player can continue to have a sense of expectation.

However, in the case of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, if a special symbol lottery corresponding to a pending symbol whose display mode has been changed (variable pending symbol) is executed, the display of the variable pending symbol will disappear, so the currently executed There is a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponds to the variable pending symbol. On the other hand, this control example is configured to display an in-execution display mode based on a variable display mode of the pending symbol corresponding to the currently executed special symbol lottery (variation). This allows the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (variation) being executed corresponds to the variable pending symbol.

In addition, as described above, by varying the display mode of the reserved symbols, when configuring the system to notify players of multiple types of performance results in a look-ahead performance that notifies players of special symbol lottery results in advance, (For example, when configuring a system to notify multiple performance results with different levels of expectation of winning a jackpot), it is necessary to make the variable display formats different in an easy-to-understand manner so that each performance result can be easily identified. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was difficult to provide a lot of information in advance.

On the other hand, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned pre-reading effect, an effect that changes the display mode of a presentation device (treasure box accessories 750 (see FIG. 210)) provided separately from the third symbol display device 81 is executed. It is configured as follows. Among the multiple pieces of information acquired through the prefetch process, information to be notified to the player in advance by varying the display mode of the pending symbols (for example, prefetch information to indicate the result of determining whether or not a jackpot has been achieved) and the treasure box By changing the display mode of the object 750, the information notified to the player in advance (for example, advance look-ahead information for indicating the type of jackpot won) is configured to be different.

In this way, by providing a plurality of performance objects used for pre-reading performance and by differentiating the type of information to be notified in advance for each performance target, it is easier to notify the player of a large amount of information in advance. be able to. In addition, in this control example, since a production device other than the third symbol display device 81 is used, it is possible to continuously notify the production result of the pre-read production.

In addition, conventionally, a variable effect is performed in which the identification information (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and then stopped and displayed. There is something that makes me According to such a pachinko machine 10, it is possible to predict whether or not the lottery result of the current special symbol is a jackpot based on the variable performance mode of the third symbol, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Ta. However, since the variable presentation mode of the third symbol is determined only based on the lottery result of the special symbol, for players who play the game for a long time, the lottery result of the special symbol is determined based on the variable presentation mode executed. There was a problem that it could be easily identified.

In addition, in order to execute a specific variation performance mode (stop display mode of the third symbol) that indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result that is advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot), the lottery result of the special symbol must be executed. Since the condition is that the result be a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot), there is a problem in that the frequency with which the variable performance mode is executed becomes low.

On the other hand, in this first control example, it is possible to notify the lottery result of a symbol other than the special symbol (for example, a normal symbol) using the variable presentation mode of the third symbol to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured so that it is possible. With this configuration, it is possible to set the variable presentation mode of the third symbol based on information other than the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the normal symbol). It is possible to prevent the lottery results of special symbols from being easily discriminated.

Furthermore, since the specific variable production mode can be executed even when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a win), it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the specific variation production mode. .

In addition, in this first control example, in order to show the lottery result of the normal symbol using a variation effect that is set based on the variation time (special symbol variation time) that is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, The third symbol is configured to be temporarily stopped (actually moving (swinging), but almost stopped) at the timing when the symbol variation time has elapsed. Thereby, it can be made to appear as if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in synchronization with the stop timing of the normal symbol.

In addition, in this control example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped at the stop timing of the normal symbol during a variable performance corresponding to the variable time (special symbol variation time) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. The present invention is configured to vary the performance mode of the remaining time performance executed during the remaining time based on the remaining time from the temporary stop timing (the time from the temporary stop timing until the special symbol is stopped and displayed). For example, if the remaining time is less than 3 seconds, a remaining time effect is performed in which the temporary stop display of the third symbol continues, and if the remaining time is 3 seconds or more, the temporary stop display of the third symbol is executed. It is configured so that it is displayed again in a variable manner.

As a result, even though the remaining time is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), it is possible to prevent the temporarily stopped third symbol from changing again and performing a performance that is difficult for the player to understand. I can do it. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game due to the temporary stop display continuing even though the remaining time is long (for example, 10 seconds).

Further, in the first control example, the length of the remaining time is roughly divided (eg, divided into 3 second intervals), and a re-variation effect corresponding to the division is executed. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute a re-variation effect corresponding to the length of the remaining time. In addition, the performance mode that can be set as a re-fluctuation performance has a performance period set in advance at 3 second intervals such as 3 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, etc., and after setting the performance period corresponding to the remaining time. In order to correspond to the detailed remaining time, the first half of the performance mode is deleted for a predetermined period of time to perform a re-variable performance.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a re-fluctuation performance corresponding to the remaining time that is randomly calculated using a preset performance period at regular intervals, so that the performance data used for re-fluctuation can be Capacity can be reduced. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, an effect in which the third symbol swings is set as the first half (1 second) of the effect mode that is preset in accordance with the remaining time. . Thereby, even if a part of the first half of the performance mode is deleted in accordance with the actual remaining time, it is possible to suppress execution of a performance that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is other than a jackpot, and when the player wins a small win, which is a lottery result that can give the player a smaller amount of benefits (prize balls) than in a jackpot game, The above-mentioned specific variation performance is also configured to be executed.

The small winning game that is executed when winning the small winning is the winning game that is executed during the initial period (round game period of the first round) of the jackpot game that is executed when winning the jackpot mentioned above. The configuration is such that the same game content is executed.

As a result, even if a winning game is executed after a specific fluctuation effect is executed, at that point, the player will not be able to tell whether the current winning game is a winning game based on a jackpot win or a winning game based on a small win win. Since it can be made difficult to understand, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful about winning the jackpot for a long period of time.

In addition, in this first control example, the player can determine whether the winning game being executed is a jackpot game or a small winning game by using the period in which the same game content is executed in the jackpot game and the small winning game. The system is configured to execute a notification effect to notify the user. By configuring in this way, information that is difficult to distinguish from the contents of the winning game alone can be notified through the performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Conventionally, as a performance (advance performance) to suggest the lottery result of a special symbol to a player, a performance (operation performance) that displays the preview contents by having the player operate an operating means (frame button 22) has been performed. There is something to do. When performing such an operation effect, a period during which the operation of the operation means can be effectively determined (operation validity period) is set, and a preview content is displayed if the operation means is operated within the operation validity period. It is common to configure it so that In order to notify the player that the above-mentioned operation validity period has been set, for example, a display form that imitates the operation means (button display) and a display form that shows the operation validity period (for example, a time gauge display) ) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, in order to allow the player to operate the operating means multiple times in one operation performance, there is a display mode in which a time gauge is attached to each of a plurality of button displays.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player can grasp the contents of multiple notices by operating the operation means within the operation validity period corresponding to each button display. This allowed them to actively participate in the production. However, if multiple button displays with operation validity periods set are displayed at the same time, if you temporarily neglect to operate the frame button 22, each of the individually set operation validity periods will be Since it becomes difficult to properly operate the operating means, there is a problem in that the user's desire to participate in the production decreases even while the operation validity period is being set.

In contrast, in this first control example, a plurality of operation performances with overlapping operation validity periods are configured to be executable, and furthermore, when the operation validity period of each operation performance satisfies a predetermined condition, each operation performance It is configured to execute a fused operation performance that combines the following. Specifically, the fused operation performance is configured to be executed when the display mode of the time gauge indicating the remaining period of the operation validity period becomes the same among a plurality of operation performances.

With this configuration, it is possible to have the possibility that a plurality of operation performances can be changed into one fused operation performance, so it is possible to leave the possibility of completing the operation performance to the end. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to participate in the operation performance during the operation performance.

Furthermore, some conventional pachinko machines 10 are configured so that specific preview content is displayed even if the operating means is not operated within the operation validity period set for the operation performance. In such a pachinko machine 10, specific preview contents can be displayed even when the player does not operate the operating means, so that the player's desire to play decreases if he is unable to operate the operating means within the valid operation period. You can prevent it from happening. However, with such a configuration, there is a problem in that the correlation between operating the operating means within the valid operation period and displaying the preview content becomes low, resulting in a reduction in the presentation effect.

On the other hand, in this first control example, if the operating means is not operated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed during the valid operation period, the operating means is automatically operated (automatic press effect). configured to run. As a result, it is possible to strengthen the relationship between operating the operating means within the operation validity period and displaying the preview content, thereby increasing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, in this first control example, when the player operates the operating means during the automatic press performance, the presentation mode of the automatic press performance can be changed in response to the player's operation. There is. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operating means until the end of the period for which the operation validity period is set.

Here, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in this first control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2) in that the left side area of the game board 13 (the variable display unit 80 The difference is that a through gate 67 is provided in the gaming area formed on the left side, but other than that, they are the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with a through gate 67 in the left side area, and the player plays a left-handed game (a game in which the ball flows down to the left side area of the game board 13). The structure is such that all the balls fired when doing so pass through the through gate 67. With this configuration, the player plays a left-handed game (a game in which the ball flows down to the left side area of the game board 13), wins the ball into the first prize opening 64, and draws the first special symbol. It is also possible to carry out the drawing of normal symbols while the drawing is being carried out. As a result, the normal symbol lottery is performed using a variation effect (special symbol 1 variation effect) that dynamically displays identification information (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Can show results.

The detailed content of the special symbol 1 variation effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, but in this first control example, the dynamic display period of the special symbol is During the middle (while the third symbol is changing), the third symbol will be temporarily stopped and displayed (the third symbol will be oscillated and displayed to the extent that the player thinks that the third symbol is being displayed in a stopped state). It consists of Thereby, the third symbol can be used to notify the lottery result of the normal symbol, so it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player.

In addition, in this first control example, the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the same winning display mode in the case where the normal symbol wins and the case where the special symbol wins. (See FIG. 212)). This allows the player to determine whether the winning display mode that is stopped and displayed to the player is a display mode for showing the lottery results for special symbols or a display mode for showing the lottery results for normal symbols. It can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a sense of anticipation for the winning game that will be executed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, since it is configured to perform the above-mentioned charge performance either when winning a normal symbol or when winning a special symbol, the chart performance is only performed when a special symbol wins. It is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the charge effect compared to the case where the charge effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 207, the explanation will be continued. A gaming area (lower right gaming area) covered with an outer edge member 73 (73b) made of resin is formed in the right side area of the gaming board 13. This lower right gaming area is covered by an outer edge member 73b that is transparent and has a surface treatment (for example, textured) that diffusely reflects light, so it is more accessible to players than other gaming areas. This is a gaming area that is difficult to see.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 208, but a special winning device 550 is provided in the lower right gaming area, which has a channel for flowing balls and various winning openings through which balls can be won. Furthermore, a discharge flow path is formed for using balls that have won prizes in various prize openings for a simulated performance. The ball flowing down the lower right gaming area enters an outlet (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the types of ball entry ports (winning ports) provided in the special winning device 550 and the flow paths of game balls that enter each ball entry port will be explained. Note that the downstream paths (main paths SK1 to SK6) of the game balls that have flowed into the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 have already been explained with reference to FIG. 22 etc. in the first embodiment, so they will not be described here. The details will be omitted here. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special prize winning device 550. As shown in FIG. 208, a specific out port 166 is provided on the upper right side of the special winning device 550 when viewed from the front, and a specific general winning port 163 is provided on the left side of the specific out port 166 when viewed from the front. The specific general winning hole 163 corresponds to the second receiving portion 562 (see FIG. 22) in the description of the first embodiment described above, and in order to make the description easier to understand (to make it clear that it is a ball entrance hole) ) has been renamed. Similarly, the specific outlet 166 is a renamed third receiving portion 563 (see FIG. 22) in the description of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, the specific general winning opening 163 and the out opening 166 are provided with a general winning sensor 163s and an out entering ball sensor 166s that can detect the entering of a game ball. The specific general winning hole 163 is configured as a winning hole in which three prize balls are awarded for one game ball winning (ball entering), and the general winning sensor 163s detects the entering of the game ball. Each time a ball is played, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, the specific out port 166 is configured as a ball inlet that does not award a prize ball even if a game ball enters the ball (simply discharges the entered game ball to the outside), and is configured as an out ball entry hole. Even if the entry of a game ball is detected by 166s, the prize ball will not be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208, a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning opening 65a into which a game ball can enter is provided approximately at the center of the special winning device 550. This variable winning device 65 is composed of the first variable plate 583b, the first receiving recess 574a, and the second receiving recess 574b in the description of the first embodiment, and has a winning opening (ball entrance). In order to clarify a certain point, in the description of the first control example, the first variable plate 583b is referred to as the opening/closing door 65f1, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are simply referred to as the specific winning opening 65a. It is called. When a jackpot is achieved in the jackpot lottery, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened a predetermined number of times (6 to 16 rounds) (displaced from the state extended to the front side to the state retracted to the back side) and goes to the specific prize opening 65a. The game ball becomes ready to enter.

As shown in FIG. 208, the specific winning hole 65a is provided with specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 (detection devices SE3 and SE4 in the description of the first embodiment) that can detect the entry of game balls. ing. The specific winning hole 65a is configured as a winning hole in which 15 prize balls are awarded for one game ball winning (ball entering), and the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 determine whether the game ball enters the ball. Each time a ball is detected, 15 prize balls are paid out. In each round of the jackpot, the specific prize opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds pass or until 10 game balls are won) (the opening/closing door 65f1 retreats to the back side), so the jackpot is won. During this period, a large amount of prize balls are paid out by firing a game ball at the specific prize opening 65a (launching a game ball toward the channel on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game when winning a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 208, at the lower left of the variable winning device 65 in the special winning device 550, there is a second ball entrance (second winning hole) 640 (the third receiving recess 575a in the description of the first embodiment, the third receiving recess 575a in the description of the first embodiment, 4 receiving recess 575b, see FIG. 22), and a first electric accessory 640a (second variable member 584b in the description of the first embodiment) that opens and closes the second ball entry opening (second winning opening) 640. ing. When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed, and when a jackpot is achieved, a jackpot game is executed in which a specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed a plurality of times. In addition, as described above, the first electric accessory 640a is activated for a predetermined period of time when a winning result is obtained in the normal symbol lottery performed based on the game ball passing through the first through gate 66. .

The game ball that enters the specific general winning hole 163 (second receiving part 562) rolls on the second rolling part 577 (see FIG. 20), so that it reaches the back side in front view (the back side of the base plate 60). be guided to. The game ball guided to the back side in the front view flows into the guide channel 690 shown by the broken line in FIG. 208. Similarly, the game ball that enters the specific out port 166 is guided to the back side of the base plate 60 by rolling on the third rolling part 578 (see FIG. 20), and flows into the guiding channel 690. do. Further, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a rolls through the sub-path HK1 (see FIG. 22), is guided to the back side of the base plate 60, and flows into the guiding channel 690. That is, the game ball that entered the specific general winning opening 163, the gaming ball that entered the specific out opening 166, and the gaming ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a all pass through the guiding flow path 690. Flow down.

As shown in FIG. 208, the guiding channel 690 includes a general ball throwing section 690a for causing the game ball that entered the specific general winning opening 163 to flow into the guiding channel 690, and a general ball throwing section 690a for causing the game ball that entered the specific general winning opening 163 to flow into the guiding channel 690, and a general ball throwing section 690a for causing the game ball that entered the specific general winning opening 163 to flow into the guiding channel 690, and a general ball throwing section 690a for causing the game ball that entered the specific general winning opening 163 to flow into the guiding channel 690, An out ball throwing section 690b for causing the game ball to flow into the guiding channel 690, a specific ball throwing section 690c for causing the game ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a to flow into the guiding channel 690, Consisting of at least a merging path 690d that is provided at the most downstream side and allows the game balls to flow down (merge) from the back side of the base plate 60 to the production flow path 691 (auxiliary path HK3 in the description of the first embodiment). has been done. A game ball that has flown into the specific flow path 690 through any one of the general ball throw section 690a, out ball throw section 690b, and specific ball throw section 690c is guided to the performance flow path 691 via the merging path 690d. . The game ball guided to the production channel 691 falls from the discharge part 691a at the lower end of the production channel 691 toward the pseudo attacker 165 (decoration unit 750 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 91). do. This pseudo attacker 165 has a pseudo winning hole 165a into which a game ball can enter, an open state in which a game ball can enter into the pseudo winning hole 165a, and a state in which a ball cannot enter into the pseudo winning hole 165a. The pseudo door 165f1 (opening/closing member 870 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 104(b)) is configured to be variable between the closed state and the closed state. In addition, on the front side of the pseudo attacker 165, there is an out port 167 (in the description of the first embodiment, a prize-winning A port 761a) is provided.

Although details will be described later, in this first control example, in each round of the jackpot game, the specific winning hole 65a is opened and closed, and the pseudo door 165f1 of the pseudo attacker 165 is opened and closed. In the first control example, a performance (pseudo winning performance) that suggests the payout of prize balls is executed in accordance with the timing of entry of game balls into the pseudo winning opening 165a. In other words, instead of executing the effect of notifying the payout of the prize ball based on the detection of the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a, a pseudo winning effect is executed in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the pseudo winning hole 165a. It is configured to execute. That is, by using the pseudo attacker 165, which is more visible than the specific winning hole 65a covered by the first path member 560, to suggest whether or not the prize ball will be paid out, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out in a jackpot. It is possible to make the player more clearly understand the opportunity for a payout.

In addition, after a ball is detected by either the specific winning sensor 65s1 or 65s2, the detected game ball flows down the guiding channel 690 and the production channel 691 and enters the pseudo winning hole 165a. It takes about 0.5 seconds for this to happen. Therefore, in this first control example, the timing at which the pseudo winning opening 165a is opened and the timing at which the pseudo winning opening 165a is closed is set to 0. The configuration is such that the delay is delayed for 5 seconds. As a result, all the game balls that have won (entered) the specific winning hole 65a can be made to enter the pseudo winning hole 165a.

In addition, in this first control example, as described above, the game ball that enters the specific general winning opening 163 or the specific out opening 166 is also configured to be able to reach the pseudo attacker 165. From the perspective of the player, it is difficult to distinguish which entrance the ball entered into and reached the pseudo attacker 165, so regardless of the type of ball entrance, the game ball enters the pseudo winning opening 165a. The structure is such that a pseudo prize-winning effect is executed for every ball entered. As a result, during the jackpot round period, the more game balls enter the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166, the more times the pseudo winning effect is executed, so more prizes are won than actually. It can create the illusion that you have won the ball. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of satisfaction in the jackpot game. As described above, each round of the jackpot ends when the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a 10 times. On the other hand, the pseudo winning opening 165a is configured so that in addition to the game ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a, the gaming ball that entered the specific general winning opening 163 or the specific out opening 166 can also enter. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, ten or more game balls are likely to enter the pseudo winning hole 165a. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, it is possible to make the player think that more game balls than usual have entered the special winning hole 65a, thereby giving the player a greater sense of satisfaction. be able to. Here, in this first control example, the mode of the pseudo winning effect is determined depending on whether the number of times the ball enters the pseudo winning opening 165a during the opening period of the first pseudo door 165f1 exceeds the specified number of times (10 times). (Pseudo winning sound) is configured to vary. As a result, when the pseudo winning sound changes, it is possible to give the player the illusion that more than the prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a (over-winning). It can give you a greater sense of satisfaction.

In addition, in this first control example, whether or not to execute the pseudo winning effect and the execution timing are determined at the timing when the ball entering each ball entry hole (specific general winning hole 163, specific out hole 166, specific winning hole 65a) is detected. The configuration is such that it is determined by That is, at the timing when a ball entering each ball entrance is detected, it is predicted whether or not the timing at which the game ball whose entry is detected will reach the pseudo attacker 165 is during the open period of the pseudo door 165f1. Then, when it is during the opening period (that is, when the game ball whose entry is detected is predicted to enter the pseudo winning opening 165a during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1), it is decided to execute the pseudo winning effect. It is configured to do this. In other words, for the pseudo winning opening 165a, there is no need to provide any configuration for detecting the entry of game balls, and whether or not the pseudo winning effect can be executed only by the winning sensor originally provided in each ball entering opening. It is configured to determine the execution timing. With this configuration, the number of sensors for detecting entering balls can be reduced, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

In addition, in this first control example, it takes about 1.5 seconds after the ball entering the specific general winning hole 163 is detected until the game ball whose entering ball is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165. It takes about 1 second after the ball enters the specific out port 166 is detected until the game ball whose entry is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165, and the specific winning port 65a It takes about 0.5 seconds after the ball entering the game ball is detected to reach the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, when a ball entering the specific general prize opening 163 is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 1.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened. When it is predicted that (the game ball whose entry has been detected will enter the pseudo-winning hole 165a), the pseudo-winning effect is set to be executed 1.5 seconds later. Similarly, when a ball entering the specific out port 166 is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is open after one second, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened ( When it is predicted that the game ball whose entry has been detected will enter the pseudo-winning hole 165a, the pseudo-winning performance is set to be executed one second later. When a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is open after 0.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is determined to be open (the ball enters the hole). When it is predicted that the detected game ball will enter the pseudo winning hole 165a, the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed after 0.5 seconds. As a result, it is possible to execute a pseudo-winning performance in accordance with the timing when the game ball enters the pseudo-winning hole 165a, so that in the event of a jackpot, the prize ball will be more reliably won by entering the pseudo-attacker 165. It is possible to give the player the illusion that the bonus is given to the player. Therefore, in the event of a jackpot, the player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the pseudo attacker 165, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, not only the game ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a, but also the game ball that entered the specific general winning hole 163 and the specific out hole 166 can reach the pseudo attacker 165. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a game ball that enters at least one of the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 cannot reach the pseudo attacker 165. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a discrepancy between the number of prize balls estimated from the number of pseudo winning effects and the number of prize balls actually paid out.

In the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a was configured to be provided on the downstream side of the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166, but the arrangement of each ball entry opening may be arbitrarily determined.

Returning to FIG. 207, the explanation will be continued. A center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 provided approximately at the center of the game board 13 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 protrudes to the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81, and prevents game balls from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three symbols on the left, middle, and right can be displayed. Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed (variable) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. display). The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37a, 37b that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, and FIG. 209(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three symbols on the left, middle, and right can be displayed. A row of symbols will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 209(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, upper and lower, with the upper two-thirds being the main display area Dm that displays the third symbol in a variable manner, and the other half being the main display area Dm that displays the third symbol in a variable manner. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved pitches, and the like.

The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols each imitating the numbers "0" to "9". . In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777") is performed, The system is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each symbol row L1 to L3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the active line V1. If the third symbols are stopped on the active line V1 in a jackpot symbol combination (in this first control example, the same main symbol combination), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

Note that the manner in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned one and may be arbitrary, and may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the direction of fluctuating display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in a column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those mentioned above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the variable display area smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing or not. You may also do so. Further, during the period in which the special symbols are varying, the variation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be varied again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol is the same as the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify the third symbol). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

In addition, in this first control example, a specific symbol can be stopped and displayed as the third symbol that is variably displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. The details of this specific symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, but it is configured in a display format with identification information (for example, "charge") that is different from numbers, and this specific symbol is displayed on the active line V1. By displaying the special symbol in a stopped state, it is possible to inform that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result.

In this control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the third symbol showing the same number is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column L1 and the right symbol column L3, the changing middle symbol column L2 is specified. It is configured so that a specific symbol is displayed by interrupting a location (for example, a location between the numbers "0" and "9"). Thereby, the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable display of the third symbol, so that it is possible to provide a surprising variable effect to the player.

Note that the conditions for displaying the specific symbols may be other than those described above. For example, the conditions for displaying the specific symbols may be such that the numbers indicated by the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol column L1 and the right symbol column L3 are a predetermined combination. It may be set as a condition, or it may be set as a condition that the player operates the operating means during the variable display of the third symbol. Alternatively, the condition may be established based on the special symbol lottery results. In addition, a variable effect in which a specific symbol is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable display of the third symbol is started may be set in advance at the time of setting the variable effect (at the time of starting the variation).

In addition, when displaying a specific symbol, a method other than displaying it by inserting it into a preset symbol row may be used; for example, it may be replaced with one third symbol preset in the symbol row. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, if a specific third symbol is stopped and displayed, a combination of third symbols that will indicate a jackpot winning of the special symbol will be displayed in a stopped state. If it is in a ready-to-win state, the specific symbol may be displayed in place of the third symbol set before or after the specific third symbol. As a result, no matter which of the plurality of consecutive third symbols is stopped and displayed, it will indicate a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, so it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fluctuating performance while creating a sense of anticipation in the player. .

In this control example, three types of special symbol lottery results, ``big hit'', ``small win'', and ``miss'', can be set as the special symbol lottery results, and when a jackpot is won, It is configured such that one jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types in which the content of the jackpot game to be executed and the game state set after the jackpot game are different. The combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to suggest (inform) the player of the lottery result of the special symbol and the type of jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot D" where the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is set, one of the odd numbered main symbols "3, 7" will be a double hit. A fluctuating display that stops and displays all at once is performed. Further, in the case of "Jackpot A", "Jackpot B", "Jackpot C", and "Jackpot E", a variable display is performed in which any of the main symbols "0 to 9" are aligned in a row. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a "small win", a chance number consisting of a combination of "341" is displayed. Note that this chance combination is configured not to be selected if the lottery result is a loss. In this embodiment, the chance eye is configured to be displayed with a specific combination of third symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and special symbols different from the normal third symbols from 0 to 9 (for example, a golden fish symbol) are displayed. ) may be configured to display one or a combination of a plurality of characters, or may be configured to display characters such as "chance" for notification.

The sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas, and on the display screen that can execute variable display of special symbols, information (execution Medium symbol m0) is displayed, and information indicating the winning information of the special symbol stored in the small area Ds2 (special symbol 1 first reserved symbol m1 to special symbol 1 fourth reserved symbol m4, special symbol 2) is displayed. It is configured so that the first reserved symbol m5 to the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol m8) are displayed. Further, the information (content) displayed in the sub-display area Ds is configured to be switched depending on the gaming state. For example, if a jackpot game is in progress, a guide display mode is displayed to guide the game content during the jackpot game. is displayed, and even while the third symbol is being displayed, if a variable performance with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is being executed, the player will be informed of the jackpot expectation level of that variable production. A display mode for showing the information is displayed. Further, when performing a variable effect using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the sub-display area Ds is configured to disappear.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 209(b). As shown in FIG. 209(b), in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, there is a special figure 1 display area Dm1a in which a fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol. A special figure 2 display area Dm1b is formed in which a fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the symbol, and in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, a fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the normal symbol. The ordinary figure display area Dm2 is configured to be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 209(b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the regular figure display area Dm2 are shown in a size that is visible to the player. In reality, the size is such that it is difficult for the player to see it. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the variable performance of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

In addition, when a performance using the entire display screen is executed as a variation performance of the third symbol, a movable performance accessory provided near the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 9) )) is movable and covers the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the sizes of the display areas of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the regular figure display area Dm2 are reduced. It may be possible to change the display position, change the display position, or temporarily hide the display. This makes it possible to provide a powerful performance without any discomfort.

Furthermore, in place of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the ordinary figure display area Dm2, it is linked to the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol outside the third symbol display device 81. It may also be configured to display a fourth symbol that is dynamically displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide LEDs for the fourth symbol in correspondence with each symbol in the same location as the many decorative LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, it is possible to dynamically display the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of each symbol in a way that is difficult for the player to understand.

<About the production content in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 to 218, the contents of various effects executed in the first control example will be explained. First, with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211, a pre-reading effect using a reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a treasure box accessory 750, which is a performance accessory provided outside the third symbol display device. I will explain about it.

In this first control example, when a ball enters the special symbol starting port (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 640) during the variable display of the special symbol, the lottery right for the special symbol (the ball is The right to draw a special symbol using the values of various counters (winning information) obtained when entering a ball) will be stored (reserved memory) up to a predetermined number (4 for each special symbol). It is configured. The reserved symbols are displayed in the small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds of the third symbol display device 81 as a display mode for indicating the number of reserved lottery rights.

Furthermore, the content of the winning information that is held and stored is determined in advance before the special symbol lottery is actually executed, and the display mode of the pending symbols and the display mode of the treasure box accessories 750 are determined based on the determination result. It is configured to execute a variable performance (pre-reading performance).

When this look-ahead effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Then, when executing a special symbol lottery corresponding to the pending symbol whose display mode has been changed, as shown in FIG. m0 is displayed in the small area Ds1. In other words, the running symbol m0 displayed in the small area Ds1 notifies the player of the display mode of the pending symbol that has been changed by the look-ahead effect even while the special symbol variation based on the pending symbol is being executed. It is configured so that it can be done.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 can be varied in addition to the reserved symbols by the pre-read effect. Furthermore, even when performing a pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of reserved symbols and a pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 for the same winning information, the results of the pre-reading effect are configured differently.

According to the example shown in FIG. 210, during the variable display of the special symbol whose lottery result is jackpot D (16th round jackpot), the running symbol m0 indicates that there is a high expectation of winning the jackpot. By displaying a "green" display mode (in FIG. 210(a), a checkered pattern display mode), it is suggested to the player that the special symbol variation being executed may be a jackpot variation. Then, the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed in a "red" display mode (in FIG. 210(b), a diagonal line pattern display mode) indicating that the jackpot type is jackpot D and the expectation level is high.

Furthermore, according to the example shown in FIG. 211, while the special symbol whose lottery result is jackpot A (6th round jackpot) is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the running symbol m0 indicates that there is a high expectation that the jackpot has been won. By displaying the "green" display mode shown in FIG. 211(a) (checkered display mode in FIG. 211(a)), it is suggested to the player that the special symbol variation being executed may be a jackpot variation. Then, the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed in a "green" display mode (in FIG. 211(b), a checkered pattern display mode) indicating that the jackpot type is jackpot A and the expectation level is high.

In other words, in this first control example, the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols is based on the information that indicates the judgment result of the jackpot among the target winning information, whereas the look-ahead effect mainly sets the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead performance that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is configured so that the performance mode of the look-ahead performance is mainly set using information indicating the type of jackpot that will be selected when a jackpot is won among the target winning information. ing.

As a result, the player can comprehensively determine the display mode of multiple objects whose display mode is changed by the look-ahead effect, and perform various methods to predict the lottery result of the special symbol based on the target winning information. I will be watching the performance carefully. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is such that at the latest, a part of the third symbol that is variably displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that a look-ahead effect is executed so that the content changes forward as well. That is, as mentioned above, there is a relationship between the number of the third symbol and the type of jackpot, and in the event of an actual jackpot, each third symbol will stop at a predetermined combination (for example, a row of eyes). Since the number of the third symbol is displayed, the number of the third symbol more directly indicates the result of this special symbol lottery (jackpot type) to the player, so the number of the treasure box symbol is displayed before the third symbol is stopped and displayed. The display mode of the object 750 is made variable.

With this configuration, the lottery results of special symbols can be suggested to the player in order, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the various performances to be performed until the end.

In addition, in this control example, when the pre-reading effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbols and the treasure box accessory 750 is changed to the display mode showing the effect of the pre-reading effect. However, in the end, the pre-reading effect For example, the display mode may be changed in stages with the performance result of the pre-read performance as the final stage. In this case, it is preferable to configure the performance result of the pre-read performance to be settable in a plurality of stages in correspondence with the size of the benefit to be given to the player. Thereby, the user can enjoy the performance while expecting that the display mode will be more variable.

Further, the configuration is such that the determination of whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols and the determination of whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect that varies the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 are made different. Therefore, it is possible to know at what timing the display mode of which target object will change during the period from when the winning information is stored and when the special symbol corresponding to the winning information starts changing. Since it can be made difficult, even if the performance result of the look-ahead performance is already displayed, it is possible to create expectations that the display mode will be further changed.

As described above, in this control example, the display mode of a plurality of objects to be rendered can be randomly and variably displayed as a look-ahead effect. The configuration may be such that the order of the objects is determined in advance. Thereby, it is possible to clearly inform the player which of the objects to be rendered will be whose display mode can be changed next. Therefore, it can be easily determined that the display mode has changed.

In addition, when displaying the display mode of a plurality of objects to be effected randomly as in this control example, it is necessary to check which object to be effected the display mode of which is to be changed immediately before the timing when the display mode is actually changed. A similar effect can be achieved by configuring the system to notify the following.

Furthermore, in this control example, the timing at which the display mode of the target object is variably displayed is set randomly, but the display mode may be configured to be varied at a predetermined specific timing. The display mode may be configured to be changed based on the operator's operation of the operating means.

Furthermore, in this control example, by varying the display mode of the reserved symbols, the winning information that is the target of the current look-ahead performance is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the winning information that is the target of the winning information is difficult to understand. The system is configured to perform a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the image. As a result, for example, if the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 changes before the display mode of the reserved symbols, the player can have the pleasure of predicting which winning information is being prefetched. can be provided.

In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the pending symbols corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the look-ahead effect is configured to be varied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display mode of the pending symbols before and after that can be varied. It may also be configured to allow This makes it difficult for the player to understand which pending symbol (winning information) the pre-read performance is being executed for even when the pre-read performance using the reserved symbols is executed. Further, in a pre-reading performance that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, the player may be informed of the target pending symbol (winning information).

In addition, in this control example, a plurality of variable display effects are executed by using a plurality of objects to be effected for one winning information as a look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that each of the plurality of objects to be effected performs a pre-read effect on different winning information, or, for example, it is possible to perform a pre-read effect using a plurality of objects to be effected for one winning information. It is configured to determine whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, and to set only the target object for which it is determined as a result of the determination that the pre-reading effect will not be performed as the target object for the pre-reading effect for other winning information. You may do so. As a result, when the display mode of multiple performance objects changes, the player can check whether the pre-reading performance is being executed for one piece of winning information, or whether it is a pre-reading performance that is being executed for multiple pieces of winning information. It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether it is a look-ahead performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from becoming bored with the content of the pre-reading presentation at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, the contents of the charge effect in which a specific symbol (charge symbol) is displayed as the third symbol will be explained. FIG. 212(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the charging performance, and FIG. 212(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example when the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed during the charging performance. It is a schematic diagram.

This charge effect is when the third symbol showing the same number on the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 is stopped (i.e. reach state), and the middle symbol Z2 is in the middle symbol row L2 (Fig. 210 ( This is an effect in which a specific symbol (charge symbol) Z4 is inserted and displayed in (see a). Then, when the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol row L2, it becomes a third symbol combination indicating that the special symbol has been won as a jackpot or a small prize. Furthermore, during this charging performance, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, a performance is performed in which the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped at the stop timing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(a), the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 are stopped and displayed in a display mode showing "7", and the middle symbol row L2 is displayed in a fluctuating manner, that is, "7". ”, a specific symbol Z4 is displayed in the middle symbol row L2, cutting into the normal middle symbol row L2. In this state, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, a variable display mode of the 4th symbol indicating that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is being executed, and in the normal symbol display area Dm2, the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. A variable display mode is displayed to indicate that the

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 212(a), when the timing at which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed is reached, the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row L2, as shown in FIG. 212(b). . This temporary stop display is a display state in which the specific symbol Z4 is not actually completely stopped, but is swung to the extent that the player can recognize that the specific symbol Z4 has stopped. In this state, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, a variable display mode of the 4th symbol indicating that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is being executed, and in the normal symbol display area Dm2, the normal symbol is displayed indicating a win. A fluctuating display mode indicating that the display is stopped is displayed. FIG. 212(b) shows an example where the normal symbol wins, so after the specific symbol Z4 temporarily stops (after the normal symbol stops changing), the first electric accessory 640a performs the opening operation. be done.

With this configuration, when the specific symbol Z4 stops (temporarily stops) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the player can win a special symbol (big hit, small hit). It is possible to notify you in a way that makes it difficult to tell whether you have won or won a normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to create interest in the game content that is executed after the specific symbol Z4 stops (temporarily stops).

In addition, the above-mentioned charge effect (effect in which the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed) can be executed in the case of winning a special symbol and in the case of winning a normal symbol, so the charge effect can be executed. It is possible to increase the frequency of performance and enhance the performance effect.

Next, the above-mentioned charging effect is configured to be executed regardless of whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or a small win, so the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. However, for example, a jackpot game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed. If the game content is completely different from the game content of the small winning game (for example, the attacker (variable winning device) that opens is different), the player will be unable to read the lottery results of the current special symbol. Since the judgment is made immediately, it becomes difficult to keep the player's expectations high.

On the other hand, in this first control example, the initial game content of the jackpot game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed and the game content of the small win game are configured to be the same. . Thereby, immediately after a jackpot game or a small win game is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining what the winning game is being executed. Furthermore, an effect (roulette effect) is executed to notify the player of the current winning result on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 using a period in which the same game content is set (common game period). It is composed of

Here, the contents of the above-mentioned roulette effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 that is displayed during execution of the roulette effect, and FIG. 213(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 that is displayed while the roulette effect is being executed. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen.

As shown in FIG. 212(a), when the roulette effect is executed, a character 811b imitating a boy who is the main character of the roulette effect and the lottery result of the current special symbol (big hit or small win) are displayed in the main display area Dm. ), and a sword 811k for notifying the lottery results of special symbols using the roulette 811c are displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 212(a) is a roulette effect that is executed when a small hit with a special symbol is won. ”, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, this roulette performance is performed during a small winning game.

The roulette 811c has a jackpot area (area with a circle) 811c1 indicating that the lottery result of this special symbol was a jackpot, and a small win area (area with a circle) 811c1 indicating that the lottery result of this special symbol was a jackpot. 811c2) are formed to have the same size, and are rotated clockwise at a speed that allows the player to identify each area. Thereafter, the roulette 811c is rotated and displayed at a high speed (a speed at which it is difficult for the player to distinguish each area), and an effect is performed in which the sword 811k is thrown toward the roulette 811c.

When the sword 811k is stuck in the roulette 811c, the rotational speed of the roulette 811c gradually decreases, and the roulette 811c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 213(b). In this state, the player is informed that the area where the sword 811k is stuck is the lottery result of the current special symbol. Since FIG. 213(b) shows a roulette effect executed after winning a small win (a roulette effect executed during a small win game), an effect in which the sword 811k sticks into the small win area 811c2 is executed. .

In addition, in the above-mentioned roulette performance, the game content of the small winning game and the game content of the jackpot game are executed during the same period (common game period), so during the roulette performance, the game content of the winning game Therefore, it is not possible to determine the lottery result of this special symbol. Therefore, the player who wants to know the lottery result of the current special symbol as soon as possible will pay close attention to the performance mode of the roulette performance that is being executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the jackpot area 811c1 and the small win area 811c2 formed in the roulette 811c are formed with the same size, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol lottery It is preferable to configure the size of each area to be varied depending on the result. This allows the player to predict the lottery result of the current special symbol by understanding the display mode (size of each area) of the roulette 811c at the start of the roulette performance (before the roulette 811c rotates at high speed). I can do it. Further, in the above example, a display mode is shown in which one jackpot area 811c1 and one small jackpot area 811c2 are formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of jackpot areas 811c1 and small jackpot areas 811c2 are formed. may be formed alternately.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, two types of areas, the jackpot area 811c1 and the small win area 811c2, are formed as areas indicating special symbol lottery results, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot area 811c1 is The winning jackpot may be further subdivided for each jackpot type.

In addition, the lottery result of the current special symbol may be suggested by changing the rotating display mode of the roulette 811c, the display mode of the sword 811k, and the display mode of the character 811b.

In this first control example, when a winning game is started, the above-mentioned roulette effect is executed and the result of the effect is automatically displayed. The roulette performance may be started based on the start of the game, and the performance result of the roulette performance may be displayed based on the ball hitting the attacker who is released during the common game period. The performance result of the roulette performance may be displayed based on a predetermined operation performed on the operating means during the period. Thereby, players can be motivated to participate in the performance.

Further, in this first control example, the roulette effect is executed during the winning game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the roulette effect may be executed during the fluctuation of the special symbols. Also good. In other words, for example, if the performance period of the roulette performance is 10 seconds and the performance period of the charge performance is 15 seconds, the charge performance will start 25 seconds before the special symbol fluctuation stop timing, and 10 seconds before the fluctuation stop timing. It may be configured such that a variable effect corresponding to the special symbol change is set so that the roulette effect is executed seconds before.

In this way, if the roulette effect is configured to be able to be executed during the variable display of special symbols rather than during the winning game, the above-mentioned roulette effect will be executed even in the charge effect that is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. becomes possible. In this case, for example, if it is determined that a winning normal symbol will be stopped during the special symbol fluctuation period, the stop timing will be calculated and the roulette effect will be executed 10 seconds before the calculated stop timing. (so that the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed during the charge performance), the performance mode of the charge performance may be set. Further, the roulette 811c displayed in the roulette effect may be set to form a normal symbol winning region in addition to the jackpot region 811c1 and the small winning region 811c2. This makes it possible to execute the roulette effect even when a normal symbol is won, so it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the roulette effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, the content of the first operation performance (button fusion performance), which is one of the operation performances in which the player operates the operating means, will be explained. FIG. 214(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation content at the time when the first operation presentation (button fusion presentation) is started, and FIG. 214(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation contents after a certain period of time has passed. FIG. 215(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance content, and FIG. 215(a) shows the performance content when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) once in the first operation performance (button fusion performance). FIG. 215(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 215(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation content after buttons are fused in the first operation presentation (button fusion presentation).

Here, the content of the first operation performance (button fusion performance) will be explained. In this first operation performance (button fusion performance), the lottery result of the current special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 by the player operating the operation means. Then, the operating means is operated a number of times (three times) corresponding to the number of third symbols (three in this control example) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol.

An operation validity period is set for each operation of each operation means, and if the operation means is not operated within the operation validity period, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not displayed. In addition, if the display mode of the time gauge displayed corresponding to the operation validity period set for the operation of each operating means satisfies the predetermined condition (if the display mode is the same), each operating means A plurality of third symbols are displayed based on one operation of the operating means. This makes it possible to display all the third symbols even if there is only a short period remaining in the operation validity period, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means until the end.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), the left display area 81a, the middle display area 81b, and the right display area 81c are formed so as to cover the left symbol row L1, middle symbol row L2, and right symbol row L3 that are being displayed in a variable manner. Ru. In the left display area 81a, a first button 822a and a time gauge t1 for indicating the operation validity period of the first button 822a are displayed, and in the middle display area 81b, a second button 822b and the second button 822a are displayed. A time gauge t2 for indicating the valid period of operation of the third button 822b is displayed, and a third button 822c and a time gauge t3 for indicating the valid period of operation of the third button 822c are displayed in the right display area 81c.

In this state, when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), the display mode of the first button 822a changes to a display mode indicating that the operating means has been operated, and the left button 822a is displayed in the left display area 81a. 3 symbols Z1 are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 215(a)).

The valid operation periods corresponding to the buttons 822a to 822c are all configured to have the same length (5 seconds) and the start timings of the valid operation periods are also the same, but in FIG. 214(a), On the display screen, the remaining time displays t1a to t3a of each time gauge t1 to t3 are displayed in a display mode showing different remaining times. Specifically, the remaining time display t1a is displayed in a display mode showing that the remaining time is 4 seconds, the remaining time display t2a is displayed in a display mode showing that the remaining time is 3.5 seconds, and the remaining time display t2a is displayed in a display mode showing that the remaining time is 3.5 seconds. The time display t3a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 5 seconds.

Furthermore, in this control example, the time gauges t1 to t3 are configured to have the same gauge movement speed (the length of the arrow in FIG. 214(a)). In other words, the movement start timings (subtraction display timings) of the time gauges t1 to t3 are configured to be different in a state in which the same operation valid period is set.

In this way, when executing multiple operation effects that have the same operation validity period, by displaying the remaining time visually to make them different, it is possible to visually tell the player the order of operation effects. It becomes possible to make the discrimination. In addition, it is possible to make the user feel that the operating means must be operated as soon as possible depending on the degree of decrease (subtraction) of the remaining time, thereby making the user feel motivated to operate the operating means.

Here, in this performance where the same operation validity period is set and the movement speed of each time gauge t1 to t3 (the length of the arrow in FIG. 214(a)) is the same, If the movement start timings (subtraction display timings) of the time gauges t1 to t3 are made different, there is a risk that the timings at which the remaining time reaches 0 will be different. Therefore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 214(b), an effect is executed to make the time gauge blink, and the remaining time is not reduced during the period when the time gauge is off (hidden). are doing. This makes it possible to easily unify the timing at which the remaining time of each time gauge t1 to t3 becomes 0 without having to prepare a plurality of timing movement speeds. In this control example, the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is set to be the same when the remaining time of the valid operation period set for each operation effect is 1 second.

In FIG. 214(b), the remaining time t1b of the time gauge t1 indicating the valid operation period of the first button 822a is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode indicated by a broken line) indicating 2.5 seconds, and the remaining time t1b of the time gauge t1 indicating the operation validity period of the first button 822a is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode indicated by a broken line). The remaining time t2b of the time gauge t2 indicating the valid period of operation is displayed in a blinking display mode (display mode indicated by a broken line) indicating 3.5 seconds, and the remaining time t3b of the time gauge t3 indicating the valid period of operation of the third button 822c. is displayed in a display mode showing 4.5 seconds. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 214(b), the moving speeds of time gauge t1 and time gauge t2 are displayed to be lower than the moving speed of time gauge t3.

In the state shown in FIG. 214(b), when the player operates the frame button 22 once, as shown in FIG. 215(a), a display indicating that the third symbol Z1 on the left indicates "7" is displayed in the left display area 81a, as shown in FIG. 215(a). displayed in the following manner. Even in this state, the time gauge t2 is displayed in a blinking display mode, and the time gauge t3 is displayed in a normal display mode, as in FIG. 214(b).

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the state of FIG. 215(a), the remaining time display of time gauge t2 and time gauge t3 becomes the same because the moving speed of time gauge t3 is faster than the moving speed of time gauge t2. . When the remaining time display modes of the two time gauges t2 and t3 become the same, as shown in FIG. 215(b), a fusion button 822d in which the second button 822b and the third button 822c are fused is displayed, and the time gauge A fusion operation effect is executed in which a fusion time gauge t4, which is a fusion of time t2 and time gauge t3, is displayed.

As mentioned above, in this control example, since the remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation performance is set so that the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is the same at a timing of 1 second, On the fusion time gauge t4, a remaining time display t4a is displayed in a display mode showing 1 second of remaining time. When the player operates the operating means while the fusion button 822d is displayed, the middle symbol Z2 is displayed in the middle display area 81b and the right symbol Z3 is displayed in the right display area 81c at the same time.

In addition, in the example described above with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, an example was shown in which the fusion button 822d is displayed in a state where the left symbol Z1 is already displayed. When there is no operation and the remaining time of the valid operation period reaches 1 second, the fusion button 822d is displayed using all of the left display area 81a to right display area 81c.

In this way, since the display area in which the fusion button 822d is displayed indicates the range of the performance that is performed when the operating means is operated (the performance that displays the third symbol), the operation performance that is easy for the player to understand is provided. can be provided.

Note that in this control example, when a fusion operation performance is set, the fusion button 822d is displayed to execute an easy-to-understand performance for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even after the fusion operation performance is set, the display screen shown in FIG. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player.

In addition, in this control example, the fused operation performance is executed when the display format indicating the remaining time of the operation validity period set for each operation performance becomes the same, but other conditions For example, the fused operation performance may be executed when the operating means is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) after a plurality of operation performances are started. Alternatively, the remaining time of the operation validity period set for multiple operation effects may all be set under predetermined timing conditions (for example, all remaining times are odd numbers, the value of a specific digit indicating the remaining time is 0, the remaining time is The fused operation performance may be performed when the sum of the values of each digit of the indicated numerical value satisfies 10). This makes it possible to provide unexpected operation effects.

In this control example, we have explained the case where multiple operation effects are executed at the same time, but the invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the operation validity periods set for the multiple operation effects overlap, and the start timing of each operation effect is sufficient. may be made different, or the length of each operation valid period may be made different.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the content of the second operation performance (automatic press performance) in this control example will be explained. FIG. 216 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effects executed in the second operation effect, and FIG. 217(a) schematically shows the effects executed in the initial period (first period) of the automatic press effect. FIG. 217(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect executed in the intermediate period (second period) of the automatic press effect, and FIG. 218(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect executed in the final period (third period) of the automatic press effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the contents of the automatic press effect in this control example will be explained. In this control example, an operation effect period of 10 seconds is set as the operation effect in which the automatic press effect is executed, and a effect result display period of 2 seconds is set after the operation effect period has elapsed. Of the 10-second valid operation period, the first 8 seconds are set as a button operation immediate response period in which the effect is immediately displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means), and the remaining During the 2 seconds, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 (operation means) has been operated within the predetermined period at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed, and if it has been operated, the effect result is displayed. It is set as a period.

During the button operation immediate response period, a button display Z8 (see FIG. 217) corresponding to the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and when the button operation immediate response period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 216, Automatic press effect is executed. This automatic press effect is an effect that is executed during the remaining 2 seconds of the operation validity period (2 seconds from 8 seconds after the operation validity period is set until 10 seconds have elapsed). As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218, an effect is executed in which a character appearing in the main display area Dm presses the button display Z8.

In this control example, the automatic press effect is divided into three periods (first period, second period, and third period), and automatic effect 1 (button automatic press effect 1) is executed during the first period. The automatic presentation 2 (automatic button press presentation 2) is executed during the second period, and the automatic presentation 3 (automatic button press presentation 3) is executed during the third period.

In the second operation effect configured in this way, for example, if the frame button 22 is operated during the button operation immediate response period (see (Example 1) in FIG. 216), the effect result will be displayed immediately after the button operation is executed. Until the period ends, a display mode showing the performance result is displayed in the main display area Dm. Additionally, if the frame button 22 is operated during the first period (see (Example 2) in FIG. 216), the performance result display period ends from the second period after a waiting period until the first period elapses. Until then, a display mode showing the performance result is displayed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, if the frame button 22 is operated during the third period (see (Example 3) in FIG. 216), the display mode that shows the same effect as if the operating means was not operated during the valid operation period is changed to the main display area. It is configured to be displayed on Dm.

In this way, by setting the period during which the automatic press effect is being performed as the regular button operation response period, even if the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic press effect, the current effect will suddenly be interrupted. It is possible to suppress the execution of a performance that gives a sense of discomfort, and it is also possible to cancel the automatic press performance by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to participate enthusiastically in the operation performance.

In addition, during the standby period that occurs when the frame button 22 is operated while the automatic press effect is being executed, the automatic press effect is continuously executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, but the audio It is configured such that an effect mode indicating that a standby period is in progress is set for the light emitting device and the light emitting means. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218, the content of the effect during the automatic press effect will be explained. As shown in FIG. 217(a), when the automatic press effect is executed and the automatic button press effect 1 is executed, a character 811a imitating a bird appears in the main display area Dm and tries to land on the button display Z8. The performance is executed. In this state, the remaining time display t5a of the time gauge t5 indicating the valid operation period of the button display Z8 indicates 2 seconds (first period).

Then, when the remaining time of the valid operation period reaches 1.5 seconds (second period), automatic button press effect 2 shown in FIG. 217(b) is executed. In this button automatic pressing effect 2, a effect is executed in which the character 811a rides on the button display Z8 and looks around. In this state, the remaining time display t5b of the time gauge t5 indicating the valid operation period of the button display Z8 indicates 1.5 seconds (second period). Next, when the remaining time of the valid operation period reaches 1 second (third period), automatic button press effect 3 shown in FIG. 218 is executed. In this automatic button press effect 3, a effect is executed in which the character 811a riding on the button display Z8 presses the button.

As described above, in this control example, the character 811a appears as an automatic press effect, a button press effect is executed, and the operation result display period ends at the timing when the automatic press effect is completed (the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed). Since the performance result of the set operation performance is displayed, it is possible to provide the player with a relationship between the operation performance and the performance result.

Furthermore, if the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic press effect, the effect result display is configured to be executed at the timing when the currently set period (first period to third period) has elapsed. However, in this case, the start mode of presentation result display (the presentation mode executed for 0.5 seconds after the start) is made different depending on the period in which the frame button 22 is operated. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period, a production mode is set in which the character 811a flying in the sky falls and presses the button display Z8, and when the frame button 22 is operated during the second period. 22 is pressed, a presentation mode is set in which another character imitating a bird rides on the button display Z8 and presses the button display Z8 with its weight.

With this configuration, the effect result can be displayed without changing the effect mode of the automatic press effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 and without giving a sense of discomfort. In addition, in this control example, the production mode of the automatic press production executed in each period is configured not to be changed depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is operated. It may be configured such that only easy elements (for example, changing colors or adding comments) are changed, and in this case, it is preferable to change the performance content only when the performance result is a performance result that is advantageous to the player. . Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the frame button 22 during the automatic press effect, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the content of the performance displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot performance using the pseudo attacker 165 will be explained. FIG. 219(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the time when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot performance using the pseudo attacker 165, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the time when the ball hits the attacker 165.

As shown in FIG. 219(a), when the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 is opened and the jackpot (jackpot D) is won and the jackpot game is executed, the third symbol display device At 81, a jackpot game screen is displayed. On this jackpot game screen, a jackpot display 830 indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is displayed in the main display area Dm, and acquisition information 831 indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are integrated, and a comment of "hit right" indicating the playing method during the jackpot game is displayed.

FIG. 219(a) shows that a ball fired in a right-handed game enters a specific prize opening 65a in the special prize winning device 550 (a winning opening in which the ball can win when the variable winning device 65 opens). Although the displayed content is shown, the acquisition information 831 is displayed without adding the number of prize balls awarded based on the ball winning in the specific winning hole 65a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 219(b), in the state shown in FIG. 219(a), the ball entered the specific winning hole 65a at the same time as the ball entered the pseudo attacker 165. It is configured such that the number of prize balls awarded is added based on the number of balls awarded. Specifically, when the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 (see FIG. 208) detect that a ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a, the timing when 0.5 seconds have passed from that point, that is, the specific winning hole 65a. It is configured such that a display mode indicating that a prize ball has been awarded is displayed at the timing when the period (0.5 seconds) required for the winning ball to reach the pseudo attacker 165 has elapsed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the prize ball is awarded based on the ball hitting the pseudo attacker 165. In addition, since the winning sound for audibly notifying that the ball has won in the variable winning device 65 is also configured to be delayed in accordance with the update timing of the acquisition information 831 described above, the sound shown in FIG. A winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 at the indicated timing.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
As described above with reference to FIG. 4, the main control device 110 is equipped with the MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, and display settings on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 220, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this first control example. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

To set the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and a jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach type, out of reach (out of reach length A, out of short A), out of reach type), variation pattern selection A variation type counter CS1 used for this, and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1 are used. Further, a normal winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 238), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 253). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas) for storing reserved balls of the 1st special symbol, and a reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved area) for the purpose of A ball execution area is provided. Each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter according to the timing of ball entry into the first ball entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, similar values are stored in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through any of the second entrance ports (through gates) 67.

Next, each counter will be explained in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 499), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 499 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 499). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 499, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 499. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and is updated at the timing when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1. is determined to be a special symbol jackpot when it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for times when the probability of the special symbol is low (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the probability is high that the probability of the special symbol becoming a jackpot is higher than when the probability is low (for the special symbol). It is divided into two types: one for the period when the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of random numbers that will be a jackpot included in each type is set to be different.

In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Furthermore, what is the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)) for when the probability of special symbols is high and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)) for when the probability of special symbols is low? , is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, and is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if the special symbol is missed. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is missed.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the special win type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In this embodiment, five jackpot types are set: "Jackpot A", "Jackpot B", "Jackpot C", "Jackpot D", and "Jackpot E", and the special winning type counter C2 Either one is decided. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are 5 random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability times. 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 5 out of a total of 500 random numbers, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are six random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot, and the values "4 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. . In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is 6 out of the total number of random numbers of 500, so the probability that the special symbol will become a jackpot is "6/500".

In addition, in this control example, the random numbers that result in a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability times and the random values that result in a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability times are used. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for a jackpot regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number value will be inputted from the outside and that a jackpot will be won illegally. On the other hand, as in this control example, the random value for the jackpot is changed depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state). By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, so it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 that is referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the 2 special symbols is set respectively.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 indicates that when the variation of the first special symbol stops and the lottery result in that variation is a jackpot, the special symbol set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol reserved ball execution area is selected. A judgment value for comparing (judging) with the value of the winning type counter C2 is stored in correspondence with the jackpot type.

FIG. 223(b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, when the random value in the acquired special win type counter is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Also, when the value was "50-68", the jackpot type was "Jackpot B", and when the value was "69-98", the jackpot type was "Jackpot C", the value was "99". The jackpot type in each case is set to "jackpot D".

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol (special symbol 1), four types of winnings are determined based on the random number value indicated by the special winning type counter C2. is configured to be

In addition, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the variation of the second special symbol stops and the lottery result in that variation is a jackpot. A judgment value for comparing (judging) with the value of the special winning type counter C2 is stored in correspondence with the jackpot type.

FIG. 223(c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, when the random value in the acquired special win type counter is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot D". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot E".

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that five types of winnings are determined by the random number value indicated by the special winning type counter C2. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type that is selected when the judgment result is a jackpot is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player can easily understand the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to generate interest in which lottery is being held. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variable jackpot in which the probability variation is given to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (100%), the probability variation percentage is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine As a whole, it is possible to suppress the problem that the probability variation ratio is not constant. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot D in the second special symbol is set high, the probability that the 16R probability variable jackpot is selected is set higher than that of the first special symbol, so that it is configured to be advantageous to the player. There is.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The above-mentioned stop type selection counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 determine rough display modes such as so-called short time off, long time off, normal reach, super reach, etc. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed information of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 253) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Note that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224) that stores random values for determining the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 224(b), the variation pattern selection table 202b includes normal and potential patterns used in gaming states (normal state, potential state) when the probability of correctness judgment of normal symbols is low. A variation pattern selection table 202b1 and a probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 used in a gaming state (probability variation state) when the probability of determining whether a normal symbol is high or not are set, respectively.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), It is configured so that three game states can be set, including a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and at the end of the jackpot game, the type of jackpot won or the jackpot won. It is configured such that the gaming state is set in accordance with the gaming state that was set at the time of the game.

As will be explained in more detail in the explanation of the selection of the variation pattern in the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, the main control device 110 uses the judgment result, the number of balls on hold, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type. Based on the value of counter CS1, the rough content of the variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and variation time are determined, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal/potential variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal/potential variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and for each variation pattern, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, The value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned. In addition, when the result of the judgment is a win, each variation pattern is changed according to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the value of the acquired special win type counter C2). is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 226, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time-saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and for each variation pattern, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are set. The value is assigned. In addition, when the result of the judgment is a win, each variation pattern is changed according to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the value of the acquired special win type counter C2). is set.

The normal winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time the timer interrupt processing is performed, and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second ball entry opening (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. It is acquired when the ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The random number value for the normal symbol win is set by the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 222(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is If it matches the value of the random number that is a win set by the normal win random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state), and for the probability of the normal symbol winning from the low probability period. It is divided into two types: one for high probability times (periods in which the normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that will be a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. Furthermore, the types of winnings for the normal symbols are set as normal winnings and long-term winnings, and the values of the normal winning random number counter C4 are set for each.

Here, in this control example, it is configured such that a long win can be won only during a low probability state of the normal symbol, and when a long win is won, the electric accessory 640a is released in an opening time of 4 seconds. A long hit is executed. This makes it possible to temporarily execute the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state. A normal win (short win) of a normal symbol other than the above-mentioned long win is a win in which an operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated to an open state with an open time of 0.2 seconds is executed once.

In addition, in this control example, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a that is executed during the short time and probability variable period in the normal winning is set to be the same as the opening operation in the long winning. It may also be an opening operation. Specifically, the opening operation may be performed once for 3 seconds, for example. With this configuration, the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 more easily when winning for a long time, and the fluctuating display with the second special symbol can be performed during the normal game. can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the changes in the game performance by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol in which a fresh preview display or the like is displayed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 222(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is "5", it is determined that it is a normal winning of the normal symbol, If it is "6", it is determined that it is a long win. On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, if the value of the acquired normal win random number counter C4 is between 5 and 204, it is determined that it is a normal win of the normal symbol.

In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of game balls by the player and increase the profit on the game parlor side. On the other hand, during the short time period and the variable probability period where the probability is high, the chance for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of "1/1.2", and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 It is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the field. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's consumption of game balls and set a gaming state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with the aim of playing the game with high probability, and can play the game for more time.

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238). , are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 218, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags and counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 255) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 251). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 221(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 includes the above-described special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222), fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224), and normal win random numbers. In addition to the table 202c (see FIG. 222(c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 223), a small win random number table 202e, a jackpot scenario table 202f, and a small win scenario table 202g are set. Further, although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data, programs, etc. necessary for the game in addition to the above-mentioned ones.

The small win random number table 202e is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not the player has won a small win in which the player can be given a smaller benefit than if he or she had won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Here, the contents of the small winning random number table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 222(b). As shown in FIG. 222(b), in this control example, it is configured such that a small winning is won only in the lottery of special drawing 1.

The jackpot scenario table 202f and the small win scenario table 202g are data tables in which game operation contents during a jackpot game and game operation contents during a small win game are stored in association with the determined winning type, respectively. , the gaming operation during each win is executed based on the information (scenario) stored in this data table.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 221(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, small hit medium flag 203g, short time medium counter 203j, fixed variable counter 203m, and other memory areas. It has 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas includes: Each value of a special win random number counter C1, a special win type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A normal win random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4). ) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas. That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (the number of times of waiting) up to four times (fluctuating display performed on the display device 81). The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it reaches the maximum value of 4. 1 is added. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed.

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending balls N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winnings in the second ball entrance 640, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d. A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the main control device by a pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of balls held in the variable display held in 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number of held pitches deviates from the actual fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received command for the number of held pitches.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 to a maximum of four times. This is a counter that counts up to The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The small winning medium flag 203g is a flag that is set on while the small winning game is being executed. The variable probability counter 203m is a counter for measuring the period during which the variable probability state continues, and is set to a predetermined value when the variable probability state is set. Then, the value of the counter is updated at the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed during the variable probability state, and when the updated value reaches a predetermined value, a process to end the variable probability state is executed. be done.

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols. The initial value of this short-time counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110 and a special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving counter 203j.

In the other memory area 203z, necessary flags, counters, storage data, etc. for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details thereof will be omitted.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and continuous preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 227(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a reservation rank selection table 222b, a reservation mode selection table 222c, and a treasure chest mode selection table 222d.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time and variation pattern type corresponding to the variation pattern command, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

The rank pending selection table 222b is a data table for selecting a rank (pending rank) regarding whether or not to execute a prefetch effect based on the winning information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110. In this control example, a pending rank is set for all of the winning information corresponding to the received winning command, and depending on the set pending rank, it is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect or not. It is configured to set the performance mode when performing the performance.

Here, with reference to FIG. 228(a), the contents defined in the reservation rank selection table 222b will be explained. FIG. 228(a) schematically shows the contents of the pending rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 228(a), the pending rank selection table 222b corresponds to the type of the judgment result included in the received winning command and the value of the pending rank counter 223p1 included in the production counter group 223p. A plurality of reservation ranks (rank 1 to rank 4) are defined.

Specifically, when the result of the judgment is "Jackpot D" which is most advantageous for the player, "Rank 2" is in the range of "0 to 69" and "Rank 2" is in the range of "70 to 69". "Rank 3" is defined in the range of "89" and "Rank 1" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and if the judgment result is "Jackpot A, B, E", the reserved rank "Rank 3" is defined when the value of the counter 223p1 is in the range of "0 to 69", "Rank 2" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", and "Rank 3" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". .

If the result of the judgment is "big hit C, small hit", the value of the pending rank counter 223p1 is "rank 3" in the range "0 to 69" and "rank 3" in the range "70 to 89". If "Rank 4" is defined in the range of "90 to 99" and "Rank 2" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and the result of the judgment is a "miss" which is the most disadvantageous for the player, the value of the pending rank counter 223p1 is "Rank 4" is defined in the range "0 to 69," "Rank 4" is defined in the range "70 to 89," and "Rank 3" is defined in the range "90 to 99."

In other words, in this control example, four types of pending ranks, "Rank 1" to "Rank 4", can be selected for each winning information, and the result of the judgment is advantageous to the player. The more advantageous ranks (ranks with smaller values) are set to be more easily selected.

In this way, when performing multiple look-ahead effects, instead of setting the performance mode of each look-ahead effect based on the judgment result of winning information, the pending rank is set based on the judgment result of winning information. By configuring the performance mode of each look-ahead performance to be set based on the pending rank, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance mode of the look-ahead performance to be executed. .

In other words, when performing a look-ahead effect when the result of a win/fail judgment is a failure, in order to create a sense of expectation in the player, it is possible to set a performance mode with a high expectation of winning, but it is possible to set a performance mode with a high expectation of winning, In order to prevent expectations from being raised and the desire to play to decline, it is common to configure the system so that it is possible to set performance modes with low expectations of winning. When performing a look-ahead effect, by configuring the effect so that the effect mode with low expectation of winning is set approximately 90% of the time, and the effect mode with high expectation of winning is set approximately 10% of the time. To perform a pre-read performance without giving a player a feeling of discomfort.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, if the performance mode of each look-ahead performance is set based on the result of the judgment of success or failure, a performance mode with a low expectation of winning will be set as the performance mode of one look-ahead performance, There is a problem in that a performance mode with a high expectation of winning is set as the performance mode of the other look-ahead performance, making it impossible to enhance the performance effect of the look-ahead performance.

On the other hand, by setting a suspension rank in advance based on the result of the validity determination, and setting the performance mode of each look-ahead performance according to the set suspension rank, for example, if the result of the validity determination is a failure. In this case, the performance mode of each look-ahead performance is divided into a low-expectation look-ahead performance in which a performance mode with a low expectation of winning is selected, and a high-expectation look-ahead performance in which a performance mode with a high expectation of winning is selected. Therefore, an appropriate presentation mode can be set for each pre-read presentation without causing the above-mentioned problems.

Further, for example, by configuring the system to be able to set more suspension ranks than the types of validity determination results, it is possible to perform a more variety of look-ahead performances without any discomfort.

The pending mode selection table 222c is a data table for selecting the display mode of the pending symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the display mode of the pending symbols can be changed at the timing when a winning command is received from the main control device 110 or at the timing when a new special symbol variation (lottery) is started. .

Here, the contents defined in the reservation mode selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 228(b). FIG. 228(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the reservation mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 228(b), the reservation mode selection table 222c corresponds to the reservation rank selected using the reservation rank selection table 222b and the value of the reservation mode counter 223p2 included in the production counter group 223p. , multiple reservation modes are defined.

In this control example, the color of the pending symbols is changed as a pending mode, and the color of the pending symbols, which is normally displayed as "white", is changed to "rainbow" and "red" in descending order of probability of winning. , "green", "yellow", and "blue".

Specifically, when the expectation of winning is "pending rank 1", which is the highest (set only when winning jackpot D), the value of the pending mode counter 223p2 is "0 to 69". "Red" is in the range "70-89", "- (no change)" is in the range "90-93", "yellow" is in the range "94-96", "Rainbow" is defined in the range of "97 to 99", and if it is "holding rank 2", "green" is defined in the range of "0 to 69" and "green" is defined in the value of the holding mode counter 223p2. "Yellow" is in the range of "70 to 79", "- (no change)" is in the range of "80 to 89", "Red" is in the range of "90 to 96", and "Red" is in the range of "97 to 99". "Blue" is specified.

If the value of the reservation mode counter 223p2 is "pending rank 3", "- (no change)" is displayed in the range of "0 to 69", and "yellow" is displayed in the range of "70 to 79". , "green" is defined in the range "80-89", "blue" is defined in the range "90-96", "red" is defined in the range "97-99", and "retention rank 4" is defined as "red" in the range "97-99". In some cases, the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 is in the range of "0 to 89", "- (no change)", in the range of "90 to 93", "blue", and in the range of "94 to 96". "yellow" is defined for the range "97 to 98", "green" is defined for the value "99", and "red" is defined for the value "99".

In addition, in this control example, the configuration is such that a mode in which the color of the pending symbol is varied is selected as the pending mode, but the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be set to vary the shape of the pending symbol. , it may be configured such that a display form indicating the performance result of the pre-read performance is displayed in the vicinity of the pending symbols (in a range where the player can identify the targeted pending symbols).

The treasure box mode selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when selecting the display mode (color) of the treasure box accessory 750, and sets the display mode based on the jackpot type included in the corresponding winning information. be.

Here, the contents defined in the treasure box mode selection table 222d will be explained with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 229, the treasure box mode selection table 222d includes the jackpot type information (win/fail judgment result) included in the winning information, and whether or not the display mode of the pending symbol indicating the corresponding winning information has changed (the pending mode is already variable). A plurality of treasure box modes are defined in correspondence with the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 of the production counter group 223p.

Specifically, when the result of the judgment is "Jackpot D" and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is not changed, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "red" in the range of "0 to 69". ", "Rainbow" is defined in the range "70-89", "- (no change)" is defined in the range "90-99", and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is variable, "Red" is defined as the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 in the range of "0 to 89", and "rainbow" is defined as the value in the range of "90 to 99".

In other words, in this control example, if the display mode of the pending symbol has already been changed for the pending symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating that "Jackpot D" has been won, the treasure box accessory 750 The display mode is also always variable, and on the other hand, the display mode of the treasure box accessories 750 may not be varied when the display mode of the reserved symbols is not varied. Thereby, it is possible to set an effect pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed without changing the display manner of the reserved symbols or the display manner of the treasure box accessory 750.

In addition, the configuration is such that the "rainbow" display mode, which has the highest probability of winning, is selected more often when the reservation mode is not changed than when the reservation mode is changed. This makes it easier for the treasure box accessory 750 to be changed to the display mode "Rainbow" with the highest expectation of winning without changing the display mode (holding mode) of the pending symbols due to the look-ahead effect, so that the player can It is possible to perform a surprising performance while providing the enjoyment of predicting for which reserved symbol the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 has been changed.

Next, if the winning/failure determination result is "Jackpot B" and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is not variable, "Blue" is displayed when the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is in the range of "0 to 69". If "- (no change)" is defined in the range "70-89" and "red" is defined in the range "90-99", and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is variable, the treasure box mode "Blue" is defined for the range of the counter 223p3 value from "0 to 69", and "red" is defined for the range of "70 to 99".

If the result of the judgment is "Jackpot A, C, E, or Small Hit" and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "0 to 69". "- (no change)" is defined in the range of , "blue" is defined in the range of "70-89", "- (no change)" is defined in the range of "90-99", and the corresponding pending symbol is displayed. When the mode is variable, "blue" is defined in the range of "0 to 89" and "red" is defined in the range of "90 to 99" for the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3.

Finally, if the validity judgment result is "miss" and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is not changed, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is in the range of "0 to 89". )" is defined as "blue" in the range of "90 to 99" and the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol is variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is in the range of "0 to 69". For "blue", "- (no change)" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag. 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, status setting area 223g, operation performance flag 223h, operation performance type storage area 223i, pressed flag 223k, pending performance information storage area 223m, operation valid timer 223n, performance Counter group 223p, pending performance flag 223q, treasure box performance flag 223r, pseudo winning order storage area 223s, general pattern fluctuation start flag 223t, general pattern performance prohibition flag 223u, normal pattern performance flag 223v, and other memory areas 223z. At least it is provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a display of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) for special symbol fluctuation effects up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and the number of pending balls when receiving a prize information command or receiving a variable pattern command. Update according to the timing of increases and decreases.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable display of the second special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. , when a winning information command is received by a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol, It is updated in accordance with the timing when the number of held pitches increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and updates the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Unable to get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and counts the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223b. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when a starting winning is detected and the number of pending balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, a variable display in a special symbol is executed and the number of pending balls is subtracted. If so, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 based on the held ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 298). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved pitch number counter 223b, and , Sends a command for the number of reserved balls for display to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage. .

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 reserved The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved pitch number symbols corresponding to the value of the pitch counter 223b are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As mentioned above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Its value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 also corresponds to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while being synchronized. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223c has the same contents as the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, but differs in that the target is changed from a special symbol to a normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2302 in FIG. 259), and the third symbol It is turned off when the variable display setting on the display device 81 is made (see S3002 in FIG. 267). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 257). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 controls the display control device 114 so that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 258), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is turned off when it is turned off (see S3007 in FIG. 267). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas) and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to normal symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a starting winning for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry opening 640, a special winning random number counter C1 is acquired according to the starting winning. From each value of the special winning type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information (win or failure, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

In addition, when the passage of a ball to the through gate 67 is detected, a normal symbol corresponding to the passage is drawn from the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired according to the passage. The lottery result is predicted in advance, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the audio lamp control device 113 displays various information notified by the winning information command (in the case of special symbol winning information, win/fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern, normal symbol). In the case of winning information, win/fail) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is based on the type of ball entry port where the ball was detected (first ball entry port 64 or second ball entry port 640), or the four areas corresponding to the normal symbols ( Among the vacant areas (first area to fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth area). In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

In addition, in this first control example, the main control device 110 operates based on various information (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn. Although a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting winning occurs, the various information predicted corresponding to the starting winning includes various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. and a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command, and when receiving a winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f and information included in the received winning information command are provided. A configuration may also be provided in which a discriminating means for discriminating whether the various information (winning information) matches or not. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

In addition, in this first control example, when a new starting winning occurs, a winning information command is set and the audio lamp control device 113 is notified. The timing of the notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, by providing a storage means to temporarily store the winning information command, in addition to the timing of starting a winning, the timing of notification is not limited to the timing mentioned above (the timing when the winning information command is set). (for example, at 5-second intervals), when the gaming conditions change (for example, when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, when a jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when special symbols start changing (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the winning information command is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform an effect (so-called pre-read effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, setting of performance modes such as changing the display color of reserved symbols is executed as a pre-reading performance. In this way, by executing various performances (pre-reading performances) based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, players can be informed about each reserved ball before the variable display starts. It can create a sense of expectation that it will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform long-term effects using multiple variable display periods.

The status setting area 223g shows the current gaming status set in the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming status a predetermined period ago (for example, if a jackpot game is currently being played, the gaming status at the time when the jackpot was won). This is a storage area to be set (stored).

In this state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main controller 110 are received through command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 258), information indicating the gaming state included in the received state command is extracted. Then, the current gaming state is set. In addition, in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), if it is determined that a command indicating that a jackpot game is to be executed is received, the information set (stored) as the current gaming state is It is configured to be set (stored) as the previously set gaming state. As a result, it is possible to vary the performance mode of the variable performance executed after the end of the jackpot game depending on the gaming state that was set at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition, for example, even if the jackpot is of the same jackpot type, if the game state that is executed after the jackpot game is changed according to the gaming state at the time of winning, if the game state is changed after the jackpot game ends, during the jackpot game The audio lamp control device 113 side can predict the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and perform an effect during the jackpot game to suggest the prediction result.

The operation presentation flag 223h is used to indicate that the operation presentation is being executed, and is set to ON when the operation presentation is being executed.The setting status of the operation presentation flag 223h The configuration is such that the processing content when the operating means is operated differs depending on the operation.

This operation performance flag 223h is executed when it is determined in the fluctuation performance setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) that the fluctuation pattern to be executed this time includes an operation performance (S3105 in FIG. 268: Yes). It is set to on in the operation effect setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269) (see S3204 in FIG. 269), is referenced in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 271), and is set to on (S3304 in FIG. 271). If it has been pressed (S3304: Yes in FIG. 271), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271). Then, it is also referred to in the operation performance management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3501 in FIG. 273), and the performance mode of the operation performance is set based on the presence or absence of the frame button 22 operation for the operation performance being executed. .

The operation performance type storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of operation performance to be executed, and stores the performance type of the operation performance determined in the operation performance setting process (see S3106 in FIG. 269). The information shown is stored (see S3203 and S3207 in FIG. 269). The performance type of the operation performance stored here is referred to when determining what type of operation performance is currently being executed in the operation performance management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3502 and S3509 in FIG. 273). ). Thereby, different processes can be executed depending on the type of operation performance. Further, the information stored in the operation performance type storage area 223i is cleared when the operation performance ends (when the corresponding variable pattern performance ends).

The pressed flag 223k is for indicating that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operation means), and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation performance. It is something.

This pressed flag 223k is set when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (see S2107 in FIG. 271) that the frame button 22 was operated with the operation production flag 223h set to on (see S2107 in FIG. 271). 271 S3304: Yes), is set to on (see S3305 in FIG. 271), and is referenced in the operation performance management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (S3503, S3511, S3518 in FIG. 273). Then, after the performance mode of the operation performance based on the reference result is set, it is set to off (S3505, S3513, S3520 in FIG. 273).

In this control example, as the operation performance, there are cases where the performance mode is changed immediately after the player operates the operating means, and cases where the performance mode is changed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In such a case, by using the pressed flag 223k, it is possible to reliably vary the performance mode of the operation performance based on the operation result of the operating means.

The reserved effect information storage area 223m is a storage area for storing various information set for executing the pre-read effect, and includes four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second storage area corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is formed of four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and each storage area is configured to store information indicating a reservation rank, a reservation mode, and a treasure box mode. When a new special symbol variation is started, the various information stored in each storage area is configured to shift similarly to the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, by using the information stored in this pending performance information storage area 223m, the special symbol variation starts from the information set when receiving the winning command (for example, information indicating the pending rank). Since the information can be held until the information is displayed, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect using that information at any timing. Thereby, it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect that is surprising to the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this control example, the prefetch effect is executed at the timing when the effect mode of the prefetch effect is determined, but in addition to this, for example, the effect mode of the prefetch effect that has been determined may be stored in pending effect information. It may be configured such that the prefetch effect is stored in the area 223m and when a predetermined condition is met, the prefetch effect is executed using the stored effect mode. With this configuration, for example, the winning information included in the winning command received during the period in which the execution of the pre-reading effect is prohibited due to the pre-reading effect being executed for another pending symbol, can be used. It becomes possible to determine the performance mode of the pre-reading performance based on the completion of the pre-reading performance executed for another pending symbol, and to execute a new pre-reading performance.

In addition, when the process of setting the performance mode of the look-ahead performance is executed once, the process of setting the performance mode of the look-ahead performance will be executed again for a predetermined period of time (for example, until the special symbol variation is executed twice). period) When using a process that prohibits, the information specifying the prohibited period may be stored in the hold performance information storage area 223m, or the hold process that indicates the special symbol change to be executed next may be stored. It is configured to set prohibition information unique to a specific storage area in the storage area so as to prohibit the execution of a prefetch effect based on the pending effect information stored in the storage area where the pending effect information corresponding to the symbol is stored. You may do so.

The operation valid timer 223n is a timer for measuring the operation valid period during the operation performance (the period during which it is effectively determined that the player has operated the operation means (frame button 22)), and is a timer for measuring the operation validity period during the operation performance (the period during which it is effectively determined that the player has operated the operation means (frame button 22)), and when the operation performance is executed. A value is set for timing the period corresponding to the case. This operation valid timer 223n is periodically decremented by a value set in the counter update process (S2113) executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 257).

The performance counter group 223p is a counter group that includes a plurality of counters used for selecting various performances. The contents of various counters included in this performance counter group 223p will be explained with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the performance counter group 223p. As shown in FIG. 230, in this control example, the effect counter group 223p includes a pending rank counter 223p1, a pending mode counter 223p2, a treasure chest mode counter 223p3, and other counters 223pz, and each counter is It consists of a loop counter that is repeatedly updated within the range of 99.

Each counter included in the effect counter group 223p is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. Each counter is configured to update within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) without synchronization.

The pending performance flag 223q is a flag for indicating that a pending performance, which is one of the pre-read performances, is being executed, and is set to ON when the pending performance is being executed. This hold effect flag 223q is set to ON (see S2506 in FIG. 261) in the hold mode selection process (see S2405 in FIG. 261), and when set to ON, a new hold mode is not set. (See S2501 in FIG. 261). Then, in the stop processing (see FIG. 266), when it is determined that the special symbol variation that is the subject of the pending performance has stopped (S2957: Yes in FIG. 266), it is set to off (see S2958 in FIG. 266).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the holding effect from being executed simultaneously for multiple held symbols, so that the player is forced to pay attention to the look-ahead effect that is executed for a specific held symbol. be able to. In addition, if a winning command indicating that the winning/failure judgment result is a win is received while a pre-reading effect in which the winning/failure judgment result is a failure has already been executed, the pre-reading effect will be executed for the winning information corresponding to the winning command. Since this can be suppressed, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance in which the fluctuation result of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the pending symbol for which the pre-read performance is not executed becomes a jackpot.

In addition, in this control example, the flag 223q is used to suppress the execution of pre-read effects for a plurality of pending symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two The configuration may be such that the look-ahead effect is executed for up to three pending symbols, and there is winning information that indicates a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result of the special symbol that corresponds to the currently executed look-ahead effect. If it is determined that this is the case, it may be configured to switch the pending symbols that are the target of the prefetch performance.

The treasure box presentation flag 223r is a flag for indicating that a treasure box presentation, which is one of the pre-read presentations, is being executed, and is set to ON when the treasure box presentation is being executed. This treasure box presentation flag 223r is different from the above-described suspended presentation flag 223q in that the target is replaced with a look-ahead presentation that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. do.

The pseudo winning order storage area 223s stores pseudo attackers 165 calculated for balls that have won in each winning opening (right general winning opening 163, specific out opening 166, and specific winning opening 65a) provided in the special winning device 550. This is a storage area for temporarily storing the order of arrival (pseudo winning order). This pseudo winning order storage area 223s stores information that a ball has won a prize in each winning opening in the pseudo attacker production process (see S2812 in FIG. 265) executed in the right attacker jackpot related process (see S2702 in FIG. 264). When the command shown is received, the winning order to the pseudo attacker 165 is calculated by adding the ball falling period from each winning hole to the pseudo attacker 165, and the calculation result is stored (S2903 in FIG. 265) . Then, it is referred to when setting a specific presentation mode (overflow presentation mode) for the pseudo winning information whose winning order is 10 or later stored in the winning order storage area 223s. The information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is cleared every time one round game ends (see S2808 in FIG. 264).

The normal symbol production possible flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the variation pattern of the normal symbol won in the long opening will be executed, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol won in the long opening will be executed. Set to on if With this, it is possible to determine whether it is possible to change the performance mode based on the lottery result of the normal symbol while the charging performance is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. . In addition, when receiving a fluctuation pattern command indicating that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol won in the long opening will be executed, if it is determined that the performance mode of the charge performance cannot be replaced ( S2305 in FIG. 259: No), it is never set to on.

The ordinary pattern performance prohibition flag 223u is a flag for indicating that the execution of the general pattern performance (a performance in which the performance mode of the charge performance is varied based on the lottery result of normal symbols) is prohibited, and is a flag for indicating that the performance of the general pattern performance is prohibited. This is set to on when it is determined that the execution of This general pattern performance prohibition flag 223u is set when it is determined in the winning information related process (see S2209 in FIG. (see S2407 in FIG. 260) and is set to on (see S2408 in FIG. 260).

Then, in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see S2202 in FIG. 259), when a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a long open hit (normal symbol long hit) of a normal symbol is received, it is referenced (S2305 in FIG. 259), and the reference result is Based on this, the setting status of the ordinary figure production possible flag 223t is varied. This general symbol performance prohibition flag 223u is set to OFF when a special symbol indicating a win (big win, small win) is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, if there is winning information indicating a special symbol win (big hit, small win) that is more advantageous for the player than a long open win with a regular symbol, a special symbol will be displayed based on the lottery result of the regular symbol. It is possible to suppress the variation effect of the symbols from being changed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a player from being provided with a performance that is difficult to understand due to a performance based on a winning of a flat map being executed while a look-ahead performance is being executed based on winning information indicating a win. be able to.

In addition, in this control example, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol will be won (big hit or small hit), the general pattern performance prohibition flag 223u is turned on. , the general pattern performance prohibition flag 223u may be set to on under other conditions. For example, the general pattern performance prohibition flag 223u may be set to on at a timing other than when the fluctuating performance indicating the lottery result of a special symbol is fluctuating at high speed. You can also set it to on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to sudden changes in the variable performance being executed.

Further, in addition to the timing at which the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the long open hit of the common figure is received, the general figure performance prohibition flag 223u is set to be turned on based on the timing when the game for the long open hit of the common figure is executed. Also good.

The flag 223v during the production of a common picture is a flag for indicating that the production of a common picture is being executed, and is set to ON when the production of a common picture is being executed. The flag 223v during normal illustration is set to ON when the ordinary illustration is executed in the liquid crystal presentation execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 272) (see S3406 in FIG. 272). Then, in order to set the display mode of the third symbol to be displayed at the stop timing of the special symbol, it is referred to in the stop process (see S2213 in FIG. 266) that is executed when a special symbol stop command is received (see S2213 in FIG. 266). 266 S2952). It is also referred to in order to set a variation pattern of a variation effect that is set in accordance with the start of variation of the special symbol (see S3103 in FIG. 268).

The continuation flag 223x is a flag for determining that a general pattern effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, and is a flag for determining that a general pattern effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations. This is set to on. This continuation flag 223x is turned on when it is determined in the charge effect setting process (see S3104 in FIG. 270) that the regular symbol fluctuation time is longer than the special symbol fluctuation time being executed (S3224 in FIG. 270: Yes). is set (see S3231 in FIG. 270). Then, it is referenced in the stop process (see S3103 in FIG. 266) (see S2953 in FIG. 266), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S2953 in FIG. 266: Yes), the general effect (charge effect) is activated. A process for displaying a reduced third symbol is executed to reduce and stop the third symbol so that the third symbol can be continued without discomfort.

In this way, when performing processing to change the performance mode of the charge performance based on the lottery result of the normal symbol while the charge performance is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the fluctuation of the normal symbol may be stopped. Even if the timing is later than the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, by using the continuation flag 223x, it becomes possible to execute the charge performance over the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. In addition, when performing a charge effect across the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is made more difficult for the player to distinguish than the normal stop display mode. By variably setting , it is possible to allow the player to perform the charging effect without feeling uncomfortable.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. It controls the performance (direction). Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided in order to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store the control program and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 274) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the next one frame worth of images, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (the final address of the storage source), the information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and it is possible to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b indicates that the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 in a variation effect when

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be explained. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 35). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen, a power-on fluctuation image with an "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and a power-on fluctuation image with an "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, are displayed during the fluctuation period. In the middle, the display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is determined. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", an image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuating effect has stopped, and if it is a "missing special symbol", an image showing it will be displayed after the fluctuating effect has stopped. It will then be displayed for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on variation image area The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating "○" and "x" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the time when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 231, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area that stores image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 209), numbered from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance, the third symbol display device 81 does not display the variable effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes it to the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading resident image data in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data to be stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, round presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , ending effects, and demo effects are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

In addition, since the first starting port 64a is a winning port from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a jackpot with a normal symbol, and the ball is sent to the second starting port. If it becomes easier to enter 64b, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a sense of a period of time when you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2,...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite is defined for each address, such as effects for expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, etc. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table.

If it is specified that any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (undersea, beach, preparation period background, background dedicated to time production) is to be displayed based on the background type, the MPU 231 determines which of the backgrounds is selected by the player. The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified as time passes.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. However, instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are defined. It is also possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol has a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36 is the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, among the image data of sprites used in the production specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all of the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 236). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 236 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 236, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 236, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display can be easily performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 35 on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 274). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7705 in FIG. 285(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 276(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 276(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 276(b), S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284(b)) are executed.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 285(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 285(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 286) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for the image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and draws the image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display can be easily performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 276(b ), pointer update processing (see S7305 in FIG. 284(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 237), and obtains the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2,...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2,..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite (design) is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending pitch number symbol 1, pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , error symbol), and detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in this order.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 276 (b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7809 in FIG. 286). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7810 in FIG. 286). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i specifies a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 276(b)) is executed (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 238 to 255. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store it in the corresponding buffer area.

Furthermore, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the normal win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, 299, 99, and 239, respectively). When reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed to perform display on the first symbol display device 37 and to set a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104), and then, The starting winning process accompanying the winning to the first starting opening 64a (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process is executed as the ball passes through the through gate 67. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After executing the through gate passing process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and then other prize winning processes are executed (S109). Furthermore, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in step 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 ( S204: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), and set a reserved ball number command that indicates the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation. (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 253) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store in.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 253) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store in.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the period has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol 2 variation start processing (S208) and special symbol 1 variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 240 and 241. When this special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) or special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is executed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are A special symbol is drawn based on the values of various counters stored in the provided execution area. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is lit. In addition, if it is off, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S215 is completed, the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). Then, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery is performed by the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). It is determined whether the result (current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot scenario table 202f is set (S218). After that, the values of the probability variation counter 203m and the time saving medium counter 203j are set to 0 (S219), and the jackpot medium winning flag 203n is set to ON (S220). Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S217, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S217: No), a small win setting process (S222) is executed. The small win setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 242. Next, a game state update process (S223) is executed. The game status update process (S223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 239. Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S209). This special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is a process that is executed in the special symbol 2 variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) for a fluctuating performance to be performed.

In the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208), first, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired. (S251). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in a variable probability period (high probability gaming state) (S252). Note that the determination as to whether or not it is the variable probability period is executed by determining whether the variable probability counter 203m is on. This probability change counter 203m is set to ON based on the completion of the jackpot game based on jackpot D and jackpot E. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the probability is changing (S252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state, so the process moves to S253. In the process of S253, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)), the lottery result to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is determined. Acquire (S253). Specifically, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As mentioned above, six random numbers from "5 to 10" are set as the random numbers for a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability gaming state (special gaming state), and these numbers are set to 5 to 10. If the random numbers that result in a win match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S255.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state with special symbols (S252: No), the process of S254 is executed. In the process of S254, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S254). Specifically, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. In the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), five random numbers from 0 to 4 are set as special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that result in a jackpot are If the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S255.

In the process of S255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S253 or S254 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, it is determined whether the obtained special symbol jackpot random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are (S255), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S251 Based on this, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S256). More specifically, the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (( It is determined what type of jackpot is among jackpot D and jackpot E)). As mentioned above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot D (16R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is judged to be a jackpot E. (See FIG. 223(c)).

In the process of S256, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot D, jackpot E). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot D, jackpot E) is set as the stop type in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 (S257). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S257, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the currently determined jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot D, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, "51 to 250". ”, determine the variation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination of validity, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The audio lamp control device 113 determines the contents of the variable display mode (variation pattern) to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the validity determination result. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode in the audio lamp control device 113 for the same variable time even if the out-of-reach display mode is displayed. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

For example, as variation patterns for misses, various types of "short miss", "long miss", "miss normal reach", and "miss super reach" are defined. Various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined as common variation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D.

On the other hand, in the process of S255, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of order (S255: No), a display mode when the special symbol is out is set (S258). In the process of S258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is set. Based on this, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, a variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as reach.

When the process of S257 or the process of S259 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S257 or the process of S259 is set (S260). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S257 or S259 (S261). When the process of S261 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is a process that is executed in the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" lottery (judgment) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) for a fluctuating performance to be performed.

In this special symbol 1 variation start process (S214), similarly to the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), firstly, the special symbol 1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a obtained by the process of S271 is The respective values of the winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are acquired (S271).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in a variable probability period (high probability gaming state) (S272). If it is determined that the gaming state is currently in a variable probability period (S272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol. Since it is in a variable probability state, the process moves to S273. In the process of S273, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S273). Specifically, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As mentioned above, 11 random numbers from "5 to 10" are set as the random numbers that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and these random numbers that will result in a jackpot match. In this case, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S275.

On the other hand, in the process of S272, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a variable probability state (S272: No), the process of S274 is executed. In the process of S274, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S254). Specifically, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Five random numbers from 0 to 4 are set as the random numbers that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that will result in a jackpot, the special symbol will be selected. It is determined that it is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S275.

In the process of S275, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S273 or S274 is a special symbol jackpot (S275), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S275: Yes), the display mode at the time of a jackpot is set based on the value of the special win type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 (S276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), the jackpot type is determined. As mentioned above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (6R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 68", it is judged to be a jackpot B. (16R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "69 to 98", it is determined to be a jackpot C (8R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "99", it is determined to be a jackpot C. (See FIG. 223(c)).

In the process of S276, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) are set as stop types in order to stop display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 (S277). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S277, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, if the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250", it is normal reach. Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination of validity, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The audio lamp control device 113 determines the contents of the variable display mode (variation pattern) to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the validity determination result. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode in the audio lamp control device 113 for the same variable time even if the out-of-reach display mode is displayed. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

For example, the variation patterns for misses include "miss (long time)", "miss (short time)", "miss normal reach", "miss super reach", and "miss special reach". ing. Various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined as common variation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D.

In the process of S275, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of order (S275: No), a display mode when the special symbol is out is set (S278). In the process of S278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, a variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as reach.

When the process of S277 or the process of S279 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S277 or the process of S279 is set (S280). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S277 or the process of S279 (S281). When the process of S281 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the small hit setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the small hit setting process (S222). This small hit setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in It is processing.

In the small win setting process (S222), first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S301). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S301: Yes), a small win scenario is set based on the small win scenario table 202g (S302). Next, the small hit medium flag 203g is set to ON (S303), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S301, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S301: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the game state update process (S223) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the gaming state update process (S223). This game state update process (S223) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and updates the values of the probability change counter 203m and the time saving medium counter 203j. This is a process for executing a subtraction process and updating the gaming state based on the subtracted value.

In the game state update process (S223), first, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203m is greater than 1 (S351). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S351: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is larger than 1 (S351: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability variation counter 203m (S352). Next, in the process of S352, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203m subtracted is 0 or not (S353). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is 0 (S353: Yes), it is time to end the probability variation, so a state command indicating the normal state is set (S354), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S353, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203m is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203j is greater than 1 (S355). If it is determined that the value is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S355: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S355, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203j subtracted in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating transition to the probable state is set (S358), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S357, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is not 0 (S357: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and it is determined whether there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for suspending the values indicated by various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first prize opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of reservations of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, there is no winning in the first winning hole 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning hole 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process moves to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S405).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1301) of the main processing (see FIG. 253) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S405, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is updated. is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, regarding S408 to S414, for each process of S401 to S406 described above, only the process for winning a prize in the first winning hole 64 is changed to the process for winning a prize in the second starting hole 64b, Since similar processing is executed, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are acquired, and the corresponding special symbol 2 It is stored in an empty holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by acquiring the values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, which are similar to those for the first special symbol. Since the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the probability of winning can be made constant for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

After executing the process of S413, a prefetch process is executed (S414). The details of the pre-reading process (S414) will be explained with reference to FIG. Then, a process is executed to determine in advance each lottery result to be executed at the start of the fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the entry of the ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area to store the values of each counter until the fluctuation starts, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Alternatively, some of the counters (for example, only the variation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of variation. With this configuration, the counters related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counters that are not related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the pre-reading process (S414), which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S414).

In the pre-reading process (FIG. 36, S414), first, based on the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation is started (S421). Judgment at the start of variation is whether the gaming state at the start of variation is a normal gaming state (low probability) or a variable playing state (high probability gaming state) in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area. 203a, the determination is made based on the validity of the variable displayed before each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and the hit type.

In the process of S422, it is determined whether the determination result executed in the process of S421 is a hit (S422). If the determination result is a win (S422: Yes), it is determined whether the win type is jackpot A or not based on the special win type counter C2 (S423). If it is determined that the winning type is jackpot A (S423: Yes), a winning command indicating jackpot A is set (S424). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (S423: No), a winning command indicating jackpot B is set (S425). Further, in the process of S422, if it is determined that the result of the determined win/fail determination is a win (S422: No), a lose win command is set (S426).

In this way, before the fluctuation starts, the result of the validity judgment in advance is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a reserved ball is established, so the voice lamp control device 113 The result of the judgment and the type of winning can be recognized in advance. Therefore, based on the winning command, the audio lamp control device 113 provides a preview effect that notifies the player of the winning/failure judgment result for the held balls in advance (for example, changing the color of the holding symbol to a color that notifies the winning/failing judgment result). , outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of judgment on the validity of the held balls, etc.) can be executed. Moreover, since one winning command is output for each held ball every time a held ball is established, the audio lamp control device 113 can also recognize the formation of a held ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, a pre-reading process (S407) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S407).

In this pre-reading process (S407), first, it is determined whether there is a new prize in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (S501: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning is a winning of the first special symbol (S502).

In the process of S502, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S502: Yes), the winning is based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a1, the special symbol jackpot 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the small win random number table 202e. Then, the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small win type are acquired (S503), and the process moves to S504. In the process of S504, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result, jackpot type, small win determination result, and small win type acquired in S503 (or S505) is set (S504), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the winning is a winning of the second special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result, The jackpot type is acquired (S505), the process of S504 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 and the variation display of the second symbol attached to the second winning hole 640. 1. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is won, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win, and the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened/closed. This includes while the work is being done. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S601: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of pending variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, a normal symbol variation start process is executed (S608), and this process ends. The normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 247. In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S609). Note that the variable time here is a time that is preset by the process of S637 or S638 in FIG. 38 before the variable display starts on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S609, if the variable time has not elapsed (S609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S609, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the process of S610, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set by the process of S707 or the process of S710 in FIG. 247, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed as the second symbol. The device 83 is set to display a stopped display (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S713 in FIG. display). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, when the second symbol display update process (see S1307) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S707, the process of S710, or the process of S713 in FIG.

Next, when the variable display being executed is started on the second symbol display device 83, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol fluctuation process is a normal symbol win? is determined (S611). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol win (S611: Yes), set the opening/closing control start of the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning opening 640 (S612), and set the normal symbol win operation command. (S613), and this process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640 is set by the process of S612, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1306) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed next, the first electric accessory The opening/closing control of the accessory 640 is started, and the opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640 is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S709 or the process of S712 in FIG. 247 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the current lottery result is outside the normal symbol (S611: No), the process of S612 and S613 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (S608). This normal symbol fluctuation start process (S608) sets the setting at the time of the start of the normal symbol fluctuation that is executed in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see Figure 246) that is executed in the timer interrupt process (see Figure 238). This is a process to be executed.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S701). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S701: Yes), the process moves to S704.

In the process of S701, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S702). If the probability is not changing (S702: No), the process moves to S704.

If the probability is changing (S702: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a jackpot with a special symbol, but the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with a regular symbol, so the normal win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 in FIG. 246 Based on the value of , and the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability times (see FIG. 222(c)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S703). Specifically, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal win random number table 202c for high probability times (see FIG. 222(c)). As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 222(c)).

In the process of S704, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 in FIG. , and the normal winning random number table 202c for low probability times (see FIG. 222(c)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S704). Specifically, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal win random number table 202c for low probability times (see FIG. 222(c)). As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined that it is a short hit with a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "6", it is determined that it is a long win with a normal symbol. If it is determined that there is, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 222(c)).

In this embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, it is configured such that the lottery of the normal symbol is less likely to become a win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning hole 65a, so the first electric accessory 640 attached to the second winning hole 640 This is to suppress as much as possible the ball that is opened and intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second winning hole 640. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided directly below the second winning hole 640, even if the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second winning hole Many balls enter 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second winning hole 640 reaches the maximum (four times).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S703 or S704 is a normal symbol win (S705), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S705: Yes) , it is determined whether the type of hit of the normal symbol is a long time hit (S706). If it is determined that the type of win for the normal symbol is a long time win (S706: Yes), a display mode for a long time win is set (S707). In the process of S707, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a variable pattern command per standard figure length is set (S708), the opening time and number of times of the first electric accessory 640 are set to 2 seconds x 2 times (S709), and the process moves to S715.

In the process of S706, if it is determined that the type of win of the normal symbol is a normal win (S706: No), a display mode for a normal win is set (S710). Next, a fluctuation pattern command per normal figure is set (S711). The opening period of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to one time (S712), and the process moves to S636.

In the process of S705, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S705: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of deviation is completed, a normal pattern deviation variation pattern command is set (S714), and the process moves to S715.

In the process of S715, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S715), and if the probability is changing (S715: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S716). , this process ends. On the other hand, if the probability is not changing in the process of S715 (S715: No), the variable time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S717), and this process is ended. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and furthermore, Since the release period of the second winning hole 640 becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening time and the number of openings in a long time win are the same as when the normal symbol hits in the variable probability state and the shortening time state, but the operation is not limited to this, and the opening time and number of openings are different. It may be configured to set.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 248. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and determines whether or not a ball has passed through the first through gate 66, and if a ball has passed through the first through gate 66, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 or not. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801). Here, passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

The ball has not passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S803: No), the process moves to S806. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203f (S804). Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S805), and the process moves to S806. In addition, in the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area. Next, ordinary map pre-reading processing (S806) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the general map pre-reading process will be described (S806). FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the contents of this general map pre-reading process (S806). In the ordinary symbol pre-reading process (S806), first, preliminary determination is performed based on the value of the ordinary winning random number counter C4 newly stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S901). Specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S805 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c.

Next, based on the result of the preliminary determination, a preliminary hit determination result and a variable time determination result are obtained (S902). Thereafter, a common drawing prize information command is set (S903), and this processing is ended.

Next, other winning processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 250. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the contents of the other winning process (S109). This other winning process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and it is determined whether a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a and a specific outro, and if a ball enters, This is a process for setting commands.

In the other winning process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the specific winning hole 65a (S1001). If it is determined that there is a prize in the specific winning hole 65a (S1001: Yes), a specific winning command is set, and the process moves to S1003. On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if it is determined that there is a prize in the specific winning hole (S1001: No), the process of S1002 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1003.

After executing the process of S1001 or S1002, it is next determined whether a ball enters a specific outro (S1003). If it is determined that there is a ball entering a specific outro (S1003: Yes), a specific out ball entering command is set (S1004), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if it is determined that there is no ball in the specific outro (S1003: No), the process of S1004 is skipped and the process ends.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process moves to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S913 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S913 in such a case. Note that, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 253, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S914, S915).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S914, S915) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (S908). Next, the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S909). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S911, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, interrupts are permitted (S912), and the process shifts to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S1301 to S1307 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S1310 and S1311 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). (S1301). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S131 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 244) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning command set in the start winning process and the prefetch process (see FIG. 245) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 has been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (S1304). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, when the special symbol is in a small winning state, a small winning effect is executed and a small winning control process for opening or closing the third prize opening 82 of the third electric accessory is executed (S1305). In the jackpot control process, the third winning hole 82 is opened for each round in the small winning state, and it is checked whether the maximum opening time of the third winning hole 82 has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the third winning hole 82. judge. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the third winning opening 82 is closed. This opening and closing of the third winning hole 82 is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the small hit control process (S1305) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 (S1305). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 246), opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is started. . Note that the opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S709 or S712 of FIG. 247 in the normal symbol variation start process end.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1306). In the first symbol display update process, by the process of S257 or S259 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 240), or the process of S277 or S279 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241). When a variation pattern is set, a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display device 37. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is lit, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is lit, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the red LED lights up.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 or S259 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 240), or the process of S277 or S279 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241) When the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process ends, the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is ended and the process of S256 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 208) or The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of S258 or the process of S276 or the process of S278 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 241). (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (S1307). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S716 or the process of S717 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83 when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S610 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 246). The current variation display is ended, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S707 or the process of S710 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247). (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1308), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1308: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1309). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1309: Yes), the process moves to S1301, and the processes from S1301 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main process (S1309: No), the initial The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1310, S1311).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1310). Specifically, 1 is added to the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1302 (S1311).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1301 to S1307 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 , the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1308, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1308: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1312 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1312), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1313). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1314), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1315), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1308 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1301 to S1307, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1310 and S1311 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process of S1301. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1301, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1301. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 254, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 257), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of specific prize openings ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1304), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S1401). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S1401: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that a jackpot scenario has been set (S1401: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S1402), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403). ). More specifically, in the process of S1402, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S1403, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is set to the opening start of the jackpot scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to .

In the process of S1403, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S1404), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405).

In the process of S1405, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: Yes), the opening of the specific prize opening 65a during the jackpot is set (S1406), and the number of rounds to be newly started is set. A round number command indicating the number of rounds is set (S1407), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied ( S1408). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5 balls) win in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition has been met. If it is determined that the round end condition for the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1408: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S1409 (the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed). The solenoid is set to OFF so that it is in the closed state), and this process ends. Note that the above-described determination processing from S1405 to S1409 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S1409: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1410), and the ending effect is determined. If it is the start timing (S1410: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1411), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during the external output processing (S1301) of the main processing (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S1410: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1412). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. In the process of S1412, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1412: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set based on the current jackpot type (S1413), and the probability change is set based on the jackpot type. The value of the counter 203m is set (S1414), the jackpot flag 203n is set to OFF (S1415), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (S1412: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the small hit control process (S1305), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S1305).

In the small win control process (S1305), first, it is determined whether a small win scenario is set (S1501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special drawing 2 out-of-game stop process (see FIG. 45) is executed, and it is determined whether a small winning scenario is set. In the process of S1501, if a small winning scenario is not set (S1501: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if a small win scenario is set (S1501: Yes), the small win scenario is updated (S1502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small win scenario (S1503). More specifically, in the process of S1502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small win scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S1503, the counter value of the small win scenario counter (not shown) is set to the small win scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the process of S1503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small win scenario (S1503: Yes), a small win opening command is set (S1504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S1503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the round of the small winning scenario (S1505).

In the process of S1505, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the round of the small winning scenario (S1505: Yes), the third prize opening 82 is set to be opened (S1506), and then a round start command is set (S1507). ), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the round of the small win scenario (S1505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied (S1508). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5 balls) win in total while the third winning hole 82 is open, or when the opening period of the third winning hole 82 is a predetermined time. If it has elapsed, it is determined that the round end condition has been met.

In the process of S1508, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S1508: Yes), the third prize opening 82 is set to be closed in the process of S1509, and the main prize is closed. Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end condition for the third winning hole 82 is not satisfied (S1508: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1510).

In the process of S1510, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1510: Yes), an ending command for a small win is set (S1511), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during the external output processing (S1301) of the main processing (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the small hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S1510, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S1510: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small win (S1512). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

In the process of S1512, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win (S1512: Yes), the small win medium flag 203g is set to OFF (S1513), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1513: No), this process ends.

<Control processing executed by audio lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 to 273. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 256, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When start-up processing is executed, first, initial setting processing associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "momentary power outage"), and the power-off processing in S2119 (see Figure 257) ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 257, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 257), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2119. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2119 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S2119 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process moves to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process moves to S2008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process moves to S2004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and after the execution of the power-off process in S2118 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process moves to S2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S2119, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 259). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2119 is executed, so the reason why the process in S2008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), the interrupt Permission is set (S2011) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S2008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S2004 to S2006 and then S2008. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S2010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), interrupt permission is set. (S2011), and moves to main processing. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2012). Note that this status command is a command that is set in the process of S1208 of the startup process (see FIG. 252) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the process of S2012, if it is determined that a status command has been received (S2012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area 223g, and this process ends (S2013).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is hitting for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side can also determine the state. I can do it.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S2009 is skipped is because if the process has reached S2008 from S2004 through the process in S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main process was started or the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S2101 was executed. If not (S2101: No), the process moves to S2114 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2113. In the process of S2101, determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is because S2102 to S2113 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S2114, the variable display setting processing in S2115, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) in short cycles. That is, by executing the process in S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process in S2115 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command from being received by the command determination process. Based on the command, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S2103 to S2115 are sent to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108, which will be described later (S2103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a reservation lamp (not shown) is lit according to the values of the special symbol 1 reservation ball counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reservation ball counter 223b, and the value of the normal reservation ball counter 223c. will be held.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. Note that this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S2107) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 271.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process in S2109, a liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process moves to S2111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing in S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that the above-mentioned liquid crystal presentation execution management process (S2110) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 272.

When the process of S2110 is finished, operation performance management process is executed (S2111). The details of this operation effect management process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. Processing for making it variable is executed.

After executing the operation performance management process (S2111), the operation control process (S2112) is executed. In this operation control process (S2112), operation control of various performance movable accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is executed. The operation control of the movable accessories for various performances is performed based on the special symbol lottery results, the regular symbol lottery results, the operation results of the operating means (frame button 22), the game results during the jackpot game, etc. This is executed according to the content of the action scenario of the movable accessory, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S2112 is finished, counter update process is executed (S2113). In this counter update process (S2113), a process for updating the value of a counter (timer) for time measurement information necessary when performing various effects, for example, the operation valid timer 223n is executed.

When the process of S2113 is completed, command determination process is executed next (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 258. After executing the command determination process (S2114), a variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 267.

When the process of S2115 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2118), and the power-off process is executed (S2119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the command determination process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

In the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). If a variable pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), a variable pattern reception process is executed (S2202), and this process ends. Details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 259.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if a variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether a stop type command is received (S2203). If a stop type command is received (S2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2205), and this process ends. .

In the process of S2203, if the stop type command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the held pitch count command is received (S2206). When the number of reserved balls command is received (S2206: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved balls number counter (special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223b) (S2207), and this process ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when a command for the number of reserved balls indicating the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is received, information for indicating the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal number of reserved balls counter.

On the other hand, in the process of S2206, if the reserved pitch count command is not received (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not a prize-winning related command is received (S2208). If a winning-related command is received (S2208: Yes), winning information-related processing is started (S2209), and this processing is ended. Details of the winning information related process (S2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 260, but the winning commands (winning commands corresponding to special symbols, winning commands corresponding to normal symbols) output from the main controller 110 Based on the above, the winning information included in the winning command is pre-determined, and a process of executing a presentation (pre-reading presentation) based on the preliminary judgment result, and a process of temporarily storing the preliminary judgment result are executed. be done.

In the process of S2208, if a winning-related command is not received (S2208: No), then it is determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S2210), and if it is determined that it has been received (S2210: Yes). , executes win-related processing (S2211), and ends this processing. This win-related process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 263.

In the process of S2210, if it is determined that a winning related command has not been received (S2210: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2212). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2212: Yes), a stop process is executed (S2213) and this process is completed. This stop processing (S2213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the stop command has not been received (S2212: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, details of the fluctuation pattern reception process (S2202), which is one process in the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (S2202), a variation pattern (variation effect) of the special symbol is set using the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the received variation pattern command. Further, when a variable pattern command indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is received, it is determined whether or not a variable performance of the special symbol can be executed based on the result of the regular symbol lottery.

In the variation pattern reception process (S2202: FIG. 259), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command received this time is for a special symbol (S2301), and the variation pattern command for the special symbol, that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol is indicated. If it is determined that it is a command (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2302), and a fluctuation pattern is extracted using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a based on the received command. (S2303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received this time is not for a special figure, that is, if it is determined that a variation pattern command for a regular figure has been received (S2301: No), next, It is determined whether the variable pattern command for the general pattern received this time is a variable pattern command indicating that the general pattern long winning (long open winning) has been won (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the variable pattern command indicating that the player has won the Fuzucho (Long Open) win (S2304: Yes), then the Fuzo production prohibition flag 223u is set to on. If it is determined that it is not set to on (S2305: No), the normal figure production possible flag 223t is set to on, and this process ends.

In the process of S2304, if it is determined that a command other than the variable pattern command indicating that the player has won the long open winning (S2304: No), or in the process of S2305, the player is prohibited from playing the player. If it is determined that the flag 223u is set to on (S2305: Yes), this process is ended without setting the normal pattern production possible flag 223t to on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the winning information related process (S2209), which is one process in the command determination process (S2114: see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this winning information related processing (S2209). This winning information related process (S2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the winning information related process (S2209), first, it is determined whether the received winning information command is a command indicating winning information of a special symbol (winning information command for special symbols) (S2401), and the winning information command for special symbols is determined. If it is determined that it is (S2401: Yes), the winning information included in the received winning information command is read out (S2402), and the winning information included in the read winning information and the obtained value of the pending rank counter 223p1 are read out. A pending rank is selected based on the pending rank selection table 222b using (S2403).

Then, the pending rank selected in the process of S2403 is stored in the location corresponding to the winning information command received this time in the pending performance information storage area 223m (S2404). Thereafter, a reservation mode selection process (S2405) and a treasure box mode selection process (S2406) are executed. Here, the reservation mode selection process (S2405) is a process for setting a pre-reading effect (holding effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol based on the winning information read this time. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 261. In addition, the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) is a process for setting a look-ahead effect (treasure box effect) that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 based on the winning information read this time. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 262.

After completing the process of S2406, it is next determined whether the winning information read this time includes winning information (S2407), and if it is determined that winning information is included (S2407: Yes), the general drawing effect is displayed. The prohibition flag 223u is set on (S2408), the received winning information is stored in the corresponding position of the winning information storage area 223f (S2409), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is for a normal symbol (S2401: No), the process of S2402 to S2408 is skipped and the present process ends. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the winning information related process (S2209), when a winning information command for common figures is received, it is determined whether the received winning information command includes winning information or not. And, if the win information is included, it is configured to determine whether or not the win information for executing the long open win game is included, and furthermore, the regular pattern fluctuation time is determined, and the determination is made. The configuration is such that the results are stored in the general pattern area of the winning information storage area 223f.

As a result, it is possible to determine in advance how many seconds after the long open winning game will be executed depending on the normal pattern winning, so the lottery results of the normal pattern can be spread across multiple normal pattern fluctuations in the same way as the special pattern. It becomes possible to perform an effect that suggests that (Fuzu map pre-reading effect). In addition, it is also possible to determine whether a long opening winning game will be executed during the special symbol fluctuation period in progress, so for example, it is possible to insert a performance based on the regular symbol fluctuation during the special symbol fluctuation. It also becomes possible.

Therefore, in a pachinko machine 10 where a plurality of drawings of different symbols (a drawing of special symbols and a lottery of normal symbols) are executed in parallel, the variation is based on the variation of the symbols on the side where the lottery result is advantageous to the player. Since the performance (variable performance executed by the third symbol display device 81) can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since it is possible to suppress the execution of a variable performance based on a lottery result (loss) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents of the reservation mode selection process (S2405) executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 260) will be explained. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reservation mode selection process (S2405). In this reservation mode selection process (S2405), a process for setting a reservation effect that is an effect that changes the display mode of the pending symbols based on the winning information received this time is executed.

When the holding mode selection process (S2405) is executed, first, it is determined whether the holding presentation flag 223q is set to on (S2501), and if it is determined that the holding presentation flag 223q is not set to on. (S2501: No), that is, if it is determined that the pending effect is not currently set (executed), it is possible to set a new pending effect, so the process from S2502 to set the pending effect is possible. The process of S2506 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the pending performance flag 223q is set to on (S2501: Yes), it is in a state where it is not possible to set (execute) a new pending performance, so the above-mentioned The processing of S2502 to S2506 is then skipped and the present processing ends.

When the process of S2502 is executed, the pending rank stored in the pending performance information storage area is read (S2502), and the pending rank read in the process of S2502 and the obtained value of the pending mode counter 223p2 are used. The holding mode is selected based on the holding mode selection table 222c (S2503).

Then, a display hold command corresponding to the selected hold mode is set (S2504), the selected hold mode is stored in the hold effect information storage area 223m (S2505), and the hold mode that changes the display mode of the hold symbols is selected. If so, the flag 223q is set on hold (S2506), and the process ends.

As explained above, in this control example, when winning information is acquired, it is configured to be able to execute a holding performance that changes the display mode of the holding symbols. Further, by using the flag 223q during the pending performance, it is possible to suppress setting of the pending performance redundantly.

In addition, in this control example, while the pending effect is being executed (set), a new pending effect is not executed (set) based on a newly received winning command, so that the pre-read effect (pending effect) is not executed (set). ) is configured so as to be able to suppress being executed repeatedly and performing effects that are difficult for the player to understand. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, 2) may be configured to be executed in duplicate with an upper limit of 2).

In addition, in this control example, the process of selecting a pending presentation is always executed when the pending presentation flag 223q is not set to on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning command A predetermined lottery is executed in the winning information related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260) that is executed when the winning information is received, and when the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result, the above-mentioned reservation mode selection process is executed. It may be configured as follows. By configuring the process to set the hold effect to be executed randomly in this way, hold symbols for which the hold effect has not been executed will not have the hold effect executed even though the hold mode selection process has been executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the reservation mode selection process was executed or whether the reservation mode selection process was not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable presentation of the special symbols corresponding to the pending symbols for which the pending presentation has not been executed.

In addition, once the hold performance is executed, after that, a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 10 times, or a condition that is satisfied when 10 minutes have passed) A determination unit for determining whether the predetermined condition is satisfied may be provided, and a new suspension mode selection process may not be executed until the determination unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to intentionally set a period in which the suspended performance is not performed.

In addition, in this control example, when a holding effect that changes the display form of the holding pattern is selected in the holding form selection process (when a value other than "-" is selected by the holding form selection table 222c (see FIG. 228)) Although the flag 223q is configured to be set on during the pending presentation, for example, the flag 223q is also configured to be set on when the display mode of the pending symbol is not changed in the pending mode selection process. You may do so. In this case, it is preferable to intentionally provide a period in which the suspension performance is not performed as described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more randomly set the period during which the display mode of the reserved symbols is not varied, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the reservation mode selection process (S2405) executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 260) will be explained. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection process (S2406). In this treasure box mode selection process (S2406), a process for setting (executing) a treasure box effect (see FIG. 210(b)) that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 based on the winning information received this time. is executed.

When the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) is executed, it is first determined whether the treasure box presentation flag 223r is set to on (S2601), and if it is determined that the treasure box presentation flag 223r is not set to on. (S2601: No), that is, if it is determined that the treasure box effect has not been set (executed), it is possible to set a new treasure box effect, so steps S2602 to S2606 for setting the treasure box effect are performed. Execute the process. On the other hand, in the process of S2601, if it is determined that the treasure box presentation flag 223r is set to on (S2601: Yes), it is in a state where it is not possible to set (execute) a new treasure box presentation, so the above-mentioned process is performed. The processing of S2602 to S2606 is skipped and the present processing ends.

When the process of S2602 is executed, the notification determination result is read from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S2602), and then the reservation mode change is read from the information stored in the pending performance information storage area 223m. Information indicating the presence or absence (information indicating whether or not it is a pending symbol for which a pending effect is executed) is read out (S2603). Then, based on the treasure box mode selection table 222d, using the validity judgment result read in the process of S2602, the information indicating whether or not the reservation mode has been changed read in the process of S2603, and the value of the acquired treasure box mode counter 223p3. A treasure box mode is selected (S2604).

Then, a lamp treasure box command corresponding to the selected treasure box mode is set (S2605), the selected treasure box mode is stored in the corresponding location of the pending performance information storage area 223m (S2606), and the display mode of the treasure box accessories 750 is changed. If the variable treasure box mode is selected, the treasure box presentation flag 223r is set to ON (S2606), and the process ends.

The display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is variably controlled based on the lamp treasure box command set in the process of S2605. Note that the audio lamp control device 113 may have a means for variably controlling the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, or a control device different from the audio lamp control device 113 may be used.

As explained above, in this control example, the treasure box mode selection process (S2406 in FIG. 262) is performed in the prize information related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260), as well as in the reservation mode selection process (see S2405 in FIG. 261) described above. ) is configured to run. In this treasure box mode selection process, when selecting a treasure box mode in which the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is varied, based on the determination result as to whether or not the display mode of the target pending symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The configuration is such that the treasure box mode is selected, and furthermore, in one winning information related process (S2209 in FIG. 260), after the holding mode selection process (S2405 in FIG. 261) is executed, the treasure box mode setting process (FIG. S2406) of H.262 is configured to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to reliably set an appropriate effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the contents of the win-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263) will be explained. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related process (S2211). This win-related process (S2211) is executed in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258) of the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed when the main control device 110 sends a message related to a win (big win, small win). This is executed when a command is received.

In this control example, when a jackpot C is won by drawing a special symbol, and when a small win is won, the third electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 207) provided on the left side area of the game board 13 is released. When a winning game (left winning game) is executed and a jackpot A, B, D, or E is won by drawing a special symbol, the variable winning device 65 provided on the right side area of the game board 13 is opened. It is configured to execute a winning game (right winning game), and in the winning related process (S2211 in FIG. 263), a display command for displaying information regarding the winning game on the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is configured such that different winning effects are executed depending on the processing and the type of winning game to be executed.

When the win-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command related to a big win C or a small win, that is, a command related to a left-win game (S2701 ). Here, if it is determined that the command is related to jackpot C or small win (S2701: Yes), the processes of S2703 to S2709 are executed in order to set various display contents related to the left win game. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command related to jackpot C or small win, that is, it is a command related to right winning games (S2701: No), various display contents related to right winning games are displayed. In order to set, right attacker jackpot related processing is executed (S2702), and this processing is ended. The contents of the right attacker jackpot related processing (S2702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264, and first, the processing of S2703 to S2709 for setting various display contents regarding the left winning game will be explained.

When the process of S2703 is executed, it is determined whether the command received this time is a winning start command indicating the start of a winning (S2703), and if it is determined to be a winning start command (S2703: Yes), the winning type is determined. A roulette effect (see FIG. 213) corresponding to the roulette effect is determined (S2704), a display command corresponding to the determined roulette effect is set (S2705), and this processing is ended.

Here, the roulette performance described above with reference to FIG. 213 is a performance that is executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), and when a small winning game is executed, the small winning game period (5 seconds), That is, it is executed using the opening period (2 seconds), round game period (1.5 seconds), and ending period (1.5 seconds) of the small winning game. In addition, when a jackpot (jackpot C) game is executed, 5 seconds after the start of the jackpot game, that is, an opening period (2 seconds), a part of the round game period of the first round (from the start of the round game) 3 seconds).

In this control example, the same winning operation is executed during the period in which the roulette effect is executed, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, in the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C, the opening period was set to 2 seconds, and as the first round game, the third electric accessory 82a was opened for 1.5 seconds after the round game was started. Afterwards, a round game is set in which the third electric accessory 82a is opened for 28.5 seconds after a closing period of 3 seconds (a period in which the third electric accessory 82a is closed).

With this configuration, while the roulette effect is being executed (while the small winning game or the first half period of the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C is being executed), the contents of the winning game that is being executed Based on this, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the winning game currently being executed is a big winning game or a small winning game. Further, as described above, as the first round game in the jackpot game, a closing period of 1.5 seconds is set after the execution period (5 seconds) of the roulette effect has elapsed. Thereby, the third electric accessory 82a is not released from the time the performance result of the roulette performance is displayed until the player recognizes the performance result, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 213, the player is informed of the type of winning game being executed by the roulette effect. It may be configured to execute a roulette effect (gasser roulette effect) that notifies the player of a winning type different from the type of game, and in this case, even though a jackpot game is actually being executed. It is preferable to display a performance result indicating a small winning game as a performance result of the gasser roulette performance. Thereby, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 263, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2703, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a winning start command (S2703: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (S2706), and the number of rounds is determined. If it is determined that it is a command (S2706: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S2707), and this process ends.

In the process of S2706, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (S2706: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (S2708), and it is determined that it is an ending command. If so (S2708: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S2709), and this process ends. Also. If it is determined in the process of S2708 that the ending command has not been received (S2708: No), this process is immediately ended.

Next, in the win-related process (see S2701 in FIG. 263), it is executed when it is determined that the win-related command received this time is a command related to jackpots A, B, D, and E (S2701 in FIG. 263: No). The contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702) will be explained with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702).

In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 in the right side area of the game board 13 is opened, a pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed. It is configured as follows (see FIG. 219). Then, in the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702), necessary processing is executed to make the performance content of the pseudo jackpot performance using the pseudo attacker 165 correspond to the jackpot game (right win game) that is actually executed.

When the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S2801), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S2801: Yes) , sets a display jackpot start command (S2802), and ends this process.

In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2801: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (S2803), and it is determined whether it is a round number command. If it is determined that (S2803: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S2804), a release operation for releasing the pseudo attacker 165 is set (S2805), and this process ends. . When the opening operation is set in the process of S2805, in the operation control process (see S2112) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 257), a solenoid (not shown) for activating the pseudo attacker 165 is set. ) is set to ON, and the pseudo attacker 165 is variably operated from a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball to an open state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the ball.

In this way, by configuring the release operation of the pseudo attacker 165 to be executed at the timing when the round number command for indicating that a new round game is started from the main control device 110 is received, it is possible to achieve an actual jackpot. Since the game content and the pseudo jackpot performance using the pseudo attacker 165 can be made similar, the pseudo jackpot performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the process of S2803, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2803: No), then it is determined whether a closing command has been received (S2806), and if it is determined that the closing command has been received, then (S2806: Yes), sets the closing operation of the pseudo attacker 165 (S2807), clears the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s (S2808), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2806, if it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S2806: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2809), and if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2809) :Yes), sets an ending command for display (S2810), and ends this process. Further, in the process of S2809, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2809: No), then it is determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S2811).

Here, winning-related commands refer to various commands that are output when a ball enters a winning opening where a ball can win (ball into) when a player performs a right-handed game during a jackpot game. , Specifically, a specific winning command to indicate that a ball has won in the specific winning opening 65a, a specific general winning command to indicate that a ball has won in the specific general winning opening 163, and a specific out opening 166. This shows a specific out ball entry command to indicate that the ball entered the ball.

In addition, in this control example, both the winning hole that awards a prize ball based on the ball entering the ball, and the ball entering hole (out hole) that does not give a prize ball based on whether a ball enters the prize (ball entering) or not. Although the main controller 110 is configured to perform the determination, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the audio lamp controller 113 may be provided with means for determining whether a ball has entered the specific out port 166. Also good.

In other words, in the case of a winning hole in which a prize ball must be given when a ball wins (a ball entered), the main control device 110 controls the winning hole of the ball in order to execute the process for awarding the prize ball. Since it has a configuration for discrimination, that configuration can be reused. On the other hand, since there is no particular process that the main controller 110 must execute when a ball enters the specific out port 166, the configuration for determining that a ball enters the specific out port 166 is performed by the audio lamp control device. It may be provided on the 113 side. With this configuration, the load on the control processing of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In the process of S2811, if it is determined that a prize-winning related command has been received (S2811: Yes), a pseudo attacker effect process is executed (S2812), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2811, if it is determined that the winning-related command has not been received (S2811: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the contents of the pseudo attacker effect processing (S2812) will be explained. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo attacker production process (S2812). In this pseudo attacker performance processing (S2812), processing for setting various performances to be executed during the pseudo jackpot performance in which the pseudo attacker 165 is released is performed.

When the pseudo attacker production process (S2812) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a specific winning command, that is, whether the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 208) of the variable winning device 65. It is determined whether a command indicating a command has been received (S2901). If it is determined that a specific winning command has been received (S2901: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 0.5 seconds (S2902).

When the pseudo winning effect is set in this process, a winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 based on the setting information, and a message of the ball to the specific winning hole 65a is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Acquisition information 831 is displayed to indicate the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings. Further, various performance devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 are caused to perform a performance to indicate that a ball has won a prize in the variable winning device 65.

When the process of S2902 is finished, the timing at which the pseudo winning effect set this time is executed is then stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s (S2903). Here, to explain the process of S2903 in detail, the pseudo winning order storage area 223s arranges in chronological order the timing when the pseudo winning effect is executed, that is, the timing when the ball wins (arrives) at the pseudo attacker 165. This is a storage area for storing information. This pseudo winning order storage area 223s is provided with an area capable of storing 20 pieces of timing information corresponding to the order in which the pseudo winning effects are executed, and the timing at which the pseudo winning effects are executed is set. Timing information is stored in each area in the order of execution of the pseudo-winning effects (pseudo-winning order).

In addition, in this control example, since the distance from each winning hole (ball entry hole) provided in the special winning device 550 to the pseudo attacker 165 (the distance of the ball flowing down) is configured to be different, each winning hole ( The order in which the ball enters the winning slot (ball entrance) may differ from the order in which the ball reaches the pseudo attacker 165 (wins), for example, 0.2 seconds from the time the ball enters the specific general winning slot 163. When a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a later, the winning ball of the specific winning hole 65a that wins later reaches the pseudo attacker 165 first.

Therefore, the pseudo winning order storage area 223s stores information stored in each area so that timing information set later can be stored so as to interrupt the order of a plurality of timing information that has already been stored. It is configured to be easily shiftable. Furthermore, the upper limit number of timing information (30 pieces) stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is configured to be larger than the number of winnings (10 pieces) that is the closing condition for the round game executed during the jackpot game. However, the timing information (normal timing information) stored within the number of winnings (10 pieces) that is the closing condition for the round game, and the timing stored outside the number of winnings (10 pieces) that is the closing condition for the round game. information (over-timing information).

As a result, in addition to the timing information set corresponding to the ball that won the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the ball that won (entered) the specific general winning hole 163 or the specific out hole 166 Correspondingly set timing information can also be reliably stored.

When the process of S2903 is finished, next, based on the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s, the timing information stored in the area where the winning order of the pseudo attacker 165 is 10 or later, that is, the over An over-the-top pseudo winning effect is set for the timing information (S2904), and the process ends.

As the over-win pseudo winning effect set in the process of S2904, for example, the sound mode of the winning sound output from the audio output device 226 is changed, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 indicates that an over-win has been won. This corresponds to effects such as displaying a display mode indicating a winning amount, or causing various effect devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 to execute effects to indicate that the player has won an excessive amount of money.

In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a specific general winning command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a specific general winning command (S2905), and a specific general winning command is determined. If it is determined that it is a command (S2905: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 1.5 seconds (S2906), the processes of S2903 and S2904 described above are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the received command is not a specific general winning command (S2905: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a specific out ball entering command (S2907), and the specific If it is determined that it is an out ball entry command (S2907: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after one second (S2908), the processes of S2903 and S2904 described above are executed, and this process ends. In the process of S2907, if it is determined that the specific out ball entry command has not been received (S2907: No), this process is directly ended.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured such that a prize ball is awarded when a ball is won in the specific winning opening 65a and when a ball is won in the specific general winning opening 163. It is configured so that if a ball wins at 166, no prize ball will be awarded. Therefore, in the pseudo winning effect (S2902, S2906 in FIG. 265) that is set based on the winning of balls in the specific winning hole 65a and the specific general winning hole 163, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of winning balls is In the pseudo winning effect (S2908 in FIG. 265) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and is set based on the ball entering the specific out port 166, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls is 3 It is configured so that it is not displayed on the symbol display device 81.

With this configuration, the display mode of the acquisition information 831 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the pseudo jackpot performance using the pseudo attacker 165 and the number of prize balls actually paid out to the player can be changed. This can prevent large errors from occurring. In addition, during the pseudo jackpot performance, many balls enter the pseudo attacker 165, so the game can be played without executing the process of updating the display mode of the acquisition information 831 for each ball that enters the pseudo attacker 165. The display mode of the acquired information 831 can be updated without making the person feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this control example, when updating the display mode of the acquired information 831, the value displayed in the acquired information 831 is updated in the minimum unit (for example, if it is a numerical value, It is configured to be updated every "1"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which ball has won the prize based on the display mode of the acquisition information 831, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with a performance that feels less strange. .

As described above, in this control example, as a pseudo jackpot effect, the display mode of the acquisition information 831 is updated based on the fact that a ball enters the winning hole where the prize ball is generated, but this is not limited to this. For example, a storage means for storing the number of prize balls acquired during a jackpot game, and acquisition information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of prize balls stored in the storage means. an updating means for executing the update process of 831; a determining means for determining the number of prize balls for which processing by the updating means has not been performed (unknown number of prize balls) among the number of prize balls stored in the storage means; may be provided, and when the number of unreported prize balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls), the updating process may be periodically executed by the updating means.

Further, the pseudo attacker 165 is provided with a detection means for detecting that a ball has entered the prize, and when the detection means detects a ball, the updating means is executed based on the number of prize balls stored in the above-mentioned storage means. Alternatively, the updating process may be executed based on detecting that a ball has won a prize in each winning hole that the special winning device 550 has.

Next, the contents of the stop processing (S2213) will be explained with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop processing (S2213). In this stop processing (S2213), a process for setting the display mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the special symbol variation stop timing is executed.

When this stop processing (S2213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation (currently executed special symbol variation) corresponding to the current stop command is a special symbol hit variation (big hit variation, small hit variation). (S2951), and if it is determined that there is no fluctuation per special figure (S2951: No), then it is determined whether the flag 223v is set to on (S2952), and the flag 223v is set to ON (S2952), and the flag 223v is set to ON. If it is determined that 223v is set on (S2952: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuation flag 223x is set on (S2953).

That is, in the processes of S2951 to S2953 described above, a process is executed to determine whether or not the general figure performance is to be executed over the current special figure stop timing. In the process of S2953, if it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is set to on (S2953: Yes), that is, if the general pattern effect is continued even after the special pattern fluctuation is stopped, the reduced third symbol A display stop command indicating this is set (S2954), a stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2955), and the process proceeds to S2957.

In this way, by configuring the reduced third symbol to be displayed when the normal pattern effect continues even after the special pattern fluctuation has stopped, it is difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. Therefore, the charge performance being performed for the player (see Figure 212) is performed based on a special symbol lottery, or is performed based on a normal symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the game is the same or not, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2951, if it is determined that it is a variation per special figure (S2951: Yes), or in the process of S2952, the normal figure performance flag 223v is not set to on (it is set to off). ) (S2952: No), since the charge effect was not executed during the special symbol variation being executed, the process moves to S2955 without setting the reduced third symbol.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S2953 that the continuation flag 223x is not set to ON (S2953: No), that is, if the normal pattern effect is completed during the current special symbol variation, the normal third symbol is Since it is only necessary to stop the display, the flag 223v in progress is set to OFF (S2956), and the process proceeds to S2955.

In the process of S2957, it is determined whether the current special symbol change is a change that is subject to a pending effect (see FIG. 210(a)) or a treasure box effect (see FIG. 210(b)). Here, the determination is performed based on the information stored in the pending performance information storage area 223m. If it is determined that it is a target change (S2957: Yes), the pending performance flag 223q and the treasure box performance flag 223r are set to OFF (S2958), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2957 that the change is not a target change (S2957: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the variable display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2115). This variable display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S2115: FIG. 267), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3001). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S3001: No), this means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so step S3006 is performed. Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S3002), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation performance extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is It is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3003).

Next, a variation effect setting process is executed (S3004), a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. (S3005). The contents of the variable effect setting process executed in the process of S3004 will be described later with reference to FIG. 268.

In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to S3006.

In the process of S3006, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S3006: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3007), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is It is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is directly set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 (S3009), and the process moves to S3010.

In the process of S3010, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S3010). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled. After the process of Z2509 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the contents of the variable effect setting process (S3004), which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. . FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process (S3004). In this variable performance setting process (S3004), a process for setting a detailed performance mode (notice content) of the variable performance of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

When the variable performance setting process (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S3101). Here, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state based on the information set in the state setting area 223g. In the process of S3101, if it is determined that the current state is in a variable probability state (S3101: Yes), a pattern command for displaying a variable probability state is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S3102), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the current state is not in a variable probability state (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the flag 223v in progress is set to on (S3103), and the flag 223v is set to on. In other words, if it is determined that the normal pattern effect is a change effect corresponding to the previous special pattern change, a normal pattern effect (a charge effect based on the result of the normal pattern lottery) is executed, and that normal pattern effect straddles the current special pattern change. Therefore, if it is executed (S3103: Yes), a charge effect setting process is executed (S3104), and this process is ended.

The detailed content of this charge effect setting process (S3104) will be described later with reference to FIG. The performance mode of the continuously executed charge performance and the variable performance after the charge performance ends are set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the flag 223v in progress is not set to ON (S3103: No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation effect in the fluctuation pattern obtained this time (S3105). If it is determined that there is a performance (S3105: Yes), an operation performance setting process is executed (S3106), and this process ends. The details of the operation effect setting process (S3106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

In the process of S3105, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time does not include an operation effect (S3105: No), then a charge effect (a charge effect executed based on a special symbol lottery) is included. If it is determined that a charge effect is included (S3107: Yes), the charge effect flag 223y is set to ON (S3108), and this process ends. By setting the charging performance flag 223y on here, it is possible to determine that it is the timing at which the normal figure performance can be performed.

Then, in the process of S3107, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time does not include a charge effect (S3107: No), a hold mode selection process is executed (S3109), and a treasure box mode selection process is executed ( S3110), this process ends. In addition, in the holding mode selection process (S3109), the same process as the above-mentioned holding mode selection process (S2405) is executed, and in the treasure box mode selection process (S3110), the same process as the above-mentioned treasure box mode selection process (S2406) is executed. is executed, so its detailed explanation will be omitted.

In this way, in this control example, the pre-reading performance (pending) is performed at the timing when the special symbol winning command is received and the timing when the variation of the special symbol starts, that is, the timing when the number of pending symbols corresponding to the special symbol is changed. The system is configured to execute a presentation (a presentation, a treasure box presentation).

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106) executed in the variable effect setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) will be explained. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106). In this operation effect setting process (S3106), a preparation process according to the operation effect type included in the current variation pattern is executed.

When the operation performance setting process (S3106) is executed, it is first determined whether the current operation performance is the first operation performance (see FIG. 214) (S3201), and if it is determined that it is the first operation performance ( S3201: Yes) sets the operation command corresponding to the first operation performance (S3202), stores the first operation performance type in the operation performance type storage area (S3203), and sets the operation performance flag to ON (S3204). ), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that it is not the first operation performance (S3201: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation performance (S3205), and if it is determined that it is the second operation performance ( S3205: Yes), sets a performance command corresponding to the second operation performance (S3206), stores the second operation performance means in the operation performance type storage area (S3207), and moves to the process of S3204. In addition, if it is determined in the process of S3205 that it is not the second operation effect (S3205: No), a performance command corresponding to the other operation effect is set (S3208), the process of S3204 described above is executed, and the main process end.

In this control example, the first operation performance is configured to be set more frequently than the second operation performance. The configuration is such that the determination is made in descending order of setting frequency. With this configuration, processing speed can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104) executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 268) will be explained. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104). When the charge effect setting process (S3104) is executed, it is first determined whether the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit) (S3221), and if it is determined to be a hit (S3221). :No), the normal drawing production possible flag 223t is set to OFF (S3222), and this processing is ended.

With this configuration, the charging effect (normal pattern effect) indicating that the drawing result of the normal pattern is a win (normal pattern winning) can be used as a special pattern drawing that can be more advantageous to the player than the normal pattern winning. It will be set with a lower priority than the variable performance to show the results. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution of the performance that the player is most interested in (for example, the performance to show that the player has won a jackpot) from being obstructed by other performances.

If it is determined in the process of S3221 that the lottery result is not a win (lost) (S3221: No), the special symbol fluctuation time extracted from the current special symbol fluctuation pattern and the remaining period of the regular symbol fluctuation at the present time are calculated. (S3223), and based on the determination result of S3223, it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time is longer (S3224). In the process of S3224, if it is determined that the general pattern fluctuation time is shorter, that is, the general pattern fluctuation that is the target of the general pattern performance ends during the current special pattern fluctuation period (S3224: No), then, It is determined whether the difference is 3 seconds or more (S3225), and if it is determined that it is 3 seconds or more (S3225: Yes), a variation that temporarily stops the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 in accordance with the end timing of the regular pattern variation A pattern (fluctuation effect) is determined (S3226).

Then, a fluctuation pattern using the remaining period after the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped is determined (S3227), the flag 223v in progress is set to ON (S3228), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3225, if it is determined that there is no difference of 3 seconds or more between the stop timing of the normal symbol and the stop timing of the special symbol (S3225: No), from the end timing of the normal symbol fluctuation to the end timing of the special symbol fluctuation. A variation pattern for temporarily stopping the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 is determined, and the process proceeds to S3228.

That is, in this control example, when setting a variation performance corresponding to a new special symbol variation, it is determined whether a production (normal symbol production) for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol variation currently being executed is being executed. , When the common picture performance is continuously executed, the variable production corresponding to the common picture performance is executed. Thereby, it is possible to easily set a variation performance (normal pattern performance) corresponding to a normal pattern variation that is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

In addition, the display format of the identification information (charge pattern) for indicating the lottery result of the regular pattern performance and the identification information (charge pattern) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol are the same (including some errors). Furthermore, since it is configured to use a part of the special symbol variation performance (for example, charge performance) to execute the normal pattern performance, the performance result of the charge performance (charge performance) It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand whether the symbol display (symbol display) is displaying the lottery result of a special symbol or the lottery result of a normal symbol.

Furthermore, in this control example, if the time from the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the lottery of the current special symbol will be held after the regular symbol performance ends. It is configured to execute a special figure variation effect to show the results. Thereby, it is possible to reliably inform the players of the lottery results.

On the other hand, in this control example, if the time from the normal symbol fluctuation stop timing to the special symbol fluctuation stop timing is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), it is assumed that the special symbol fluctuation performance has been executed for a short period of time. However, since only an incomprehensible variable effect is executed, the design is configured so that the symbol indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a long time (temporary stopped display) without executing the variable effect for the special symbol. There is. Returning to the process in FIG. 270, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3224, if it is determined that the normal pattern variation time is shorter, a variation pattern that continues the charging effect is determined, and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and based on the depression, execution of a preview effect, etc. is set.

In the frame button input monitoring/production process (S2107: see FIG. 271), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3301: No). , and then ends this process. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the current operation is valid (S3302). In the process of S3302, when the type of operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269), the operation valid period corresponding to the type is set in the operation valid timer 223n, and the operation valid timer 223n Determine whether the value of indicates the operation validity period.

In the process of S3302, if it is determined that the operation is within the valid period (S3302: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3303), and the pressed flag 223k is set to on. If it is determined that the operation presentation flag 223h is not set to on (S3303: No), it is determined whether the operation presentation flag 223h is on (S3304), and if it is determined that the operation presentation flag 223h is set to on (S3304). :Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON, and this process ends.

In other words, in this control example, when the first operation effect and the second operation effect are set among the operation effects, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the operation validity period, the pressed The flag 223k is set to on, and the performance mode is set in accordance with the setting status of the pressed flag 223k in accordance with the progress of the first operation performance and the second operation performance. As a result, it is possible to perform a performance based on the operation immediately after operating the frame button 22, or to perform a performance based on the operation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after operating the frame button 22, allowing variations in the operation performance. can be increased.

On the other hand, in the process of S3304, if it is determined that the operation presentation flag 223h is not set to ON (S3304: No), an operation mode corresponding to the set operation validity period is determined (S3306), and the operation mode is determined. A display command corresponding to the selected operation mode is set (S3307), and the present process ends. Further, in the process of S3302, if it is determined that the operation is not within the valid period (S3302: No), or if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is on in the process of S3303 (S3303: Yes), This process ends immediately.

In addition, in this control example, an example is shown in which a variable condition for varying the production mode of the operation production is established based on one operation (pressing) of the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the variable condition may be configured so that the variable condition is satisfied when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the valid operation period, or an operation means having multiple operation methods may be provided, The variable condition may be configured so that the variable condition is satisfied when the operating means is operated using a specific operating method.

Furthermore, in this control example, the fact that the operating means has been operated is indicated by setting one flag (the pressed flag 223k) to ON; however, the present invention is not limited to this; , it may be configured to show different operation results, and the presentation mode of the operation effect may be configured to be varied depending on the type of operation result.

In addition, in this control example, a display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation of the operating means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to perform an effect of moving a decorative movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means).

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while an operation effect other than the first operation effect or the second operation effect is being executed, the operation mode corresponding to the set operation validity period is determined. Although the configuration is as follows (see S3306 in FIG. 271), other configurations may be used.

Specifically, an operation validity period is set during which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively determined within the performance period of the display performance executed on the third symbol display device 81, and the set operation is performed. The value of the operation valid timer 223n is set to determine the valid period. A storage means for storing the length of the set operation validity period and a calculation means for calculating the remaining period of the operation validity period based on the value of the operation validity timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated are provided. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are defined depending on the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculation means.

With this configuration, different operation modes are selected depending on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (according to the remaining time at the time the operating means is operated), so the player can receive a variety of effects. can be provided.

In addition, an operation validity period setting means that can determine one operation validity period from among a plurality of operation validity periods and set it within the presentation period of the display effect, and an operation validity timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated. The configuration may include a calculation means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the operation validity period based on the value of . With this configuration, it is possible to set different operation validity periods for display effects of the same display mode, and further, based on the length of the set operation validity period and the timing at which the operation means is operated. According to the progress rate of the calculated operational valid period, that is, the value (%) calculated by taking the length of the entire operational valid period as 100 and calculating the ratio of the period that has already passed (or the period that has not elapsed) as a percentage, The operation mode to be executed can be different.

As a result, even if the operating means is operated at the same timing based on the display performance executed on the third symbol display device 81, different operation modes can be set, so that a more diverse range of performances can be provided to the player. be able to.

Furthermore, instead of setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation validity period, the operation mode is set according to the percentage value calculated by the calculation means. The range defined in the data table for selection can be limited to "1 to 100". In other words, when setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the valid operation period, for example, in a case where the length of the valid operation period can be set from 2 to 15 seconds, 6 seconds When the operating means is operated at the 3rd second when is set (remaining time: 3 seconds), and when the operating means is operated at the 7th second when 14 seconds is set (remaining time: 7 seconds) Since the remaining time differs between and, different operation modes will be set.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples, the operating means is operated at the halfway point of the effective operation period in both cases, and the operating difficulty level is the same, so when trying to set the same operating mode, the operating means is It is necessary to specify the data table so that the operation mode is selected based not only on the remaining time of the valid period, but also on the length of the set valid operation period and the remaining time of the valid operation period at the time the operating means is operated. There is.

In this case, if the length of the operation validity period is set to be variable to multiple lengths, the capacity of the data table mentioned above will increase significantly, which will put pressure on the data capacity. . On the other hand, by configuring the operation mode to be selected using a percentage value as described above, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation validity period, so the operation mode can be selected. The data capacity of the data table can be reduced.

In addition, as a dividing means for dividing the percentage value calculated by the calculating means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first dividing means for dividing into "1% to 50%" and "51% to 99%"; "1%-10%" "11%-20%" "21%-30%" "41%-50%" "51%-60%" "61%-70%" "71%" % to 80%," "81% to 90%," and "91% to 99%," and further based on whether or not a predetermined condition is met, such as the lottery result of a special symbol. A determining means is provided for determining which sorting means to use, and the percentage value calculated by the calculation means is divided by the dividing means determined by the determining means, and an operation mode is selected based on the divided information. It may be configured to do so.

In addition, in this way, when using a configuration in which the operation mode to be executed subsequently is varied according to the operation timing of the operation means, for example, a pachinko machine is used as an operation performance executed when the operation means is operated. It is preferable to use a performance that moves the movable performance accessories provided in 10. Thereby, it is possible to perform the operation performance without worrying about the period of the operation performance executed based on the set operation mode and the display performance period displayed on the display means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents of the liquid crystal presentation execution management process (S2110) will be explained. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal presentation execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal performance execution management process (S2110), the process of updating the performance mode of the special symbol fluctuation performance being executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a predetermined variation pattern, and the process of updating the performance mode of the special symbol fluctuation performance on the third symbol display device 81. A process for replacing it with a performance based on the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol performance) is executed.

When the liquid crystal performance execution management process (S2110) is executed, first, it is determined whether the charging performance flag 223y is set to on (S3401), and if it is determined that it is set to on, (S3401: Yes) ), it is determined whether the special symbol variation currently being executed is a winning variation (S3402). In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the win is not fluctuating (S3402: No), then it is determined whether the normal pattern production possible flag 223t is set to on (S3403), and it is determined whether it is set to on. If it is determined that (S3403: Yes), it is determined whether the current performance is within the effect replacement possible period (S3404).

In this control example, only the period in which the special symbol fluctuation is changing at high speed (the period in which any of the third symbols Z1 to Z3 are not displayed in a stopped state) and the third symbol Z1, which is displayed in a stopped state for the first time, is displayed in a stopped state. Only during the period during which the variation performance is set based on the special symbol lottery result can be replaced with the performance mode based on the normal symbol lottery result. With this configuration, after the special symbol variation performance progresses and the player reaches a state where the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, a ready-to-win state), the performance mode of the variation performance is replaced. It is possible to prevent performances that are difficult for players to understand from being executed.

In the process of S3404, if it is determined that it is within the production replacement possible period (S3404: Yes), the Fuzuzu production possible flag 223t is set to OFF (S3405), and the Fuzuzu production in progress flag 223v is set to ON. (S3406), sets a replacement display command (S3407), executes other liquid crystal presentation execution management processes (S3408), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that the charge performance flag 223y is not set to ON (S3401: No), in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the winning is changing (S3402: Yes), in S3403 In the process of , if it is determined that the flag 223t for production is not set to on (S3403: No), in the process of S3404, if it is determined that it is not within the production replacement possible period (S3404: No) Since the state is such that it is not possible to execute the general drawing effect, the process directly proceeds to S3408.

Next, the contents of the operation performance management process (S2111) will be explained with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation performance management process (S2111). In this operation performance management process (S2111), a process for setting a performance mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed during a period in which the operation performance is being executed.

When the operation performance management process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether the operation performance flag 223h is set to on (S3501). If it is determined that the operation performance flag 223h is not set to ON, that is, the operation performance is not currently in progress (S3501: No), this process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that the operation performance flag 223h is set to on (S3501: Yes), then the first operation performance is executed based on the information stored in the operation performance type storage area 223i. If it is determined that the first operation performance is being performed (S3502), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set on (S3503).

If it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3503: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3504), the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3505), The process related to the first operation effect is ended and the process moves to S3509. On the other hand, in the process of S3503, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to on (S3503: No), next, the display mode showing the remaining period of the operation valid period set for each operation effect is displayed. It is determined whether the timing is the same (in this control example, the timing when the remaining period of the operation transition period is 1 second) (S3506).

Here, if it is determined that it is the matching timing (S3506: Yes), a fusion effect display mode is set for changing the currently unoperated button display to a fusion button display. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3506 that it is not the matching timing, the process directly advances to the process of S3509. As a result, in a state where the first operation performance is being executed, if a predetermined condition is satisfied without operating the frame button 22 for multiple operation performances, a fused operation performance that combines the multiple operation performances is executed. That will happen. Thereby, a surprising performance can be provided to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, in the process of S3509, it is determined whether it is the second operation effect (see FIG. 216). If it is determined that the second operation presentation is in progress (S3509: Yes), it is determined whether the current period is the first operation period (button operation immediate response period) (S3510). As described above with reference to FIG. 216, in the second operation performance of this control example, a 10-second operation validity period is set, and the first 8 seconds of this are used to immediately respond to the operation of the frame button 22 and produce the performance result. is set as the period in which is displayed (button operation immediate response period), and the remaining 2 seconds are used to periodically (0.5 second intervals, 1 second intervals) determine whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated. It is set as a period (regular button operation corresponding period) in which the effect result is displayed based on the determination result.

In the process of S3510, if it is determined that the first operation period is in progress (S3510: Yes), it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is on (S3511), and if the pressed flag 223k is not set to on. If it is determined that (S3511: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3511 that the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3511: Yes), a corresponding button effect is set (S3512), and the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3513). ), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3510, if it is determined that the current time is not during the first operation period (S3510: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing at which the first operation period has elapsed (S3514). Here, if it is determined that it is the timing when the first operation period has elapsed (S3516: Yes), an automatic press effect mode is set (S3515), and then it is determined whether the current time is in the second operation period. (S3516). In S3516, if it is determined that the second operation period is in progress (S3516: Yes), it is determined whether the current timing is to determine the operation status of the frame button 22 (has a predetermined period elapsed) (S3517); If it is determined that it is not the timing to make the determination (S3517: No), this process is ended.

In addition, in the process of S3517, if it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed (S3517: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3518), and the pressed flag 223k is set to on. If it is determined that the button has been set (S3518: Yes), a corresponding button effect is set (S3519), the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3520), and the process proceeds to S3522. On the other hand, in the process of S3518, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3518: No), an automatic press effect is set (S3521), and the process proceeds to S3522. In the process of S3522, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect mode is set, and this process ends.

<About control processing in display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 287. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be explained with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 274. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 285(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer (see S7602 in FIG. 285(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)), the simple command determination process is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in is drawn. (See S6308 in FIG. 276(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 276(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first starting port 64 (starting prize), and an instruction to start the variable performance is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation production period, and a simple variation production can be performed. can. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276(a). FIG. 276(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276(b). FIG. 276(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 237) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 276(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the performance and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 237, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 287.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (Jackpot A, Jackpot B1, Jackpot B2, Jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command is created. It is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process of S6304 is executed. Move to.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282. First, FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 277, S6302), as shown in FIG. 277, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, (S6401: No), the command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

First, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 278(a). FIG. 278(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of S6501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S6503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can be judged.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6506), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data was set in the process of S6504 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 277. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 278(b). FIG. 278(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (Jackpot A, Jackpot B1, Jackpot B2, Jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and , the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) is executed, and the stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Finally, the settings are made (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. Set it to off (S6603). Thereafter, the process returns to S6401 in FIG. 277.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Incidentally, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display preview display command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If it is determined that a preview display command for display has been received (S6408: Yes), a preview effect display process is executed (S6409). The details of the advance notice effect display process (S6409) will be explained with reference to FIG. Setting of a preview display mode is executed to notify the player of a notice of a jackpot or a jackpot.

Here, the preview effect display process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279(a). FIG. 279(a) is a flowchart showing this preview effect display process (S6409).

In the preview performance display process (FIG. 279(a), S6409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display preview display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6701). A transfer data table corresponding to the set preview display data table to be displayed at a display timing based on the display timing of the preview display indicated by the received display preview display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S6702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6703), and time data representing the variation time is measured based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S6704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6705).

In this way, a preview display is set based on the preview display command for display outputted from the audio lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if it were different display modes.

Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the content of the preview display and the display timing, but the present invention is not limited thereto. You may.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table for preview is configured to be set, but the configuration is not limited to this, but the configuration may be configured to set the preview display and overwrite the display data table that has already been set. good.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no preview display command for display (S6408: No), it is determined whether there is a variable replacement command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If it is determined that there is a display variation replacement command (S6410: Yes), a variation replacement display process is executed (S6411). This variable replacement display process (S6411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279(b).

Here, the variable replacement display processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 279(b). FIG. 279(b) is a flowchart showing this variable replacement display processing (S6411).

In the fluctuation replacement display processing (FIG. 279(b), S6411), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display fluctuation replacement command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6801). Determine a transfer data table that corresponds to the set display data table for variation replacement to display at a display timing based on the display timing of the variation replacement display indicated by the received display variation replacement command, and transfer the data table. It is set in the buffer 233e (S6802).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6803), and time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S6804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6805).

In this way, the variable replacement display is set based on the display change replacement command output from the audio lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if it were different display modes.

Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the content and display timing of the variable replacement display, but the selection is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 executes the selection of the variable replacement display. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table for variable replacement is configured to be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set can be set for variable replacement display and overwritten. may be configured.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display variation replacement command (S6410: No), it is determined whether there is a display operation performance command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If it is determined that there is a display operation effect command (S6412: Yes), an operation effect display process is executed (S6413). This operation effect display process (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280(a).

Here, the operation effect display process (S6413) will be explained with reference to FIG. 280(a). FIG. 280(a) is a flowchart showing this operation effect display processing (S6413).

In the operation effect display process (FIG. 280(a), S6413), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display operation effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6901). The transfer data table corresponding to the set operation effect display data table to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the operation effect display indicated by the received display operation effect command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S6902).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6903), and time data representing the fluctuation time is measured based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S6904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6905).

In this way, the operation effect display is set based on the display operation effect command output from the audio lamp control device 113, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if it were different display modes.

Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the content and display timing of the operation effect display, but the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may select the operation effect display. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table for operation effects is configured to be set, but the configuration is not limited thereto. You can.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display operation effect command (S6412: No), it is determined whether there is a display button fusion command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If it is determined that there is a display button fusion command (S6414: Yes), button fusion display processing is executed (S6415). This button fusion display process (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280(b).

Here, the button fusion display process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280(b). FIG. 280(b) is a flowchart showing this button fusion display processing (S6415).

In the button fusion display process (FIG. 280(b), S6415), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display button fusion command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7001). Determine a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for button fusion to display at a display timing based on the display timing of the button fusion display indicated by the received display button fusion command, and store it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S7002).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7003), and time data representing the variation time is timed based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S7004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7005).

In this way, the button fusion display is set based on the display button fusion command output from the audio lamp control device 113, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if it were different display modes.

In this embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the content and display timing of the button fusion display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may select the button fusion display. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table for button fusion is configured to be set, but the configuration is not limited to this, but the configuration is configured to set the button fusion display and overwrite the display data table that has already been set. It's okay.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no button fusion command for display (S6414: No), it is determined whether there is a pseudo winning command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If it is determined that there is a pseudo winning command for display (S6416: Yes), pseudo winning display processing is executed (S6417). This pseudo-winning display process (S6417) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 281.

Here, with reference to FIG. 281, the pseudo winning display process (S6417) will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this pseudo winning display process (S6417).

In the pseudo-win display process (FIG. 281, S6417), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display pseudo-win command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7101). A transfer data table corresponding to the set pseudo-winning display data table to be displayed at a display timing based on the display timing of the pseudo-winning display indicated by the received display pseudo-winning command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S7102).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7103), and time data representing the variation time is measured based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S7104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7105).

In this way, a pseudo winning display is set based on the pseudo winning command for display outputted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if it were different display modes.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the content and display timing of the pseudo winning display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may select the pseudo winning display. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for pseudo-winning is configured to be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is configured to set the pseudo-winning display and overwrite the display data table that has already been set. You can.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no pseudo-winning command for display (S6416: No), it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and if there is an error command, If (S6418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7202, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7202, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 277. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Only the type commands are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command, such as the fluctuation pattern command processing (see Figure 278(a)) and the stop type command processing (see Figure 278(b)), is executed, and other For commands, processing is performed to discard them without executing the processing corresponding to the commands.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7301: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, so the process skips steps S7302 to S7304 and moves to the process S7305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7302), S7303 to S7304 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 284(a). FIG. 284(a) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags that are set to on are checked. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7401).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing information such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine the various parameters required.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7303: No), then the process moves to S7305.

In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 284(b). FIG. 284(b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data table is Time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7505), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7506), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 283 and continues. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In task processing, the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7306, along with the warning image developed earlier, and display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S7309).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S7309: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S7310), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7311). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S7314), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. In addition, compared to the conventional case where display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not placed on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Incidentally, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable production. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7315, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmed display flag is not off but on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S7317), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S7321), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of S7316, if the demo display flag is on (S7316: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process will end. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image (FIG. 35) is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 285(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S7601: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 286.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 285(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7701), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7701: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7702). In the process of S7702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7702 that the transfer process has not finished (S7702: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7702: Yes), the process moves to S7703. Also, as a result of the process in S7701, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7703: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device A normal image is displayed at 81. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 286) (see S7601: No in FIG. 285(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, except for the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S7801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802), and if it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7803), and furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7804), and the process moves to S7805.

Further, in the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No), the process of S7803 and S7804 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not finished (S7806: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7806: Yes), the process moves to S7807. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S7805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7805: No), the process proceeds to S7807.

In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), this process ends.

In the process of S7809, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809). The determination in the process of S7809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S7809, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. As a result, it is possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7809, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7810). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7811), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list shown in FIG. 237 is generated (S7901). That is, in the process of S7901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7903). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 276(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and when the audio lamp controller 113 receives the command, the audio lamp controller 113 transmits the command to the display controller 114. The command to be executed is determined, and the command is then transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In contrast, first, a command is sent from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines the command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 may then send a command to the audio lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, which is the transfer destination, is unused. If the image data is unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination is unused can be determined by checking that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use). a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use); ) may be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may perform this by checking the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors the signals sent and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or the signals sent and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and based on the state of the signals, the resident video RAM 235 It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing or ends the access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or receives a notification from the image controller 237 to determine whether the scanning is in a blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is not in use. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether it is not in use or not, so the determination can be easily made.

In addition, in this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the drawing of that sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for the video can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed within the display main process or main process loop executed by the MPU 231. This allows the MPU 231 to perform image data transfer processing using the time when important processing in the display control device 114, such as command interruption processing and V interruption processing, is not being performed. In addition, since command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are processes that are executed with priority over display main processing, etc., the MPU 231 can process image data without affecting command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the embodiment described above, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 each have, but uses the addresses that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 have in common. Within the address system provided, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not have to directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) that it wants to access to the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify an address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction that specifies the command. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, an address set in a common address system is simply used as information indicating the storage destination of sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected, but this is not necessarily the case. 237 may be provided. Further, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used as is. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, but the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. may be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow readout speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above embodiment, images can be displayed at the desired display time without any problems. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231, but this is not necessarily the case. Although not limited to this, a first program storage area may be provided in a memory configured with a non-volatile storage medium that can read data at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area may be stored in the first program storage area in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided therein, and the MPU 231 After canceling system reset A part of the boot program that is executed first may be stored.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in that area. Although the case where the memory is stored is not necessarily limited to this, the memory configured with a non-volatile storage medium that can read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a is stored on the internal bus (bus line 240). A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the first program storage area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM234D, install Feram (FerroelECTRIC RAM), MRAM (MagnetoreSistive Ram) or PRAM (Phase CHANGE RAM) on the internal bus (bath line 240). In addition, set up the first program storage area, MPU231 A part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. A case has been described in which the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read out from the buffer RAM 234c. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 specifies address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after canceling the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has already been set in the buffer RAM 234c or Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the auxiliary production section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. I can do it.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified on the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the auxiliary production section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It may also be provided directly connected to line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to allow direct connection of the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected to the bridge circuit. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may also be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, each of which stores image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected depending on the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port DRAM (with 1 input/output port) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. A type of RAM may also be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time, so for example, while image data is being read from the normal video RAM 236 and drawing an image, data is being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to writing of image data.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured as separate memories, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM can be used as a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided so that the same contents as in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. In addition, when configuring a resident area and a normal area in one RAM, in order to prevent the input/output port of that memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area for read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multiport type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be set as appropriate depending on the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside, image data corresponding to an image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is sent to the third symbol display device 81 at least for permanent use. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made to reside therein, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You can.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the resident video RAM 235 continues to retain its contents without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Even if the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is to be significantly different based on a command received from the good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and continues to be held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it there. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed while the image data is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer data information) to the image controller 237. The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, during the period when image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may also do so.

Furthermore, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transition image is updated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out new image data to be resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receives an instruction from the MPU 231 to transfer the image data to be resident, accesses the character ROM 234, reads new image data to be resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You can do it like this. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM judgment value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when a power outage is resolved is stored, and the power is turned on. During the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, before starting the transfer of main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 at power-on, check the RAM judgment value, If the RAM judgment value is a normal value, it means that the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, so the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to an instantaneous power outage and the MPU 231 starts execution of display main processing or main processing, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. If so, it is possible to prevent image data from being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 unnecessarily, and the time required to recover from a power outage can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by a character ROM 234a with a slow readout speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM judgment value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power outage, the time required to transfer the image data is Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start playing the game. Note that the RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Furthermore, instead of using this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237, but the buffer RAM 237a is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided within the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged can be transferred. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be set to a data capacity that allows the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to be completed. Thereby, image data can be reliably transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. .

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one buffer RAM 237a is provided, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the other buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Furthermore, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area storing the image data is divided into two or more areas. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The processing time can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image. can do. During this time, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235b, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, data from the character ROM 234 is displayed. Image data to be made resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly and processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring the image data corresponding to The image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. This allows image data to be transferred more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is being transferred; The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Good too. In addition, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the main image at power-on and the image data at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are transferred. By displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. This allows image data to be transferred more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button Although a case has been described in which the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the presentation mode of super reach are changed based on the operation command, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and depending on the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state. A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the performance mode of super reach according to the gaming state based on the back image changing command and the gaming state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the performance mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to the changed rear image or at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the changed production mode is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, transfer data table, additional data table, and composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed back image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to transfer data information written in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image based on the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the original back image was stored is The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the new back image is stored in the subarea, and the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored may be defined. Transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in a different area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so the processing by the display control device 114 is unnecessary. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although a case has been described in which the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is inputted to the main control device 110, and the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A vibration error may be detected in the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be sent from the main control device 110 to either the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. You can.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. If a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, thereby confirming that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 284(a)) when it is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to send and receive error commands from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

Further, in the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, a magnetic sensor may be attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Good too. This magnetic sensor is a sensor that detects the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the ball from intentionally entering the ball entrance by changing the flow of the ball due to the magnetic field of a magnet. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be conveyed may be sent from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, when it is determined that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the audio lamp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command indicating the error may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command conveying a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when it is determined that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 or recognizes the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 updates the character ROM 234. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that is resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to create the third symbol to notify the magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by a player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the player of the magnetic field error, thereby preventing the player from acting illegally. It can be suppressed.

When the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all in one production is specified by an additional data table or display data table, in the additional data table or display data table, one The type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time, and the change after the change in that sprite, in correspondence with the address that represents the time that a frame's worth of images are displayed (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) as one unit. It may also define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the color tone after the change in the sprite at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. If color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one performance is defined by a display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type that should be newly displayed, and the new It may also define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 inputs the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, the various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information for that sprite may be included in the drawing list. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image including a new sprite to be displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table includes transfer data information of image data that is necessary when drawing an image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data that is necessary when drawing an image according to the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional performance 1”, “additional performance 2”, etc.) for identifying the effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines the effect to be added and displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as follows.

Thereby, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, according to the drawing list, before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, the effects to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, a wide variety of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, drawing contents corresponding to all the super reaches that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player Although we have explained the case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is specified, this is not necessarily the case, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach can be added to the display data table. You can. Thereby, the drawn content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all super reaches in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data thirds of the display data table from increasing.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information, but the display data table is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an additional effect to be displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to that effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . In addition, the additional data table may specify not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect that should be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table. Compared to the case where drawing contents and transfer data information are respectively specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by a display variation pattern command in the display control device 114, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "Fluctuation start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Notice effect", "Normal reach", and "Super reach", and the display data table is displayed according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, display data tables corresponding to the paper necessary for the specified variable performance are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You can do it like this. "Variation start-up," "high-speed fluctuation," "normal reach," etc. are often displayed in common for each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by dividing the variable performance into elements in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently provide a data table.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. For this purpose, a pointer may be provided.

In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process ends. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that one frame of images is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is sent every time one frame of images is displayed. By sending , you can keep the time interval accurate without having to clock it.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed, and the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. has been described and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the case is not limited to this, and each time the image controller 237 receives a drawing list, the image controller 237 reads out the drawn image and sends it to the third symbol display device 81. may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. In addition, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed and to the third symbol display device 81. It is also possible to replace the frame buffer with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the fixed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demo command (display demo command) is received, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the final display data table corresponding to the final display performance may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In addition, in this case, the final display effect is not executed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time the process ends, the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, the final display performance can be continued to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variable pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect changes the back image and stops displaying the third symbol consisting of the main symbol to which no numbers from "0" to "9" are attached. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Furthermore, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third symbol or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, when the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data to be resident including image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the power-on main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly after the power is turned on, so players, hall personnel, or when checking the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at the factory during manufacturing, etc. You can immediately confirm that the device has started operating without any problems by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command Based on this, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image stored in the power-on variation image area 235b. Note that it is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to more quickly display fluctuations using the power-on fluctuation image.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to a time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and display the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the content to be transferred at that time. Although a case has been described in which image data information (transfer data information) is defined, the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, if the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays images at 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 has a frame rate of 1/30 Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents every 1/30 seconds.

In addition, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval, instead of specifying the sprite type itself, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified. It may also be something that stipulates. In order to read the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 reads the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be displayed in association with each sprite type. Since it is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character ROM 234 and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. Information indicating the sprite type stored in the subarea of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of that sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. The MPU 231 has described a case in which the MPU 231 determines whether the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 and disables the transfer process. The image controller 237 may perform the processing. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be memorized. Further, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. In contrast, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the embodiment described above, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to "back surface A" among a plurality of back images is made to reside in the back surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a back image used in some super reaches may be made to reside in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of a super leech that appears frequently or is expected to appear frequently reside in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines an image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. Information regarding the necessary sprite type is written in the table, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information written at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of that image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer the image to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes over time in the rear surface C, which is the rear image of the "island stage," but even if the color tone of the entire image changes over time, good. In addition, the back image is not only one that scrolls or changes in color tone over time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of the back image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 sends the information of various counters (special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winnings notified to the audio lamp control device 113 to the pending ball number command. Although we have explained the case where it is included, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

In the above embodiment, when executing the variation effect, a case was explained in which a high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at high speed to such an extent that the player cannot see them, but instead of displaying this high-speed variation, , all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size to the extent that they are not visible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the game board 13 is provided with one first starting port 64a for starting a special symbol jackpot lottery when a ball enters the ball, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entry ports, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a ball being held at each first entrance, the number of held balls command that the main controller 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 indicates which first entrance the ball is being held. May contain information. Furthermore, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 when starting the variation may also include information indicating which first ball entry port the variation effect was held on hold for. good. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, a held ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a held ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the held ball number command is If the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decreased by 1, the number of balls held at the first entry port is You can count the number of balls held each time.

In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the number of reserved balls command is issued as the main controller. Although the case where the information is transmitted from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning balls into the first starting port 64a and the passing through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is not limited to four times. , 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls that is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings in the first starting port 64a is displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four areas is changed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. may be configured.

Furthermore, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbols as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81; The display may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 306. In addition to the content explained in connection with the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, in this second control example, an effect is executed to give points to the player, and the points determine the validity determination result of the special symbol. An example of control in a configuration in which the player can select the content of the reach by consuming points owned by the player himself will be mainly explained. Note that descriptions of the same contents as in the first control example will be omitted. In addition, in this second control example, there are some parts where the control processing described in the first control example is deleted, but this is omitted for the sake of convenience, and it is natural that the first control example In addition to all the contents described above, the configuration may be such that the contents of the second control example are added. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

An example of a point acquisition performance and a point consumption performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 291. FIG. 288 is an example of a point acquisition effect. In this control example, the benefits given to the player include points (numerical benefits) as a performance benefit, in addition to prize balls paid out to the player when a game ball enters a jackpot game or a general prize opening, etc. The system is configured so that a point effect is executed in which points are awarded and the awarded points are accumulated.

FIGS. 288(a) and 288(b) are one type of variation pattern determined by the audio lamp control device 113, and show some display modes in a point acquisition effect variation pattern in which the execution of a point acquisition effect is set. It is a diagram. This point acquisition performance variation pattern is a variation pattern determined by lottery based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main controller 110 when the result of the judgment is a hit or miss. In the case of a hit, it is composed of a fluctuating pattern (dynamic display mode) that is displayed with a symbol (the third symbol is a combination of the same aligned eyes) that will ultimately notify you that it is a win, and in the case of a miss. consists of a fluctuating pattern that is displayed with a symbol (the third symbol is a combination of odds other than doubles) that informs you that you are finally out.

FIG. 288(a) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when execution of the point acquisition performance is started in the point acquisition performance variation pattern. This point acquisition performance is set to start in the middle of the execution period (dynamic display period) of the fluctuating pattern, regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss, and the third symbol that was displayed will be hidden or A point acquisition performance displayed semitransparently is displayed in an easily visible state, and together with a tornado display, information values (numerical patterns) indicating a plurality of point values are displayed rotating like a tornado. In the same display area, a hero character is displayed facing a tornado, and a plurality of (for example, four) swords are displayed above the hero's head. In the example of FIG. 288(a), four swords (a1 to a4) are displayed. It is announced that the player can obtain point values by piercing the point values with a sword against a large number of point values displayed while rotating with the tornado. In addition, at the bottom of the display area, the words "GET THE POINTS!!" are displayed, indicating that the player can earn points. It is clearly announced that this is a performance in which it is announced that one of the rotating point values will be awarded to the player. In addition, the total value of the point values currently acquired by the player is displayed at the bottom left of the display area (at the top of the display area Ds of the pending symbol being executed) (in the example of FIG. 288(a), the 500 points).

Figure 288(b) shows that in the point acquisition performance, the swords displayed above the hero's head are shot toward the point value (flying performance is performed), and each sword pierces the point value. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the screen is displayed.

In the example of FIG. 288(b), sword a1 is stuck at a point value of 100 points, sword a2 is stuck at a point value of 20 points, sword a3 is stuck at a point value of 50 points, and sword a4 is stuck at a point value of 70 points. The case is shown. The total point value obtained by the four swords is displayed in the lower part of the display area with the words "240 points GET!!".

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the timing at which points are awarded to the player is mainly during the variation period of the special symbol, and the timing at which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed (variation display period A preview display indicating the lottery result will be displayed in accordance with the period in which the lottery result will be executed before the end of the lottery (from just before the end of the lottery to the time of confirmation). The point value is selected as one of the selection information, and the result of determining the lottery result of the special symbol that has started to fluctuate or the lottery result of the special symbol that has been stored on hold before the fluctuation starts (preread result) is selected as one of the selection information, and the point value is selected and the game The preview effect given to the person is executed.

If the fluctuating display or the stored determination result of the reservation is a hit, a higher point value is more likely to be determined than if it is a loss. As a result, by displaying a preview mode with a high point value, it is possible to make people expect that the lottery result of the special symbol that is changing or the special symbol that has been stored on hold will be a hit, and the fluctuation of the special symbol concerned. In addition to this, it is also possible to make the player play the game with the expectation of winning even with the already stored reserved balls. In other words, the preview display performance that gives the player a point value displayed as a preview display is based on not only the special symbol of the displayed variation, but also the lottery result of the special symbol that is varied and displayed across multiple variations. This is a preview display performance for a longer period of time, and can make the player have expectations corresponding to a longer period preview display performance.

In addition, even if a point value is awarded, but there is no winning result due to the fluctuation or the special symbol lottery result that has been reserved and stored, the awarded point value will be accumulated and will not be awarded later. It can be used for performances using point values (such as performances that select reach mode using point values), and the higher the total value of accumulated points, the higher the expectation of jackpot. The player is configured to be able to select a display mode with a high reach using point values.

As a result, when the reach selection variation pattern that allows the player to select the type of reach display mode using the point value is executed when the total value of accumulated point values is large, the player It is possible to create high expectations for the jackpot game. Therefore, the performance in which point values are given is not only for notifying the player of the change in the special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol that has been reserved and stored, but also for the first prize opening 64. Alternatively, it can be used to notify the results of a future lottery when a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 and a lottery is executed, thereby making it possible for players to expect to win for a longer period of time.

As will be described in detail later, the display data of the point values displayed together with the tornado of the point acquisition effect displayed in FIG. 114, and when the point acquisition effect is displayed by the audio lamp control device 113, swords (a1 to The point value to be pierced in a4) is determined respectively.

In detail, the basic point values at the start timing of fluctuation of the point acquisition performance fluctuation pattern (variation pattern of point consumption performance) are the first basic point value, the second basic point value (low), and the second basic point value (high). ) is determined. At the start of fluctuation, the point value is determined based on the total of the current accumulated point value, the lottery result of the special symbol to be fluctuated (win/fail determination result), and the lottery result of the special symbol that is stored in the reserved memory (winning information). be done.

However, in the configuration of this control example, since the preview performance that gives point values is executed at random timing after the special symbol changes, the cumulative The total value of the point value is increasing, or the pre-reading result of a newly won reserved ball (a new reserved ball memorized by entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640) is increasing. Changes such as hits are occurring. At the timing when the preview performance for giving this point value is executed, it is necessary to determine the current point value and the state of the lottery result again to determine the point value to be given.

Here, in this control example, the point value determined when the point acquisition effect variation pattern is executed includes the first basic point (part of the point value scheduled to be awarded is distributed to one or both of the two swords). , a second basic point (low) which is a point value less than the value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the point value scheduled to be awarded, and a second basic point which is a point value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the point value scheduled to be awarded. By determining the two point values of points (high) and points (high), if the cumulative points have increased by more than the standard value (for example, 500 points or more) at the time of execution of the point acquisition effect than at the time of determination, , a display command indicating the first basic point and the second basic point (low) is output to the display control device 114.

In addition, even if the cumulative point value has increased by more than the standard value since the time of determination, if a hit ball is stored, the first basic point and second basic point (high) will be displayed. A display command is output to the display control device 114.

In this way, since two patterns of point values are determined in advance at the time of determination, it is possible to reduce the control load when executing the point acquisition effect.

Next, point production in this control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291. First, FIG. 289(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when execution of a point acquisition performance with a reserved ball is started in a point acquisition performance variation pattern. In FIG. 289(a), the special symbol is being changed, and the currently acquired total points (900 points in the example of FIG. 289(a)) are displayed in the point display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm. , the currently earned points are notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In the sub-display area, a running symbol m0, a first pending symbol m1, and a second pending symbol m2 are displayed, and a pending ball with 500p written on it is displayed as the second pending symbol m2. There is. In this way, in this control example, as a result of determining the lottery result of the special symbol that is held and stored before the fluctuation starts (pre-reading result), the held ball is used to indicate that a point value will be given to the second fluctuation from the fluctuation. It is possible to notify the player. With this configuration, the player can have a sense of expectation that he or she can obtain point values not only from the result of the fluctuation, but also from the fluctuation of the special symbols that are held and stored. Further, the point awarding performance using the reserved ball is not limited to the reserved ball that is stored in a reserved state, and may be displayed on the currently executed symbol m0. With this configuration, the player can play the game while expecting to earn unexpected points.

FIG. 289(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an effect that allows the player to select a desired reach in the next change by consuming the point value acquired so far.

In the example of FIG. 289(b), the currently acquired point value is displayed in the point display area Dm3 (1800 points in the example of FIG. 289(b)), and using this, the player selects the next change reach. can do. The reach patterns that can be selected this time are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a left option 822e, a middle option 822f, and a right option 822g are displayed. At the top of the main display area Dm, the words "Buy Reach!!" are displayed, clearly informing the player that the player can select the next change in Reach using the current point value. Ru. Further, a cursor ka is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. As will be described in detail later, when the player presses the frame button 22, the displayed cursor ka moves below the options 822e to 822g, and the player places the cursor ka on the desired option and selects it. be able to.

The options 822e to 822g display reach details and required point values, and in the example of FIG. 289(b), the left option 822e is "A reach 500 points" and the middle option 822f is "B reach 800 points". , "SP reach 10,000 points" is displayed on the right option 822g. The player can select the reach based on the displayed content of each option and the current acquired point value displayed in the point display area Dm3. In the example of FIG. 289(b), since the current point value is 1800 points, the player can select "A reach" and "B reach" from the left option 822e.

In this way, by configuring the player to be able to select the next fluctuation pattern according to the current earned point value, the player can have a sense of expectation for the point earning game, and increase the interest of the game. can be increased. In addition, in this control example, like the right option 822g, the reach that cannot be selected with the current point value is also displayed, but it is configured so that only the reach that can be selected with the current point value is displayed. Good too. With this configuration, the player can play the game without feeling disappointed that he or she cannot select the desired reach.

FIG. 290 is a diagram illustrating an example of the performance content in which when the third symbol display device 81 performs a pseudo variation of the special symbol, it can be changed again using points.

In the example of FIG. 290(a), the result of the special symbol missing is temporarily stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. A 7 is displayed on the left symbol Z1 and a 7 is displayed on the right symbol Z3, indicating a reach, but a 4 is stopped on the middle symbol Z2, and the symbol is temporarily stopped with a miss display mode. Then, in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, the words "Re-change using 500 points!!" are displayed, and the player is instructed to re-change the special symbol by using the currently acquired point value. Players are informed that they can do so.

FIG. 290(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the special symbol is changed again from FIG. 290(a) using points. In the main display area Dm, 7 is displayed in a stopped state on the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3, and the middle symbol Z2 is displayed while changing again.

In this way, by setting the point consumption performance even when a pseudo fluctuation is set as a special symbol fluctuation pattern, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of excitement after the symbol fluctuation stops.

FIG. 291 is a diagram showing an example of display content in which a part of the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changed (fixed) using the acquired point value. In FIG. 291(a), symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner. At the top of the main display area Dm, the words "HOLD the left symbol with 3 variations and 7 symbols for 2000 points!!" are displayed in text. In other words, by using 2000 points, the player is clearly informed that the left symbol Z1 will be fixed at 7 symbols that are more likely to win a jackpot with higher expectations during the period from the fluctuation to 3 fluctuations.

FIG. 291(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the left symbol Z1 is fixed at 7. In the main display area Dm, a left symbol Z1 whose symbol is fixed at 7, a medium symbol Z2 and a right symbol Z3 which are changing are displayed. ``2 remaining variations HOLD'' is displayed at the top of the main display area Dm, and the remaining number of variations for which the left symbol Z1 is fixed is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

By configuring in this way, the chances of performing the point performance increase, and the player can have further expectations for the point performance.

<Electrical configuration in second control example>
The electrical configuration in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296. The second control example differs from the first control example in that a point selection table 222ad, a variable point selection table 222ae, and a consumption point selection table 222af are added in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. . The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so their explanation will be omitted.

The point selection table 222ad is a selection table for selecting a point value to be given to a player based on advance notice or the like. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 293 and 294, the selection table is configured so that it can be switched between a state where there is a reserved ball and a state where there is no reserved ball, and a state where there is a reserved ball (see FIG. 293). Here, we will introduce a hold effect (a play that gives points by varying the hold symbol (the point value is displayed inside the hold symbol)), a PUSH effect (a play that displays the point value and is awarded by pressing the frame button 22). ) or character presentation (a presentation in which a character for preview is displayed while the special symbol is changing and the character earns points) is determined by the presentation counter obtained and the point value set in the table is set. be done. For example, if the value of the acquired performance counter is 100, 200pt is determined for the character performance.

In addition, in a state where the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (confirmation timing, etc.), a pending performance is forcibly selected. For example, if the value of the performance counter is 100, a 200pt pending performance is selected.

Next, if there are no reserved balls, a point is selected from the point selection table 222ae shown in FIG. 294. The difference is that the holding effect is not selected in a state where there are no held balls.

The variable point selection table 222ae is a selection table for setting point values set in the point acquisition effect shown in FIG. 288. The variable point selection table is a table for selecting a first basic point (first) and a second basic point (second (low), second (high)). At the start of variation, the first basic point, the second basic point (low), and the second basic point (high) are selected. The first basic point is a point value that is displayed in the performance in any state, and the second basic point value is a high point value depending on the point value held by the player at the actual performance execution timing. A second base point (high) is selected or a second base point (low) having a lower point value is selected. The 2nd basic points (high) will be selected if the points held have not increased by 1000pt or more compared to the time of selection, but if the points have increased by 1000pt or more, the 2nd basic points (low) will be displayed. It is composed of

In this way, by making selections that can be handled even if there is a change in point value at the start of the change, it is possible to reduce the processing load when executing the effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 288(a), the number of points to be given to each sword (a1 to a4) is determined based on the display position table shown in FIG. 295(b). It is determined. When the obtained performance counter is 100, the first basic point value is distributed to sword a4 and sword a3. This distribution is performed so that the point values displayed in FIG. 288(a) fall within the first basic point values selected from possible combinations. For example, if the performance counter is 100 and the pending point value is 300, 60 points are selected as the first basic point value, 60 points as the second basic point (low), and 120 points as the second basic point (high). be done. Further, in the display position table, the first basic point value of 60 points is set to, for example, 40 points for sword a4 and 20 points for sword a3. Here, the display control device has display data of each sword and each point value shown in FIG. 288(a) individually set for each point value as display data, and each sword and each point value data By setting these in correspondence with each other, the point value selected in the variable point selection table is distributed to each sword so that a performance can be executed for the player to obtain.

With this configuration, even if the same first basic point is selected, the point value corresponding to each sword can be made random, allowing for a variety of effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform various point acquisition effects with fewer variation patterns than by setting a plurality of effects of point values that can be obtained for each variation pattern.

The winning consumption point selection table 222g is a selection table for determining the consumption points of each reach in the consumption performance shown in FIG. 289(b) when a change in the winning result is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296(a), the selection is made based on the currently held points and the obtained value of the performance counter.

The loss consumption point selection table 222g is a table for determining the point value to be selected when the fluctuation display of loss is being executed (see FIG. 296(b)). Note that the specific configuration is the same as that of the winning consumption point selection table, so a description thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 304. The control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example is different from the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above, including advance notice setting processing (S2131), special point selection processing (S2132), The difference is that a consumption reach selection process (S2133) is added, and a command determination process 2 (S2134) is executed instead of the command determination process (S2114 in FIG. 258). Regarding other processes, the same parts as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the main processing in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the content of main processing in this second control example. In the main process in the second control example, in contrast to the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 257), after executing the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), the advance notice setting process (S2031), the special point selection process (S2132), consumption reach selection processing (S2133) is added, frame button input monitoring/production processing 2 (S2130) is replaced with frame button input monitoring/production processing (S2107), and command judgment processing (S2114) is replaced with There is a difference in command determination processing 2 (S2134). Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, command determination processing 2 (S2134) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S2134) in this second control example. In command determination processing 2 (S2134) in the second control example, when it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation pattern reception The difference is that processing 2 (S2220) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 299, variation pattern reception processing 2 (S2220) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern reception processing 2 (S2220) in this second control example. Variation pattern reception processing 2 (S2220) in the second control example determines whether or not the variation pattern command received this time is a point acquisition effect, in contrast to the variation pattern reception processing (S2202) in the first control example. The difference is that selection processing is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the fluctuation pattern reception processing 2 (S2220), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2221), and a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received this time and the value of the fluctuation pattern selection counter 223aa ( S2222). Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern determined in the process of S2222 is a point acquisition effect (S2223). If it is determined that the determined variation pattern is a point acquisition effect (S2223: Yes), point selection processing is executed (S2224), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined variation pattern is not a point acquisition effect (S2223: No), the process is immediately ended.

Next, the point selection process (S2224), which is one process of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 300. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the contents of the point selection process (S2224).

In the point selection process (S2224), the value of the point storage area 223ab is first obtained (S2321), and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern determined this time is a hit (S2322). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern determined this time is a win (S2322: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information is a win (S2323). If it is determined that there is a hit in the winning information (S2323: Yes), a no-point effect is set (S2324), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2322, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a win (that is, it is a loss) (S2322: No), or if it is determined that the received winning information is not a win ( S2323: No), a basic point is selected from the variable point selection table 222ae based on the current point and set in the first basic point setting area (S2325). Then, based on the current point value, a point value is selected from the second basic point selection table 222ae2, and the current point value and the selected point value are set in the second basic point setting area (S2326), and this process end.

Next, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (S2130) in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 301. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (S2130) in this second control example. In the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 2 (S2130) in the second control example, when it is determined that a variable pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes) with respect to the command determination process (S2114) in the first control example, , is different in that it executes operation processing related to point selection and determination.

In frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (S2130), first, it is determined whether the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the button operation is valid (S2421). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2421: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2421, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S2421: No), the value of the operation valid timer 223n is subtracted (S2422), and then the value of the operation valid timer 223n is subtracted in the process of S2422. It is determined whether the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S2423). If it is determined that the subtracted value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S2423: Yes), a display command indicating the ready-to-reach content corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2424), and the process moves to S2425. On the other hand, in the process of S2423, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S2423: No), the process of S2424 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2425.

After executing the process of S2423 or S2425, it is determined whether a selection operation has been executed (S2425). If it is determined that a selection operation has been performed (S2425: Yes), information corresponding to the operation is stored in the cursor position storage area 223ac (S2426), a display command corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2427), This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2425 that a selection operation has not been performed (S2425: No), it is determined whether a determination operation has been performed (S2428). If it is determined that the determination operation has been executed (S2428: Yes), a reach command for displaying the reach content determined in the process of S2428 is set (S2429), and points corresponding to the determined reach content are subtracted. (S2430), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2428 that the determination operation has been executed (S2428: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, the contents of the advance notice setting process (S2131) will be explained with reference to FIG. 302. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the advance notice setting process (S2131). The advance notice setting process (S2131) is one process in the main process (FIG. 297) in this second control example, and is a process for selecting the point value of the point performance from the point selection table 222ad when the special symbol is changing. executed.

In the advance notice setting process (S2131), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S2511). If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S2511: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2511 that the special symbol is changing (S2511: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the preview performance (S2512). If it is determined that it is within the execution period of the preview performance (S2512: Yes), the value of the performance counter 223ad is acquired (S2513), and based on the value of the performance counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2513, the point selection table is A point value is selected from 222ad (S2514), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2512 that it is not within the period in which advance notice can be executed (S2512: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved pitches is greater than 0 (S2515). If it is determined that the number of suspended balls is greater than 0 (S2515: Yes), the value of the performance counter 223ad is acquired (S2516) because it is the period in which the suspended performance can be executed. Based on the value of , points for the pending effect are selected from the point selection table 222ad (S2517), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2515 that the number of reserved pitches is 0 (S2515: No), it is determined that advance notice cannot be set, and this process is directly ended.

Next, the contents of the special point selection process (S2132) will be explained with reference to FIG. 303. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special point selection process (S2132).

In the special point selection process (S2132), first, it is determined whether or not the point effect is being fluctuated (S2611). If it is determined that the change is not a change in which a point effect is executed (S2611: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2611, it is determined whether it is time to set points (S2612). If it is determined that it is not the timing to set points (S2612: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the timing to set points (S2612: Yes), it is determined whether the current point performance is a performance to set 0 points (S2613). If it is determined that the current point is an effect that sets 0 points (S2613: Yes), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2613 that the current performance is not a performance that sets 0 points (S2613: No), the process moves to S2614.

After executing the process of S2613, it is next determined whether there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614). If it is determined that there is a win in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614: Yes), a display command indicating the high points in the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area is set (S2615), and the book is displayed. Finish the process. On the other hand, in the process of S2614, if it is determined that there is no win in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614: No), it is determined whether the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is 1000 points or more (S2616). If it is determined that the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is 1000 points or more (S2616: Yes), the process of S2615 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, if it is determined that the difference between the points to be acquired this time and the current points is not 1000 points or more (S2616: No), the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area are A display command indicating the low point of is set (S2617), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 304, the content of the consumption reach selection process (S2133) will be explained. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the content of the consumption reach selection process (S2133).

In the consumption reach selection process (S2133), first, it is determined whether consumption reach is executable (S2711). If it is determined that the consumption reach is not executable (S2711: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that consumption reach is executable (S2711: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to select reach data (S2712). If it is determined that it is not the timing to select the reach data (S2712: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the reach data selection timing (S2712: Yes), the process moves to S2713.

In the process of S2713, it is determined whether the current variation is a winning variation pattern (S2713). If it is determined that the current change is a win (S2713: Yes), consumption points are set based on the current number of points from the winning consumption point selection table 222af (S2714), and the process moves to S2717. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2713 that the current fluctuation is not a winning fluctuation pattern (that is, it is a miss), it is determined whether the current point is greater than or equal to the set value (S2715). If it is determined that the current point is not greater than or equal to the set value (S2715: No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2715 that the current points are equal to or greater than the set value (S2715: Yes), consumption points are set based on the current number of points from the loss consumption point selection table 222af (S2716 ), the process moves to S2717. In the process of S2717, a display reach selection command corresponding to the selected reach effect in which the selected consumption points are set is set (S2717), and this process ends.

<About the control process of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 and 306. In the processing in the display control device 114 in the second control example, the V-interrupt processing is replaced with the V-interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)) with respect to the processing in the display control device 114 in the first control example. 2 (see FIG. 305), and command determination processing 2 (S6311 in FIG. 306) is executed instead of command determination processing (S6302 in FIG. 277). Regarding other processes, the same parts as in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, V interrupt processing 2 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 305. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of V interrupt processing 2. The V interrupt processing 2 in this second control example differs in that command judgment processing 2 (S6311) is executed instead of command judgment processing (S6302). Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306, command determination processing 2 (S6311) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S6311).

In the command determination process 2 (S6311) in this second control example, if it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no preview display command for the current display (S6408: No), it is determined whether there is a point command for display. (S6421). If it is determined that there is a display point command (S6421: Yes), the point command received this time is set in the display point storage area (S6422), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, in the process of S6421, if it is determined that there is no display point command (S6421: No), it is determined whether there is a display performance point command (S6423). If it is determined that there is a display performance point command (S6423: Yes), point display processing (S6424) is executed, and the process returns to S6401.

On the other hand, in the process of S6423, if it is determined that there is no display production point command (S6423: No), it is determined whether there is a display reach command (S6425). If it is determined that there is a reach command for display (S6425: Yes), a reach display data table corresponding to the command received this time is set (S6426), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6425 that there is no reach command for display (S6425: No), it is determined whether there is a reach selection command for display (S6427), and if it is determined that there is a reach selection command for display (S6427: Yes), a display data table of the corresponding selected reach is set (S6428), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display reach selection command (S6427: No), the process moves to S6418.

<About the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 319. In this second control example, control in the above-mentioned lower displacement unit 400 will be explained. It should be noted that the above-described first control example and second control example may of course be combined into the present third control example, but for the sake of convenience, illustrations of some of the first control example and second control example will be omitted in the description. .

In this third control example, operation control of the lower displacement unit 400 and control in a configuration in which game balls are ejected from the emission opening 400 will be described. Note that the description of the same contents as in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<About the configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example>
FIG. 307 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example, and is substantially the same as FIG. 66 described above, but a storage sensor SP5 is added. The storage sensor SP5 is configured to be able to detect whether a game ball has entered the ball receiver 467 as well as detect that a game ball has entered from the opening 451a. Furthermore, since both tips of the ball receiving portion 467 are arranged at positions where they can be detected, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 can also be detected.

As a method for detecting the position of the ball receiver, when moving the movable rack 464 from the origin position toward the exit opening 471, the tip of the ball receiver 467 is detected by the storage sensor SP5, and then the rear ball is detected. The tip of the receiving portion 467 is detected. In this case, the slide motor is driven 10 steps from the state in which the front side storage sensor SP5 is turned on, and then the stop control is performed to bring it to the ball receiving position (the position shown in Figure 307(b)). It can be moved so that the ball receiving part 467 is positioned.

Furthermore, after the storage sensor detects the front end of the ball receiving part 467, if the storage sensor is turned on 20 steps before the slide motor KM2 is driven, the game ball is held in the ball receiving part 467 ( It can be determined that the game ball is in the ball receiving portion 467. Also, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the firing position (the position shown in FIG. 307(c)) to the origin position (the position shown in FIG. 307(a)), the tip of the rear side Although the storage sensor SP5 detects the ball receiving portion 467 first, the method for detecting the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is the same.

Note that the storage sensor SP5 is composed of a reflective laser output sensor, and the laser light output from the storage sensor SP5 to the front is blocked and the laser light reflected by the detection part of the storage sensor SP5 is detected ( (on state) sensor.

Therefore, the storage sensor SP5 not only detects that a game ball has entered the opening 451a, but also detects the state in which a game ball has entered the ball receiving part 467, detects the position of the ball receiving part 467, and detects the movement of the ball receiving part 467. The position of rack 464 can also be detected.

In the initial state (at the end of the initial operation after turning on the power), the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position shown in FIG. 307(a). As already explained with reference to FIG. 81, at the origin position, the abutting plate 464c rotates the bulging portion 543a in the rearward direction to prevent game balls from being sorted into the opening 451a. By moving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the ball receiving position (see FIG. 307(b)), the bulging portion 543a rotates forward, and game balls are distributed to the opening 451a. Here, the time required for the movable rack 363 to move to the ball receiving position is the time required for the distribution member 540 to rotate and distribute the game balls toward the opening 451a until the game balls reach the opening 451a. It is constructed so that it can be moved in a shorter time than the Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem in which a game ball enters the ball before the ball receiving part 467 moves to the ball receiving position and the game ball cannot be received in the ball receiving part 467.

When the game ball is received in the ball receiving part 467, the movable rack 464 is moved to the original position in the received state, and then the tilting motor KM1 of the lower displacement unit 400 is driven to move the lower displacement unit 400 to the first position. It is rotated so as to rise to the fully extended state (see FIG. 48). As a result, the lower displacement unit is driven upward with the ball bearing portion 467 disposed on the rotating shaft side of the lower displacement unit 400, and the driving force required for upward movement can be reduced. load can be reduced.

When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state, the lower displacement unit 400 is driven upward by the player's operation of the frame button 22. This drive is stopped when the slide motor KM2 is driven 30 steps, and then when the frame button 22 is operated, the 30 step slide motor KM2 is driven to drive the downward displacement unit 400. At this time, as well as driving 30 steps, it is determined whether the lower displacement unit 400 is detected in the first extended state position by the ascending position sensor (detected as on). It is configured to be stopped according to the timing. Further, in a state where the ascending position sensor is not turned on even after driving 30 steps, the slide motor KM2 is further driven until the ascending position sensor is turned on. Note that if the raised position sensor does not turn on even after driving 15 steps, the lower displacement unit 400 is stopped at the position raised by 15 steps. In this way, it is possible to determine that there is clearly a problem in which the elevated position sensor is not turned on, and to play the game by switching to control only based on the number of steps. In this case, it may be configured to notify the error using a lamp, display, external terminal, or the like.

When the ending at the time of a jackpot is set, the lower displacement unit is moved to the raised position, and then the movable rack 464 is moved toward the firing position, and the game ball held in the ball receiver 467 is sent to the exit opening 471. To launch more game balls. The firing timing is the timing when the player operates the frame button 22, and if the frame button 22 is not operated even after the valid time of the frame button 22 has elapsed, the firing operation is automatically executed. .

When the power is turned on, the initial operation described below is also executed in the lower variable unit 400. If a small win or jackpot C is being executed in a state where the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the small win or jackpot C that was being executed is restored to the state at the time of the power cut and restarted. 3. The electric accessories are in an open state. In that case, the game ball enters the third electric accessory before the initial operation of the lower variable unit 400 executed by the audio lamp control device 113 is completed, and the game ball enters the lower variable unit 400. There is a risk of it flowing down.

In that case, a game ball enters from the opening 451a of the lower variable unit 400 and the game ball enters the ball receiving part 467, or a game ball enters from the opening 451a and the lower variable unit 400 There is a problem in which a game ball enters the ball (see FIG. 67(c)). However, in this third control example, a command (payout command or winning production (payout prize In order to execute the command for displaying the value corresponding to the number of pitches on the third symbol display device 81, upon receiving ), monitoring of the storage sensor SP5 is started, and after the initial operation is completed, the ending command, 2 after receiving either a fluctuation pattern command or a customer waiting command (command output from the main controller 110 when fluctuation is not executed for a certain period of time or when neither fluctuation nor firing handle is operated for a certain period of time) Monitoring is performed to see if the storage sensor SP5 is on (identifying whether it is on at every interval (for example, 4 ms) in which a game ball can pass) until the second elapses.

With this configuration, even during the period when the third electric accessory is opened due to the timing when the initial operation is executed, the storage sensor is activated during the period when the game ball can enter the opening 451a. SP5 can be monitored, and whether the game ball has entered the lower variable unit 400 can be monitored. If the storage sensor SP5 is monitored and the passing of a game ball is detected, one of the ending command (command output at the end of the jackpot game), fluctuation pattern command, and customer waiting command is output. In the operation of ejecting the game ball from the lower variable unit 400 at the timing when seconds have elapsed, the ejecting operation (after the movement of the operation rack 464 to the firing position with the rotation of the lower variable unit 400 at the origin position, An operation in which the game balls ejected from the output opening 471 of the lower variable unit 400 are collected from the collection port 411f (see FIG. 43) is performed.

As a result, even if a game ball is guided into the lower variable unit 400 during the initial operation, the ejection operation is performed after the game ball does not enter the lower variable unit 400.

Executing the ejecting operation two seconds after each of the above commands is because the movable rack 464 moves from the firing position to the origin position, and the sorting member 540 moves the game balls to the lower variable unit 400. The elapsed time of 2 seconds is set in consideration of the period from when the game ball is not distributed until the game ball reaches the opening 451a (the last game ball distributed).

In addition, when the above-mentioned command output from the main controller 110 based on the ball entering the third electric accessory is received during the period when the initial operation is being executed, the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is turned on. The configuration is such that the selection of an effect (variation pattern) for tilting the lower variable unit 400 is prohibited until the ejection operation is completed, and its execution is prohibited. That is, the performance using the lower variable unit 400 is prohibited until the variation after the ejection operation is completed.

On the other hand, if the command is received but the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not turned on (that is, OFF), one of the ending command (command output at the end of the jackpot game), fluctuation pattern command, and customer waiting command is sent. Monitoring of the storage sensor SP5 is executed until the monitoring period of 2 seconds has elapsed since the reception of configured to prohibit.

With this configuration, the lower variable unit 400 is configured not to tilt when the game ball accidentally enters the lower variable unit 400 due to the initial operation, so the game ball does not enter the lower variable unit 400. It is possible to suppress the problem of damage due to excessive load being applied to the tilting motor KM1 due to the tilting operation in the state in which the ball enters the ball.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
In the third control example, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores initial operation data 222ba, firing operation data 222bb, origin operation data 222bc, ejection operation data 222bd, first operation data 222be, and the like in the ROM 222 of the first control example. Second operation data 222bf is added. The other points are the same as the first control example, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The initial operation data 222ba is movable data that is set to execute the initial operation of the lower variable unit 400, which is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, the type of motor to be driven, the driving direction, and the conditions for stopping the motor are set for each operation status. The operation status is set in the initial operation setting process (S2021, see FIG. 312) executed in the startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the power is turned on, and the operation status changes from the initial value 0. It is started, incremented by 1, and the drive corresponding to the operation status is executed. Each time the execution is completed, the operation status is incremented and necessary initial operations are executed in order. Regarding the drive direction set in the initial operation data 222ba, the + direction of the slide motor is the direction in which the motor is driven in the direction of moving the movable rack 464 from the origin position toward the firing position, and the + direction of the tilting motor is , which is a direction in which the lower variable unit 400 is rotated from the origin position (the retracted position sensor is on) toward the first extended state.

The firing operation data 222bb is operation data for driving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the firing position and firing the game ball from the output opening 471. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310(a), the data includes data for driving the slide motor in the + direction until the firing position sensor is turned on.

The origin movement data 222bc is movement data for returning to the origin for moving the movable rack 464 and the lower variable unit 400 to the origin position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310(b), after the game ball is launched from the exit opening 471, the origin position sensor is turned on so that the slide motor is driven in the - direction (toward the origin position). and drive the tilting motor in the - direction (toward the retracted position (origin position)) until the retracted position sensor is turned on.

Further, when the lower variable unit 400 is in the retracted position (origin position) and the ejecting operation is performed by operating the movable rack 464, the setting of the movable data in the tilting motor is not executed.

The ejection operation data 222bd is operation data for ejecting the game ball that has entered the lower variable unit 400, and the same data as the ejection operation data 222bb is set.

The first operation data is operation data for receiving a game ball in the ball receiving part 467 with the lower variable unit 400 in the retracted position, and after moving the movable unit 464 from the origin position to the ball receiving position, This is drive data for moving to a certain position (see FIG. 311(a)).

The second operation data 222bc indicates that after the lower variable unit 400 is moved to the raised position (first extended state) and raised by 30 steps based on the operation of the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is operated next. This is data for executing a stirring operation (swinging operation) to lower the vehicle until the upward sensor turns on. In addition, a display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and in the production of firing a game ball from the output opening 471 of the lower displacement unit 400, the lower displacement unit 400 is operated. The display mode imitated by the lower displacement unit can be changed to the first extended state without changing the display mode, and the display mode can be used to display an effect in which game balls are fired. Furthermore, when performing a rocking effect on the lower displacement unit 400, the lower displacement unit 400 is varied to the first extended state; The lower displacement unit 400 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. A simulated display mode can be displayed and the display mode and the lower displacement unit 400 can be combined to create a rocking effect. Here, the audio lamp control device 113 is equipped with an RTC that can measure the date and time, and after a certain period of time (for example, one year, etc.) the lower displacement unit 400 does not perform the rocking effect. By switching to the rocking effect that is combined with the display mode, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement unit 400 from moving beyond its durability and causing the lower displacement unit 400 to break down. In addition, when a failure is detected in which the lower displacement unit 400 does not operate even if the operation data is set, instead of the effect that the lower displacement unit 400 operates, a display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 is variably displayed and substituted. You may also do so.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 319. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example is different from the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above, including an initial operation setting process (S2071) and an initial discharge operation setting process (S2140). ) and operation control processing (S2112) are added. Specifically, processing for controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 and processing for checking the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 at the time of start-up processing are added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 312, the initial operation setting process (S2071), which is one process of the start-up process in the third control example, will be described. FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial operation setting process (S2071). The initial operation setting process (S2071) is a process for checking the operation details of the lower displacement unit 400 during the start-up process.

In the initial operation setting process (S2071), first, it is determined whether the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031). If it is determined that the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not on (S2031: No), it is determined whether the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032). If it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032: Yes), the operation prohibition counter 223bk is set to 2 (S2033), the savings sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to ON (S2034), and the process of S2038 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S2032, if it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has not been received (S2032), the process of S2033 to S2034 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2038.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, if it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031: Yes), it is determined whether the bulb discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035). If it is determined that the bulb discharge flag 223bj is not "ON" (S2035: No), the bulb discharge flag 223bj is set to ON (S2036), the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to OFF (S2037), and the process in S2038 is performed. Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2035, if it is determined that the ball ejection flag 223bj is on (S2035: Yes), the process of S2036 to S2037 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2038.

In the process of S2038, it is determined whether the ball ejecting operation has been completed or whether the value of the operation status stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. If it is determined that the ball ejection operation is not completed (S2038: No), the processes of S2031 to S2037 are repeatedly executed until the operation is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation has been completed (S2038: Yes), it is determined whether the operation status is set to 5 (S2039). If it is determined that 5 is not set in the operation status (S2039: No), +1 is set in the operation status (S2040), the corresponding operation data is set (S2041), and the operation status is set based on the final display data table. The time data is set in the time counter (S2042), and the process returns to S2031. On the other hand, in the process of S2039, if it is determined that the operation status is 5 (S2039: Yes), the operation status is reset (S2043) and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the main processing in this third control example, after executing the same processing as S2101 to S2111 of the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 257), initial discharge operation setting processing (S2140) and operation control processing (S2141) are performed. The difference is that the following is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 313) in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 314. FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140).

In the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), first, it is determined whether the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901). If it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not on (S3901: No), since no balls are stored in the ball receiving unit 455, this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223bl is greater than 0 (S3902). If it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not larger than 0 (ie, 0) (S3902: No), it is determined whether the bulb ejection flag 223bj is on (S3903). If it is determined that the bulb discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3903: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S3904). If it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3904: Yes), the bulb discharge flag 223bj is set on (S3905), and the process moves to S3906. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3903 that the bulb discharge flag 223bj is on (S3903: Yes), or if it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the process of S3904 (S3904: No), The process of S3905 is skipped and the process moves to S3906.

In the process of S3906, it is determined whether any of the jackpot ending command, variation pattern command, and customer waiting command has been received (S3906). If it is determined that the jackpot ending command, variable pattern command, or customer waiting command has been received (S3906: Yes), the value of the waiting counter corresponding to 2 seconds is set (S3907), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the jackpot ending command, variable pattern command, or customer waiting command has been received (S3906: No), the process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is greater than 0 (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether the bulb ejection flag 223bj is on (S3908). If it is determined that the bulb discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3908: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S3909). If it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3909: Yes), the bulb discharge flag 223bj is set on (S3910), and the process moves to S3911. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3908 that the bulb discharge flag 223bj is on (S3908: Yes), or if it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the process of S3904 (S3909: No), The process of S3910 is skipped and the process moves to S3911.

In the process of S3911, the value of the standby counter 223bl is subtracted by 1 (S3911). Next, it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223bl subtracted in the process of S3911 is 0 (S3912). If it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is 0 (S3912: Yes), it is determined whether the bulb ejection flag 223bj is on (S3913). If it is determined that the ball ejecting flag 223bj is on (S3913: Yes), ejecting operation data is set (S3914), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3912, if it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S3912: No), or in the process of S3913, it is determined that the bulb ejection flag 223bj is not on. If it is determined (S3913: No), this process is immediately ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the operation control process (S2141), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 313) in the third control example, will be described. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation control process (S2141). In this operation control process (S2141), a process for controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 is executed according to the gaming state.

In the operation control process (S2141), first, it is determined whether the small winning medium flag 223ac or the large winning medium flag 223ab is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is a small winning or a big winning (S4001). If it is determined that the small hit medium flag 223ab or the large hit medium flag 223ab is on, the first operation setting process is executed (S4002), and the present process ends.

Here, the first operation setting process (S4002), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be explained with reference to FIG. 316. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first operation setting process (S4002). In this first operation setting process (S4002), a process for controlling the operation of the ball receiving unit 445 is executed when the gaming state is a small win or a jackpot.

In the first operation setting process (S4002), first, it is determined whether the operation status is 0 (S4101). Specifically, it is determined whether the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0 or not. If it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4101: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4102), and the operation data is set in the ball receiving unit 445 (S4103). The operation status 1 is defined in the first operation data 222be (see FIG. 310(a)), and when the operation status is set to 1, the slide motor KM is driven and driven in the plus direction from the origin position. Then, when the first sensor is turned on, it stops. By driving in this way, it is possible to drive the ball that has flowed in from the third prize opening 82 to a position where the ball receiving portion 467 can receive it.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4101 that the operational status is not 0, it is determined whether the operational status is 1 (S4104). If it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4104: Yes), it is determined whether the second position sensor is on (S4105). If it is determined that the second position sensor is not on (S4105: No), the ball receiving unit 445 has not been driven to the second position, so the process skips S4106 to S4107 and moves to the process of S4108. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the second position sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4106), and the operation data is set (S4107). In operation status 2, standby is set until the ball is stored in the ball receiving part 467 from the third prize opening 82.

On the other hand, in the process of S4104, if it is determined that the operational status is not 1, it is determined whether the operational status is 2 (S4108). If it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4108: Yes), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S4109). If it is determined that the storage sensor is not on (S4109), since the balls that entered from the third prize opening 82 are not stored, the process of S4110 to S4111 is skipped and the process of S4112 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4109, if it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S4109: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4110), the operation data is set (S4111), and the process moves to S4112. do. In operation status 3, when a ball is stored in the ball receiving part 467 from the third winning hole 82, the slide motor is driven in the negative direction. Then, when the origin sensor is set to on, it stops. In other words, once the ball receiving unit 445 stores the ball from the third winning port 82, it is controlled to once return to the original position. Then, the balls stored in the ejection operation setting process (S4004) and firing operation setting process (S4008), which will be described later, are ejected.

On the other hand, in the process of S4108, if it is determined that the operational status is not 2 (S4108: No), it is determined whether the operational status is 3 (S4112). If it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4112: Yes), it is determined whether the origin sensor is on (S4113). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4113: Yes), the operation status is reset (S4114) and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4001, if it is determined that the small winning medium flag 223bb or the large winning medium flag 223ba is not on (S4001: No), it is determined whether the small winning ending flag 223bd is set on (S4003). . If it is determined that the small winning ending flag 223bd is on (S4003: Yes), the discharge operation setting process (S4004) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, the discharge operation setting process (S4004), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be explained with reference to FIG. 317. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the contents of the discharge operation setting process (S4004). In this discharge operation setting process (S4004), a process for controlling the operation of discharging the ball from the ball receiving unit 445 at the timing of the ending of the small win is executed.

In the discharge operation setting process (S4004), first, it is determined whether the origin operation flag 223bh is on. If it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is not on (S4201: No), discharge operation data is set (S4202). Then, it is determined whether the firing position sensor is set to on (S4203). If it is determined that the firing position sensor is off (S4203: Yes), the origin operation data is set (S4204), the origin operation flag 223bh is set on (S4205), and the process moves to S4206. On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is off (S4201: No), the process of S4201 to S4205 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4206.

Next, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on (S4206). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4206: Yes), the origin operation flag is set to OFF (S4207), the small hit ending flag 223bd is set to OFF (S4208), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4206, if it is determined that the origin sensor is not on (S4206: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4003, if it is determined that the small winning ending flag 223bd is off (S4003: No), it is determined whether the round of the jackpot is the 8th round (S4005). If it is determined that the jackpot round is the 8th round (S4005: Yes), the second operation setting process (S4006) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, the second operation setting process (S4006), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be explained with reference to FIG. 318. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second operation setting process (S4006). This second operation setting process (S4006) is for raising the lower displacement unit 400 to the firing position in the 8th round of the jackpot and executing an up and down stirring effect when the player presses the frame button 22. This is control processing.

In the second operation setting process (S4006), first, it is determined whether the operation status is 0 (S4301). Specifically, it is determined whether the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0 or not. If it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4301: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4302), and the operation data is set in the lower displacement unit 400 (S4303). The operation status 1 is defined in the second operation data 222bf (see FIG. 310(b)), and when the operation status is set to 1, the tilting motor is driven and driven in the positive direction from the origin position. Then, when the rise sensor is set to on, it stops.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the operational status is not 0 (S4301: No), it is determined whether the operational status is 1 (S4304). If it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4304: Yes), it is determined whether the rise sensor is on (S4305). If it is determined that the ascending sensor is not on (S4305: No), the lower displacement unit 400 has not been driven to the first position, so the processes of S4306 to S4307 are skipped and the process moves to the process of S4308. On the other hand, if it is determined that the rise sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4306), and the operation data is set (S4307).

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the operational status is not 1 (S4304: No), it is determined whether the operational status is 2 (S4308). If it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4308: Yes), it is determined whether the rise sensor is on (S4309). If it is determined that the ascending sensor is not on (S4309), the lower displacement unit 400 is in a standby state at the origin position, so the processes of S4310 to S4312 are skipped and the process moves to the process of S4313. On the other hand, in the process of S4308, if it is determined that the rise sensor is on (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4310: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4310: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4311), the operation data is set (S4312), and the process moves to S4313. In operation status 3, when a ball is stored in the ball receiving part 467 from the third prize opening 82, the tilting motor is driven in the plus direction. Then, when the lower displacement unit 400 is set to rise by 30 steps, it stops.

On the other hand, in the process of S4308, if it is determined that the operation status is not 2 (S4308: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 3 (S4313). If it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4313: Yes), it is determined whether the lower displacement unit 400 has moved up by 30 steps (S4314). If it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has moved up by 30 steps (S4314: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has moved up by 30 steps (S4314: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4315: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4315 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315: Yes), the operation status is set to 2 (S4316), the operation data is set (S4317), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4005, if it is determined that there is no 8th round of jackpot (S4005: No), it is determined whether the jackpot ending flag 223bc is set (S4007). If it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is on (S4007: Yes), firing operation setting processing (S4008) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is not on (S4007: No), the process is immediately ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 318, the firing operation setting process (S4008), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be explained. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the firing operation setting process (S4008). This firing operation setting process (S4008) executes a process for causing the ball stored in the first operation setting process (S4002) to be fired from the lower displacement unit 400 at the ending of the jackpot.

In the firing operation setting process (S4008), first, it is determined whether the ascending sensor is on (S4401). If it is determined that the ascending sensor is not on (S4401: No), 30 descending steps data is set (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, if it is determined that the rise sensor is on (S4401: Yes), it is determined whether the firing performance flag 223be is on, that is, whether the firing performance is set (S4403). If it is determined that the firing effect flag 223be is not on (S4403: No), the firing effect is not set, so the firing effect flag 223be is set to ON (S4404), and the firing effect is set (S4405). , the process moves to S4411.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the firing effect flag 223be is on (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (S4406). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (S4406: Yes), the process of S4407 to S4410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4411. If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4406: No), a firing effect is set (S4407), and the firing effect flag 223be is set to OFF (S4408). Next, the firing operation data is set (S4409), the firing performance operation flag 223bg is set to ON (S4410), and the process moves to S4411.

In the process of S4411, it is determined whether the firing position sensor is on (S4411). If it is determined that the firing position sensor is on (S4411: Yes), in order to return the lower displacement unit 400 to the origin position, origin operation data is set (S4412) and the origin operation flag 223bh is set to on. (S4413), the process moves to S4414. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, if it is determined that the firing position sensor is off (S4411: No), the lower displacement unit 400 is not in the firing position, so the processes of S4412 and S4413 are skipped, and the process of S4414 is performed. Transition.

After executing the process of S4411 or S4413, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on, that is, whether the lower displacement unit 400 is at the origin position (S4414). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4414: Yes), the jackpot ending flag 223bc is set to OFF (S4415), the origin operation flag 223bh is set to OFF (S4416), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4414, if it is determined that the origin sensor is not on (S4414: No), this process ends.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 320 to 351. This fourth control example differs from the first control example in that the configuration of the game board 13 is changed, the control content of the main controller 110 is changed, and the control content of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. There are differences in the changes made. Note that the same elements as in the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The major differences between this fourth control example and the first control example described above will be briefly explained. In the first control example described above, the control process of the main control device 110 is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not dynamically displayed at the same time (in parallel). The fourth control example differs greatly in that the control process is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are dynamically displayed simultaneously (in parallel).

In addition, in the first control example described above, the pseudo jackpot performance using the pseudo attacker 165 was executed while the jackpot game was being executed, whereas in the fourth control example, , is largely different in that when a potential state is set as a gaming state, a pseudo jackpot effect using a pseudo attacker 165 is executed. Furthermore, there is a big difference in that the contents of the pseudo jackpot effects are different.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 320 and 321. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example has a lower first ball entrance 64D in the lower area of the game board 13, unlike the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. , a lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first ball entrance 64D is provided, and a second variable winning device 650 (second specific winning opening 650a) is provided below the lower first winning opening 64D. The difference is that a special winning device 1550 is provided in the right side area of the game board 13 in place of the special winning device 550.

The lower first ball entry opening 64D is in a state where it is difficult for a ball to enter the lower electric accessory 64Da, which is variably controlled from a closed position where it is difficult for a ball to enter to an open position when a winning result is won by drawing a normal symbol. This is a ball entry means that can set a state in which the ball enters easily. When a ball enters the lower first ball entry port 64Da, the same process as when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 is executed.

The lower first ball entry port 64D is arranged in a location that is less visible to the player than the first ball entry port 64, and is configured in a shape that is less visible to the player than the first ball entry port 64. The player is configured not to be informed that the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64D. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing he acquired the lottery right for the special drawing 1. In this control example, the lower first ball entry port 64D is provided directly below the first ball entry port 64, and among the balls fired aiming at the first ball entry port 64, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. By configuring the ball so that the ball that did not play can enter the lower first ball entry hole 64D, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the lower first winning hole 64D without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. However, the arrangement position of the lower first ball entry hole 64D is not limited to this, and it may be provided above the first ball entry hole 64, or may be provided near the general winning hole 63 to make it less noticeable. .

The second variable winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a specific jackpot is won in the lottery of the special drawing 1, and by opening the opening/closing door 650f1, it becomes an open state in which it is easy to win a ball, and the opening/closing door By closing 650f1, the operation is controlled so that the ball is in a closed state where it is difficult to win a prize. In this control example, when winning a jackpot in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, a jackpot game is executed in which only a small amount (approximately 40 prize balls) are awarded. Therefore, the winning of a jackpot in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is not a jackpot aimed at in order to win a prize ball, but is intended to cause the player to shift to an advantageous gaming state (in this control example, a potential state). It will be a big hit. In this way, even if it is a jackpot in which the number of prize balls awarded to the player is small due to one jackpot win, if a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot is over, the jackpot game (Winning a jackpot) gives advantageous benefits to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 321, details of the special winning device 1550 provided in the fourth control example in place of the special winning device 550 in the first control example described above will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special prize winning device 1550. As shown in FIG. 208, the special winning device 1550 in the fourth control example is different from the special winning device 550 in the first control example at the position where the specific general winning opening 163 was arranged (in front of the specific out opening 166). A second ball entry port 640 is provided on the left side of the screen, a pseudo through gate 1167 is provided above the second ball entry port 640, and a pseudo second ball entry port 640 is provided above the production channel 691. The ball opening 1640 is provided on the upstream side of the guiding channel 690 (around the general ball throwing section 690a), and the game ball is allowed to flow down into a channel different from the guiding channel 690 (pseudo second ball entrance 1640). A branching part 694a is provided that branches into a second guiding channel 694) for causing the game balls that have reached the branching part 694a to flow down into the guiding channel 690 or to the second guiding channel 694. The difference is that a flow path switching member 695 is provided to switch between flowing and flowing down. In addition, as the second ball entrance hole 640 was relocated to the position where the specific general winning hole 163 in the first control example was provided, the second ball entrance hole 640 was provided in the first control example. The difference is that the position is hollow. Furthermore, the difference is that the number of prize balls paid out when a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is detected is changed to 10.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second ball entry port 640 in the fourth control example is only provided with a pseudo through gate 1167 above it, and is not provided with any structure that prevents the ball from entering. By hitting the ball right-handed, the player can always hit the ball. More specifically, about 1/3 of the game balls hit to the right enter the second ball entrance 640, and about 2/3 flow into the main path SK1. The branch section 694a, which is provided at a position where the game ball entering the second ball entry port 640 can reach, branches toward the back side of the general ball throwing section 690a when viewed from the front, and the flow path switching member 695 In the state where the ball has retreated to the retracted position (back side in front view), the game ball flows down along the slope of the guiding channel 690, so it can flow down to the second guiding channel 694 via the branch part 694a. There isn't. On the other hand, in the state where the flow path switching member 694a is extended to the extended position shown in FIG. 321, it becomes impossible to proceed through the guide flow path 690. In addition, since the flow path switching member 695 is inclined in the direction of guiding the game ball to the back side when viewed from the front in the extended position, the game ball is guided to the branch portion 694a by the inclination of the flow path switching member 695. and is distributed to the guiding flow path 694. In addition, the flow path switching member 695 temporarily operates when a second special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 during execution of the potential effect B described later. It is moved to the extended position, and after distributing the game balls that triggered the lottery of the second special symbol to the second guiding channel 694, it is retreated to the retreat position.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second guide channel 694 is provided with a guide channel sensor 694s that can detect passage of a game ball. When the passage of a game ball is detected by this guiding flow path sensor 694s, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a attached to the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 is opened for two seconds, and the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 is opened. The ball is ready to enter. On the most downstream side of the second guide channel 694, the game ball that has flown down the second guide channel 694 is rolled from the back side in front view to the front side in front view and falls into the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. A ball ejecting section 694b is provided that can be used to release the ball. The game ball that has fallen from this ball ejection part 694b enters the pseudo second ball entry port 1640 or enters the out port 1640b provided on the left side of the pseudo second ball entry port 1640. Then, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, since the period required for flowing down the second guiding channel 694 is approximately 1 second, basically the game ball flowing down the second guiding channel 694 will not be able to flow down the second guiding channel 694 for 2 seconds, which is the opening period of the pseudo electric accessories 1640a. In the meantime, the ball enters the pseudo second ball entry port 1640. The out port 1640b is for the purpose of normally discharging game balls that have reached the pseudo second ball entry port 1640 after the release period of the pseudo electric accessory 1640a has elapsed due to irregularities such as ball clogging. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 321, the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 is provided with a pseudo electric accessory 1640a. This pseudo-electric accessory 1640a is opened and closed as part of an interesting performance (potential performance B) in the most advantageous probability mode for the player (high probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols). The details will be described later, but once you shift to the probability mode, if you win in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high probability that the special winning opening 65a will be opened for 1 second (small win). becomes. As a result, in the probability mode, by simply continuing to hit the ball to the right, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. When a small win is achieved in the lottery, the game ball can be caused to flow down the main routes SK1 to SK3 and enter the opened specific prize opening 65a. That is, it becomes an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed without reducing the number of balls held. Further, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability mode, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability mode again unless the probability variation limit number of times is reached. In other words, the probability mode and the jackpot are repeated until the probability variation limit number of times is reached. In this fourth control example, since the probability variation limit number is set to 36 times, the advantageous probability mode and the jackpot are repeated until the jackpot is achieved 36 times at maximum (the probability mode is looped).

However, since relatively few machines are equipped with fixed variable limit numbers, small wins, etc., and many players are not familiar with the specifications, it becomes difficult to understand the gameplay, and it is difficult to play games with pachinko machines 10. There is a risk that players will avoid playing games. Therefore, in this fourth control example, a performance (potential performance B) that makes the player pseudo-recognize the behavior in the advantageous probability mode as if it were a probability change state of a general machine is executed. It is structured as follows. More specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the probability mode (and when the pseudo jackpot effect described below is not executed), the game that triggered the lottery of the second special symbol The ball (the game ball that has entered the second ball entry port 640) is caused to flow down into the second guiding channel 694 (that is, by moving the channel switching member 695 to the extended position), and is controlled by the guiding channel sensor 694s. The pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened at the timing when passage is detected, and the game ball flowing down the second guide channel 694 is configured to enter the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 in the open state. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a jackpot variable display performance after the game ball enters the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. Further, the board is configured such that the ball cannot enter the second ball entry port 640 unless it passes through the pseudo through gate 1167. As a result, the player can be made to think that the pseudo electric accessory 1640a has been opened based on the game ball passing through the pseudo through gate 1167. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect as if a second special symbol lottery was executed based on the ball entering the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. In other words, the behavior is similar to the behavior in the variable probability state (game state in which electric accessories are easily released and the jackpot probability is high) in general game machines (in the advantageous variable state, if you hit the right hand and pass the through gate, there is a high probability By opening the electric accessory in the second starting port and letting the game ball enter the second starting port, it is possible to realize a behavior that results in a jackpot with a high probability.

In addition, in all gaming states (modes) other than the probability mode, the behavior is similar to the normal state (playing state where electric accessories are difficult to release and the jackpot probability is low) in general gaming machines. The presentation mode etc. are set. Thereby, it is possible to realize a game that is easy to understand for a wide range of players and has a lot of variety.

Further, in the fourth control example, in the variable probability mode, a performance (pseudo jackpot performance) is executed to make a plurality of jackpots (for example, five jackpots) appear as if they were one jackpot. More specifically, by configuring multiple rounds (for example, 5 rounds) in a jackpot to appear as one round through production, the number of prize balls in one jackpot is the actual number of prize balls. It can create the illusion that there are more than Therefore, when a jackpot is achieved, the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction. Furthermore, as mentioned above, in this fourth control example, once the probability mode is entered, the jackpot and probability mode are repeated until the jackpot is reached a maximum of 36 times, so the actual internal state and the production content are linked. If this happens, the jackpot mode and probability mode are frequently switched, which may cause the player to feel troubled. On the other hand, in this fourth control example, the structure is such that a production (pseudo jackpot production) is performed that makes multiple jackpots (and probability modes between jackpots) appear as if they were one jackpot, so even fewer jackpots can be achieved. It is possible to make the player feel as if he or she has won more prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothered. In addition, in this fourth control example, once the probability mode is entered, the probability mode is looped until the probability change limit number of times is reached. It becomes possible to understand. This makes it easy to determine how many jackpots can be treated as one pseudo-jackpot effect to ensure that the pseudo-jackpot effect can be completed at the end of the probability mode (i.e., when the probability variable limit is reached). . Therefore, the pseudo jackpot performance can be executed in a more natural manner.

In addition, in this fourth control example, if it is in the probability mode and the pseudo jackpot effect is not being executed, each time a game ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the game ball that entered the ball is The ball is made to enter the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 to make it appear as if the fluctuating display performance of the second special symbol was executed with the ball entering the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 as a trigger. , but not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that only when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol drawing, the game ball that triggered the jackpot drawing is allowed to flow down to the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. With this configuration, in the probability mode, when a ball enters the pseudo second ball entry port 1640, it is possible to realize a behavior as if it will definitely be a jackpot, so the pseudo second ball entry port 1640 The game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the flow of the game in this fourth control example will be explained. FIG. 322 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of gaming states. As shown in FIG. 322, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to set four gaming states (normal state, variable probability state, potential state, and time saving state). When a special symbol jackpot is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, an upper limit is set on the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set consecutively, and the state in which the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol can be consecutively set has reached the upper limit (variable limit state). Only when a jackpot is won in the game, a low probability state (time saving state) of a special symbol is set after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, among the game states in which the high probability state of special symbols is set, the potential state is more advantageous to the player than the variable probability state. Furthermore, once the state is shifted to the definite state, it is configured so that it is easy to continuously set the definite state until the definite variable limit state is reached. With this configuration, the player can play an advantageous game by shifting to the probability state while the number of consecutively set high probability states of special symbols is small.

If the normal state is set as the gaming state, it will be the gaming state where the special drawing 1 lottery is mainly held (for the special drawing 2 drawing in the normal state, a long period of time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as a variable time). ), the system is configured such that 99.5% of the winnings of the special drawing 1 jackpot will shift to the variable probability state, and 0.5% will shift to the probability state.

While the variable probability state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so it is easier for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry hole 64D than in the normal state, so special drawing 1 is drawn. It becomes easier. Furthermore, the probability of winning the jackpot of special drawing 1 is set higher than that of the normal state, and the transition rate to the probability state when winning the jackpot of special drawing 1 is 10 times (5%) as compared to the normal state. In addition, even in a state where the variable probability state is set, a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the variable time for the special drawing 2 lottery, so even during this variable probability state, the gaming state where the drawing of the special drawing 1 is mainly performed. becomes.

In the potential state, the variable time of the special drawing 1 lottery is set to a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the variable time of the special drawing 2 drawing is set to a short period of time, so the lottery of the special drawing 2 is set to a long time (for example, 10 minutes). This is a gaming state in which the game is mainly played, and the player is configured to play a right-handed game. When a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the probability state is set again until the probability variable limit state is reached. In addition, in the special drawing 2 lottery, it is set so that in most cases where the player does not win the jackpot, he or she will win the small jackpot. Therefore, the special drawing 2 lottery during the probability state is the most advantageous lottery for the player, and the probability state is the gaming state most advantageous for the player.

If you win a jackpot in the variable limit state, a time saving state is set. In this time-saving state, the game state is such that the special drawing 1 lottery is mainly performed, and the special drawing 1 jackpot lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it becomes easier to execute the special drawing 1 lottery than in the normal state. In addition, the time saving state continues until a predetermined condition other than winning a jackpot is met (for example, a condition that the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times), a condition that a small win is won a predetermined number of times (1 time), etc.) If a jackpot is won during this time-saving state, the system is configured to shift to a probability state that is most advantageous to the player with a high probability (95%). By shifting from the time saving state to the potential state (pulling back) in this way, it is possible to play the game in the potential state from the first time of the number of consecutive high probability states of the special symbol. It is possible to provide players with a fun game.

In this control example, a small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, and when the small winning is won, a small winning game is executed in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened in the same way as the winning of the special drawing 1 jackpot. are doing. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the current number of probability variations (remaining number of probability variations until the probability variation limit state) based on the number of times the second variable winning device 65 has been opened.

Note that, unlike the configuration of this control example, it may also be configured to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the current number of probability changes (remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state) to the player based on winning a small win. good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, of the performances executed in this fourth control example, the performances (performance mode) executed according to the set gaming state will be explained. FIG. 323 is a transition diagram showing transition contents of performances executed in accordance with gaming states. As shown in FIG. 323, in a state where a normal state and a variable probability state are set, the same production mode (normal production mode) is set, and the player is asked whether the current state is a normal state or a variable probability state. It is structured in a way that makes it difficult to understand. This makes it difficult to easily grasp the number of remaining probability variations until the probability variation limit state.

In this control example, the time-saving state is set only when a jackpot is won while the probability variable limit state is reached, so the normal production mode is executed without winning the jackpot during the time-saving state. Only in this case can the player understand that the current state is normal. Therefore, advantageous game information can be provided only to players who have been playing games for a long time.

In addition, in this control example, the fluctuation time set based on the special drawing 1 lottery is configured to be the same in the normal state and the variable probability state (configured to use the same fluctuation pattern selection table). ). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the current gaming state from being determined based on the varying time of the special drawing 1 lottery to be executed. Incidentally, the present invention is not limited to this, and the structure is configured such that a variable time can be set to either a fixed variable state or a normal state, and when the variable time is set, the current gaming state can be suggested. You may do so. Furthermore, the structure is configured to set the variation time by referring to a different variation pattern selection table according to the current number of probability variations (remaining number of variations until the probability variation limit state), and to set the variation time according to the variation time of the special drawing 1 lottery to be executed. It may be configured such that the player can determine the current probability variation count.

Next, when transitioning to the potential state while the normal performance is being executed (the normal state and the state where the variable probability state is set), two production modes are set depending on the current number of variable variations. Ru. Specifically, when the probability state is set and the remaining number of times until the probability limit state is 30 or more, an odd number of squares (for example, 777) will be displayed as the third symbol indicating a jackpot. Then, a potential probability performance A mode is set in which a pseudo jackpot game performance is executed in a period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game executed in a state where the probability variable limit state is reached.

When the probability state is set and the remaining number of times until the probability limit state is less than 30, an even number of squares (for example, 666) will be stopped and displayed as the third symbol indicating a jackpot, and that During the period from the end of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game that is executed in the state where the variable limit state is reached, and until the jackpot is won a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times), the game production in the potential state is executed. After that, a potential performance B mode is set in which a pseudo jackpot game performance is executed for a period until the player wins a predetermined number of jackpots (1 to 5 times).

In other words, in this control example, a large number of prize balls are awarded to the player in two states: a jackpot game state and a continuous small win game state in the potential state (so-called small win RUSH). However, while in a potential state, you will not only win small wins frequently, but also win jackpots with a high probability. If the winning game performance is configured to be executed, there is a problem in that the performance becomes complicated and the performance is difficult for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, during the period in which the potential state is set, there is a period in which a pseudo jackpot game effect is executed, regardless of whether it is a jackpot game or a small win game. It is configured to set a period for executing a certain state game performance (small hit RUSH performance). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance to be performed from becoming complicated and provide the pachinko machine 10 that is easy for players to understand.

In addition, when the fixed limit state is reached and the time saving state is then set, a pullback mode is set and an inciting effect is performed to show the player that the gaming state is likely to shift to the fixed state. executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the characteristic presentation content of the fourth control example will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 324(a), the contents of the pseudo jackpot performance (super jackpot performance) executed during the probable performance A mode will be explained. FIG. 324(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a pseudo jackpot performance (super jackpot performance) executed during the probable performance A mode. Note that the same elements as those on the display screen in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 324(a), in the pseudo jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during the probable effect effect A mode, a comment indicating that a super jackpot is in progress is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a super jackpot effect is displayed in the main display area Dm. Acquisition information 803 indicating the number of prize balls awarded during the performance is displayed. Then, a stored image is displayed in the center to show the player that the acquired information 803 is increasing using a dynamic image. Then, a guide display Dm9 for guiding the player to a right-handed game is displayed.

Here, during the potential performance A mode, the prize balls awarded during the potential state, that is, the prize balls awarded when the ball played right-handed during the potential state enters each winning slot ( All of the prize balls awarded based on the balls that entered the second ball entrance 640 and the balls that won in the variable winning device 65 in the small winning game are treated as prize balls acquired during the jackpot game. The structure is such that a pseudo-jackpot effect is executed when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 when the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is located at the buried position during the potential effect A mode. It is configured so that the ball flows such that the ball lands on the pseudo attacker 165.

As a result, a pseudo-jackpot effect is executed in which all the winning balls in the potential state enter the pseudo-attacker 165, and a pseudo-jackpot effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the jackpot game is being continuously executed. can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a pseudo jackpot effect during the probability state without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324(b), the contents of the pseudo-potential state game presentation among the presentations executed during the potential presentation B mode will be explained. FIG. 324(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pseudo-potential state game performance. As shown in FIG. 324(b), in the pseudo-potential state game production, the characters "RUSH" are displayed to indicate that the current state is a potential game state, and whether or not a small winning game will be executed is displayed. (a game in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 and if the contents of the treasure box 812 is "V" indicates that a small win has been won) is executed. This pseudo-potential state game production is executed during a period in which a jackpot game is being played until the probability state and a predetermined number of times are reached. When the game is executed, the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game and the prize balls awarded during the small winning game are reported in the acquisition information 803.

Here, during the potential performance B mode, during the period when the pseudo potential state game performance is being executed, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the special drawing 2 lottery is executed. Since it is necessary to indicate this to the player, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is located at the protruding position, and the ball that enters the second ball entrance 640 flows down toward the pseudo electric accessory 1640a. It is configured to create a spherical flow.

Note that the update timing of the acquisition information 803 and the update timing of the performance mode displayed in each of the above-mentioned performances are based on the timing when the ball actually wins, as in the first control example described above. The timing when the ball reaches the winning hole is predicted and the timing is set based on the prediction result. The detailed contents are the same as the first control example described above, and therefore will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the main controller in the fourth control example>
The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the fourth control example has a random number 4 table 202ca per special symbol instead of the random number table 202a per special symbol compared to the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the first control example described above. In place of the pattern selection table 202b, there is a variable pattern selection 4 table 202cb, in place of the normal winning random number table 202c, a normal winning random number 4 table 202cc, and in place of the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, a special drawing 1 jackpot type selection 4 table. 202cd1 is different in that a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 is provided instead of the special drawing 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and a small hit random number 4 table 202ce is provided instead of the small hit random number table 202e.

The RAM of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example has a probability change flag 203ca, a gaming state storage area 203cb, a jackpot flag 203cc, and a special figure with respect to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the first control example described above. Added 1 variation stop flag 203cd, special figure 2 variation stop flag 203ce, small hit flag 203cf, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg, special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch, special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci, fixed variation upper limit counter 203cj. They differ in some respects. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the random number 4 table 202ca per special symbol will be explained with reference to FIG. 325(a). This special symbol random number 4 table 202ca differs from the above-described special symbol random number table 202a in that the range of the value of the first winning random number counter C1, which is the special symbol jackpot, is different. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of "0 to 4" is defined as the range corresponding to the jackpot, and in the high probability state of the special symbol, the range of "0 to 39" is defined as the range corresponding to the jackpot. .

Next, the contents of the small winning random number 4 table 202ce will be explained with reference to FIG. 325(b). This small hit random number 4 table 202ce is different from the above-mentioned small hit random number table 202e, and is configured so that each of the special drawings 1 and 2 wins a small winning. Specifically, in the case of special drawing 1, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "50 to 59", and in the case of special drawing 2, the range of "50 to 479" is determined to be a jackpot. It is stipulated in In other words, in this fourth control example, the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/50 in the lottery for special figure 1, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/1.1 in the lottery for special figure 2. It consists of

Next, the contents of the normal winning random number 4 table 202cc will be explained with reference to FIG. 325(c). This normal winning random number 4 table 202cc is different from the above-mentioned normal winning random number table 202c in that it deletes the element for long open winning, lowers the probability of winning in the low probability state of normal symbols, and The difference is that the probability of winning is increased in the high probability state of the symbol, but other than that they are the same.

Next, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 326(a). FIG. 326(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 326(a), when the jackpot of special drawing 1 is won in the normal state, the first attacker (second variable prize winning device 650) is opened and the jackpot (jackpot) in which a variable probability state is set. A, jackpot B) and a jackpot (jackpot C) in which the second attacker (variable winning device 65) is opened and a probability state is set are defined in association with the value of the special winning type counter C2.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 326(b). FIG. 326(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 326(b), when the jackpot of special drawing 2 is won, the second attacker (variable prize winning device 65) is opened, and the jackpot (jackpot C) in which the probability state is set is made special. It is defined in association with the value of the winning type counter C2.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cb will be explained with reference to FIGS. 327 to 329. As shown in FIG. 327, in this control example, there are four tables 202cb1 for normal and variable probability that are used when the normal state and variable probability state are set, and four tables 202cb1 for potential variation that are used when the potential state is set. 4 table 202cb2 and a 4 time saving table 202cb3 used when a time saving state is set, and the table corresponding to the set gaming state is referred to.

FIG. 328 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the four probability variation tables 202cb1. As shown in FIG. 328, in this control example, in the state where the normal state and variable probability state are set, a long time fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol 2. Therefore, the lottery game of special drawing 1 is actually performed.

FIG. 329(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the four potential confirmation tables 202cb2. As shown in FIG. 329(a), in this control example, in a state where the potential state is set, a long-time variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of the special figure 1. Therefore, the lottery game of special drawing 2 is actually performed.

FIG. 329(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the four time-saving tables 202cb3. As shown in FIG. 329(b), in this control example, in the state where the time saving state is set, a long time variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of the special figure 2. Therefore, the lottery game of special drawing 1 is actually performed. And, normally, the length of the variation time selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 is specified to be shorter than the 4 table for probability variation 202cb1. Therefore, normally, the special figure 1 variation can be executed more efficiently than in the probability variation state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 330, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 330 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the following configuration is added. Since other elements are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation flag 203ca is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when set to on, indicates that the special symbol is in a high probability state. In other words, when the variable probability flag 203ca is set to ON, the gaming state is a variable probability state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a potential state (special symbol: high probability state, Normal symbol: Low probability state) is set.

This probability change flag 203ca is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot that sets a probability change state or a probability state after the jackpot ends. Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF.

In this embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, the special symbol after the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability ending condition for ending the special symbol's high probability state. When the number of fluctuations (the number of special figure fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability change flag 203ca may be set to OFF. In this case, in order to determine the timing for setting the probability variation flag 203ca to OFF, a storage means is provided for storing in advance the number of special pattern fluctuations as the special pattern high accuracy end condition, and a storage means for storing in advance the number of special pattern fluctuations as the special pattern high accuracy ending condition, and A measuring means for measuring the number of special pattern fluctuations, and an end determination for determining whether the number of special pattern fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special pattern fluctuations (special pattern high accuracy termination condition) stored in the storage means. All you have to do is provide the means.

Furthermore, multiple special pattern high-accuracy ending conditions are prepared, such as the special pattern 1 high-accuracy ending condition that can be established based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special pattern high-accuracy state, and the variation of the second special symbol. There are various types of lottery ending conditions, such as the special pattern 2 high-accuracy ending condition that can be established based only on the number of times, and the lottery ending condition that can be established when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small win). It may be configured such that the special figure high accuracy end condition is made easy and the probability change flag 203ca is set to OFF when any of the special figure high accuracy end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 matches the jackpot judgment value at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag that is set. This special figure 1 jackpot flag is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

When the variable time of the variable display of the first special symbol ends while the special symbol 1 jackpot flag is on, a process is executed to forcibly stop the second special symbol at a missed symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is executing a big hit.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag that is set. This special figure 2 jackpot flag is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

When the variable time of the variable display of the second special symbol ends while the special symbol 2 jackpot flag is on, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol at a missed symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is executing a big hit.

The gaming state storage area 203cb is a storage area for storing information indicating the currently set gaming state and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 0 and the variable probability flag 203ca is off), the winning state of this gaming state storage area 203cb "00H" is stored in the area as information indicating the normal state. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more and the variable probability flag 203ca is on), the state at the time of winning in the gaming state storage area 203cb is , "01H" is stored as information indicating the variable probability state. In addition, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 0 and the probability change flag 203ca is on), the winning state area of this gaming state storage area 203cb is , "02H" is stored as information indicating the potential state.

The information stored in this gaming state storage area 203cb is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referenced when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

The small hit flag 203cf is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the small hit judgment value at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag that is set. This small hit flag 203cf is set to OFF when setting the display of a stop symbol corresponding to a small win. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends while this small hit flag 203cf is on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is subtracted). (stop) processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a jackpot occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol while a small prize of the second special symbol is being executed, and the jackpot starts during the minor prize. can.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci are counters for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended based on the timing results of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203ch and the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203ci.

The jackpot flag 203cc is a flag indicating whether or not it is a jackpot. If this jackpot flag 203cc is on, it shows that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting a jackpot, and if it is off, it shows that it is not hitting a jackpot. This jackpot flag 203cc is set to ON when the start of a jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF during the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hit flag is a flag indicating whether or not there is a small win. If this small winning flag is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is making a small winning, and if it is off, it indicates that the small winning is not occurring. This flag during a small win is set to ON when the start of a small win is set. On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small win.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to win a small hit with the second special symbol, and when the small win is won (when the small hit medium flag is set to on), the first It is configured to interrupt the fluctuating display of special symbols. In other words, out of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), a small hit is won in the lottery of one special symbol (second special symbol), and the medium small win flag is set to on. In this state, since the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) never ends, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the small winning game and play the game. Further, during a small winning game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the jackpot game starting.

In addition, in this control example, the first special symbol is also configured to win a small hit similarly to the second special symbol described above. The process when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery is the same as the process when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is a flag indicating that the period is from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (determined display) with the jackpot stop symbol until the jackpot starts. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to on, even if a new ball enters the second ball entrance 640, execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. be done. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a missed symbol, and is set to OFF when the process for executing the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is avoided. Ru.

In addition, in this control example, a special figure 2 variation stop flag 203cd is provided in which the target is changed from special figure 2 to special figure 1 in contrast to the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation stop flag 203ce, but the contents are as described above. The only difference is that the object of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce has been changed from special figure 2 to special figure 1, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the period for opening the first specific prize opening 65a as the game content of the small winning game is set to be 1.5 seconds, and the round ending condition established by the number of prizes is set to 10. are doing. In other words, the validity period (1.5 seconds) of the round game has elapsed by the time 10 balls enter the first specific prize opening 65a during the small winning game (before the round end condition for the number of prizes is satisfied). It turns out. Therefore, since the period of the small winning game can be kept constant, the performance that spans the small winning game (the period from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol to the end of the fluctuation of other special symbols via the small winning game) It is possible to predetermine the presentation period for a series of presentations (a series of presentations to be performed). Therefore, the variation timing of the special symbol and the performance execution timing can be easily synchronized, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is a flag indicating the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and when set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, When the setting is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the stopped updating (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) whose lottery result is a small win, and is referenced in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 32). Ru. As a result of the reference, if it is set to on, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during fluctuation is executed. In other words, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display continues to be executed. Become. Thereby, by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg to ON, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has not been forcibly stopped. Then, when it is determined that it is set to on in the first special symbol variation execution process, it is set to off.

In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured such that only the second special symbol lottery can win the small hit, the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on winning the small win is the first special symbol. However, if the first special symbol lottery is configured so that a small hit can be won, a special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. good.

The variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is a counter for setting the upper limit value at which variable probability states are set continuously. In this control example, the upper limit number of times that the variable probability state is continuously set after the end of the jackpot is defined (36 times). Then, when determining whether the number of consecutive variable probability states has reached the upper limit number of times, the value of the variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is referred to. The value of this variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 each time a variable probability state is set at the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the normal state or the time saving state is set, the value of the counter is cleared.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot, it is determined based on the fact that one of the special symbols stops in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the execution of a jackpot game). ), a process that forcibly stops the fluctuating display of the other special symbol when it misses, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small win, one special symbol stops with a combination that indicates a small win. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small winning game ends).

That is, the structure is such that, depending on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various ways. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result for the player (for example, a jackpot), and while the fluctuating display to show the game result is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol on the other side is It is possible to prevent the special symbol (the lottery result is a small win) from being displayed in a stopped state and the large win from being erased by the small win.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 331. The RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that an effect mode storage area 223ca and a probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb are added. ing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The production mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing the currently set production mode. In this fourth control example, as a performance mode set when the potential state is set as the gaming state, a pseudo jackpot performance (Fig. 324 ( (See a)), and the probability state that is set continuously is divided into predetermined periods (for example, the period until winning the jackpot three times), and a pseudo effect is created for each division. It is configured to be able to set a potential game performance B mode in which a potential game performance (see FIG. 324(b)) is executed.

This production mode storage area 223ca contains a variable probability upper limit counter 223cb in the case where a jackpot is won in a gaming state other than the probability state (normal state, variable probability state, time saving state) and the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game. The performance mode selected based on the value of is stored. Then, while the potential state is continuously set, the same performance mode is stored, and the information (performance mode) stored based on the fact that a game state other than the potential state is set is cleared. Ru.

The probability variation upper limit number of times counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of times that the high probability state (probability variation state, potential probability state) of the special symbol is continuously set, and is a counter for measuring the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously. It is referenced when determining whether the number of times the state (variable state, potential state) has reached the upper limit number (for example, 36 times). This probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb is incremented by 1 when the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, and is cleared when the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the end of the jackpot game. Ru.

<About the control process of the main controller in the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 332 to 347. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

First, with reference to FIG. 332, the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be explained. FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 4 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current state is a jackpot or a small win (S4501), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot or a small win (S4501: Yes). ), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on (S4502). In the process of S4502, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the fluctuating time of the other special symbol is interrupted because one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit. In the process of S4502, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on (S4502: Yes), the display on the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. (S4503), that is, a process is executed to continue the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 for the special symbol whose variable time subtraction has been interrupted, and this process ends. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol variation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the current jackpot or small hit is occurring (S4501: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is greater than 0 (i.e., the special figure 1 fluctuates). (S4504), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203ch is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4504: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S4508) is executed, and then the process moves to S4509 where variation processing regarding the special figure 2 is executed. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S4508) will be described later with reference to FIG. 333.

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203ch is larger than 0 (S4504: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505) is executed. This first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505) is to execute the process during special symbol 1 variation, and a detailed explanation thereof will be given later with reference to FIG. 336.

When the first special symbol variation execution processing 4 (S4505) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203ch is 0) (S4506), and the variation time If it is determined that it is the end timing (S4506: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S4507) is executed, and then the process moves to S4509. On the other hand, in the process of S4506, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S4506: No), the process of S4507 is skipped and the process moves to S4509.

In the processing of S4509 to S4513, the same processing as S4504 to S4507 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S4509 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S4509), and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci is determined (S4509) If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203ci is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S4509: No), the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) is executed, and then this process is ended. Details of this second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338.

On the other hand, in the process of S4509, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203ci is larger than 0 (S4509: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511) is executed. This second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511) is to execute the process during special symbol 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 343.

When the second special symbol variation execution processing 4 (S4511) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203ci is 0) (S4512), and the variation time If it is determined that it is the end timing (S4512: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S4513) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4512, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S4512: No), the process of S4513 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 333, the first special symbol variation start process (S4508), which is a process of special symbol variation process 4 (S104 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be explained. . FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S4508).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S4508), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S4601), and the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S4601). ) is a value greater than 0 (S4602). In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S4602: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is determined. 1 is subtracted (S4603), and a held ball number command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the held ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d after the subtraction (S4604). .

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the first special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203d.

When the process of S4604 is completed, next, the data in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S4605). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

When the process of S4605 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S4606). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 334, but the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the process of S4606 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 is executed (see FIG. 335). Although details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) is based on the result of the judgment of the first special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S4608). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S4608: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S4609), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4608, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is not a value greater than 0 (S4608: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4602, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S4602: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606) which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4504 in FIG. 333) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. explain. FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, during a period in which a variable display indicating that a jackpot has been won in one of the special symbols (jackpot variation) is being executed, it is not possible to display whether or not a jackpot has been won in the other special symbol lottery. It is configured so that no discrimination is performed.

In other words, in a state where it is certain that a jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period of time (after the elapse of a variable time) by one special symbol lottery, a jackpot game will be won by the other special symbol lottery, and the game will be played multiple times in a short period of time. The system is configured to prevent excessive benefits from being awarded due to winning a jackpot.

In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same way as a normal special symbol lottery, skipping the judgment based on the various counter values acquired in that process, and setting the missing symbols, the other It is possible to quickly respond to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S4701). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203ca is set to on (S4702). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (variable probability state, potential state). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is on (that is, the special symbol is in a probability variation state) (S4702: Yes), a random number that results in a jackpot as defined in the first random number table 202a for high probability times is selected. It is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S4703). On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203ca is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S4702: No), the first winning random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the prescribed random number value for a jackpot matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S4704).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S4703 or S4704 is a jackpot (S4705), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S4705: Yes), the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set for the first special symbol. It is set on (S4706), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S4707). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, if it is determined that the lottery result is a loser (S4705: No), a loser symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and then , this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4508 in FIG. 333), will be described. FIG. 335 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607 in FIG. 335), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606 in FIG. 334), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S4801). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on. This special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON in the process of S4707 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334).

In the process of S4801, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S4801: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot that was acquired in the process of S4701 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) Based on the value of the 1 hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202d1 (see FIG. 326(a)) (S4802), and the process moves to S4803.

On the other hand, in the process of S4801, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss (that is, the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off) (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped. Then, the process moves to S4803.

In the process of S4803, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S4803). Next, the variable pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 329) corresponding to the gaming state is read out (S4804), and the process moves to S4805. Note that the gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203ca and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the process of S4805, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S4805), and then a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern ( S4806).

When the process of S4806 is finished, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S4807), and then a fluctuation start of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S4808), and the process of S4805 is set. A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch, and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 336, the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505) executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Explain the content. FIG. 336 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505). In this first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505), a process for restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol 1 when it has been interrupted, and a process for subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation execution processing 4 (S4505) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on (S4901). Here, a case where this process is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON will be briefly described. As mentioned above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is changing. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on, the jackpot flag 203o is set to on in the process, so a timer interrupt is executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 4 (see Figure 332) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on), it is determined that the jackpot is in progress in the process of S4501. Therefore, the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game (or small win game) ends and it is determined in the process of S4501 that there is no jackpot (or small win), the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505) is executed. That will happen. With this configuration, the state in which the first special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4505) is executed while the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON is a jackpot (or small win) game. is completed, and the timing is such that the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which had been interrupted, is restarted.

Returning to FIG. 336, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S4902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901: Yes). The stop flag 203cg is set to OFF (S4903), and the process moves to S4904. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is not set to on (set to off) (S4901: No), the processes of S4902 and S4903 are skipped and S4904 Shift to processing.

In the process of S4904, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch is decremented by 1 and updated (S4904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S4905), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 337, the first special symbol variation stop process (S4507), which is one process of special symbol variation process 4 (S154 in FIG. 332), will be described. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation stop processing (S4507).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S4507), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set on for the first special symbol (S5001: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set on (S5002), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set on (S5002). A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is turned on is set (S5003). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S5004).

After completing the process of S5004, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is set to 0 (S5005), and it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to on (S5006). The stored information regarding the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S5008), and the process moves to S5009. On the other hand, in the process of S5006, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to OFF (S5006: No), the process of S5007 to S5008 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5009.

After executing the process of S5006 or S5008, a jackpot scenario is set (S5009). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck, probability change flag 203ca, and time saving counter 203j are reset (S5010), the jackpot flag 203cc is set on (S5011), and the process moves to S5012. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, also when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is not on (S5001: No), the process moves to S5012.

In the process of S5012, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped (S5012). Thereafter, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37 (S5013), and this process is ended.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop processing (S4507), the processing (S5002 to S5009) of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (S5001: Yes), a process (S5003, S5004) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is executed.

In addition, in this fourth control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed as a winning symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol ends, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to create a more natural performance compared to the case where a forced stop is made due to a miss.

Next, with reference to FIG. 338, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. do. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510). In this second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510), a process for starting variation of the special symbol 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the process related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 333 to 337, the subject of variation is only changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. A detailed explanation of the elements will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to OFF (S5102), and this process ends. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203ce is a flag that is set to ON when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the loss. . That is, if the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is on, it means that a jackpot is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is on in the process of S5101, the present process is ended without executing each process of S5102 to S5107 for setting the start of fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S5101: No), the second special symbol execution area is Data (various counter values) is acquired (S5103). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S5103, it is determined whether there is any acquired data (S5104). That is, if it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S5104: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5103, if it is determined that there is data (S5104: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value (S5105). Details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 339.

When the process of S5105 is completed, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 for selecting a variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S5103 (S5106 ). Details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 341. After the process of S5106 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5107). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5107: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S5108), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5107, if the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, that is, it is determined that the time is not being reduced (S5107: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105), which is a process of the second special symbol fluctuation start process 4 (S4510 in FIG. ) will be explained. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) I will mainly explain the differences between the two.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is acquired (S5201). Then, the process of S5202 to S5204 is executed to obtain the lottery result as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on each obtained counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203ca. Each of these processes differs only in that the counter value used for lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area, and other than that, the same control as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see Figure 334) is performed. is executed.

When the process of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S5205), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S5205: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is The processing of S5206 to S5208 for setting the jackpot is executed, and the present processing ends. In each of these processes of S5206 to S5208, the same processes as those of S4706 to S4708 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) are executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S5205, if it is determined that the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a jackpot (S5205: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a miss of the second special symbol is set. The special figure 2 deviation variation process 4 is executed (S5209), and this process is ended. The details of this special figure 2 off variation processing 4 (S5209) will be explained with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 off variation processing 4 (S5209).

In the special symbol 2 missing variation process 4 (S5209), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S5203 or S5204 of FIG. 339 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S5301), If it is determined that it is a win (S5301: Yes), the small win flag 203cf is set on (S5302), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small win (S5303). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the value of the obtained small winning type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S5304), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is a loser in the process of S5301 (S5301: No), a loser symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S5305), and then, This process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 341, second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 ( S5106) will be explained. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106 in FIG. 341), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5401). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105 in FIG. 339), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S5402). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203cl is on for the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON in the process of S5207 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339) described above.

In the process of S5402, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S5402: Yes), the variable pattern selection table (see FIGS. 328 and 329) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S5403). Then, based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S5201 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339), the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 (FIG. 326(b) ), the jackpot type is determined (S5404).

When the process of S5404 is completed, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S5405), and then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S5406). Then, the process moves to S5408.

On the other hand, in the process of S5402, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S5402: No), the special symbol 2 missing variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) is executed, and the process of S5408 is performed. Move to.

In the process of S5408, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S5408). Next, set the start of variation of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S5409), and set the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S5405 in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203ci ( S5410), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, this special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) will be explained. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407).

In the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407 in FIG. 342), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5501). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203cf is set to on (S5501). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is on (S5501: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5502). Then, the small win type is selected based on the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 and the small win type selection table 202ce (not shown) (S5503).

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 389) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S5504), and the small winning fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table. is selected (S5505). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (S5506), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, a loss) (S5501: No), the fluctuation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (see Fig. 327 to 389) is read (S5507), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S5508). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation variation pattern (S5509), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511) is one of the special symbol variation processes (see S154 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511). In this second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511), a process for restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol 2 when it has been interrupted, and a process for subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation execution process 4 (S4511) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203ci is decremented by 1 and updated (S5601), and the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated. The display is updated (S5602), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S4513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S4513). This second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S4513) is to execute the processing when stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S4513) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to on (S5701), and the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to on. If it is determined that there is (S5701: Yes), a special figure 1 variation stop command indicating the stop of special figure 1 variation is set (S5703). Next, when the process of S5703 is finished, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S5704). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on (S5706). If it is determined that the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on (S5706: Yes), the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to off (S5707), and the memory information for the special drawing 1 jackpot is deleted (S5708). , the process moves to S5709. On the other hand, in the process of S5706, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off (S5706: No), the process of S5707 to S5708 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S5709.

In the process of S5709, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S5709), and the special map 2 jackpot flag 203cl, probability variable flag 203ca, and time saving counter 203j are reset (S5710). Next, the jackpot flag 203cc is set on (S5711), and the process moves to S5712.

In the process of S5712, a special symbol 2 confirmation command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped (S5712). Thereafter, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37 (S5713), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is not set to ON (S5701: No), the special figure 2 missing stop process 4 is executed (S5702), and the above-mentioned S5712, The process of S5713 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, special symbol 2 off-stopping process 4 (S5702), which is one process of 2nd special symbol variation stopping process 4 (S4513 in FIG. 344), will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 out-of-place stop processing 4 (S5702). In this special figure 2 winning stop processing 4 (S5702), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than a jackpot (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. This is a process to be executed when the special figure 2 lottery result is a small hit, a process for temporarily stopping the special figure 1 variation being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 missing stop processing 4 (S5702), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203cf is set to on (S5801). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is set on (S5801: Yes), the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set on (S5802). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is turned on is set (S5803).

After completing the process of S5803, a small win scenario based on the selected small win type is set (S5804). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203cf is set to OFF (S5805), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to ON (S5806).

When the process of S5806 is completed, a special symbol 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol (S5807). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped varying at the small winning symbol (S5808), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5801, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss) (S5801: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. A special map 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to do so (S5809). Thereafter, the second special symbol being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed, and the variation is stopped at the symbol (S5810), and this process is ended.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously. It can be displayed. Therefore, more special symbol lottery games can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a jackpot will be awarded to a player within a predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, in this control example, when a special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed on either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or fluctuatingly displayed while measurement of the fluctuating time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of a variable display disappears. It is possible to know that the player is not playing a jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 346, the normal symbol variation process (S156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S156). This normal symbol fluctuation processing (S156) is executed during the timer interrupt processing, and includes the fluctuation display and fluctuation time of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the lower electric power associated with the lower first ball entrance 64D. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the accessory 64Da.

In this normal symbol variation process (S156 in FIG. 346), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S5901). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening/closing control of the lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first ball entrance 64D. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S5901: Yes), it is not possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery), so This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S5901: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol changing). (S5902), and when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S5902: No), that is, even if the current normal symbol is a hit, the normal symbol is changing. If it is determined that there is no state among them, that is, a state in which it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203e (the pending display of variation in the normal symbol The number of times M) is obtained (S5903).

Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S5904), and when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S5904: No), this process is ended immediately. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S5904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S5905), The data stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S5906).

In the process of S5906, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first area for normal symbol retention → execution area, the second area for regular symbol retention → the first area for regular symbol retention, the third area for regular symbol retention → the second area for regular symbol retention, the fourth area for regular symbol retention. → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal symbol holding area 3. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S5907).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5908). If it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is larger than 0 (S5908: Yes), since the time saving state is in effect, the lottery result is obtained based on the normal winning random number 4 table 202cc for high probability times (S5909 ). Specifically, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol has won, and if it is in the range of "205 to 232", it is determined that the normal symbol has been won. It is determined that On the other hand, in the process of S5908, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5908: No), based on the normal winning random number 4 table 202cc for low probability times, Then, the lottery result is obtained (S5910). Specifically, the lottery result is obtained based on the winning random number 4 table 202cc of normal symbols for low probability times. If the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 6 to 232", it is determined that it is a normal symbol miss. do.

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S5909 or S5910 is a normal symbol win (S5911), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S5911: Yes) ), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S5912), and the process moves to S5914. In the process of S5911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S5911, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S5911: No), the display mode when the pattern is out is set (S5913), and the process proceeds to S5914. In the process of S5913, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S5914. When the process of S5912 or S5913 is finished, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter (S5914), and this process is ended.

When the process of S5912 or S5914 is completed, in the process of S591, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S5911), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols. state) (S5911: Yes), sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device to 3 seconds (S5913), and then sets the short fluctuation flag 203t on. (S5914), this process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 determines that it is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (it is in the low probability state of normal symbols) (S5911: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols on the second symbol display device is set to 10 seconds (S5915), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5902, if it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S5902: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S5915). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S5910 or the process of S5912 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S5915, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S5915: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5915, if it is determined that the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S5915: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S5916). In the process of S5916, if the drawing of the normal symbol is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S5912, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S5913, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. In addition, the period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternating display of "○" and "x") indicating that the second symbol is changing is lit. (confirmed display). Thereby, the player can easily understand that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

When the process of S5916 is finished, next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (S156) (current lottery result) It is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S5917). If it is determined that the current lottery result is an outlier of the normal symbols (S5917: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (S5917: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5918).

In the process of S5918, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, that is, if it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started is the normal state (S5919 :No), the opening time of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set to 0.9 seconds, the number of openings is set to 2 (S5920), and the process moves to S5921.

On the other hand, in the process of S5918, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) is started is the time saving state. (S5918: Yes), the opening period of the lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first ball entrance 64D is set to 1 second, and the number of openings is set to 2 (S5924), and the process moves to S5923. do.

As explained above, in this control example, the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (variation) is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set, which is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, are determined. , are both in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player, so for example, if the normal symbol lottery ( Even if the time saving state is set before the variation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol ends after the variation) is executed and the winning occurs, the long opening is set as the operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da. There is nothing to do. Similarly, if a player wins in a normal symbol variation (lottery) executed while the time saving state is set, and the normal state is set as the gaming state until the normal symbol variation stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da is never set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous benefit (long opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da) from being provided to the player.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the lower electric accessory 64Da from being opened long when the normal state is set as the gaming state, a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is executed. The easy period can be limited to a short time state. In addition, in this control example, the gaming state is determined at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol starts and the timing when the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set, and the gaming state set at each timing is determined. Although the above-mentioned configuration is used as a configuration for setting the opening operation content of the lower electric accessory 64Da based on the above, other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set are both in the normal state (see FIG. 346). The opening operation set in S5924) may be set (short opening is set), and the long opening (opening operation set in S5922 of FIG. 346) is set in other states. With this configuration, a benefit (long release) advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations executed before and after the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, compared to the case where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is very short from "10 seconds → 3 seconds", and furthermore. , since the open period of the lower first ball entrance 64D becomes extremely long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64D. Become. In addition, in this control example, since the time saving state is configured to end when the jackpot game is executed, the normal state is entered during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when a small win game is executed, the time saving state is configured to be set continuously unless the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the small winning game is executed while the time saving state is set. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the lower electric accessory 64Da is long opened, and a plurality of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, lower first winning ball) are opened. This is a specific period during which it is easy for the ball to enter the opening (64D).

By using such a configuration, for example, in place of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. However, it is preferable that the ball enters the two winning holes (V winning device 65a, lower first ball entrance 64D) during the small winning game. This makes it possible to increase the number of players and provide more advantageous benefits to players.

Returning to FIG. 346, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5920, the start of opening/closing control of the lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first ball entry opening 64D is set (S5921), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set by the process of S5923, when the main process of opening/closing the electric accessory is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started, and the opening/closing control of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set. Alternatively, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S5922 are completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 347, the jackpot ending process (S1451) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S1451). In the jackpot end process (S1451), processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot is executed at the end of the jackpot game.

In the jackpot end process (S1451), first, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON (S5952), and the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 (S5953). Next, a number command indicating the value of the variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is set (S5954), and the process moves to S5955.

In the process of S5955, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability upper limit counter 203cj added in the process of S5953 is 35 (S5955). If it is determined that the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 203cj is 35 (S5955: Yes), a state command before reaching the upper limit is set (S5956), and the process moves to S5957. On the other hand, in the process of S5955, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 (S5955: No), the process of S5956 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S5957.

In the process of S5957, the jackpot type executed this time is read out (S5957). Next, it is determined whether the jackpot type read in the process of S5957 is jackpot C (S5958). If it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot C (S5958: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203j is set to 0 (S5960), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5958 that the jackpot type is not jackpot C (S5958: No), it is determined whether the read jackpot type is jackpot B (S5959). If it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot B (S5959: Yes), the gaming state at the time of winning is read from the gaming state storage area 203cb (S5961). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning read out in the process of S5962 is a potential state or a variable probability state (S5962). If it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not a probability state or a probability variable state (that is, a normal state or a time-saving state) (S5962: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 10000. (S5964), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5962, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is a probability state or a probability variable state (S5962: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203j is set to 0 (S5963), This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5959 that it is not the jackpot B (S5959: No), the gaming state at the time of winning is read out from the gaming state storage area 203cb (S5965). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a time saving state (S5966). If it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving state (S5966: Yes), the time-saving counter 203j is set to 0 (S5960), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5966, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the time-saving state (S5966: No), 10000 is set in the time-saving counter 203j (S5964), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5951, if it is determined that the value of the variable variable upper limit counter 203cj is not less than 35 (S5951: No), the value of the short time counter 203j is set to 50 (S5967), and the value of the variable variable upper limit counter 203cj is set to 50 (S5967). The value is set to clear (S5968), and this processing ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 348 to 351. First, main processing 4 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 348. This main process 4 is a process executed in place of the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 257).

Of the main processing 4 in this fourth control example (see FIG. 348), each of the processing in S2101 to S2113 and S2115 to S2120 is different from the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 257) in S2101 to S2113 and S2115, respectively. The same processes as those from S2120 to S2120 are executed. In addition, in the main processing 4 in the fourth control example (see FIG. 348), command judgment processing 4 is used instead of the command judgment processing (S2114, see FIG. 258) of the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 257). It is executed (S2171), and the process moves to S2115. This command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the main control device 110, similar to the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 258). Details of this command determination process 4 (S2171) will be explained with reference to FIG. 349.

FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 4 (S2171) described above. As described above, this command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process executed in place of the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 258). Of the command determination process 4 (S2171) in this fourth control example, each process in S2201 to S2213 is the same as each process in S2201 to S2213 in the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 258). executed.

In addition, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that a stop command is not included in the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110, (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command is included in the unprocessed commands (S2251), and if it is determined that a status command is included (S2251: Yes), the status A status command for executing control according to the gaming status notified by the command is executed (S2252). Details of this status command processing (S2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 350. In addition, when the state command processing (S2252) is completed, the production type and production of the pseudo production (pseudo jackpot production using the pseudo attacker 165, pseudo fluctuating production using the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, etc.) A pseudo effect setting process for setting a period is executed (S2253), and this process ends. Details of this pseudo effect setting process (S2253) will be described later with reference to FIG. 351.

In addition, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S2251 that the status command is not included in the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110, (S2251: No), then it is determined whether the unprocessed commands include a definite variable number command (S2254), and it is determined that the unprocessed commands include a definite variable number command. If so (S2254: Yes), the number of consecutive variable probability states notified by the variable probability command (the value of the variable upper limit counter 203cj provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110) is set as the value of the upper limit frequency counter 223cb of variable probability. After setting (S2255), this process ends. Through the process of S2255, each time the value of the variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is changed on the main control device 110 side (every time the jackpot ends and the variable probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol is set) , the value of the probability variation upper limit number counter 223cb can be updated in synchronization with the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj. Therefore, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, it is possible to accurately grasp the remaining number of jackpots until the upper limit of the variable probability state is reached. In addition, in the process of S2251, if it is determined that the probability variable number command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S2251: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, details of status command processing 4 (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 350. As described above, this status command processing 4 (S2252) is a process for executing control according to the type of gaming status notified by the status command received from the main control device 110.

In this state command processing 4 (see FIG. 350), first, it is determined whether or not a change in the gaming state has been notified (S3601), and it is determined that the gaming state has not been changed (that is, the number of time saving times has been subtracted by 1). If it is determined that the notification has been received, etc.) (S2601: No), the process moves to S3609. On the other hand, if it is determined that a change in the gaming state has been notified by the status command (S3601: Yes), the game state after the change is either a normal state (normal mode) or a variable probability state (variable probability mode). (S3602), and if it is determined that the state is either the normal state or the variable probability state (S3602: Yes), a display command indicating the normal performance mode is set, and the process moves to S3609. Note that the normal performance mode is, as described above, a performance mode in which a performance that appears to be in a normal state in a general gaming machine is executed.

As described above, in the fourth control example, both the normal state and the variable probability state are game states in which the game is progressed by playing a left-handed game aiming at the first ball entrance 64. In addition, even if you win a jackpot, if the gaming state does not become a probable state after the jackpot ends, the fact that you have won a jackpot itself will be kept secret, and the game ball will simply enter the general prize opening in the normal state. The structure is such that it appears as if a prize ball has been awarded. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game without making the player aware of the relatively complicated state transitions until the transition to the most advantageous potential state (potential mode). In other words, even though the player has won the jackpot, only a small number of prize balls (40 balls) can be obtained, which may disappoint the player, or cause the player to enter a variable state and become more likely to open and close the lower electric accessory 64Da. Despite this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being disadvantageous to the player. As a result, the player can be treated as if the player is in a relatively disadvantageous normal state, a variable probability state, or a jackpot state that does not transition to a potential state, as if the disadvantageous gaming state were simply continuing. Since the game can be disguised, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that is easier to understand. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the gameplay from becoming difficult for players to understand, it is possible to prevent players from shying away from playing games using the Pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the state command processing 4 (see FIG. 350) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S3602 that the state notified by the current state command is neither the normal state nor the variable state (S3602: No ), it means that the gaming state notified by the status command is either a potential state (potential mode) or a time saving state, so next, the gaming state notified by the status command is a potential state. It is determined whether there is one (S3604). In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the transition to the probable state (potential mode) has been notified by the state command (S3604: Yes), then whether or not the value of the probable variation upper limit number counter 223cb is 5 or less. (S3605), and it is determined that the value of the definite variation upper limit number of times counter 223b is 5 or less (that is, the number of loops in the definite mode is 30 or more remaining until reaching the definite variation limit number of times). If so (S3605: Yes), a display command indicating the probable performance A mode is set (S3606), and the process moves to S3609. As a result, until the probability mode ends, it is possible to continue executing the effect as if the jackpot state continues (see Figure 324(a)), so the number of rounds is extremely large, over 60 rounds. It is possible to make the player feel as if he or she has won the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, in the process of S3605, it is determined that the value of the definite variation upper limit number of times counter 223b is 6 or more (that is, the number of times the definite mode is looped until reaching the definite variation limit number of times is less than 30 times). If so (S3605: No), a display command indicating the probable performance B mode is set (S3607), and the process moves to S3609. In this precision production B mode, roughly divided into pseudo special 2 variation production, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the game ball is sent to the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. A period in which a ball enters the ball and a variable display effect is executed, and a period in which a pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed are set. In the pseudo jackpot performance, a performance is performed that makes a maximum of five jackpots (and a probability mode between jackpots) appear as if it were one jackpot. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect operation as if a special symbol lottery was executed based on the ball entering the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, and a jackpot state in which the pseudo attacker 165 was opened and closed. This makes it possible to realize operations that are easier for the operator to understand. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S3604, if it is determined that the gaming state notified by the state command is not a definite state (S3604: No), it is determined that the transition to the time saving state (time saving mode) was notified by the state command. Therefore, a display command indicating the time-saving mode is set (S3608), and this processing is ended.

In the process of S3609, the information indicated by the received status command is stored (stored) in the status setting area 223g (S3609), and the information according to the production mode set by the process of any one of S3603, S3606, S3607, and S3608 is stored. is stored in the production mode storage area 223ca (S3610), and the present process ends. By executing this state command processing 4 (see FIG. 350), it is possible to set the production mode according to the gaming state notified from the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, details of the above-mentioned pseudo effect setting process (S2253) will be explained. This pseudo effect setting process (S2253) is a process for setting the effect operation according to the type of pseudo effect set in the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350).

In this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), first, information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is read out (S3701), and it is determined whether or not the read information is information indicating the probable effect A mode. It is determined (S3702). In the process of S3702, if it is determined that the information indicating the potential performance A mode is stored in the performance mode storage area 223ca (S3702: Yes), the discharge for controlling the closing and opening of the flow path switching member 695 is performed. By setting the path switching solenoid to OFF, the flow path switching member 695 is set to an open state (S3703). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the variable probability upper limit counter 223cb is set as the number of rounds of the super jackpot effect (S3704), and the process moves to S3705. In addition, in the super jackpot performance, a performance is performed that makes five rounds of the actual jackpot look like one round. Since all the jackpots of the second special symbol are 10 rounds, the number of rounds for the super jackpot effect is the value of the remaining number of jackpots up to the variable probability limit (value obtained by subtracting the value of the variable probability upper limit number of times counter 223cb from 36). A value multiplied by 2 is set. On the other hand, in the process of S3702, if it is determined that the information stored in the performance mode storage area 223ca is not information indicating the probable performance A mode (S3702), each process of S3703 and S3704 is skipped, The process moves to S3705.

In the process of S3705, it is determined whether the information stored in the production mode storage area 223ca is information indicating the probable production B mode (S3705), and it is determined that the information is the information indicating the probable production B mode. If (S3705: Yes), the value of the probability variable upper limit number counter 223cb is read out (S3706), and based on the read counter value, the performance period of the pseudo jackpot performance is set (S3707), and the performance period of the set jackpot performance is set. The period outside (outside the execution period of the pseudo jackpot effect) is set as the effect period of the pseudo special drawing 2 variable effect (S3708), and the process moves to S3709.

In the processing of S3707 and S3708, for example, if each pseudo jackpot is set to be as many as 5 actual jackpots, and the remaining number of jackpots (remaining number of jackpots up to the variable probability limit) is a value that is not divisible by 5. In this case, the remainder of the number of jackpots divided by 5 is set as the duration of the first pseudo-jackpot performance. More specifically, for example, in the process of S3705, if it is determined that the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 223cb is 8, the remaining number of jackpots up to the probability variable limit number (the number of jackpots won in the current probability mode) ) means 28 times, so the 1st to 3rd (3 times which is the remainder of 28 times divided by 5) jackpot (and the period of probability mode between jackpots) is 1 pseudo-jackpot effect. Set as the performance period. In addition, from then on, a pseudo special 2 variable performance period that is linked to the probability mode period between jackpots, and a pseudo jackpot production period that continues for 5 jackpots (and the probability mode period between jackpots) will be repeated. Set to .

On the other hand, in the process of S3705, if it is determined that the information stored in the performance mode storage area 223ca is not information indicating the probable performance B mode (S3705: No), each process of S3706 to S3708 is skipped. , the process moves to S3709. In the process of S3709, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect is set, and this process ends.

By executing this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), the effect mode of the pseudo effect executed in the probability mode is set to the remaining number of jackpots (the number of jackpots to be won before reaching the probability variable limit number of times). It can be set in a manner according to the following. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game during the probability mode.

In addition, in this fourth control example, in the probability performance B mode, the period of five jackpots is adjusted to be the performance period of one pseudo jackpot performance as much as possible, but it is not limited to this. . For example, the performance period of each pseudo jackpot performance may be configured to be as close as possible (number of jackpot hits). Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 223cb is 8, a pseudo jackpot consisting of four jackpot execution periods (and a probability mode period between jackpots) is executed as a pseudo production. It may be configured such that the effect is set twice, and the pseudo jackpot effect is set four times, which is made up of five jackpot execution periods (and probability mode periods between jackpots). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the difference in the duration of each pseudo jackpot performance and the number of winning prize balls, so it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<About the modification of the first control example>
Next, a modification of the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 352. FIG. 352 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 in this modification. In the configuration of the game board 13 of the first control example described above, the second ball entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 were provided in the right side area (see FIG. 208). On the other hand, this modified example is different in that a second ball entrance 640 and an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 are provided in the right side area.

By configuring in this way, when a player wins a normal figure while playing a left-handed game, the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance without changing the game method. Therefore, when the performance mode of the charge performance is varied based on the general lottery result, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result that is advantageous to the player, so that the effect is that the player can pay attention to the content of the performance to be performed. There is.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as the plurality of special symbol types, but the number of types of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more types of special symbols are used. The special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game feature in which a plurality of special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules, and a game feature in which a lottery (variation) is carried out independently of each other are explained. However, the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A displacement member formed to be displaceable from a reference position in a first direction and capable of moving a game ball as the game ball is displaced in the first direction, and a game from outside the trajectory area of the displacement member to the trajectory area of the displacement member. In a gaming machine equipped with a regulating means for regulating throwing of a ball, the displacement member:
A gaming machine A1 is formed to be movable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

Here, a displacement member is formed to be displaceable from a reference position in a first direction, and is formed to be able to move a game ball as the game ball is displaced in the first direction, and A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means for regulating the throwing of a game ball to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by regulating the regulating means, it is possible to suppress more than a specified number of game balls from being thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the regulating means malfunctions due to sticking or wear, for example, there is a risk that more than the specified number of game balls will be thrown toward the orbital area of the displacement member. In this case, there is a problem that problems may occur due to the number of game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and become caught in the movable part, causing damage. Alternatively, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would flow out of the game area (for example, to the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so the trajectory area of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if the regulating means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown,
Since the orbital area of the displacement member is expanded, more game balls than the specified number can be received in the orbital area. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the drive mechanism part of the displacement member or flowing out of the gaming area, and as a result, problems caused by game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented. It can be made difficult to occur.

The gaming machine A1 includes a passage member formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and whose downstream side is communicated with the orbital region of the displacement member, and the regulating means restricts passage of the game ball in the passage member. Characteristic gaming machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1, the game machine A2 is provided with a passage member formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and whose downstream side is communicated with the orbital region of the displacement member, and the regulating means prevents the game in the passage member. Since the passage of balls is restricted, for example, even if the regulating means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the game balls exceeding the specified number will be transferred to the displacement member through the passage member. The ball can be reliably thrown to the orbital area. As a result, problems caused by game balls exceeding the specified number can be made less likely to occur.

In gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed to be able to receive and hold a prescribed number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least change the diameter of the game balls in a second direction from the reference position. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to be displaced by a distance exceeding .

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A2, the displacement member is formed to be able to receive and hold a prescribed number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and also to Since it is formed so that it can be displaced by at least a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball in the direction, after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, by displacing the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction, the specified number can be received. It is possible to throw the game balls exceeding the amount to the orbital region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction.

In this case, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be thrown to the orbit area, so these specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number are separated. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, it is possible to maintain the state in which the displacement member holds a prescribed number of game balls, and to discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the orbital area. It becomes possible.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the displacement member is configured to be able to change its posture when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is formed so that its posture can be changed when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position. While it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the displacement member holds the ball and prevent the game ball from falling from the displacement member, when it reaches a predetermined position, the change in the posture of the displacement member is used to release the game ball. can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

The gaming machine A4 includes a recess that is recessed in a trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member is recessed in the recess when it is displaced in the first direction. A gaming machine A5 comprising a protrusion that is engaged and is formed so that its posture can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a concave portion recessed in the orbit region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The structure includes a protrusion that is engaged with the recess when the displacement member is moved, and the attitude of the displacement member can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess. Therefore, the structure for changing the attitude of the displacement member can be simplified.

In the game machine A5, the protrusion is provided to protrude from the displacement member in the first direction, and the protrusion tip is in contact with the lower half of the game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being touched.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A5, the protrusion is provided to protrude from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion can be used to prevent the game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member. (In other words, it is formed so that it can come into contact with the lower half of the game balls exceeding the specified number), so when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball can be moved by touching the lower half of the game ball with the protrusion. You can move it while pressing it. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily ejected from the orbit area.

In addition, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls thrown to the orbital region of the displacement member (game balls exceeding the specified number), so that such protrusion is prevented. A distance can be secured between the specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number by the protruding length of the part. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the orbital area.

Furthermore, since the protrusion serves both the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the recess and the role of moving the game ball while pushing its lower half, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product can be improved. Cost reduction can be achieved.

A gaming machine A7 in gaming machine A5 or A6, wherein the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the recessed portion in the first direction is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is (That is, game balls exceeding the specified number) can easily pass through the recessed portion when being moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily ejected from the orbit area.

In any of gaming machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in a trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and is higher than the recess. The game ball includes a wall portion located on the first direction side, and when the game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member is moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved toward the wall portion. The game machine A8 is characterized in that a change in posture of the displacement member is regulated by contacting the displacement member with the displacement member.

According to the game machine A8, in any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and has a recessed portion. When a game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member is moved in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is located on the first direction side of the wall. Since the displacement member is in contact with the displacement member, the posture change of the displacement member can be regulated, so while the displacement member maintains the state in which it holds the specified number of game balls, it only releases game balls that exceed the specified number. It can be easily ejected from the orbital area.

That is, since the wall part is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the protrusion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball By bringing the lower half of the ball into contact with the wall, the game ball can easily get over the wall. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member, so that the displacement member Changes in posture can be regulated, and falling of the prescribed number of game balls held by the displacement member can be suppressed. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls, only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be easily discharged from the orbital area.

On the other hand, if no game balls (that is, more than a specified number of game balls) are thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member, no game balls are interposed between the wall and the displacement member, so the protrusion is inserted into the recess. By being engaged, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, by utilizing the change in the posture of the displacement member, it is possible to easily discharge the prescribed number of game balls (namely, the game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member.

A gaming machine A9 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein the regulating means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the regulating means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the regulating means is configured to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member. Throwing of game balls to the orbital region of the member can be regulated or allowed. In other words, regulation or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member. It is not necessary to control the driving means for driving the regulating means or each of these means, and accordingly, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of the operation.

In the game machine A9, the regulating means allows the game ball to be thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. Characteristic gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A9, the regulating means operates in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position to the second direction to prevent the game ball from moving into the trajectory area of the displacement member. Since the ball is allowed to be thrown, it is possible to reliably throw the game ball to the orbital region of the displacement member and the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, a base member on which the displacement member is disposed to be displaceable, and a base member disposed vertically below and vertically above the end of the base member on the first direction side; A gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is equipped with a collecting member having an opening at the bottom.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A10, the displacing member is disposed vertically below the base member on which the displaceable member is displaceably disposed, and the end on the first direction side of the base member. and a collection member having an opening vertically upward, so that the game balls that are moved as the displacement member moves in the first direction and are ejected from the trajectory area of the displacement member (i.e., the number exceeding the specified number) are Game balls) can be received and collected through the opening of the collection member.

In the game machine A11, the base member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the opening of the collection member is formed at least in the first position in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that it is formed in a size that is located vertically below the end on the direction side.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed to be movable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the collection member can be displaced at least to the retracted position or the displaced position. Since the base member is formed in a size that is located vertically below the end on the first direction side of the base member, even if the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position, it will not be ejected from the orbital area of the displaced member. The game balls (that is, the game balls in excess of the specified number) can be received through the opening of the collection member and collected.

In any of gaming machines A5 to A8, by being inserted into the recessed space of the recessed part,
A gaming machine A13 characterized in that it includes an insertion member that restricts engagement of the protrusion with the recess.

According to the gaming machine A13, any one of the gaming machines A5 to A8 includes an insertion member that is inserted into the recessed space of the recess to prevent the protrusion from engaging with the recess. With the displacement in the first direction, it is possible to suppress the attitude of the displacement member from changing when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region of the displacement member. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the orbital area.

The gaming machine A13 includes a base member that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and on which the displaceable member is disposed so as to be displaceable, and the insertion member is arranged such that the base member is displaced to the retracted position. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that when the base member is moved to a displacement position, the base member is inserted into the recessed space of the recessed part, and is separated from the recessed space of the recessed part when the base member is displaced to a displacement position.
4.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member in the first direction is Accordingly, when the game balls exceeding the prescribed number are discharged from the orbital area of the displacement member, the posture of the displacement member is suppressed from being changed, and the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess, so that the protrusion engages with the recess as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. By being combined, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed and a prescribed number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
A downstream passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downstream passage, and a game ball flowing down the downstream passage into one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine comprising a distributing means for distributing game balls, the displacing member being formed to be displaceable and receiving game balls from the first branch passage, the displacing member coming into contact with the distributing means and being displaced. The game machine B1 is characterized in that the distribution means is displaced to switch the distribution destination.

Here, there is a downstream passage through which the game ball flows, a first branch passage and a second branch passage that branch from the downstream passage, and a game ball that has flown down the downstream passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. Gaming machines are known that are equipped with an allocating means for allocating (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-223
No. 176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game balls flowing down the flowing path are
Since the structure is such that one ball is alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flowing passage are distributed equally (in other words, half each) to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. Can be sorted. That is, there was a problem in that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage could not be changed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, it is provided with a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and receives the game balls from the first branch passage, and the displacement member comes into contact with the distribution means and is displaced, thereby distributing the game balls. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

According to the game machine B1, the distributing means can be displaced using the displacement of the displacing member, so there is no need to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing means. can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the sorting means is controlled using position detection by a sensor device or drive by a driving means, reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means is reduced due to malfunction due to poor detection or control. However, according to the game machine B1, the allocation destination by the allocation means can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the allocation operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives game balls from the first branch passage, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member. The game balls distributed to the passage can be surely received by the displacement member.

The gaming machine B1 includes a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the distributing means to maintain the distribution destination by the distributing means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the displacing member By displacing the distributing means in a direction opposing the direction of the biasing force, the distribution destination by the distributing means is switched to the other of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the biasing force A game machine B2 characterized in that the destination of distribution by the distribution means is returned to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage by the biasing force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, a biasing force is applied to the distribution means,
Since the biasing means is provided for maintaining the destination of distribution by the distribution means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the destination of distribution by the distribution means from being changed inadvertently. In this case, after the distribution means is displaced with the displacement of the displacement member and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging means, so that the displacement It is not necessary for the member to be in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member can be increased.

A gaming machine B3 in the gaming machine B2, wherein the biasing means applies a biasing force to the distributing means to maintain the destination of distribution by the distributing means in the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the biasing means applies a biasing force to the distributing means to maintain the destination of distribution by the distributing means in the second branch passage, so that the displacement member It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage in a state where the game balls cannot be received by the distribution means.

The gaming machine B3 includes a base member that is formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position and on which the displacement member is disposed, and when the base member is disposed at the first position. , the displacement member is capable of receiving game balls from the first branch passage and is capable of contacting the distribution means, and when the base member is disposed at the second position, the displacement member A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the member cannot receive game balls from the first branch passage and cannot come into contact with the sorting means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, it is provided with a base member that is formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacing member is disposed on the base member. , a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member disposed in the first position, and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced in a state in which the base member is disposed in the second position can be formed. Therefore, the performance effect can be increased accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is placed in the second position, the displacement member cannot receive game balls from the first branch passage, and in such a state, the displacement member cannot come into contact with the distribution means. Therefore, in a state in which the displacement member cannot receive game balls (a state in which the base member is disposed at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch path.

A gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the gaming machine B4 includes a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distributing means is disposed on the second base member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B4, it is provided with a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distributing means is disposed on the second base member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the base member from increasing in size.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be able to be displaced at least between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In the state in which the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state in which the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive game balls from the first branch passage. A game machine B6 characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.
.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be able to be displaced at least between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, When the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member receives game balls from the first branch passage. Since the game balls can be received and the destination of distribution by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the prescribed number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game balls while the distribution destination by the distribution means is still switched to the first branch passage, so the displacement member There is a possibility that game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received may be distributed to the first branch passage. If a means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the first branch passage is provided separately, the structure becomes complicated, reliability decreases, and product cost increases.

On the other hand, according to game machine B6, after the displacement member is displaced to the switching position and a prescribed number (or less than the prescribed number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. When this happens, the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, so it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down into the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage. Also,
Since there is no need to separately provide the above-mentioned means, reliability can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

In gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface thereof, and has a resistance that provides resistance to game balls passing through the first branch passage. A game machine B7 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface of the first branch passage, Since the game ball is provided with a resistance means that applies resistance to the game ball, it is possible to slow down the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage. Therefore, since the time required for the displacement member to be displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened accordingly, the game ball can be reliably received by the displacement member. Further, since the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be reduced, the output of the driving means can be reduced, and product costs can be reduced.

In the game machine B6 or B7, the distributing means is configured to displace the first distributing means according to the displacement of the distributing means.
It includes a first projecting part and a second projecting part that are formed to be able to move in and out of the branch passage, and the first projecting part protrudes into the first branch passage to attract game balls flowing down the downstream passage. Said second
The second protruding and retracting part is formed so as to be able to be distributed into branch passages, and the second protruding and retracting part is smaller than the first protruding and retracting part.
By being located on the downstream side of the branch passage and protruding into the first branch passage, it is formed to be able to restrict the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage, and the first protruding and retracting portion and the second
A gaming machine B8 characterized in that when one of the protruding and retracting parts protrudes into the first branch passage, the other part is retracted out of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distributing means has a first projecting and retracting section that is formed to be retractable relative to the first branch passage as the distributing means is displaced; The first projecting part includes a second projecting part, and the first projecting part is formed to be capable of distributing game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the second branching passage by protruding into the first branching passage. The first projecting part is located downstream of the first branching passage and protrudes into the first branching passage to be able to restrict the flow of game balls distributed to the first branching passage. In the state where one of the second projecting and retracting parts protrudes into the first branch passage, the other is retracted outside the first branch passage, so that the distributing means can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member. Then, only the prescribed number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, the first state in which the first protruding part protrudes and distributes the game balls flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage, and the first state in which the first protrusion part retracts allows the game balls flowing down the flow passage to be distributed to the second branch passage. A second state in which the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage; a third state in which the second protruding portion protrudes to restrict the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage (storage of game balls); 2. By retracting the retractable part, the game balls stored in the first branch passage flow down and are received by the displacement member.
By combining these states, only a prescribed number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine B8, the distribution means includes the first appearing part and the second appearing part, that is,
Since it is formed as one piece, the structure of the distributing means (the structure for operating the first protruding and retracting part and the second protruding and retracting part to exhibit their functions) can be simplified. Furthermore, when one of the first protruding and retracting parts protrudes into the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the first branch passage. It is sufficient if the distributing means is also formed so as to be able to be displaced into two positions depending on the position (and receiving position). That is, by displacing the distribution means at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution means and the structure for displacing the distribution means in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distribution operation can be improved accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
A downstream passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downstream passage, and a game ball flowing down the downstream passage into one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with a distributing means for distributing game balls, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a flow state changing means located downstream of the distributing means and regulating or allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. Gaming machine C1.

Here, there is a downstream passage through which the game ball flows, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downstream passage, and a game ball flowing down the downstream passage into one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. Gaming machines are known that are equipped with an allocating means for allocating (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-223
No. 176). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the game ball flowing down the downstream path,
Since the game is only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, there is a problem in that it is insufficient to provide players with interest.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, it is provided with a flow state changing means that is located downstream of the distribution means and that regulates or allows the flow of game balls in the first branch passage. can be given.

That is, by the operation of the flow state changing means, the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage is restricted and the game balls are stored in the first branch passage, and the game balls are allowed to flow down in the first branch passage. , the game balls stored in the first branch passage can be made to flow down (released).
As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the downstream passage into either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, there is also an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the game balls distributed to the first branch passage. , and the action of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (release). As a result, it is possible to provide interest to the player.

The gaming machine C1 includes an integral member in which the distributing means and the flow state changing means are integrally formed, and when the destination of distribution by the distributing means is the first branch passage, the first branch passage The downward flow of game balls in the first branch passage is regulated by the downward flow state changing means, and when the destination of distribution by the allocating means is the second branch passage, the downward flow of the game balls in the first branch passage is regulated by the downward flow state change means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it is allowed.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, since the distributing means and the flowing state changing means are provided with an integral member formed integrally, the distributing means and the flowing state changing means are operated. The structure can be simplified and the reliability of operation can be improved. That is, when the distributing means and the flow state changing means are formed separately, they are two parts, which complicates the structure for operating these two parts and leads to a decrease in operational reliability. On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, the distribution means and the flow state changing means can be formed as a single component, so the structure can be simplified accordingly, reducing product costs and improving operational reliability. can be achieved.

Further, in this case, when the destination of distribution by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage due to the operation of the integrated member, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, When the game balls are stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the second branch passage, the flowing state changing means allows the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage, and the game balls are stored in the first branch passage. It is possible to make the game ball that was previously held flow down (release). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage (storage); Not only can the motion of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (release) be formed, but also these motions of storing and releasing can be formed alternately in conjunction with the distribution motion.

In the game machine C2, the integral member is formed so as to be displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and when the integral member is displaced to the first state position, the distributing means is displaceable between the first state position and the second state position. The integrated member is disposed at a position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is disposed at a position to restrict the flow of game balls in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the sorting means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the sorting destination, and the flowing state changing means is arranged at a position which allows the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. A gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the integral member is formed to be able to be displaced between the first state position and the second state position, and when the integral member is displaced to the first state position, , the distributing means is disposed at a position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, the flowing state changing means is disposed at a position regulating the downward flow of the game balls in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distribution means is arranged in a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flowing state changing means is arranged in a position that allows the game ball to flow down in the first branch passage.
By displacing the integral member in two positions (the first state position and the second state position), in addition to the action of distributing the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage,
It is possible to form an action that temporarily stops the flow of game balls distributed to the branch passage (storing) and an action that causes the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (release), and also to store and release the stopped (stored) game balls. These actions can be formed alternately in conjunction with the sorting action. That is, by simplifying the structure, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve operational reliability.

In the gaming machine C3, the integral member is formed to be rotatable, and at least the flowing state changing means is formed to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage, and by protruding into the first branch passage, the game ball can be changed. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the gaming machine C4 is formed in a shape curved in an arc centered on the rotation axis of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, the integral member is rotatably formed, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract from the first branch passage. The ball protrudes from the inner wall of the first branch passageway to prevent the game balls from flowing down, and because it is formed into an arcuate shape centered on the rotation axis of the integral member, the flow state changing means can be moved in and out of the inner wall of the first branch passage. The area of the hole opened can be reduced.

A gaming machine C5 in the gaming machine C4, wherein the flow state changing means is disposed in such a manner that the side facing the upstream side of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C4, the flow state changing means is arranged in such a manner that the side facing upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow state is changed to the first branch passage. In the initial state where the means starts to protrude (i.e., the state in which only the distal end side of the flow state changing means is protruded into the passageway), the shape of the distal end side of the flow state changing means can be adjusted so that it is easy to restrict the flow of the game ball. The game balls can be arranged in the same direction, and the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be easily regulated.

In addition, in a state where the flowing state changing means is maximally protruded into the first branch passage and regulating the flowing down of the game ball, the game ball can be held stably by the concave part of the flowing state changing means, so that the wild movement of the game ball can be suppressed. .

The gaming machine C4 or C5 includes a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the integrated member to bias the flow state changing means in a direction in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage, A gaming machine C6 characterized in that a distance to the rotation axis of the integral member is larger than a distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the gaming machine C6 includes a biasing device that applies a biasing force to the integral member to bias the flow state changing device in the direction of protruding into the first branch passage. Therefore, by using this biasing force, it is possible to easily maintain the integral member in a position in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage (ie, the first state position).

In this case, in the game machine C6, the distance from the flowing state changing means to the rotating shaft of the integral member is made larger than the distance from the distributing means to the rotating shaft of the integral member, so that the flowing game balls collide. Since the distance from the rotation axis is large, even when the same impact force is applied, the flow state changing means is likely to retract, and the biasing direction of the biasing means is such that the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. By setting the flow state changing means in the direction of immersion, it is possible to suppress the flow state changing means from being retracted by the biasing force.

In the game machine C6, the integrated member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flow state changing means projects into the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the integral member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage, so the integral member is The member is placed in a position where the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage (i.e., the first state position)
can be easily maintained. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the falling state changing means from being immersed by its own weight.

Furthermore, even if the biasing means falls off, the integral component is maintained in a posture in which the flowing state changing means protrudes into the first branching passage due to its own weight, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down into the first branching passage. It can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of game balls in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first branch passage is controlled by the flow state changing means. A game machine C characterized in that, in a state where a prescribed number of game balls are stored in the branch passage, the game balls flowing down the downstream passage can flow down to the second branch passage.
8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flowing down of the game ball in the first branch passage is changed by the flowing state changing means. When a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the downstream passage are configured to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that more than the specified number of game balls can flow down. When flowing down the passage, game balls exceeding a specified number can be prevented from staying in the passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of assigning the distribution destination to the second branch passage) from being hindered by the game balls stuck in the downstream passage.

In the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the downstream passage facing the second branch passage is configured to move the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the end of the prescribed number of game balls stored in the first branch passage. A game machine C9 is formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of the game ball on the second branch passage side.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the downstream passageway facing the second branching passage allows the game balls flowing down the downstream passageway to be controlled by the specified number of balls stored in the first branching passage. Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface on the second branch passage side of the last game ball among the game balls,
After the game ball flowing down the downstream path collides with the last game ball among the prescribed number of game balls, it can be easily caused to flow down to the second branch path.

Incidentally, the last game ball among the prescribed number of game balls means the game ball located on the upstream side (on the opposite side to the flow state changing means). Further, when the specified number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

A gaming machine C10 in the gaming machine C8 or C9, wherein the downstream end of the downstream passage is formed in a different direction from the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C8 or C9, the downstream end of the downstream passage is formed in a different direction from the upstream end of the first branch passage, so that the downstream passage can be When a flowing game ball collides with the last game ball out of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball is determined by the first branch passage. The flow direction can be different from the flow direction at the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tail game ball from flying out of the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force upon collision.

In any one of gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed to be able to appear and retract with respect to the downstream passage or the first branch passage, and the position of the distributing unit is located in the downstream end of the downstream passage in the downstream direction. A gaming machine C11 characterized in that the inner wall is an extension of the inner wall.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distributing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the downstream passage or the first branch passage, and its appearing and retracting position is different from that of the downstream passage. Since it is an inner wall on the extension line of the downstream end of the passageway in the downstream direction, the distribution means can be made to protrude at a position close to the game balls flowing down from the downstream end of the downstream passageway. Therefore,
It is possible to shorten the time required from when the distributing means starts to protrude into the downstream passage or the first branch passage to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, the allocation destination can be switched more reliably by the allocation means.

In the gaming machine C11, the sorting means is for distributing game balls flowing down the flowing passageway to the second branching passage by protruding into the downstream passageway or the first branching passage, and the distribution means A gaming machine C12 characterized in that the protruding direction of the means is set to point toward the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, the distributing means is protruded into the downstream passageway or the first branching passage to distribute the game balls flowing down the downstream passageway to the second branching passage. Since the protruding direction of the distributing means is set to point toward the upstream end of the second branch passage, when a game ball flowing down the downstream passage comes into contact with the distributing means during the protruding operation, The game ball can be pushed into the second branch passage with the protruding operation of the distribution means. As a result, distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downwardly toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed to be able to roll on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and the flowing down state A game machine C13 characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. The flow state changing means is formed to be able to roll, and the flow state changing means is formed to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state where the flow of the ball can be regulated. As a result, when the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage and the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow state changing means is used to regulate the flow of the game ball. The protrusion can be easily fixed in time.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage, and at least in the state of maximally protruding into the first branch passage, the flow state changing means A game machine C14 characterized in that a force component is applied from the game ball to the flowing state changing means.

According to the game machine C14, in any of the game machines C1 to C13, the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first branch passage, and at least in the state of protruding to the maximum into the first branch passage, the flow state changing means does not protrude. Since a force component in the direction of the ball is applied from the game ball to the flow state changing means, when regulating the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage, the impact of the game ball colliding with the ball causes the ball to flow downward. It is possible to prevent the state changing means from becoming immersed. Therefore, it is possible to easily control the flow of game balls.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, one side of which is disposed displaceably on the base member, and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, the base member displaces when the displaceable member is displaced. A gaming machine D1 comprising a suppressing means for suppressing a reaction of a member.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member whose one side is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member (for example, , JP 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between an extended position where the base member is extended into the gaming area and visible to the player and a retracted position where the base member is retreated from the gaming area, the base member is It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in a state where it is placed in the extended position.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, one side of the base member is disposed on the base member so that it can be displaced, so when the displaceable member is displaced, the base member wobbles with respect to the base member using the one side as a fulcrum. There was a problem in that it was easy for this to occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since it is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

Note that the reaction force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member includes, for example, one generated due to a change in the center of gravity due to the displacement of the displacement member, and one generated due to the action of inertial force due to an increase or decrease in the displacement speed (change in acceleration) of the displacement member. Examples include those generated due to a reaction force when a displacement member is displaced and ejects a game ball.

In the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably disposed on the base member, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold and emit a game ball, and the arrangement member is configured to: A game machine D characterized in that the game ball is formed to be able to be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member.
2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displacing member is formed to be able to hold and eject the gaming ball. is,
Since the arrangement member is formed to be able to be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when a game ball is launched from a displacement member, the center of gravity position of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball, and for example, the center of gravity position of the base member is moved in a direction that offsets the change in the center of gravity position due to the launch of the game ball. When a configuration in which the installation member is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wobbling of the base member due to a change in the center of gravity position. In addition, when a game ball is fired from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction due to the firing of the game ball. When adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wobbling of the base member due to reaction.

A game machine D3, which is the game machine D1 or D2, and includes a reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member when the displacement member is displaced.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, a reverse member is displaced with at least a displacement component in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Therefore, the change in the center of gravity position of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be reduced by the displacement of the opposite member. As a result, wobbling of the base member due to changes in the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Note that if the configuration is such that the displacement of the opposite member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, at least a portion of the inertial forces of both can be canceled out. As a result, wobbling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine D2 or D3 is characterized by comprising a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposed member or (and) the reverse member to displace the disposed member or (and) the reverse member. Game machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D2 or D3, there is a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposed member or (and) the reverse member to displace the disposed member or (and) the reverse member. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the disposed member and/or the reverse member. That is, the drive means for displacing the displacement member is connected to the disposed member or (and)
It can also be used as a driving means for displacing the opposite member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced by that much, and its wobbling can be easily suppressed.

In addition, since it is possible to displace the disposed or (and) opposite member mechanically synchronized with the displacement of the displaceable member, for example, the position of the displaceable member can be detected by a sensor device, and the disposed or disposed member can be disposed in accordance with the detection result. Control for driving the member or (and) reverse member by a driving means is not required, which reduces product costs and improves the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or (and) reverse member relative to the displacement member. can be secured.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member may start displacement from a second position, or start displacement from a first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. A gaming machine D5, which is formed so as to be able to form, and starts displacement from the first position at least when the base member is placed at a predetermined position with respect to the base member.

Here, when displacing the displacement member from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximum, so
The base member tends to wobble due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts displacing from the second position, and is located on one side of the base member from the second position. The base member is formed so as to be able to form a mode in which the displacement starts from a first position close to In the visible extended position), the displacement starts from the first position, so that shaking of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position, by setting the first position as the starting position for displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the displacement member can be reduced from the base member. The member can be kept close to the fulcrum at which it wobbles with respect to the base member, and the effect of inertial force when the displacing member is displaced from a stopped state can be made less likely to act on the base member. As a result, wobbling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

A game machine D5 comprising a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is disposed on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D5, the game machine D6 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member in which a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear is formed, and the rack member is provided with a displacement member. is arranged, so when starting the displacement of the displacement member from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is It can be kept close to the fulcrum (the fulcrum point when shaking). As a result, wobbling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

A gaming machine D7 in the gaming machine D6, wherein the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction in which it moves away from one side of the base member.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction in which the displacement member moves away from one side of the base member. In the state where the rack member is disposed on the base member, the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member must be based on the portion on the rack gear side where the pinion gear is engaged after the displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed towards one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be kept closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member wobbles relative to the base member), and as a result, when the displaceable member is displaced from a stopped state, Shaking of the base member can be easily suppressed.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D7 includes a support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member on the base member, and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure, The displacement member is formed to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism includes a regulating means that restricts the base member from being displaced in a direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 comprising:

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines D1 to D7, there is a support structure that movably supports one side of the base member on the base member, and a base member that is supported by the support structure is driven. The displacement member is formed to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is configured to displace the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the regulating means is provided, it is possible to suppress the base member from being displaced relative to the base member due to a reaction. As a result, the occurrence of wobbling of the base member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
A gaming machine equipped with a rotating drum member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer circumferential surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player, further comprising a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating drum member. Characteristic gaming machine E1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a drum member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so that it can be seen by the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this gaming machine, the spinning drum member is formed into a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or by stopping the spinning drum member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is only possible to form a performance mode that allows the player to visually recognize the display on the outer circumferential surface as the spinning drum member rotates or stops, so there is little change in the performance mode, and the performance effect is limited. The problem was that it was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member is disposed movably on the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, the display on the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the drum member rotates or stops. In addition to the presentation mode that is visually recognized, it is possible to form a presentation mode that displaces the displacement member, so that the presentation mode can be changed accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the drum member taken along a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis does not necessarily have to be circular, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the drum member does not have to be a circumferential surface, and may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position, and in the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is formed by the displacement member. , A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the second position, at least a portion of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the drum member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotation drum member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be made smaller, and the space required for the rotating drum member to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a portion of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotation drum member, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the displacement member, resulting in a dramatic effect. can be increased. Further, for example, by rotating the drum member with the displacement member placed in the first position and arranging (displacing) the displacement member in the second position when the rotation of the drum member is stopped, A portion (displacement member) that was visually recognized as the outer circumferential surface of the drum member can be formed to protrude outward in the radial direction of the drum member, thereby increasing interest.

The gaming machine E2 is provided with a light emitting means for emitting light, the drum member is formed with an internal space, the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space, and the displacement member is disposed in the second
A game machine E3 characterized in that when the drum member is displaced to the position, the outer circumferential surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, it is equipped with a light emitting means that emits light,
The drum member is formed with an internal space, and a light emitting means is disposed in the internal space,
When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside, and the displacement member is moved to the second position. By being displaced to the 1st position, the radiation to the outside can be blocked. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

A game machine E4, which is any one of the game machines E1 to E3, and includes a drive means that generates a driving force, and a transmission means that transmits the drive force of the drive means to the drum member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the drum member to be rotatable and to arrange the displacement member in the drum member so that it can be displaced, a driving means is required for each of the drum member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulk. Further, when a drive means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the drum member, the weight of the drum member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop rotation of the drum member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a driving means for generating a driving force is provided, and the driving force of the driving means is applied to the drum member and the displacement member. Since the rotation drum member is provided with a transmission means for transmitting data, the rotation drum member can be rotated and the displacement member can be displaced by using one driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs. Furthermore, since there is no need to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating drum member, the weight of the rotating drum member can be reduced, and rotation of the rotating drum member can be smoothly started or stopped.

In the game machine E4, the driving means is formed to be able to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmission means includes a rotational side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the drum member, and a rotating side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the drum member; a displacement side transmission means for transmitting rotational driving force to the displacement member; and a displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force to either the rotational side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means according to the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means; A game machine E5 characterized by comprising a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other side.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed to be able to generate rotational driving force, and the transmission means is a rotational side transmission that transmits the rotational driving force of the driving means to the drum member. means, a displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and a rotational driving force is transmitted to either the rotational side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means depending on the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means. Since it is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that interrupts transmission to the other, simply by switching the rotational direction of the drive means, it is possible to switch the drive target (the drum member or the displacement member) driven by the rotational drive force. That is, depending on the rotational direction of the driving means, it is possible to switch between the rotation of the drum member and the stopping of the rotation, and the displacement of the displacement member and the stopping of the displacement. Can be simplified.

In the gaming machine E5, the rotation side transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the drum member, and one gear of the gear train. A game machine E6 comprising a load gear that is meshed with each other.

Here, in a structure that uses a one-way clutch mechanism to switch the driven object (circle drum member or displacement member) according to the rotational direction of the drive means, when the transmission of the driving force from the drive means is cut off, The drive force allows rotation or displacement in the previously driven direction. Therefore, for example, when the drive target of the driving means is switched from the drum member to the displacement member and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the drum member becomes rotatable and continues to rotate due to inertia (rotation). There is a risk that

On the other hand, according to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E5, the rotation side transmission means is a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive means to the drum member. and a load gear meshed with one of the gears in the gear train, so even if the transmission of rotational driving force from the drive means is cut off, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is reduced. ) can be used to prevent the rotation drum member from continuing to rotate.

A gaming machine E7 characterized in that the gaming machine E5 or E6 is provided with a reverse rotation regulating means for regulating the rotating drum member from being rotated in a direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. .

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a reverse rotation regulating means is provided for regulating the rotating drum member from being rotated in a direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotating drum member from being rotated in the opposite direction due to, for example, a deviation in the center of gravity of the rotating drum member or a collision with a game ball.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the drum member is formed with an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is opened. A gaming machine E8 is characterized in that a gaming machine E8 is connected to a gaming area.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2 or E3, the drum member is formed with an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is opened,
Since the internal space is communicated with the gaming area, game balls flowing down the gaming area can be made to flow into the internal space of the spinning drum member, or game balls in the internal space of the spinning drum member can be made to flow out into the gaming area. . Moreover, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer circumferential surface of the rotation drum member is closed, thereby blocking the inflow and outflow of game balls between the internal space and the game area. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is rotated to the rotation drum member. A game machine E9 is characterized in that it extends into a region.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E8, the displacement member is rotatably supported on one side by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member is rotatably supported on the rotation drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, Since the other side extends to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the drum member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9, the gaming machine E10 is characterized in that, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface thereof is tilted downward from the other side toward the one side.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E9, when the displacing member is displaced to the second position, its upper surface is tilted downward from the other side toward the one side, so that the gaming area can be After the game ball that has flown down is received on the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) into the internal space of the rotation drum member along the downward slope of the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the drum member by using the displacement member.

A gaming machine E11, which is the gaming machine E9 or E10, further comprising a displacement setting means for regulating or permitting displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotation drum member.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E9 or E10, it is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the drum member, so that the projected displacement member Interference with other members around the drum member can be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines E9 to E11 is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member, and the rotation regulating member is arranged so that the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is moved to the second position. A gaming machine E12 characterized in that rotation of the drum member is restricted when it is extended into a gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member is provided, and the rotation regulating member is arranged such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position. When the other side of the displacement member is extended to the game area, the rotation of the rotation drum member is restricted, so that the rotation drum member is rotated with the displacement member extended and positioned on its rotation trajectory. Interference of the displacement member with other members can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress rotation of the drum member due to the load that is applied when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine equipped with a rotating drum member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer circumferential surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the spinning drum member has an internal space formed inside the rotating drum member, and an internal space that is connected to the outside. A gaming machine F1, characterized in that it is provided with a communication port formed to allow game balls to pass through.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a drum member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so that it can be seen by the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this gaming machine, the spinning drum member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or by stopping the spinning drum member. be able to. however,
In the conventional gaming machine described above, there was a problem in that the rotating drum member was not fully utilized, as it was only used as a member for holding a display on the outer circumferential surface of the machine for the player to see.
That is, since the rotation drum member needs to hold a display visible to the player, it is formed relatively large. Therefore, while the space occupied by the drum member increases, the portion other than the outer circumferential surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the drum member includes an internal space formed inside the drum member, and a communication port that communicates the internal space with the outside and is formed so that the game ball can pass through. , the game balls flowing down the game area can be caused to flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the spinning drum member, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a storage space for game balls or a ball throwing path, and the spinning drum member can be utilized accordingly.

Note that the communication port may be formed at only one location on the drum member, or may be formed at two or more locations. When the communication port is formed at only one location, the communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up or down according to the rotational position of the spinning drum member, so that the game ball can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward). When the communication port faces downward, the game balls can flow into the internal space, and when the communication port faces downward, the game balls in the internal space can flow out.

Further, the cross-sectional shape of the rotating drum member taken along a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis does not necessarily have to be circular, and may be polygonal, elliptical, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the drum member does not have to be a circumferential surface, and may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

A gaming machine F2 in the gaming machine F1, wherein the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port, so that the first communication port is provided with the first communication port. One of the communication port or the second communication port is an inflow port that allows game balls to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is an outflow port that allows game balls to flow out from the internal space to the outside. It can be done. That is, even without rotating the spinning drum member (while maintaining it in a stopped state), the spinning drum member can be used as a ball throwing path for the game ball. Note that while the rotating drum member is being rotated, the rotating drum member may be utilized as a ball throwing path.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member, and is formed as an inflow port through which game balls flowing down the gaming area flow into the internal space, and the second communication port is A gaming machine F3, characterized in that the gaming machine F3 is formed on an end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotational axis, and is formed as an outlet that allows game balls to flow out from the internal space to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member and is formed as an inflow port through which the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area flow into the internal space. , the second communication port is formed on the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotating shaft, and is formed as an outlet that allows the game balls to flow out from the internal space to the gaming area, so that the second communication port does not allow the game balls to flow into the internal space of the rotating drum member. In addition to making it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow, the game ball can be ejected while the spinning drum member is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating drum member is arranged so that the outer circumferential surface is visible to the player, and the outer circumferential surface has the following features:
Since the first communication port (inflow port) is formed, it is possible to easily allow the player to visually recognize the inflow of game balls. On the other hand, when a second communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member, when the drum member is displaced to a rotational position where the communication port is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the second communication port (outflow port) is formed on the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotation axis, it is possible to create a state in which the game balls can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating drum member.

Any of the game machines F1 to F3 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is moved to the first position. A gaming machine F4, wherein the communication port is shielded by a member and is opened when the displacement member is displaced to a second position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F1 to F3, the game machine F4 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is blocked by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow and outflow of game balls through the communication port is in a blocked state and a permitted state. Can be switched.

In the game machine F4, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the drum member, and the displacement member is in the second position. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that when the gaming machine F5 is displaced, the other side opposite to the one side projects out into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is rotatably supported on one side by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member rotates on the opposite side from the one side. Since the other side extends to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be made to easily flow into the internal space of the rotation drum member using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that one side of the displacement member is located further forward in the rotational direction of the drum member than the other side.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F5, since one side of the displacement member is located further forward in the rotating direction of the drum member than the other side, when the drum member is rotated, Even if the displacement member interferes with a member disposed around the drum member, the force generated by such interference can be applied in the direction of closing the displacement member (displacing it to the first position). That is, when the drum member rotates, the displacement member interferes with other members and is extended (displaced to the second position).
can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with another member and inhibiting the rotation of the drum member.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, there is provided a base member on which the drum member is rotatably disposed, and a base member supported by the base member and arranged in an internal space of the drum member, and A gaming machine F7 is characterized in that it is provided with a fixed member that does not rotate.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, there is provided a base member on which the spinning drum member is rotatably disposed, and an internal space of the spinning drum member that is supported by the base member. Since it is equipped with a fixed member that is disposed in the rotating drum member and does not rotate with respect to the spinning drum member, the game ball that has flowed into the internal space can be held on the fixed member or rolled on the fixed member toward the outlet. ,
As the rotation drum member rotates, the game ball can be prevented from moving wildly in the internal space or being prevented from rolling and remaining in the internal space.

A game machine F8, which is any one of the game machines F4 to F6, and further includes a displacement setting means for regulating or permitting displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotation drum member.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F4 to F6, the second
The displacement member displaced to the position can be prevented from interfering with other members around the drum member.

The gaming machine F5 or F6 includes a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member, and the rotation regulating member is arranged such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is directed to the gaming area. A game machine F9 characterized in that rotation of the drum member is restricted when it is extended.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F5 or F6, it is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member, and the rotation regulating member is arranged so that the displacement member is displaced to the second position. Since the rotation of the drum member is restricted when the other side is extended to the gaming area, the drum member is rotated with the displacement member extended, and other members located on its rotation trajectory are restricted. It is possible to suppress the displacement member from interfering with the displacement member. Further, it is possible to suppress rotation of the drum member due to the load that is applied when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F3, a light emitting means is formed to be able to emit light and is disposed in the internal space of the drum member, and the second communication port is formed on an end face of the drum member in the rotation axis direction. A gaming machine F10 comprising: an opening formed on an end surface opposite to the end surface where the light emitting means is exposed, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, an opening is formed on the end surface of the drum member in the direction of the rotation axis, which is opposite to the end surface where the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is routed through the opening, it is possible to easily secure a space usable for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly flowed out through the second communication port, and the wiring work for electrical connection lines to the opening can be easily performed. In addition, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated as much as possible, the internal space can be
Interference between the game ball rolling toward the communication port and the electrical connection line can be easily suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
A first member and a second member are formed to be displaceable, and the first member has a covered position where at least a portion of the second member is hidden from view, and a state where the first member is disposed at the covered position. In the gaming machine, the first member is movable between a retracted position and a retracted position in which an area that invisibly covers the second member is reduced. A gaming machine G1 is formed to be able to regulate displacement of the gaming machine G1.

Here, the first member and the second member are displaceably formed, and the first member has a covering position where at least a part of the second member is hidden from view, and a state where the first member is disposed at the covering position. A gaming machine is known that is movable between a retracted position and a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the first
After the member is placed in the covered position and the second member is not visible to the player, the first member is moved to the retracted position to expose the second member and make it visible to the player. be able to.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the second member is formed to be displaceable, so when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the second member is not displaced. There is a risk of Therefore, there was a problem in that the second member could not be seen in an appropriate state by the player, and the performance effect was reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the state where the first member is displaced to the retracted position,
Since the second member is formed so as to be able to regulate its displacement, the second member can be made visible to the player in an appropriate state, and the performance effect can be ensured. That is, when performing an effect in which the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which must be performed for the purpose of the effect, is replaced by the displacement of the second member to the retracted position. Used as a means of regulating displacement. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed to be rotatable, and the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so the degree of freedom in designing the second member is increased. can be increased. In other words, the second member does not need to have a shape in which its center of gravity is located at the center of rotation; for example, a shape that is asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the performance effect of the second member can be enhanced. . On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this manner, there is a risk that the second member will rotate (rotate) around the rotation center due to its own weight. Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the production effect.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 includes a displacement member movably disposed on the second member,
The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed to be able to be displaced in a state in which at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming machine G3 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the second member, and the displacement member is configured such that at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced in the state, when performing a performance in which the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the performance effect can be enhanced by further displacing the displacement member. I can do it. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move with the displacement, and the second member may rotate (rotate). Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the production effect.

In gaming machine G3, the second member is arranged so that its outer peripheral surface is visible to the player, and the displacement member has one side rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the displacement member has one side rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the other side, which is the opposite side, is formed so as to be able to extend into a gaming area.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the second member is arranged such that its outer circumferential surface is visible to the player, and the displacement member has one side rotatable to the outer circumferential surface of the second member. is pivoted on
Since the other side opposite to one side is formed so as to be able to extend into the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when an inlet for game balls is formed in the second member, the game balls flowing down the game area can be made easier to flow into the inlet by using the displacement member. . In this case, if the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area, there is a risk that the second member will be rotated due to the load acting at that time and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thereby the state in which the displacement member is extended to a predetermined position in the game area is particularly effective. can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is disposed in the gaming area while facing the outer circumferential surface of the second member in the covered position, and is placed outside the gaming area in the retracted position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G4, the first member is disposed in the gaming area while facing the outer circumferential surface of the second member in the covered position, so that the gaming machine flowing down the gaming area cannot be played. It is possible to prevent the second member from rotating due to the ball colliding with the second member. In particular, when the rotational position of the second member is such that the displacement member is directed toward the gaming area, the game ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tensioned). can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the first member is placed outside the gaming area in the retracted position, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position makes it possible to secure a space for the displacement member to protrude into the gaming area. . Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the second member can be moved closer to the gaming area side (player side), making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement member.

In gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A game machine G6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer circumferential surface of the second member Since the cover is formed in a plate shape that curves along the curve, the space required when moving between the covered position and the retracted position can be reduced. Therefore, space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.
In addition, by forming the first member in a curved manner in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area,
It is possible to prevent the liquid from remaining on the first member disposed at the covering position and to allow it to flow down smoothly.

A gaming machine G7, which is any one of the gaming machines G3 to G6, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and displaceably displace the displacement member on the second member, a driving means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulk. Further, when the second member is equipped with a driving means for displacing the displacement member, the second
Since the weight of the member increases, it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines G3 to G6, a driving means for generating driving force is provided, and the driving force of the driving means is applied to the second member and the displacement member. Since the second member is provided with a transmission means for transmitting data, the first driving means can be used also to rotate the second member and displace the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs. Further, since there is no need to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and rotation of the second member can be smoothly started or stopped.

A gaming machine G8 characterized in that the gaming machine G7 is provided with a connecting means that connects the first member and the displacement member, and links the displacement of the first member to the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G7, the first member and the displacement member are connected to each other, and since the game machine G8 is provided with a connecting means that links the displacement of the first member to the displacement of the displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced. The driving means for displacing the first displacement member can also be used as a driving means for displacing the first displacement member.
In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving force of separate driving means,
If a control failure occurs, there is a risk that the displacement member and the first member will interfere, but since the displacement member and the first member can be mechanically connected and their displacements can be synchronized, the displacement member and the first member can interfere with each other. Interference with one member can be reliably suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the transmission means is , a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in the transmission path of the driving force, and an engagement member disposed between the first member and the second member. and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member, and the driving force is transmitted. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance in the one direction with respect to the first member.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a drive means that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member also remains constant. The displacement member is displaced at a displacement speed, and the displacement mode of the displacement member cannot be changed. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member was insufficient.

Note that the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the drive means, but if the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement sections of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. In order to achieve this speed, it is necessary to install a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control the output of the drive means to increase or decrease according to the detection result of the sensor device, which leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. . Furthermore, the structure and control become complicated, leading to a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the transmission means includes a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in the driving force transmission path, and an engaging member disposed between the members, and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member. At the same time, the driving force is transmitted and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in one direction in advance of the first member. Therefore, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Furthermore, according to the game machine H1, the second member can be caused to advance in one direction relative to the first member regardless of the driving state of the driving means, so that, for example, in the entire displacement section of the displacement member, The drive means can be driven at a constant drive speed, and in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (i.e.
There is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive means (depending on whether it is a predetermined section or another section). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, it is possible to suppress energy consumption.

Furthermore, according to the game machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction relative to the two members, the engagement of the engagement member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. The displacement member can be in a stopped state (non-driven state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driven state is
It can be used as a driving force to drive other members. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, the two members, the displacement member and the other member, can be respectively displaced.

The transmission means is configured such that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engagement member is released and transmission of the driving force is interrupted. It may be something that is done.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable, and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, and in the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member moves the second member in the one direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in a direction of displacement.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable, and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that in a predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member is Since it is formed to be able to act in a direction to displace the two members in one direction, the second member can be displaced in one direction in advance of the first member by utilizing the weight of the displacing member. . That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, when a displacement member is formed to be able to repeatedly rotate 360 degrees around its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotation speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is different from that of the displacement member in other sections. A rotation mode in which the displacement speed (rotation speed) is higher than that, that is, a rotation mode in which the rotation speed is increased or decreased during one rotation, can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body that is rotationally driven by the second member, and a crank member that has a pin that projects from the main body and is located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body. a sliding groove through which a pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed at one end side, and an arm member whose intermediate portion is rotatably supported; A gaming machine H3 characterized in that it is connected to a member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body that is rotationally driven by the second member, a transmission means that projects from the main body, and is located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body. The crank member includes a crank member having a pin portion, and an arm member in which a sliding groove into which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed at one end side and whose intermediate portion is rotatably supported. By rotationally driving the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position as the other end of the arm member reciprocates. . That is,
The displacement direction of the displacement member can be changed without changing the driving direction of the driving means.

In the game machine H3, the displacement member, as the other end of the arm member reciprocates,
While being reciprocated between a first position and a second position, being displaced from the first position to the second position, and being displaced from the second position to the first position, , the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member is changed from a direction in which the second member is displaced in the other direction to a direction in which the second member is displaced in the one direction. Characteristic game machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating movement of the other end of the arm member, and the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position. from the second
The direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member is such that the second member is moved in the other direction during the displacement to the second position and during the displacement from the second position to the first position. Since the direction of displacement is changed from the direction of displacement to the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the displacement member is reciprocated, no matter which direction it is displaced, the direction of displacement of the second member is changed from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed can be increased. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, the displacement member is reciprocated between an extended position (first position), which is a position where the displacement member is extended so that it can be seen by the player, and a retracted position (second position), which is a position that is retracted from the extended position. When operating, when extending the displacement member from the retracted position to the extended position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed halfway, and then the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle to move the displacement member vigorously. In addition to being able to extend the displaceable member to the extended position, when retracting the displaceable member from the extended position to the extended position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until halfway, and the displacement speed of the displaceable member is increased from halfway. As a result, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidable, and in the predetermined section, it is tilted downward in the direction of the slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member is lowered by the second member. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidable and tilted downward in the direction of the sliding displacement in a predetermined section, thereby reducing the weight of the displacement member. Since the second member is formed to be able to act in a direction to displace the second member in one direction, the weight of the displacing member is used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, a gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed to be able to hold a gaming ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold the game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member can hold the game ball. In this state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster. Furthermore, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made to differ depending on whether the displacement member holds a game ball or not, or depending on the number of game balls held. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed in each case. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving part that receives a game ball flowing down the gaming area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving part receives the game ball, the game ball is A gaming machine H7 characterized in that a force applied to the displacement member from the above can be applied in a direction to displace the second member in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H7, in any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member is provided with a receiving section that receives the game ball flowing down the gaming area, and at least in a predetermined section, when the receiving section receives the gaming ball. Since the force that is applied from the game ball to the displacement member is configured to be able to act in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the receiving part receives the game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball is By utilizing this, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster. In addition, the force applied to the displacement member is varied depending on whether the receiving part is receiving the game ball or not, or depending on the falling speed (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball when receiving the game ball. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed in each case. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Note that the game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to a game ball that moves along the front surface of the game board in the direction of gravity, but also includes a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Examples of game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include game balls that collide with nails, tulips, objects, etc. and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity, and balls that roll on a stage and then jump off the stage. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of the drive force transmission path, and a load gear meshed with one gear of the gear train. A gaming machine H8 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means is configured to mesh with a gear train forming part or all of the driving force transmission path and one gear of the gear train. In a predetermined section, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the game ball is received by the receiving part, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. and displacing the second member in advance of the first member in one direction (i.e., making the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections), If the displacement member does not hold the game ball or the receiving part does not receive the game ball, the second member will move against the first member using the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in one direction in advance (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is increased).

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving part does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving part receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is set to be higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. It is possible to easily form a mode of speeding up the process.

<About the concept of the invention using the back case 300 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a game board, a back member disposed on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member disposed on the back member, the fixing member is disposed between the game board and the back member. The fixing member has a protrusion that engages with the displacement member, and includes a displacement member on the back side of the game board that can be operated from the outside between the opposing sides from the game board to the back member, and the fixed member has a protrusion that engages with the displacement member. A game machine I1 comprising: a protruding portion thereof and the displacement member engaging with each other, and the fixing member being disposed on the back surface member.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a game board, a back member disposed on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2004-200112) -3360
Publication No. 3). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by the screw inserted from the front side of the back member. This prevents the fixing member from being removed from the back side of the game board.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the process of arranging the fixing member on the back member, the process of arranging the fixing member on the back member, and the process of fastening the fixing member to the back member are performed from the back side of the back member. This means that the work is done from the front side of the back member, and the work is done from the opposite direction. for that,
There is a problem in that there are many work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the displacement member is disposed between the opposing sides of the gaming board and the back member, and is operable from the outside of the opposing area between the gaming board and the back member on the back side of the gaming board. (displacement member 310), the fixing member includes a protrusion (engaged part 322) that engages with the displacement member, the protrusion and the displacement member engage, and the fixation member is disposed on the back member. Therefore, the fixing member can be disposed on the rear case by a one-way operation from the rear side. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the step of working from the back side and then going around to the front side or reversing the back member. As a result, the work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member can be reduced.

A gaming machine I1, comprising a first member disposed between the gaming board and the back member facing each other, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. I2
.

Here, in recent game machines, the first member (
There is a tendency for equipment (accessory equipment, etc.) to become larger. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the enlarged first member is disposed in front of the fixed member or in a position close to the fixed member, the fixed member is fastened from the front side of the back member. In some cases, the first member becomes a hindrance. Therefore, it has been difficult to arrange the fixing member on the back member by fastening the fixing member with a screw inserted from the front side of the back member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the first
Since the displacement member is provided on the back side of the first member, the first member is provided between the game board and the back member, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. The displacement member can be operated from the outside to engage the displacement member and the fixed member. Therefore, the fixed member can be disposed on the back member without being obstructed by the first member that is disposed between the displacing member and the opposing member from the game board to the back member.

Further, since the displacement member is arranged between the facing member from the back member to the first member, the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member can be arranged between the facing member from the back member to the first member. Therefore, access to the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally released and the fixing member being tampered with (for example, being replaced with an incorrect fixing member).

A gaming machine I3 in the gaming machine I1 or I2, wherein the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back member and the gaming board.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slid on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back member and the game board, so that when the displacement member is displaced, , the amount of displacement between the back member and the game board in the opposing direction can be set to zero. Thereby, it is possible to secure a space for disposing the first member between the displacement member and the game board. the result,
The outer shape of the first member in the direction in which the back member and the game board face each other can be increased, and the degree of freedom in designing the first member can be improved.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is a box comprising a bottom wall portion facing the game board, and a side wall portion erected from an edge of the bottom wall portion toward the game board. an opening is formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member has an operator that is inserted through the opening and projects from the inside of the back member to the outside. A gaming machine I4 comprising:

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is provided with a bottom wall facing the gaming board and an edge of the bottom wall standing on the gaming board side. The displacement member is formed into a box shape, and has an opening formed in either the bottom wall or the side wall, and the displacement member is inserted through the opening and extends from the inside of the back member to the outside. Since it is equipped with a protruding operator, the operator can be operated from the outside of the back member (the outside between the opposing sides from the game board to the back member).
The displacement member can be displaced. Therefore, even when the first member is disposed inside the back member (between the game board and the back member facing each other), the displacement member can be displaced without being hindered by the first member. .

The gaming machine I4 is characterized by comprising a biasing means for biasing the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member when the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged. A gaming machine I5.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine I4, in a state where the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is released, the displacement member is biased in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member. Since the biasing means is provided, if you forget to engage the displacement member and the fixed member, or if the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is incomplete, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with the fixed member. It can be displaced in the direction of release. Therefore, the operator can judge whether the displacement member and the fixed member are properly engaged based on the position where the operating element protruding to the outside of the back member is arranged. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting of engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member.

Note that the biasing means may include a form in which a spring, rubber, etc. is disposed between the displacement member and the back member to bias the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member, or a form in which the displacement member is biased in the direction of disengaging from the fixed member. Examples include a form in which the displacement member acts in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member.

The game machine I4 or I5 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the game board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the same as the outer shape of the game board and the back member when viewed from the front. A game machine that is formed substantially identically, and that when the displacement member and the fixed member are in a non-engaged state, the operator is disposed on the outside between the opposing parts from the game board to the back surface member. I6.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4 or I5, it is provided with an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the game board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the same as that of the game board and the back member. When the displacement member and the fixed member are not engaged with each other,
Since the operator is arranged on the outside of the opposing gap between the game board and the back member, when the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged, when the game board and the back member are housed in the outer frame, the outer frame The operator can be brought into contact with the Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board and the back member from being housed in the outer frame. Therefore, if the fixing member is forgotten to be disposed on the back surface member, or if the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged, the operator can be made aware of the forgetting (abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being housed in the outer frame in a state where the fixing member is forgotten to be disposed on the back member or the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to engage.

A gaming machine I7, which is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the operating element from being operated in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member. .

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a suppressing means for suppressing the operator from being operated in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member due to the operation of the operator. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from disengaging from the fixed member using the operator.

Note that the suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member may include a form in which the operator is pivotally supported so that it can idle in the direction of releasing the engagement. , a form in which the protruding tip of the operator is formed on an inclined surface protruding in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member, and a form in which the operator is disposed between the displacement member and the fixed member. etc. are exemplified.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed;
a first protrusion protruding from the elastic piece; the fixing member includes an accommodating part that opens in the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member; The accommodating portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes into a displacement region of the first protrusion, and the second protrusion is configured to be disposed between the first protrusion and the first protrusion when the displacement member is displaced in one direction. The elastic piece can be displaced by contacting the first member, and by the displacement member being displaced in the other direction, the first member can be brought into contact with the first member and the displacement member and the fixing member can be engaged with each other. A gaming machine I8.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion that projects from the elastic piece, and the fixed member has , an accommodating part opened in the displacement region of the displacement member and recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member; the accommodating part includes a second protrusion protruding from the displacement region of the first protrusion; When the displacement member is displaced in one direction, the second protrusion comes into contact with the first protrusion and can displace the elastic piece, and when the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, the second protrusion comes into contact with the first member. Since the displacement member and the fixing member are brought into contact with each other and can be engaged with each other, the second protrusion can allow displacement of the displacement member in one direction and restrict displacement of the displacement member in the other direction. This makes it possible to restrict the displacement of the displacement member in both the direction of engagement with the fixed member and the direction of detachment.

In the gaming machine I8, the accommodating part is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, the elastic piece is placed in the accommodating part. A gaming machine I9 is characterized in that a gaming machine I9 is accommodated therein.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I8, the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, Since the elastic piece is housed in the housing part, it can be made difficult to operate the elastic piece from outside the housing part when the displacement member and the fixing member are engaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic piece from being manipulated from the outside of the accommodating portion and being elastically deformed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member from being improperly released. In this case, the fixing member can be removed from the back member by cutting the displacement member (base end portion of the accommodated portion) located outside the accommodation portion.

In the gaming machine I9, the displacement member is provided with a plurality of the elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodation part, and the accommodation part is set to a size that can accommodate the plurality of elastic pieces. Machine I10.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodation section, and the accommodation section is set in a space large enough to accommodate the plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the fixed member is removed from the back member by cutting the displacement member (base end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the housing part, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) is placed inside the housing part. In this state, the uncut displacement member (elastic piece) can be stored inside the housing part. Therefore, the cut displacement members (elastic pieces) can be stored and left inside the storage part, so it is possible to compare the number of displacement members stored in the storage part and the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member. In this case, when the fixing member is illegally removed and replaced with an unauthorized fixing member, the difference in the number of the fixing members allows the operator to detect that the gaming machine has been tampered with.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I10, when the displacement member engages with the fixed member, the first member restricts displacement of the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member. A gaming machine I11 characterized in that it is provided with a regulating means.

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I1 to I10, there is a regulation that restricts the displacement of the displacing member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member when the displacing member engages with the fixed member. Since the means is provided, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the displacement member when a force is applied in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member due to an unauthorized person. Therefore, when a force acts in a direction that causes the displacement member to disengage from the fixed member due to fraud, it is possible to prevent the force from concentrating on the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. It is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member or the fixed member due to the force inputted by.

Furthermore, since the first member includes the regulating means, when removing the fixing member from the back member,
By removing the first member from the back member, the restriction on displacement of the displacement member by the restriction means can be released. In this case, by removing the first member, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be accessed, so that the work efficiency when removing the fixing member from the back member can be improved.

Examples of the regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member include a configuration in which a protrusion is arranged inside the engagement recess to regulate elastic deformation of the displacement member, and a configuration in which the protrusion is engaged with the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention using the general winning slot unit 150 as an example>
a base member having a play area on the front side; and a first base member forming decoration on the front side of the base member.
In a gaming machine comprising a decoration means and a second decoration means forming a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means when viewed from the front, the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. A gaming machine J1 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position adjacent to the gaming machine J1.

Conventionally, a base member having a play area on the front side, a first decoration means arranged on the front side of the base member and having decorations formed on the front surface, and a first decoration means arranged on the front side of the first decoration means are conventionally provided. A gaming machine is known that includes a first member and a second decoration means that is disposed in front of the first member and forms a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means when viewed from the front (for example, Unpublished 2007
-000195). According to this gaming machine, the design of the base member can be ensured by allowing the player to visually recognize the decorations of the first decoration means and the second decoration means as one decoration.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second decoration means is disposed in front of the first member, the second decoration means is separated from the first decoration means by the thickness of the first member. placed at a remote location. Therefore, depending on the position (direction of line of sight) from which the player views the base member, the decorations on the first decoration means and the decorations on the second decoration means may be seen to be shifted by the thickness of the first member, There was a problem that the design of the member deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, so that the first decoration means and the second decoration means are The distance between the front and rear can be reduced. Thereby, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means This can prevent the image from being visually recognized as being out of alignment. Therefore, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and the design of the base member can be improved.

Further, the first decoration means may be any type of decoration as long as it forms a decoration, for example, a sticker member having a decoration printed on a plate-shaped member is pasted on the front of the base member, or a decoration is formed on the front of the base member. It is intended to print.

In addition, when the second decoration means is pasted (glued) on the front of the first decoration means, the worker can affix (glue) the second decoration means while visually recognizing the decoration of the first decoration means. can. Therefore, the operator can easily attach the second decoration means to the first decoration means at a position where the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are continuous. Therefore, the work efficiency of the worker who attaches the second decorative means to the first decorative means can be improved.

The gaming machine J1 includes a front member made of a light-transmitting material and having an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the second decoration means when viewed from the front, and disposed in front of the second decoration means, The member is provided with a recessed portion having a larger shape than the outer diameter of the second decorative means on a surface facing the second decorative means, and the recessed dimension of the recessed portion is larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means. The game machine J2 is characterized in that a large value is also set to a large value.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is made of a light-transmitting material, has an outer shape larger than the outer diameter of the second decorative means when viewed from the front, and is disposed in front of the second decorative means. The front member includes a recess formed in a face larger than the outer diameter of the second decoration means on a surface facing the second decoration means, and the recess dimension of the recess is larger than the outer diameter of the second decoration means. Since the thickness is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension, the front member can be disposed on the base member with the second decoration means accommodated in the recess. Thereby, the second decoration means can be prevented from falling off from between the base member and the front member.

Furthermore, since the concave dimension of the concave portion is set to a larger value than the thickness dimension of the second decoration means,
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front member and the first decoration means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from being caught between the front member and the first decoration means, thereby making it difficult for the decoration of the first decoration means to be visually recognized.

The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the second decoration means is disposed by adhering to the bottom surface of the recess. Game machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J2, the inner surface of the recessed portion is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is disposed by being adhered to the bottom surface of the recessed portion of the recessed portion. Since it will be set up,
By arranging the second decoration means along the recessed portion of the front member, the second decoration means can be positioned and arranged with respect to the front member. Thereby, when the front member is disposed in front of the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress the second decoration means from being caught between the opposing edge of the front member and the first decoration means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first decoration means and the front member, and the decoration of the first decoration means can be visually recognized due to dust or dirt being caught between the front member and the first decoration means. This can prevent it from becoming difficult.

In gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the base member from a surface facing the base member, the base member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the front member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by being inserted into the opening.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the front member is positioned relative to the base member by inserting the protrusion into the opening, it is possible to suppress the front member from shifting in position relative to the first decoration means. Further, the second decorative means is positioned relative to the front member by the recessed portion of the front member. Therefore,
By positioning the front member with respect to the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the first decoration means and the second decoration means. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, the second decoration means has a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recessed part, and the second decoration means is formed with a through hole that penetrates at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the projection is inserted into the hole, the second decoration means can be easily arranged on the front member.
That is, simply disposing the second decorative means inside the concave portion of the front member requires the edge of the second decorative means to be disposed along the concave portion. By forming the through hole to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be determined simply by inserting the protrusion into the through hole. As a result, the arrangement of the second decoration means on the front member can be simplified.

Furthermore, since the projection for positioning the front member relative to the first decoration means is inserted into the through hole of the second decoration means, the second decoration means and the first decoration means can be positioned at the same part (protrusion). Therefore, the accuracy of positioning the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In any one of gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that is inclined toward the first decorative means toward the outer edge when viewed from the front, and the second decorative means is provided on the back side of the inclined portion.
A gaming machine J6 characterized in that an edge of a decorative means is provided.

Here, in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize both the decorations of the first decoration means and the decorations of the second decoration means as one decoration, it is necessary to suppress the displacement of the two decorations. However, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are overlapped in the front-back direction, the positions of the decorations on both sides are shifted in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decoration means. There has been a problem in that when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the second decoration means, there is a possibility that a positional shift between the front and back may be recognized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined part that is inclined toward the first decorative means side as it goes toward the outer edge in front view. Since the edge of the second decoration means is disposed on the back side of the front member, misalignment of the decoration due to the difference in the arrangement of the second decoration means and the first decoration means in the front-rear direction can be avoided by the inclined part of the front member. The refraction of light can make it difficult for players to recognize it.

To explain in detail, the light that is reflected by the decoration of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, passes through the inside of the front member, and is emitted from the inclined part, is caused by the slope of the light passing direction with respect to the front surface of the base member. When the angle is made smaller than the inclination angle in the direction perpendicular to the inclined surface of the inclined part with respect to the front of the base member, the inclination angle of the direction of light emission from the inclined part with respect to the front of the base member is The angle of inclination of the light passing direction with respect to the front of the member is made smaller. Therefore, the connecting portion between the first decorative means and the second decorative means is viewed from a direction having a smaller intersecting angle with respect to the front surface of the base member than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the slope surface of the slope portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. The passing direction of the light that is visually recognized by the player can be brought closer to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the positional shift between the front and back.

In gaming machine J6, the second decorative means includes an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member, and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, and the slope portion and the second decorative means are at least A game machine J7 characterized in that the non-adhesive surfaces are provided at opposing positions.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the connecting part of the decoration between the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction perpendicular to the slope of the slope, the front and back of the first decoration means and the second decoration means are There is a possibility that the player will notice the misalignment of the decoration in the direction.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means:
It has an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member, and a non-adhesive surface that is not attached to the front member, and has an inclined part and a second
Since the non-adhesive surface is provided at least at a position facing the decorative means, a gap is formed between the second decorative means and the front member (slanted portion) facing each other on the non-adhesive surface, and the second decorative member passes through the non-adhesive surface of the front member. The light can be totally reflected. This makes it possible to prevent the player from seeing the decoration at the end of the second decoration means when the player views the second decoration means through the slope from a direction perpendicular to the slope of the slope. . As a result, when a player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means through the slope from a direction perpendicular to the slope of the slope, the decoration of the second decoration means is made difficult to see. , it is possible to suppress the player from perceiving the misalignment of the decorations in the front-rear direction between the first decoration means and the second decoration means.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which an outer edge of a cross section in a direction perpendicular to an extending direction of the outer edge of the front member when viewed from the front is curved convexly toward the outer edge of the front member. a gaming machine, wherein the end of the second decorative means is disposed closer to the center of the front member when viewed from the front than a substantially midway point of a straight line connecting the ends of the sloped portions. J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J6 or J7, the sloping portion has an outer edge in a cross section perpendicular to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member when viewed from the front that is convex toward the outer edge of the front member. The end portion of the second decorative means is arranged closer to the center of the front member when viewed from the front than the approximately midway point of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portion. When the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the center of the front member is refracted due to the curvature of the inclined portion. The direction of light passing through the side can be brought closer to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap. Further, the second
Since the end portions of the decoration means are disposed, it is possible to prevent the player from perceiving a positional shift between the first decoration means and the second decoration means in the front-rear direction. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second
The decoration of the decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In any of gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined part that is inclined outward in front view toward the first decorative means, and the second inclined part is A gaming machine J9 characterized in that the angle of inclination of the member with respect to the front is set smaller than the angle of inclination of the inclined portion with respect to the front of the base member.

According to the game machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess has the first
A second inclined portion is formed that slopes outward in a front view toward the decoration means, and the second inclined portion has an inclination angle with respect to the front of the base member that is set smaller than an inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front of the base member. Therefore, the position of the decoration (virtual image) of the first decoration means that is visually recognized through the slope part and the second slope part is changed from the position of the decoration (virtual image) of the first decoration means that is visually recognized through the slope part and the second slope part. (real image). As a result, when the first decoration means is visually recognized through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decoration means from becoming difficult to see due to the refraction of light through the front member.

<About the concept of the invention using the special prize winning device 550 as an example>
A game machine comprising a game board having a game area on the front side, and a path unit disposed on the game board and having a path for guiding the throwing of a game ball flowing down the game area, the path unit comprising: A first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board when viewed from the front, and a first path for throwing the game ball from the first path to a horizontal direction in the opposite direction to the guiding direction of the first path. A second path for throwing the ball to the other side, and a third path connecting one side of the first path and the second path, and the third path is on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board. A game machine K1 characterized in that a guide means for throwing a game ball to at least one of the game boards is provided on at least one inner wall on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a gaming board having a playing area on the front side, and a path unit disposed on the gaming board and having a path for guiding a thrown game ball flowing down the playing area. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, by guiding (rolling) the game ball that has flowed into the guide route formed in the route unit along the route of the guide route, the rolling (flowing down) of the game ball can be enjoyed. can have.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to ensure a predetermined throwing distance for the game ball inside the path unit, there is a first path for throwing the game ball to one side with respect to the game board, and a first path for throwing the game ball to one side with respect to the game board. When a second path is formed in which the game ball thrown from the first path is thrown to the other side of the game board, and a third path is formed that connects one side of the first path and the second path, the first path Since the speed of the game ball rolling is maximized at the portion communicating with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), the game ball is placed on the inner wall of the third path where the direction of the ball is changed. Collisions and bounces are more likely. Therefore,
There was a risk that the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third path would return to the first path, or swing (shake) inside the third path in the throwing direction of the first path (horizontal direction when viewed from the front). Therefore, the first
Since the game ball thrown from the path to the third path swings in the third path, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball thrown to the third path in a fixed direction, and the ball is thrown to the third path. There was a problem in that it was difficult for the player to visually recognize the game balls.

In this case, by making the third path longer, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the first path can be smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second path, and the game ball passing through the third path can be However, since the third path is formed to be long, the overall size of the path unit increases accordingly, making it impossible to secure space for arranging the path unit on the game board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the path unit has a first path for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board when viewed from the front, and a path for throwing the game ball from the first path. 1st
A second path where the ball is thrown to the other side in the horizontal direction in the direction opposite to the guiding direction of the path, and a first path and a second path.
a third path connecting one side of the paths to each other, and the third path includes a guide means for throwing the game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board. Alternatively, since it is provided on at least one inner wall on the back side, the game ball passing through the third path can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-rear direction of the game board when viewed from the front). By this movement of the game ball on the front side or the back side, the game ball that rolled and accelerated on the first path can be slowed down on the third path, and the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third path will be moved to the third path. It is possible to suppress the ball from returning to the first path or from swinging (shaking) in the throwing direction of the first path (horizontal direction when viewed from the front) on the third path. This allows the player's line of sight to follow the game ball thrown from the third path in a fixed direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown to the third path.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from shaking (shaking) in the horizontal direction (left and right direction when viewed from the front) with respect to the game board when viewed from the front, the third path that connects the first path and the second path can be There is no need to lengthen the route to suppress swinging of the game ball, and the third route can be shortened. As a result, the route unit can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the route unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

In addition, as a guide means for guiding the game ball, switching the rolling direction of the game ball using unevenness, or disposing a displacement member at the path switching part and guiding the game ball to the second path by displacing the displacement member. An example of how to do this is given below.

In the gaming machine K1, the guide means is composed of a recess provided in an inner wall on either the front side or the back side, and a protrusion provided protruding from the other inner wall on the front side or the back side. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that the recessed portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, the guiding means includes a recess provided in the inner wall on either the front side or the back side, and an inner wall on the other side of the front side or the back side. The concave part and the convex part are formed at positions facing each other, so that the game ball can be partially displaced in the middle of the third path, and the game ball can be can slow down the ball's throwing speed. Therefore, the third route can be shortened. As a result, the route unit can be easily accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the route unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

A gaming machine K3 in the gaming machine K2, wherein a horizontal distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the horizontal distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. , the game ball that flows down the third path and is thrown to the guide means can be easily brought into contact with the convex portion of the guide means. Thereby, the game ball that flows down the first path and is thrown to the third path can be brought into contact with the convex portion, and its rolling speed can be easily slowed down. Therefore, the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path can be prevented from returning to the first path or swinging in the third path in a direction different from the ball throwing direction of the third path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the third route.

A game machine K2 or K3, wherein the convex portion is formed on an inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the recessed portion is formed on an inner wall on the back side with respect to the game board. Machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the recessed portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the game board. Therefore, the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit can be made thinner. Therefore, the inside of the path unit can be easily seen by the player through the front of the path unit, and the game ball thrown inside the path unit can be easily seen by the player. Furthermore, by forming a recess in the inner wall on the front side of the route unit, it is possible to suppress the guide means from protruding to the front of the route unit, so that the route unit can be disposed on the player's side. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the path unit.

To explain in detail, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, the thickness of the front side of the path unit needs to be larger than the depth of the recess. Therefore, as the thickness of the front side of the path unit increases, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown on the back side thereof. In addition, when a recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, it is possible to curve the front plate of the path unit along the shape of the recess, but in this case, the game A gap with the glass plate forming the front side of the area is required, and the entire game board needs to be placed on the back side. Therefore, the further away from the player the player is, the more difficult it becomes for the player to see the game ball thrown through the path unit.

Furthermore, when the recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, it is also possible to open the part where the recess is formed, but in this case, the rigidity of the path unit will be reduced due to the opening.
The route unit becomes easily damaged. Furthermore, if an opening is formed in the front of the path unit, there is a risk that unauthorized persons may pass through the opening.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K4, the concave portion is formed on the back side of the path unit, and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, so that the thickness of the entire front side of the path unit is suppressed from increasing. In addition to making it easier to see the game balls passing through the inside of the path unit, the path unit is placed on the front side of the gaming machine by suppressing the partial protrusion toward the front side of the path unit. The game ball passing through can be easily recognized.

A game machine K5 in the game machine K3 or K4, wherein the convex portion and the concave portion have arc-shaped cross sections in the direction of gravity when viewed from the front, and the axes of the arcs are set coaxially.

According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex part and the concave part have an arc-shaped cross section in the direction of gravity, and the axes of the arcs are set on the same axis, so that the convex part and the concave part are The separation distance can be kept constant. As a result, the distance between the convex portion and the concave portion can be prevented from becoming partially smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball passing through the inside of the path unit can be prevented from being caught between the convex portion and the inner wall. can.

In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the recessed portion is formed at a position along an extension line of the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K6, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along the extension line of the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling on the first path when viewed from the front, so that the game ball rolling on the first path cannot be played. Even when the rolling speed of the ball is high, the center of the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be suppressed from being thrown above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be thrown inside the recess.

A gaming machine K7 in any one of gaming machines K2 to K6, characterized in that the recessed portion is formed at a position spaced apart from both horizontal side surfaces of the third path in a front view by more than the radial dimension of the gaming ball. .

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recessed portion is formed at a position that is spaced apart from both sides of the third path in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front by a radius dimension of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down along the inner wall of the recess from colliding with both side surfaces of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front and swinging inside the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown along the inside of the recess can be smoothly thrown to the second path.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recessed portion is recessed so that a cross section in the ball throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front has an arcuate cross section centered on a central portion in the horizontal direction of the third path; Game K8 is characterized in that the convex portion has a protruding rectangular cross section in the throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recessed portion has an arcuate cross section in the throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front, and the convex portion has an arcuate cross section in the throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front. Since the cross section of the first path in the ball throwing direction in view is provided in a protruding rectangular shape, the guiding means is
The distance between the opposing concave portions and convex portions is narrowed toward both ends of the first path in the throwing direction. Therefore, the game ball thrown inside the recess can be made difficult to swing in the throwing direction of the first path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown to the third path.

In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends in a downwardly inclined direction to one side in a direction opposite to the throwing direction of the game ball on the second path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends downwardly and inclines to one side in the direction opposite to the throwing direction of the game ball on the second path when viewed from the front. The game ball that comes into contact with the convex part while flowing down the three routes can be guided in the direction of the inclination of the convex part. Thereby, the game ball that has come into contact with the convex portion can be guided along the inner wall of the concave portion on the side away from the second path.
As a result, the game balls flowing into the second path from the third path can be rolled in the throwing direction of the game balls in the second path, and the game balls can smoothly flow into the second path from the third path. can.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path is provided with a second guide means at a connecting portion with the third path, and the second guide means guides the game ball thrown from the first path. A gaming machine K10 characterized in that it can be guided by the guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first route is provided with a second guide means at the connection part with the third route, and the second guide means Since the game balls thrown from the route can be guided to the guide means, the game balls thrown from the first route to the third route can be easily thrown to the guide means for the third route. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first route to the third route. Therefore, since the game balls thrown from the first route can be easily thrown to the guide means, the game balls can flow smoothly from the third route to the second route. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of game balls throughout the route unit.

In the gaming machine K10, the second guide means includes a second convex portion protruding from either the front side or the back side of the first path, and a second convex portion recessed at a position opposite to the second convex portion. 2 concave portions, and the second concave portion has a width dimension in a direction perpendicular to a downstream direction of the game ball that is set larger toward the upstream side of the first path when viewed from the front. K11.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K10, the second guide means includes a second protrusion protruding from either the front side or the back side of the first path; and a second recess recessed in an opposing position, and the second recess is set to have a large width in a direction perpendicular to the downward direction of the game ball toward the upstream side of the first path when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball thrown along the first path can be easily received in the second recess. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first route to the third route. Therefore, since the game balls thrown from the first route can be easily thrown to the guide means, the game balls can flow smoothly from the third route to the second route. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of game balls throughout the route unit.

A gaming machine K12 in the gaming machine K10 or K11, characterized in that the second recessed portion is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first route, such that the downstream end of the first route is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first route. .

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recessed portion has the following effects:
Since the downstream end of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game balls in the first path, the game balls flowing from the first path to the third path along the inner wall of the second recess are , can be caused to flow into the third path on the far side from the first path. As a result, the game balls flowing from the first path to the third path can be easily thrown inside the recess, and the game balls can easily flow from the third path to the second path.

<About the concept of the invention using the special prize winning device 550 as an example>
A game machine comprising a game board having a game area on the front side, and a flow direction changing means disposed in front of the game board for changing the flow direction of a game ball flowing down the game area, wherein the flow direction change means includes a first member disposed on the front side of the game board, a second member disposed on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval, and at least one of the first member and the second member. an adjusting means for displacing one side, the adjusting means changes the interval between the facing first member and the second member, and the game ball flows down between the facing first member and the second member. A gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the direction of flow of the game machine L1 is adjustable.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and nails driven into the front of the gaming board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197311). According to this game machine, it is possible to adjust the direction of the game ball flowing down the game area by adjusting the angle of the nail nailed to the game board (by bending the nail). However, when changing the angle of the nail to change the direction in which the game ball flows down, the angle of the nail is visible to the player, which puts the player at a disadvantage (the game ball is difficult to flow down into the flow path where it is advantageous). There is a problem in that when a player recognizes that the game machine is at a disadvantage (the angle of the nail), the player stops playing the game machine that he or she considers to be at a disadvantage, and the operating rate of the game machine decreases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the flow direction changing means includes a first member disposed in front of the game board, and a second member disposed at a predetermined interval on the front side of the first member. 2 members, and adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member and the second member, the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing first member and the second member, and the first member and the second member are moved. Since the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down between the two opposing members can be adjusted, the flowing direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) by the distance in the front and back direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, when viewed from the front of the game board, compared to the nails that change the downward direction of the game ball by a distance in the horizontal direction, the player is prevented from visually recognizing the downward direction changing means and determining that it is disadvantageous or advantageous. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the adjusting means allows the second member to
A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the position of the first member is displaced.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine L1, the second member is fixed to the game board and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjustment means, so that the second member disposed on the front side At least a portion of the first member disposed on the back side is hidden by the second member, thereby making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the position of the first member. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the opposing first and second members. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from not playing a game on the gaming machine because he/she judges that the spacing between the opposing first and second members is disadvantageous, thereby improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In the game machine L2, the game board includes a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and a fastening member that is inserted through the first opening from the back side of the game board is attached to the first member. A game machine L3 characterized in that the first member is disposed on the game board by being fastened to the game board.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L2, the game board is provided with a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the game board. By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is disposed on the game board, so there is no need to form a fastening part for fastening the first member on the front side of the game board, and the front side The outer shape of the first member can be made smaller when viewed. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure space for arranging other members in front of the game board.

Further, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board when the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member from being illicitly manipulated and the position of the first member from being illicitly changed.

In the game machine L3, the first member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protrusion, so that the 1st
A gaming machine L4 characterized in that a member is arranged on the gaming board.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L3, the first member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and a fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protrusion. By doing so, the first member is disposed on the game board, so that the fastening portion of the fastening member can be accommodated inside the first opening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion of the first member from protruding toward the front side of the fastening member, so that it is possible to secure a space between the first member and the second member facing each other.

In the game machine L4, the first member can be slid on a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board by the adjustment means, and the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion. A gaming machine L5 is characterized in that it is opened in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion, so when displacing the position of the first member, the protrusion can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when displacing the position of the first member, the first
The member can be prevented from being displaced in a direction other than the displacement direction (the direction in which it is displaced by the adjustment means). As a result, the operator can easily adjust the position of the first member.

A gaming machine L6, which is any one of the gaming machines L3 to L5, characterized in that the gaming board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming board also has the following effects:
Since the second opening is provided at a position different from the first opening, the fastening member fastened to the back side of the game board can be operated through the second opening. As a result, the work process when the operator operates the adjusting means can be simplified.

That is, since the accessory device and the case member that houses the accessory device are arranged on the back side of the game board, when the fastening member is operated from the back side of the game board, the accessory device and its case member are arranged. When it is necessary to remove the case member housing the accessory device from the game board, the second opening allows the operator to operate the fastening member from the front side of the game board. Since there is no need to remove the installed accessory device or the case member housing the accessory device, the work process for the worker can be simplified.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the adjustment means changes the position of the second member relative to the first member in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member relative to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, so that the position of the second member relative to the first member is changed. Compared to the case where the position is changed in the horizontal or vertical direction in a front view, it is possible to suppress the position of the second member from being changed in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from determining that the change in the position of the second member as viewed from the front is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material, and is formed to have a larger outer shape in front view than the first member, and the first member is larger than the first member in front view. A gaming machine L8 characterized in that it is covered by a second member.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material and has a larger external shape in front view than the first member,
Since the first member is covered with the second member when viewed from the front, the first member is covered by the second member when viewed from the front.
The first member can be hidden by the member, making it difficult for the player to recognize the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the opposing first and second members, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member protrudes from the other of the first member and the second member. A gaming machine L9 is characterized in that it is provided with a protruding part.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material. Alternatively, since the second member has a protruding part that protrudes from the other side, the game ball thrown between the first member and the second member can be brought into contact with the protruding part and the direction of the ball thrown can be changed. can. Therefore, by recognizing the distance between the opposing first and second members, it is possible to prevent the player from making a judgment that the player is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means is configured to adjust the position of the other of the first member or the second member in stages, with respect to one of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L10 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means adjusts the position of the other of the first member or the second member with respect to one of the first member or the second member. Since the step adjustment means that can be adjusted in steps is provided, an operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change in the position in steps. As a result, it is possible to suppress errors in the adjusted position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, it is possible to easily adjust the position of the first member or the second member.

Note that the means for adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member in stages includes adjusting the position of the first member or the second member with respect to a plurality of grooves formed in one of the first member or the second member. By changing the insertion position of the protruding convex part, the position of the first member or the second member can be changed, or the first member can be inserted into a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the game board. An example is a mode in which the position of the first member is changed by changing the insertion position of a convex portion protruding from the other side of the member or the game board.

<About the concept of the invention using the special prize winning device 550 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, and a route unit disposed in the gaming area, which has a plurality of guide routes for guiding the throwing of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area,
The route unit includes a first guide route formed of a light-transmissible material and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a second guide route arranged on the back side of the first guide route. a guide route, the first guide route includes a first prize opening into which a game ball can enter, and the second guide route includes a second prize opening into which a game ball can enter. A gaming machine M1, characterized in that a game ball that enters the first winning hole is given a higher gaming value than a game ball that enters the second winning hole.

Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that improves the player's interest by disposing a path unit in a gaming area that has a plurality of guide paths for letting game balls flow down, and allowing the player to visually see the game balls flowing down inside the unit. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the layout of each guide route has tended to be complicated in order to increase the player's interest by allowing the player to see the game balls flowing down the guide route. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to judge which route among the respective guide routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, if the gaming values of the game balls flowing down the guide route are different,
It becomes difficult for players to judge whether they are passing through an advantageous (higher gaming value) or unfavorable (lower gaming value) route, and the player's interest is reduced by the game ball flowing down the route unit. There was a problem in that it was not possible to sufficiently improve the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the route unit includes a first guide route formed of a light-transmissible material and disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and a rear side of the first guide route. a second guide route disposed on the side, the first guide route includes a first prize opening into which a game ball can enter, and the second guide route has a first winning opening into which a game ball can enter. The game ball that enters the first winning port is given a higher gaming value than the game ball that enters the second winning port.
It is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the game ball flowing down the first guide route. In addition, if the game balls are flown down the first and second guide routes at the same timing, the second guide route with the second winning opening with the lower gaming value will be placed on the back side of the first guide route. Since the game ball is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide route that includes the first winning hole with high game value. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize game balls that are given a high gaming value, thereby making it easier to increase the player's interest.

Note that the predetermined game value means, for example, a game ball that is paid out to the player as a benefit when the game ball enters the first or second prize opening.

In the gaming machine M1, the first guide route includes a first route for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and a game ball thrown from the first route to the game ball on the first route. a second path for throwing the game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction; and a connection path that connects one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity, the connection The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the first guide route includes a first route for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and a ball being thrown from the first route. a second path in which the game ball is thrown to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the game ball in the first path; and one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity. and a connecting path that connects, and the connecting path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected by the shortest distance. The throwing path can have more curves than in the case where the pitcher throws the ball. Thereby, the downward speed of the game ball can be slowed down in stages at the curved portion, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and swinging (shaking) within the connection path. As a result, the game balls can flow smoothly from the first route to the second route, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the throwing of the game balls from the first route to the second route.

In addition, in order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and shaking (shaking),
It is also possible to suppress the repeated collision of game balls with the inner wall of the connecting path by increasing the internal space of the connecting path in the throwing direction of the first path. As one path is increased in the throwing direction, the connecting path is projected in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, since the path unit when viewed from the front is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to keep the path unit within a predetermined range when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, since the connecting path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side, the external shape of the path unit when viewed from the front can be kept within a predetermined range. Therefore,
When the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first guide route, the range that the player visually recognizes can be kept within a predetermined range (the outer shape of the route unit). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing down the route unit.

In the gaming machine M2, the path unit is disposed on the other side of the gaming area in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the connecting path is formed on one side of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Characteristic gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M2, the route unit is disposed on the other side of the gaming area in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the connecting route is located on one side of the route unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Since it is formed on the side, the connection path can be formed at a position close to the player who is located in front of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path. As a result, even if the game ball is thrown to the back side through the connection path, the game ball passing through the connection path can be easily seen by the player.

A gaming machine M4 characterized in that in the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is disposed between the first route and the second route when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first prize opening has the following effects:
Since it is arranged between the first route and the second route when viewed from the front, the first winning opening is formed on the first guide route by using the dead space that formed the first route and the second route. can. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the external size of the route unit when viewed from the front. the result,
It is possible to reduce the range in which the player visually recognizes the route unit. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connecting route includes a third prize opening into which a gaming ball can be inserted into two places, a connecting part with the first route and the second route; a displacement member that can be moved to a position that closes or opens the winning hole, and the game ball that enters the third winning hole is the same as the game ball that enters the first winning hole. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that a gaming value is given.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connecting route has a third prize opening into which game balls can be inserted into two places, the first route and the connecting part with the second route. , those third
a displacement member that can be moved to a position to close or open the winning hole, and the game ball that enters the third winning hole has the same gaming value as the game ball that enters the first winning hole. is given, so
It is possible to make it easier for the game ball thrown from the first path to the connecting path to enter one of the two third prize winning holes, and the game balls flowing down the connecting path can provide entertainment to the players. It's easy to do.

That is, between the third winning port on the upstream side formed at the connecting portion of the connecting path and the first path and the third winning hole on the downstream side formed at the connecting portion of the connecting path and the second path. Since the connecting path can be arranged in the position, when the displacement member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing to the position where the third winning opening is closed or released, the third winning opening is closed by the displacement member. At this time, the game balls thrown from the first route to the connecting route are allowed to flow down the connecting route that curves to the back side, thereby securing the time until the third prize opening is released, and You can make it flow into the winning opening. As a result, the game balls thrown into the connection path can easily flow into the third prize opening, so the game balls flowing down the connection path can easily entertain the players.

In addition, the two third winning openings are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connecting route (the connecting part between the first route and the second route), so the third winning opening can be inserted into the third winning opening. You can extend the time you can play the ball. Therefore, it is possible to extend the time for which the player is interested, and it is possible to easily increase the player's interest.

A gaming machine M6 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detection means for detecting passage of a gaming ball is disposed outside the connection path.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detection means for detecting passage of a game ball is provided in the connecting path, so that the game ball can be prevented from getting stuck in the connecting path. In this case, by continuing the detection by the detection means, it is possible to cause the gaming machine to detect the error. In addition, since the detection means is arranged outside the connection path, compared to the case where the detection means is arranged inside the connection path, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the detection means, and the game can be improved accordingly. It is possible to prevent balls from clogging in the connection path.

Furthermore, since the detection means is disposed outside the connecting path where the rolling of the game balls is slowed down, it is easy to accurately detect the number of game balls passing through the connecting path. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detection means is greater than the number of balls that enter the first winning hole or the third winning hole, it is possible to make the gaming machine recognize that fraud is being committed. As a result, the continuation of fraud can be suppressed by notifying that fraud is being committed through an alarm sound, abnormal lighting, or the like.

In the gaming machine M6, the connecting path has a dimension between opposing inner walls when viewed from the front, which is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the connecting path has an opposing inner wall of the first path in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball. A game machine M7 characterized in that the size is set smaller than the distance between the two.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6, the connecting path has a dimension between opposing inner walls when viewed from the front, which is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball. Since the dimension is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing inner walls of the first path in the direction, when a game ball with a diameter larger than a predetermined size (diameter larger than the regulation) is thrown, the game ball cannot be kept in the connecting path. It can be clogged. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls having a diameter larger than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

In addition, since a detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided in the connection path, if a game ball with a diameter larger than the regulation remains (clogs) in the connection path, the detection means detects the passing of the game ball. can be used to detect errors.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path has an opening opening with a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the game ball formed in a radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side. A gaming machine M7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path has a predetermined diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball on the radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side. Since an opening is formed that opens at a value of Can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to suppress game balls having a smaller diameter than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

The opening is formed on the radially outer side wall of the connection path, which serves as the rolling surface for game balls flowing down the connection path, so if the game ball flowing down the connection path has a diameter smaller than the specified value, Makes it easier to eject game balls.

The gaming machine M8 includes a box-shaped accommodating part that projects from the outside in the radial direction of the connection path and communicates with the opening, and the accommodating part is set to a size that can accommodate game balls. ,
A gaming machine M9 characterized in that it is formed in a detection range of the detection means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M8, the gaming machine M9 includes a box-shaped accommodating part that protrudes from the outside in the radial direction of the connection path and communicates with the opening, and the accommodating part has a gaming machine inside. The ball is formed to a size that can accommodate the ball, and is formed within the detection range of the detection means, so that a game with a diameter less than a predetermined size (a diameter smaller than the regulation) is discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path. The balls can be stored inside the receptacle. Furthermore, since the storage section is formed within the detection range of the detection means, the detection means can detect game balls stored inside the storage section. As a result, when game balls are stored inside the storage section, the detection means can cause the gaming machine to detect an error.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M9, a position where a game ball inlet of the first guide route and a game ball inlet of the second guide route are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. A gaming machine M10 characterized in that it is formed.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M1 to M9, the inflow port for game balls on the first guide route and the inflow port for game balls on the second guide route, Since they are formed at horizontally adjacent positions when viewed from the front, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board are
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which of the guide routes or the second guide route the players are going to take until immediately before the player enters. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to keep an eye on the game ball that flows down the game area and is thrown to the path unit. As a result, it is possible to easily give players interest.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member disposed on the front side of the base member and having a ball throwing path formed as a space in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown. In the gaming machine, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state where it is biased toward the back side of the base member by a fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. Game machine N1.

Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side, and a first ball throwing path disposed on the front side of the base member and formed as a space where a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown.
There is a gaming machine including a member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the first member includes an extending portion extending on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on a side surface on the base member side (a portion in contact with the base member), and the extending portion extends on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member. By screwing the screw inserted into the opening formed in the base member into the base member, the base member is disposed in close contact with the front surface of the base member.

However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to arrange the first member in close contact with the front side of the base member, it is essential to fasten the screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. It is necessary to form an opening in the first member for the insertion thereof. Here, in order to form the opening in a position that does not interfere with the throwing of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the throwing space of the game ball, and the extension part where the opening is formed must be placed outside of the throwing space. need to be formed. Therefore, since the extending portion is formed on the outer edge of the first member, the area that can be used as a throwing path becomes smaller with respect to the outer shape of the first member, and the throwing path of the first member cannot be made sufficiently large. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state where it is biased toward the back side of the base member by the fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. The first member and the base member can be disposed in close contact with each other due to the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back side. Furthermore, since the first member is disposed on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member, there is a fastening allowance (an opening through which the fixing means is inserted) for fastening the first member with the base member on the front side of the first member. This eliminates the need to form an extended section). Therefore, with respect to the outer shape of the first member when viewed from the front, the entire area can be used as a throwing path. As a result, the ball throwing path of the first member can be increased.

In addition, since the fastened portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed to the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastened portion between the base member and the first member from being removed by unauthorized persons, and the fastened portion is visible to the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In the gaming machine N1, a second player disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member
member, the second member is fixed to the first member by the fixing means that is inserted from the back side of the second member to the first member side and fixed to the first member, A gaming machine N2 characterized in that it is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap between the gaming machine and the base member.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the second member is provided on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is arranged on the back side of the second member. The first member is fixed to the first member by a fixing means that is inserted into the first member side and fixed to the first member, and is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. When fastening the first member to the second member, a force that urges the first member toward the back side can be applied to the first member by the amount of the predetermined gap.
Moreover, since a force biased toward the front side can be applied to the second member, the base member can be held between the first member and the second member. Therefore, the first member and the second member are unlikely to be displaced from the base member due to the clamping force between the first member and the second member.
There is no need to fasten the member or the second member to the base member, and the second member can be fastened accordingly.

Note that the predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value larger than 0 and smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, when the first member and the second member are fastened together, a force that attracts each other can be applied to both the first member and the second member due to the gap.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has a protrusion that projects inside the first opening. A gaming machine N3, characterized in that the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member has the first
The first member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the member, and the first member includes a protrusion that protrudes inside the first opening, and a fixing means is fastened to the tip of the protrusion. Since the first member is disposed on the base member, the fastening portion of the fixing means can be located inside the first opening. Thereby, the fastening portion of the fixing means can be prevented from being disposed on the front side of the base member, and the fastening portion of the fixing means can be prevented from being formed in the ball throwing space of the first member. As a result, the first
The size of the ball throwing space of the member can be ensured.

Furthermore, since the protruding portion can secure the fastening margin (insertion depth) of the fixing means, it is possible to suppress the fastening of the fixing means from coming off from the first member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back side.

In the gaming machine N1, a second player disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member
and a third member disposed between the first member and the second member, the base member having a first opening formed at a position facing the first member. The third member has a dimension in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front that is smaller than a dimension in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and is disposed inside the first opening, and the third member The member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member has a predetermined gap with the third member due to the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member. A gaming machine N4, wherein the gaming machine N4 is fastened to the back side of the third member in the state.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the second member is disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is disposed between the opposing first and second members. a third member provided, the base member having a first opening formed at a position facing the first member;
The third member has a dimension in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front that is smaller than a dimension in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and is disposed inside the first opening. The second member is arranged in close contact with the base member, and the second member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap between the second member and the third member by a fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member. , it is possible to apply a biasing force to the back side of the first member via the third member. Therefore, the biasing force toward the back side that is applied when the second member and the third member are fastened together by the fixing means can also be applied to the third member. As a result, the biasing force acting on the portion of the first member that contacts the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by bringing the third member into close contact with the back side of the first member, the rigidity of the entire first member can be increased. Therefore, the entire first member is elastically deformed by the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back side, and it is possible to suppress deformation of the throwing path of the game ball formed in the first member. As a result, the game ball of the first member can be thrown stably.

In the game machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-like member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. Game machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening opened in the base member. So,
The biasing force acting on the third member can be used as a force for biasing the frame member toward the back side. Therefore,
The frame member can be easily disposed in close contact with the base member.

In addition, the biasing force toward the back side that acts when the second member and the third member are fastened together by the fixing means is
Since the force can be applied to the contact surface between the frame member and the base member, the force applied to the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed. can.

In the game machine N4 or N5, the first member includes a displacement member capable of displacing the throwing space of the game ball of the first member, and a drive disposed on the back side of the first member to drive the displacement member. means, the third member includes a third opening having a size that allows the driving means to be inserted therein, and the third member has a third opening having a size that allows the driving means to be inserted thereinto, and the third member has a third opening with the driving means inserted inside the third opening. A game machine characterized in that it is arranged on the back side of one member.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member includes a displacement member capable of displacing the throwing space of the game ball of the first member, and a displacement member disposed on the back side of the first member. and a driving means for driving the displacement member, the third member having a third opening having a size that allows insertion of the driving means, and inserting the driving means inside the third opening. Since it is disposed on the back side of the first member in this state, the driving means can be covered with the third member. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the gaming machine from accessing the drive means. As a result, it is possible to suppress tampering with the driving means.

In the game machine N6, the second member projects toward the first member, communicates with the ball throwing space of the first member, and transfers the game ball thrown into the ball throwing space of the first member to the second member. A gaming machine N7 comprising a communication section that allows ball throwing, and the communication section is arranged outside the third opening.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N6, the second member is protruded toward the first member side, communicates with the ball throwing space of the first member, and allows a game in which the ball is thrown into the ball throwing space of the first member. The ball is provided with a communication part that can send the ball to the second member, and the communication part is disposed outside the third opening, so that the third member can be disposed between the communication part and the driving means. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by the driving of the driving means to act on the communication portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the speed of the game ball thrown into the communication section from slowing down or stopping at the communication section due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from slowing down or stopping at the communication section due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means. Throwing of the game ball to the member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member protrudes from at least two locations on the back side of the first member. The protrusion includes a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and is inserted through the first opening, and an end portion of the first piece that is bent to extend outside the first opening. a second piece extending toward the front side of the second piece, and a raised part raised toward the front side of the second piece that overlaps with the base member when viewed from the front; The protrusion dimension is set to a larger value than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension of the protruding portion between facing the back surface of the first member is equal to or equal to the width dimension in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the base member. The bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means,
A gaming machine N8 characterized in that the first member is disposed in a state where it is biased toward the back side with respect to the base member.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has a rear surface of the first member. The protrusion includes a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and is inserted through the first opening, and a first piece that is bent at the end of the first piece and extends from the first member. The first piece includes a second piece extending toward the outside of the opening, and a protuberance raised toward the front side of the second piece that overlaps with the base member in front view, and the first piece extends toward the outside of the base member when viewed from the front. The protrusion dimension is set to a larger value than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension of the protruding portion between facing the back surface of the first member is set to be equal to or smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction when the base member is viewed from the front. The bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means, so that the first member is biased toward the back side of the base member. There is no need to provide a portion for fastening a fixing means (for example, a screw) on the side, and a throwing space for the game ball formed in the first member can be secured. As a result, since the ball throwing space can be enlarged, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown to the first member can be varied to make the ball throwing more interesting.

Further, since the screwing portion of the fixing means can be made into the base member, elastic deformation of the ball throwing space of the first member can be suppressed by applying a biasing force to the screwing portion of the fixing means. the result,
The first member is elastically deformed and the speed of the game ball thrown from the ball throwing path of the first member can be suppressed from slowing down.

In gaming machine N8, the base member includes a second opening formed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening. A gaming machine N9 comprising: the first opening and the second opening communicating with each other.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a second opening on the front side of the base member along the second opening. Since the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, the projecting part is arranged inside the first opening using the opening of the second opening. can be set. Therefore, the work of disposing the first unit on the base member can be simplified, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by displacement of the displacement member, in a driven direction of the driven member. the displacement member is displaced between a first position and a second position, and is moved from the first position to an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. a first displacement region for displacing the third position of the 1st position; and a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position; By being displaced to the second position, the first driven position is driven to the second driven position, and the third driven position, which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, is displaced from the first driven position. a first driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a portion of the second driven region and the first driven region are the same. The gaming machine O1 is set in a second displacement area, and when the displacement member is displaced through a second displacement area, the regulating means restricts the swinging of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction.

Conventionally, a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by the displacement of the displacement member, the driven member being driven by the displacement of the displacement member. Gaming machines that displace members are known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-02984
Publication No. 9). However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to restrict the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and the rocking motion in directions other than the driven direction, a regulating means for regulating the rocking motion of both the displacement member and the driven member is formed. There was a problem in that it was necessary to form it in two places, which made the shape more complicated and increased the manufacturing cost.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, the displacement member is provided with a regulating means for regulating the swinging of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position, The driven member has a first displacement region for displacing from the first position to a third position intermediate between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position. , the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, thereby being driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and from the first driven position to an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position. It has a first driven region that displaces the third driven position, and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a portion of the second displacement region and the first driven region are When the displacement member is set in the same area and is displaced through the second displacement area, the regulating means restricts the displacement member from swinging in a direction other than the displacement direction.
Swinging of the driven member and the displacement member can be restricted using the same portion of the restriction means. Therefore, since the regulating means only needs to be formed at one location, the shape can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, since the swinging of the driven member and the displacement member can be restricted using the same part of the restriction means, there is no need to form the driven member, the displacement member, and the restriction part of one restriction means, respectively. Accordingly, the regulating means can be made smaller.

In the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member is attached to the base at a position overlapping with at least a portion of the base member when viewed from the front. It is characterized in that it is capable of sliding displacement on a plane parallel to the member, and as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the area overlapping with the base member in front view is gradually reduced. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member has at least one portion of the base member when viewed from the front. It is possible to slide on a plane parallel to the base member at the position where it overlaps with the base member,
As the driven position moves from the first driven position to the second driven position, the area that overlaps with the base member in front view is gradually reduced, so that in the second driven position, the driven member extends outside of the base member in front view. The area is enlarged compared to the first driven position. Therefore, since the driven member protrudes outward from the base member, it is difficult to restrict the swinging of the driven member using a restriction means provided on the base member. Therefore, the more the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the more easily it swings toward the base member, but by restricting the rocking of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the regulating means By increasing the number of restricted locations, it is possible to make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the driven member from swinging when placed in the second driven region.

In the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one side long when viewed from the front;
It has a rotatable rotation shaft on one side in the longitudinal direction, is rotatably disposed on the base member, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and When driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates around the rotation axis,
A game machine O3 characterized in that the other side of the driven member is arranged above the rotating shaft in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one side long when viewed from the front, has a rotatable rotation axis on one side in the longitudinal direction, and has a rotary shaft attached to the base member. The driven member is rotatably arranged, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction;
When driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates around the rotation axis and the other side of the driven member is placed above the rotation axis in the direction of gravity. When driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, it rotates and the longitudinal side stands up. Therefore, as the driven member stands up, the load of the driven member is more likely to act toward the rotating shaft, and the load is applied to the driven member in the swinging direction of the driven member, making it easier for the driven member to swing.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swinging of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the number of locations regulated by the restricting means can be increased, thereby making it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the driven member from swinging when placed in the second driven region.

In addition, when the driven member follows the first driven region where a force to lift the other end side of the driven member is required, the displacement member is moved from the first position to the third position (first displacement region) where the restriction of the displacement member is released. When it is necessary to displace the displacement member, the restriction by the restriction means is released in the first displacement region, so that the movement of the displacement member can be prevented from being slowed down by the restriction means. Therefore,
Even when the displacement force of the driven member is required, the displacement force of the driven member can be ensured.

In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member includes a protrusion that protrudes from a position facing the wall, and the tip of the protrusion comes into contact with the wall to displace the driven member. is regulated, and the displacement member is set to be able to displace the space between the driven member and the wall in the second displacement region, and the displacement member The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that at least a portion of the driven member overlaps with the driven member.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O2, the driven member is provided with a protrusion that protrudes from a position facing the wall, and the tip of the protrusion comes into contact with the wall. The displacement of the driven member is regulated, and the displacement member is set to be able to displace the space between the driven member and the wall facing each other in the displacement region at the end, and at least Since a portion overlaps with the driven member, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from tilting to the side opposite to the wall portion. As a result, displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be restricted by the driven member and the wall, and rocking can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

A gaming machine O5 in the gaming machine O4, wherein a side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protrusion of the driven member in the second driven position.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protrusion of the driven member in the second driven position, so that the displacement member is moved from the first driven position to the second driven position. When the displacement member is displaced to the position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the protrusion of the displacement member and stopped. Therefore, the projecting portion can serve both of the role of regulating the displacement of the driven member by coming into contact with the wall portion, and the role of assisting the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, a space in which the displacement member and the driven member can be displaced can be secured.

In the gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member, and when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the direction of displacement of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member is is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member O6.
.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is placed at the second driven position, the driven member is connected to the displacement member. Since the displacement direction of the portion is set toward the axis of the displacement member, when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the displacement member due to the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be set to a dead center relationship, so that displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed. As a result, the second
In the driven position, the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means.

In the gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base portion, and when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the direction of displacement of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member is , and a direction in which a reaction force acts due to contact between the protruding portion and the displacement member, and a direction in which a reaction force acts is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the displacement member of the driven member and the The combined direction of the displacement direction of the connecting part and the direction in which the reaction force acts due to the contact between the protruding part and the displacement member is set toward the axis of the displacement member, so that the load on the driven member is reduced. When acting on the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the displacement member due to the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is placed in the second driven position, by directing the direction of the force acting on the displacement member from the driven member toward the axis of the displacement member, the direction in which the displacement member rotates about the pivot portion is set. It is possible to suppress the generation of force. As a result, the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the protruding portion is arranged with a predetermined gap from the wall, and is brought into contact with the wall when the displacement member comes into contact with it. Machine O8.

Here, if the protruding portion of the driven member and the wall portion are constantly in contact with each other, it may create resistance when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, making it difficult to stably displace the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O8, the protrusion is disposed with a predetermined gap from the wall, and when the displacement member comes into contact with the wall, the projection is brought into contact with the wall, so that the displacement member is moved to the second driven position. When the displacement member is displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from swinging, and it is also possible to suppress the protrusion and the bulge from becoming resistance during the displacement.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement member 440 as an example>
a decorative member formed of a light-transmitting material at least partially capable of transmitting light from the rear side when viewed from the front; and a decorative member disposed on the rear side of the decorative member in a state that it can be displaced on a plane parallel to the front side;
a receiving part capable of receiving and holding a game ball, and a light emitting means disposed on the back side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward a displacement area of the receiving part; The means is disposed on the back side of the receiving section or between the decorative member and the receiving section, and is configured to emit light emitted from the light emitting means by the receiving section or a game ball received in the receiving section. A game machine P1 characterized in that the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially varied by blocking or reflecting the light.

Conventionally, a decorative member is made of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light from the back side at least in part when viewed from the front, and the decorative member is disposed on the back side of the decorative member in a state that it can be displaced on a plane parallel to the front side. A gaming machine is known that is equipped with a receiving section that can receive and hold game balls (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by moving the receiving part after receiving and holding the game ball in the receiving part, it is possible to perform an effect in which the game ball is moved as the receiving part moves.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the receiving section is disposed on the back side of the decorative member, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize the receiving section and the position of the game ball received in the receiving section. Therefore, after a game ball is received (held) in the receiving part, if the receiving part moves,
It is said that it becomes difficult for players to grasp the receiving section and in which direction the game balls received (held) in the receiving section have moved, and it is difficult for players to grasp the position of the game balls received in the receiving section. There was a problem.

On the other hand, the gaming machine P1 is provided with a light emitting means that is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and can emit light toward the displacement area of the receiving part, and the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part or The amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially reduced by blocking or reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means by the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion, which is disposed between the member and the receiving portion. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the receiving part or the decorative member located on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving part is different from the amount of light emitted from the decorative member located at other positions. By making the light intensity different, the player can be made aware that the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion where the light intensity differs.

To explain in detail, when the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, so that the receiving part or the receiving part The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received can be made darker than other parts of the decorative member. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small (
The player can be made aware that the receiving portion or the game balls received in the receiving portion are located on the back side of the dark) portion.

On the other hand, when a light emitting means is disposed between the decorative member and the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, so that the receiving part or The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving part can be made brighter than other parts of the decorative member. As a result, a large amount of light is emitted from the decorative member (
The player can be made aware that the receiving section or the game ball received in the receiving section is located on the back side of the bright (bright) part.

In the game machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is approximately the same as the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that a light emitting part is arranged at a height of , and a light transmitting part of the decorative member is formed at a higher position than the light emitting part of the light emitting means.

Here, in a structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member, and the light is reflected or blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member. Not only that, but also the receiving part is irradiated with light, which makes it easier for the receiving part to reflect or block the light. Therefore, the brightness and darkness of the light formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving part, and the shape of the brightness and darkness becomes different from the outer shape of the game ball, and the amount of light is There was a risk that it would be difficult to recognize that game balls are arranged on the back side of different parts of the player.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the receiving part is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving part in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is provided in the receiving part. The light emitting part is arranged at approximately the same height as the center of the game ball being held, and the light transmitting part of the decorative member is
Since it is formed at a higher position than the light emitting part of the light emitting means, the contrast of the light emitted from the light emitting means and blocked or reflected by the receiving part is transmitted through the light transmitting part of the decorative member. It is possible to prevent the decorative member from being formed on the front side of the decorative member. Thereby, the shape of the brightness and darkness of the light that is formed by passing through the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member can be brought close to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game ball. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the game balls are placed in areas with different amounts of light.

A gaming machine P3 in the gaming machine P1 or P2, wherein the receiving section is made of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, since the receiving part is formed of a light-transmitting material, the light emitted from the light emitting means is not reflected or blocked by the receiving part. It can be suppressed. Thereby, when no game ball is received in the receiving portion, it is possible to suppress the formation of portions with different amounts of light in the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving section, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from gazing at the decorative member during the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section, and allow the player to focus only on the displacement operation of the receiving section when the player wants to watch the decorative member.

The gaming machine P2 or P3 includes a connecting member made of a non-light-transmitting material and connected to one side of the receiving section in the displacement direction, and the light emitting means is provided on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving section. The connecting member is set to have a dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving portion larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and is disposed on the back side of the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member, and the connecting member Accordingly, the gaming machine P4 is characterized in that the light emitting means and the decorative member are protruded or retracted between the facing parts.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P2 or P3, the gaming machine P4 includes a connecting member made of a non-light-transmitting material and connected to one side of the receiving part in the displacement direction, and the light emitting means is connected to the receiving part. The connecting member is arranged on the back side of the light-transmitting part of the decorative member, and the connecting member is set to have a dimension larger in the displacement direction of the receiving part than the displacement distance of the receiving part, and is arranged on the back side of the light-transmitting part of the decorative member. As the light emitting means and the decorative member are displaced, the area of light emitted from the decorative member can be changed as the receiving portion is displaced. That is, the connecting member can block the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the decorative member, and the area that blocks the light can be changed in accordance with the displacement of the receiving part. As a result, the receiving portion and the connecting member are displaced so as to protrude between the light emitting means and the decorative member, thereby making it possible to reduce the emission area of light emitted from the decorative member. As a result, the light emitting surface of the decorative member is made smaller, making it easier for the player to recognize the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member by the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion is small.

A gaming machine P5 in the gaming machine P4, wherein the connecting member is a part of a driving means for driving the receiving section.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of the driving means that drives the receiving section, so it has the role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the receiving section, and the light emitting means. The connecting member can also serve the role of blocking light emitted from the connecting member. As a result, a space for arranging the driving means for driving the receiving portion can be secured.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving section, and the receiving section includes a displacement member that can be displaced from a game ball received in the receiving section, and The member is made of a non-light transmitting material and is movable in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving portion, the A gaming machine P6, characterized in that it protrudes between the light emitting means and the decorative member facing each other.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving section, and the receiving section is configured to hold a game ball that is received in the receiving section. The displacement member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and can be displaced in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the game ball is placed in the receiving part. When received, it protrudes between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, so that only when the game ball is held in the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the displacement member and the game ball. Therefore, the player can recognize the position of the game ball by the shadow (dark part) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving section, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, the player is prevented from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving section, and the receiving section includes a displacement member that can be displaced from a game ball received in the receiving section, and The member is made of a non-light transmitting material and is movable in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving portion, the A game machine P7 characterized by protruding between the light emitting means and the game ball facing each other.
.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving part, and the receiving part is configured to hold a game ball that is received in the receiving part. The displacement member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and can be displaced in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the game ball is placed in the receiving part. When the light emitting means and the game ball are received, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the displacement member and the game ball only when the game ball is held in the receiving part. Therefore, the player can recognize the position of the game ball from the bright part (the part where the amount of light is larger than other parts) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving section, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, the player is prevented from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally made of a metal material whose light reflectance is higher than that of a resin material, or that its outer surface is coated with metal. This makes it easier to reflect the light irradiated to the displacement member, and makes it clear that there is a difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member.
To make it easier for a player to recognize the position of a game ball.

A gaming machine P8 in the gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape concave toward the back side.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P7, since the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape concave toward the back side, the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected toward the decorative member side. When doing so, the reflected light can be made difficult to diffuse (light can be easily focused). Therefore, by collecting the light reflected by the displacement member and emitted from the decorative member, the difference in the amount of light can be clearly distinguished, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

In gaming machines P1 to P8, gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the decorative member is formed to bulge in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed to bulge in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, so that the light from the light emitting means transmitted from the decorative member is reduced. It can be spread easily. As a result, it is possible to magnify the areas where the amounts of light formed by the game balls received in the receiving section differ and make the player aware of them, so that the player can recognize the position of the game balls received in the receiving section. It's easy to do.

In gaming machines 01 to P9, gaming machine P10 is characterized in that the light emitting means is capable of emitting light of at least two or more colors.

According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means is capable of emitting at least two or more colors. can be changed.

For example, if the light emission is divided into a first area with a first emission color and a second area with a second emission color, and the receiving part is placed in the first area, the expectation of a jackpot will be increased. Make it expensive. the result,
It is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the position of the game ball held in the receiving part.

In this case, the range of the first region and the range of the second region can be changed by simply changing the emitted light color, so by changing the emitted light range, multiple forms of presentation can be created. This makes it easier for players to enjoy the game.

<Characteristics Q group> (Be sure to capture the firing sensor when descending with up and down fanning)
a movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position; a movable control means capable of movably controlling the movable means; and a movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position; and a first position detection means capable of detecting the position of the gaming machine, in which the movable control means is configured to move the movable control means from the first position to the second position when moving from the first position to the second position. The movable means is moved after moving the movable means based on predetermined movable data for movable to the second position, and then the movable means is stopped, and when the movable means is moved from the second position to the first position. The movable means is moved based on movable data for moving from the second position to the first position, and when the movable means is detected by the first position detection means, the movable means is stopped. A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that it is a gaming machine that

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Further, after the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner for a certain period of time, a performance that is notified to the player is executed, and within the period during which the lottery result is executed, a performance in which movable objects, etc. are moved is executed. Accordingly, a gaming machine that notifies players of various performance modes has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-130802). By the way, the gaming machine described above executes stop control to stop the movable object at a predetermined stop position when moving the movable object. Therefore, there was a problem that the stopping position varied. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can stably control the movement of movable objects in the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine Q1, when moving from the first position to the second position, the control load is reduced by moving based on the movement data, compared to the case where the movement is performed while constantly detecting the movement position. Even though the configuration is controllable, when moving from the second position to the first position, the movable means is controlled to stop based on the result detected by the detection means, so the movable means moved to the first position is controlled to stop. In reality, even if there is some variation in the position, it is possible to control by stopping at a more accurate first position, and the variation when moved to the first position becomes larger depending on the number of movements. This has the effect of preventing this and allowing stable control of movable objects.

The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that the movable means has a firing means capable of firing a game ball, and the firing means fires the game ball in a state of being moved to the first position. Game machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, since the game ball is fired while being moved to the first position, the accuracy of movement of the game ball to the first position reduces the variation in the firing accuracy of the game ball. This has the effect of suppressing problems that occur.

The gaming machine Q1 or Q2 has a base member that movably fixes the movable means, and the movable means has a shaft part rotatably supported by the base member at one end side, and a shaft part rotatably supported on the base member from the one end side. It has at least a moving means for moving the game ball to the other end side, and an opening on the other end side for causing the game ball to be fired by the firing means, and the movable means is configured to move the game ball from the origin position to the first position. is movable to the first position set at a position where the shaft is rotated in a first direction around the shaft by an amount of rotation, and the shaft is pivoted from the first position by a second amount of rotation. The gaming machine Q3 is configured to be movable from the origin position to the second position set at a position rotated in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the center of gravity of the movable means is varied due to the movement of the game ball by the moving means, making it difficult to control the stop. Since the configuration allows the movable means to be stopped more accurately at the first position, there is an effect that problems caused by stop control of the movable means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine Q3, the moving means starts moving the game ball from the shaft portion to the other end side after the movable means starts movement control from the origin position to the first position. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q3, since the gaming ball moves to the other end before rotating to the first position, the weight of the other end becomes heavier and the movable load increases. This has the effect of suppressing problems that may occur. In addition, by moving the ball to the first position after the movable control is started, the effect is that the game ball can be moved to the other end side in synchronization with the timing when the movable means moves to the first position. be.

<Feature R group> (Sensor detection of power return)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a movable means which is movable to a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to the movable means. and a guiding means capable of guiding the ball, and the movable means holds an opening means into which the game ball guided by the guiding means can enter, and a game ball that enters from the opening means. and a moving means capable of moving the game ball held by the holding means, and the gaming machine moves the game ball that enters from the opening means to the movable means. A game machine R1 characterized in that it has a discharge control means that allows the moving means to perform a discharge operation capable of discharging the game machine to the outside.

Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have used movable objects to move to positions that are visible to the player as part of the performance to notify the results of judgments such as winnings, creating a novel impression on the player. A gaming machine has been proposed that can prevent a player from getting bored with the game early by giving the player the following advantages (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2012-130802). By the way, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that problems occur due to movement. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress defects in the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine R1, even if the movable means is configured to allow game balls to enter and move the entered game balls, the game balls that have entered the movable means are ejected to the outside by the ejecting operation. Therefore, even if an excessive number of game balls enter the movable means, the game balls can be ejected and operated normally, and malfunctions can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R1, a main control means capable of controlling a game, a slave control means capable of controlling a game based on a control signal output from the main control means, and the ball landing means. ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the ball; the slave control means includes an aperture detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered from the aperture means; movable control means capable of movably controlling the means; and initial operation control means for causing the movable control means to perform a predetermined initial operation for the movable means when power is turned on to the gaming machine. and, when the ball entry signal is received during the period in which the initial operation is being executed, the opening detection means detects that the game ball has entered the ball at least until the initial operation is completed. A game machine R2 comprising: initial discharge operation control means for causing the discharge operation to be executed by the discharge control means based on the above.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine R1, if there is a possibility that a game ball may enter the movable means during the initial operation, monitoring by the opening detection means is performed. By entering the ball, the ejecting operation is executed after the initial operation is completed, which has the effect of suppressing problems in the execution of the initial operation.

In the gaming machine R2, when the moving means moves to a predetermined position, the holding means is configured to be able to hold a game ball entered through the opening means. R3.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine R2, the holding means is configured to be able to hold the game ball entered from the opening means by being moved to a predetermined position by the moving means. There is an effect that the reception of game balls can be controlled by limiting the timing at which the holding means can hold the balls.

In gaming machine R2 or R3, when the ball landing signal is received during the period in which the initial operation is being executed, the aperture detection means detects the ball for a period until a predetermined period elapses after the initial operation is completed. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that it has a determination control execution means for executing determination control to determine whether a game ball is detected.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, if a ball entry signal is received during the period in which the initial operation is being performed, the opening detection means determines whether a gaming ball is detected. Therefore, in a state where a game ball cannot enter the movable means, the detection process can be omitted, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine R3, the predetermined period is a period until a predetermined number of seconds has elapsed after receiving a specific control signal from the main control means.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine R3, by being executed after outputting a specific control signal, the timing at which the ejection operation is executed can be made constant, and the ejection operation can be performed at an appropriate timing. It has the effect of being able to perform actions.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the main control means includes a determining means capable of executing a determination, and a dynamic displaying means for dynamically displaying identification information on a display means to indicate a determination result by the determining means. , dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means is stopped and displayed. A game machine R5 characterized in that it has a special state setting means that can change the ball entry means to a special state in which a game ball can easily enter the ball.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines R1 to R4, when the determination result becomes a specific determination result, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, so that the game ball is not allowed to enter the movable means. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to enter the ball, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an innovative performance.

In gaming machine R5, gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the specific slave control signal is a signal output based on the end of the special state.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine R5, the ejection operation can be performed after the special state ends, so the ejection operation is performed after the game ball becomes difficult to enter the movable means. This has the effect of further suppressing problems.

<Characteristic S group> (Sound effect when winning special electric accessories)
A first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first detection means which can detect that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and whether a game ball has entered the ball by the first detection means. a first signal output means for outputting a first signal when a first ball is detected; a first channel through which a game ball entering the first ball entering means can pass; and one of the first channels. a second ball entry means into which game balls that have not entered the first ball entry means can enter; a second detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means; and a second signal is output when the second detection means detects that a game ball has entered the ball. a second signal output means; a first passage guiding means for guiding the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first passage; and a first period after receiving the first signal; a first performance execution means that executes a first performance based on the fact that a second period has passed since receiving the second signal; and a second performance execution means that executes a second performance based on the fact that a second period has passed since receiving the second signal. A gaming machine S1 characterized in that it has means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that during the bonus game, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the problem of players getting tired of playing the game early.

According to the gaming machine S1, the second effect is executed at the timing when a game ball that enters the second ball entering means without entering the first ball entering means also passes through the visual recognition section, so The effects can be varied in combination with the first effect caused by entering the ball, and the problem of the player getting tired of the game early can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine S1, based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means, a display means for displaying information corresponding to the entry of the ball, and a display means for displaying information corresponding to the entry of the ball, 1. The ball entering means has an updating means for updating in accordance with the game balls that have entered the ball, and the updating means updates the information at least in accordance with the timing at which the second performance is executed. A gaming machine S2 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1, it is possible to make it seem as if the information has been updated for game balls that did not enter the first ball entering means, and the second entering means This has the effect of making the player think that the ball, including the game ball that has entered the ball means, is entering the ball means.

In the gaming machine S1 or 2, a third guiding means for guiding game balls that have not entered the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means to the first guiding path; and the third guiding means. A gaming machine S3 characterized in that it has a third performance execution means capable of executing a third performance at the timing when the game ball guided by the game ball reaches the visual recognition section.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the game ball guided by the third guiding means is also guided by the visual recognition part and the third effect is executed, so that the game ball is The effect is that it can be made to simulate that the game balls that have entered the ball pass through the viewing part, and that the player can be made to think that many game balls are entering the ball entry means. be.

In gaming machine S3, gaming machine S4 is characterized in that the updating means updates the information at least at a timing when the third effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S3, the information is updated in accordance with the timing when the third performance is executed, so that the game where no ball has entered the first or second ball entering means can be played. The ball can also be made to seem as if it is entering the first ball entry means, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the first period is set to be longer than the first falling period required for a game ball entering the first ball entry means to reach the viewing section. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second period is set to be longer than the second falling period required for a game ball entering the second ball entry means to reach the viewing section. S5.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, an effect is performed in accordance with the timing when the ball reaches the viewing section, making the viewing section seem like a means of entering the ball. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of gaming machines S1 to S5, an opening into which a game ball can enter is formed in the first flow path in the visual recognition section as a part of the first flow path; A gaming machine S6 characterized in that the game ball entering the ball is configured to be visible.

According to the game machine S6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines S1 to S5, the opening formed in the viewing part can be made to look like a ball entry means, and more game balls enter the ball entry means. It has the effect of making it seem as if it is a ball.

<Characteristics T group> (Pseudo jackpot performance during potential state)
a discriminating means for performing a predetermined discrimination when a discriminating condition is met; a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means; and the identification information for indicating the first discrimination result on the display means. is displayed, a bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player, and after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means ends, the first game state and the first A game state setting means that can set a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, and a bonus game performance that can execute a bonus game performance when the bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. It is characterized by having an execution means, and a pseudo-privilege game performance execution means that can execute the bonus game performance in a pseudo manner when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. Game machine T1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There were bonus games that could award a large number of prize balls. Furthermore, the configuration is configured such that a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state can be set as the gaming state in which the above-mentioned lottery is executed, and the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a special game that can award prize balls to a player is more likely to be executed when the player is playing the game (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can increase the interest of the game because it is possible to award prize balls to the player through bonus games and special games. Since it is necessary to execute a game and a game aiming at a special game, there is a problem in that the gameplay becomes complicated and the player's desire to play decreases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine as described above, which suppresses a decrease in the desire to play and improves the interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine T1, when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, a pseudo bonus game performance is executed, so that the content of the performance executed in a state that is advantageous to the player is unified. be able to. Therefore, by executing a performance that is easy for the player to understand, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, since the bonus game performance can be executed in a pseudo manner other than when bonus games are being executed, it is possible to make the player think that many bonus games are being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine T1 includes variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which a ball can enter the ball and a second state in which it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball than in the first state, and at least the variable ball entry means. a pseudo ball entry means into which a played game ball can enter; and a variable control means that changes the variable ball entry means to the first state when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. A game machine T2 comprising: a game ball that enters the game ball when the pseudo-privilege game effect is executed by the pseudo-privilege game effect execution means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, when the pseudo bonus game effect is executed, the effect of causing the game ball to enter the pseudo ball entry means is executed, so that a realistic pseudo effect can be realized. The effect is that it can be executed.

The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes performance condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined performance condition is satisfied when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and the pseudo bonus game performance The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that the execution means executes the pseudo bonus game performance when the performance condition determining means determines that the predetermined performance condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the predetermined performance conditions are not satisfied, the pseudo bonus game performance will not be executed even during the second game state. By configuring in this way, for example, when the period in which the second game state is set is short (shorter than the execution period of one bonus game), it is possible to suppress the pseudo bonus game performance from being executed. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress execution of a performance that gives a player a sense of discomfort, there is an effect that the performance effect of the performance to be executed can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine T3, the second gaming state is continuously set by the upper limit setting means for setting the upper limit of the number of times the second gaming state is continuously set after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state setting means. and a set number of times measuring means for measuring the set number of times, and the performance condition determining means determines that the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is less than a predetermined number of times, the performance condition is determined by the set number of times measuring means. A gaming machine T4 is characterized in that it determines that the following is true.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the upper limit number of times that the second game state can be continuously set is set, and it is determined how many consecutive times the second game performance has been currently set. Then, when the consecutively set number of times of the second gaming state is less than a predetermined number of times, the production condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to execute a stable pseudo-privilege game performance while securing the period in which the second gaming state is set, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T4, when the performance condition determining means determines that the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is greater than a predetermined number of times, a second game state performance different from the pseudo bonus game performance is executed. A gaming machine T5 characterized in that it has a possible second gaming state performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T4, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the number of consecutive settings of the second game state is greater than a predetermined number, a specific second game state performance is executed without executing a pseudo bonus game performance, so that an easy-to-understand performance for the player is provided. It has the effect of being executable.

<Features U group> (Point consumption performance)
Displaying a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a determining means capable of making a determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the means; dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a determination result specific to the display means. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means that allows a player to execute a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the game is stopped and displayed, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, A numerical performance execution means capable of executing a numerical performance that gives numerical information to a player; and a numerical information storage means capable of cumulatively storing numerical information of numerical performances executed by the numerical performance execution means. , an operating means that can be operated by a player, and at least one of the dynamic display modes determined by the dynamic display mode determining means in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. A gaming machine U1 characterized in that it has a dynamic display mode determination control means that allows a player to determine the mode of the part by operating the operation means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. As a performance for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of symbols for informing the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by a combination in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. A game machine has been proposed in which, as a performance other than the symbols, a preview performance is executed to notify the player of the lottery result before the symbols stop. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem in that the player becomes bored with the effects performed until the lottery result becomes a win. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the problem of players becoming bored with the game early in the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine U1, the content of the dynamic display mode related to notification of the determination result can be varied based on the numerical information accumulated by the numerical performance executed, so that the numerical performance is executed and the numerical information is accumulated. This has the effect of making the player more interested in the game and preventing them from getting bored with the game machine early.

In the gaming machine U1, when some of the modes are determined by the dynamic display mode determination control means, the corresponding numerical information is subtracted from the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. The gaming machine U2 is characterized in that it is updated and stored as follows.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1, the accumulated numerical information is subtracted by determining the dynamic display mode corresponding to the numerical information, so there is no compensation for using the numerical information. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance that provides a dynamic display mode, and this has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine U3, which is one of the gaming machines U1 and U2, further comprising a notification means for notifying information corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

In addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the gaming machine U3 notifies the player of information corresponding to the stored numerical information, so that the player can easily recognize the status of the stored numerical information. It has the effect of being able to.

Any one of the gaming machines U1 to U3 includes a numerical information determining means for determining the numerical information to be given to the player by the numerical performance executed by the numerical performance executing means, and the numerical information determining means includes: A gaming machine U4 characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine numerical information corresponding to the numerical information stored by the numerical information storage means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines U1 to U3, the numerical information provided by the numerical performance can be determined in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to provide numerical information in accordance with the numerical information held by the player.

<Feature V group> (Common button press timing acquisition process)
Setting an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation performance execution means that executes a predetermined operation performance based on the operation of the operation means, and a validity period for validly determining the operation on the operation means. A gaming machine comprising: a valid period setting means for setting a valid period; and a performance setting means for setting a performance mode for a predetermined period including the valid period set by the valid period setting means, wherein the operating means is operated, a calculation means for calculating an operation timing based on the validity period set by the validity period setting means; and a calculation means for calculating the operation timing based on the operation timing calculated by the calculation means. A game machine V1 characterized in that it has a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the operation performance to be executed.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform a winning lottery and perform a variable display effect on a display device to show the lottery results. Furthermore, a gaming machine is provided with a plurality of suggestion performances for suggesting the lottery results, and executes a specific suggestion production based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player as part of the plurality of suggestion productions. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-283442). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, a specific suggestive effect is executed regardless of the timing when the operating means is operated, which reduces the player's motivation to operate the operating means, and the player's early However, there was a problem in that the player got bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine V1, since the performance mode of the operation performance can be set based on the operation timing of the operating means during the valid period, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of performances. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the gaming machine early.

A gaming machine V2 in the gaming machine V1, wherein the calculating means calculates a ratio between the valid period and the remaining period of the valid period at the timing when the operating means is operated.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance mode of the operation performance is set based on the ratio between the valid period and the remaining period of the valid period calculated based on the timing at which the operating means is operated. As a result, the operation effect is set based on the length of the set validity period and the operation timing of the operating means, so it is possible to set a variety of operation effects, and the effect is that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. There is.

In addition, when using the configuration of the gaming machine V2, it is preferable to configure it so that different validity periods are set for the same performance mode set by the performance setting means. With this configuration, even if the operation means is operated at the same timing for the performance mode being executed, the calculation results of the calculation means can be made different by setting different valid periods. It is possible to change the performance mode of the operation performance.

The gaming machine V1 or V2 includes a display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect and a movable means capable of executing a predetermined movable effect, and the effect setting means is configured to set the effect mode to be executed on the display means. A gaming machine V3, wherein the operation performance execution means executes the operation performance using the movable means.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, if the performance operation means is operated while the performance displayed on the display means is being executed, the operation performance that moves the movable means will be executed, so at what timing during the validity period the operation means can be operated. Even if an operation is performed, the operation performance can be executed without changing the performance content displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for executing the operation performance, and it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost.

A gaming machine V4 in the gaming machine V2 or V3, wherein the validity period setting means is capable of setting a different validity period when the same performance mode is set by the performance setting means.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V2 or V3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, even if the operating means is operated at the same timing for the performance mode being executed, by setting different valid periods, the calculation results of the calculation means will be different, and the performance of the operation performance will be different. The aspect can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of operation performances to the player who always operates the operation means at a constant timing, and it is possible to suppress the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines V2 to V4, a first sorting means for sorting the ratio calculated by the calculating means according to a first condition, and a second sorting means for dividing the ratio according to a second condition different from the first condition. and a classification determining means for determining whether to classify the ratio by either the first classifying means or the second classifying means, and the production mode setting means is configured to perform the determination by the classification determining means. A gaming machine V5, characterized in that a performance mode of the operation performance is set based on the content.

According to gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines V2 to V4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the ratios calculated by the calculation means are divided according to different conditions, and the performance mode of the operation performance is set based on the divided contents, so even if the calculation results of the calculation means are the same, different operations may be performed. You can execute the performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of operation effects to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from becoming bored with the game early.

<Characteristics W group> (Notification of jackpot pre-reading results)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and a memory in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. a determining means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storing means; and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information on a display means to indicate a determination result by the determining means; a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a bonus game execution means executed by the bonus game execution means. In the gaming machine, the game machine includes a bonus game type determining unit that determines the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the information stored in the storage unit. A preliminary determination means for performing a preliminary determination based on information stored in a storage means, and prior information for indicating a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means corresponding to the previously determined information. advance notification means for notifying before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result is started, and determination by the bonus game type determination means when the determination means determines a specific determination result. a bonus game type preliminary determination means for determining in advance the type of the bonus game to be played based on the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means; and a determination by the bonus game type preliminary determination means. Pre-privilege game type notification means for notifying prior game information for indicating a result before the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the information determined is started. A gaming machine W1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Different types of benefits that can be obtained by a plurality of types of players are set in the bonus game to be executed, and one bonus game type is determined in the case of a win. A gaming machine has been proposed in which the player's interest varies depending on the type of bonus game being executed even when the game wins (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is required not only to provide an effect that increases the interest in winning and losing, but also to increase the interest in the types of bonus games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine W1, advance game information corresponding to the type of bonus game to be executed in the event of a win is also notified, so it is possible to provide the player with an effect that is combined with the notification result based on the advance determination. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine W1 includes a symbol display means for displaying on the display means a symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and the advance notification means is configured to display the symbol A gaming machine W2 characterized in that notification is made by changing the display mode of the symbols displayed by a display means.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1, information related to the determination result can be identified by the symbol in a state stored in the storage means before the identification information is dynamically displayed. Players can be interested not only in the judgment results of the dynamically displayed identification information, but also in the judgment results stored in the storage means, which can prevent players from getting bored with the game early. effective.

In the gaming machine W1 or W2, the performance means for performing a performance when the bonus game is executed and the advance bonus game type notification means are characterized in that the performance means executes a specific performance. Game machine W3.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the performance means that performs the performance when a bonus game is executed provides early notification of the bonus game type, so that the bonus game cannot be played. This has the effect that it is possible to easily identify that the notification is related to.

In the gaming machine W3, the advance bonus game type notification means is a game characterized in that the advance notification means performs notification in response to the execution of notification for indicating the advance determination by the advance notification means. Machine W4.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W3, the bonus game type is also notified in advance in response to the execution of advance notification regarding the determination result, so that the player is not informed of the determination result. This has the effect that advance notification can be made in combination with the notification content.

<Characteristics X Group> (Small hit notification and charge pattern)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. a storage means, a first judgment means for executing a first judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, and a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the first judgment result by the first judgment means. dynamic display means for displaying; and bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. , a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the second determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, the ball hitting means is provided with a game. In the gaming machine, the variable means is variable so that the ball enters an easy state where the ball enters easily, and the variable means is changed to the easy ball entry state in response to the specific second determination result. A first determination type and a second determination type that puts the variable means in a special ball entry easy state so that it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first judgment means, The bonus game execution means is capable of executing a special game different from the bonus game when the determination means determines that the special first determination result is different from the specific determination result, and the identification information is displayed as special identification information as a stop display mode for showing the special first judgment result, and the specific second judgment corresponding to the second judgment type is displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information. When a special game determined as a result is to be executed, the identification information being dynamically displayed is switched to the special identification information and a temporary stop is displayed before the execution of the special game. Game machine X1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. As a performance for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of symbols for informing the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by a combination in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. A game machine has been proposed in which, as a performance other than the symbols, a preview performance is executed to notify the player of the lottery result before the symbols stop. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem in that the player becomes bored with the effects performed until the lottery result becomes a win. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the problem of players becoming bored with the game early in the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine X1, it is possible to increase the frequency with which special identification information is displayed, and by displaying special identification information, it is possible to avoid the problem of getting bored with the game during the period until a specific judgment result is announced. It has the effect of suppressing

The gaming machine X1 includes a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display mode determining means The gaming machine X2 is characterized in that it determines whether the special game is to be executed while the target is being displayed, and determines a dynamic display mode based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine X1, there is an effect that the special identification information can be easily set by determining execution of the special game before dynamic display.

<Feature Y group> (Notify the end of the valid time at the same timing with multiple button effects)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation performance setting means for setting an operation performance to be executed corresponding to when the operation means is operated, and an operation performance corresponding to the operation performance set by the operation performance setting means. , a gaming machine comprising a valid period setting means for setting a valid period that is determined to be valid when the operating means is operated, wherein the operation effect setting means is capable of setting a plurality of the operation effects. , the validity period setting means determines one validity period for the plurality of operation performances set by the operation performance setting means, and the plurality of operation performances are configured to perform one validity period within the validity period. One of the operation presentations is executed in a predetermined order based on the operation performed by the player, and the notification means individually responds to each of the plurality of operation presentations. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that identification information for indicating the individual validity period set is notified in correspondence with the set validity period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. When the lottery result is announced, symbols for notifying the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner at a variable time determined by the lottery, and then a combination of symbols indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. During the period in which the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in which a preview display regarding the lottery result to be announced, etc. is displayed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by the player ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machines are required to improve the game's interest by suitably performing various effects using the operating means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine Y1, even when a plurality of operation effects are set, the effective period of each operation is notified, so the period during which the operation means can be operated can be recognized as an individual operation effect, and the interest of the game can be increased. It has the effect of improving the

In the gaming machine Y1, the identification information is notified by varying the individual validity period in order in accordance with the predetermined order in response to a decrease in the validity period. Machine Y2.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y1, the identification information indicating the individual validity period is displayed in a variable order in the order in which the operation performances are executed, so that the player can perform a plurality of operation performances. This has the effect of making it possible to identify the order.

In the gaming machine Y2, when the validity period has elapsed in a state where the plurality of operation effects have been set, each piece of the identification information to be notified is notified at the same timing that the validity period has elapsed. The gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that the gaming machine Y3 is variable.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y2, it is possible to notify the player that the individual validity period will also expire in accordance with the passage of the validity period, and the effect is that the passage of the validity period can be accurately notified. There is.

In the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, when the identification information is changed in response to a decrease in the validity period, the identification information is updated and changed after being displayed blinking. Game machine Y4.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, since the identification information is changed after the flashing display, it is possible to make it difficult to understand even if the speed at which the identification information is changed is not constant, which is effective. This has the effect of making it easier to control the time notification.

<Characteristic Z group> (Automatic press of button effect)
an operation means that can be operated by a player; an operation performance setting means for setting an operation performance to be executed when the operation means is operated; and when the operation performance is set by the operation performance setting means, A valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which an operation by the operating means is determined to be valid, and when the valid period is set by the valid period setting means, notification of identification information corresponding to the set valid period. A gaming machine Z1, characterized in that the notifying means notifies a specific notification mode based on the validity period being equal to or less than a predetermined period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified An advantageous bonus game was being executed. When the lottery result is announced, symbols for notifying the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner at a variable time determined by the lottery, and then a combination of symbols indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. During the period in which the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in which a preview display regarding the lottery result to be announced, etc. is displayed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by the player ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machines are required to improve the game's interest by suitably performing various effects using the operating means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine Z1, when the validity period reaches a predetermined period, a specific notification mode is notified, so that it is possible to notify the player that the specified period has reached in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

The gaming machine Z1 includes a suggestion mode display means for displaying on a display means a suggestion mode that suggests to the player that the period in which the valid period is set is a period for operating the operation means, and the suggestion mode display means is provided. The means changes and displays the suggestion mode to an operated suggestion mode indicating that the operation means has been operated based on the operation of the operation means, and the validity period is less than or equal to a predetermined period. Based on the fact that the operating means is not operated even if the operating means is not operated, a pseudo operation mode indicating that the operation means has been operated in a pseudo manner different from the operation suggested mode is displayed. Game machine Z2.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Z1, by displaying a pseudo operation mode, it is possible to detect that the effective period has elapsed even if the operation effect is automatically executed as the effective period has elapsed. This has the effect of making it easy to understand.

In the gaming machine Z2, the suggestion mode is composed of a pattern that imitates the shape of the operating means, and the pseudo operation mode is composed of a performance mode in which the symbol is operated. The gaming machine Z3 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Z2, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly notify that the operation performance has been executed due to the lapse of the valid period.

In any of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, when the operating means is operated at a timing when a specific notification mode is displayed, a special notification mode is notified in addition to the specific notification mode. Game machine Z4.

According to the gaming machine Z4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, if the operating means is operated at the timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, the special notification mode is notified, so that the game This has the effect of making it possible for the user to feel that the performance has been executed by the user's operation.

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Further, after the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner for a certain period of time, a performance that is notified to the player is executed, and within the period during which the lottery result is executed, a performance in which movable objects, etc. are moved is executed. Accordingly, a gaming machine that notifies players of various performance modes has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-130802).
By the way, the gaming machine described above executes stop control to stop the movable object at a predetermined stop position when moving the movable object. Therefore, there was a problem that the stopping position varied.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can stably control the movement of movable objects in the gaming machine described above.
<Means>
To achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes a movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a movable means that is movably controlled. and a first position detection means capable of detecting that the movable means is located at the first position, the movable control means being able to move from the first position to the second position. In the case where the movable means is moved from the first position to the second position, the movable means is moved based on predetermined movement data for moving from the first position to the second position, and then the movable means is stopped. When moving from the second position to the first position, the moving means is moved based on movement data for moving from the second position to the first position, and the first position detecting means moves the moving means. When the movable means is detected, the movable means is controlled to stop.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the movable means has a firing means capable of firing a game ball, and the firing means is moved to the first position. It shoots game balls.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, which has a base member that movably fixes the movable means, and the movable means has one end rotatably attached to the base member. At least a shaft portion pivotally supported by the member, a moving means for moving the game ball from the one end side to the other end side, and an opening for causing the game ball to be fired by the firing means at the other end side. and the movable means is movable from the origin position to the first position set at a position rotated in a first direction about the shaft part by a first rotation amount, and The device is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position, which is set to a position rotated in the first direction from the origin position about the shaft portion by the second rotation amount. .
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the movable means is configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a movable control capable of movably controlling the movable means. and first position detection means capable of detecting that the movable means is located at the first position, and the movable control means moves from the first position to the second position. The movable means is moved based on predetermined movement data for moving from the first position to the second position, and then the movable means is stopped, and the movable means is stopped from the second position to the second position. When moving to the first position, the movable means is moved based on movable data for moving from the second position to the first position, and the movable means is detected by the first position detection means. When this occurs, the movable means is controlled to stop.
Therefore, there is an effect that the movable object can be controlled stably.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the movable means has a firing means capable of firing a game ball, and the firing means fires the game ball while being moved to the first position.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of variations in the shooting accuracy of game balls.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the movable means has a base member that movably fixes the movable means, and the movable means has a shaft portion rotatably supported on the base member at one end side, and a shaft portion rotatably supported by the base member at one end side, It has at least a moving means for moving a game ball, and an opening on the other end side for causing the game ball to be fired by the firing means, and the movable means is configured to move the shaft portion by a first rotation amount from the origin position. is movable to the first position set at a position rotated in a first direction about the axis, and the origin position is moved from the first position by the second rotation amount about the shaft part. It is configured to be movable from the position to the second position set at the position rotated in the first direction.
Therefore, there is an effect that problems caused by stop control of the movable means can be suppressed.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)

Claims (1)

a game board having a game area on the front side; a first member disposed on the front side of the game board; and the first member disposed on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval. A gaming machine comprising: a second member that allows the game ball to flow down between the opposing sides;
comprising a changing means for changing the facing distance between a predetermined portion disposed in at least one of the first member or the second member and the other of the first member or the second member;
The changing means can form a first state and a second state in which the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down between the opposing first member and the second member is different from the first state,
The second member is formed with a viewing part that allows the inside to be viewed so that the player can visually check the game ball flowing down between the opposing sides,
The direction of displacement of the predetermined portion is the front-rear direction of the game board,
A game machine characterized in that the changing means is configured to be able to change the facing interval in a state where the first member is disposed on the game board.

Images